Provided by: rclone_1.60.1+dfsg-4_amd64 
NAME
Rclone - syncs your files to cloud storage
• About rclone
• What can rclone do for you?
• What features does rclone have?
• What providers does rclone support?
• Download
• Install
• Donate.
About rclone
Rclone is a command-line program to manage files on cloud storage. It is a feature-rich alternative to
cloud vendors’ web storage interfaces. Over 40 cloud storage products support rclone including S3 object
stores, business & consumer file storage services, as well as standard transfer protocols.
DESCRIPTION
Rclone has powerful cloud equivalents to the unix commands rsync, cp, mv, mount, ls, ncdu, tree, rm, and
cat. Rclone’s familiar syntax includes shell pipeline support, and --dry-run protection. It is used at
the command line, in scripts or via its API.
Users call rclone “The Swiss army knife of cloud storage”, and “Technology indistinguishable from magic”.
Rclone really looks after your data. It preserves timestamps and verifies checksums at all times.
Transfers over limited bandwidth; intermittent connections, or subject to quota can be restarted, from
the last good file transferred. You can check the integrity of your files. Where possible, rclone
employs server-side transfers to minimise local bandwidth use and transfers from one provider to another
without using local disk.
Virtual backends wrap local and cloud file systems to apply encryption, compression, chunking,
hashing and joining.
Rclone mounts any local, cloud or virtual filesystem as a disk on Windows, macOS, linux and FreeBSD, and
also serves these over SFTP, HTTP, WebDAV, FTP and DLNA.
Rclone is mature, open-source software originally inspired by rsync and written in Go. The friendly
support community is familiar with varied use cases. Official Ubuntu, Debian, Fedora, Brew and
Chocolatey repos. include rclone. For the latest version downloading from rclone.org is recommended.
Rclone is widely used on Linux, Windows and Mac. Third-party developers create innovative backup,
restore, GUI and business process solutions using the rclone command line or API.
Rclone does the heavy lifting of communicating with cloud storage.
What can rclone do for you?
Rclone helps you:
• Backup (and encrypt) files to cloud storage
• Restore (and decrypt) files from cloud storage
• Mirror cloud data to other cloud services or locally
• Migrate data to the cloud, or between cloud storage vendors
• Mount multiple, encrypted, cached or diverse cloud storage as a disk
• Analyse and account for data held on cloud storage using lsf, ljson, size, ncdu
• Union file systems together to present multiple local and/or cloud file systems as one
Features
• Transfers
• MD5, SHA1 hashes are checked at all times for file integrity
• Timestamps are preserved on files
• Operations can be restarted at any time
• Can be to and from network, e.g. two different cloud providers
• Can use multi-threaded downloads to local disk
• Copy new or changed files to cloud storage
• Sync (one way) to make a directory identical
• Move files to cloud storage deleting the local after verification
• Check hashes and for missing/extra files
• Mount your cloud storage as a network disk
• Serve local or remote files over HTTP/WebDav/FTP/SFTP/DLNA
• Experimental Web based GUI
Supported providers
(There are many others, built on standard protocols such as WebDAV or S3, that work out of the box.)
• 1Fichier
• Akamai Netstorage
• Alibaba Cloud (Aliyun) Object Storage System (OSS)
• Amazon Drive
• Amazon S3
• Backblaze B2
• Box
• Ceph
• China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS)
• Arvan Cloud Object Storage (AOS)
• Citrix ShareFile
• Cloudflare R2
• DigitalOcean Spaces
• Digi Storage
• Dreamhost
• Dropbox
• Enterprise File Fabric
• FTP
• Google Cloud Storage
• Google Drive
• Google Photos
• HDFS
• Hetzner Storage Box
• HiDrive
• HTTP
• Internet Archive
• Jottacloud
• IBM COS S3
• IDrive e2
• IONOS Cloud
• Koofr
• Mail.ru Cloud
• Memset Memstore
• Mega
• Memory
• Microsoft Azure Blob Storage
• Microsoft OneDrive
• Minio
• Nextcloud
• OVH
• OpenDrive
• OpenStack Swift
• Oracle Cloud Storage Swift
• Oracle Object Storage
• ownCloud
• pCloud
• premiumize.me
• put.io
• QingStor
• Qiniu Cloud Object Storage (Kodo)
• Rackspace Cloud Files
• rsync.net
• Scaleway
• Seafile
• Seagate Lyve Cloud
• SeaweedFS
• SFTP
• Sia
• SMB / CIFS
• StackPath
• Storj
• SugarSync
• Tencent Cloud Object Storage (COS)
• Uptobox
• Wasabi
• WebDAV
• Yandex Disk
• Zoho WorkDrive
• The local filesystem
Virtual providers
These backends adapt or modify other storage providers:
• Alias: Rename existing remotes
• Cache: Cache remotes (DEPRECATED)
• Chunker: Split large files
• Combine: Combine multiple remotes into a directory tree
• Compress: Compress files
• Crypt: Encrypt files
• Hasher: Hash files
• Union: Join multiple remotes to work together
Links
• Home page
• GitHub project page for source and bug tracker
• Rclone Forum
• Downloads
Usage
Rclone is a command line program to manage files on cloud storage. After download and install, continue
here to learn how to use it: Initial configuration, what the basic syntax looks like, describes the
various subcommands, the various options, and more.
Configure
First, you’ll need to configure rclone. As the object storage systems have quite complicated
authentication these are kept in a config file. (See the --config entry for how to find the config file
and choose its location.)
The easiest way to make the config is to run rclone with the config option:
rclone config
See the following for detailed instructions for
• 1Fichier
• Akamai Netstorage
• Alias
• Amazon Drive
• Amazon S3
• Backblaze B2
• Box
• Chunker - transparently splits large files for other remotes
• Citrix ShareFile
• Compress
• Combine
• Crypt - to encrypt other remotes
• DigitalOcean Spaces
• Digi Storage
• Dropbox
• Enterprise File Fabric
• FTP
• Google Cloud Storage
• Google Drive
• Google Photos
• Hasher - to handle checksums for other remotes
• HDFS
• HiDrive
• HTTP
• Internet Archive
• Jottacloud
• Koofr
• Mail.ru Cloud
• Mega
• Memory
• Microsoft Azure Blob Storage
• Microsoft OneDrive
• OpenStack Swift / Rackspace Cloudfiles / Memset Memstore
• OpenDrive
• Oracle Object Storage
• Pcloud
• premiumize.me
• put.io
• QingStor
• Seafile
• SFTP
• Sia
• SMB
• Storj
• SugarSync
• Union
• Uptobox
• WebDAV
• Yandex Disk
• Zoho WorkDrive
• The local filesystem
Basic syntax
Rclone syncs a directory tree from one storage system to another.
Its syntax is like this
Syntax: [options] subcommand <parameters> <parameters...>
Source and destination paths are specified by the name you gave the storage system in the config file
then the sub path, e.g. “drive:myfolder” to look at “myfolder” in Google drive.
You can define as many storage paths as you like in the config file.
Please use the -i / --interactive flag while learning rclone to avoid accidental data loss.
Subcommands
rclone uses a system of subcommands. For example
rclone ls remote:path # lists a remote
rclone copy /local/path remote:path # copies /local/path to the remote
rclone sync -i /local/path remote:path # syncs /local/path to the remote
rclone config
Enter an interactive configuration session.
Synopsis
Enter an interactive configuration session where you can setup new remotes and manage existing ones. You
may also set or remove a password to protect your configuration.
rclone config [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for config
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
• rclone config create - Create a new remote with name, type and options.
• rclone config delete - Delete an existing remote.
• rclone config disconnect - Disconnects user from remote
• rclone config dump - Dump the config file as JSON.
• rclone config file - Show path of configuration file in use.
• rclone config password - Update password in an existing remote.
• rclone config paths - Show paths used for configuration, cache, temp etc.
• rclone config providers - List in JSON format all the providers and options.
• rclone config reconnect - Re-authenticates user with remote.
• rclone config show - Print (decrypted) config file, or the config for a single remote.
• rclone config touch - Ensure configuration file exists.
• rclone config update - Update options in an existing remote.
• rclone config userinfo - Prints info about logged in user of remote.
rclone copy
Copy files from source to dest, skipping identical files.
Synopsis
Copy the source to the destination. Does not transfer files that are identical on source and
destination, testing by size and modification time or MD5SUM. Doesn’t delete files from the destination.
If you want to also delete files from destination, to make it match source, use the sync command instead.
Note that it is always the contents of the directory that is synced, not the directory itself. So when
source:path is a directory, it’s the contents of source:path that are copied, not the directory name and
contents.
To copy single files, use the copyto command instead.
If dest:path doesn’t exist, it is created and the source:path contents go there.
For example
rclone copy source:sourcepath dest:destpath
Let’s say there are two files in sourcepath
sourcepath/one.txt
sourcepath/two.txt
This copies them to
destpath/one.txt
destpath/two.txt
Not to
destpath/sourcepath/one.txt
destpath/sourcepath/two.txt
If you are familiar with rsync, rclone always works as if you had written a trailing / - meaning “copy
the contents of this directory”. This applies to all commands and whether you are talking about the
source or destination.
See the –no-traverse option for controlling whether rclone lists the destination directory or not.
Supplying this option when copying a small number of files into a large destination can speed transfers
up greatly.
For example, if you have many files in /path/to/src but only a few of them change every day, you can copy
all the files which have changed recently very efficiently like this:
rclone copy --max-age 24h --no-traverse /path/to/src remote:
Note: Use the -P/--progress flag to view real-time transfer statistics.
Note: Use the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag to test without copying anything.
rclone copy source:path dest:path [flags]
Options
--create-empty-src-dirs Create empty source dirs on destination after copy
-h, --help help for copy
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone sync
Make source and dest identical, modifying destination only.
Synopsis
Sync the source to the destination, changing the destination only. Doesn’t transfer files that are
identical on source and destination, testing by size and modification time or MD5SUM. Destination is
updated to match source, including deleting files if necessary (except duplicate objects, see below). If
you don’t want to delete files from destination, use the copy command instead.
Important: Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag.
rclone sync -i SOURCE remote:DESTINATION
Note that files in the destination won’t be deleted if there were any errors at any point. Duplicate
objects (files with the same name, on those providers that support it) are also not yet handled.
It is always the contents of the directory that is synced, not the directory itself. So when source:path
is a directory, it’s the contents of source:path that are copied, not the directory name and contents.
See extended explanation in the copy command if unsure.
If dest:path doesn’t exist, it is created and the source:path contents go there.
It is not possible to sync overlapping remotes. However, you may exclude the destination from the sync
with a filter rule or by putting an exclude-if-present file inside the destination directory and sync to
a destination that is inside the source directory.
Note: Use the -P/--progress flag to view real-time transfer statistics
Note: Use the rclone dedupe command to deal with “Duplicate object/directory found in source/destination
- ignoring” errors. See this forum post for more info.
rclone sync source:path dest:path [flags]
Options
--create-empty-src-dirs Create empty source dirs on destination after sync
-h, --help help for sync
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone move
Move files from source to dest.
Synopsis
Moves the contents of the source directory to the destination directory. Rclone will error if the source
and destination overlap and the remote does not support a server-side directory move operation.
To move single files, use the moveto command instead.
If no filters are in use and if possible this will server-side move source:path into dest:path. After
this source:path will no longer exist.
Otherwise for each file in source:path selected by the filters (if any) this will move it into dest:path.
If possible a server-side move will be used, otherwise it will copy it (server-side if possible) into
dest:path then delete the original (if no errors on copy) in source:path.
If you want to delete empty source directories after move, use the --delete-empty-src-dirs flag.
See the –no-traverse option for controlling whether rclone lists the destination directory or not.
Supplying this option when moving a small number of files into a large destination can speed transfers up
greatly.
Important: Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag.
Note: Use the -P/--progress flag to view real-time transfer statistics.
rclone move source:path dest:path [flags]
Options
--create-empty-src-dirs Create empty source dirs on destination after move
--delete-empty-src-dirs Delete empty source dirs after move
-h, --help help for move
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone delete
Remove the files in path.
Synopsis
Remove the files in path. Unlike purge it obeys include/exclude filters so can be used to selectively
delete files.
rclone delete only deletes files but leaves the directory structure alone. If you want to delete a
directory and all of its contents use the purge command.
If you supply the --rmdirs flag, it will remove all empty directories along with it. You can also use
the separate command rmdir or rmdirs to delete empty directories only.
For example, to delete all files bigger than 100 MiB, you may first want to check what would be deleted
(use either):
rclone --min-size 100M lsl remote:path
rclone --dry-run --min-size 100M delete remote:path
Then proceed with the actual delete:
rclone --min-size 100M delete remote:path
That reads “delete everything with a minimum size of 100 MiB”, hence delete all files bigger than 100
MiB.
Important: Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag.
rclone delete remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for delete
--rmdirs rmdirs removes empty directories but leaves root intact
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone purge
Remove the path and all of its contents.
Synopsis
Remove the path and all of its contents. Note that this does not obey include/exclude filters -
everything will be removed. Use the delete command if you want to selectively delete files. To delete
empty directories only, use command rmdir or rmdirs.
Important: Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag.
rclone purge remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for purge
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone mkdir
Make the path if it doesn’t already exist.
rclone mkdir remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for mkdir
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone rmdir
Remove the empty directory at path.
Synopsis
This removes empty directory given by path. Will not remove the path if it has any objects in it, not
even empty subdirectories. Use command rmdirs (or delete with option --rmdirs) to do that.
To delete a path and any objects in it, use purge command.
rclone rmdir remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for rmdir
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone check
Checks the files in the source and destination match.
Synopsis
Checks the files in the source and destination match. It compares sizes and hashes (MD5 or SHA1) and
logs a report of files that don’t match. It doesn’t alter the source or destination.
For the crypt remote there is a dedicated command, cryptcheck, that are able to check the checksums of
the crypted files.
If you supply the --size-only flag, it will only compare the sizes not the hashes as well. Use this for
a quick check.
If you supply the --download flag, it will download the data from both remotes and check them against
each other on the fly. This can be useful for remotes that don’t support hashes or if you really want to
check all the data.
If you supply the --checkfile HASH flag with a valid hash name, the source:path must point to a text file
in the SUM format.
If you supply the --one-way flag, it will only check that files in the source match the files in the
destination, not the other way around. This means that extra files in the destination that are not in
the source will not be detected.
The --differ, --missing-on-dst, --missing-on-src, --match and --error flags write paths, one per line, to
the file name (or stdout if it is -) supplied. What they write is described in the help below. For
example --differ will write all paths which are present on both the source and destination but different.
The --combined flag will write a file (or stdout) which contains all file paths with a symbol and then a
space and then the path to tell you what happened to it. These are reminiscent of diff files.
• = path means path was found in source and destination and was identical
• - path means path was missing on the source, so only in the destination
• + path means path was missing on the destination, so only in the source
• * path means path was present in source and destination but different.
• ! path means there was an error reading or hashing the source or dest.
rclone check source:path dest:path [flags]
Options
-C, --checkfile string Treat source:path as a SUM file with hashes of given type
--combined string Make a combined report of changes to this file
--differ string Report all non-matching files to this file
--download Check by downloading rather than with hash
--error string Report all files with errors (hashing or reading) to this file
-h, --help help for check
--match string Report all matching files to this file
--missing-on-dst string Report all files missing from the destination to this file
--missing-on-src string Report all files missing from the source to this file
--one-way Check one way only, source files must exist on remote
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone ls
List the objects in the path with size and path.
Synopsis
Lists the objects in the source path to standard output in a human readable format with size and path.
Recurses by default.
Eg
$ rclone ls swift:bucket
60295 bevajer5jef
90613 canole
94467 diwogej7
37600 fubuwic
Any of the filtering options can be applied to this command.
There are several related list commands
• ls to list size and path of objects only
• lsl to list modification time, size and path of objects only
• lsd to list directories only
• lsf to list objects and directories in easy to parse format
• lsjson to list objects and directories in JSON format
ls,lsl,lsd are designed to be human-readable. lsf is designed to be human and machine-readable. lsjson
is designed to be machine-readable.
Note that ls and lsl recurse by default - use --max-depth 1 to stop the recursion.
The other list commands lsd,lsf,lsjson do not recurse by default - use -R to make them recurse.
Listing a nonexistent directory will produce an error except for remotes which can’t have empty
directories (e.g. s3, swift, or gcs - the bucket-based remotes).
rclone ls remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for ls
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone lsd
List all directories/containers/buckets in the path.
Synopsis
Lists the directories in the source path to standard output. Does not recurse by default. Use the -R
flag to recurse.
This command lists the total size of the directory (if known, -1 if not), the modification time (if
known, the current time if not), the number of objects in the directory (if known, -1 if not) and the
name of the directory, Eg
$ rclone lsd swift:
494000 2018-04-26 08:43:20 10000 10000files
65 2018-04-26 08:43:20 1 1File
Or
$ rclone lsd drive:test
-1 2016-10-17 17:41:53 -1 1000files
-1 2017-01-03 14:40:54 -1 2500files
-1 2017-07-08 14:39:28 -1 4000files
If you just want the directory names use rclone lsf --dirs-only.
Any of the filtering options can be applied to this command.
There are several related list commands
• ls to list size and path of objects only
• lsl to list modification time, size and path of objects only
• lsd to list directories only
• lsf to list objects and directories in easy to parse format
• lsjson to list objects and directories in JSON format
ls,lsl,lsd are designed to be human-readable. lsf is designed to be human and machine-readable. lsjson
is designed to be machine-readable.
Note that ls and lsl recurse by default - use --max-depth 1 to stop the recursion.
The other list commands lsd,lsf,lsjson do not recurse by default - use -R to make them recurse.
Listing a nonexistent directory will produce an error except for remotes which can’t have empty
directories (e.g. s3, swift, or gcs - the bucket-based remotes).
rclone lsd remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for lsd
-R, --recursive Recurse into the listing
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone lsl
List the objects in path with modification time, size and path.
Synopsis
Lists the objects in the source path to standard output in a human readable format with modification
time, size and path. Recurses by default.
Eg
$ rclone lsl swift:bucket
60295 2016-06-25 18:55:41.062626927 bevajer5jef
90613 2016-06-25 18:55:43.302607074 canole
94467 2016-06-25 18:55:43.046609333 diwogej7
37600 2016-06-25 18:55:40.814629136 fubuwic
Any of the filtering options can be applied to this command.
There are several related list commands
• ls to list size and path of objects only
• lsl to list modification time, size and path of objects only
• lsd to list directories only
• lsf to list objects and directories in easy to parse format
• lsjson to list objects and directories in JSON format
ls,lsl,lsd are designed to be human-readable. lsf is designed to be human and machine-readable. lsjson
is designed to be machine-readable.
Note that ls and lsl recurse by default - use --max-depth 1 to stop the recursion.
The other list commands lsd,lsf,lsjson do not recurse by default - use -R to make them recurse.
Listing a nonexistent directory will produce an error except for remotes which can’t have empty
directories (e.g. s3, swift, or gcs - the bucket-based remotes).
rclone lsl remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for lsl
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone md5sum
Produces an md5sum file for all the objects in the path.
Synopsis
Produces an md5sum file for all the objects in the path. This is in the same format as the standard
md5sum tool produces.
By default, the hash is requested from the remote. If MD5 is not supported by the remote, no hash will
be returned. With the download flag, the file will be downloaded from the remote and hashed locally
enabling MD5 for any remote.
For other algorithms, see the hashsum command. Running rclone md5sum remote:path is equivalent to
running rclone hashsum MD5 remote:path.
This command can also hash data received on standard input (stdin), by not passing a remote:path, or by
passing a hyphen as remote:path when there is data to read (if not, the hyphen will be treated literally,
as a relative path).
rclone md5sum remote:path [flags]
Options
--base64 Output base64 encoded hashsum
-C, --checkfile string Validate hashes against a given SUM file instead of printing them
--download Download the file and hash it locally; if this flag is not specified, the hash is requested from the remote
-h, --help help for md5sum
--output-file string Output hashsums to a file rather than the terminal
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone sha1sum
Produces an sha1sum file for all the objects in the path.
Synopsis
Produces an sha1sum file for all the objects in the path. This is in the same format as the standard
sha1sum tool produces.
By default, the hash is requested from the remote. If SHA-1 is not supported by the remote, no hash will
be returned. With the download flag, the file will be downloaded from the remote and hashed locally
enabling SHA-1 for any remote.
For other algorithms, see the hashsum command. Running rclone sha1sum remote:path is equivalent to
running rclone hashsum SHA1 remote:path.
This command can also hash data received on standard input (stdin), by not passing a remote:path, or by
passing a hyphen as remote:path when there is data to read (if not, the hyphen will be treated literally,
as a relative path).
This command can also hash data received on STDIN, if not passing a remote:path.
rclone sha1sum remote:path [flags]
Options
--base64 Output base64 encoded hashsum
-C, --checkfile string Validate hashes against a given SUM file instead of printing them
--download Download the file and hash it locally; if this flag is not specified, the hash is requested from the remote
-h, --help help for sha1sum
--output-file string Output hashsums to a file rather than the terminal
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone size
Prints the total size and number of objects in remote:path.
Synopsis
Counts objects in the path and calculates the total size. Prints the result to standard output.
By default the output is in human-readable format, but shows values in both human-readable format as well
as the raw numbers (global option --human-readable is not considered). Use option --json to format
output as JSON instead.
Recurses by default, use --max-depth 1 to stop the recursion.
Some backends do not always provide file sizes, see for example Google Photos and Google Drive. Rclone
will then show a notice in the log indicating how many such files were encountered, and count them in as
empty files in the output of the size command.
rclone size remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for size
--json Format output as JSON
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone version
Show the version number.
Synopsis
Show the rclone version number, the go version, the build target OS and architecture, the runtime OS and
kernel version and bitness, build tags and the type of executable (static or dynamic).
For example:
$ rclone version
rclone v1.55.0
- os/version: ubuntu 18.04 (64 bit)
- os/kernel: 4.15.0-136-generic (x86_64)
- os/type: linux
- os/arch: amd64
- go/version: go1.16
- go/linking: static
- go/tags: none
Note: before rclone version 1.55 the os/type and os/arch lines were merged, and the “go/version” line was
tagged as “go version”.
If you supply the –check flag, then it will do an online check to compare your version with the latest
release and the latest beta.
$ rclone version --check
yours: 1.42.0.6
latest: 1.42 (released 2018-06-16)
beta: 1.42.0.5 (released 2018-06-17)
Or
$ rclone version --check
yours: 1.41
latest: 1.42 (released 2018-06-16)
upgrade: https://downloads.rclone.org/v1.42
beta: 1.42.0.5 (released 2018-06-17)
upgrade: https://beta.rclone.org/v1.42-005-g56e1e820
rclone version [flags]
Options
--check Check for new version
-h, --help help for version
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone cleanup
Clean up the remote if possible.
Synopsis
Clean up the remote if possible. Empty the trash or delete old file versions. Not supported by all
remotes.
rclone cleanup remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for cleanup
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone dedupe
Interactively find duplicate filenames and delete/rename them.
Synopsis
By default dedupe interactively finds files with duplicate names and offers to delete all but one or
rename them to be different. This is known as deduping by name.
Deduping by name is only useful with a small group of backends (e.g. Google Drive, Opendrive) that can
have duplicate file names. It can be run on wrapping backends (e.g. crypt) if they wrap a backend which
supports duplicate file names.
However if --by-hash is passed in then dedupe will find files with duplicate hashes instead which will
work on any backend which supports at least one hash. This can be used to find files with duplicate
content. This is known as deduping by hash.
If deduping by name, first rclone will merge directories with the same name. It will do this iteratively
until all the identically named directories have been merged.
Next, if deduping by name, for every group of duplicate file names / hashes, it will delete all but one
identical file it finds without confirmation. This means that for most duplicated files the dedupe
command will not be interactive.
dedupe considers files to be identical if they have the same file path and the same hash. If the backend
does not support hashes (e.g. crypt wrapping Google Drive) then they will never be found to be identical.
If you use the --size-only flag then files will be considered identical if they have the same size (any
hash will be ignored). This can be useful on crypt backends which do not support hashes.
Next rclone will resolve the remaining duplicates. Exactly which action is taken depends on the dedupe
mode. By default, rclone will interactively query the user for each one.
Important: Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag.
Here is an example run.
Before - with duplicates
$ rclone lsl drive:dupes
6048320 2016-03-05 16:23:16.798000000 one.txt
6048320 2016-03-05 16:23:11.775000000 one.txt
564374 2016-03-05 16:23:06.731000000 one.txt
6048320 2016-03-05 16:18:26.092000000 one.txt
6048320 2016-03-05 16:22:46.185000000 two.txt
1744073 2016-03-05 16:22:38.104000000 two.txt
564374 2016-03-05 16:22:52.118000000 two.txt
Now the dedupe session
$ rclone dedupe drive:dupes
2016/03/05 16:24:37 Google drive root 'dupes': Looking for duplicates using interactive mode.
one.txt: Found 4 files with duplicate names
one.txt: Deleting 2/3 identical duplicates (MD5 "1eedaa9fe86fd4b8632e2ac549403b36")
one.txt: 2 duplicates remain
1: 6048320 bytes, 2016-03-05 16:23:16.798000000, MD5 1eedaa9fe86fd4b8632e2ac549403b36
2: 564374 bytes, 2016-03-05 16:23:06.731000000, MD5 7594e7dc9fc28f727c42ee3e0749de81
s) Skip and do nothing
k) Keep just one (choose which in next step)
r) Rename all to be different (by changing file.jpg to file-1.jpg)
s/k/r> k
Enter the number of the file to keep> 1
one.txt: Deleted 1 extra copies
two.txt: Found 3 files with duplicate names
two.txt: 3 duplicates remain
1: 564374 bytes, 2016-03-05 16:22:52.118000000, MD5 7594e7dc9fc28f727c42ee3e0749de81
2: 6048320 bytes, 2016-03-05 16:22:46.185000000, MD5 1eedaa9fe86fd4b8632e2ac549403b36
3: 1744073 bytes, 2016-03-05 16:22:38.104000000, MD5 851957f7fb6f0bc4ce76be966d336802
s) Skip and do nothing
k) Keep just one (choose which in next step)
r) Rename all to be different (by changing file.jpg to file-1.jpg)
s/k/r> r
two-1.txt: renamed from: two.txt
two-2.txt: renamed from: two.txt
two-3.txt: renamed from: two.txt
The result being
$ rclone lsl drive:dupes
6048320 2016-03-05 16:23:16.798000000 one.txt
564374 2016-03-05 16:22:52.118000000 two-1.txt
6048320 2016-03-05 16:22:46.185000000 two-2.txt
1744073 2016-03-05 16:22:38.104000000 two-3.txt
Dedupe can be run non interactively using the --dedupe-mode flag or by using an extra parameter with the
same value
• --dedupe-mode interactive - interactive as above.
• --dedupe-mode skip - removes identical files then skips anything left.
• --dedupe-mode first - removes identical files then keeps the first one.
• --dedupe-mode newest - removes identical files then keeps the newest one.
• --dedupe-mode oldest - removes identical files then keeps the oldest one.
• --dedupe-mode largest - removes identical files then keeps the largest one.
• --dedupe-mode smallest - removes identical files then keeps the smallest one.
• --dedupe-mode rename - removes identical files then renames the rest to be different.
• --dedupe-mode list - lists duplicate dirs and files only and changes nothing.
For example, to rename all the identically named photos in your Google Photos directory, do
rclone dedupe --dedupe-mode rename "drive:Google Photos"
Or
rclone dedupe rename "drive:Google Photos"
rclone dedupe [mode] remote:path [flags]
Options
--by-hash Find identical hashes rather than names
--dedupe-mode string Dedupe mode interactive|skip|first|newest|oldest|largest|smallest|rename (default "interactive")
-h, --help help for dedupe
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone about
Get quota information from the remote.
Synopsis
rclone about prints quota information about a remote to standard output. The output is typically used,
free, quota and trash contents.
E.g. Typical output from rclone about remote: is:
Total: 17 GiB
Used: 7.444 GiB
Free: 1.315 GiB
Trashed: 100.000 MiB
Other: 8.241 GiB
Where the fields are:
• Total: Total size available.
• Used: Total size used.
• Free: Total space available to this user.
• Trashed: Total space used by trash.
• Other: Total amount in other storage (e.g. Gmail, Google Photos).
• Objects: Total number of objects in the storage.
All sizes are in number of bytes.
Applying a --full flag to the command prints the bytes in full, e.g.
Total: 18253611008
Used: 7993453766
Free: 1411001220
Trashed: 104857602
Other: 8849156022
A --json flag generates conveniently machine-readable output, e.g.
{
"total": 18253611008,
"used": 7993453766,
"trashed": 104857602,
"other": 8849156022,
"free": 1411001220
}
Not all backends print all fields. Information is not included if it is not provided by a backend.
Where the value is unlimited it is omitted.
Some backends does not support the rclone about command at all, see complete list in documentation.
rclone about remote: [flags]
Options
--full Full numbers instead of human-readable
-h, --help help for about
--json Format output as JSON
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone authorize
Remote authorization.
Synopsis
Remote authorization. Used to authorize a remote or headless rclone from a machine with a browser - use
as instructed by rclone config.
Use the –auth-no-open-browser to prevent rclone to open auth link in default browser automatically.
rclone authorize [flags]
Options
--auth-no-open-browser Do not automatically open auth link in default browser
-h, --help help for authorize
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone backend
Run a backend-specific command.
Synopsis
This runs a backend-specific command. The commands themselves (except for “help” and “features”) are
defined by the backends and you should see the backend docs for definitions.
You can discover what commands a backend implements by using
rclone backend help remote:
rclone backend help <backendname>
You can also discover information about the backend using (see operations/fsinfo in the remote control
docs for more info).
rclone backend features remote:
Pass options to the backend command with -o. This should be key=value or key, e.g.:
rclone backend stats remote:path stats -o format=json -o long
Pass arguments to the backend by placing them on the end of the line
rclone backend cleanup remote:path file1 file2 file3
Note to run these commands on a running backend then see backend/command in the rc docs.
rclone backend <command> remote:path [opts] <args> [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for backend
--json Always output in JSON format
-o, --option stringArray Option in the form name=value or name
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone bisync
Perform bidirectional synchronization between two paths.
Synopsis
Perform bidirectional synchronization between two paths.
Bisync provides a bidirectional cloud sync solution in rclone. It retains the Path1 and Path2 filesystem
listings from the prior run. On each successive run it will: - list files on Path1 and Path2, and check
for changes on each side. Changes include New, Newer, Older, and Deleted files. - Propagate changes on
Path1 to Path2, and vice-versa.
See full bisync description for details.
rclone bisync remote1:path1 remote2:path2 [flags]
Options
--check-access Ensure expected RCLONE_TEST files are found on both Path1 and Path2 filesystems, else abort.
--check-filename string Filename for --check-access (default: RCLONE_TEST)
--check-sync string Controls comparison of final listings: true|false|only (default: true) (default "true")
--filters-file string Read filtering patterns from a file
--force Bypass --max-delete safety check and run the sync. Consider using with --verbose
-h, --help help for bisync
--localtime Use local time in listings (default: UTC)
--no-cleanup Retain working files (useful for troubleshooting and testing).
--remove-empty-dirs Remove empty directories at the final cleanup step.
-1, --resync Performs the resync run. Path1 files may overwrite Path2 versions. Consider using --verbose or --dry-run first.
--workdir string Use custom working dir - useful for testing. (default: $HOME/.cache/rclone/bisync)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone cat
Concatenates any files and sends them to stdout.
Synopsis
rclone cat sends any files to standard output.
You can use it like this to output a single file
rclone cat remote:path/to/file
Or like this to output any file in dir or its subdirectories.
rclone cat remote:path/to/dir
Or like this to output any .txt files in dir or its subdirectories.
rclone --include "*.txt" cat remote:path/to/dir
Use the --head flag to print characters only at the start, --tail for the end and --offset and --count to
print a section in the middle. Note that if offset is negative it will count from the end, so --offset
-1 --count 1 is equivalent to --tail 1.
rclone cat remote:path [flags]
Options
--count int Only print N characters (default -1)
--discard Discard the output instead of printing
--head int Only print the first N characters
-h, --help help for cat
--offset int Start printing at offset N (or from end if -ve)
--tail int Only print the last N characters
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone checksum
Checks the files in the source against a SUM file.
Synopsis
Checks that hashsums of source files match the SUM file. It compares hashes (MD5, SHA1, etc) and logs a
report of files which don’t match. It doesn’t alter the file system.
If you supply the --download flag, it will download the data from remote and calculate the contents hash
on the fly. This can be useful for remotes that don’t support hashes or if you really want to check all
the data.
Note that hash values in the SUM file are treated as case insensitive.
If you supply the --one-way flag, it will only check that files in the source match the files in the
destination, not the other way around. This means that extra files in the destination that are not in
the source will not be detected.
The --differ, --missing-on-dst, --missing-on-src, --match and --error flags write paths, one per line, to
the file name (or stdout if it is -) supplied. What they write is described in the help below. For
example --differ will write all paths which are present on both the source and destination but different.
The --combined flag will write a file (or stdout) which contains all file paths with a symbol and then a
space and then the path to tell you what happened to it. These are reminiscent of diff files.
• = path means path was found in source and destination and was identical
• - path means path was missing on the source, so only in the destination
• + path means path was missing on the destination, so only in the source
• * path means path was present in source and destination but different.
• ! path means there was an error reading or hashing the source or dest.
rclone checksum <hash> sumfile src:path [flags]
Options
--combined string Make a combined report of changes to this file
--differ string Report all non-matching files to this file
--download Check by hashing the contents
--error string Report all files with errors (hashing or reading) to this file
-h, --help help for checksum
--match string Report all matching files to this file
--missing-on-dst string Report all files missing from the destination to this file
--missing-on-src string Report all files missing from the source to this file
--one-way Check one way only, source files must exist on remote
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone completion
Generate the autocompletion script for the specified shell
Synopsis
Generate the autocompletion script for rclone for the specified shell. See each sub-command’s help for
details on how to use the generated script.
Options
-h, --help help for completion
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
• rclone completion bash - Generate the autocompletion script for bash
• rclone completion fish - Generate the autocompletion script for fish
• rclone completion powershell - Generate the autocompletion script for powershell
• rclone completion zsh - Generate the autocompletion script for zsh
rclone completion bash
Generate the autocompletion script for bash
Synopsis
Generate the autocompletion script for the bash shell.
This script depends on the `bash-completion' package. If it is not installed already, you can install it
via your OS’s package manager.
To load completions in your current shell session:
source <(rclone completion bash)
To load completions for every new session, execute once:
Linux:
rclone completion bash > /etc/bash_completion.d/rclone
macOS:
rclone completion bash > $(brew --prefix)/etc/bash_completion.d/rclone
You will need to start a new shell for this setup to take effect.
rclone completion bash
Options
-h, --help help for bash
--no-descriptions disable completion descriptions
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone completion - Generate the autocompletion script for the specified shell
rclone completion fish
Generate the autocompletion script for fish
Synopsis
Generate the autocompletion script for the fish shell.
To load completions in your current shell session:
rclone completion fish | source
To load completions for every new session, execute once:
rclone completion fish > ~/.config/fish/completions/rclone.fish
You will need to start a new shell for this setup to take effect.
rclone completion fish [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for fish
--no-descriptions disable completion descriptions
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone completion - Generate the autocompletion script for the specified shell
rclone completion powershell
Generate the autocompletion script for powershell
Synopsis
Generate the autocompletion script for powershell.
To load completions in your current shell session:
rclone completion powershell | Out-String | Invoke-Expression
To load completions for every new session, add the output of the above command to your powershell
profile.
rclone completion powershell [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for powershell
--no-descriptions disable completion descriptions
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone completion - Generate the autocompletion script for the specified shell
rclone completion zsh
Generate the autocompletion script for zsh
Synopsis
Generate the autocompletion script for the zsh shell.
If shell completion is not already enabled in your environment you will need to enable it. You can
execute the following once:
echo "autoload -U compinit; compinit" >> ~/.zshrc
To load completions in your current shell session:
source <(rclone completion zsh); compdef _rclone rclone
To load completions for every new session, execute once:
Linux:
rclone completion zsh > "${fpath[1]}/_rclone"
macOS:
rclone completion zsh > $(brew --prefix)/share/zsh/site-functions/_rclone
You will need to start a new shell for this setup to take effect.
rclone completion zsh [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for zsh
--no-descriptions disable completion descriptions
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone completion - Generate the autocompletion script for the specified shell
rclone config create
Create a new remote with name, type and options.
Synopsis
Create a new remote of name with type and options. The options should be passed in pairs of key value or
as key=value.
For example, to make a swift remote of name myremote using auto config you would do:
rclone config create myremote swift env_auth true
rclone config create myremote swift env_auth=true
So for example if you wanted to configure a Google Drive remote but using remote authorization you would
do this:
rclone config create mydrive drive config_is_local=false
Note that if the config process would normally ask a question the default is taken (unless
--non-interactive is used). Each time that happens rclone will print or DEBUG a message saying how to
affect the value taken.
If any of the parameters passed is a password field, then rclone will automatically obscure them if they
aren’t already obscured before putting them in the config file.
NB If the password parameter is 22 characters or longer and consists only of base64 characters then
rclone can get confused about whether the password is already obscured or not and put unobscured
passwords into the config file. If you want to be 100% certain that the passwords get obscured then use
the --obscure flag, or if you are 100% certain you are already passing obscured passwords then use
--no-obscure. You can also set obscured passwords using the rclone config password command.
The flag --non-interactive is for use by applications that wish to configure rclone themselves, rather
than using rclone’s text based configuration questions. If this flag is set, and rclone needs to ask the
user a question, a JSON blob will be returned with the question in it.
This will look something like (some irrelevant detail removed):
{
"State": "*oauth-islocal,teamdrive,,",
"Option": {
"Name": "config_is_local",
"Help": "Use auto config?\n * Say Y if not sure\n * Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine\n",
"Default": true,
"Examples": [
{
"Value": "true",
"Help": "Yes"
},
{
"Value": "false",
"Help": "No"
}
],
"Required": false,
"IsPassword": false,
"Type": "bool",
"Exclusive": true,
},
"Error": "",
}
The format of Option is the same as returned by rclone config providers. The question should be asked to
the user and returned to rclone as the --result option along with the --state parameter.
The keys of Option are used as follows:
• Name - name of variable - show to user
• Help - help text. Hard wrapped at 80 chars. Any URLs should be clicky.
• Default - default value - return this if the user just wants the default.
• Examples - the user should be able to choose one of these
• Required - the value should be non-empty
• IsPassword - the value is a password and should be edited as such
• Type - type of value, eg bool, string, int and others
• Exclusive - if set no free-form entry allowed only the Examples
• Irrelevant keys Provider, ShortOpt, Hide, NoPrefix, Advanced
If Error is set then it should be shown to the user at the same time as the question.
rclone config update name --continue --state "*oauth-islocal,teamdrive,," --result "true"
Note that when using --continue all passwords should be passed in the clear (not obscured). Any default
config values should be passed in with each invocation of --continue.
At the end of the non interactive process, rclone will return a result with State as empty string.
If --all is passed then rclone will ask all the config questions, not just the post config questions.
Any parameters are used as defaults for questions as usual.
Note that bin/config.py in the rclone source implements this protocol as a readable demonstration.
rclone config create name type [key value]* [flags]
Options
--all Ask the full set of config questions
--continue Continue the configuration process with an answer
-h, --help help for create
--no-obscure Force any passwords not to be obscured
--non-interactive Don't interact with user and return questions
--obscure Force any passwords to be obscured
--result string Result - use with --continue
--state string State - use with --continue
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config delete
Delete an existing remote.
rclone config delete name [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for delete
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config disconnect
Disconnects user from remote
Synopsis
This disconnects the remote: passed in to the cloud storage system.
This normally means revoking the oauth token.
To reconnect use “rclone config reconnect”.
rclone config disconnect remote: [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for disconnect
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config dump
Dump the config file as JSON.
rclone config dump [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for dump
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config edit
Enter an interactive configuration session.
Synopsis
Enter an interactive configuration session where you can setup new remotes and manage existing ones. You
may also set or remove a password to protect your configuration.
rclone config edit [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for edit
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config file
Show path of configuration file in use.
rclone config file [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for file
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config password
Update password in an existing remote.
Synopsis
Update an existing remote’s password. The password should be passed in pairs of key password or as
key=password. The password should be passed in in clear (unobscured).
For example, to set password of a remote of name myremote you would do:
rclone config password myremote fieldname mypassword
rclone config password myremote fieldname=mypassword
This command is obsolete now that “config update” and “config create” both support obscuring passwords
directly.
rclone config password name [key value]+ [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for password
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config paths
Show paths used for configuration, cache, temp etc.
rclone config paths [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for paths
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config providers
List in JSON format all the providers and options.
rclone config providers [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for providers
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config reconnect
Re-authenticates user with remote.
Synopsis
This reconnects remote: passed in to the cloud storage system.
To disconnect the remote use “rclone config disconnect”.
This normally means going through the interactive oauth flow again.
rclone config reconnect remote: [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for reconnect
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config show
Print (decrypted) config file, or the config for a single remote.
rclone config show [<remote>] [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for show
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config touch
Ensure configuration file exists.
rclone config touch [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for touch
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config update
Update options in an existing remote.
Synopsis
Update an existing remote’s options. The options should be passed in pairs of key value or as key=value.
For example, to update the env_auth field of a remote of name myremote you would do:
rclone config update myremote env_auth true
rclone config update myremote env_auth=true
If the remote uses OAuth the token will be updated, if you don’t require this add an extra parameter
thus:
rclone config update myremote env_auth=true config_refresh_token=false
Note that if the config process would normally ask a question the default is taken (unless
--non-interactive is used). Each time that happens rclone will print or DEBUG a message saying how to
affect the value taken.
If any of the parameters passed is a password field, then rclone will automatically obscure them if they
aren’t already obscured before putting them in the config file.
NB If the password parameter is 22 characters or longer and consists only of base64 characters then
rclone can get confused about whether the password is already obscured or not and put unobscured
passwords into the config file. If you want to be 100% certain that the passwords get obscured then use
the --obscure flag, or if you are 100% certain you are already passing obscured passwords then use
--no-obscure. You can also set obscured passwords using the rclone config password command.
The flag --non-interactive is for use by applications that wish to configure rclone themselves, rather
than using rclone’s text based configuration questions. If this flag is set, and rclone needs to ask the
user a question, a JSON blob will be returned with the question in it.
This will look something like (some irrelevant detail removed):
{
"State": "*oauth-islocal,teamdrive,,",
"Option": {
"Name": "config_is_local",
"Help": "Use auto config?\n * Say Y if not sure\n * Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine\n",
"Default": true,
"Examples": [
{
"Value": "true",
"Help": "Yes"
},
{
"Value": "false",
"Help": "No"
}
],
"Required": false,
"IsPassword": false,
"Type": "bool",
"Exclusive": true,
},
"Error": "",
}
The format of Option is the same as returned by rclone config providers. The question should be asked to
the user and returned to rclone as the --result option along with the --state parameter.
The keys of Option are used as follows:
• Name - name of variable - show to user
• Help - help text. Hard wrapped at 80 chars. Any URLs should be clicky.
• Default - default value - return this if the user just wants the default.
• Examples - the user should be able to choose one of these
• Required - the value should be non-empty
• IsPassword - the value is a password and should be edited as such
• Type - type of value, eg bool, string, int and others
• Exclusive - if set no free-form entry allowed only the Examples
• Irrelevant keys Provider, ShortOpt, Hide, NoPrefix, Advanced
If Error is set then it should be shown to the user at the same time as the question.
rclone config update name --continue --state "*oauth-islocal,teamdrive,," --result "true"
Note that when using --continue all passwords should be passed in the clear (not obscured). Any default
config values should be passed in with each invocation of --continue.
At the end of the non interactive process, rclone will return a result with State as empty string.
If --all is passed then rclone will ask all the config questions, not just the post config questions.
Any parameters are used as defaults for questions as usual.
Note that bin/config.py in the rclone source implements this protocol as a readable demonstration.
rclone config update name [key value]+ [flags]
Options
--all Ask the full set of config questions
--continue Continue the configuration process with an answer
-h, --help help for update
--no-obscure Force any passwords not to be obscured
--non-interactive Don't interact with user and return questions
--obscure Force any passwords to be obscured
--result string Result - use with --continue
--state string State - use with --continue
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone config userinfo
Prints info about logged in user of remote.
Synopsis
This prints the details of the person logged in to the cloud storage system.
rclone config userinfo remote: [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for userinfo
--json Format output as JSON
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone config - Enter an interactive configuration session.
rclone copyto
Copy files from source to dest, skipping identical files.
Synopsis
If source:path is a file or directory then it copies it to a file or directory named dest:path.
This can be used to upload single files to other than their current name. If the source is a directory
then it acts exactly like the copy command.
So
rclone copyto src dst
where src and dst are rclone paths, either remote:path or /path/to/local or C:.
This will:
if src is file
copy it to dst, overwriting an existing file if it exists
if src is directory
copy it to dst, overwriting existing files if they exist
see copy command for full details
This doesn’t transfer files that are identical on src and dst, testing by size and modification time or
MD5SUM. It doesn’t delete files from the destination.
Note: Use the -P/--progress flag to view real-time transfer statistics
rclone copyto source:path dest:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for copyto
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone copyurl
Copy url content to dest.
Synopsis
Download a URL’s content and copy it to the destination without saving it in temporary storage.
Setting --auto-filename will attempt to automatically determine the filename from the URL (after any
redirections) and used in the destination path. With --auto-filename-header in addition, if a specific
filename is set in HTTP headers, it will be used instead of the name from the URL. With --print-filename
in addition, the resulting file name will be printed.
Setting --no-clobber will prevent overwriting file on the destination if there is one with the same name.
Setting --stdout or making the output file name - will cause the output to be written to standard output.
rclone copyurl https://example.com dest:path [flags]
Options
-a, --auto-filename Get the file name from the URL and use it for destination file path
--header-filename Get the file name from the Content-Disposition header
-h, --help help for copyurl
--no-clobber Prevent overwriting file with same name
-p, --print-filename Print the resulting name from --auto-filename
--stdout Write the output to stdout rather than a file
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone cryptcheck
Cryptcheck checks the integrity of a crypted remote.
Synopsis
rclone cryptcheck checks a remote against a crypted remote. This is the equivalent of running rclone
check, but able to check the checksums of the crypted remote.
For it to work the underlying remote of the cryptedremote must support some kind of checksum.
It works by reading the nonce from each file on the cryptedremote: and using that to encrypt each file on
the remote:. It then checks the checksum of the underlying file on the cryptedremote: against the
checksum of the file it has just encrypted.
Use it like this
rclone cryptcheck /path/to/files encryptedremote:path
You can use it like this also, but that will involve downloading all the files in remote:path.
rclone cryptcheck remote:path encryptedremote:path
After it has run it will log the status of the encryptedremote:.
If you supply the --one-way flag, it will only check that files in the source match the files in the
destination, not the other way around. This means that extra files in the destination that are not in
the source will not be detected.
The --differ, --missing-on-dst, --missing-on-src, --match and --error flags write paths, one per line, to
the file name (or stdout if it is -) supplied. What they write is described in the help below. For
example --differ will write all paths which are present on both the source and destination but different.
The --combined flag will write a file (or stdout) which contains all file paths with a symbol and then a
space and then the path to tell you what happened to it. These are reminiscent of diff files.
• = path means path was found in source and destination and was identical
• - path means path was missing on the source, so only in the destination
• + path means path was missing on the destination, so only in the source
• * path means path was present in source and destination but different.
• ! path means there was an error reading or hashing the source or dest.
rclone cryptcheck remote:path cryptedremote:path [flags]
Options
--combined string Make a combined report of changes to this file
--differ string Report all non-matching files to this file
--error string Report all files with errors (hashing or reading) to this file
-h, --help help for cryptcheck
--match string Report all matching files to this file
--missing-on-dst string Report all files missing from the destination to this file
--missing-on-src string Report all files missing from the source to this file
--one-way Check one way only, source files must exist on remote
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone cryptdecode
Cryptdecode returns unencrypted file names.
Synopsis
rclone cryptdecode returns unencrypted file names when provided with a list of encrypted file names.
List limit is 10 items.
If you supply the --reverse flag, it will return encrypted file names.
use it like this
rclone cryptdecode encryptedremote: encryptedfilename1 encryptedfilename2
rclone cryptdecode --reverse encryptedremote: filename1 filename2
Another way to accomplish this is by using the rclone backend encode (or decode) command. See the
documentation on the crypt overlay for more info.
rclone cryptdecode encryptedremote: encryptedfilename [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for cryptdecode
--reverse Reverse cryptdecode, encrypts filenames
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone deletefile
Remove a single file from remote.
Synopsis
Remove a single file from remote. Unlike delete it cannot be used to remove a directory and it doesn’t
obey include/exclude filters - if the specified file exists, it will always be removed.
rclone deletefile remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for deletefile
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone genautocomplete
Output completion script for a given shell.
Synopsis
Generates a shell completion script for rclone. Run with --help to list the supported shells.
Options
-h, --help help for genautocomplete
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
• rclone genautocomplete bash - Output bash completion script for rclone.
• rclone genautocomplete fish - Output fish completion script for rclone.
• rclone genautocomplete zsh - Output zsh completion script for rclone.
rclone genautocomplete bash
Output bash completion script for rclone.
Synopsis
Generates a bash shell autocompletion script for rclone.
This writes to /etc/bash_completion.d/rclone by default so will probably need to be run with sudo or as
root, e.g.
sudo rclone genautocomplete bash
Logout and login again to use the autocompletion scripts, or source them directly
. /etc/bash_completion
If you supply a command line argument the script will be written there.
If output_file is “-”, then the output will be written to stdout.
rclone genautocomplete bash [output_file] [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for bash
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone genautocomplete - Output completion script for a given shell.
rclone genautocomplete fish
Output fish completion script for rclone.
Synopsis
Generates a fish autocompletion script for rclone.
This writes to /etc/fish/completions/rclone.fish by default so will probably need to be run with sudo or
as root, e.g.
sudo rclone genautocomplete fish
Logout and login again to use the autocompletion scripts, or source them directly
. /etc/fish/completions/rclone.fish
If you supply a command line argument the script will be written there.
If output_file is “-”, then the output will be written to stdout.
rclone genautocomplete fish [output_file] [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for fish
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone genautocomplete - Output completion script for a given shell.
rclone genautocomplete zsh
Output zsh completion script for rclone.
Synopsis
Generates a zsh autocompletion script for rclone.
This writes to /usr/share/zsh/vendor-completions/_rclone by default so will probably need to be run with
sudo or as root, e.g.
sudo rclone genautocomplete zsh
Logout and login again to use the autocompletion scripts, or source them directly
autoload -U compinit && compinit
If you supply a command line argument the script will be written there.
If output_file is “-”, then the output will be written to stdout.
rclone genautocomplete zsh [output_file] [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for zsh
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone genautocomplete - Output completion script for a given shell.
rclone gendocs
Output markdown docs for rclone to the directory supplied.
Synopsis
This produces markdown docs for the rclone commands to the directory supplied. These are in a format
suitable for hugo to render into the rclone.org website.
rclone gendocs output_directory [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for gendocs
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone hashsum
Produces a hashsum file for all the objects in the path.
Synopsis
Produces a hash file for all the objects in the path using the hash named. The output is in the same
format as the standard md5sum/sha1sum tool.
By default, the hash is requested from the remote. If the hash is not supported by the remote, no hash
will be returned. With the download flag, the file will be downloaded from the remote and hashed locally
enabling any hash for any remote.
For the MD5 and SHA1 algorithms there are also dedicated commands, md5sum and sha1sum.
This command can also hash data received on standard input (stdin), by not passing a remote:path, or by
passing a hyphen as remote:path when there is data to read (if not, the hyphen will be treated literally,
as a relative path).
Run without a hash to see the list of all supported hashes, e.g.
$ rclone hashsum
Supported hashes are:
* md5
* sha1
* whirlpool
* crc32
* sha256
* dropbox
* hidrive
* mailru
* quickxor
Then
$ rclone hashsum MD5 remote:path
Note that hash names are case insensitive and values are output in lower case.
rclone hashsum <hash> remote:path [flags]
Options
--base64 Output base64 encoded hashsum
-C, --checkfile string Validate hashes against a given SUM file instead of printing them
--download Download the file and hash it locally; if this flag is not specified, the hash is requested from the remote
-h, --help help for hashsum
--output-file string Output hashsums to a file rather than the terminal
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone link
Generate public link to file/folder.
Synopsis
rclone link will create, retrieve or remove a public link to the given file or folder.
rclone link remote:path/to/file
rclone link remote:path/to/folder/
rclone link --unlink remote:path/to/folder/
rclone link --expire 1d remote:path/to/file
If you supply the –expire flag, it will set the expiration time otherwise it will use the default (100
years). Note not all backends support the –expire flag - if the backend doesn’t support it then the link
returned won’t expire.
Use the –unlink flag to remove existing public links to the file or folder. Note not all backends
support “–unlink” flag - those that don’t will just ignore it.
If successful, the last line of the output will contain the link. Exact capabilities depend on the
remote, but the link will always by default be created with the least constraints – e.g. no expiry, no
password protection, accessible without account.
rclone link remote:path [flags]
Options
--expire Duration The amount of time that the link will be valid (default off)
-h, --help help for link
--unlink Remove existing public link to file/folder
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone listremotes
List all the remotes in the config file.
Synopsis
rclone listremotes lists all the available remotes from the config file.
When used with the --long flag it lists the types too.
rclone listremotes [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for listremotes
--long Show the type as well as names
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone lsf
List directories and objects in remote:path formatted for parsing.
Synopsis
List the contents of the source path (directories and objects) to standard output in a form which is easy
to parse by scripts. By default this will just be the names of the objects and directories, one per
line. The directories will have a / suffix.
Eg
$ rclone lsf swift:bucket
bevajer5jef
canole
diwogej7
ferejej3gux/
fubuwic
Use the --format option to control what gets listed. By default this is just the path, but you can use
these parameters to control the output:
p - path
s - size
t - modification time
h - hash
i - ID of object
o - Original ID of underlying object
m - MimeType of object if known
e - encrypted name
T - tier of storage if known, e.g. "Hot" or "Cool"
M - Metadata of object in JSON blob format, eg {"key":"value"}
So if you wanted the path, size and modification time, you would use --format "pst", or maybe --format
"tsp" to put the path last.
Eg
$ rclone lsf --format "tsp" swift:bucket
2016-06-25 18:55:41;60295;bevajer5jef
2016-06-25 18:55:43;90613;canole
2016-06-25 18:55:43;94467;diwogej7
2018-04-26 08:50:45;0;ferejej3gux/
2016-06-25 18:55:40;37600;fubuwic
If you specify “h” in the format you will get the MD5 hash by default, use the --hash flag to change
which hash you want. Note that this can be returned as an empty string if it isn’t available on the
object (and for directories), “ERROR” if there was an error reading it from the object and “UNSUPPORTED”
if that object does not support that hash type.
For example, to emulate the md5sum command you can use
rclone lsf -R --hash MD5 --format hp --separator " " --files-only .
Eg
$ rclone lsf -R --hash MD5 --format hp --separator " " --files-only swift:bucket
7908e352297f0f530b84a756f188baa3 bevajer5jef
cd65ac234e6fea5925974a51cdd865cc canole
03b5341b4f234b9d984d03ad076bae91 diwogej7
8fd37c3810dd660778137ac3a66cc06d fubuwic
99713e14a4c4ff553acaf1930fad985b gixacuh7ku
(Though “rclone md5sum .” is an easier way of typing this.)
By default the separator is “;” this can be changed with the --separator flag. Note that separators
aren’t escaped in the path so putting it last is a good strategy.
Eg
$ rclone lsf --separator "," --format "tshp" swift:bucket
2016-06-25 18:55:41,60295,7908e352297f0f530b84a756f188baa3,bevajer5jef
2016-06-25 18:55:43,90613,cd65ac234e6fea5925974a51cdd865cc,canole
2016-06-25 18:55:43,94467,03b5341b4f234b9d984d03ad076bae91,diwogej7
2018-04-26 08:52:53,0,,ferejej3gux/
2016-06-25 18:55:40,37600,8fd37c3810dd660778137ac3a66cc06d,fubuwic
You can output in CSV standard format. This will escape things in ” if they contain ,
Eg
$ rclone lsf --csv --files-only --format ps remote:path
test.log,22355
test.sh,449
"this file contains a comma, in the file name.txt",6
Note that the --absolute parameter is useful for making lists of files to pass to an rclone copy with the
--files-from-raw flag.
For example, to find all the files modified within one day and copy those only (without traversing the
whole directory structure):
rclone lsf --absolute --files-only --max-age 1d /path/to/local > new_files
rclone copy --files-from-raw new_files /path/to/local remote:path
Any of the filtering options can be applied to this command.
There are several related list commands
• ls to list size and path of objects only
• lsl to list modification time, size and path of objects only
• lsd to list directories only
• lsf to list objects and directories in easy to parse format
• lsjson to list objects and directories in JSON format
ls,lsl,lsd are designed to be human-readable. lsf is designed to be human and machine-readable. lsjson
is designed to be machine-readable.
Note that ls and lsl recurse by default - use --max-depth 1 to stop the recursion.
The other list commands lsd,lsf,lsjson do not recurse by default - use -R to make them recurse.
Listing a nonexistent directory will produce an error except for remotes which can’t have empty
directories (e.g. s3, swift, or gcs - the bucket-based remotes).
rclone lsf remote:path [flags]
Options
--absolute Put a leading / in front of path names
--csv Output in CSV format
-d, --dir-slash Append a slash to directory names (default true)
--dirs-only Only list directories
--files-only Only list files
-F, --format string Output format - see help for details (default "p")
--hash h Use this hash when h is used in the format MD5|SHA-1|DropboxHash (default "md5")
-h, --help help for lsf
-R, --recursive Recurse into the listing
-s, --separator string Separator for the items in the format (default ";")
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone lsjson
List directories and objects in the path in JSON format.
Synopsis
List directories and objects in the path in JSON format.
The output is an array of Items, where each Item looks like this
{
"Hashes" : {
"SHA-1" : "f572d396fae9206628714fb2ce00f72e94f2258f",
"MD5" : "b1946ac92492d2347c6235b4d2611184",
"DropboxHash" : "ecb65bb98f9d905b70458986c39fcbad7715e5f2fcc3b1f07767d7c83e2438cc"
},
"ID": "y2djkhiujf83u33",
"OrigID": "UYOJVTUW00Q1RzTDA",
"IsBucket" : false,
"IsDir" : false,
"MimeType" : "application/octet-stream",
"ModTime" : "2017-05-31T16:15:57.034468261+01:00",
"Name" : "file.txt",
"Encrypted" : "v0qpsdq8anpci8n929v3uu9338",
"EncryptedPath" : "kja9098349023498/v0qpsdq8anpci8n929v3uu9338",
"Path" : "full/path/goes/here/file.txt",
"Size" : 6,
"Tier" : "hot",
}
If --hash is not specified the Hashes property won’t be emitted. The types of hash can be specified with
the --hash-type parameter (which may be repeated). If --hash-type is set then it implies --hash.
If --no-modtime is specified then ModTime will be blank. This can speed things up on remotes where
reading the ModTime takes an extra request (e.g. s3, swift).
If --no-mimetype is specified then MimeType will be blank. This can speed things up on remotes where
reading the MimeType takes an extra request (e.g. s3, swift).
If --encrypted is not specified the Encrypted won’t be emitted.
If --dirs-only is not specified files in addition to directories are returned
If --files-only is not specified directories in addition to the files will be returned.
If --metadata is set then an additional Metadata key will be returned. This will have metadata in rclone
standard format as a JSON object.
if --stat is set then a single JSON blob will be returned about the item pointed to. This will return an
error if the item isn’t found. However on bucket based backends (like s3, gcs, b2, azureblob etc) if the
item isn’t found it will return an empty directory as it isn’t possible to tell empty directories from
missing directories there.
The Path field will only show folders below the remote path being listed. If “remote:path” contains the
file “subfolder/file.txt”, the Path for “file.txt” will be “subfolder/file.txt”, not
“remote:path/subfolder/file.txt”. When used without --recursive the Path will always be the same as
Name.
If the directory is a bucket in a bucket-based backend, then “IsBucket” will be set to true. This key
won’t be present unless it is “true”.
The time is in RFC3339 format with up to nanosecond precision. The number of decimal digits in the
seconds will depend on the precision that the remote can hold the times, so if times are accurate to the
nearest millisecond (e.g. Google Drive) then 3 digits will always be shown
(“2017-05-31T16:15:57.034+01:00”) whereas if the times are accurate to the nearest second (Dropbox, Box,
WebDav, etc.) no digits will be shown (“2017-05-31T16:15:57+01:00”).
The whole output can be processed as a JSON blob, or alternatively it can be processed line by line as
each item is written one to a line.
Any of the filtering options can be applied to this command.
There are several related list commands
• ls to list size and path of objects only
• lsl to list modification time, size and path of objects only
• lsd to list directories only
• lsf to list objects and directories in easy to parse format
• lsjson to list objects and directories in JSON format
ls,lsl,lsd are designed to be human-readable. lsf is designed to be human and machine-readable. lsjson
is designed to be machine-readable.
Note that ls and lsl recurse by default - use --max-depth 1 to stop the recursion.
The other list commands lsd,lsf,lsjson do not recurse by default - use -R to make them recurse.
Listing a nonexistent directory will produce an error except for remotes which can’t have empty
directories (e.g. s3, swift, or gcs - the bucket-based remotes).
rclone lsjson remote:path [flags]
Options
--dirs-only Show only directories in the listing
--encrypted Show the encrypted names
--files-only Show only files in the listing
--hash Include hashes in the output (may take longer)
--hash-type stringArray Show only this hash type (may be repeated)
-h, --help help for lsjson
--no-mimetype Don't read the mime type (can speed things up)
--no-modtime Don't read the modification time (can speed things up)
--original Show the ID of the underlying Object
-R, --recursive Recurse into the listing
--stat Just return the info for the pointed to file
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone mount
Mount the remote as file system on a mountpoint.
Synopsis
rclone mount allows Linux, FreeBSD, macOS and Windows to mount any of Rclone’s cloud storage systems as a
file system with FUSE.
First set up your remote using rclone config. Check it works with rclone ls etc.
On Linux and macOS, you can run mount in either foreground or background (aka daemon) mode. Mount runs
in foreground mode by default. Use the --daemon flag to force background mode. On Windows you can run
mount in foreground only, the flag is ignored.
In background mode rclone acts as a generic Unix mount program: the main program starts, spawns
background rclone process to setup and maintain the mount, waits until success or timeout and exits with
appropriate code (killing the child process if it fails).
On Linux/macOS/FreeBSD start the mount like this, where /path/to/local/mount is an empty existing
directory:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files /path/to/local/mount
On Windows you can start a mount in different ways. See below for details. If foreground mount is used
interactively from a console window, rclone will serve the mount and occupy the console so another window
should be used to work with the mount until rclone is interrupted e.g. by pressing Ctrl-C.
The following examples will mount to an automatically assigned drive, to specific drive letter X:, to
path C:\path\parent\mount (where parent directory or drive must exist, and mount must not exist, and is
not supported when mounting as a network drive), and the last example will mount as network share
\\cloud\remote and map it to an automatically assigned drive:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files *
rclone mount remote:path/to/files X:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files C:\path\parent\mount
rclone mount remote:path/to/files \\cloud\remote
When the program ends while in foreground mode, either via Ctrl+C or receiving a SIGINT or SIGTERM
signal, the mount should be automatically stopped.
When running in background mode the user will have to stop the mount manually:
# Linux
fusermount -u /path/to/local/mount
# OS X
umount /path/to/local/mount
The umount operation can fail, for example when the mountpoint is busy. When that happens, it is the
user’s responsibility to stop the mount manually.
The size of the mounted file system will be set according to information retrieved from the remote, the
same as returned by the rclone about command. Remotes with unlimited storage may report the used size
only, then an additional 1 PiB of free space is assumed. If the remote does not support the about
feature at all, then 1 PiB is set as both the total and the free size.
Installing on Windows
To run rclone mount on Windows, you will need to download and install WinFsp.
WinFsp is an open-source Windows File System Proxy which makes it easy to write user space file systems
for Windows. It provides a FUSE emulation layer which rclone uses combination with cgofuse. Both of
these packages are by Bill Zissimopoulos who was very helpful during the implementation of rclone mount
for Windows.
Mounting modes on windows
Unlike other operating systems, Microsoft Windows provides a different filesystem type for network and
fixed drives. It optimises access on the assumption fixed disk drives are fast and reliable, while
network drives have relatively high latency and less reliability. Some settings can also be
differentiated between the two types, for example that Windows Explorer should just display icons and not
create preview thumbnails for image and video files on network drives.
In most cases, rclone will mount the remote as a normal, fixed disk drive by default. However, you can
also choose to mount it as a remote network drive, often described as a network share. If you mount an
rclone remote using the default, fixed drive mode and experience unexpected program errors, freezes or
other issues, consider mounting as a network drive instead.
When mounting as a fixed disk drive you can either mount to an unused drive letter, or to a path
representing a nonexistent subdirectory of an existing parent directory or drive. Using the special
value * will tell rclone to automatically assign the next available drive letter, starting with Z: and
moving backward. Examples:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files *
rclone mount remote:path/to/files X:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files C:\path\parent\mount
rclone mount remote:path/to/files X:
Option --volname can be used to set a custom volume name for the mounted file system. The default is to
use the remote name and path.
To mount as network drive, you can add option --network-mode to your mount command. Mounting to a
directory path is not supported in this mode, it is a limitation Windows imposes on junctions, so the
remote must always be mounted to a drive letter.
rclone mount remote:path/to/files X: --network-mode
A volume name specified with --volname will be used to create the network share path. A complete UNC
path, such as \\cloud\remote, optionally with path \\cloud\remote\madeup\path, will be used as is. Any
other string will be used as the share part, after a default prefix \\server\. If no volume name is
specified then \\server\share will be used. You must make sure the volume name is unique when you are
mounting more than one drive, or else the mount command will fail. The share name will treated as the
volume label for the mapped drive, shown in Windows Explorer etc, while the complete \\server\share will
be reported as the remote UNC path by net use etc, just like a normal network drive mapping.
If you specify a full network share UNC path with --volname, this will implicitly set the --network-mode
option, so the following two examples have same result:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files X: --network-mode
rclone mount remote:path/to/files X: --volname \\server\share
You may also specify the network share UNC path as the mountpoint itself. Then rclone will automatically
assign a drive letter, same as with * and use that as mountpoint, and instead use the UNC path specified
as the volume name, as if it were specified with the --volname option. This will also implicitly set the
--network-mode option. This means the following two examples have same result:
rclone mount remote:path/to/files \\cloud\remote
rclone mount remote:path/to/files * --volname \\cloud\remote
There is yet another way to enable network mode, and to set the share path, and that is to pass the
“native” libfuse/WinFsp option directly: --fuse-flag --VolumePrefix=\server\share. Note that the path
must be with just a single backslash prefix in this case.
Note: In previous versions of rclone this was the only supported method.
Read more about drive mapping
See also Limitations section below.
Windows filesystem permissions
The FUSE emulation layer on Windows must convert between the POSIX-based permission model used in FUSE,
and the permission model used in Windows, based on access-control lists (ACL).
The mounted filesystem will normally get three entries in its access-control list (ACL), representing
permissions for the POSIX permission scopes: Owner, group and others. By default, the owner and group
will be taken from the current user, and the built-in group “Everyone” will be used to represent others.
The user/group can be customized with FUSE options “UserName” and “GroupName”, e.g. -o UserName=user123
-o GroupName="Authenticated Users". The permissions on each entry will be set according to options
--dir-perms and --file-perms, which takes a value in traditional https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File-
system_permissions#Numeric_notation numeric notation.
The default permissions corresponds to --file-perms 0666 --dir-perms 0777, i.e. read and write
permissions to everyone. This means you will not be able to start any programs from the mount. To be
able to do that you must add execute permissions, e.g. --file-perms 0777 --dir-perms 0777 to add it to
everyone. If the program needs to write files, chances are you will have to enable VFS File Caching as
well (see also limitations).
Note that the mapping of permissions is not always trivial, and the result you see in Windows Explorer
may not be exactly like you expected. For example, when setting a value that includes write access, this
will be mapped to individual permissions “write attributes”, “write data” and “append data”, but not
“write extended attributes”. Windows will then show this as basic permission “Special” instead of
“Write”, because “Write” includes the “write extended attributes” permission.
If you set POSIX permissions for only allowing access to the owner, using --file-perms 0600 --dir-perms
0700, the user group and the built-in “Everyone” group will still be given some special permissions, such
as “read attributes” and “read permissions”, in Windows. This is done for compatibility reasons, e.g. to
allow users without additional permissions to be able to read basic metadata about files like in UNIX.
One case that may arise is that other programs (incorrectly) interprets this as the file being accessible
by everyone. For example an SSH client may warn about “unprotected private key file”.
WinFsp 2021 (version 1.9) introduces a new FUSE option “FileSecurity”, that allows the complete
specification of file security descriptors using https://docs.microsoft.com/en-
us/windows/win32/secauthz/security-descriptor-string-format SDDL. With this you can work around issues
such as the mentioned “unprotected private key file” by specifying -o FileSecurity="D:P(A;;FA;;;OW)", for
file all access (FA) to the owner (OW).
Windows caveats
Drives created as Administrator are not visible to other accounts, not even an account that was elevated
to Administrator with the User Account Control (UAC) feature. A result of this is that if you mount to a
drive letter from a Command Prompt run as Administrator, and then try to access the same drive from
Windows Explorer (which does not run as Administrator), you will not be able to see the mounted drive.
If you don’t need to access the drive from applications running with administrative privileges, the
easiest way around this is to always create the mount from a non-elevated command prompt.
To make mapped drives available to the user account that created them regardless if elevated or not,
there is a special Windows setting called https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/troubleshoot/windows-
client/networking/mapped-drives-not-available-from- elevated-command#detail-to-configure-the-en‐
ablelinkedconnections-registry-entry linked connections that can be enabled.
It is also possible to make a drive mount available to everyone on the system, by running the process
creating it as the built-in SYSTEM account. There are several ways to do this: One is to use the
command-line utility PsExec, from Microsoft’s Sysinternals suite, which has option -s to start processes
as the SYSTEM account. Another alternative is to run the mount command from a Windows Scheduled Task, or
a Windows Service, configured to run as the SYSTEM account. A third alternative is to use the
WinFsp.Launcher infrastructure). Note that when running rclone as another user, it will not use the
configuration file from your profile unless you tell it to with the --config option. Read more in the
install documentation.
Note that mapping to a directory path, instead of a drive letter, does not suffer from the same
limitations.
Limitations
Without the use of --vfs-cache-mode this can only write files sequentially, it can only seek when
reading. This means that many applications won’t work with their files on an rclone mount without
--vfs-cache-mode writes or --vfs-cache-mode full. See the VFS File Caching section for more info.
The bucket-based remotes (e.g. Swift, S3, Google Compute Storage, B2) do not support the concept of empty
directories, so empty directories will have a tendency to disappear once they fall out of the directory
cache.
When rclone mount is invoked on Unix with --daemon flag, the main rclone program will wait for the
background mount to become ready or until the timeout specified by the --daemon-wait flag. On Linux it
can check mount status using ProcFS so the flag in fact sets maximum time to wait, while the real wait
can be less. On macOS / BSD the time to wait is constant and the check is performed only at the end. We
advise you to set wait time on macOS reasonably.
Only supported on Linux, FreeBSD, OS X and Windows at the moment.
rclone mount vs rclone sync/copy
File systems expect things to be 100% reliable, whereas cloud storage systems are a long way from 100%
reliable. The rclone sync/copy commands cope with this with lots of retries. However rclone mount can’t
use retries in the same way without making local copies of the uploads. Look at the VFS File Caching for
solutions to make mount more reliable.
Attribute caching
You can use the flag --attr-timeout to set the time the kernel caches the attributes (size, modification
time, etc.) for directory entries.
The default is 1s which caches files just long enough to avoid too many callbacks to rclone from the
kernel.
In theory 0s should be the correct value for filesystems which can change outside the control of the
kernel. However this causes quite a few problems such as rclone using too much memory, rclone not
serving files to samba and excessive time listing directories.
The kernel can cache the info about a file for the time given by --attr-timeout. You may see corruption
if the remote file changes length during this window. It will show up as either a truncated file or a
file with garbage on the end. With --attr-timeout 1s this is very unlikely but not impossible. The
higher you set --attr-timeout the more likely it is. The default setting of “1s” is the lowest setting
which mitigates the problems above.
If you set it higher (10s or 1m say) then the kernel will call back to rclone less often making it more
efficient, however there is more chance of the corruption issue above.
If files don’t change on the remote outside of the control of rclone then there is no chance of
corruption.
This is the same as setting the attr_timeout option in mount.fuse.
Filters
Note that all the rclone filters can be used to select a subset of the files to be visible in the mount.
systemd
When running rclone mount as a systemd service, it is possible to use Type=notify. In this case the
service will enter the started state after the mountpoint has been successfully set up. Units having the
rclone mount service specified as a requirement will see all files and folders immediately in this mode.
Note that systemd runs mount units without any environment variables including PATH or HOME. This means
that tilde (~) expansion will not work and you should provide --config and --cache-dir explicitly as
absolute paths via rclone arguments. Since mounting requires the fusermount program, rclone will use the
fallback PATH of /bin:/usr/bin in this scenario. Please ensure that fusermount is present on this PATH.
Rclone as Unix mount helper
The core Unix program /bin/mount normally takes the -t FSTYPE argument then runs the /sbin/mount.FSTYPE
helper program passing it mount options as -o key=val,... or --opt=.... Automount (classic or systemd)
behaves in a similar way.
rclone by default expects GNU-style flags --key val. To run it as a mount helper you should symlink
rclone binary to /sbin/mount.rclone and optionally /usr/bin/rclonefs, e.g. ln -s /usr/bin/rclone
/sbin/mount.rclone. rclone will detect it and translate command-line arguments appropriately.
Now you can run classic mounts like this:
mount sftp1:subdir /mnt/data -t rclone -o vfs_cache_mode=writes,sftp_key_file=/path/to/pem
or create systemd mount units:
# /etc/systemd/system/mnt-data.mount
[Unit]
After=network-online.target
[Mount]
Type=rclone
What=sftp1:subdir
Where=/mnt/data
Options=rw,allow_other,args2env,vfs-cache-mode=writes,config=/etc/rclone.conf,cache-dir=/var/rclone
optionally accompanied by systemd automount unit
# /etc/systemd/system/mnt-data.automount
[Unit]
After=network-online.target
Before=remote-fs.target
[Automount]
Where=/mnt/data
TimeoutIdleSec=600
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
or add in /etc/fstab a line like
sftp1:subdir /mnt/data rclone rw,noauto,nofail,_netdev,x-systemd.automount,args2env,vfs_cache_mode=writes,config=/etc/rclone.conf,cache_dir=/var/cache/rclone 0 0
or use classic Automountd. Remember to provide explicit config=...,cache-dir=... as a workaround for
mount units being run without HOME.
Rclone in the mount helper mode will split -o argument(s) by comma, replace _ by - and prepend -- to get
the command-line flags. Options containing commas or spaces can be wrapped in single or double quotes.
Any inner quotes inside outer quotes of the same type should be doubled.
Mount option syntax includes a few extra options treated specially:
• env.NAME=VALUE will set an environment variable for the mount process. This helps with Automountd and
Systemd.mount which don’t allow setting custom environment for mount helpers. Typically you will use
env.HTTPS_PROXY=proxy.host:3128 or env.HOME=/root
• command=cmount can be used to run cmount or any other rclone command rather than the default mount.
• args2env will pass mount options to the mount helper running in background via environment variables
instead of command line arguments. This allows to hide secrets from such commands as ps or pgrep.
• vv... will be transformed into appropriate --verbose=N
• standard mount options like x-systemd.automount, _netdev, nosuid and alike are intended only for
Automountd and ignored by rclone.
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
rclone mount remote:path /path/to/mountpoint [flags]
Options
--allow-non-empty Allow mounting over a non-empty directory (not supported on Windows)
--allow-other Allow access to other users (not supported on Windows)
--allow-root Allow access to root user (not supported on Windows)
--async-read Use asynchronous reads (not supported on Windows) (default true)
--attr-timeout duration Time for which file/directory attributes are cached (default 1s)
--daemon Run mount in background and exit parent process (as background output is suppressed, use --log-file with --log-format=pid,... to monitor) (not supported on Windows)
--daemon-timeout duration Time limit for rclone to respond to kernel (not supported on Windows)
--daemon-wait duration Time to wait for ready mount from daemon (maximum time on Linux, constant sleep time on OSX/BSD) (not supported on Windows) (default 1m0s)
--debug-fuse Debug the FUSE internals - needs -v
--default-permissions Makes kernel enforce access control based on the file mode (not supported on Windows)
--devname string Set the device name - default is remote:path
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--fuse-flag stringArray Flags or arguments to be passed direct to libfuse/WinFsp (repeat if required)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for mount
--max-read-ahead SizeSuffix The number of bytes that can be prefetched for sequential reads (not supported on Windows) (default 128Ki)
--network-mode Mount as remote network drive, instead of fixed disk drive (supported on Windows only)
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--noappledouble Ignore Apple Double (._) and .DS_Store files (supported on OSX only) (default true)
--noapplexattr Ignore all "com.apple.*" extended attributes (supported on OSX only)
-o, --option stringArray Option for libfuse/WinFsp (repeat if required)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
--volname string Set the volume name (supported on Windows and OSX only)
--write-back-cache Makes kernel buffer writes before sending them to rclone (without this, writethrough caching is used) (not supported on Windows)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone moveto
Move file or directory from source to dest.
Synopsis
If source:path is a file or directory then it moves it to a file or directory named dest:path.
This can be used to rename files or upload single files to other than their existing name. If the source
is a directory then it acts exactly like the move command.
So
rclone moveto src dst
where src and dst are rclone paths, either remote:path or /path/to/local or C:.
This will:
if src is file
move it to dst, overwriting an existing file if it exists
if src is directory
move it to dst, overwriting existing files if they exist
see move command for full details
This doesn’t transfer files that are identical on src and dst, testing by size and modification time or
MD5SUM. src will be deleted on successful transfer.
Important: Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run or the --interactive/-i flag.
Note: Use the -P/--progress flag to view real-time transfer statistics.
rclone moveto source:path dest:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for moveto
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone ncdu
Explore a remote with a text based user interface.
Synopsis
This displays a text based user interface allowing the navigation of a remote. It is most useful for
answering the question - “What is using all my disk space?”.
To make the user interface it first scans the entire remote given and builds an in memory representation.
rclone ncdu can be used during this scanning phase and you will see it building up the directory
structure as it goes along.
You can interact with the user interface using key presses, press `?' to toggle the help on and off. The
supported keys are:
↑,↓ or k,j to Move
→,l to enter
←,h to return
c toggle counts
g toggle graph
a toggle average size in directory
u toggle human-readable format
n,s,C,A sort by name,size,count,average size
d delete file/directory
v select file/directory
V enter visual select mode
D delete selected files/directories
y copy current path to clipboard
Y display current path
^L refresh screen (fix screen corruption)
? to toggle help on and off
q/ESC/^c to quit
Listed files/directories may be prefixed by a one-character flag, some of them combined with a
description in brackets at end of line. These flags have the following meaning:
e means this is an empty directory, i.e. contains no files (but
may contain empty subdirectories)
~ means this is a directory where some of the files (possibly in
subdirectories) have unknown size, and therefore the directory
size may be underestimated (and average size inaccurate, as it
is average of the files with known sizes).
. means an error occurred while reading a subdirectory, and
therefore the directory size may be underestimated (and average
size inaccurate)
! means an error occurred while reading this directory
This an homage to the ncdu tool but for rclone remotes. It is missing lots of features at the moment but
is useful as it stands.
Note that it might take some time to delete big files/directories. The UI won’t respond in the meantime
since the deletion is done synchronously.
For a non-interactive listing of the remote, see the tree command. To just get the total size of the
remote you can also use the size command.
rclone ncdu remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for ncdu
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone obscure
Obscure password for use in the rclone config file.
Synopsis
In the rclone config file, human-readable passwords are obscured. Obscuring them is done by encrypting
them and writing them out in base64. This is not a secure way of encrypting these passwords as rclone
can decrypt them - it is to prevent “eyedropping” - namely someone seeing a password in the rclone config
file by accident.
Many equally important things (like access tokens) are not obscured in the config file. However it is
very hard to shoulder surf a 64 character hex token.
This command can also accept a password through STDIN instead of an argument by passing a hyphen as an
argument. This will use the first line of STDIN as the password not including the trailing newline.
echo "secretpassword" | rclone obscure -
If there is no data on STDIN to read, rclone obscure will default to obfuscating the hyphen itself.
If you want to encrypt the config file then please use config file encryption - see rclone config for
more info.
rclone obscure password [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for obscure
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone rc
Run a command against a running rclone.
Synopsis
This runs a command against a running rclone. Use the --url flag to specify an non default URL to
connect on. This can be either a “:port” which is taken to mean “http://localhost:port” or a “host:port”
which is taken to mean “http://host:port”
A username and password can be passed in with --user and --pass.
Note that --rc-addr, --rc-user, --rc-pass will be read also for --url, --user, --pass.
Arguments should be passed in as parameter=value.
The result will be returned as a JSON object by default.
The --json parameter can be used to pass in a JSON blob as an input instead of key=value arguments. This
is the only way of passing in more complicated values.
The -o/--opt option can be used to set a key “opt” with key, value options in the form -o key=value or -o
key. It can be repeated as many times as required. This is useful for rc commands which take the “opt”
parameter which by convention is a dictionary of strings.
-o key=value -o key2
Will place this in the “opt” value
{"key":"value", "key2","")
The -a/--arg option can be used to set strings in the “arg” value. It can be repeated as many times as
required. This is useful for rc commands which take the “arg” parameter which by convention is a list of
strings.
-a value -a value2
Will place this in the “arg” value
["value", "value2"]
Use --loopback to connect to the rclone instance running rclone rc. This is very useful for testing
commands without having to run an rclone rc server, e.g.:
rclone rc --loopback operations/about fs=/
Use rclone rc to see a list of all possible commands.
rclone rc commands parameter [flags]
Options
-a, --arg stringArray Argument placed in the "arg" array
-h, --help help for rc
--json string Input JSON - use instead of key=value args
--loopback If set connect to this rclone instance not via HTTP
--no-output If set, don't output the JSON result
-o, --opt stringArray Option in the form name=value or name placed in the "opt" array
--pass string Password to use to connect to rclone remote control
--url string URL to connect to rclone remote control (default "http://localhost:5572/")
--user string Username to use to rclone remote control
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone rcat
Copies standard input to file on remote.
Synopsis
rclone rcat reads from standard input (stdin) and copies it to a single remote file.
echo "hello world" | rclone rcat remote:path/to/file
ffmpeg - | rclone rcat remote:path/to/file
If the remote file already exists, it will be overwritten.
rcat will try to upload small files in a single request, which is usually more efficient than the
streaming/chunked upload endpoints, which use multiple requests. Exact behaviour depends on the remote.
What is considered a small file may be set through --streaming-upload-cutoff. Uploading only starts
after the cutoff is reached or if the file ends before that. The data must fit into RAM. The cutoff
needs to be small enough to adhere the limits of your remote, please see there. Generally speaking,
setting this cutoff too high will decrease your performance.
Use the --size flag to preallocate the file in advance at the remote end and actually stream it, even if
remote backend doesn’t support streaming.
--size should be the exact size of the input stream in bytes. If the size of the stream is different in
length to the --size passed in then the transfer will likely fail.
Note that the upload can also not be retried because the data is not kept around until the upload
succeeds. If you need to transfer a lot of data, you’re better off caching locally and then rclone move
it to the destination.
rclone rcat remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for rcat
--size int File size hint to preallocate (default -1)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone rcd
Run rclone listening to remote control commands only.
Synopsis
This runs rclone so that it only listens to remote control commands.
This is useful if you are controlling rclone via the rc API.
If you pass in a path to a directory, rclone will serve that directory for GET requests on the URL passed
in. It will also open the URL in the browser when rclone is run.
See the rc documentation for more info on the rc flags.
rclone rcd <path to files to serve>* [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for rcd
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone rmdirs
Remove empty directories under the path.
Synopsis
This recursively removes any empty directories (including directories that only contain empty
directories), that it finds under the path. The root path itself will also be removed if it is empty,
unless you supply the --leave-root flag.
Use command rmdir to delete just the empty directory given by path, not recurse.
This is useful for tidying up remotes that rclone has left a lot of empty directories in. For example
the delete command will delete files but leave the directory structure (unless used with option
--rmdirs).
To delete a path and any objects in it, use purge command.
rclone rmdirs remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for rmdirs
--leave-root Do not remove root directory if empty
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone selfupdate
Update the rclone binary.
Synopsis
This command downloads the latest release of rclone and replaces the currently running binary. The
download is verified with a hashsum and cryptographically signed signature.
If used without flags (or with implied --stable flag), this command will install the latest stable
release. However, some issues may be fixed (or features added) only in the latest beta release. In such
cases you should run the command with the --beta flag, i.e. rclone selfupdate --beta. You can check in
advance what version would be installed by adding the --check flag, then repeat the command without it
when you are satisfied.
Sometimes the rclone team may recommend you a concrete beta or stable rclone release to troubleshoot your
issue or add a bleeding edge feature. The --version VER flag, if given, will update to the concrete
version instead of the latest one. If you omit micro version from VER (for example 1.53), the latest
matching micro version will be used.
Upon successful update rclone will print a message that contains a previous version number. You will
need it if you later decide to revert your update for some reason. Then you’ll have to note the previous
version and run the following command: rclone selfupdate [--beta] OLDVER. If the old version contains
only dots and digits (for example v1.54.0) then it’s a stable release so you won’t need the --beta flag.
Beta releases have an additional information similar to v1.54.0-beta.5111.06f1c0c61. (if you are a
developer and use a locally built rclone, the version number will end with -DEV, you will have to rebuild
it as it obviously can’t be distributed).
If you previously installed rclone via a package manager, the package may include local documentation or
configure services. You may wish to update with the flag --package deb or --package rpm (whichever is
correct for your OS) to update these too. This command with the default --package zip will update only
the rclone executable so the local manual may become inaccurate after it.
The rclone mount command (https://rclone.org/commands/rclone_mount/) may or may not support extended FUSE
options depending on the build and OS. selfupdate will refuse to update if the capability would be
discarded.
Note: Windows forbids deletion of a currently running executable so this command will rename the old
executable to `rclone.old.exe' upon success.
Please note that this command was not available before rclone version 1.55. If it fails for you with the
message unknown command "selfupdate" then you will need to update manually following the install
instructions located at https://rclone.org/install/
rclone selfupdate [flags]
Options
--beta Install beta release
--check Check for latest release, do not download
-h, --help help for selfupdate
--output string Save the downloaded binary at a given path (default: replace running binary)
--package string Package format: zip|deb|rpm (default: zip)
--stable Install stable release (this is the default)
--version string Install the given rclone version (default: latest)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone serve
Serve a remote over a protocol.
Synopsis
Serve a remote over a given protocol. Requires the use of a subcommand to specify the protocol, e.g.
rclone serve http remote:
Each subcommand has its own options which you can see in their help.
rclone serve <protocol> [opts] <remote> [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for serve
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
• rclone serve dlna - Serve remote:path over DLNA
• rclone serve docker - Serve any remote on docker’s volume plugin API.
• rclone serve ftp - Serve remote:path over FTP.
• rclone serve http - Serve the remote over HTTP.
• rclone serve restic - Serve the remote for restic’s REST API.
• rclone serve sftp - Serve the remote over SFTP.
• rclone serve webdav - Serve remote:path over WebDAV.
rclone serve dlna
Serve remote:path over DLNA
Synopsis
Run a DLNA media server for media stored in an rclone remote. Many devices, such as the Xbox and
PlayStation, can automatically discover this server in the LAN and play audio/video from it. VLC is also
supported. Service discovery uses UDP multicast packets (SSDP) and will thus only work on LANs.
Rclone will list all files present in the remote, without filtering based on media formats or file
extensions. Additionally, there is no media transcoding support. This means that some players might
show files that they are not able to play back correctly.
Server options
Use --addr to specify which IP address and port the server should listen on, e.g. --addr 1.2.3.4:8000 or
--addr :8080 to listen to all IPs.
Use --name to choose the friendly server name, which is by default “rclone (hostname)”.
Use --log-trace in conjunction with -vv to enable additional debug logging of all UPNP traffic.
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
rclone serve dlna remote:path [flags]
Options
--addr string The ip:port or :port to bind the DLNA http server to (default ":7879")
--announce-interval duration The interval between SSDP announcements (default 12m0s)
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for dlna
--interface stringArray The interface to use for SSDP (repeat as necessary)
--log-trace Enable trace logging of SOAP traffic
--name string Name of DLNA server
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone serve docker
Serve any remote on docker’s volume plugin API.
Synopsis
This command implements the Docker volume plugin API allowing docker to use rclone as a data storage
mechanism for various cloud providers. rclone provides docker volume plugin based on it.
To create a docker plugin, one must create a Unix or TCP socket that Docker will look for when you use
the plugin and then it listens for commands from docker daemon and runs the corresponding code when
necessary. Docker plugins can run as a managed plugin under control of the docker daemon or as an
independent native service. For testing, you can just run it directly from the command line, for
example:
sudo rclone serve docker --base-dir /tmp/rclone-volumes --socket-addr localhost:8787 -vv
Running rclone serve docker will create the said socket, listening for commands from Docker to create the
necessary Volumes. Normally you need not give the --socket-addr flag. The API will listen on the unix
domain socket at /run/docker/plugins/rclone.sock. In the example above rclone will create a TCP socket
and a small file /etc/docker/plugins/rclone.spec containing the socket address. We use sudo because both
paths are writeable only by the root user.
If you later decide to change listening socket, the docker daemon must be restarted to reconnect to
/run/docker/plugins/rclone.sock or parse new /etc/docker/plugins/rclone.spec. Until you restart, any
volume related docker commands will timeout trying to access the old socket. Running directly is
supported on Linux only, not on Windows or MacOS. This is not a problem with managed plugin mode
described in details in the full documentation.
The command will create volume mounts under the path given by --base-dir (by default
/var/lib/docker-volumes/rclone available only to root) and maintain the JSON formatted file
docker-plugin.state in the rclone cache directory with book-keeping records of created and mounted
volumes.
All mount and VFS options are submitted by the docker daemon via API, but you can also provide defaults
on the command line as well as set path to the config file and cache directory or adjust logging
verbosity.
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
rclone serve docker [flags]
Options
--allow-non-empty Allow mounting over a non-empty directory (not supported on Windows)
--allow-other Allow access to other users (not supported on Windows)
--allow-root Allow access to root user (not supported on Windows)
--async-read Use asynchronous reads (not supported on Windows) (default true)
--attr-timeout duration Time for which file/directory attributes are cached (default 1s)
--base-dir string Base directory for volumes (default "/var/lib/docker-volumes/rclone")
--daemon Run mount in background and exit parent process (as background output is suppressed, use --log-file with --log-format=pid,... to monitor) (not supported on Windows)
--daemon-timeout duration Time limit for rclone to respond to kernel (not supported on Windows)
--daemon-wait duration Time to wait for ready mount from daemon (maximum time on Linux, constant sleep time on OSX/BSD) (not supported on Windows) (default 1m0s)
--debug-fuse Debug the FUSE internals - needs -v
--default-permissions Makes kernel enforce access control based on the file mode (not supported on Windows)
--devname string Set the device name - default is remote:path
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--forget-state Skip restoring previous state
--fuse-flag stringArray Flags or arguments to be passed direct to libfuse/WinFsp (repeat if required)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for docker
--max-read-ahead SizeSuffix The number of bytes that can be prefetched for sequential reads (not supported on Windows) (default 128Ki)
--network-mode Mount as remote network drive, instead of fixed disk drive (supported on Windows only)
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--no-spec Do not write spec file
--noappledouble Ignore Apple Double (._) and .DS_Store files (supported on OSX only) (default true)
--noapplexattr Ignore all "com.apple.*" extended attributes (supported on OSX only)
-o, --option stringArray Option for libfuse/WinFsp (repeat if required)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--socket-addr string Address <host:port> or absolute path (default: /run/docker/plugins/rclone.sock)
--socket-gid int GID for unix socket (default: current process GID) (default 1000)
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
--volname string Set the volume name (supported on Windows and OSX only)
--write-back-cache Makes kernel buffer writes before sending them to rclone (without this, writethrough caching is used) (not supported on Windows)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone serve ftp
Serve remote:path over FTP.
Synopsis
Run a basic FTP server to serve a remote over FTP protocol. This can be viewed with a FTP client or you
can make a remote of type FTP to read and write it.
Server options
Use –addr to specify which IP address and port the server should listen on, e.g. –addr 1.2.3.4:8000 or
–addr :8080 to listen to all IPs. By default it only listens on localhost. You can use port :0 to let
the OS choose an available port.
If you set –addr to listen on a public or LAN accessible IP address then using Authentication is advised
- see the next section for info.
Authentication
By default this will serve files without needing a login.
You can set a single username and password with the –user and –pass flags.
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
Auth Proxy
If you supply the parameter --auth-proxy /path/to/program then rclone will use that program to generate
backends on the fly which then are used to authenticate incoming requests. This uses a simple JSON based
protocol with input on STDIN and output on STDOUT.
PLEASE NOTE: --auth-proxy and --authorized-keys cannot be used together, if --auth-proxy is set the
authorized keys option will be ignored.
There is an example program bin/test_proxy.py in the rclone source code.
The program’s job is to take a user and pass on the input and turn those into the config for a backend on
STDOUT in JSON format. This config will have any default parameters for the backend added, but it won’t
use configuration from environment variables or command line options - it is the job of the proxy program
to make a complete config.
This config generated must have this extra parameter - _root - root to use for the backend
And it may have this parameter - _obscure - comma separated strings for parameters to obscure
If password authentication was used by the client, input to the proxy process (on STDIN) would look
similar to this:
{
"user": "me",
"pass": "mypassword"
}
If public-key authentication was used by the client, input to the proxy process (on STDIN) would look
similar to this:
{
"user": "me",
"public_key": "AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQDuwESFdAe14hVS6omeyX7edc...JQdf"
}
And as an example return this on STDOUT
{
"type": "sftp",
"_root": "",
"_obscure": "pass",
"user": "me",
"pass": "mypassword",
"host": "sftp.example.com"
}
This would mean that an SFTP backend would be created on the fly for the user and pass/public_key
returned in the output to the host given. Note that since _obscure is set to pass, rclone will obscure
the pass parameter before creating the backend (which is required for sftp backends).
The program can manipulate the supplied user in any way, for example to make proxy to many different sftp
backends, you could make the user be user@example.com and then set the host to example.com in the output
and the user to user. For security you’d probably want to restrict the host to a limited list.
Note that an internal cache is keyed on user so only use that for configuration, don’t use pass or
public_key. This also means that if a user’s password or public-key is changed the cache will need to
expire (which takes 5 mins) before it takes effect.
This can be used to build general purpose proxies to any kind of backend that rclone supports.
rclone serve ftp remote:path [flags]
Options
--addr string IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to (default "localhost:2121")
--auth-proxy string A program to use to create the backend from the auth
--cert string TLS PEM key (concatenation of certificate and CA certificate)
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for ftp
--key string TLS PEM Private key
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--pass string Password for authentication (empty value allow every password)
--passive-port string Passive port range to use (default "30000-32000")
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--public-ip string Public IP address to advertise for passive connections
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--user string User name for authentication (default "anonymous")
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone serve http
Serve the remote over HTTP.
Synopsis
Run a basic web server to serve a remote over HTTP. This can be viewed in a web browser or you can make
a remote of type http read from it.
You can use the filter flags (e.g. --include, --exclude) to control what is served.
The server will log errors. Use -v to see access logs.
--bwlimit will be respected for file transfers. Use --stats to control the stats printing.
Server options
Use --addr to specify which IP address and port the server should listen on, eg --addr 1.2.3.4:8000 or
--addr :8080 to listen to all IPs. By default it only listens on localhost. You can use port :0 to let
the OS choose an available port.
If you set --addr to listen on a public or LAN accessible IP address then using Authentication is advised
- see the next section for info.
--server-read-timeout and --server-write-timeout can be used to control the timeouts on the server. Note
that this is the total time for a transfer.
--max-header-bytes controls the maximum number of bytes the server will accept in the HTTP header.
--baseurl controls the URL prefix that rclone serves from. By default rclone will serve from the root.
If you used --baseurl "/rclone" then rclone would serve from a URL starting with “/rclone/”. This is
useful if you wish to proxy rclone serve. Rclone automatically inserts leading and trailing “/” on
--baseurl, so --baseurl "rclone", --baseurl "/rclone" and --baseurl "/rclone/" are all treated
identically.
SSL/TLS
By default this will serve over http. If you want you can serve over https. You will need to supply the
--cert and --key flags. If you wish to do client side certificate validation then you will need to
supply --client-ca also.
--cert should be a either a PEM encoded certificate or a concatenation of that with the CA certificate.
--key should be the PEM encoded private key and --client-ca should be the PEM encoded client certificate
authority certificate.
–min-tls-version is minimum TLS version that is acceptable. Valid values are “tls1.0”, “tls1.1”,
“tls1.2” and “tls1.3” (default “tls1.0”).
Template
--template allows a user to specify a custom markup template for HTTP and WebDAV serve functions. The
server exports the following markup to be used within the template to server pages:
Parameter Description
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
.Name The full path of a file/directory.
.Title Directory listing of .Name
.Sort The current sort used. This is
changeable via ?sort= parameter
Sort Options:
namedirfirst,name,size,time
(default namedirfirst)
.Order The current ordering used. This is
changeable via ?order= parameter
Order Options: asc,desc (default
asc)
.Query Currently unused.
.Breadcrumb Allows for creating a relative
navigation
– .Link The relative to the root link of
the Text.
– .Text The Name of the directory.
.Entries Information about a specific
file/directory.
– .URL The `url' of an entry.
– .Leaf Currently same as `URL' but
intended to be `just' the name.
– .IsDir Boolean for if an entry is a
directory or not.
– .Size Size in Bytes of the entry.
– .ModTime The UTC timestamp of an entry.
Authentication
By default this will serve files without needing a login.
You can either use an htpasswd file which can take lots of users, or set a single username and password
with the --user and --pass flags.
Use --htpasswd /path/to/htpasswd to provide an htpasswd file. This is in standard apache format and
supports MD5, SHA1 and BCrypt for basic authentication. Bcrypt is recommended.
To create an htpasswd file:
touch htpasswd
htpasswd -B htpasswd user
htpasswd -B htpasswd anotherUser
The password file can be updated while rclone is running.
Use --realm to set the authentication realm.
Use --salt to change the password hashing salt from the default.
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
rclone serve http remote:path [flags]
Options
--addr string IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to (default "127.0.0.1:8080")
--baseurl string Prefix for URLs - leave blank for root
--cert string SSL PEM key (concatenation of certificate and CA certificate)
--client-ca string Client certificate authority to verify clients with
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for http
--htpasswd string A htpasswd file - if not provided no authentication is done
--key string SSL PEM Private key
--max-header-bytes int Maximum size of request header (default 4096)
--min-tls-version string Minimum TLS version that is acceptable (default "tls1.0")
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--pass string Password for authentication
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--realm string Realm for authentication
--salt string Password hashing salt (default "dlPL2MqE")
--server-read-timeout duration Timeout for server reading data (default 1h0m0s)
--server-write-timeout duration Timeout for server writing data (default 1h0m0s)
--template string User-specified template
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--user string User name for authentication
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone serve restic
Serve the remote for restic’s REST API.
Synopsis
Run a basic web server to serve a remove over restic’s REST backend API over HTTP. This allows restic to
use rclone as a data storage mechanism for cloud providers that restic does not support directly.
Restic is a command-line program for doing backups.
The server will log errors. Use -v to see access logs.
--bwlimit will be respected for file transfers. Use --stats to control the stats printing.
Setting up rclone for use by restic
First set up a remote for your chosen cloud provider.
Once you have set up the remote, check it is working with, for example “rclone lsd remote:”. You may
have called the remote something other than “remote:” - just substitute whatever you called it in the
following instructions.
Now start the rclone restic server
rclone serve restic -v remote:backup
Where you can replace “backup” in the above by whatever path in the remote you wish to use.
By default this will serve on “localhost:8080” you can change this with use of the --addr flag.
You might wish to start this server on boot.
Adding --cache-objects=false will cause rclone to stop caching objects returned from the List call.
Caching is normally desirable as it speeds up downloading objects, saves transactions and uses very
little memory.
Setting up restic to use rclone
Now you can http://restic.readthedocs.io/en/latest/030_preparing_a_new_repo.html#rest-server follow the
restic in‐ structions on setting up restic.
Note that you will need restic 0.8.2 or later to interoperate with rclone.
For the example above you will want to use “http://localhost:8080/” as the URL for the REST server.
For example:
$ export RESTIC_REPOSITORY=rest:http://localhost:8080/
$ export RESTIC_PASSWORD=yourpassword
$ restic init
created restic backend 8b1a4b56ae at rest:http://localhost:8080/
Please note that knowledge of your password is required to access
the repository. Losing your password means that your data is
irrecoverably lost.
$ restic backup /path/to/files/to/backup
scan [/path/to/files/to/backup]
scanned 189 directories, 312 files in 0:00
[0:00] 100.00% 38.128 MiB / 38.128 MiB 501 / 501 items 0 errors ETA 0:00
duration: 0:00
snapshot 45c8fdd8 saved
Multiple repositories
Note that you can use the endpoint to host multiple repositories. Do this by adding a directory name or
path after the URL. Note that these must end with /. Eg
$ export RESTIC_REPOSITORY=rest:http://localhost:8080/user1repo/
# backup user1 stuff
$ export RESTIC_REPOSITORY=rest:http://localhost:8080/user2repo/
# backup user2 stuff
Private repositories
The--private-repos flag can be used to limit users to repositories starting with a path of /<username>/.
Server options
Use --addr to specify which IP address and port the server should listen on, e.g. --addr 1.2.3.4:8000 or
--addr :8080 to listen to all IPs. By default it only listens on localhost. You can use port :0 to let
the OS choose an available port.
If you set --addr to listen on a public or LAN accessible IP address then using Authentication is advised
- see the next section for info.
--server-read-timeout and --server-write-timeout can be used to control the timeouts on the server. Note
that this is the total time for a transfer.
--max-header-bytes controls the maximum number of bytes the server will accept in the HTTP header.
--baseurl controls the URL prefix that rclone serves from. By default rclone will serve from the root.
If you used --baseurl "/rclone" then rclone would serve from a URL starting with “/rclone/”. This is
useful if you wish to proxy rclone serve. Rclone automatically inserts leading and trailing “/” on
--baseurl, so --baseurl "rclone", --baseurl "/rclone" and --baseurl "/rclone/" are all treated
identically.
--template allows a user to specify a custom markup template for HTTP and WebDAV serve functions. The
server exports the following markup to be used within the template to server pages:
Parameter Description
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
.Name The full path of a file/directory.
.Title Directory listing of .Name
.Sort The current sort used. This is
changeable via ?sort= parameter
Sort Options:
namedirfirst,name,size,time
(default namedirfirst)
.Order The current ordering used. This is
changeable via ?order= parameter
Order Options: asc,desc (default
asc)
.Query Currently unused.
.Breadcrumb Allows for creating a relative
navigation
– .Link The relative to the root link of
the Text.
– .Text The Name of the directory.
.Entries Information about a specific
file/directory.
– .URL The `url' of an entry.
– .Leaf Currently same as `URL' but
intended to be `just' the name.
– .IsDir Boolean for if an entry is a
directory or not.
– .Size Size in Bytes of the entry.
– .ModTime The UTC timestamp of an entry.
Authentication
By default this will serve files without needing a login.
You can either use an htpasswd file which can take lots of users, or set a single username and password
with the --user and --pass flags.
Use --htpasswd /path/to/htpasswd to provide an htpasswd file. This is in standard apache format and
supports MD5, SHA1 and BCrypt for basic authentication. Bcrypt is recommended.
To create an htpasswd file:
touch htpasswd
htpasswd -B htpasswd user
htpasswd -B htpasswd anotherUser
The password file can be updated while rclone is running.
Use --realm to set the authentication realm.
SSL/TLS
By default this will serve over HTTP. If you want you can serve over HTTPS. You will need to supply the
--cert and --key flags. If you wish to do client side certificate validation then you will need to
supply --client-ca also.
--cert should be either a PEM encoded certificate or a concatenation of that with the CA certificate.
--key should be the PEM encoded private key and --client-ca should be the PEM encoded client certificate
authority certificate.
–min-tls-version is minimum TLS version that is acceptable. Valid values are “tls1.0”, “tls1.1”,
“tls1.2” and “tls1.3” (default “tls1.0”).
rclone serve restic remote:path [flags]
Options
--addr string IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to (default "localhost:8080")
--append-only Disallow deletion of repository data
--baseurl string Prefix for URLs - leave blank for root
--cache-objects Cache listed objects (default true)
--cert string SSL PEM key (concatenation of certificate and CA certificate)
--client-ca string Client certificate authority to verify clients with
-h, --help help for restic
--htpasswd string htpasswd file - if not provided no authentication is done
--key string SSL PEM Private key
--max-header-bytes int Maximum size of request header (default 4096)
--min-tls-version string Minimum TLS version that is acceptable (default "tls1.0")
--pass string Password for authentication
--private-repos Users can only access their private repo
--realm string Realm for authentication (default "rclone")
--server-read-timeout duration Timeout for server reading data (default 1h0m0s)
--server-write-timeout duration Timeout for server writing data (default 1h0m0s)
--stdio Run an HTTP2 server on stdin/stdout
--template string User-specified template
--user string User name for authentication
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone serve sftp
Serve the remote over SFTP.
Synopsis
Run an SFTP server to serve a remote over SFTP. This can be used with an SFTP client or you can make a
remote of type sftp to use with it.
You can use the filter flags (e.g. --include, --exclude) to control what is served.
The server will respond to a small number of shell commands, mainly md5sum, sha1sum and df, which enable
it to provide support for checksums and the about feature when accessed from an sftp remote.
Note that this server uses standard 32 KiB packet payload size, which means you must not configure the
client to expect anything else, e.g. with the chunk_size option on an sftp remote.
The server will log errors. Use -v to see access logs.
--bwlimit will be respected for file transfers. Use --stats to control the stats printing.
You must provide some means of authentication, either with --user/--pass, an authorized keys file
(specify location with --authorized-keys - the default is the same as ssh), an --auth-proxy, or set the
--no-auth flag for no authentication when logging in.
If you don’t supply a host --key then rclone will generate rsa, ecdsa and ed25519 variants, and cache
them for later use in rclone’s cache directory (see rclone help flags cache-dir) in the “serve-sftp”
directory.
By default the server binds to localhost:2022 - if you want it to be reachable externally then supply
--addr :2022 for example.
Note that the default of --vfs-cache-mode off is fine for the rclone sftp backend, but it may not be with
other SFTP clients.
If --stdio is specified, rclone will serve SFTP over stdio, which can be used with sshd via
~/.ssh/authorized_keys, for example:
restrict,command="rclone serve sftp --stdio ./photos" ssh-rsa ...
On the client you need to set --transfers 1 when using --stdio. Otherwise multiple instances of the
rclone server are started by OpenSSH which can lead to “corrupted on transfer” errors. This is the case
because the client chooses indiscriminately which server to send commands to while the servers all have
different views of the state of the filing system.
The “restrict” in authorized_keys prevents SHA1SUMs and MD5SUMs from beeing used. Omitting “restrict”
and using --sftp-path-override to enable checksumming is possible but less secure and you could use the
SFTP server provided by OpenSSH in this case.
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
Auth Proxy
If you supply the parameter --auth-proxy /path/to/program then rclone will use that program to generate
backends on the fly which then are used to authenticate incoming requests. This uses a simple JSON based
protocol with input on STDIN and output on STDOUT.
PLEASE NOTE: --auth-proxy and --authorized-keys cannot be used together, if --auth-proxy is set the
authorized keys option will be ignored.
There is an example program bin/test_proxy.py in the rclone source code.
The program’s job is to take a user and pass on the input and turn those into the config for a backend on
STDOUT in JSON format. This config will have any default parameters for the backend added, but it won’t
use configuration from environment variables or command line options - it is the job of the proxy program
to make a complete config.
This config generated must have this extra parameter - _root - root to use for the backend
And it may have this parameter - _obscure - comma separated strings for parameters to obscure
If password authentication was used by the client, input to the proxy process (on STDIN) would look
similar to this:
{
"user": "me",
"pass": "mypassword"
}
If public-key authentication was used by the client, input to the proxy process (on STDIN) would look
similar to this:
{
"user": "me",
"public_key": "AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQDuwESFdAe14hVS6omeyX7edc...JQdf"
}
And as an example return this on STDOUT
{
"type": "sftp",
"_root": "",
"_obscure": "pass",
"user": "me",
"pass": "mypassword",
"host": "sftp.example.com"
}
This would mean that an SFTP backend would be created on the fly for the user and pass/public_key
returned in the output to the host given. Note that since _obscure is set to pass, rclone will obscure
the pass parameter before creating the backend (which is required for sftp backends).
The program can manipulate the supplied user in any way, for example to make proxy to many different sftp
backends, you could make the user be user@example.com and then set the host to example.com in the output
and the user to user. For security you’d probably want to restrict the host to a limited list.
Note that an internal cache is keyed on user so only use that for configuration, don’t use pass or
public_key. This also means that if a user’s password or public-key is changed the cache will need to
expire (which takes 5 mins) before it takes effect.
This can be used to build general purpose proxies to any kind of backend that rclone supports.
rclone serve sftp remote:path [flags]
Options
--addr string IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to (default "localhost:2022")
--auth-proxy string A program to use to create the backend from the auth
--authorized-keys string Authorized keys file (default "~/.ssh/authorized_keys")
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for sftp
--key stringArray SSH private host key file (Can be multi-valued, leave blank to auto generate)
--no-auth Allow connections with no authentication if set
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--pass string Password for authentication
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--stdio Run an sftp server on stdin/stdout
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--user string User name for authentication
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone serve webdav
Serve remote:path over WebDAV.
Synopsis
Run a basic WebDAV server to serve a remote over HTTP via the WebDAV protocol. This can be viewed with a
WebDAV client, through a web browser, or you can make a remote of type WebDAV to read and write it.
WebDAV options
–etag-hash
This controls the ETag header. Without this flag the ETag will be based on the ModTime and Size of the
object.
If this flag is set to “auto” then rclone will choose the first supported hash on the backend or you can
use a named hash such as “MD5” or “SHA-1”. Use the hashsum command to see the full list.
Server options
Use --addr to specify which IP address and port the server should listen on, e.g. --addr 1.2.3.4:8000 or
--addr :8080 to listen to all IPs. By default it only listens on localhost. You can use port :0 to let
the OS choose an available port.
If you set --addr to listen on a public or LAN accessible IP address then using Authentication is advised
- see the next section for info.
--server-read-timeout and --server-write-timeout can be used to control the timeouts on the server. Note
that this is the total time for a transfer.
--max-header-bytes controls the maximum number of bytes the server will accept in the HTTP header.
--baseurl controls the URL prefix that rclone serves from. By default rclone will serve from the root.
If you used --baseurl "/rclone" then rclone would serve from a URL starting with “/rclone/”. This is
useful if you wish to proxy rclone serve. Rclone automatically inserts leading and trailing “/” on
--baseurl, so --baseurl "rclone", --baseurl "/rclone" and --baseurl "/rclone/" are all treated
identically.
--template allows a user to specify a custom markup template for HTTP and WebDAV serve functions. The
server exports the following markup to be used within the template to server pages:
Parameter Description
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
.Name The full path of a file/directory.
.Title Directory listing of .Name
.Sort The current sort used. This is
changeable via ?sort= parameter
Sort Options:
namedirfirst,name,size,time
(default namedirfirst)
.Order The current ordering used. This is
changeable via ?order= parameter
Order Options: asc,desc (default
asc)
.Query Currently unused.
.Breadcrumb Allows for creating a relative
navigation
– .Link The relative to the root link of
the Text.
– .Text The Name of the directory.
.Entries Information about a specific
file/directory.
– .URL The `url' of an entry.
– .Leaf Currently same as `URL' but
intended to be `just' the name.
– .IsDir Boolean for if an entry is a
directory or not.
– .Size Size in Bytes of the entry.
– .ModTime The UTC timestamp of an entry.
Authentication
By default this will serve files without needing a login.
You can either use an htpasswd file which can take lots of users, or set a single username and password
with the --user and --pass flags.
Use --htpasswd /path/to/htpasswd to provide an htpasswd file. This is in standard apache format and
supports MD5, SHA1 and BCrypt for basic authentication. Bcrypt is recommended.
To create an htpasswd file:
touch htpasswd
htpasswd -B htpasswd user
htpasswd -B htpasswd anotherUser
The password file can be updated while rclone is running.
Use --realm to set the authentication realm.
SSL/TLS
By default this will serve over HTTP. If you want you can serve over HTTPS. You will need to supply the
--cert and --key flags. If you wish to do client side certificate validation then you will need to
supply --client-ca also.
--cert should be either a PEM encoded certificate or a concatenation of that with the CA certificate.
--key should be the PEM encoded private key and --client-ca should be the PEM encoded client certificate
authority certificate.
–min-tls-version is minimum TLS version that is acceptable. Valid values are “tls1.0”, “tls1.1”,
“tls1.2” and “tls1.3” (default “tls1.0”).
VFS - Virtual File System
This command uses the VFS layer. This adapts the cloud storage objects that rclone uses into something
which looks much more like a disk filing system.
Cloud storage objects have lots of properties which aren’t like disk files - you can’t extend them or
write to the middle of them, so the VFS layer has to deal with that. Because there is no one right way
of doing this there are various options explained below.
The VFS layer also implements a directory cache - this caches info about files and directories (but not
the data) in memory.
VFS Directory Cache
Using the --dir-cache-time flag, you can control how long a directory should be considered up to date and
not refreshed from the backend. Changes made through the VFS will appear immediately or invalidate the
cache.
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes. Must be smaller than dir-cache-time. Only on supported remotes. Set to 0 to disable (default 1m0s)
However, changes made directly on the cloud storage by the web interface or a different copy of rclone
will only be picked up once the directory cache expires if the backend configured does not support
polling for changes. If the backend supports polling, changes will be picked up within the polling
interval.
You can send a SIGHUP signal to rclone for it to flush all directory caches, regardless of how old they
are. Assuming only one rclone instance is running, you can reset the cache like this:
kill -SIGHUP $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use rclone rc to flush the whole directory
cache:
rclone rc vfs/forget
Or individual files or directories:
rclone rc vfs/forget file=path/to/file dir=path/to/dir
VFS File Buffering
The --buffer-size flag determines the amount of memory, that will be used to buffer data in advance.
Each open file will try to keep the specified amount of data in memory at all times. The buffered data
is bound to one open file and won’t be shared.
This flag is a upper limit for the used memory per open file. The buffer will only use memory for data
that is downloaded but not not yet read. If the buffer is empty, only a small amount of memory will be
used.
The maximum memory used by rclone for buffering can be up to --buffer-size * open files.
VFS File Caching
These flags control the VFS file caching options. File caching is necessary to make the VFS layer appear
compatible with a normal file system. It can be disabled at the cost of some compatibility.
For example you’ll need to enable VFS caching if you want to read and write simultaneously to a file.
See below for more details.
Note that the VFS cache is separate from the cache backend and you may find that you need one or the
other or both.
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching.
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
If run with -vv rclone will print the location of the file cache. The files are stored in the user cache
file area which is OS dependent but can be controlled with --cache-dir or setting the appropriate
environment variable.
The cache has 4 different modes selected by --vfs-cache-mode. The higher the cache mode the more
compatible rclone becomes at the cost of using disk space.
Note that files are written back to the remote only when they are closed and if they haven’t been
accessed for --vfs-write-back seconds. If rclone is quit or dies with files that haven’t been uploaded,
these will be uploaded next time rclone is run with the same flags.
If using --vfs-cache-max-size note that the cache may exceed this size for two reasons. Firstly because
it is only checked every --vfs-cache-poll-interval. Secondly because open files cannot be evicted from
the cache.
You should not run two copies of rclone using the same VFS cache with the same or overlapping remotes if
using --vfs-cache-mode > off. This can potentially cause data corruption if you do. You can work around
this by giving each rclone its own cache hierarchy with --cache-dir. You don’t need to worry about this
if the remotes in use don’t overlap.
–vfs-cache-mode off
In this mode (the default) the cache will read directly from the remote and write directly to the remote
without caching anything on disk.
This will mean some operations are not possible
• Files can’t be opened for both read AND write
• Files opened for write can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files open for read with O_TRUNC will be opened write only
• Files open for write only will behave as if O_TRUNC was supplied
• Open modes O_APPEND, O_TRUNC are ignored
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode minimal
This is very similar to “off” except that files opened for read AND write will be buffered to disk. This
means that files opened for write will be a lot more compatible, but uses the minimal disk space.
These operations are not possible
• Files opened for write only can’t be seeked
• Existing files opened for write must have O_TRUNC set
• Files opened for write only will ignore O_APPEND, O_TRUNC
• If an upload fails it can’t be retried
–vfs-cache-mode writes
In this mode files opened for read only are still read directly from the remote, write only and
read/write files are buffered to disk first.
This mode should support all normal file system operations.
If an upload fails it will be retried at exponentially increasing intervals up to 1 minute.
–vfs-cache-mode full
In this mode all reads and writes are buffered to and from disk. When data is read from the remote this
is buffered to disk as well.
In this mode the files in the cache will be sparse files and rclone will keep track of which bits of the
files it has downloaded.
So if an application only reads the starts of each file, then rclone will only buffer the start of the
file. These files will appear to be their full size in the cache, but they will be sparse files with
only the data that has been downloaded present in them.
This mode should support all normal file system operations and is otherwise identical to --vfs-cache-mode
writes.
When reading a file rclone will read --buffer-size plus --vfs-read-ahead bytes ahead. The --buffer-size
is buffered in memory whereas the --vfs-read-ahead is buffered on disk.
When using this mode it is recommended that --buffer-size is not set too large and --vfs-read-ahead is
set large if required.
IMPORTANT not all file systems support sparse files. In particular FAT/exFAT do not. Rclone will
perform very badly if the cache directory is on a filesystem which doesn’t support sparse files and it
will log an ERROR message if one is detected.
Fingerprinting
Various parts of the VFS use fingerprinting to see if a local file copy has changed relative to a remote
file. Fingerprints are made from:
• size
• modification time
• hash
where available on an object.
On some backends some of these attributes are slow to read (they take an extra API call per object, or
extra work per object).
For example hash is slow with the local and sftp backends as they have to read the entire file and hash
it, and modtime is slow with the s3, swift, ftp and qinqstor backends because they need to do an extra
API call to fetch it.
If you use the --vfs-fast-fingerprint flag then rclone will not include the slow operations in the
fingerprint. This makes the fingerprinting less accurate but much faster and will improve the opening
time of cached files.
If you are running a vfs cache over local, s3 or swift backends then using this flag is recommended.
Note that if you change the value of this flag, the fingerprints of the files in the cache may be
invalidated and the files will need to be downloaded again.
VFS Chunked Reading
When rclone reads files from a remote it reads them in chunks. This means that rather than requesting
the whole file rclone reads the chunk specified. This can reduce the used download quota for some
remotes by requesting only chunks from the remote that are actually read, at the cost of an increased
number of requests.
These flags control the chunking:
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128M)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix Max chunk doubling size (default off)
Rclone will start reading a chunk of size --vfs-read-chunk-size, and then double the size for each read.
When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit is specified, and greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, the chunk size for
each open file will get doubled only until the specified value is reached. If the value is “off”, which
is the default, the limit is disabled and the chunk size will grow indefinitely.
With --vfs-read-chunk-size 100M and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 0 the following parts will be downloaded:
0-100M, 100M-200M, 200M-300M, 300M-400M and so on. When --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit 500M is specified,
the result would be 0-100M, 100M-300M, 300M-700M, 700M-1200M, 1200M-1700M and so on.
Setting --vfs-read-chunk-size to 0 or “off” disables chunked reading.
VFS Performance
These flags may be used to enable/disable features of the VFS for performance or other reasons. See also
the chunked reading feature.
In particular S3 and Swift benefit hugely from the --no-modtime flag (or use --use-server-modtime for a
slightly different effect) as each read of the modification time takes a transaction.
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download.
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up).
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files.
--read-only Only allow read-only access.
Sometimes rclone is delivered reads or writes out of order. Rather than seeking rclone will wait a short
time for the in sequence read or write to come in. These flags only come into effect when not using an
on disk cache file.
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
When using VFS write caching (--vfs-cache-mode with value writes or full), the global flag --transfers
can be set to adjust the number of parallel uploads of modified files from the cache (the related global
flag --checkers has no effect on the VFS).
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
VFS Case Sensitivity
Linux file systems are case-sensitive: two files can differ only by case, and the exact case must be used
when opening a file.
File systems in modern Windows are case-insensitive but case-preserving: although existing files can be
opened using any case, the exact case used to create the file is preserved and available for programs to
query. It is not allowed for two files in the same directory to differ only by case.
Usually file systems on macOS are case-insensitive. It is possible to make macOS file systems
case-sensitive but that is not the default.
The --vfs-case-insensitive VFS flag controls how rclone handles these two cases. If its value is
“false”, rclone passes file names to the remote as-is. If the flag is “true” (or appears without a value
on the command line), rclone may perform a “fixup” as explained below.
The user may specify a file name to open/delete/rename/etc with a case different than what is stored on
the remote. If an argument refers to an existing file with exactly the same name, then the case of the
existing file on the disk will be used. However, if a file name with exactly the same name is not found
but a name differing only by case exists, rclone will transparently fixup the name. This fixup happens
only when an existing file is requested. Case sensitivity of file names created anew by rclone is
controlled by the underlying remote.
Note that case sensitivity of the operating system running rclone (the target) may differ from case
sensitivity of a file system presented by rclone (the source). The flag controls whether “fixup” is
performed to satisfy the target.
If the flag is not provided on the command line, then its default value depends on the operating system
where rclone runs: “true” on Windows and macOS, “false” otherwise. If the flag is provided without a
value, then it is “true”.
VFS Disk Options
This flag allows you to manually set the statistics about the filing system. It can be useful when those
statistics cannot be read correctly automatically.
--vfs-disk-space-total-size Manually set the total disk space size (example: 256G, default: -1)
Alternate report of used bytes
Some backends, most notably S3, do not report the amount of bytes used. If you need this information to
be available when running df on the filesystem, then pass the flag --vfs-used-is-size to rclone. With
this flag set, instead of relying on the backend to report this information, rclone will scan the whole
remote similar to rclone size and compute the total used space itself.
WARNING. Contrary to rclone size, this flag ignores filters so that the result is accurate. However,
this is very inefficient and may cost lots of API calls resulting in extra charges. Use it as a last
resort and only with caching.
Auth Proxy
If you supply the parameter --auth-proxy /path/to/program then rclone will use that program to generate
backends on the fly which then are used to authenticate incoming requests. This uses a simple JSON based
protocol with input on STDIN and output on STDOUT.
PLEASE NOTE: --auth-proxy and --authorized-keys cannot be used together, if --auth-proxy is set the
authorized keys option will be ignored.
There is an example program bin/test_proxy.py in the rclone source code.
The program’s job is to take a user and pass on the input and turn those into the config for a backend on
STDOUT in JSON format. This config will have any default parameters for the backend added, but it won’t
use configuration from environment variables or command line options - it is the job of the proxy program
to make a complete config.
This config generated must have this extra parameter - _root - root to use for the backend
And it may have this parameter - _obscure - comma separated strings for parameters to obscure
If password authentication was used by the client, input to the proxy process (on STDIN) would look
similar to this:
{
"user": "me",
"pass": "mypassword"
}
If public-key authentication was used by the client, input to the proxy process (on STDIN) would look
similar to this:
{
"user": "me",
"public_key": "AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQDuwESFdAe14hVS6omeyX7edc...JQdf"
}
And as an example return this on STDOUT
{
"type": "sftp",
"_root": "",
"_obscure": "pass",
"user": "me",
"pass": "mypassword",
"host": "sftp.example.com"
}
This would mean that an SFTP backend would be created on the fly for the user and pass/public_key
returned in the output to the host given. Note that since _obscure is set to pass, rclone will obscure
the pass parameter before creating the backend (which is required for sftp backends).
The program can manipulate the supplied user in any way, for example to make proxy to many different sftp
backends, you could make the user be user@example.com and then set the host to example.com in the output
and the user to user. For security you’d probably want to restrict the host to a limited list.
Note that an internal cache is keyed on user so only use that for configuration, don’t use pass or
public_key. This also means that if a user’s password or public-key is changed the cache will need to
expire (which takes 5 mins) before it takes effect.
This can be used to build general purpose proxies to any kind of backend that rclone supports.
rclone serve webdav remote:path [flags]
Options
--addr string IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to (default "localhost:8080")
--auth-proxy string A program to use to create the backend from the auth
--baseurl string Prefix for URLs - leave blank for root
--cert string SSL PEM key (concatenation of certificate and CA certificate)
--client-ca string Client certificate authority to verify clients with
--dir-cache-time duration Time to cache directory entries for (default 5m0s)
--dir-perms FileMode Directory permissions (default 0777)
--disable-dir-list Disable HTML directory list on GET request for a directory
--etag-hash string Which hash to use for the ETag, or auto or blank for off
--file-perms FileMode File permissions (default 0666)
--gid uint32 Override the gid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
-h, --help help for webdav
--htpasswd string htpasswd file - if not provided no authentication is done
--key string SSL PEM Private key
--max-header-bytes int Maximum size of request header (default 4096)
--min-tls-version string Minimum TLS version that is acceptable (default "tls1.0")
--no-checksum Don't compare checksums on up/download
--no-modtime Don't read/write the modification time (can speed things up)
--no-seek Don't allow seeking in files
--pass string Password for authentication
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes, must be smaller than dir-cache-time and only on supported remotes (set 0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--read-only Only allow read-only access
--realm string Realm for authentication (default "rclone")
--server-read-timeout duration Timeout for server reading data (default 1h0m0s)
--server-write-timeout duration Timeout for server writing data (default 1h0m0s)
--template string User-specified template
--uid uint32 Override the uid field set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 1000)
--umask int Override the permission bits set by the filesystem (not supported on Windows) (default 2)
--user string User name for authentication
--vfs-cache-max-age duration Max age of objects in the cache (default 1h0m0s)
--vfs-cache-max-size SizeSuffix Max total size of objects in the cache (default off)
--vfs-cache-mode CacheMode Cache mode off|minimal|writes|full (default off)
--vfs-cache-poll-interval duration Interval to poll the cache for stale objects (default 1m0s)
--vfs-case-insensitive If a file name not found, find a case insensitive match
--vfs-disk-space-total-size SizeSuffix Specify the total space of disk (default off)
--vfs-fast-fingerprint Use fast (less accurate) fingerprints for change detection
--vfs-read-ahead SizeSuffix Extra read ahead over --buffer-size when using cache-mode full
--vfs-read-chunk-size SizeSuffix Read the source objects in chunks (default 128Mi)
--vfs-read-chunk-size-limit SizeSuffix If greater than --vfs-read-chunk-size, double the chunk size after each chunk read, until the limit is reached ('off' is unlimited) (default off)
--vfs-read-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence read before seeking (default 20ms)
--vfs-used-is-size rclone size Use the rclone size algorithm for Used size
--vfs-write-back duration Time to writeback files after last use when using cache (default 5s)
--vfs-write-wait duration Time to wait for in-sequence write before giving error (default 1s)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone serve - Serve a remote over a protocol.
rclone settier
Changes storage class/tier of objects in remote.
Synopsis
rclone settier changes storage tier or class at remote if supported. Few cloud storage services provides
different storage classes on objects, for example AWS S3 and Glacier, Azure Blob storage - Hot, Cool and
Archive, Google Cloud Storage, Regional Storage, Nearline, Coldline etc.
Note that, certain tier changes make objects not available to access immediately. For example tiering to
archive in azure blob storage makes objects in frozen state, user can restore by setting tier to
Hot/Cool, similarly S3 to Glacier makes object inaccessible.true
You can use it to tier single object
rclone settier Cool remote:path/file
Or use rclone filters to set tier on only specific files
rclone --include "*.txt" settier Hot remote:path/dir
Or just provide remote directory and all files in directory will be tiered
rclone settier tier remote:path/dir
rclone settier tier remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for settier
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone test
Run a test command
Synopsis
Rclone test is used to run test commands.
Select which test comand you want with the subcommand, eg
rclone test memory remote:
Each subcommand has its own options which you can see in their help.
NB Be careful running these commands, they may do strange things so reading their documentation first is
recommended.
Options
-h, --help help for test
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
• rclone test changenotify - Log any change notify requests for the remote passed in.
• rclone test histogram - Makes a histogram of file name characters.
• rclone test info - Discovers file name or other limitations for paths.
• rclone test makefile - Make files with random contents of the size given
• rclone test makefiles - Make a random file hierarchy in a directory
• rclone test memory - Load all the objects at remote:path into memory and report memory stats.
rclone test changenotify
Log any change notify requests for the remote passed in.
rclone test changenotify remote: [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for changenotify
--poll-interval duration Time to wait between polling for changes (default 10s)
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone test - Run a test command
rclone test histogram
Makes a histogram of file name characters.
Synopsis
This command outputs JSON which shows the histogram of characters used in filenames in the remote:path
specified.
The data doesn’t contain any identifying information but is useful for the rclone developers when
developing filename compression.
rclone test histogram [remote:path] [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for histogram
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone test - Run a test command
rclone test info
Discovers file name or other limitations for paths.
Synopsis
rclone info discovers what filenames and upload methods are possible to write to the paths passed in and
how long they can be. It can take some time. It will write test files into the remote:path passed in.
It outputs a bit of go code for each one.
NB this can create undeletable files and other hazards - use with care
rclone test info [remote:path]+ [flags]
Options
--all Run all tests
--check-control Check control characters
--check-length Check max filename length
--check-normalization Check UTF-8 Normalization
--check-streaming Check uploads with indeterminate file size
-h, --help help for info
--upload-wait duration Wait after writing a file
--write-json string Write results to file
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone test - Run a test command
rclone test makefile
Make files with random contents of the size given
rclone test makefile <size> [<file>]+ [flags]
Options
--ascii Fill files with random ASCII printable bytes only
--chargen Fill files with a ASCII chargen pattern
-h, --help help for makefile
--pattern Fill files with a periodic pattern
--seed int Seed for the random number generator (0 for random) (default 1)
--sparse Make the files sparse (appear to be filled with ASCII 0x00)
--zero Fill files with ASCII 0x00
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone test - Run a test command
rclone test makefiles
Make a random file hierarchy in a directory
rclone test makefiles <dir> [flags]
Options
--ascii Fill files with random ASCII printable bytes only
--chargen Fill files with a ASCII chargen pattern
--files int Number of files to create (default 1000)
--files-per-directory int Average number of files per directory (default 10)
-h, --help help for makefiles
--max-file-size SizeSuffix Maximum size of files to create (default 100)
--max-name-length int Maximum size of file names (default 12)
--min-file-size SizeSuffix Minimum size of file to create
--min-name-length int Minimum size of file names (default 4)
--pattern Fill files with a periodic pattern
--seed int Seed for the random number generator (0 for random) (default 1)
--sparse Make the files sparse (appear to be filled with ASCII 0x00)
--zero Fill files with ASCII 0x00
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone test - Run a test command
rclone test memory
Load all the objects at remote:path into memory and report memory stats.
rclone test memory remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for memory
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone test - Run a test command
rclone touch
Create new file or change file modification time.
Synopsis
Set the modification time on file(s) as specified by remote:path to have the current time.
If remote:path does not exist then a zero sized file will be created, unless --no-create or --recursive
is provided.
If --recursive is used then recursively sets the modification time on all existing files that is found
under the path. Filters are supported, and you can test with the --dry-run or the --interactive flag.
If --timestamp is used then sets the modification time to that time instead of the current time. Times
may be specified as one of:
• `YYMMDD' - e.g. 17.10.30
• `YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS' - e.g. 2006-01-02T15:04:05
• `YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.SSS' - e.g. 2006-01-02T15:04:05.123456789
Note that value of --timestamp is in UTC. If you want local time then add the --localtime flag.
rclone touch remote:path [flags]
Options
-h, --help help for touch
--localtime Use localtime for timestamp, not UTC
-C, --no-create Do not create the file if it does not exist (implied with --recursive)
-R, --recursive Recursively touch all files
-t, --timestamp string Use specified time instead of the current time of day
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
rclone tree
List the contents of the remote in a tree like fashion.
Synopsis
rclone tree lists the contents of a remote in a similar way to the unix tree command.
For example
$ rclone tree remote:path
/
├── file1
├── file2
├── file3
└── subdir
├── file4
└── file5
1 directories, 5 files
You can use any of the filtering options with the tree command (e.g. --include and --exclude. You can
also use --fast-list.
The tree command has many options for controlling the listing which are compatible with the tree command,
for example you can include file sizes with --size. Note that not all of them have short options as they
conflict with rclone’s short options.
For a more interactive navigation of the remote see the ncdu command.
rclone tree remote:path [flags]
Options
-a, --all All files are listed (list . files too)
-C, --color Turn colorization on always
-d, --dirs-only List directories only
--dirsfirst List directories before files (-U disables)
--full-path Print the full path prefix for each file
-h, --help help for tree
--level int Descend only level directories deep
-D, --modtime Print the date of last modification.
--noindent Don't print indentation lines
--noreport Turn off file/directory count at end of tree listing
-o, --output string Output to file instead of stdout
-p, --protections Print the protections for each file.
-Q, --quote Quote filenames with double quotes.
-s, --size Print the size in bytes of each file.
--sort string Select sort: name,version,size,mtime,ctime
--sort-ctime Sort files by last status change time
-t, --sort-modtime Sort files by last modification time
-r, --sort-reverse Reverse the order of the sort
-U, --unsorted Leave files unsorted
--version Sort files alphanumerically by version
See the global flags page for global options not listed here.
SEE ALSO
• rclone - Show help for rclone commands, flags and backends.
Copying single files
rclone normally syncs or copies directories. However, if the source remote points to a file, rclone will
just copy that file. The destination remote must point to a directory - rclone will give the error
Failed to create file system for "remote:file": is a file not a directory if it isn’t.
For example, suppose you have a remote with a file in called test.jpg, then you could copy just that file
like this
rclone copy remote:test.jpg /tmp/download
The file test.jpg will be placed inside /tmp/download.
This is equivalent to specifying
rclone copy --files-from /tmp/files remote: /tmp/download
Where /tmp/files contains the single line
test.jpg
It is recommended to use copy when copying individual files, not sync. They have pretty much the same
effect but copy will use a lot less memory.
Syntax of remote paths
The syntax of the paths passed to the rclone command are as follows.
/path/to/dir
This refers to the local file system.
On Windows \ may be used instead of / in local paths only, non local paths must use /. See local
filesystem documentation for more about Windows-specific paths.
These paths needn’t start with a leading / - if they don’t then they will be relative to the current
directory.
remote:path/to/dir
This refers to a directory path/to/dir on remote: as defined in the config file (configured with rclone
config).
remote:/path/to/dir
On most backends this is refers to the same directory as remote:path/to/dir and that format should be
preferred. On a very small number of remotes (FTP, SFTP, Dropbox for business) this will refer to a
different directory. On these, paths without a leading / will refer to your “home” directory and paths
with a leading / will refer to the root.
:backend:path/to/dir
This is an advanced form for creating remotes on the fly. backend should be the name or prefix of a
backend (the type in the config file) and all the configuration for the backend should be provided on the
command line (or in environment variables).
Here are some examples:
rclone lsd --http-url https://pub.rclone.org :http:
To list all the directories in the root of https://pub.rclone.org/.
rclone lsf --http-url https://example.com :http:path/to/dir
To list files and directories in https://example.com/path/to/dir/
rclone copy --http-url https://example.com :http:path/to/dir /tmp/dir
To copy files and directories in https://example.com/path/to/dir to /tmp/dir.
rclone copy --sftp-host example.com :sftp:path/to/dir /tmp/dir
To copy files and directories from example.com in the relative directory path/to/dir to /tmp/dir using
sftp.
Connection strings
The above examples can also be written using a connection string syntax, so instead of providing the
arguments as command line parameters --http-url https://pub.rclone.org they are provided as part of the
remote specification as a kind of connection string.
rclone lsd ":http,url='https://pub.rclone.org':"
rclone lsf ":http,url='https://example.com':path/to/dir"
rclone copy ":http,url='https://example.com':path/to/dir" /tmp/dir
rclone copy :sftp,host=example.com:path/to/dir /tmp/dir
These can apply to modify existing remotes as well as create new remotes with the on the fly syntax.
This example is equivalent to adding the --drive-shared-with-me parameter to the remote gdrive:.
rclone lsf "gdrive,shared_with_me:path/to/dir"
The major advantage to using the connection string style syntax is that it only applies to the remote,
not to all the remotes of that type of the command line. A common confusion is this attempt to copy a
file shared on google drive to the normal drive which does not work because the --drive-shared-with-me
flag applies to both the source and the destination.
rclone copy --drive-shared-with-me gdrive:shared-file.txt gdrive:
However using the connection string syntax, this does work.
rclone copy "gdrive,shared_with_me:shared-file.txt" gdrive:
Note that the connection string only affects the options of the immediate backend. If for example
gdriveCrypt is a crypt based on gdrive, then the following command will not work as intended, because
shared_with_me is ignored by the crypt backend:
rclone copy "gdriveCrypt,shared_with_me:shared-file.txt" gdriveCrypt:
The connection strings have the following syntax
remote,parameter=value,parameter2=value2:path/to/dir
:backend,parameter=value,parameter2=value2:path/to/dir
If the parameter has a : or , then it must be placed in quotes " or ', so
remote,parameter="colon:value",parameter2="comma,value":path/to/dir
:backend,parameter='colon:value',parameter2='comma,value':path/to/dir
If a quoted value needs to include that quote, then it should be doubled, so
remote,parameter="with""quote",parameter2='with''quote':path/to/dir
This will make parameter be with"quote and parameter2 be with'quote.
If you leave off the =parameter then rclone will substitute =true which works very well with flags. For
example, to use s3 configured in the environment you could use:
rclone lsd :s3,env_auth:
Which is equivalent to
rclone lsd :s3,env_auth=true:
Note that on the command line you might need to surround these connection strings with " or ' to stop the
shell interpreting any special characters within them.
If you are a shell master then you’ll know which strings are OK and which aren’t, but if you aren’t sure
then enclose them in " and use ' as the inside quote. This syntax works on all OSes.
rclone copy ":http,url='https://example.com':path/to/dir" /tmp/dir
On Linux/macOS some characters are still interpreted inside " strings in the shell (notably \ and $ and
") so if your strings contain those you can swap the roles of " and ' thus. (This syntax does not work
on Windows.)
rclone copy ':http,url="https://example.com":path/to/dir' /tmp/dir
Connection strings, config and logging
If you supply extra configuration to a backend by command line flag, environment variable or connection
string then rclone will add a suffix based on the hash of the config to the name of the remote, eg
rclone -vv lsf --s3-chunk-size 20M s3:
Has the log message
DEBUG : s3: detected overridden config - adding "{Srj1p}" suffix to name
This is so rclone can tell the modified remote apart from the unmodified remote when caching the
backends.
This should only be noticeable in the logs.
This means that on the fly backends such as
rclone -vv lsf :s3,env_auth:
Will get their own names
DEBUG : :s3: detected overridden config - adding "{YTu53}" suffix to name
Valid remote names
Remote names are case sensitive, and must adhere to the following rules: - May only contain 0-9, A-Z,
a-z, _, -, . and space. - May not start with - or space.
Quoting and the shell
When you are typing commands to your computer you are using something called the command line shell.
This interprets various characters in an OS specific way.
Here are some gotchas which may help users unfamiliar with the shell rules
Linux / OSX
If your names have spaces or shell metacharacters (e.g. *, ?, $, ', ", etc.) then you must quote them.
Use single quotes ' by default.
rclone copy 'Important files?' remote:backup
If you want to send a ' you will need to use ", e.g.
rclone copy "O'Reilly Reviews" remote:backup
The rules for quoting metacharacters are complicated and if you want the full details you’ll have to
consult the manual page for your shell.
Windows
If your names have spaces in you need to put them in ", e.g.
rclone copy "E:\folder name\folder name\folder name" remote:backup
If you are using the root directory on its own then don’t quote it (see #464 for why), e.g.
rclone copy E:\ remote:backup
Copying files or directories with : in the names
rclone uses : to mark a remote name. This is, however, a valid filename component in non-Windows OSes.
The remote name parser will only search for a : up to the first / so if you need to act on a file or
directory like this then use the full path starting with a /, or use ./ as a current directory prefix.
So to sync a directory called sync:me to a remote called remote: use
rclone sync -i ./sync:me remote:path
or
rclone sync -i /full/path/to/sync:me remote:path
Server Side Copy
Most remotes (but not all - see the overview) support server-side copy.
This means if you want to copy one folder to another then rclone won’t download all the files and
re-upload them; it will instruct the server to copy them in place.
Eg
rclone copy s3:oldbucket s3:newbucket
Will copy the contents of oldbucket to newbucket without downloading and re-uploading.
Remotes which don’t support server-side copy will download and re-upload in this case.
Server side copies are used with sync and copy and will be identified in the log when using the -v flag.
The move command may also use them if remote doesn’t support server-side move directly. This is done by
issuing a server-side copy then a delete which is much quicker than a download and re-upload.
Server side copies will only be attempted if the remote names are the same.
This can be used when scripting to make aged backups efficiently, e.g.
rclone sync -i remote:current-backup remote:previous-backup
rclone sync -i /path/to/files remote:current-backup
Metadata support
Metadata is data about a file which isn’t the contents of the file. Normally rclone only preserves the
modification time and the content (MIME) type where possible.
Rclone supports preserving all the available metadata on files (not directories) when using the
--metadata or -M flag.
Exactly what metadata is supported and what that support means depends on the backend. Backends that
support metadata have a metadata section in their docs and are listed in the features table (Eg local,
s3)
Rclone only supports a one-time sync of metadata. This means that metadata will be synced from the
source object to the destination object only when the source object has changed and needs to be
re-uploaded. If the metadata subsequently changes on the source object without changing the object
itself then it won’t be synced to the destination object. This is in line with the way rclone syncs
Content-Type without the --metadata flag.
Using --metadata when syncing from local to local will preserve file attributes such as file mode, owner,
extended attributes (not Windows).
Note that arbitrary metadata may be added to objects using the --metadata-set key=value flag when the
object is first uploaded. This flag can be repeated as many times as necessary.
Types of metadata
Metadata is divided into two type. System metadata and User metadata.
Metadata which the backend uses itself is called system metadata. For example on the local backend the
system metadata uid will store the user ID of the file when used on a unix based platform.
Arbitrary metadata is called user metadata and this can be set however is desired.
When objects are copied from backend to backend, they will attempt to interpret system metadata if it is
supplied. Metadata may change from being user metadata to system metadata as objects are copied between
different backends. For example copying an object from s3 sets the content-type metadata. In a backend
which understands this (like azureblob) this will become the Content-Type of the object. In a backend
which doesn’t understand this (like the local backend) this will become user metadata. However should
the local object be copied back to s3, the Content-Type will be set correctly.
Metadata framework
Rclone implements a metadata framework which can read metadata from an object and write it to the object
when (and only when) it is being uploaded.
This metadata is stored as a dictionary with string keys and string values.
There are some limits on the names of the keys (these may be clarified further in the future).
• must be lower case
• may be a-z 0-9 containing . - or _
• length is backend dependent
Each backend can provide system metadata that it understands. Some backends can also store arbitrary
user metadata.
Where possible the key names are standardized, so, for example, it is possible to copy object metadata
from s3 to azureblob for example and metadata will be translated appropriately.
Some backends have limits on the size of the metadata and rclone will give errors on upload if they are
exceeded.
Metadata preservation
The goal of the implementation is to
1. Preserve metadata if at all possible
2. Interpret metadata if at all possible
The consequences of 1 is that you can copy an S3 object to a local disk then back to S3 losslessly.
Likewise you can copy a local file with file attributes and xattrs from local disk to s3 and back again
losslessly.
The consequence of 2 is that you can copy an S3 object with metadata to Azureblob (say) and have the
metadata appear on the Azureblob object also.
Standard system metadata
Here is a table of standard system metadata which, if appropriate, a backend may implement.
key description example
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
mode File type and mode: 0100664
octal, unix style
uid User ID of owner: 500
decimal number
gid Group ID of owner: 500
decimal number
rdev Device ID (if special 0
file) => hexadecimal
atime Time of last access: 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00
RFC 3339
mtime Time of last 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00
modification: RFC
3339
btime Time of file creation 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00
(birth): RFC 3339
cache-control Cache-Control header no-cache
content-disposition Content-Disposition inline
header
content-encoding Content-Encoding gzip
header
content-language Content-Language en-US
header
content-type Content-Type header text/plain
The metadata keys mtime and content-type will take precedence if supplied in the metadata over reading
the Content-Type or modification time of the source object.
Hashes are not included in system metadata as there is a well defined way of reading those already.
Options
Rclone has a number of options to control its behaviour.
Options that take parameters can have the values passed in two ways, --option=value or --option value.
However boolean (true/false) options behave slightly differently to the other options in that --boolean
sets the option to true and the absence of the flag sets it to false. It is also possible to specify
--boolean=false or --boolean=true. Note that --boolean false is not valid - this is parsed as --boolean
and the false is parsed as an extra command line argument for rclone.
Time or duration options
TIME or DURATION options can be specified as a duration string or a time string.
A duration string is a possibly signed sequence of decimal numbers, each with optional fraction and a
unit suffix, such as “300ms”, “-1.5h” or “2h45m”. Default units are seconds or the following
abbreviations are valid:
• ms - Milliseconds
• s - Seconds
• m - Minutes
• h - Hours
• d - Days
• w - Weeks
• M - Months
• y - Years
These can also be specified as an absolute time in the following formats:
• RFC3339 - e.g. 2006-01-02T15:04:05Z or 2006-01-02T15:04:05+07:00
• ISO8601 Date and time, local timezone - 2006-01-02T15:04:05
• ISO8601 Date and time, local timezone - 2006-01-02 15:04:05
• ISO8601 Date - 2006-01-02 (YYYY-MM-DD)
Size options
Options which use SIZE use KiB (multiples of 1024 bytes) by default. However, a suffix of B for Byte, K
for KiB, M for MiB, G for GiB, T for TiB and P for PiB may be used. These are the binary units, e.g. 1,
2**10, 2**20, 2**30 respectively.
–backup-dir=DIR
When using sync, copy or move any files which would have been overwritten or deleted are moved in their
original hierarchy into this directory.
If --suffix is set, then the moved files will have the suffix added to them. If there is a file with the
same path (after the suffix has been added) in DIR, then it will be overwritten.
The remote in use must support server-side move or copy and you must use the same remote as the
destination of the sync. The backup directory must not overlap the destination directory without it
being excluded by a filter rule.
For example
rclone sync -i /path/to/local remote:current --backup-dir remote:old
will sync /path/to/local to remote:current, but for any files which would have been updated or deleted
will be stored in remote:old.
If running rclone from a script you might want to use today’s date as the directory name passed to
--backup-dir to store the old files, or you might want to pass --suffix with today’s date.
See --compare-dest and --copy-dest.
–bind string
Local address to bind to for outgoing connections. This can be an IPv4 address (1.2.3.4), an IPv6
address (1234::789A) or host name. If the host name doesn’t resolve or resolves to more than one IP
address it will give an error.
–bwlimit=BANDWIDTH_SPEC
This option controls the bandwidth limit. For example
--bwlimit 10M
would mean limit the upload and download bandwidth to 10 MiB/s. NB this is bytes per second not bits per
second. To use a single limit, specify the desired bandwidth in KiB/s, or use a suffix B|K|M|G|T|P. The
default is 0 which means to not limit bandwidth.
The upload and download bandwidth can be specified separately, as --bwlimit UP:DOWN, so
--bwlimit 10M:100k
would mean limit the upload bandwidth to 10 MiB/s and the download bandwidth to 100 KiB/s. Either limit
can be “off” meaning no limit, so to just limit the upload bandwidth you would use
--bwlimit 10M:off
this would limit the upload bandwidth to 10 MiB/s but the download bandwidth would be unlimited.
When specified as above the bandwidth limits last for the duration of run of the rclone binary.
It is also possible to specify a “timetable” of limits, which will cause certain limits to be applied at
certain times. To specify a timetable, format your entries as WEEKDAY-HH:MM,BANDWIDTH
WEEKDAY-HH:MM,BANDWIDTH... where: WEEKDAY is optional element.
• BANDWIDTH can be a single number, e.g.100k or a pair of numbers for upload:download, e.g.10M:1M.
• WEEKDAY can be written as the whole word or only using the first 3 characters. It is optional.
• HH:MM is an hour from 00:00 to 23:59.
An example of a typical timetable to avoid link saturation during daytime working hours could be:
--bwlimit "08:00,512k 12:00,10M 13:00,512k 18:00,30M 23:00,off"
In this example, the transfer bandwidth will be set to 512 KiB/s at 8am every day. At noon, it will rise
to 10 MiB/s, and drop back to 512 KiB/sec at 1pm. At 6pm, the bandwidth limit will be set to 30 MiB/s,
and at 11pm it will be completely disabled (full speed). Anything between 11pm and 8am will remain
unlimited.
An example of timetable with WEEKDAY could be:
--bwlimit "Mon-00:00,512 Fri-23:59,10M Sat-10:00,1M Sun-20:00,off"
It means that, the transfer bandwidth will be set to 512 KiB/s on Monday. It will rise to 10 MiB/s
before the end of Friday. At 10:00 on Saturday it will be set to 1 MiB/s. From 20:00 on Sunday it will
be unlimited.
Timeslots without WEEKDAY are extended to the whole week. So this example:
--bwlimit "Mon-00:00,512 12:00,1M Sun-20:00,off"
Is equivalent to this:
--bwlimit "Mon-00:00,512Mon-12:00,1M Tue-12:00,1M Wed-12:00,1M Thu-12:00,1M Fri-12:00,1M Sat-12:00,1M
Sun-12:00,1M Sun-20:00,off"
Bandwidth limit apply to the data transfer for all backends. For most backends the directory listing
bandwidth is also included (exceptions being the non HTTP backends, ftp, sftp and storj).
Note that the units are Byte/s, not bit/s. Typically connections are measured in bit/s - to convert
divide by 8. For example, let’s say you have a 10 Mbit/s connection and you wish rclone to use half of
it - 5 Mbit/s. This is 5/8 = 0.625 MiB/s so you would use a --bwlimit 0.625M parameter for rclone.
On Unix systems (Linux, macOS, ...) the bandwidth limiter can be toggled by sending a SIGUSR2 signal to
rclone. This allows to remove the limitations of a long running rclone transfer and to restore it back
to the value specified with --bwlimit quickly when needed. Assuming there is only one rclone instance
running, you can toggle the limiter like this:
kill -SIGUSR2 $(pidof rclone)
If you configure rclone with a remote control then you can use change the bwlimit dynamically:
rclone rc core/bwlimit rate=1M
–bwlimit-file=BANDWIDTH_SPEC
This option controls per file bandwidth limit. For the options see the --bwlimit flag.
For example use this to allow no transfers to be faster than 1 MiB/s
--bwlimit-file 1M
This can be used in conjunction with --bwlimit.
Note that if a schedule is provided the file will use the schedule in effect at the start of the
transfer.
–buffer-size=SIZE
Use this sized buffer to speed up file transfers. Each --transfer will use this much memory for
buffering.
When using mount or cmount each open file descriptor will use this much memory for buffering. See the
mount documentation for more details.
Set to 0 to disable the buffering for the minimum memory usage.
Note that the memory allocation of the buffers is influenced by the –use-mmap flag.
–cache-dir=DIR
Specify the directory rclone will use for caching, to override the default.
Default value is depending on operating system: - Windows %LocalAppData%\rclone, if LocalAppData is
defined. - macOS $HOME/Library/Caches/rclone if HOME is defined. - Unix $XDG_CACHE_HOME/rclone if
XDG_CACHE_HOME is defined, else $HOME/.cache/rclone if HOME is defined. - Fallback (on all OS) to
$TMPDIR/rclone, where TMPDIR is the value from –temp-dir.
You can use the config paths command to see the current value.
Cache directory is heavily used by the VFS File Caching mount feature, but also by serve, GUI and other
parts of rclone.
–check-first
If this flag is set then in a sync, copy or move, rclone will do all the checks to see whether files need
to be transferred before doing any of the transfers. Normally rclone would start running transfers as
soon as possible.
This flag can be useful on IO limited systems where transfers interfere with checking.
It can also be useful to ensure perfect ordering when using --order-by.
Using this flag can use more memory as it effectively sets --max-backlog to infinite. This means that
all the info on the objects to transfer is held in memory before the transfers start.
–checkers=N
Originally controlling just the number of file checkers to run in parallel, e.g. by rclone copy. Now a
fairly universal parallelism control used by rclone in several places.
Note: checkers do the equality checking of files during a sync. For some storage systems (e.g. S3,
Swift, Dropbox) this can take a significant amount of time so they are run in parallel.
The default is to run 8 checkers in parallel. However, in case of slow-reacting backends you may need to
lower (rather than increase) this default by setting --checkers to 4 or less threads. This is especially
advised if you are experiencing backend server crashes during file checking phase (e.g. on subsequent or
top-up backups where little or no file copying is done and checking takes up most of the time). Increase
this setting only with utmost care, while monitoring your server health and file checking throughput.
-c, –checksum
Normally rclone will look at modification time and size of files to see if they are equal. If you set
this flag then rclone will check the file hash and size to determine if files are equal.
This is useful when the remote doesn’t support setting modified time and a more accurate sync is desired
than just checking the file size.
This is very useful when transferring between remotes which store the same hash type on the object,
e.g. Drive and Swift. For details of which remotes support which hash type see the table in the overview
section.
Eg rclone --checksum sync s3:/bucket swift:/bucket would run much quicker than without the --checksum
flag.
When using this flag, rclone won’t update mtimes of remote files if they are incorrect as it would
normally.
–compare-dest=DIR
When using sync, copy or move DIR is checked in addition to the destination for files. If a file
identical to the source is found that file is NOT copied from source. This is useful to copy just files
that have changed since the last backup.
You must use the same remote as the destination of the sync. The compare directory must not overlap the
destination directory.
See --copy-dest and --backup-dir.
–config=CONFIG_FILE
Specify the location of the rclone configuration file, to override the default. E.g. rclone config
--config="rclone.conf".
The exact default is a bit complex to describe, due to changes introduced through different versions of
rclone while preserving backwards compatibility, but in most cases it is as simple as:
• %APPDATA%/rclone/rclone.conf on Windows
• ~/.config/rclone/rclone.conf on other
The complete logic is as follows: Rclone will look for an existing configuration file in any of the
following locations, in priority order:
1. rclone.conf (in program directory, where rclone executable is)
2. %APPDATA%/rclone/rclone.conf (only on Windows)
3. $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/rclone/rclone.conf (on all systems, including Windows)
4. ~/.config/rclone/rclone.conf (see below for explanation of ~ symbol)
5. ~/.rclone.conf
If no existing configuration file is found, then a new one will be created in the following location:
• On Windows: Location 2 listed above, except in the unlikely event that APPDATA is not defined, then
location 4 is used instead.
• On Unix: Location 3 if XDG_CONFIG_HOME is defined, else location 4.
• Fallback to location 5 (on all OS), when the rclone directory cannot be created, but if also a home
directory was not found then path .rclone.conf relative to current working directory will be used as a
final resort.
The ~ symbol in paths above represent the home directory of the current user on any OS, and the value is
defined as following:
• On Windows: %HOME% if defined, else %USERPROFILE%, or else %HOMEDRIVE%\%HOMEPATH%.
• On Unix: $HOME if defined, else by looking up current user in OS-specific user database (e.g. passwd
file), or else use the result from shell command cd && pwd.
If you run rclone config file you will see where the default location is for you.
The fact that an existing file rclone.conf in the same directory as the rclone executable is always
preferred, means that it is easy to run in “portable” mode by downloading rclone executable to a writable
directory and then create an empty file rclone.conf in the same directory.
If the location is set to empty string "" or path to a file with name notfound, or the os null device
represented by value NUL on Windows and /dev/null on Unix systems, then rclone will keep the config file
in memory only.
The file format is basic INI: Sections of text, led by a [section] header and followed by key=value
entries on separate lines. In rclone each remote is represented by its own section, where the section
name defines the name of the remote. Options are specified as the key=value entries, where the key is
the option name without the --backend- prefix, in lowercase and with _ instead of -. E.g. option
--mega-hard-delete corresponds to key hard_delete. Only backend options can be specified. A special,
and required, key type identifies the storage system, where the value is the internal lowercase name as
returned by command rclone help backends. Comments are indicated by ; or # at the beginning of a line.
Example:
[megaremote]
type = mega
user = you@example.com
pass = PDPcQVVjVtzFY-GTdDFozqBhTdsPg3qH
Note that passwords are in obscured form. Also, many storage systems uses token-based authentication
instead of passwords, and this requires additional steps. It is easier, and safer, to use the
interactive command rclone config instead of manually editing the configuration file.
The configuration file will typically contain login information, and should therefore have restricted
permissions so that only the current user can read it. Rclone tries to ensure this when it writes the
file. You may also choose to encrypt the file.
When token-based authentication are used, the configuration file must be writable, because rclone needs
to update the tokens inside it.
–contimeout=TIME
Set the connection timeout. This should be in go time format which looks like 5s for 5 seconds, 10m for
10 minutes, or 3h30m.
The connection timeout is the amount of time rclone will wait for a connection to go through to a remote
object storage system. It is 1m by default.
–copy-dest=DIR
When using sync, copy or move DIR is checked in addition to the destination for files. If a file
identical to the source is found that file is server-side copied from DIR to the destination. This is
useful for incremental backup.
The remote in use must support server-side copy and you must use the same remote as the destination of
the sync. The compare directory must not overlap the destination directory.
See --compare-dest and --backup-dir.
–dedupe-mode MODE
Mode to run dedupe command in. One of interactive, skip, first, newest, oldest, rename. The default is
interactive.
See the dedupe command for more information as to what these options mean.
–disable FEATURE,FEATURE,...
This disables a comma separated list of optional features. For example to disable server-side move and
server-side copy use:
--disable move,copy
The features can be put in any case.
To see a list of which features can be disabled use:
--disable help
See the overview features and optional features to get an idea of which feature does what.
This flag can be useful for debugging and in exceptional circumstances (e.g. Google Drive limiting the
total volume of Server Side Copies to 100 GiB/day).
–disable-http2
This stops rclone from trying to use HTTP/2 if available. This can sometimes speed up transfers due to a
problem in the Go standard library.
–dscp VALUE
Specify a DSCP value or name to use in connections. This could help QoS system to identify traffic
class. BE, EF, DF, LE, CSx and AFxx are allowed.
See the description of differentiated services to get an idea of this field. Setting this to 1 (LE) to
identify the flow to SCAVENGER class can avoid occupying too much bandwidth in a network with DiffServ
support (RFC 8622).
For example, if you configured QoS on router to handle LE properly. Running:
rclone copy --dscp LE from:/from to:/to
would make the priority lower than usual internet flows.
This option has no effect on Windows (see golang/go#42728).
-n, –dry-run
Do a trial run with no permanent changes. Use this to see what rclone would do without actually doing
it. Useful when setting up the sync command which deletes files in the destination.
–expect-continue-timeout=TIME
This specifies the amount of time to wait for a server’s first response headers after fully writing the
request headers if the request has an “Expect: 100-continue” header. Not all backends support using
this.
Zero means no timeout and causes the body to be sent immediately, without waiting for the server to
approve. This time does not include the time to send the request header.
The default is 1s. Set to 0 to disable.
–error-on-no-transfer
By default, rclone will exit with return code 0 if there were no errors.
This option allows rclone to return exit code 9 if no files were transferred between the source and
destination. This allows using rclone in scripts, and triggering follow-on actions if data was copied,
or skipping if not.
NB: Enabling this option turns a usually non-fatal error into a potentially fatal one - please check and
adjust your scripts accordingly!
–fs-cache-expire-duration=TIME
When using rclone via the API rclone caches created remotes for 5 minutes by default in the “fs cache”.
This means that if you do repeated actions on the same remote then rclone won’t have to build it again
from scratch, which makes it more efficient.
This flag sets the time that the remotes are cached for. If you set it to 0 (or negative) then rclone
won’t cache the remotes at all.
Note that if you use some flags, eg --backup-dir and if this is set to 0 rclone may build two remotes
(one for the source or destination and one for the --backup-dir where it may have only built one before.
–fs-cache-expire-interval=TIME
This controls how often rclone checks for cached remotes to expire. See the --fs-cache-expire-duration
documentation above for more info. The default is 60s, set to 0 to disable expiry.
–header
Add an HTTP header for all transactions. The flag can be repeated to add multiple headers.
If you want to add headers only for uploads use --header-upload and if you want to add headers only for
downloads use --header-download.
This flag is supported for all HTTP based backends even those not supported by --header-upload and
--header-download so may be used as a workaround for those with care.
rclone ls remote:test --header "X-Rclone: Foo" --header "X-LetMeIn: Yes"
–header-download
Add an HTTP header for all download transactions. The flag can be repeated to add multiple headers.
rclone sync -i s3:test/src ~/dst --header-download "X-Amz-Meta-Test: Foo" --header-download "X-Amz-Meta-Test2: Bar"
See the GitHub issue here for currently supported backends.
–header-upload
Add an HTTP header for all upload transactions. The flag can be repeated to add multiple headers.
rclone sync -i ~/src s3:test/dst --header-upload "Content-Disposition: attachment; filename='cool.html'" --header-upload "X-Amz-Meta-Test: FooBar"
See the GitHub issue here for currently supported backends.
–human-readable
Rclone commands output values for sizes (e.g. number of bytes) and counts (e.g. number of files) either
as raw numbers, or in human-readable format.
In human-readable format the values are scaled to larger units, indicated with a suffix shown after the
value, and rounded to three decimals. Rclone consistently uses binary units (powers of 2) for sizes and
decimal units (powers of 10) for counts. The unit prefix for size is according to IEC standard notation,
e.g. Ki for kibi. Used with byte unit, 1 KiB means 1024 Byte. In list type of output, only the unit
prefix appended to the value (e.g. 9.762Ki), while in more textual output the full unit is shown
(e.g. 9.762 KiB). For counts the SI standard notation is used, e.g. prefix k for kilo. Used with file
counts, 1k means 1000 files.
The various list commands output raw numbers by default. Option --human-readable will make them output
values in human-readable format instead (with the short unit prefix).
The about command outputs human-readable by default, with a command-specific option --full to output the
raw numbers instead.
Command size outputs both human-readable and raw numbers in the same output.
The tree command also considers --human-readable, but it will not use the exact same notation as the
other commands: It rounds to one decimal, and uses single letter suffix, e.g. K instead of Ki. The
reason for this is that it relies on an external library.
The interactive command ncdu shows human-readable by default, and responds to key u for toggling
human-readable format.
–ignore-case-sync
Using this option will cause rclone to ignore the case of the files when synchronizing so files will not
be copied/synced when the existing filenames are the same, even if the casing is different.
–ignore-checksum
Normally rclone will check that the checksums of transferred files match, and give an error “corrupted on
transfer” if they don’t.
You can use this option to skip that check. You should only use it if you have had the “corrupted on
transfer” error message and you are sure you might want to transfer potentially corrupted data.
–ignore-existing
Using this option will make rclone unconditionally skip all files that exist on the destination, no
matter the content of these files.
While this isn’t a generally recommended option, it can be useful in cases where your files change due to
encryption. However, it cannot correct partial transfers in case a transfer was interrupted.
When performing a move/moveto command, this flag will leave skipped files in the source location
unchanged when a file with the same name exists on the destination.
–ignore-size
Normally rclone will look at modification time and size of files to see if they are equal. If you set
this flag then rclone will check only the modification time. If --checksum is set then it only checks
the checksum.
It will also cause rclone to skip verifying the sizes are the same after transfer.
This can be useful for transferring files to and from OneDrive which occasionally misreports the size of
image files (see #399 for more info).
-I, –ignore-times
Using this option will cause rclone to unconditionally upload all files regardless of the state of files
on the destination.
Normally rclone would skip any files that have the same modification time and are the same size (or have
the same checksum if using --checksum).
–immutable
Treat source and destination files as immutable and disallow modification.
With this option set, files will be created and deleted as requested, but existing files will never be
updated. If an existing file does not match between the source and destination, rclone will give the
error Source and destination exist but do not match: immutable file modified.
Note that only commands which transfer files (e.g. sync, copy, move) are affected by this behavior, and
only modification is disallowed. Files may still be deleted explicitly (e.g. delete, purge) or
implicitly (e.g. sync, move). Use copy --immutable if it is desired to avoid deletion as well as
modification.
This can be useful as an additional layer of protection for immutable or append-only data sets (notably
backup archives), where modification implies corruption and should not be propagated.
-i / –interactive
This flag can be used to tell rclone that you wish a manual confirmation before destructive operations.
It is recommended that you use this flag while learning rclone especially with rclone sync.
For example
$ rclone delete -i /tmp/dir
rclone: delete "important-file.txt"?
y) Yes, this is OK (default)
n) No, skip this
s) Skip all delete operations with no more questions
!) Do all delete operations with no more questions
q) Exit rclone now.
y/n/s/!/q> n
The options mean
• y: Yes, this operation should go ahead. You can also press Return for this to happen. You’ll be asked
every time unless you choose s or !.
• n: No, do not do this operation. You’ll be asked every time unless you choose s or !.
• s: Skip all the following operations of this type with no more questions. This takes effect until
rclone exits. If there are any different kind of operations you’ll be prompted for them.
• !: Do all the following operations with no more questions. Useful if you’ve decided that you don’t
mind rclone doing that kind of operation. This takes effect until rclone exits . If there are any
different kind of operations you’ll be prompted for them.
• q: Quit rclone now, just in case!
–leave-root
During rmdirs it will not remove root directory, even if it’s empty.
–log-file=FILE
Log all of rclone’s output to FILE. This is not active by default. This can be useful for tracking down
problems with syncs in combination with the -v flag. See the Logging section for more info.
If FILE exists then rclone will append to it.
Note that if you are using the logrotate program to manage rclone’s logs, then you should use the
copytruncate option as rclone doesn’t have a signal to rotate logs.
–log-format LIST
Comma separated list of log format options. Accepted options are date, time, microseconds, pid,
longfile, shortfile, UTC. Any other keywords will be silently ignored. pid will tag log messages with
process identifier which useful with rclone mount --daemon. Other accepted options are explained in the
go documentation. The default log format is “date,time”.
–log-level LEVEL
This sets the log level for rclone. The default log level is NOTICE.
DEBUG is equivalent to -vv. It outputs lots of debug info - useful for bug reports and really finding
out what rclone is doing.
INFO is equivalent to -v. It outputs information about each transfer and prints stats once a minute by
default.
NOTICE is the default log level if no logging flags are supplied. It outputs very little when things are
working normally. It outputs warnings and significant events.
ERROR is equivalent to -q. It only outputs error messages.
–use-json-log
This switches the log format to JSON for rclone. The fields of json log are level, msg, source, time.
–low-level-retries NUMBER
This controls the number of low level retries rclone does.
A low level retry is used to retry a failing operation - typically one HTTP request. This might be
uploading a chunk of a big file for example. You will see low level retries in the log with the -v flag.
This shouldn’t need to be changed from the default in normal operations. However, if you get a lot of
low level retries you may wish to reduce the value so rclone moves on to a high level retry (see the
--retries flag) quicker.
Disable low level retries with --low-level-retries 1.
–max-backlog=N
This is the maximum allowable backlog of files in a sync/copy/move queued for being checked or
transferred.
This can be set arbitrarily large. It will only use memory when the queue is in use. Note that it will
use in the order of N KiB of memory when the backlog is in use.
Setting this large allows rclone to calculate how many files are pending more accurately, give a more
accurate estimated finish time and make --order-by work more accurately.
Setting this small will make rclone more synchronous to the listings of the remote which may be
desirable.
Setting this to a negative number will make the backlog as large as possible.
–max-delete=N
This tells rclone not to delete more than N files. If that limit is exceeded then a fatal error will be
generated and rclone will stop the operation in progress.
–max-depth=N
This modifies the recursion depth for all the commands except purge.
So if you do rclone --max-depth 1 ls remote:path you will see only the files in the top level directory.
Using --max-depth 2 means you will see all the files in first two directory levels and so on.
For historical reasons the lsd command defaults to using a --max-depth of 1 - you can override this with
the command line flag.
You can use this command to disable recursion (with --max-depth 1).
Note that if you use this with sync and --delete-excluded the files not recursed through are considered
excluded and will be deleted on the destination. Test first with --dry-run if you are not sure what will
happen.
–max-duration=TIME
Rclone will stop scheduling new transfers when it has run for the duration specified.
Defaults to off.
When the limit is reached any existing transfers will complete.
Rclone won’t exit with an error if the transfer limit is reached.
–max-transfer=SIZE
Rclone will stop transferring when it has reached the size specified. Defaults to off.
When the limit is reached all transfers will stop immediately.
Rclone will exit with exit code 8 if the transfer limit is reached.
–metadata / -M
Setting this flag enables rclone to copy the metadata from the source to the destination. For local
backends this is ownership, permissions, xattr etc. See the #metadata for more info.
–metadata-set key=value
Add metadata key = value when uploading. This can be repeated as many times as required. See the
#metadata for more info.
–cutoff-mode=hard|soft|cautious
This modifies the behavior of --max-transfer Defaults to --cutoff-mode=hard.
Specifying --cutoff-mode=hard will stop transferring immediately when Rclone reaches the limit.
Specifying --cutoff-mode=soft will stop starting new transfers when Rclone reaches the limit.
Specifying --cutoff-mode=cautious will try to prevent Rclone from reaching the limit.
–modify-window=TIME
When checking whether a file has been modified, this is the maximum allowed time difference that a file
can have and still be considered equivalent.
The default is 1ns unless this is overridden by a remote. For example OS X only stores modification
times to the nearest second so if you are reading and writing to an OS X filing system this will be 1s by
default.
This command line flag allows you to override that computed default.
–multi-thread-cutoff=SIZE
When downloading files to the local backend above this size, rclone will use multiple threads to download
the file (default 250M).
Rclone preallocates the file (using fallocate(FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE) on unix or NTSetInformationFile on
Windows both of which takes no time) then each thread writes directly into the file at the correct place.
This means that rclone won’t create fragmented or sparse files and there won’t be any assembly time at
the end of the transfer.
The number of threads used to download is controlled by --multi-thread-streams.
Use -vv if you wish to see info about the threads.
This will work with the sync/copy/move commands and friends copyto/moveto. Multi thread downloads will
be used with rclone mount and rclone serve if --vfs-cache-mode is set to writes or above.
NB that this only works for a local destination but will work with any source.
NB that multi thread copies are disabled for local to local copies as they are faster without unless
--multi-thread-streams is set explicitly.
NB on Windows using multi-thread downloads will cause the resulting files to be sparse. Use
--local-no-sparse to disable sparse files (which may cause long delays at the start of downloads) or
disable multi-thread downloads with --multi-thread-streams 0
–multi-thread-streams=N
When using multi thread downloads (see above --multi-thread-cutoff) this sets the maximum number of
streams to use. Set to 0 to disable multi thread downloads (Default 4).
Exactly how many streams rclone uses for the download depends on the size of the file. To calculate the
number of download streams Rclone divides the size of the file by the --multi-thread-cutoff and rounds
up, up to the maximum set with --multi-thread-streams.
So if --multi-thread-cutoff 250M and --multi-thread-streams 4 are in effect (the defaults):
• 0..250 MiB files will be downloaded with 1 stream
• 250..500 MiB files will be downloaded with 2 streams
• 500..750 MiB files will be downloaded with 3 streams
• 750+ MiB files will be downloaded with 4 streams
–no-check-dest
The --no-check-dest can be used with move or copy and it causes rclone not to check the destination at
all when copying files.
This means that:
• the destination is not listed minimising the API calls
• files are always transferred
• this can cause duplicates on remotes which allow it (e.g. Google Drive)
• --retries 1 is recommended otherwise you’ll transfer everything again on a retry
This flag is useful to minimise the transactions if you know that none of the files are on the
destination.
This is a specialized flag which should be ignored by most users!
–no-gzip-encoding
Don’t set Accept-Encoding: gzip. This means that rclone won’t ask the server for compressed files
automatically. Useful if you’ve set the server to return files with Content-Encoding: gzip but you
uploaded compressed files.
There is no need to set this in normal operation, and doing so will decrease the network transfer
efficiency of rclone.
–no-traverse
The --no-traverse flag controls whether the destination file system is traversed when using the copy or
move commands. --no-traverse is not compatible with sync and will be ignored if you supply it with sync.
If you are only copying a small number of files (or are filtering most of the files) and/or have a large
number of files on the destination then --no-traverse will stop rclone listing the destination and save
time.
However, if you are copying a large number of files, especially if you are doing a copy where lots of the
files under consideration haven’t changed and won’t need copying then you shouldn’t use --no-traverse.
See rclone copy for an example of how to use it.
–no-unicode-normalization
Don’t normalize unicode characters in filenames during the sync routine.
Sometimes, an operating system will store filenames containing unicode parts in their decomposed form
(particularly macOS). Some cloud storage systems will then recompose the unicode, resulting in duplicate
files if the data is ever copied back to a local filesystem.
Using this flag will disable that functionality, treating each unicode character as unique. For example,
by default é and é will be normalized into the same character. With --no-unicode-normalization they
will be treated as unique characters.
–no-update-modtime
When using this flag, rclone won’t update modification times of remote files if they are incorrect as it
would normally.
This can be used if the remote is being synced with another tool also (e.g. the Google Drive client).
–order-by string
The --order-by flag controls the order in which files in the backlog are processed in rclone sync, rclone
copy and rclone move.
The order by string is constructed like this. The first part describes what aspect is being measured:
• size - order by the size of the files
• name - order by the full path of the files
• modtime - order by the modification date of the files
This can have a modifier appended with a comma:
• ascending or asc - order so that the smallest (or oldest) is processed first
• descending or desc - order so that the largest (or newest) is processed first
• mixed - order so that the smallest is processed first for some threads and the largest for others
If the modifier is mixed then it can have an optional percentage (which defaults to 50),
e.g. size,mixed,25 which means that 25% of the threads should be taking the smallest items and 75% the
largest. The threads which take the smallest first will always take the smallest first and likewise the
largest first threads. The mixed mode can be useful to minimise the transfer time when you are
transferring a mixture of large and small files - the large files are guaranteed upload threads and
bandwidth and the small files will be processed continuously.
If no modifier is supplied then the order is ascending.
For example
• --order-by size,desc - send the largest files first
• --order-by modtime,ascending - send the oldest files first
• --order-by name - send the files with alphabetically by path first
If the --order-by flag is not supplied or it is supplied with an empty string then the default ordering
will be used which is as scanned. With --checkers 1 this is mostly alphabetical, however with the
default --checkers 8 it is somewhat random.
Limitations
The --order-by flag does not do a separate pass over the data. This means that it may transfer some
files out of the order specified if
• there are no files in the backlog or the source has not been fully scanned yet
• there are more than –max-backlog files in the backlog
Rclone will do its best to transfer the best file it has so in practice this should not cause a problem.
Think of --order-by as being more of a best efforts flag rather than a perfect ordering.
If you want perfect ordering then you will need to specify –check-first which will find all the files
which need transferring first before transferring any.
–password-command SpaceSepList
This flag supplies a program which should supply the config password when run. This is an alternative to
rclone prompting for the password or setting the RCLONE_CONFIG_PASS variable.
The argument to this should be a command with a space separated list of arguments. If one of the
arguments has a space in then enclose it in ", if you want a literal " in an argument then enclose the
argument in " and double the ". See CSV encoding for more info.
Eg
--password-command echo hello
--password-command echo "hello with space"
--password-command echo "hello with ""quotes"" and space"
See the Configuration Encryption for more info.
See a https://github.com/rclone/rclone/wiki/Windows-Powershell-use-rclone-password-command-for-Config-
file- password Windows PowerShell example on the Wiki.
-P, –progress
This flag makes rclone update the stats in a static block in the terminal providing a realtime overview
of the transfer.
Any log messages will scroll above the static block. Log messages will push the static block down to the
bottom of the terminal where it will stay.
Normally this is updated every 500mS but this period can be overridden with the --stats flag.
This can be used with the --stats-one-line flag for a simpler display.
Note: On Windows until this bug is fixed all non-ASCII characters will be replaced with . when
--progress is in use.
–progress-terminal-title
This flag, when used with -P/--progress, will print the string ETA: %s to the terminal title.
-q, –quiet
This flag will limit rclone’s output to error messages only.
–refresh-times
The --refresh-times flag can be used to update modification times of existing files when they are out of
sync on backends which don’t support hashes.
This is useful if you uploaded files with the incorrect timestamps and you now wish to correct them.
This flag is only useful for destinations which don’t support hashes (e.g. crypt).
This can be used any of the sync commands sync, copy or move.
To use this flag you will need to be doing a modification time sync (so not using --size-only or
--checksum). The flag will have no effect when using --size-only or --checksum.
If this flag is used when rclone comes to upload a file it will check to see if there is an existing file
on the destination. If this file matches the source with size (and checksum if available) but has a
differing timestamp then instead of re-uploading it, rclone will update the timestamp on the destination
file. If the checksum does not match rclone will upload the new file. If the checksum is absent (e.g.
on a crypt backend) then rclone will update the timestamp.
Note that some remotes can’t set the modification time without re-uploading the file so this flag is less
useful on them.
Normally if you are doing a modification time sync rclone will update modification times without
--refresh-times provided that the remote supports checksums and the checksums match on the file. However
if the checksums are absent then rclone will upload the file rather than setting the timestamp as this is
the safe behaviour.
–retries int
Retry the entire sync if it fails this many times it fails (default 3).
Some remotes can be unreliable and a few retries help pick up the files which didn’t get transferred
because of errors.
Disable retries with --retries 1.
–retries-sleep=TIME
This sets the interval between each retry specified by --retries
The default is 0. Use 0 to disable.
–server-side-across-configs
Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy or move) to work across different configurations.
This can be useful if you wish to do a server-side copy or move between two remotes which use the same
backend but are configured differently.
Note that this isn’t enabled by default because it isn’t easy for rclone to tell if it will work between
any two configurations.
–size-only
Normally rclone will look at modification time and size of files to see if they are equal. If you set
this flag then rclone will check only the size.
This can be useful transferring files from Dropbox which have been modified by the desktop sync client
which doesn’t set checksums of modification times in the same way as rclone.
–stats=TIME
Commands which transfer data (sync, copy, copyto, move, moveto) will print data transfer stats at regular
intervals to show their progress.
This sets the interval.
The default is 1m. Use 0 to disable.
If you set the stats interval then all commands can show stats. This can be useful when running other
commands, check or mount for example.
Stats are logged at INFO level by default which means they won’t show at default log level NOTICE. Use
--stats-log-level NOTICE or -v to make them show. See the Logging section for more info on log levels.
Note that on macOS you can send a SIGINFO (which is normally ctrl-T in the terminal) to make the stats
print immediately.
–stats-file-name-length integer
By default, the --stats output will truncate file names and paths longer than 40 characters. This is
equivalent to providing --stats-file-name-length 40. Use --stats-file-name-length 0 to disable any
truncation of file names printed by stats.
–stats-log-level string
Log level to show --stats output at. This can be DEBUG, INFO, NOTICE, or ERROR. The default is INFO.
This means at the default level of logging which is NOTICE the stats won’t show - if you want them to
then use --stats-log-level NOTICE. See the Logging section for more info on log levels.
–stats-one-line
When this is specified, rclone condenses the stats into a single line showing the most important stats
only.
–stats-one-line-date
When this is specified, rclone enables the single-line stats and prepends the display with a date string.
The default is 2006/01/02 15:04:05 -
–stats-one-line-date-format
When this is specified, rclone enables the single-line stats and prepends the display with a
user-supplied date string. The date string MUST be enclosed in quotes. Follow golang specs for date
formatting syntax.
–stats-unit=bits|bytes
By default, data transfer rates will be printed in bytes per second.
This option allows the data rate to be printed in bits per second.
Data transfer volume will still be reported in bytes.
The rate is reported as a binary unit, not SI unit. So 1 Mbit/s equals 1,048,576 bit/s and not 1,000,000
bit/s.
The default is bytes.
–suffix=SUFFIX
When using sync, copy or move any files which would have been overwritten or deleted will have the suffix
added to them. If there is a file with the same path (after the suffix has been added), then it will be
overwritten.
The remote in use must support server-side move or copy and you must use the same remote as the
destination of the sync.
This is for use with files to add the suffix in the current directory or with --backup-dir. See
--backup-dir for more info.
For example
rclone copy -i /path/to/local/file remote:current --suffix .bak
will copy /path/to/local to remote:current, but for any files which would have been updated or deleted
have .bak added.
If using rclone sync with --suffix and without --backup-dir then it is recommended to put a filter rule
in excluding the suffix otherwise the sync will delete the backup files.
rclone sync -i /path/to/local/file remote:current --suffix .bak --exclude "*.bak"
–suffix-keep-extension
When using --suffix, setting this causes rclone put the SUFFIX before the extension of the files that it
backs up rather than after.
So let’s say we had --suffix -2019-01-01, without the flag file.txt would be backed up to
file.txt-2019-01-01 and with the flag it would be backed up to file-2019-01-01.txt. This can be helpful
to make sure the suffixed files can still be opened.
–syslog
On capable OSes (not Windows or Plan9) send all log output to syslog.
This can be useful for running rclone in a script or rclone mount.
–syslog-facility string
If using --syslog this sets the syslog facility (e.g. KERN, USER). See man syslog for a list of possible
facilities. The default facility is DAEMON.
–temp-dir=DIR
Specify the directory rclone will use for temporary files, to override the default. Make sure the
directory exists and have accessible permissions.
By default the operating system’s temp directory will be used: - On Unix systems, $TMPDIR if non-empty,
else /tmp. - On Windows, the first non-empty value from %TMP%, %TEMP%, %USERPROFILE%, or the Windows
directory.
When overriding the default with this option, the specified path will be set as value of environment
variable TMPDIR on Unix systems and TMP and TEMP on Windows.
You can use the config paths command to see the current value.
–tpslimit float
Limit transactions per second to this number. Default is 0 which is used to mean unlimited transactions
per second.
A transaction is roughly defined as an API call; its exact meaning will depend on the backend. For HTTP
based backends it is an HTTP PUT/GET/POST/etc and its response. For FTP/SFTP it is a round trip
transaction over TCP.
For example, to limit rclone to 10 transactions per second use --tpslimit 10, or to 1 transaction every 2
seconds use --tpslimit 0.5.
Use this when the number of transactions per second from rclone is causing a problem with the cloud
storage provider (e.g. getting you banned or rate limited).
This can be very useful for rclone mount to control the behaviour of applications using it.
This limit applies to all HTTP based backends and to the FTP and SFTP backends. It does not apply to the
local backend or the Storj backend.
See also --tpslimit-burst.
–tpslimit-burst int
Max burst of transactions for --tpslimit (default 1).
Normally --tpslimit will do exactly the number of transaction per second specified. However if you
supply --tps-burst then rclone can save up some transactions from when it was idle giving a burst of up
to the parameter supplied.
For example if you provide --tpslimit-burst 10 then if rclone has been idle for more than 10*--tpslimit
then it can do 10 transactions very quickly before they are limited again.
This may be used to increase performance of --tpslimit without changing the long term average number of
transactions per second.
–track-renames
By default, rclone doesn’t keep track of renamed files, so if you rename a file locally then sync it to a
remote, rclone will delete the old file on the remote and upload a new copy.
An rclone sync with --track-renames runs like a normal sync, but keeps track of objects which exist in
the destination but not in the source (which would normally be deleted), and which objects exist in the
source but not the destination (which would normally be transferred). These objects are then candidates
for renaming.
After the sync, rclone matches up the source only and destination only objects using the
--track-renames-strategy specified and either renames the destination object or transfers the source and
deletes the destination object. --track-renames is stateless like all of rclone’s syncs.
To use this flag the destination must support server-side copy or server-side move, and to use a hash
based --track-renames-strategy (the default) the source and the destination must have a compatible hash.
If the destination does not support server-side copy or move, rclone will fall back to the default
behaviour and log an error level message to the console.
Encrypted destinations are not currently supported by --track-renames if --track-renames-strategy
includes hash.
Note that --track-renames is incompatible with --no-traverse and that it uses extra memory to keep track
of all the rename candidates.
Note also that --track-renames is incompatible with --delete-before and will select --delete-after
instead of --delete-during.
–track-renames-strategy (hash,modtime,leaf,size)
This option changes the file matching criteria for --track-renames.
The matching is controlled by a comma separated selection of these tokens:
• modtime - the modification time of the file - not supported on all backends
• hash - the hash of the file contents - not supported on all backends
• leaf - the name of the file not including its directory name
• size - the size of the file (this is always enabled)
The default option is hash.
Using --track-renames-strategy modtime,leaf would match files based on modification time, the leaf of the
file name and the size only.
Using --track-renames-strategy modtime or leaf can enable --track-renames support for encrypted
destinations.
Note that the hash strategy is not supported with encrypted destinations.
–delete-(before,during,after)
This option allows you to specify when files on your destination are deleted when you sync folders.
Specifying the value --delete-before will delete all files present on the destination, but not on the
source before starting the transfer of any new or updated files. This uses two passes through the file
systems, one for the deletions and one for the copies.
Specifying --delete-during will delete files while checking and uploading files. This is the fastest
option and uses the least memory.
Specifying --delete-after (the default value) will delay deletion of files until all new/updated files
have been successfully transferred. The files to be deleted are collected in the copy pass then deleted
after the copy pass has completed successfully. The files to be deleted are held in memory so this mode
may use more memory. This is the safest mode as it will only delete files if there have been no errors
subsequent to that. If there have been errors before the deletions start then you will get the message
not deleting files as there were IO errors.
–fast-list
When doing anything which involves a directory listing (e.g. sync, copy, ls - in fact nearly every
command), rclone normally lists a directory and processes it before using more directory lists to process
any subdirectories. This can be parallelised and works very quickly using the least amount of memory.
However, some remotes have a way of listing all files beneath a directory in one (or a small number) of
transactions. These tend to be the bucket-based remotes (e.g. S3, B2, GCS, Swift).
If you use the --fast-list flag then rclone will use this method for listing directories. This will have
the following consequences for the listing:
• It will use fewer transactions (important if you pay for them)
• It will use more memory. Rclone has to load the whole listing into memory.
• It may be faster because it uses fewer transactions
• It may be slower because it can’t be parallelized
rclone should always give identical results with and without --fast-list.
If you pay for transactions and can fit your entire sync listing into memory then --fast-list is
recommended. If you have a very big sync to do then don’t use --fast-list otherwise you will run out of
memory.
If you use --fast-list on a remote which doesn’t support it, then rclone will just ignore it.
–timeout=TIME
This sets the IO idle timeout. If a transfer has started but then becomes idle for this long it is
considered broken and disconnected.
The default is 5m. Set to 0 to disable.
–transfers=N
The number of file transfers to run in parallel. It can sometimes be useful to set this to a smaller
number if the remote is giving a lot of timeouts or bigger if you have lots of bandwidth and a fast
remote.
The default is to run 4 file transfers in parallel.
Look at –multi-thread-streams if you would like to control single file transfers.
-u, –update
This forces rclone to skip any files which exist on the destination and have a modified time that is
newer than the source file.
This can be useful in avoiding needless transfers when transferring to a remote which doesn’t support
modification times directly (or when using --use-server-modtime to avoid extra API calls) as it is more
accurate than a --size-only check and faster than using --checksum. On such remotes (or when using
--use-server-modtime) the time checked will be the uploaded time.
If an existing destination file has a modification time older than the source file’s, it will be updated
if the sizes are different. If the sizes are the same, it will be updated if the checksum is different
or not available.
If an existing destination file has a modification time equal (within the computed modify window) to the
source file’s, it will be updated if the sizes are different. The checksum will not be checked in this
case unless the --checksum flag is provided.
In all other cases the file will not be updated.
Consider using the --modify-window flag to compensate for time skews between the source and the backend,
for backends that do not support mod times, and instead use uploaded times. However, if the backend does
not support checksums, note that syncing or copying within the time skew window may still result in
additional transfers for safety.
–use-mmap
If this flag is set then rclone will use anonymous memory allocated by mmap on Unix based platforms and
VirtualAlloc on Windows for its transfer buffers (size controlled by --buffer-size). Memory allocated
like this does not go on the Go heap and can be returned to the OS immediately when it is finished with.
If this flag is not set then rclone will allocate and free the buffers using the Go memory allocator
which may use more memory as memory pages are returned less aggressively to the OS.
It is possible this does not work well on all platforms so it is disabled by default; in the future it
may be enabled by default.
–use-server-modtime
Some object-store backends (e.g, Swift, S3) do not preserve file modification times (modtime). On these
backends, rclone stores the original modtime as additional metadata on the object. By default it will
make an API call to retrieve the metadata when the modtime is needed by an operation.
Use this flag to disable the extra API call and rely instead on the server’s modified time. In cases
such as a local to remote sync using --update, knowing the local file is newer than the time it was last
uploaded to the remote is sufficient. In those cases, this flag can speed up the process and reduce the
number of API calls necessary.
Using this flag on a sync operation without also using --update would cause all files modified at any
time other than the last upload time to be uploaded again, which is probably not what you want.
-v, -vv, –verbose
With -v rclone will tell you about each file that is transferred and a small number of significant
events.
With -vv rclone will become very verbose telling you about every file it considers and transfers. Please
send bug reports with a log with this setting.
When setting verbosity as an environment variable, use RCLONE_VERBOSE=1 or RCLONE_VERBOSE=2 for -v and
-vv respectively.
-V, –version
Prints the version number
SSL/TLS options
The outgoing SSL/TLS connections rclone makes can be controlled with these options. For example this can
be very useful with the HTTP or WebDAV backends. Rclone HTTP servers have their own set of configuration
for SSL/TLS which you can find in their documentation.
–ca-cert string
This loads the PEM encoded certificate authority certificate and uses it to verify the certificates of
the servers rclone connects to.
If you have generated certificates signed with a local CA then you will need this flag to connect to
servers using those certificates.
–client-cert string
This loads the PEM encoded client side certificate.
This is used for mutual TLS authentication.
The --client-key flag is required too when using this.
–client-key string
This loads the PEM encoded client side private key used for mutual TLS authentication. Used in
conjunction with --client-cert.
–no-check-certificate=true/false
--no-check-certificate controls whether a client verifies the server’s certificate chain and host name.
If --no-check-certificate is true, TLS accepts any certificate presented by the server and any host name
in that certificate. In this mode, TLS is susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks.
This option defaults to false.
This should be used only for testing.
Configuration Encryption
Your configuration file contains information for logging in to your cloud services. This means that you
should keep your rclone.conf file in a secure location.
If you are in an environment where that isn’t possible, you can add a password to your configuration.
This means that you will have to supply the password every time you start rclone.
To add a password to your rclone configuration, execute rclone config.
>rclone config
Current remotes:
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/s/q>
Go into s, Set configuration password:
e/n/d/s/q> s
Your configuration is not encrypted.
If you add a password, you will protect your login information to cloud services.
a) Add Password
q) Quit to main menu
a/q> a
Enter NEW configuration password:
password:
Confirm NEW password:
password:
Password set
Your configuration is encrypted.
c) Change Password
u) Unencrypt configuration
q) Quit to main menu
c/u/q>
Your configuration is now encrypted, and every time you start rclone you will have to supply the
password. See below for details. In the same menu, you can change the password or completely remove
encryption from your configuration.
There is no way to recover the configuration if you lose your password.
rclone uses nacl secretbox which in turn uses XSalsa20 and Poly1305 to encrypt and authenticate your
configuration with secret-key cryptography. The password is SHA-256 hashed, which produces the key for
secretbox. The hashed password is not stored.
While this provides very good security, we do not recommend storing your encrypted rclone configuration
in public if it contains sensitive information, maybe except if you use a very strong password.
If it is safe in your environment, you can set the RCLONE_CONFIG_PASS environment variable to contain
your password, in which case it will be used for decrypting the configuration.
You can set this for a session from a script. For unix like systems save this to a file called
set-rclone-password:
#!/bin/echo Source this file don't run it
read -s RCLONE_CONFIG_PASS
export RCLONE_CONFIG_PASS
Then source the file when you want to use it. From the shell you would do source set-rclone-password.
It will then ask you for the password and set it in the environment variable.
An alternate means of supplying the password is to provide a script which will retrieve the password and
print on standard output. This script should have a fully specified path name and not rely on any
environment variables. The script is supplied either via --password-command="..." command line argument
or via the RCLONE_PASSWORD_COMMAND environment variable.
One useful example of this is using the passwordstore application to retrieve the password:
export RCLONE_PASSWORD_COMMAND="pass rclone/config"
If the passwordstore password manager holds the password for the rclone configuration, using the script
method means the password is primarily protected by the passwordstore system, and is never embedded in
the clear in scripts, nor available for examination using the standard commands available. It is quite
possible with long running rclone sessions for copies of passwords to be innocently captured in log files
or terminal scroll buffers, etc. Using the script method of supplying the password enhances the security
of the config password considerably.
If you are running rclone inside a script, unless you are using the --password-command method, you might
want to disable password prompts. To do that, pass the parameter --ask-password=false to rclone. This
will make rclone fail instead of asking for a password if RCLONE_CONFIG_PASS doesn’t contain a valid
password, and --password-command has not been supplied.
Whenever running commands that may be affected by options in a configuration file, rclone will look for
an existing file according to the rules described above, and load any it finds. If an encrypted file is
found, this includes decrypting it, with the possible consequence of a password prompt. When executing a
command line that you know are not actually using anything from such a configuration file, you can avoid
it being loaded by overriding the location, e.g. with one of the documented special values for
memory-only configuration. Since only backend options can be stored in configuration files, this is
normally unnecessary for commands that do not operate on backends, e.g. genautocomplete. However, it
will be relevant for commands that do operate on backends in general, but are used without referencing a
stored remote, e.g. listing local filesystem paths, or connection strings: rclone --config="" ls .
Developer options
These options are useful when developing or debugging rclone. There are also some more remote specific
options which aren’t documented here which are used for testing. These start with remote name e.g.
--drive-test-option - see the docs for the remote in question.
–cpuprofile=FILE
Write CPU profile to file. This can be analysed with go tool pprof.
–dump flag,flag,flag
The --dump flag takes a comma separated list of flags to dump info about.
Note that some headers including Accept-Encoding as shown may not be correct in the request and the
response may not show Content-Encoding if the go standard libraries auto gzip encoding was in effect. In
this case the body of the request will be gunzipped before showing it.
The available flags are:
–dump headers
Dump HTTP headers with Authorization: lines removed. May still contain sensitive info. Can be very
verbose. Useful for debugging only.
Use --dump auth if you do want the Authorization: headers.
–dump bodies
Dump HTTP headers and bodies - may contain sensitive info. Can be very verbose. Useful for debugging
only.
Note that the bodies are buffered in memory so don’t use this for enormous files.
–dump requests
Like --dump bodies but dumps the request bodies and the response headers. Useful for debugging download
problems.
–dump responses
Like --dump bodies but dumps the response bodies and the request headers. Useful for debugging upload
problems.
–dump auth
Dump HTTP headers - will contain sensitive info such as Authorization: headers - use --dump headers to
dump without Authorization: headers. Can be very verbose. Useful for debugging only.
–dump filters
Dump the filters to the output. Useful to see exactly what include and exclude options are filtering on.
–dump goroutines
This dumps a list of the running go-routines at the end of the command to standard output.
–dump openfiles
This dumps a list of the open files at the end of the command. It uses the lsof command to do that so
you’ll need that installed to use it.
–memprofile=FILE
Write memory profile to file. This can be analysed with go tool pprof.
Filtering
For the filtering options
• --delete-excluded
• --filter
• --filter-from
• --exclude
• --exclude-from
• --exclude-if-present
• --include
• --include-from
• --files-from
• --files-from-raw
• --min-size
• --max-size
• --min-age
• --max-age
• --dump filters
See the filtering section.
Remote control
For the remote control options and for instructions on how to remote control rclone
• --rc
• and anything starting with --rc-
See the remote control section.
Logging
rclone has 4 levels of logging, ERROR, NOTICE, INFO and DEBUG.
By default, rclone logs to standard error. This means you can redirect standard error and still see the
normal output of rclone commands (e.g. rclone ls).
By default, rclone will produce Error and Notice level messages.
If you use the -q flag, rclone will only produce Error messages.
If you use the -v flag, rclone will produce Error, Notice and Info messages.
If you use the -vv flag, rclone will produce Error, Notice, Info and Debug messages.
You can also control the log levels with the --log-level flag.
If you use the --log-file=FILE option, rclone will redirect Error, Info and Debug messages along with
standard error to FILE.
If you use the --syslog flag then rclone will log to syslog and the --syslog-facility control which
facility it uses.
Rclone prefixes all log messages with their level in capitals, e.g. INFO which makes it easy to grep the
log file for different kinds of information.
Exit Code
If any errors occur during the command execution, rclone will exit with a non-zero exit code. This
allows scripts to detect when rclone operations have failed.
During the startup phase, rclone will exit immediately if an error is detected in the configuration.
There will always be a log message immediately before exiting.
When rclone is running it will accumulate errors as it goes along, and only exit with a non-zero exit
code if (after retries) there were still failed transfers. For every error counted there will be a high
priority log message (visible with -q) showing the message and which file caused the problem. A high
priority message is also shown when starting a retry so the user can see that any previous error messages
may not be valid after the retry. If rclone has done a retry it will log a high priority message if the
retry was successful.
List of exit codes
• 0 - success
• 1 - Syntax or usage error
• 2 - Error not otherwise categorised
• 3 - Directory not found
• 4 - File not found
• 5 - Temporary error (one that more retries might fix) (Retry errors)
• 6 - Less serious errors (like 461 errors from dropbox) (NoRetry errors)
• 7 - Fatal error (one that more retries won’t fix, like account suspended) (Fatal errors)
• 8 - Transfer exceeded - limit set by –max-transfer reached
• 9 - Operation successful, but no files transferred
Environment Variables
Rclone can be configured entirely using environment variables. These can be used to set defaults for
options or config file entries.
Options
Every option in rclone can have its default set by environment variable.
To find the name of the environment variable, first, take the long option name, strip the leading --,
change - to _, make upper case and prepend RCLONE_.
For example, to always set --stats 5s, set the environment variable RCLONE_STATS=5s. If you set stats on
the command line this will override the environment variable setting.
Or to always use the trash in drive --drive-use-trash, set RCLONE_DRIVE_USE_TRASH=true.
Verbosity is slightly different, the environment variable equivalent of --verbose or -v is
RCLONE_VERBOSE=1, or for -vv, RCLONE_VERBOSE=2.
The same parser is used for the options and the environment variables so they take exactly the same form.
The options set by environment variables can be seen with the -vv flag, e.g. rclone version -vv.
Config file
You can set defaults for values in the config file on an individual remote basis. The names of the
config items are documented in the page for each backend.
To find the name of the environment variable, you need to set, take RCLONE_CONFIG_ + name of remote + _ +
name of config file option and make it all uppercase.
For example, to configure an S3 remote named mys3: without a config file (using unix ways of setting
environment variables):
$ export RCLONE_CONFIG_MYS3_TYPE=s3
$ export RCLONE_CONFIG_MYS3_ACCESS_KEY_ID=XXX
$ export RCLONE_CONFIG_MYS3_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY=XXX
$ rclone lsd mys3:
-1 2016-09-21 12:54:21 -1 my-bucket
$ rclone listremotes | grep mys3
mys3:
Note that if you want to create a remote using environment variables you must create the ..._TYPE
variable as above.
Note that the name of a remote created using environment variable is case insensitive, in contrast to
regular remotes stored in config file as documented above. You must write the name in uppercase in the
environment variable, but as seen from example above it will be listed and can be accessed in lowercase,
while you can also refer to the same remote in uppercase:
$ rclone lsd mys3:
-1 2016-09-21 12:54:21 -1 my-bucket
$ rclone lsd MYS3:
-1 2016-09-21 12:54:21 -1 my-bucket
Note that you can only set the options of the immediate backend, so RCLONE_CONFIG_MYS3CRYPT_ACCESS_KEY_ID
has no effect, if myS3Crypt is a crypt remote based on an S3 remote. However RCLONE_S3_ACCESS_KEY_ID
will set the access key of all remotes using S3, including myS3Crypt.
Note also that now rclone has connection strings, it is probably easier to use those instead which makes
the above example
rclone lsd :s3,access_key_id=XXX,secret_access_key=XXX:
Precedence
The various different methods of backend configuration are read in this order and the first one with a
value is used.
• Parameters in connection strings, e.g. myRemote,skip_links:
• Flag values as supplied on the command line, e.g. --skip-links
• Remote specific environment vars, e.g. RCLONE_CONFIG_MYREMOTE_SKIP_LINKS (see above).
• Backend-specific environment vars, e.g. RCLONE_LOCAL_SKIP_LINKS.
• Backend generic environment vars, e.g. RCLONE_SKIP_LINKS.
• Config file, e.g. skip_links = true.
• Default values, e.g. false - these can’t be changed.
So if both --skip-links is supplied on the command line and an environment variable
RCLONE_LOCAL_SKIP_LINKS is set, the command line flag will take preference.
The backend configurations set by environment variables can be seen with the -vv flag, e.g. rclone about
myRemote: -vv.
For non backend configuration the order is as follows:
• Flag values as supplied on the command line, e.g. --stats 5s.
• Environment vars, e.g. RCLONE_STATS=5s.
• Default values, e.g. 1m - these can’t be changed.
Other environment variables
• RCLONE_CONFIG_PASS set to contain your config file password (see Configuration Encryption section)
• HTTP_PROXY, HTTPS_PROXY and NO_PROXY (or the lowercase versions thereof).
• HTTPS_PROXY takes precedence over HTTP_PROXY for https requests.
• The environment values may be either a complete URL or a “host[:port]” for, in which case the “http”
scheme is assumed.
• USER and LOGNAME values are used as fallbacks for current username. The primary method for looking up
username is OS-specific: Windows API on Windows, real user ID in /etc/passwd on Unix systems. In the
documentation the current username is simply referred to as $USER.
• RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR - rclone sets this variable for use in config files and sub processes to point to the
directory holding the config file.
The options set by environment variables can be seen with the -vv and --log-level=DEBUG flags,
e.g. rclone version -vv.
Configuring rclone on a remote / headless machine
Some of the configurations (those involving oauth2) require an Internet connected web browser.
If you are trying to set rclone up on a remote or headless box with no browser available on it (e.g. a
NAS or a server in a datacenter) then you will need to use an alternative means of configuration. There
are two ways of doing it, described below.
Configuring using rclone authorize
On the headless box run rclone config but answer N to the Use auto config? question.
...
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes (default)
n) No
y/n> n
For this to work, you will need rclone available on a machine that has
a web browser available.
For more help and alternate methods see: https://rclone.org/remote_setup/
Execute the following on the machine with the web browser (same rclone
version recommended):
rclone authorize "amazon cloud drive"
Then paste the result below:
result>
Then on your main desktop machine
rclone authorize "amazon cloud drive"
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
Paste the following into your remote machine --->
SECRET_TOKEN
<---End paste
Then back to the headless box, paste in the code
result> SECRET_TOKEN
--------------------
[acd12]
client_id =
client_secret =
token = SECRET_TOKEN
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d>
Configuring by copying the config file
Rclone stores all of its config in a single configuration file. This can easily be copied to configure a
remote rclone.
So first configure rclone on your desktop machine with
rclone config
to set up the config file.
Find the config file by running rclone config file, for example
$ rclone config file
Configuration file is stored at:
/home/user/.rclone.conf
Now transfer it to the remote box (scp, cut paste, ftp, sftp, etc.) and place it in the correct place
(use rclone config file on the remote box to find out where).
Configuring using SSH Tunnel
Linux and MacOS users can utilize SSH Tunnel to redirect the headless box port 53682 to local machine by
using the following command:
ssh -L localhost:53682:localhost:53682 username@remote_server
Then on the headless box run rclone config and answer Y to the Use auto config? question.
...
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes (default)
n) No
y/n> y
Then copy and paste the auth url http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth?state=xxxxxxxxxxxx to the browser on your
local machine, complete the auth and it is done.
Filtering, includes and excludes
Filter flags determine which files rclone sync, move, ls, lsl, md5sum, sha1sum, size, delete, check and
similar commands apply to.
They are specified in terms of path/file name patterns; path/file lists; file age and size, or presence
of a file in a directory. Bucket based remotes without the concept of directory apply filters to object
key, age and size in an analogous way.
Rclone purge does not obey filters.
To test filters without risk of damage to data, apply them to rclone ls, or with the --dry-run and -vv
flags.
Rclone filter patterns can only be used in filter command line options, not in the specification of a
remote.
E.g. rclone copy "remote:dir*.jpg" /path/to/dir does not have a filter effect. rclone copy remote:dir
/path/to/dir --include "*.jpg" does.
Important Avoid mixing any two of --include..., --exclude... or --filter... flags in an rclone command.
The results may not be what you expect. Instead use a --filter... flag.
Patterns for matching path/file names
Pattern syntax
Here is a formal definition of the pattern syntax, examples are below.
Rclone matching rules follow a glob style:
* matches any sequence of non-separator (/) characters
** matches any sequence of characters including / separators
? matches any single non-separator (/) character
[ [ ! ] { character-range } ]
character class (must be non-empty)
{ pattern-list }
pattern alternatives
{{ regexp }}
regular expression to match
c matches character c (c != *, **, ?, \, [, {, })
\c matches reserved character c (c = *, **, ?, \, [, {, }) or character class
character-range:
c matches character c (c != \, -, ])
\c matches reserved character c (c = \, -, ])
lo - hi matches character c for lo <= c <= hi
pattern-list:
pattern { , pattern }
comma-separated (without spaces) patterns
character classes (see Go regular expression reference) include:
Named character classes (e.g. [\d], [^\d], [\D], [^\D])
Perl character classes (e.g. \s, \S, \w, \W)
ASCII character classes (e.g. [[:alnum:]], [[:alpha:]], [[:punct:]], [[:xdigit:]])
regexp for advanced users to insert a regular expression - see below for more info:
Any re2 regular expression not containing `}}`
If the filter pattern starts with a / then it only matches at the top level of the directory tree,
relative to the root of the remote (not necessarily the root of the drive). If it does not start with /
then it is matched starting at the end of the path/file name but it only matches a complete path element
- it must match from a / separator or the beginning of the path/file.
file.jpg - matches "file.jpg"
- matches "directory/file.jpg"
- doesn't match "afile.jpg"
- doesn't match "directory/afile.jpg"
/file.jpg - matches "file.jpg" in the root directory of the remote
- doesn't match "afile.jpg"
- doesn't match "directory/file.jpg"
The top level of the remote may not be the top level of the drive.
E.g. for a Microsoft Windows local directory structure
F:
├── bkp
├── data
│ ├── excl
│ │ ├── 123.jpg
│ │ └── 456.jpg
│ ├── incl
│ │ └── document.pdf
To copy the contents of folder data into folder bkp excluding the contents of subfolder exclthe following
command treats F:\data and F:\bkp as top level for filtering.
rclone copy F:\data\ F:\bkp\ --exclude=/excl/**
Important Use / in path/file name patterns and not \ even if running on Microsoft Windows.
Simple patterns are case sensitive unless the --ignore-case flag is used.
Without --ignore-case (default)
potato - matches "potato"
- doesn't match "POTATO"
With --ignore-case
potato - matches "potato"
- matches "POTATO"
Using regular expressions in filter patterns
The syntax of filter patterns is glob style matching (like bash uses) to make things easy for users.
However this does not provide absolute control over the matching, so for advanced users rclone also
provides a regular expression syntax.
The regular expressions used are as defined in the Go regular expression reference. Regular expressions
should be enclosed in {{ }}. They will match only the last path segment if the glob doesn’t start with /
or the whole path name if it does. Note that rclone does not attempt to parse the supplied regular
expression, meaning that using any regular expression filter will prevent rclone from using directory
filter rules, as it will instead check every path against the supplied regular expression(s).
Here is how the {{regexp}} is transformed into an full regular expression to match the entire path:
{{regexp}} becomes (^|/)(regexp)$
/{{regexp}} becomes ^(regexp)$
Regexp syntax can be mixed with glob syntax, for example
*.{{jpe?g}} to match file.jpg, file.jpeg but not file.png
You can also use regexp flags - to set case insensitive, for example
*.{{(?i)jpg}} to match file.jpg, file.JPG but not file.png
Be careful with wildcards in regular expressions - you don’t want them to match path separators normally.
To match any file name starting with start and ending with end write
{{start[^/]*end\.jpg}}
Not
{{start.*end\.jpg}}
Which will match a directory called start with a file called end.jpg in it as the .* will match /
characters.
Note that you can use -vv --dump filters to show the filter patterns in regexp format - rclone implements
the glob patters by transforming them into regular expressions.
Filter pattern examples
Description Pattern Matches Does not match
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Wildcard *.jpg /file.jpg /file.png
/dir/file.jpg /dir/file.png
Rooted /*.jpg /file.jpg /file.png
/file2.jpg /dir/file.jpg
Alternates *.{jpg,png} /file.jpg /file.gif
/dir/file.png /dir/file.gif
Path Wildcard dir/** /dir/anyfile file.png
/subdir/dir/subsubdir/anyfile /subdir/file.png
Any Char *.t?t /file.txt /file.qxt
/dir/file.tzt /dir/file.png
Range *.[a-z] /file.a /file.0
/dir/file.b /dir/file.1
Escape *.\?\?\? /file.??? /file.abc
/dir/file.??? /dir/file.def
Class *.\d\d\d /file.012 /file.abc
/dir/file.345 /dir/file.def
Regexp *.{{jpe?g}} /file.jpeg /file.png
/dir/file.jpg /dir/file.jpeeg
Rooted Regexp /{{.*\.jpe?g}} /file.jpeg /file.png
/file.jpg /dir/file.jpg
How filter rules are applied to files
Rclone path/file name filters are made up of one or more of the following flags:
• --include
• --include-from
• --exclude
• --exclude-from
• --filter
• --filter-from
There can be more than one instance of individual flags.
Rclone internally uses a combined list of all the include and exclude rules. The order in which rules
are processed can influence the result of the filter.
All flags of the same type are processed together in the order above, regardless of what order the
different types of flags are included on the command line.
Multiple instances of the same flag are processed from left to right according to their position in the
command line.
To mix up the order of processing includes and excludes use --filter... flags.
Within --include-from, --exclude-from and --filter-from flags rules are processed from top to bottom of
the referenced file.
If there is an --include or --include-from flag specified, rclone implies a - ** rule which it adds to
the bottom of the internal rule list. Specifying a + rule with a --filter... flag does not imply that
rule.
Each path/file name passed through rclone is matched against the combined filter list. At first match to
a rule the path/file name is included or excluded and no further filter rules are processed for that
path/file.
If rclone does not find a match, after testing against all rules (including the implied rule if
appropriate), the path/file name is included.
Any path/file included at that stage is processed by the rclone command.
--files-from and --files-from-raw flags over-ride and cannot be combined with other filter options.
To see the internal combined rule list, in regular expression form, for a command add the --dump filters
flag. Running an rclone command with --dump filters and -vv flags lists the internal filter elements and
shows how they are applied to each source path/file. There is not currently a means provided to pass
regular expression filter options into rclone directly though character class filter rules contain
character classes. Go regular expression reference
How filter rules are applied to directories
Rclone commands are applied to path/file names not directories. The entire contents of a directory can
be matched to a filter by the pattern directory/* or recursively by directory/**.
Directory filter rules are defined with a closing / separator.
E.g. /directory/subdirectory/ is an rclone directory filter rule.
Rclone commands can use directory filter rules to determine whether they recurse into subdirectories.
This potentially optimises access to a remote by avoiding listing unnecessary directories. Whether
optimisation is desirable depends on the specific filter rules and source remote content.
If any regular expression filters are in use, then no directory recursion optimisation is possible, as
rclone must check every path against the supplied regular expression(s).
Directory recursion optimisation occurs if either:
• A source remote does not support the rclone ListR primitive. local, sftp, Microsoft OneDrive and
WebDAV do not support ListR. Google Drive and most bucket type storage do. Full list
• On other remotes (those that support ListR), if the rclone command is not naturally recursive, and
provided it is not run with the --fast-list flag. ls, lsf -R and size are naturally recursive but
sync, copy and move are not.
• Whenever the --disable ListR flag is applied to an rclone command.
Rclone commands imply directory filter rules from path/file filter rules. To view the directory filter
rules rclone has implied for a command specify the --dump filters flag.
E.g. for an include rule
/a/*.jpg
Rclone implies the directory include rule
/a/
Directory filter rules specified in an rclone command can limit the scope of an rclone command but
path/file filters still have to be specified.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --include /directory/ will not match any files. Because it is an --include
option the --exclude ** rule is implied, and the /directory/ pattern serves only to optimise access to
the remote by ignoring everything outside of that directory.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --filter-from filter-list.txt with a file filter-list.txt:
- /dir1/
- /dir2/
+ *.pdf
- **
All files in directories dir1 or dir2 or their subdirectories are completely excluded from the listing.
Only files of suffix pdf in the root of remote: or its subdirectories are listed. The - ** rule prevents
listing of any path/files not previously matched by the rules above.
Option exclude-if-present creates a directory exclude rule based on the presence of a file in a directory
and takes precedence over other rclone directory filter rules.
When using pattern list syntax, if a pattern item contains either / or **, then rclone will not able to
imply a directory filter rule from this pattern list.
E.g. for an include rule
{dir1/**,dir2/**}
Rclone will match files below directories dir1 or dir2 only, but will not be able to use this filter to
exclude a directory dir3 from being traversed.
Directory recursion optimisation may affect performance, but normally not the result. One exception to
this is sync operations with option --create-empty-src-dirs, where any traversed empty directories will
be created. With the pattern list example {dir1/**,dir2/**} above, this would create an empty directory
dir3 on destination (when it exists on source). Changing the filter to {dir1,dir2}/**, or splitting it
into two include rules --include dir1/** --include dir2/**, will match the same files while also
filtering directories, with the result that an empty directory dir3 will no longer be created.
--exclude - Exclude files matching pattern
Excludes path/file names from an rclone command based on a single exclude rule.
This flag can be repeated. See above for the order filter flags are processed in.
--exclude should not be used with --include, --include-from, --filter or --filter-from flags.
--exclude has no effect when combined with --files-from or --files-from-raw flags.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --exclude *.bak excludes all .bak files from listing.
E.g. rclone size remote: "--exclude /dir/**" returns the total size of all files on remote: excluding
those in root directory dir and sub directories.
E.g. on Microsoft Windows rclone ls remote: --exclude "*\[{JP,KR,HK}\]*" lists the files in remote: with
[JP] or [KR] or [HK] in their name. Quotes prevent the shell from interpreting the \ characters.\
characters escape the [ and ] so an rclone filter treats them literally rather than as a character-range.
The { and } define an rclone pattern list. For other operating systems single quotes are required ie
rclone ls remote: --exclude '*\[{JP,KR,HK}\]*'
--exclude-from - Read exclude patterns from file
Excludes path/file names from an rclone command based on rules in a named file. The file contains a list
of remarks and pattern rules.
For an example exclude-file.txt:
# a sample exclude rule file
*.bak
file2.jpg
rclone ls remote: --exclude-from exclude-file.txt lists the files on remote: except those named file2.jpg
or with a suffix .bak. That is equivalent to rclone ls remote: --exclude file2.jpg --exclude "*.bak".
This flag can be repeated. See above for the order filter flags are processed in.
The --exclude-from flag is useful where multiple exclude filter rules are applied to an rclone command.
--exclude-from should not be used with --include, --include-from, --filter or --filter-from flags.
--exclude-from has no effect when combined with --files-from or --files-from-raw flags.
--exclude-from followed by - reads filter rules from standard input.
--include - Include files matching pattern
Adds a single include rule based on path/file names to an rclone command.
This flag can be repeated. See above for the order filter flags are processed in.
--include has no effect when combined with --files-from or --files-from-raw flags.
--include implies --exclude ** at the end of an rclone internal filter list. Therefore if you mix
--include and --include-from flags with --exclude, --exclude-from, --filter or --filter-from, you must
use include rules for all the files you want in the include statement. For more flexibility use the
--filter-from flag.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --include "*.{png,jpg}" lists the files on remote: with suffix .png and .jpg.
All other files are excluded.
E.g. multiple rclone copy commands can be combined with --include and a pattern-list.
rclone copy /vol1/A remote:A
rclone copy /vol1/B remote:B
is equivalent to:
rclone copy /vol1 remote: --include "{A,B}/**"
E.g. rclone ls remote:/wheat --include "??[^[:punct:]]*" lists the files remote: directory wheat (and
subdirectories) whose third character is not punctuation. This example uses an ASCII character class.
--include-from - Read include patterns from file
Adds path/file names to an rclone command based on rules in a named file. The file contains a list of
remarks and pattern rules.
For an example include-file.txt:
# a sample include rule file
*.jpg
file2.avi
rclone ls remote: --include-from include-file.txt lists the files on remote: with name file2.avi or
suffix .jpg. That is equivalent to rclone ls remote: --include file2.avi --include "*.jpg".
This flag can be repeated. See above for the order filter flags are processed in.
The --include-from flag is useful where multiple include filter rules are applied to an rclone command.
--include-from implies --exclude ** at the end of an rclone internal filter list. Therefore if you mix
--include and --include-from flags with --exclude, --exclude-from, --filter or --filter-from, you must
use include rules for all the files you want in the include statement. For more flexibility use the
--filter-from flag.
--exclude-from has no effect when combined with --files-from or --files-from-raw flags.
--exclude-from followed by - reads filter rules from standard input.
--filter - Add a file-filtering rule
Specifies path/file names to an rclone command, based on a single include or exclude rule, in + or -
format.
This flag can be repeated. See above for the order filter flags are processed in.
--filter + differs from --include. In the case of --include rclone implies an --exclude * rule which it
adds to the bottom of the internal rule list. --filter...+ does not imply that rule.
--filter has no effect when combined with --files-from or --files-from-raw flags.
--filter should not be used with --include, --include-from, --exclude or --exclude-from flags.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --filter "- *.bak" excludes all .bak files from a list of remote:.
--filter-from - Read filtering patterns from a file
Adds path/file names to an rclone command based on rules in a named file. The file contains a list of
remarks and pattern rules. Include rules start with + and exclude rules with -. ! clears existing
rules. Rules are processed in the order they are defined.
This flag can be repeated. See above for the order filter flags are processed in.
Arrange the order of filter rules with the most restrictive first and work down.
E.g. for filter-file.txt:
# a sample filter rule file
- secret*.jpg
+ *.jpg
+ *.png
+ file2.avi
- /dir/Trash/**
+ /dir/**
# exclude everything else
- *
rclone ls remote: --filter-from filter-file.txt lists the path/files on remote: including all jpg and png
files, excluding any matching secret*.jpg and including file2.avi. It also includes everything in the
directory dir at the root of remote, except remote:dir/Trash which it excludes. Everything else is
excluded.
E.g. for an alternative filter-file.txt:
- secret*.jpg
+ *.jpg
+ *.png
+ file2.avi
- *
Files file1.jpg, file3.png and file2.avi are listed whilst secret17.jpg and files without the suffix
.jpgor.png` are excluded.
E.g. for an alternative filter-file.txt:
+ *.jpg
+ *.gif
!
+ 42.doc
- *
Only file 42.doc is listed. Prior rules are cleared by the !.
--files-from - Read list of source-file names
Adds path/files to an rclone command from a list in a named file. Rclone processes the path/file names
in the order of the list, and no others.
Other filter flags (--include, --include-from, --exclude, --exclude-from, --filter and --filter-from) are
ignored when --files-from is used.
--files-from expects a list of files as its input. Leading or trailing whitespace is stripped from the
input lines. Lines starting with # or ; are ignored.
Rclone commands with a --files-from flag traverse the remote, treating the names in --files-from as a set
of filters.
If the --no-traverse and --files-from flags are used together an rclone command does not traverse the
remote. Instead it addresses each path/file named in the file individually. For each path/file name,
that requires typically 1 API call. This can be efficient for a short --files-from list and a remote
containing many files.
Rclone commands do not error if any names in the --files-from file are missing from the source remote.
The --files-from flag can be repeated in a single rclone command to read path/file names from more than
one file. The files are read from left to right along the command line.
Paths within the --files-from file are interpreted as starting with the root specified in the rclone
command. Leading / separators are ignored. See –files-from-raw if you need the input to be processed in
a raw manner.
E.g. for a file files-from.txt:
# comment
file1.jpg
subdir/file2.jpg
rclone copy --files-from files-from.txt /home/me/pics remote:pics copies the following, if they exist,
and only those files.
/home/me/pics/file1.jpg → remote:pics/file1.jpg
/home/me/pics/subdir/file2.jpg → remote:pics/subdir/file2.jpg
E.g. to copy the following files referenced by their absolute paths:
/home/user1/42
/home/user1/dir/ford
/home/user2/prefect
First find a common subdirectory - in this case /home and put the remaining files in files-from.txt with
or without leading /, e.g.
user1/42
user1/dir/ford
user2/prefect
Then copy these to a remote:
rclone copy --files-from files-from.txt /home remote:backup
The three files are transferred as follows:
/home/user1/42 → remote:backup/user1/important
/home/user1/dir/ford → remote:backup/user1/dir/file
/home/user2/prefect → remote:backup/user2/stuff
Alternatively if / is chosen as root files-from.txt will be:
/home/user1/42
/home/user1/dir/ford
/home/user2/prefect
The copy command will be:
rclone copy --files-from files-from.txt / remote:backup
Then there will be an extra home directory on the remote:
/home/user1/42 → remote:backup/home/user1/42
/home/user1/dir/ford → remote:backup/home/user1/dir/ford
/home/user2/prefect → remote:backup/home/user2/prefect
--files-from-raw - Read list of source-file names without any processing
This flag is the same as --files-from except that input is read in a raw manner. Lines with leading /
trailing whitespace, and lines starting with ; or # are read without any processing. rclone lsf has a
compatible format that can be used to export file lists from remotes for input to --files-from-raw.
--ignore-case - make searches case insensitive
By default, rclone filter patterns are case sensitive. The --ignore-case flag makes all of the filters
patterns on the command line case insensitive.
E.g. --include "zaphod.txt" does not match a file Zaphod.txt. With --ignore-case a match is made.
Quoting shell metacharacters
Rclone commands with filter patterns containing shell metacharacters may not as work as expected in your
shell and may require quoting.
E.g. linux, OSX (* metacharacter)
• --include \*.jpg
• --include '*.jpg'
• --include='*.jpg'
Microsoft Windows expansion is done by the command, not shell, so --include *.jpg does not require
quoting.
If the rclone error Command .... needs .... arguments maximum: you provided .... non flag arguments: is
encountered, the cause is commonly spaces within the name of a remote or flag value. The fix then is to
quote values containing spaces.
Other filters
--min-size - Don’t transfer any file smaller than this
Controls the minimum size file within the scope of an rclone command. Default units are KiB but
abbreviations K, M, G, T or P are valid.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --min-size 50k lists files on remote: of 50 KiB size or larger.
See the size option docs for more info.
--max-size - Don’t transfer any file larger than this
Controls the maximum size file within the scope of an rclone command. Default units are KiB but
abbreviations K, M, G, T or P are valid.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --max-size 1G lists files on remote: of 1 GiB size or smaller.
See the size option docs for more info.
--max-age - Don’t transfer any file older than this
Controls the maximum age of files within the scope of an rclone command.
--max-age applies only to files and not to directories.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --max-age 2d lists files on remote: of 2 days old or less.
See the time option docs for valid formats.
--min-age - Don’t transfer any file younger than this
Controls the minimum age of files within the scope of an rclone command. (see --max-age for valid
formats)
--min-age applies only to files and not to directories.
E.g. rclone ls remote: --min-age 2d lists files on remote: of 2 days old or more.
See the time option docs for valid formats.
Other flags
--delete-excluded - Delete files on dest excluded from sync
Important this flag is dangerous to your data - use with --dry-run and -v first.
In conjunction with rclone sync, --delete-excluded deletes any files on the destination which are
excluded from the command.
E.g. the scope of rclone sync -i A: B: can be restricted:
rclone --min-size 50k --delete-excluded sync A: B:
All files on B: which are less than 50 KiB are deleted because they are excluded from the rclone sync
command.
--dump filters - dump the filters to the output
Dumps the defined filters to standard output in regular expression format.
Useful for debugging.
Exclude directory based on a file
The --exclude-if-present flag controls whether a directory is within the scope of an rclone command based
on the presence of a named file within it. The flag can be repeated to check for multiple file names,
presence of any of them will exclude the directory.
This flag has a priority over other filter flags.
E.g. for the following directory structure:
dir1/file1
dir1/dir2/file2
dir1/dir2/dir3/file3
dir1/dir2/dir3/.ignore
The command rclone ls --exclude-if-present .ignore dir1 does not list dir3, file3 or .ignore.
Common pitfalls
The most frequent filter support issues on the rclone forum are:
• Not using paths relative to the root of the remote
• Not using / to match from the root of a remote
• Not using ** to match the contents of a directory
GUI (Experimental)
Rclone can serve a web based GUI (graphical user interface). This is somewhat experimental at the moment
so things may be subject to change.
Run this command in a terminal and rclone will download and then display the GUI in a web browser.
rclone rcd --rc-web-gui
This will produce logs like this and rclone needs to continue to run to serve the GUI:
2019/08/25 11:40:14 NOTICE: A new release for gui is present at https://github.com/rclone/rclone-webui-react/releases/download/v0.0.6/currentbuild.zip
2019/08/25 11:40:14 NOTICE: Downloading webgui binary. Please wait. [Size: 3813937, Path : /home/USER/.cache/rclone/webgui/v0.0.6.zip]
2019/08/25 11:40:16 NOTICE: Unzipping
2019/08/25 11:40:16 NOTICE: Serving remote control on http://127.0.0.1:5572/
This assumes you are running rclone locally on your machine. It is possible to separate the rclone and
the GUI - see below for details.
If you wish to check for updates then you can add --rc-web-gui-update to the command line.
If you find your GUI broken, you may force it to update by add --rc-web-gui-force-update.
By default, rclone will open your browser. Add --rc-web-gui-no-open-browser to disable this feature.
Using the GUI
Once the GUI opens, you will be looking at the dashboard which has an overall overview.
On the left hand side you will see a series of view buttons you can click on:
• Dashboard - main overview
• Configs - examine and create new configurations
• Explorer - view, download and upload files to the cloud storage systems
• Backend - view or alter the backend config
• Log out
(More docs and walkthrough video to come!)
How it works
When you run the rclone rcd --rc-web-gui this is what happens
• Rclone starts but only runs the remote control API (“rc”).
• The API is bound to localhost with an auto-generated username and password.
• If the API bundle is missing then rclone will download it.
• rclone will start serving the files from the API bundle over the same port as the API
• rclone will open the browser with a login_token so it can log straight in.
Advanced use
The rclone rcd may use any of the flags documented on the rc page.
The flag --rc-web-gui is shorthand for
• Download the web GUI if necessary
• Check we are using some authentication
• --rc-user gui
• --rc-pass <random password>
• --rc-serve
These flags can be overridden as desired.
See also the rclone rcd documentation.
Example: Running a public GUI
For example the GUI could be served on a public port over SSL using an htpasswd file using the following
flags:
• --rc-web-gui
• --rc-addr :443
• --rc-htpasswd /path/to/htpasswd
• --rc-cert /path/to/ssl.crt
• --rc-key /path/to/ssl.key
Example: Running a GUI behind a proxy
If you want to run the GUI behind a proxy at /rclone you could use these flags:
• --rc-web-gui
• --rc-baseurl rclone
• --rc-htpasswd /path/to/htpasswd
Or instead of htpasswd if you just want a single user and password:
• --rc-user me
• --rc-pass mypassword
Project
The GUI is being developed in the: rclone/rclone-webui-react repository.
Bug reports and contributions are very welcome :-)
If you have questions then please ask them on the rclone forum.
Remote controlling rclone with its API
If rclone is run with the --rc flag then it starts an HTTP server which can be used to remote control
rclone using its API.
You can either use the rc command to access the API or use HTTP directly.
If you just want to run a remote control then see the rcd command.
Supported parameters
–rc
Flag to start the http server listen on remote requests
–rc-addr=IP
IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to. (default “localhost:5572”)
–rc-cert=KEY
SSL PEM key (concatenation of certificate and CA certificate)
–rc-client-ca=PATH
Client certificate authority to verify clients with
–rc-htpasswd=PATH
htpasswd file - if not provided no authentication is done
–rc-key=PATH
SSL PEM Private key
–rc-max-header-bytes=VALUE
Maximum size of request header (default 4096)
–rc-min-tls-version=VALUE
The minimum TLS version that is acceptable. Valid values are “tls1.0”, “tls1.1”, “tls1.2” and “tls1.3”
(default “tls1.0”).
–rc-user=VALUE
User name for authentication.
–rc-pass=VALUE
Password for authentication.
–rc-realm=VALUE
Realm for authentication (default “rclone”)
–rc-server-read-timeout=DURATION
Timeout for server reading data (default 1h0m0s)
–rc-server-write-timeout=DURATION
Timeout for server writing data (default 1h0m0s)
–rc-serve
Enable the serving of remote objects via the HTTP interface. This means objects will be accessible at
http://127.0.0.1:5572/ by default, so you can browse to http://127.0.0.1:5572/ or http://127.0.0.1:5572/*
to see a listing of the remotes. Objects may be requested from remotes using this syntax
http://127.0.0.1:5572/[remote:path]/path/to/object
Default Off.
–rc-files /path/to/directory
Path to local files to serve on the HTTP server.
If this is set then rclone will serve the files in that directory. It will also open the root in the web
browser if specified. This is for implementing browser based GUIs for rclone functions.
If --rc-user or --rc-pass is set then the URL that is opened will have the authorization in the URL in
the http://user:pass@localhost/ style.
Default Off.
–rc-enable-metrics
Enable OpenMetrics/Prometheus compatible endpoint at /metrics.
Default Off.
–rc-web-gui
Set this flag to serve the default web gui on the same port as rclone.
Default Off.
–rc-allow-origin
Set the allowed Access-Control-Allow-Origin for rc requests.
Can be used with –rc-web-gui if the rclone is running on different IP than the web-gui.
Default is IP address on which rc is running.
–rc-web-fetch-url
Set the URL to fetch the rclone-web-gui files from.
Default https://api.github.com/repos/rclone/rclone-webui-react/releases/latest.
–rc-web-gui-update
Set this flag to check and update rclone-webui-react from the rc-web-fetch-url.
Default Off.
–rc-web-gui-force-update
Set this flag to force update rclone-webui-react from the rc-web-fetch-url.
Default Off.
–rc-web-gui-no-open-browser
Set this flag to disable opening browser automatically when using web-gui.
Default Off.
–rc-job-expire-duration=DURATION
Expire finished async jobs older than DURATION (default 60s).
–rc-job-expire-interval=DURATION
Interval duration to check for expired async jobs (default 10s).
–rc-no-auth
By default rclone will require authorisation to have been set up on the rc interface in order to use any
methods which access any rclone remotes. Eg operations/list is denied as it involved creating a remote
as is sync/copy.
If this is set then no authorisation will be required on the server to use these methods. The
alternative is to use --rc-user and --rc-pass and use these credentials in the request.
Default Off.
–rc-baseurl
Prefix for URLs.
Default is root
–rc-template
User-specified template.
Accessing the remote control via the rclone rc command
Rclone itself implements the remote control protocol in its rclone rc command.
You can use it like this
$ rclone rc rc/noop param1=one param2=two
{
"param1": "one",
"param2": "two"
}
Run rclone rc on its own to see the help for the installed remote control commands.
JSON input
rclone rc also supports a --json flag which can be used to send more complicated input parameters.
$ rclone rc --json '{ "p1": [1,"2",null,4], "p2": { "a":1, "b":2 } }' rc/noop
{
"p1": [
1,
"2",
null,
4
],
"p2": {
"a": 1,
"b": 2
}
}
If the parameter being passed is an object then it can be passed as a JSON string rather than using the
--json flag which simplifies the command line.
rclone rc operations/list fs=/tmp remote=test opt='{"showHash": true}'
Rather than
rclone rc operations/list --json '{"fs": "/tmp", "remote": "test", "opt": {"showHash": true}}'
Special parameters
The rc interface supports some special parameters which apply to all commands. These start with _ to
show they are different.
Running asynchronous jobs with _async = true
Each rc call is classified as a job and it is assigned its own id. By default jobs are executed
immediately as they are created or synchronously.
If _async has a true value when supplied to an rc call then it will return immediately with a job id and
the task will be run in the background. The job/status call can be used to get information of the
background job. The job can be queried for up to 1 minute after it has finished.
It is recommended that potentially long running jobs, e.g. sync/sync, sync/copy, sync/move,
operations/purge are run with the _async flag to avoid any potential problems with the HTTP request and
response timing out.
Starting a job with the _async flag:
$ rclone rc --json '{ "p1": [1,"2",null,4], "p2": { "a":1, "b":2 }, "_async": true }' rc/noop
{
"jobid": 2
}
Query the status to see if the job has finished. For more information on the meaning of these return
parameters see the job/status call.
$ rclone rc --json '{ "jobid":2 }' job/status
{
"duration": 0.000124163,
"endTime": "2018-10-27T11:38:07.911245881+01:00",
"error": "",
"finished": true,
"id": 2,
"output": {
"_async": true,
"p1": [
1,
"2",
null,
4
],
"p2": {
"a": 1,
"b": 2
}
},
"startTime": "2018-10-27T11:38:07.911121728+01:00",
"success": true
}
job/list can be used to show the running or recently completed jobs
$ rclone rc job/list
{
"jobids": [
2
]
}
Setting config flags with _config
If you wish to set config (the equivalent of the global flags) for the duration of an rc call only then
pass in the _config parameter.
This should be in the same format as the config key returned by options/get.
For example, if you wished to run a sync with the --checksum parameter, you would pass this parameter in
your JSON blob.
"_config":{"CheckSum": true}
If using rclone rc this could be passed as
rclone rc operations/sync ... _config='{"CheckSum": true}'
Any config parameters you don’t set will inherit the global defaults which were set with command line
flags or environment variables.
Note that it is possible to set some values as strings or integers - see data types for more info. Here
is an example setting the equivalent of --buffer-size in string or integer format.
"_config":{"BufferSize": "42M"}
"_config":{"BufferSize": 44040192}
If you wish to check the _config assignment has worked properly then calling options/local will show what
the value got set to.
Setting filter flags with _filter
If you wish to set filters for the duration of an rc call only then pass in the _filter parameter.
This should be in the same format as the filter key returned by options/get.
For example, if you wished to run a sync with these flags
--max-size 1M --max-age 42s --include "a" --include "b"
you would pass this parameter in your JSON blob.
"_filter":{"MaxSize":"1M", "IncludeRule":["a","b"], "MaxAge":"42s"}
If using rclone rc this could be passed as
rclone rc ... _filter='{"MaxSize":"1M", "IncludeRule":["a","b"], "MaxAge":"42s"}'
Any filter parameters you don’t set will inherit the global defaults which were set with command line
flags or environment variables.
Note that it is possible to set some values as strings or integers - see data types for more info. Here
is an example setting the equivalent of --buffer-size in string or integer format.
"_filter":{"MinSize": "42M"}
"_filter":{"MinSize": 44040192}
If you wish to check the _filter assignment has worked properly then calling options/local will show what
the value got set to.
Assigning operations to groups with _group = value
Each rc call has its own stats group for tracking its metrics. By default grouping is done by the
composite group name from prefix job/ and id of the job like so job/1.
If _group has a value then stats for that request will be grouped under that value. This allows caller
to group stats under their own name.
Stats for specific group can be accessed by passing group to core/stats:
$ rclone rc --json '{ "group": "job/1" }' core/stats
{
"speed": 12345
...
}
Data types
When the API returns types, these will mostly be straight forward integer, string or boolean types.
However some of the types returned by the options/get call and taken by the options/set calls as well as
the vfsOpt, mountOpt and the _config parameters.
• Duration - these are returned as an integer duration in nanoseconds. They may be set as an integer, or
they may be set with time string, eg “5s”. See the options section for more info.
• Size - these are returned as an integer number of bytes. They may be set as an integer or they may be
set with a size suffix string, eg “10M”. See the options section for more info.
• Enumerated type (such as CutoffMode, DumpFlags, LogLevel, VfsCacheMode - these will be returned as an
integer and may be set as an integer but more conveniently they can be set as a string, eg “HARD” for
CutoffMode or DEBUG for LogLevel.
• BandwidthSpec - this will be set and returned as a string, eg “1M”.
Specifying remotes to work on
Remotes are specified with the fs=, srcFs=, dstFs= parameters depending on the command being used.
The parameters can be a string as per the rest of rclone, eg s3:bucket/path or :sftp:/my/dir. They can
also be specified as JSON blobs.
If specifying a JSON blob it should be a object mapping strings to strings. These values will be used to
configure the remote. There are 3 special values which may be set:
• type - set to type to specify a remote called :type:
• _name - set to name to specify a remote called name:
• _root - sets the root of the remote - may be empty
One of _name or type should normally be set. If the local backend is desired then type should be set to
local. If _root isn’t specified then it defaults to the root of the remote.
For example this JSON is equivalent to remote:/tmp
{
"_name": "remote",
"_path": "/tmp"
}
And this is equivalent to :sftp,host='example.com':/tmp
{
"type": "sftp",
"host": "example.com",
"_path": "/tmp"
}
And this is equivalent to /tmp/dir
{
type = "local",
_ path = "/tmp/dir"
}
Supported commands
backend/command: Runs a backend command.
This takes the following parameters:
• command - a string with the command name
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• arg - a list of arguments for the backend command
• opt - a map of string to string of options
Returns:
• result - result from the backend command
Example:
rclone rc backend/command command=noop fs=. -o echo=yes -o blue -a path1 -a path2
Returns
{
"result": {
"arg": [
"path1",
"path2"
],
"name": "noop",
"opt": {
"blue": "",
"echo": "yes"
}
}
}
Note that this is the direct equivalent of using this “backend” command:
rclone backend noop . -o echo=yes -o blue path1 path2
Note that arguments must be preceded by the “-a” flag
See the backend command for more information.
Authentication is required for this call.
cache/expire: Purge a remote from cache
Purge a remote from the cache backend. Supports either a directory or a file. Params: - remote = path
to remote (required) - withData = true/false to delete cached data (chunks) as well (optional)
Eg
rclone rc cache/expire remote=path/to/sub/folder/
rclone rc cache/expire remote=/ withData=true
cache/fetch: Fetch file chunks
Ensure the specified file chunks are cached on disk.
The chunks= parameter specifies the file chunks to check. It takes a comma separated list of array slice
indices. The slice indices are similar to Python slices: start[:end]
start is the 0 based chunk number from the beginning of the file to fetch inclusive. end is 0 based
chunk number from the beginning of the file to fetch exclusive. Both values can be negative, in which
case they count from the back of the file. The value “-5:” represents the last 5 chunks of a file.
Some valid examples are: “:5,-5:” -> the first and last five chunks “0,-2” -> the first and the second
last chunk “0:10” -> the first ten chunks
Any parameter with a key that starts with “file” can be used to specify files to fetch, e.g.
rclone rc cache/fetch chunks=0 file=hello file2=home/goodbye
File names will automatically be encrypted when the a crypt remote is used on top of the cache.
cache/stats: Get cache stats
Show statistics for the cache remote.
config/create: create the config for a remote.
This takes the following parameters:
• name - name of remote
• parameters - a map of { “key”: “value” } pairs
• type - type of the new remote
• opt - a dictionary of options to control the configuration
• obscure - declare passwords are plain and need obscuring
• noObscure - declare passwords are already obscured and don’t need obscuring
• nonInteractive - don’t interact with a user, return questions
• continue - continue the config process with an answer
• all - ask all the config questions not just the post config ones
• state - state to restart with - used with continue
• result - result to restart with - used with continue
See the config create command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/delete: Delete a remote in the config file.
Parameters:
• name - name of remote to delete
See the config delete command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/dump: Dumps the config file.
Returns a JSON object: - key: value
Where keys are remote names and values are the config parameters.
See the config dump command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/get: Get a remote in the config file.
Parameters:
• name - name of remote to get
See the config dump command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/listremotes: Lists the remotes in the config file.
Returns - remotes - array of remote names
See the listremotes command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/password: password the config for a remote.
This takes the following parameters:
• name - name of remote
• parameters - a map of { “key”: “value” } pairs
See the config password command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/providers: Shows how providers are configured in the config file.
Returns a JSON object: - providers - array of objects
See the config providers command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
config/update: update the config for a remote.
This takes the following parameters:
• name - name of remote
• parameters - a map of { “key”: “value” } pairs
• opt - a dictionary of options to control the configuration
• obscure - declare passwords are plain and need obscuring
• noObscure - declare passwords are already obscured and don’t need obscuring
• nonInteractive - don’t interact with a user, return questions
• continue - continue the config process with an answer
• all - ask all the config questions not just the post config ones
• state - state to restart with - used with continue
• result - result to restart with - used with continue
See the config update command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
core/bwlimit: Set the bandwidth limit.
This sets the bandwidth limit to the string passed in. This should be a single bandwidth limit entry or
a pair of upload:download bandwidth.
Eg
rclone rc core/bwlimit rate=off
{
"bytesPerSecond": -1,
"bytesPerSecondTx": -1,
"bytesPerSecondRx": -1,
"rate": "off"
}
rclone rc core/bwlimit rate=1M
{
"bytesPerSecond": 1048576,
"bytesPerSecondTx": 1048576,
"bytesPerSecondRx": 1048576,
"rate": "1M"
}
rclone rc core/bwlimit rate=1M:100k
{
"bytesPerSecond": 1048576,
"bytesPerSecondTx": 1048576,
"bytesPerSecondRx": 131072,
"rate": "1M"
}
If the rate parameter is not supplied then the bandwidth is queried
rclone rc core/bwlimit
{
"bytesPerSecond": 1048576,
"bytesPerSecondTx": 1048576,
"bytesPerSecondRx": 1048576,
"rate": "1M"
}
The format of the parameter is exactly the same as passed to –bwlimit except only one bandwidth may be
specified.
In either case “rate” is returned as a human-readable string, and “bytesPerSecond” is returned as a
number.
core/command: Run a rclone terminal command over rc.
This takes the following parameters:
• command - a string with the command name.
• arg - a list of arguments for the backend command.
• opt - a map of string to string of options.
• returnType - one of (“COMBINED_OUTPUT”, “STREAM”, “STREAM_ONLY_STDOUT”, “STREAM_ONLY_STDERR”).
• Defaults to “COMBINED_OUTPUT” if not set.
• The STREAM returnTypes will write the output to the body of the HTTP message.
• The COMBINED_OUTPUT will write the output to the “result” parameter.
Returns:
• result - result from the backend command.
• Only set when using returnType “COMBINED_OUTPUT”.
• error - set if rclone exits with an error code.
• returnType - one of (“COMBINED_OUTPUT”, “STREAM”, “STREAM_ONLY_STDOUT”, “STREAM_ONLY_STDERR”).
Example:
rclone rc core/command command=ls -a mydrive:/ -o max-depth=1
rclone rc core/command -a ls -a mydrive:/ -o max-depth=1
Returns:
{
"error": false,
"result": "<Raw command line output>"
}
OR
{
"error": true,
"result": "<Raw command line output>"
}
Authentication is required for this call.
core/gc: Runs a garbage collection.
This tells the go runtime to do a garbage collection run. It isn’t necessary to call this normally, but
it can be useful for debugging memory problems.
core/group-list: Returns list of stats.
This returns list of stats groups currently in memory.
Returns the following values:
{
"groups": an array of group names:
[
"group1",
"group2",
...
]
}
core/memstats: Returns the memory statistics
This returns the memory statistics of the running program. What the values mean are explained in the go
docs: https://golang.org/pkg/runtime/#MemStats
The most interesting values for most people are:
• HeapAlloc - this is the amount of memory rclone is actually using
• HeapSys - this is the amount of memory rclone has obtained from the OS
• Sys - this is the total amount of memory requested from the OS
• It is virtual memory so may include unused memory
core/obscure: Obscures a string passed in.
Pass a clear string and rclone will obscure it for the config file: - clear - string
Returns: - obscured - string
core/pid: Return PID of current process
This returns PID of current process. Useful for stopping rclone process.
core/quit: Terminates the app.
(Optional) Pass an exit code to be used for terminating the app: - exitCode - int
core/stats: Returns stats about current transfers.
This returns all available stats:
rclone rc core/stats
If group is not provided then summed up stats for all groups will be returned.
Parameters
• group - name of the stats group (string)
Returns the following values:
{
"bytes": total transferred bytes since the start of the group,
"checks": number of files checked,
"deletes" : number of files deleted,
"elapsedTime": time in floating point seconds since rclone was started,
"errors": number of errors,
"eta": estimated time in seconds until the group completes,
"fatalError": boolean whether there has been at least one fatal error,
"lastError": last error string,
"renames" : number of files renamed,
"retryError": boolean showing whether there has been at least one non-NoRetryError,
"speed": average speed in bytes per second since start of the group,
"totalBytes": total number of bytes in the group,
"totalChecks": total number of checks in the group,
"totalTransfers": total number of transfers in the group,
"transferTime" : total time spent on running jobs,
"transfers": number of transferred files,
"transferring": an array of currently active file transfers:
[
{
"bytes": total transferred bytes for this file,
"eta": estimated time in seconds until file transfer completion
"name": name of the file,
"percentage": progress of the file transfer in percent,
"speed": average speed over the whole transfer in bytes per second,
"speedAvg": current speed in bytes per second as an exponentially weighted moving average,
"size": size of the file in bytes
}
],
"checking": an array of names of currently active file checks
[]
}
Values for “transferring”, “checking” and “lastError” are only assigned if data is available. The value
for “eta” is null if an eta cannot be determined.
core/stats-delete: Delete stats group.
This deletes entire stats group.
Parameters
• group - name of the stats group (string)
core/stats-reset: Reset stats.
This clears counters, errors and finished transfers for all stats or specific stats group if group is
provided.
Parameters
• group - name of the stats group (string)
core/transferred: Returns stats about completed transfers.
This returns stats about completed transfers:
rclone rc core/transferred
If group is not provided then completed transfers for all groups will be returned.
Note only the last 100 completed transfers are returned.
Parameters
• group - name of the stats group (string)
Returns the following values:
{
"transferred": an array of completed transfers (including failed ones):
[
{
"name": name of the file,
"size": size of the file in bytes,
"bytes": total transferred bytes for this file,
"checked": if the transfer is only checked (skipped, deleted),
"timestamp": integer representing millisecond unix epoch,
"error": string description of the error (empty if successful),
"jobid": id of the job that this transfer belongs to
}
]
}
core/version: Shows the current version of rclone and the go runtime.
This shows the current version of go and the go runtime:
• version - rclone version, e.g. “v1.53.0”
• decomposed - version number as [major, minor, patch]
• isGit - boolean - true if this was compiled from the git version
• isBeta - boolean - true if this is a beta version
• os - OS in use as according to Go
• arch - cpu architecture in use according to Go
• goVersion - version of Go runtime in use
• linking - type of rclone executable (static or dynamic)
• goTags - space separated build tags or “none”
debug/set-block-profile-rate: Set runtime.SetBlockProfileRate for blocking profiling.
SetBlockProfileRate controls the fraction of goroutine blocking events that are reported in the blocking
profile. The profiler aims to sample an average of one blocking event per rate nanoseconds spent
blocked.
To include every blocking event in the profile, pass rate = 1. To turn off profiling entirely, pass rate
<= 0.
After calling this you can use this to see the blocking profile:
go tool pprof http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/block
Parameters:
• rate - int
debug/set-mutex-profile-fraction: Set runtime.SetMutexProfileFraction for mutex profiling.
SetMutexProfileFraction controls the fraction of mutex contention events that are reported in the mutex
profile. On average 1/rate events are reported. The previous rate is returned.
To turn off profiling entirely, pass rate 0. To just read the current rate, pass rate < 0. (For n>1 the
details of sampling may change.)
Once this is set you can look use this to profile the mutex contention:
go tool pprof http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/mutex
Parameters:
• rate - int
Results:
• previousRate - int
fscache/clear: Clear the Fs cache.
This clears the fs cache. This is where remotes created from backends are cached for a short while to
make repeated rc calls more efficient.
If you change the parameters of a backend then you may want to call this to clear an existing remote out
of the cache before re-creating it.
Authentication is required for this call.
fscache/entries: Returns the number of entries in the fs cache.
This returns the number of entries in the fs cache.
Returns - entries - number of items in the cache
Authentication is required for this call.
job/list: Lists the IDs of the running jobs
Parameters: None.
Results:
• jobids - array of integer job ids.
job/status: Reads the status of the job ID
Parameters:
• jobid - id of the job (integer).
Results:
• finished - boolean
• duration - time in seconds that the job ran for
• endTime - time the job finished (e.g. “2018-10-26T18:50:20.528746884+01:00”)
• error - error from the job or empty string for no error
• finished - boolean whether the job has finished or not
• id - as passed in above
• startTime - time the job started (e.g. “2018-10-26T18:50:20.528336039+01:00”)
• success - boolean - true for success false otherwise
• output - output of the job as would have been returned if called synchronously
• progress - output of the progress related to the underlying job
job/stop: Stop the running job
Parameters:
• jobid - id of the job (integer).
job/stopgroup: Stop all running jobs in a group
Parameters:
• group - name of the group (string).
mount/listmounts: Show current mount points
This shows currently mounted points, which can be used for performing an unmount.
This takes no parameters and returns
• mountPoints: list of current mount points
Eg
rclone rc mount/listmounts
Authentication is required for this call.
mount/mount: Create a new mount point
rclone allows Linux, FreeBSD, macOS and Windows to mount any of Rclone’s cloud storage systems as a file
system with FUSE.
If no mountType is provided, the priority is given as follows: 1. mount 2.cmount 3.mount2
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote path to be mounted (required)
• mountPoint: valid path on the local machine (required)
• mountType: one of the values (mount, cmount, mount2) specifies the mount implementation to use
• mountOpt: a JSON object with Mount options in.
• vfsOpt: a JSON object with VFS options in.
Example:
rclone rc mount/mount fs=mydrive: mountPoint=/home/<user>/mountPoint
rclone rc mount/mount fs=mydrive: mountPoint=/home/<user>/mountPoint mountType=mount
rclone rc mount/mount fs=TestDrive: mountPoint=/mnt/tmp vfsOpt='{"CacheMode": 2}' mountOpt='{"AllowOther": true}'
The vfsOpt are as described in options/get and can be seen in the the “vfs” section when running and the
mountOpt can be seen in the “mount” section:
rclone rc options/get
Authentication is required for this call.
mount/types: Show all possible mount types
This shows all possible mount types and returns them as a list.
This takes no parameters and returns
• mountTypes: list of mount types
The mount types are strings like “mount”, “mount2”, “cmount” and can be passed to mount/mount as the
mountType parameter.
Eg
rclone rc mount/types
Authentication is required for this call.
mount/unmount: Unmount selected active mount
rclone allows Linux, FreeBSD, macOS and Windows to mount any of Rclone’s cloud storage systems as a file
system with FUSE.
This takes the following parameters:
• mountPoint: valid path on the local machine where the mount was created (required)
Example:
rclone rc mount/unmount mountPoint=/home/<user>/mountPoint
Authentication is required for this call.
mount/unmountall: Unmount all active mounts
rclone allows Linux, FreeBSD, macOS and Windows to mount any of Rclone’s cloud storage systems as a file
system with FUSE.
This takes no parameters and returns error if unmount does not succeed.
Eg
rclone rc mount/unmountall
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/about: Return the space used on the remote
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
The result is as returned from rclone about –json
See the about command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/cleanup: Remove trashed files in the remote or path
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
See the cleanup command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/copyfile: Copy a file from source remote to destination remote
This takes the following parameters:
• srcFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:” for the source
• srcRemote - a path within that remote e.g. “file.txt” for the source
• dstFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive2:” for the destination
• dstRemote - a path within that remote e.g. “file2.txt” for the destination
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/copyurl: Copy the URL to the object
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
• url - string, URL to read from
• autoFilename - boolean, set to true to retrieve destination file name from url
See the copyurl command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/delete: Remove files in the path
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
See the delete command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/deletefile: Remove the single file pointed to
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
See the deletefile command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/fsinfo: Return information about the remote
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
This returns info about the remote passed in;
{
// optional features and whether they are available or not
"Features": {
"About": true,
"BucketBased": false,
"BucketBasedRootOK": false,
"CanHaveEmptyDirectories": true,
"CaseInsensitive": false,
"ChangeNotify": false,
"CleanUp": false,
"Command": true,
"Copy": false,
"DirCacheFlush": false,
"DirMove": true,
"Disconnect": false,
"DuplicateFiles": false,
"GetTier": false,
"IsLocal": true,
"ListR": false,
"MergeDirs": false,
"MetadataInfo": true,
"Move": true,
"OpenWriterAt": true,
"PublicLink": false,
"Purge": true,
"PutStream": true,
"PutUnchecked": false,
"ReadMetadata": true,
"ReadMimeType": false,
"ServerSideAcrossConfigs": false,
"SetTier": false,
"SetWrapper": false,
"Shutdown": false,
"SlowHash": true,
"SlowModTime": false,
"UnWrap": false,
"UserInfo": false,
"UserMetadata": true,
"WrapFs": false,
"WriteMetadata": true,
"WriteMimeType": false
},
// Names of hashes available
"Hashes": [
"md5",
"sha1",
"whirlpool",
"crc32",
"sha256",
"dropbox",
"mailru",
"quickxor"
],
"Name": "local", // Name as created
"Precision": 1, // Precision of timestamps in ns
"Root": "/", // Path as created
"String": "Local file system at /", // how the remote will appear in logs
// Information about the system metadata for this backend
"MetadataInfo": {
"System": {
"atime": {
"Help": "Time of last access",
"Type": "RFC 3339",
"Example": "2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00"
},
"btime": {
"Help": "Time of file birth (creation)",
"Type": "RFC 3339",
"Example": "2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00"
},
"gid": {
"Help": "Group ID of owner",
"Type": "decimal number",
"Example": "500"
},
"mode": {
"Help": "File type and mode",
"Type": "octal, unix style",
"Example": "0100664"
},
"mtime": {
"Help": "Time of last modification",
"Type": "RFC 3339",
"Example": "2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00"
},
"rdev": {
"Help": "Device ID (if special file)",
"Type": "hexadecimal",
"Example": "1abc"
},
"uid": {
"Help": "User ID of owner",
"Type": "decimal number",
"Example": "500"
}
},
"Help": "Textual help string\n"
}
}
This command does not have a command line equivalent so use this instead:
rclone rc --loopback operations/fsinfo fs=remote:
operations/list: List the given remote and path in JSON format
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
• opt - a dictionary of options to control the listing (optional)
• recurse - If set recurse directories
• noModTime - If set return modification time
• showEncrypted - If set show decrypted names
• showOrigIDs - If set show the IDs for each item if known
• showHash - If set return a dictionary of hashes
• noMimeType - If set don’t show mime types
• dirsOnly - If set only show directories
• filesOnly - If set only show files
• metadata - If set return metadata of objects also
• hashTypes - array of strings of hash types to show if showHash set
Returns:
• list
• This is an array of objects as described in the lsjson command
See the lsjson command for more information on the above and examples.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/mkdir: Make a destination directory or container
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
See the mkdir command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/movefile: Move a file from source remote to destination remote
This takes the following parameters:
• srcFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:” for the source
• srcRemote - a path within that remote e.g. “file.txt” for the source
• dstFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive2:” for the destination
• dstRemote - a path within that remote e.g. “file2.txt” for the destination
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/publiclink: Create or retrieve a public link to the given file or folder.
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
• unlink - boolean - if set removes the link rather than adding it (optional)
• expire - string - the expiry time of the link e.g. “1d” (optional)
Returns:
• url - URL of the resource
See the link command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/purge: Remove a directory or container and all of its contents
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
See the purge command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/rmdir: Remove an empty directory or container
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
See the rmdir command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/rmdirs: Remove all the empty directories in the path
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
• leaveRoot - boolean, set to true not to delete the root
See the rmdirs command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/size: Count the number of bytes and files in remote
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:path/to/dir”
Returns:
• count - number of files
• bytes - number of bytes in those files
See the size command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/stat: Give information about the supplied file or directory
This takes the following parameters
• fs - a remote name string eg “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote eg “dir”
• opt - a dictionary of options to control the listing (optional)
• see operations/list for the options
The result is
• item - an object as described in the lsjson command. Will be null if not found.
Note that if you are only interested in files then it is much more efficient to set the filesOnly flag in
the options.
See the lsjson command for more information on the above and examples.
Authentication is required for this call.
operations/uploadfile: Upload file using multiform/form-data
This takes the following parameters:
• fs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:”
• remote - a path within that remote e.g. “dir”
• each part in body represents a file to be uploaded
See the uploadfile command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
options/blocks: List all the option blocks
Returns: - options - a list of the options block names
options/get: Get all the global options
Returns an object where keys are option block names and values are an object with the current option
values in.
Note that these are the global options which are unaffected by use of the _config and _filter parameters.
If you wish to read the parameters set in _config then use options/config and for _filter use
options/filter.
This shows the internal names of the option within rclone which should map to the external options very
easily with a few exceptions.
options/local: Get the currently active config for this call
Returns an object with the keys “config” and “filter”. The “config” key contains the local config and
the “filter” key contains the local filters.
Note that these are the local options specific to this rc call. If _config was not supplied then they
will be the global options. Likewise with “_filter”.
This call is mostly useful for seeing if _config and _filter passing is working.
This shows the internal names of the option within rclone which should map to the external options very
easily with a few exceptions.
options/set: Set an option
Parameters:
• option block name containing an object with
• key: value
Repeated as often as required.
Only supply the options you wish to change. If an option is unknown it will be silently ignored. Not
all options will have an effect when changed like this.
For example:
This sets DEBUG level logs (-vv) (these can be set by number or string)
rclone rc options/set --json '{"main": {"LogLevel": "DEBUG"}}'
rclone rc options/set --json '{"main": {"LogLevel": 8}}'
And this sets INFO level logs (-v)
rclone rc options/set --json '{"main": {"LogLevel": "INFO"}}'
And this sets NOTICE level logs (normal without -v)
rclone rc options/set --json '{"main": {"LogLevel": "NOTICE"}}'
pluginsctl/addPlugin: Add a plugin using url
Used for adding a plugin to the webgui.
This takes the following parameters:
• url - http url of the github repo where the plugin is hosted
(http://github.com/rclone/rclone-webui-react).
Example:
rclone rc pluginsctl/addPlugin
Authentication is required for this call.
pluginsctl/getPluginsForType: Get plugins with type criteria
This shows all possible plugins by a mime type.
This takes the following parameters:
• type - supported mime type by a loaded plugin e.g. (video/mp4, audio/mp3).
• pluginType - filter plugins based on their type e.g. (DASHBOARD, FILE_HANDLER, TERMINAL).
Returns:
• loadedPlugins - list of current production plugins.
• testPlugins - list of temporarily loaded development plugins, usually running on a different server.
Example:
rclone rc pluginsctl/getPluginsForType type=video/mp4
Authentication is required for this call.
pluginsctl/listPlugins: Get the list of currently loaded plugins
This allows you to get the currently enabled plugins and their details.
This takes no parameters and returns:
• loadedPlugins - list of current production plugins.
• testPlugins - list of temporarily loaded development plugins, usually running on a different server.
E.g.
rclone rc pluginsctl/listPlugins
Authentication is required for this call.
pluginsctl/listTestPlugins: Show currently loaded test plugins
Allows listing of test plugins with the rclone.test set to true in package.json of the plugin.
This takes no parameters and returns:
• loadedTestPlugins - list of currently available test plugins.
E.g.
rclone rc pluginsctl/listTestPlugins
Authentication is required for this call.
pluginsctl/removePlugin: Remove a loaded plugin
This allows you to remove a plugin using it’s name.
This takes parameters:
• name - name of the plugin in the format author/plugin_name.
E.g.
rclone rc pluginsctl/removePlugin name=rclone/video-plugin
Authentication is required for this call.
pluginsctl/removeTestPlugin: Remove a test plugin
This allows you to remove a plugin using it’s name.
This takes the following parameters:
• name - name of the plugin in the format author/plugin_name.
Example:
rclone rc pluginsctl/removeTestPlugin name=rclone/rclone-webui-react
Authentication is required for this call.
rc/error: This returns an error
This returns an error with the input as part of its error string. Useful for testing error handling.
rc/list: List all the registered remote control commands
This lists all the registered remote control commands as a JSON map in the commands response.
rc/noop: Echo the input to the output parameters
This echoes the input parameters to the output parameters for testing purposes. It can be used to check
that rclone is still alive and to check that parameter passing is working properly.
rc/noopauth: Echo the input to the output parameters requiring auth
This echoes the input parameters to the output parameters for testing purposes. It can be used to check
that rclone is still alive and to check that parameter passing is working properly.
Authentication is required for this call.
sync/bisync: Perform bidirectional synchronization between two paths.
This takes the following parameters
• path1 - a remote directory string e.g. drive:path1
• path2 - a remote directory string e.g. drive:path2
• dryRun - dry-run mode
• resync - performs the resync run
• checkAccess - abort if RCLONE_TEST files are not found on both filesystems
• checkFilename - file name for checkAccess (default: RCLONE_TEST)
• maxDelete - abort sync if percentage of deleted files is above this threshold (default: 50)
• force - maxDelete safety check and run the sync
• checkSync - true by default, false disables comparison of final listings, only will skip sync, only
compare listings from the last run
• removeEmptyDirs - remove empty directories at the final cleanup step
• filtersFile - read filtering patterns from a file
• workdir - server directory for history files (default: /home/ncw/.cache/rclone/bisync)
• noCleanup - retain working files
See bisync command help and full bisync description for more information.
Authentication is required for this call.
sync/copy: copy a directory from source remote to destination remote
This takes the following parameters:
• srcFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:src” for the source
• dstFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:dst” for the destination
• createEmptySrcDirs - create empty src directories on destination if set
See the copy command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
sync/move: move a directory from source remote to destination remote
This takes the following parameters:
• srcFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:src” for the source
• dstFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:dst” for the destination
• createEmptySrcDirs - create empty src directories on destination if set
• deleteEmptySrcDirs - delete empty src directories if set
See the move command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
sync/sync: sync a directory from source remote to destination remote
This takes the following parameters:
• srcFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:src” for the source
• dstFs - a remote name string e.g. “drive:dst” for the destination
• createEmptySrcDirs - create empty src directories on destination if set
See the sync command for more information on the above.
Authentication is required for this call.
vfs/forget: Forget files or directories in the directory cache.
This forgets the paths in the directory cache causing them to be re-read from the remote when needed.
If no paths are passed in then it will forget all the paths in the directory cache.
rclone rc vfs/forget
Otherwise pass files or dirs in as file=path or dir=path. Any parameter key starting with file will
forget that file and any starting with dir will forget that dir, e.g.
rclone rc vfs/forget file=hello file2=goodbye dir=home/junk
This command takes an “fs” parameter. If this parameter is not supplied and if there is only one VFS in
use then that VFS will be used. If there is more than one VFS in use then the “fs” parameter must be
supplied.
vfs/list: List active VFSes.
This lists the active VFSes.
It returns a list under the key “vfses” where the values are the VFS names that could be passed to the
other VFS commands in the “fs” parameter.
vfs/poll-interval: Get the status or update the value of the poll-interval option.
Without any parameter given this returns the current status of the poll-interval setting.
When the interval=duration parameter is set, the poll-interval value is updated and the polling function
is notified. Setting interval=0 disables poll-interval.
rclone rc vfs/poll-interval interval=5m
The timeout=duration parameter can be used to specify a time to wait for the current poll function to
apply the new value. If timeout is less or equal 0, which is the default, wait indefinitely.
The new poll-interval value will only be active when the timeout is not reached.
If poll-interval is updated or disabled temporarily, some changes might not get picked up by the polling
function, depending on the used remote.
This command takes an “fs” parameter. If this parameter is not supplied and if there is only one VFS in
use then that VFS will be used. If there is more than one VFS in use then the “fs” parameter must be
supplied.
vfs/refresh: Refresh the directory cache.
This reads the directories for the specified paths and freshens the directory cache.
If no paths are passed in then it will refresh the root directory.
rclone rc vfs/refresh
Otherwise pass directories in as dir=path. Any parameter key starting with dir will refresh that
directory, e.g.
rclone rc vfs/refresh dir=home/junk dir2=data/misc
If the parameter recursive=true is given the whole directory tree will get refreshed. This refresh will
use –fast-list if enabled.
This command takes an “fs” parameter. If this parameter is not supplied and if there is only one VFS in
use then that VFS will be used. If there is more than one VFS in use then the “fs” parameter must be
supplied.
vfs/stats: Stats for a VFS.
This returns stats for the selected VFS.
{
// Status of the disk cache - only present if --vfs-cache-mode > off
"diskCache": {
"bytesUsed": 0,
"erroredFiles": 0,
"files": 0,
"hashType": 1,
"outOfSpace": false,
"path": "/home/user/.cache/rclone/vfs/local/mnt/a",
"pathMeta": "/home/user/.cache/rclone/vfsMeta/local/mnt/a",
"uploadsInProgress": 0,
"uploadsQueued": 0
},
"fs": "/mnt/a",
"inUse": 1,
// Status of the in memory metadata cache
"metadataCache": {
"dirs": 1,
"files": 0
},
// Options as returned by options/get
"opt": {
"CacheMaxAge": 3600000000000,
// ...
"WriteWait": 1000000000
}
}
This command takes an “fs” parameter. If this parameter is not supplied and if there is only one VFS in
use then that VFS will be used. If there is more than one VFS in use then the “fs” parameter must be
supplied.
Accessing the remote control via HTTP
Rclone implements a simple HTTP based protocol.
Each endpoint takes an JSON object and returns a JSON object or an error. The JSON objects are
essentially a map of string names to values.
All calls must made using POST.
The input objects can be supplied using URL parameters, POST parameters or by supplying “Content-Type:
application/json” and a JSON blob in the body. There are examples of these below using curl.
The response will be a JSON blob in the body of the response. This is formatted to be reasonably
human-readable.
Error returns
If an error occurs then there will be an HTTP error status (e.g. 500) and the body of the response will
contain a JSON encoded error object, e.g.
{
"error": "Expecting string value for key \"remote\" (was float64)",
"input": {
"fs": "/tmp",
"remote": 3
},
"status": 400
"path": "operations/rmdir",
}
The keys in the error response are - error - error string - input - the input parameters to the call -
status - the HTTP status code - path - the path of the call
CORS
The sever implements basic CORS support and allows all origins for that. The response to a preflight
OPTIONS request will echo the requested “Access-Control-Request-Headers” back.
Using POST with URL parameters only
curl -X POST 'http://localhost:5572/rc/noop?potato=1&sausage=2'
Response
{
"potato": "1",
"sausage": "2"
}
Here is what an error response looks like:
curl -X POST 'http://localhost:5572/rc/error?potato=1&sausage=2'
{
"error": "arbitrary error on input map[potato:1 sausage:2]",
"input": {
"potato": "1",
"sausage": "2"
}
}
Note that curl doesn’t return errors to the shell unless you use the -f option
$ curl -f -X POST 'http://localhost:5572/rc/error?potato=1&sausage=2'
curl: (22) The requested URL returned error: 400 Bad Request
$ echo $?
22
Using POST with a form
curl --data "potato=1" --data "sausage=2" http://localhost:5572/rc/noop
Response
{
"potato": "1",
"sausage": "2"
}
Note that you can combine these with URL parameters too with the POST parameters taking precedence.
curl --data "potato=1" --data "sausage=2" "http://localhost:5572/rc/noop?rutabaga=3&sausage=4"
Response
{
"potato": "1",
"rutabaga": "3",
"sausage": "4"
}
Using POST with a JSON blob
curl -H "Content-Type: application/json" -X POST -d '{"potato":2,"sausage":1}' http://localhost:5572/rc/noop
response
{
"password": "xyz",
"username": "xyz"
}
This can be combined with URL parameters too if required. The JSON blob takes precedence.
curl -H "Content-Type: application/json" -X POST -d '{"potato":2,"sausage":1}' 'http://localhost:5572/rc/noop?rutabaga=3&potato=4'
{
"potato": 2,
"rutabaga": "3",
"sausage": 1
}
Debugging rclone with pprof
If you use the --rc flag this will also enable the use of the go profiling tools on the same port.
To use these, first install go.
Debugging memory use
To profile rclone’s memory use you can run:
go tool pprof -web http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/heap
This should open a page in your browser showing what is using what memory.
You can also use the -text flag to produce a textual summary
$ go tool pprof -text http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/heap
Showing nodes accounting for 1537.03kB, 100% of 1537.03kB total
flat flat% sum% cum cum%
1024.03kB 66.62% 66.62% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/vendor/golang.org/x/net/http2/hpack.addDecoderNode
513kB 33.38% 100% 513kB 33.38% net/http.newBufioWriterSize
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/cmd/all.init
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/cmd/serve.init
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/cmd/serve/restic.init
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/vendor/golang.org/x/net/http2.init
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/vendor/golang.org/x/net/http2/hpack.init
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% github.com/rclone/rclone/vendor/golang.org/x/net/http2/hpack.init.0
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% main.init
0 0% 100% 513kB 33.38% net/http.(*conn).readRequest
0 0% 100% 513kB 33.38% net/http.(*conn).serve
0 0% 100% 1024.03kB 66.62% runtime.main
Debugging go routine leaks
Memory leaks are most often caused by go routine leaks keeping memory alive which should have been
garbage collected.
See all active go routines using
curl http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/goroutine?debug=1
Or go to http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/goroutine?debug=1 in your browser.
Other profiles to look at
You can see a summary of profiles available at http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/
Here is how to use some of them:
• Memory: go tool pprof http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/heap
• Go routines: curl http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/goroutine?debug=1
• 30-second CPU profile: go tool pprof http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/profile
• 5-second execution trace: wget http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/trace?seconds=5
• Goroutine blocking profile
• Enable first with: rclone rc debug/set-block-profile-rate rate=1 (docs)
• go tool pprof http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/block
• Contended mutexes:
• Enable first with: rclone rc debug/set-mutex-profile-fraction rate=1 (docs)
• go tool pprof http://localhost:5572/debug/pprof/mutex
See the net/http/pprof docs for more info on how to use the profiling and for a general overview see the
Go team’s blog post on profiling go programs.
The profiling hook is zero overhead unless it is used.
Overview of cloud storage systems
Each cloud storage system is slightly different. Rclone attempts to provide a unified interface to them,
but some underlying differences show through.
Features
Here is an overview of the major features of each cloud storage system.
Name Hash ModTime Case Duplicate MIME Metadata
Insensitive Files Type
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1Fichier Whirlpool - No Yes R -
Akamai Netstorage MD5, SHA256 R/W No No R -
Amazon Drive MD5 - Yes No R -
Amazon S3 (or S3 MD5 R/W No No R/W RWU
compatible)
Backblaze B2 SHA1 R/W No No R/W -
Box SHA1 R/W Yes No - -
Citrix ShareFile MD5 R/W Yes No - -
Dropbox DBHASH ¹ R Yes No - -
Enterprise File - R/W Yes No R/W -
Fabric
FTP - R/W ¹⁰ No No - -
Google Cloud MD5 R/W No No R/W -
Storage
Google Drive MD5 R/W No Yes R/W -
Google Photos - - No Yes R -
HDFS - R/W No No - -
HiDrive HiDrive ¹² R/W No No - -
HTTP - R No No R -
Internet Archive MD5, SHA1, R/W ¹¹ No No - RWU
CRC32
Jottacloud MD5 R/W Yes No R -
Koofr MD5 - Yes No - -
Mail.ru Cloud Mailru ⁶ R/W Yes No - -
Mega - - No Yes - -
Memory MD5 R/W No No - -
Microsoft Azure MD5 R/W No No R/W -
Blob Storage
Microsoft OneDrive SHA1 ⁵ R/W Yes No R -
OpenDrive MD5 R/W Yes Partial ⁸ - -
OpenStack Swift MD5 R/W No No R/W -
Oracle Object MD5 R/W No No R/W -
Storage
pCloud MD5, SHA1 ⁷ R No No W -
premiumize.me - - Yes No R -
put.io CRC-32 R/W No Yes R -
QingStor MD5 - ⁹ No No R/W -
Seafile - - No No - -
SFTP MD5, SHA1 ² R/W Depends No - -
Sia - - No No - -
SMB - - Yes No - -
SugarSync - - No No - -
Storj - R No No - -
Uptobox - - No Yes - -
WebDAV MD5, SHA1 ³ R ⁴ Depends No - -
Yandex Disk MD5 R/W No No R -
Zoho WorkDrive - - No No - -
The local All R/W Depends No - RWU
filesystem
Notes
¹ Dropbox supports its own custom hash. This is an SHA256 sum of all the 4 MiB block SHA256s.
² SFTP supports checksums if the same login has shell access and md5sum or sha1sum as well as echo are in
the remote’s PATH.
³ WebDAV supports hashes when used with Owncloud and Nextcloud only.
⁴ WebDAV supports modtimes when used with Owncloud and Nextcloud only.
⁵ Microsoft OneDrive Personal supports SHA1 hashes, whereas OneDrive for business and SharePoint server
support Microsoft’s own https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/onedrive/developer/code-snippets/quickxorhash
QuickXorHash.
⁶ Mail.ru uses its own modified SHA1 hash
⁷ pCloud only supports SHA1 (not MD5) in its EU region
⁸ Opendrive does not support creation of duplicate files using their web client interface or other stock
clients, but the underlying storage platform has been determined to allow duplicate files, and it is
possible to create them with rclone. It may be that this is a mistake or an unsupported feature.
⁹ QingStor does not support SetModTime for objects bigger than 5 GiB.
¹⁰ FTP supports modtimes for the major FTP servers, and also others if they advertised required protocol
extensions. See this for more details.
¹¹ Internet Archive requires option wait_archive to be set to a non-zero value for full modtime support.
¹² HiDrive supports its own custom hash. It combines SHA1 sums for each 4 KiB block hierarchically to a
single top-level sum.
Hash
The cloud storage system supports various hash types of the objects. The hashes are used when
transferring data as an integrity check and can be specifically used with the --checksum flag in syncs
and in the check command.
To use the verify checksums when transferring between cloud storage systems they must support a common
hash type.
ModTime
Almost all cloud storage systems store some sort of timestamp on objects, but several of them not
something that is appropriate to use for syncing. E.g. some backends will only write a timestamp that
represent the time of the upload. To be relevant for syncing it should be able to store the modification
time of the source object. If this is not the case, rclone will only check the file size by default,
though can be configured to check the file hash (with the --checksum flag). Ideally it should also be
possible to change the timestamp of an existing file without having to re-upload it.
Storage systems with a - in the ModTime column, means the modification read on objects is not the
modification time of the file when uploaded. It is most likely the time the file was uploaded, or
possibly something else (like the time the picture was taken in Google Photos).
Storage systems with a R (for read-only) in the ModTime column, means the it keeps modification times on
objects, and updates them when uploading objects, but it does not support changing only the modification
time (SetModTime operation) without re-uploading, possibly not even without deleting existing first.
Some operations in rclone, such as copy and sync commands, will automatically check for SetModTime
support and re-upload if necessary to keep the modification times in sync. Other commands will not work
without SetModTime support, e.g. touch command on an existing file will fail, and changes to modification
time only on a files in a mount will be silently ignored.
Storage systems with R/W (for read/write) in the ModTime column, means they do also support modtime-only
operations.
Case Insensitive
If a cloud storage systems is case sensitive then it is possible to have two files which differ only in
case, e.g. file.txt and FILE.txt. If a cloud storage system is case insensitive then that isn’t
possible.
This can cause problems when syncing between a case insensitive system and a case sensitive system. The
symptom of this is that no matter how many times you run the sync it never completes fully.
The local filesystem and SFTP may or may not be case sensitive depending on OS.
• Windows - usually case insensitive, though case is preserved
• OSX - usually case insensitive, though it is possible to format case sensitive
• Linux - usually case sensitive, but there are case insensitive file systems (e.g. FAT formatted USB
keys)
Most of the time this doesn’t cause any problems as people tend to avoid files whose name differs only by
case even on case sensitive systems.
Duplicate files
If a cloud storage system allows duplicate files then it can have two objects with the same name.
This confuses rclone greatly when syncing - use the rclone dedupe command to rename or remove duplicates.
Restricted filenames
Some cloud storage systems might have restrictions on the characters that are usable in file or directory
names. When rclone detects such a name during a file upload, it will transparently replace the
restricted characters with similar looking Unicode characters. To handle the different sets of
restricted characters for different backends, rclone uses something it calls encoding.
This process is designed to avoid ambiguous file names as much as possible and allow to move files
between many cloud storage systems transparently.
The name shown by rclone to the user or during log output will only contain a minimal set of replaced
characters to ensure correct formatting and not necessarily the actual name used on the cloud storage.
This transformation is reversed when downloading a file or parsing rclone arguments. For example, when
uploading a file named my file?.txt to Onedrive, it will be displayed as my file?.txt on the console, but
stored as my file？.txt to Onedrive (the ? gets replaced by the similar looking ？ character, the
so-called “fullwidth question mark”). The reverse transformation allows to read a file unusual/name.txt
from Google Drive, by passing the name unusual／name.txt on the command line (the / needs to be replaced
by the similar looking ／ character).
Caveats
The filename encoding system works well in most cases, at least where file names are written in English
or similar languages. You might not even notice it: It just works. In some cases it may lead to issues,
though. E.g. when file names are written in Chinese, or Japanese, where it is always the Unicode
fullwidth variants of the punctuation marks that are used.
On Windows, the characters :, * and ? are examples of restricted characters. If these are used in
filenames on a remote that supports it, Rclone will transparently convert them to their fullwidth Unicode
variants ＊, ？ and ： when downloading to Windows, and back again when uploading. This way files with
names that are not allowed on Windows can still be stored.
However, if you have files on your Windows system originally with these same Unicode characters in their
names, they will be included in the same conversion process. E.g. if you create a file in your Windows
filesystem with name Test：1.jpg, where ： is the Unicode fullwidth colon symbol, and use rclone to
upload it to Google Drive, which supports regular : (halfwidth question mark), rclone will replace the
fullwidth : with the halfwidth : and store the file as Test:1.jpg in Google Drive. Since both Windows
and Google Drive allows the name Test：1.jpg, it would probably be better if rclone just kept the name as
is in this case.
With the opposite situation; if you have a file named Test:1.jpg, in your Google Drive, e.g. uploaded
from a Linux system where : is valid in file names. Then later use rclone to copy this file to your
Windows computer you will notice that on your local disk it gets renamed to Test：1.jpg. The original
filename is not legal on Windows, due to the :, and rclone therefore renames it to make the copy
possible. That is all good. However, this can also lead to an issue: If you already had a different
file named Test：1.jpg on Windows, and then use rclone to copy either way. Rclone will then treat the
file originally named Test:1.jpg on Google Drive and the file originally named Test：1.jpg on Windows as
the same file, and replace the contents from one with the other.
Its virtually impossible to handle all cases like these correctly in all situations, but by customizing
the encoding option, changing the set of characters that rclone should convert, you should be able to
create a configuration that works well for your specific situation. See also the example below.
(Windows was used as an example of a file system with many restricted characters, and Google drive a
storage system with few.)
Default restricted characters
The table below shows the characters that are replaced by default.
When a replacement character is found in a filename, this character will be escaped with the ‛ character
to avoid ambiguous file names. (e.g. a file named ␀.txt would shown as ‛␀.txt)
Each cloud storage backend can use a different set of characters, which will be specified in the
documentation for each backend.
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
SOH 0x01 ␁
STX 0x02 ␂
ETX 0x03 ␃
EOT 0x04 ␄
ENQ 0x05 ␅
ACK 0x06 ␆
BEL 0x07 ␇
BS 0x08 ␈
HT 0x09 ␉
LF 0x0A ␊
VT 0x0B ␋
FF 0x0C ␌
CR 0x0D ␍
SO 0x0E ␎
SI 0x0F ␏
DLE 0x10 ␐
DC1 0x11 ␑
DC2 0x12 ␒
DC3 0x13 ␓
DC4 0x14 ␔
NAK 0x15 ␕
SYN 0x16 ␖
ETB 0x17 ␗
CAN 0x18 ␘
EM 0x19 ␙
SUB 0x1A ␚
ESC 0x1B ␛
FS 0x1C ␜
GS 0x1D ␝
RS 0x1E ␞
US 0x1F ␟
/ 0x2F ／
DEL 0x7F ␡
The default encoding will also encode these file names as they are problematic with many cloud storage
systems.
File name Replacement
────────────────────────
. ．
.. ．．
Invalid UTF-8 bytes
Some backends only support a sequence of well formed UTF-8 bytes as file or directory names.
In this case all invalid UTF-8 bytes will be replaced with a quoted representation of the byte value to
allow uploading a file to such a backend. For example, the invalid byte 0xFE will be encoded as ‛FE.
A common source of invalid UTF-8 bytes are local filesystems, that store names in a different encoding
than UTF-8 or UTF-16, like latin1. See the local filenames section for details.
Encoding option
Most backends have an encoding option, specified as a flag --backend-encoding where backend is the name
of the backend, or as a config parameter encoding (you’ll need to select the Advanced config in rclone
config to see it).
This will have default value which encodes and decodes characters in such a way as to preserve the
maximum number of characters (see above).
However this can be incorrect in some scenarios, for example if you have a Windows file system with
Unicode fullwidth characters ＊, ？ or ：, that you want to remain as those characters on the remote
rather than being translated to regular (halfwidth) *, ? and :.
The --backend-encoding flags allow you to change that. You can disable the encoding completely with
--backend-encoding None or set encoding = None in the config file.
Encoding takes a comma separated list of encodings. You can see the list of all possible values by
passing an invalid value to this flag, e.g. --local-encoding "help". The command rclone help flags
encoding will show you the defaults for the backends.
Encoding Characters Encoded as
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Asterisk * ＊
BackQuote ` ｀
BackSlash \ ＼
Colon : ：
CrLf CR 0x0D, LF 0x0A ␍, ␊
Ctl All control characters ␀␁␂␃␄␅␆␇␈␉␊␋␌␍␎␏␐␑␒␓␔␕␖␗␘␙␚␛␜␝␞␟
0x00-0x1F
Del DEL 0x7F ␡
Dollar $ ＄
Dot . or .. as entire string ．, ．．
DoubleQuote " ＂
Hash # ＃
InvalidUtf8 An invalid UTF-8 �
character (e.g. latin1)
LeftCrLfHtVt CR 0x0D, LF 0x0A, HT ␍, ␊, ␉, ␋
0x09, VT 0x0B on the
left of a string
LeftPeriod . on the left of a .
string
LeftSpace SPACE on the left of a ␠
string
LeftTilde ~ on the left of a ～
string
LtGt <, > ＜, ＞
None No characters are
encoded
Percent % ％
Pipe | ｜
Question ? ？
RightCrLfHtVt CR 0x0D, LF 0x0A, HT ␍, ␊, ␉, ␋
0x09, VT 0x0B on the
right of a string
RightPeriod . on the right of a .
string
RightSpace SPACE on the right of a ␠
string
Semicolon ; ；
SingleQuote ' ＇
Slash / ／
SquareBracket [, ] ［, ］
Encoding example: FTP
To take a specific example, the FTP backend’s default encoding is
--ftp-encoding "Slash,Del,Ctl,RightSpace,Dot"
However, let’s say the FTP server is running on Windows and can’t have any of the invalid Windows
characters in file names. You are backing up Linux servers to this FTP server which do have those
characters in file names. So you would add the Windows set which are
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot
to the existing ones, giving:
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot,Del,RightSpace
This can be specified using the --ftp-encoding flag or using an encoding parameter in the config file.
Encoding example: Windows
As a nother example, take a Windows system where there is a file with name Test：1.jpg, where ： is the
Unicode fullwidth colon symbol. When using rclone to copy this to a remote which supports :, the regular
(halfwidth) colon (such as Google Drive), you will notice that the file gets renamed to Test:1.jpg.
To avoid this you can change the set of characters rclone should convert for the local filesystem, using
command-line argument --local-encoding. Rclone’s default behavior on Windows corresponds to
--local-encoding "Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot"
If you want to use fullwidth characters ：, ＊ and ？ in your filenames without rclone changing them when
uploading to a remote, then set the same as the default value but without Colon,Question,Asterisk:
--local-encoding "Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot"
Alternatively, you can disable the conversion of any characters with --local-encoding None.
Instead of using command-line argument --local-encoding, you may also set it as environment
variable RCLONE_LOCAL_ENCODING, or configure a remote of type local in your config, and set the encoding
option there.
The risk by doing this is that if you have a filename with the regular (halfwidth) :, * and ? in your
cloud storage, and you try to download it to your Windows filesystem, this will fail. These characters
are not valid in filenames on Windows, and you have told rclone not to work around this by converting
them to valid fullwidth variants.
MIME Type
MIME types (also known as media types) classify types of documents using a simple text classification,
e.g. text/html or application/pdf.
Some cloud storage systems support reading (R) the MIME type of objects and some support writing (W) the
MIME type of objects.
The MIME type can be important if you are serving files directly to HTTP from the storage system.
If you are copying from a remote which supports reading (R) to a remote which supports writing (W) then
rclone will preserve the MIME types. Otherwise they will be guessed from the extension, or the remote
itself may assign the MIME type.
Metadata
Backends may or may support reading or writing metadata. They may support reading and writing system
metadata (metadata intrinsic to that backend) and/or user metadata (general purpose metadata).
The levels of metadata support are
Key Explanation
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
R Read only System Metadata
RW Read and write System Metadata
RWU Read and write System Metadata and read and write
User Metadata
See the metadata docs for more info.
Optional Features
All rclone remotes support a base command set. Other features depend upon backend-specific capabilities.
Name Purge Copy Move DirMove CleanUp ListR StreamUpload LinkSharing About EmptyDir
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
1Fichier No Yes Yes No No No No Yes No Yes
Akamai Netstorage Yes No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes
Amazon Drive Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No Yes
Amazon S3 (or S3 No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
compatible)
Backblaze B2 No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Box Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ‡‡ No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Citrix ShareFile Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes
Dropbox Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enterprise File Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes
Fabric
FTP No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes
Google Cloud Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No
Storage
Google Drive Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Google Photos No No No No No No No No No No
HDFS Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
HiDrive Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes
HTTP No No No No No No No No No Yes
Internet Archive No Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
Jottacloud Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Koofr Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mail.ru Cloud Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Mega Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Memory No Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No
Microsoft Azure Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No
Blob Storage
Microsoft Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
OneDrive
OpenDrive Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes
OpenStack Swift Yes † Yes No No No Yes Yes No Yes No
Oracle Object No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No No
Storage
pCloud Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
premiumize.me Yes No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes
put.io Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
QingStor No Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No
Seafile Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SFTP No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
Sia No No No No No No Yes No No Yes
SMB No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes
SugarSync Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes
Storj Yes † No Yes No No Yes Yes No No No
Uptobox No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No
WebDAV Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes ‡ No Yes Yes
Yandex Disk Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Zoho WorkDrive Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes
The local Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
filesystem
Purge
This deletes a directory quicker than just deleting all the files in the directory.
† Note Swift and Storj implement this in order to delete directory markers but they don’t actually have a
quicker way of deleting files other than deleting them individually.
‡ StreamUpload is not supported with Nextcloud
Copy
Used when copying an object to and from the same remote. This known as a server-side copy so you can
copy a file without downloading it and uploading it again. It is used if you use rclone copy or rclone
move if the remote doesn’t support Move directly.
If the server doesn’t support Copy directly then for copy operations the file is downloaded then
re-uploaded.
Move
Used when moving/renaming an object on the same remote. This is known as a server-side move of a file.
This is used in rclone move if the server doesn’t support DirMove.
If the server isn’t capable of Move then rclone simulates it with Copy then delete. If the server
doesn’t support Copy then rclone will download the file and re-upload it.
DirMove
This is used to implement rclone move to move a directory if possible. If it isn’t then it will use Move
on each file (which falls back to Copy then download and upload - see Move section).
CleanUp
This is used for emptying the trash for a remote by rclone cleanup.
If the server can’t do CleanUp then rclone cleanup will return an error.
‡‡ Note that while Box implements this it has to delete every file individually so it will be slower than
emptying the trash via the WebUI
ListR
The remote supports a recursive list to list all the contents beneath a directory quickly. This enables
the --fast-list flag to work. See the rclone docs for more details.
StreamUpload
Some remotes allow files to be uploaded without knowing the file size in advance. This allows certain
operations to work without spooling the file to local disk first, e.g. rclone rcat.
LinkSharing
Sets the necessary permissions on a file or folder and prints a link that allows others to access them,
even if they don’t have an account on the particular cloud provider.
About
Rclone about prints quota information for a remote. Typical output includes bytes used, free, quota and
in trash.
If a remote lacks about capability rclone about remote:returns an error.
Backends without about capability cannot determine free space for an rclone mount, or use policy mfs
(most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See rclone about command
EmptyDir
The remote supports empty directories. See Limitations for details. Most Object/Bucket-based remotes do
not support this.
Global Flags
This describes the global flags available to every rclone command split into two groups, non backend and
backend flags.
Non Backend Flags
These flags are available for every command.
--ask-password Allow prompt for password for encrypted configuration (default true)
--auto-confirm If enabled, do not request console confirmation
--backup-dir string Make backups into hierarchy based in DIR
--bind string Local address to bind to for outgoing connections, IPv4, IPv6 or name
--buffer-size SizeSuffix In memory buffer size when reading files for each --transfer (default 16Mi)
--bwlimit BwTimetable Bandwidth limit in KiB/s, or use suffix B|K|M|G|T|P or a full timetable
--bwlimit-file BwTimetable Bandwidth limit per file in KiB/s, or use suffix B|K|M|G|T|P or a full timetable
--ca-cert string CA certificate used to verify servers
--cache-dir string Directory rclone will use for caching (default "$HOME/.cache/rclone")
--check-first Do all the checks before starting transfers
--checkers int Number of checkers to run in parallel (default 8)
-c, --checksum Skip based on checksum (if available) & size, not mod-time & size
--client-cert string Client SSL certificate (PEM) for mutual TLS auth
--client-key string Client SSL private key (PEM) for mutual TLS auth
--compare-dest stringArray Include additional comma separated server-side paths during comparison
--config string Config file (default "$HOME/.config/rclone/rclone.conf")
--contimeout duration Connect timeout (default 1m0s)
--copy-dest stringArray Implies --compare-dest but also copies files from paths into destination
--cpuprofile string Write cpu profile to file
--cutoff-mode string Mode to stop transfers when reaching the max transfer limit HARD|SOFT|CAUTIOUS (default "HARD")
--delete-after When synchronizing, delete files on destination after transferring (default)
--delete-before When synchronizing, delete files on destination before transferring
--delete-during When synchronizing, delete files during transfer
--delete-excluded Delete files on dest excluded from sync
--disable string Disable a comma separated list of features (use --disable help to see a list)
--disable-http-keep-alives Disable HTTP keep-alives and use each connection once.
--disable-http2 Disable HTTP/2 in the global transport
-n, --dry-run Do a trial run with no permanent changes
--dscp string Set DSCP value to connections, value or name, e.g. CS1, LE, DF, AF21
--dump DumpFlags List of items to dump from: headers,bodies,requests,responses,auth,filters,goroutines,openfiles
--dump-bodies Dump HTTP headers and bodies - may contain sensitive info
--dump-headers Dump HTTP headers - may contain sensitive info
--error-on-no-transfer Sets exit code 9 if no files are transferred, useful in scripts
--exclude stringArray Exclude files matching pattern
--exclude-from stringArray Read exclude patterns from file (use - to read from stdin)
--exclude-if-present stringArray Exclude directories if filename is present
--expect-continue-timeout duration Timeout when using expect / 100-continue in HTTP (default 1s)
--fast-list Use recursive list if available; uses more memory but fewer transactions
--files-from stringArray Read list of source-file names from file (use - to read from stdin)
--files-from-raw stringArray Read list of source-file names from file without any processing of lines (use - to read from stdin)
-f, --filter stringArray Add a file-filtering rule
--filter-from stringArray Read filtering patterns from a file (use - to read from stdin)
--fs-cache-expire-duration duration Cache remotes for this long (0 to disable caching) (default 5m0s)
--fs-cache-expire-interval duration Interval to check for expired remotes (default 1m0s)
--header stringArray Set HTTP header for all transactions
--header-download stringArray Set HTTP header for download transactions
--header-upload stringArray Set HTTP header for upload transactions
--human-readable Print numbers in a human-readable format, sizes with suffix Ki|Mi|Gi|Ti|Pi
--ignore-case Ignore case in filters (case insensitive)
--ignore-case-sync Ignore case when synchronizing
--ignore-checksum Skip post copy check of checksums
--ignore-errors Delete even if there are I/O errors
--ignore-existing Skip all files that exist on destination
--ignore-size Ignore size when skipping use mod-time or checksum
-I, --ignore-times Don't skip files that match size and time - transfer all files
--immutable Do not modify files, fail if existing files have been modified
--include stringArray Include files matching pattern
--include-from stringArray Read include patterns from file (use - to read from stdin)
-i, --interactive Enable interactive mode
--kv-lock-time duration Maximum time to keep key-value database locked by process (default 1s)
--log-file string Log everything to this file
--log-format string Comma separated list of log format options (default "date,time")
--log-level string Log level DEBUG|INFO|NOTICE|ERROR (default "NOTICE")
--log-systemd Activate systemd integration for the logger
--low-level-retries int Number of low level retries to do (default 10)
--max-age Duration Only transfer files younger than this in s or suffix ms|s|m|h|d|w|M|y (default off)
--max-backlog int Maximum number of objects in sync or check backlog (default 10000)
--max-delete int When synchronizing, limit the number of deletes (default -1)
--max-depth int If set limits the recursion depth to this (default -1)
--max-duration duration Maximum duration rclone will transfer data for
--max-size SizeSuffix Only transfer files smaller than this in KiB or suffix B|K|M|G|T|P (default off)
--max-stats-groups int Maximum number of stats groups to keep in memory, on max oldest is discarded (default 1000)
--max-transfer SizeSuffix Maximum size of data to transfer (default off)
--memprofile string Write memory profile to file
-M, --metadata If set, preserve metadata when copying objects
--metadata-set stringArray Add metadata key=value when uploading
--min-age Duration Only transfer files older than this in s or suffix ms|s|m|h|d|w|M|y (default off)
--min-size SizeSuffix Only transfer files bigger than this in KiB or suffix B|K|M|G|T|P (default off)
--modify-window duration Max time diff to be considered the same (default 1ns)
--multi-thread-cutoff SizeSuffix Use multi-thread downloads for files above this size (default 250Mi)
--multi-thread-streams int Max number of streams to use for multi-thread downloads (default 4)
--no-check-certificate Do not verify the server SSL certificate (insecure)
--no-check-dest Don't check the destination, copy regardless
--no-console Hide console window (supported on Windows only)
--no-gzip-encoding Don't set Accept-Encoding: gzip
--no-traverse Don't traverse destination file system on copy
--no-unicode-normalization Don't normalize unicode characters in filenames
--no-update-modtime Don't update destination mod-time if files identical
--order-by string Instructions on how to order the transfers, e.g. 'size,descending'
--password-command SpaceSepList Command for supplying password for encrypted configuration
-P, --progress Show progress during transfer
--progress-terminal-title Show progress on the terminal title (requires -P/--progress)
-q, --quiet Print as little stuff as possible
--rc Enable the remote control server
--rc-addr string IPaddress:Port or :Port to bind server to (default "localhost:5572")
--rc-allow-origin string Set the allowed origin for CORS
--rc-baseurl string Prefix for URLs - leave blank for root
--rc-cert string SSL PEM key (concatenation of certificate and CA certificate)
--rc-client-ca string Client certificate authority to verify clients with
--rc-enable-metrics Enable prometheus metrics on /metrics
--rc-files string Path to local files to serve on the HTTP server
--rc-htpasswd string htpasswd file - if not provided no authentication is done
--rc-job-expire-duration duration Expire finished async jobs older than this value (default 1m0s)
--rc-job-expire-interval duration Interval to check for expired async jobs (default 10s)
--rc-key string SSL PEM Private key
--rc-max-header-bytes int Maximum size of request header (default 4096)
--rc-min-tls-version string Minimum TLS version that is acceptable (default "tls1.0")
--rc-no-auth Don't require auth for certain methods
--rc-pass string Password for authentication
--rc-realm string Realm for authentication (default "rclone")
--rc-serve Enable the serving of remote objects
--rc-server-read-timeout duration Timeout for server reading data (default 1h0m0s)
--rc-server-write-timeout duration Timeout for server writing data (default 1h0m0s)
--rc-template string User-specified template
--rc-user string User name for authentication
--rc-web-fetch-url string URL to fetch the releases for webgui (default "https://api.github.com/repos/rclone/rclone-webui-react/releases/latest")
--rc-web-gui Launch WebGUI on localhost
--rc-web-gui-force-update Force update to latest version of web gui
--rc-web-gui-no-open-browser Don't open the browser automatically
--rc-web-gui-update Check and update to latest version of web gui
--refresh-times Refresh the modtime of remote files
--retries int Retry operations this many times if they fail (default 3)
--retries-sleep duration Interval between retrying operations if they fail, e.g. 500ms, 60s, 5m (0 to disable)
--server-side-across-configs Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different configs
--size-only Skip based on size only, not mod-time or checksum
--stats duration Interval between printing stats, e.g. 500ms, 60s, 5m (0 to disable) (default 1m0s)
--stats-file-name-length int Max file name length in stats (0 for no limit) (default 45)
--stats-log-level string Log level to show --stats output DEBUG|INFO|NOTICE|ERROR (default "INFO")
--stats-one-line Make the stats fit on one line
--stats-one-line-date Enable --stats-one-line and add current date/time prefix
--stats-one-line-date-format string Enable --stats-one-line-date and use custom formatted date: Enclose date string in double quotes ("), see https://golang.org/pkg/time/#Time.Format
--stats-unit string Show data rate in stats as either 'bits' or 'bytes' per second (default "bytes")
--streaming-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to chunked upload if file size is unknown, upload starts after reaching cutoff or when file ends (default 100Ki)
--suffix string Suffix to add to changed files
--suffix-keep-extension Preserve the extension when using --suffix
--syslog Use Syslog for logging
--syslog-facility string Facility for syslog, e.g. KERN,USER,... (default "DAEMON")
--temp-dir string Directory rclone will use for temporary files (default "/tmp")
--timeout duration IO idle timeout (default 5m0s)
--tpslimit float Limit HTTP transactions per second to this
--tpslimit-burst int Max burst of transactions for --tpslimit (default 1)
--track-renames When synchronizing, track file renames and do a server-side move if possible
--track-renames-strategy string Strategies to use when synchronizing using track-renames hash|modtime|leaf (default "hash")
--transfers int Number of file transfers to run in parallel (default 4)
-u, --update Skip files that are newer on the destination
--use-cookies Enable session cookiejar
--use-json-log Use json log format
--use-mmap Use mmap allocator (see docs)
--use-server-modtime Use server modified time instead of object metadata
--user-agent string Set the user-agent to a specified string (default "rclone/v1.60.1")
-v, --verbose count Print lots more stuff (repeat for more)
Backend Flags
These flags are available for every command. They control the backends and may be set in the config
file.
--acd-auth-url string Auth server URL
--acd-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--acd-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--acd-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--acd-templink-threshold SizeSuffix Files >= this size will be downloaded via their tempLink (default 9Gi)
--acd-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--acd-token-url string Token server url
--acd-upload-wait-per-gb Duration Additional time per GiB to wait after a failed complete upload to see if it appears (default 3m0s)
--alias-remote string Remote or path to alias
--azureblob-access-tier string Access tier of blob: hot, cool or archive
--azureblob-account string Storage Account Name
--azureblob-archive-tier-delete Delete archive tier blobs before overwriting
--azureblob-chunk-size SizeSuffix Upload chunk size (default 4Mi)
--azureblob-disable-checksum Don't store MD5 checksum with object metadata
--azureblob-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8)
--azureblob-endpoint string Endpoint for the service
--azureblob-key string Storage Account Key
--azureblob-list-chunk int Size of blob list (default 5000)
--azureblob-memory-pool-flush-time Duration How often internal memory buffer pools will be flushed (default 1m0s)
--azureblob-memory-pool-use-mmap Whether to use mmap buffers in internal memory pool
--azureblob-msi-client-id string Object ID of the user-assigned MSI to use, if any
--azureblob-msi-mi-res-id string Azure resource ID of the user-assigned MSI to use, if any
--azureblob-msi-object-id string Object ID of the user-assigned MSI to use, if any
--azureblob-no-head-object If set, do not do HEAD before GET when getting objects
--azureblob-public-access string Public access level of a container: blob or container
--azureblob-sas-url string SAS URL for container level access only
--azureblob-service-principal-file string Path to file containing credentials for use with a service principal
--azureblob-upload-concurrency int Concurrency for multipart uploads (default 16)
--azureblob-upload-cutoff string Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (<= 256 MiB) (deprecated)
--azureblob-use-emulator Uses local storage emulator if provided as 'true'
--azureblob-use-msi Use a managed service identity to authenticate (only works in Azure)
--b2-account string Account ID or Application Key ID
--b2-chunk-size SizeSuffix Upload chunk size (default 96Mi)
--b2-copy-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to multipart copy (default 4Gi)
--b2-disable-checksum Disable checksums for large (> upload cutoff) files
--b2-download-auth-duration Duration Time before the authorization token will expire in s or suffix ms|s|m|h|d (default 1w)
--b2-download-url string Custom endpoint for downloads
--b2-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--b2-endpoint string Endpoint for the service
--b2-hard-delete Permanently delete files on remote removal, otherwise hide files
--b2-key string Application Key
--b2-memory-pool-flush-time Duration How often internal memory buffer pools will be flushed (default 1m0s)
--b2-memory-pool-use-mmap Whether to use mmap buffers in internal memory pool
--b2-test-mode string A flag string for X-Bz-Test-Mode header for debugging
--b2-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (default 200Mi)
--b2-version-at Time Show file versions as they were at the specified time (default off)
--b2-versions Include old versions in directory listings
--box-access-token string Box App Primary Access Token
--box-auth-url string Auth server URL
--box-box-config-file string Box App config.json location
--box-box-sub-type string (default "user")
--box-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--box-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--box-commit-retries int Max number of times to try committing a multipart file (default 100)
--box-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,RightSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--box-list-chunk int Size of listing chunk 1-1000 (default 1000)
--box-owned-by string Only show items owned by the login (email address) passed in
--box-root-folder-id string Fill in for rclone to use a non root folder as its starting point
--box-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--box-token-url string Token server url
--box-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to multipart upload (>= 50 MiB) (default 50Mi)
--cache-chunk-clean-interval Duration How often should the cache perform cleanups of the chunk storage (default 1m0s)
--cache-chunk-no-memory Disable the in-memory cache for storing chunks during streaming
--cache-chunk-path string Directory to cache chunk files (default "$HOME/.cache/rclone/cache-backend")
--cache-chunk-size SizeSuffix The size of a chunk (partial file data) (default 5Mi)
--cache-chunk-total-size SizeSuffix The total size that the chunks can take up on the local disk (default 10Gi)
--cache-db-path string Directory to store file structure metadata DB (default "$HOME/.cache/rclone/cache-backend")
--cache-db-purge Clear all the cached data for this remote on start
--cache-db-wait-time Duration How long to wait for the DB to be available - 0 is unlimited (default 1s)
--cache-info-age Duration How long to cache file structure information (directory listings, file size, times, etc.) (default 6h0m0s)
--cache-plex-insecure string Skip all certificate verification when connecting to the Plex server
--cache-plex-password string The password of the Plex user (obscured)
--cache-plex-url string The URL of the Plex server
--cache-plex-username string The username of the Plex user
--cache-read-retries int How many times to retry a read from a cache storage (default 10)
--cache-remote string Remote to cache
--cache-rps int Limits the number of requests per second to the source FS (-1 to disable) (default -1)
--cache-tmp-upload-path string Directory to keep temporary files until they are uploaded
--cache-tmp-wait-time Duration How long should files be stored in local cache before being uploaded (default 15s)
--cache-workers int How many workers should run in parallel to download chunks (default 4)
--cache-writes Cache file data on writes through the FS
--chunker-chunk-size SizeSuffix Files larger than chunk size will be split in chunks (default 2Gi)
--chunker-fail-hard Choose how chunker should handle files with missing or invalid chunks
--chunker-hash-type string Choose how chunker handles hash sums (default "md5")
--chunker-remote string Remote to chunk/unchunk
--combine-upstreams SpaceSepList Upstreams for combining
--compress-level int GZIP compression level (-2 to 9) (default -1)
--compress-mode string Compression mode (default "gzip")
--compress-ram-cache-limit SizeSuffix Some remotes don't allow the upload of files with unknown size (default 20Mi)
--compress-remote string Remote to compress
-L, --copy-links Follow symlinks and copy the pointed to item
--crypt-directory-name-encryption Option to either encrypt directory names or leave them intact (default true)
--crypt-filename-encoding string How to encode the encrypted filename to text string (default "base32")
--crypt-filename-encryption string How to encrypt the filenames (default "standard")
--crypt-no-data-encryption Option to either encrypt file data or leave it unencrypted
--crypt-password string Password or pass phrase for encryption (obscured)
--crypt-password2 string Password or pass phrase for salt (obscured)
--crypt-remote string Remote to encrypt/decrypt
--crypt-server-side-across-configs Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different crypt configs
--crypt-show-mapping For all files listed show how the names encrypt
--drive-acknowledge-abuse Set to allow files which return cannotDownloadAbusiveFile to be downloaded
--drive-allow-import-name-change Allow the filetype to change when uploading Google docs
--drive-auth-owner-only Only consider files owned by the authenticated user
--drive-auth-url string Auth server URL
--drive-chunk-size SizeSuffix Upload chunk size (default 8Mi)
--drive-client-id string Google Application Client Id
--drive-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--drive-copy-shortcut-content Server side copy contents of shortcuts instead of the shortcut
--drive-disable-http2 Disable drive using http2 (default true)
--drive-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default InvalidUtf8)
--drive-export-formats string Comma separated list of preferred formats for downloading Google docs (default "docx,xlsx,pptx,svg")
--drive-formats string Deprecated: See export_formats
--drive-impersonate string Impersonate this user when using a service account
--drive-import-formats string Comma separated list of preferred formats for uploading Google docs
--drive-keep-revision-forever Keep new head revision of each file forever
--drive-list-chunk int Size of listing chunk 100-1000, 0 to disable (default 1000)
--drive-pacer-burst int Number of API calls to allow without sleeping (default 100)
--drive-pacer-min-sleep Duration Minimum time to sleep between API calls (default 100ms)
--drive-resource-key string Resource key for accessing a link-shared file
--drive-root-folder-id string ID of the root folder
--drive-scope string Scope that rclone should use when requesting access from drive
--drive-server-side-across-configs Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different drive configs
--drive-service-account-credentials string Service Account Credentials JSON blob
--drive-service-account-file string Service Account Credentials JSON file path
--drive-shared-with-me Only show files that are shared with me
--drive-size-as-quota Show sizes as storage quota usage, not actual size
--drive-skip-checksum-gphotos Skip MD5 checksum on Google photos and videos only
--drive-skip-dangling-shortcuts If set skip dangling shortcut files
--drive-skip-gdocs Skip google documents in all listings
--drive-skip-shortcuts If set skip shortcut files
--drive-starred-only Only show files that are starred
--drive-stop-on-download-limit Make download limit errors be fatal
--drive-stop-on-upload-limit Make upload limit errors be fatal
--drive-team-drive string ID of the Shared Drive (Team Drive)
--drive-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--drive-token-url string Token server url
--drive-trashed-only Only show files that are in the trash
--drive-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (default 8Mi)
--drive-use-created-date Use file created date instead of modified date
--drive-use-shared-date Use date file was shared instead of modified date
--drive-use-trash Send files to the trash instead of deleting permanently (default true)
--drive-v2-download-min-size SizeSuffix If Object's are greater, use drive v2 API to download (default off)
--dropbox-auth-url string Auth server URL
--dropbox-batch-commit-timeout Duration Max time to wait for a batch to finish committing (default 10m0s)
--dropbox-batch-mode string Upload file batching sync|async|off (default "sync")
--dropbox-batch-size int Max number of files in upload batch
--dropbox-batch-timeout Duration Max time to allow an idle upload batch before uploading (default 0s)
--dropbox-chunk-size SizeSuffix Upload chunk size (< 150Mi) (default 48Mi)
--dropbox-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--dropbox-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--dropbox-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,RightSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--dropbox-impersonate string Impersonate this user when using a business account
--dropbox-shared-files Instructs rclone to work on individual shared files
--dropbox-shared-folders Instructs rclone to work on shared folders
--dropbox-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--dropbox-token-url string Token server url
--fichier-api-key string Your API Key, get it from https://1fichier.com/console/params.pl
--fichier-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,SingleQuote,BackQuote,Dollar,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,RightSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--fichier-file-password string If you want to download a shared file that is password protected, add this parameter (obscured)
--fichier-folder-password string If you want to list the files in a shared folder that is password protected, add this parameter (obscured)
--fichier-shared-folder string If you want to download a shared folder, add this parameter
--filefabric-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--filefabric-permanent-token string Permanent Authentication Token
--filefabric-root-folder-id string ID of the root folder
--filefabric-token string Session Token
--filefabric-token-expiry string Token expiry time
--filefabric-url string URL of the Enterprise File Fabric to connect to
--filefabric-version string Version read from the file fabric
--ftp-ask-password Allow asking for FTP password when needed
--ftp-close-timeout Duration Maximum time to wait for a response to close (default 1m0s)
--ftp-concurrency int Maximum number of FTP simultaneous connections, 0 for unlimited
--ftp-disable-epsv Disable using EPSV even if server advertises support
--ftp-disable-mlsd Disable using MLSD even if server advertises support
--ftp-disable-tls13 Disable TLS 1.3 (workaround for FTP servers with buggy TLS)
--ftp-disable-utf8 Disable using UTF-8 even if server advertises support
--ftp-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Del,Ctl,RightSpace,Dot)
--ftp-explicit-tls Use Explicit FTPS (FTP over TLS)
--ftp-force-list-hidden Use LIST -a to force listing of hidden files and folders. This will disable the use of MLSD
--ftp-host string FTP host to connect to
--ftp-idle-timeout Duration Max time before closing idle connections (default 1m0s)
--ftp-no-check-certificate Do not verify the TLS certificate of the server
--ftp-pass string FTP password (obscured)
--ftp-port int FTP port number (default 21)
--ftp-shut-timeout Duration Maximum time to wait for data connection closing status (default 1m0s)
--ftp-tls Use Implicit FTPS (FTP over TLS)
--ftp-tls-cache-size int Size of TLS session cache for all control and data connections (default 32)
--ftp-user string FTP username (default "$USER")
--ftp-writing-mdtm Use MDTM to set modification time (VsFtpd quirk)
--gcs-anonymous Access public buckets and objects without credentials
--gcs-auth-url string Auth server URL
--gcs-bucket-acl string Access Control List for new buckets
--gcs-bucket-policy-only Access checks should use bucket-level IAM policies
--gcs-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--gcs-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--gcs-decompress If set this will decompress gzip encoded objects
--gcs-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,CrLf,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--gcs-endpoint string Endpoint for the service
--gcs-location string Location for the newly created buckets
--gcs-no-check-bucket If set, don't attempt to check the bucket exists or create it
--gcs-object-acl string Access Control List for new objects
--gcs-project-number string Project number
--gcs-service-account-file string Service Account Credentials JSON file path
--gcs-storage-class string The storage class to use when storing objects in Google Cloud Storage
--gcs-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--gcs-token-url string Token server url
--gphotos-auth-url string Auth server URL
--gphotos-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--gphotos-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--gphotos-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,CrLf,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--gphotos-include-archived Also view and download archived media
--gphotos-read-only Set to make the Google Photos backend read only
--gphotos-read-size Set to read the size of media items
--gphotos-start-year int Year limits the photos to be downloaded to those which are uploaded after the given year (default 2000)
--gphotos-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--gphotos-token-url string Token server url
--hasher-auto-size SizeSuffix Auto-update checksum for files smaller than this size (disabled by default)
--hasher-hashes CommaSepList Comma separated list of supported checksum types (default md5,sha1)
--hasher-max-age Duration Maximum time to keep checksums in cache (0 = no cache, off = cache forever) (default off)
--hasher-remote string Remote to cache checksums for (e.g. myRemote:path)
--hdfs-data-transfer-protection string Kerberos data transfer protection: authentication|integrity|privacy
--hdfs-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Colon,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--hdfs-namenode string Hadoop name node and port
--hdfs-service-principal-name string Kerberos service principal name for the namenode
--hdfs-username string Hadoop user name
--hidrive-auth-url string Auth server URL
--hidrive-chunk-size SizeSuffix Chunksize for chunked uploads (default 48Mi)
--hidrive-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--hidrive-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--hidrive-disable-fetching-member-count Do not fetch number of objects in directories unless it is absolutely necessary
--hidrive-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Dot)
--hidrive-endpoint string Endpoint for the service (default "https://api.hidrive.strato.com/2.1")
--hidrive-root-prefix string The root/parent folder for all paths (default "/")
--hidrive-scope-access string Access permissions that rclone should use when requesting access from HiDrive (default "rw")
--hidrive-scope-role string User-level that rclone should use when requesting access from HiDrive (default "user")
--hidrive-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--hidrive-token-url string Token server url
--hidrive-upload-concurrency int Concurrency for chunked uploads (default 4)
--hidrive-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff/Threshold for chunked uploads (default 96Mi)
--http-headers CommaSepList Set HTTP headers for all transactions
--http-no-head Don't use HEAD requests
--http-no-slash Set this if the site doesn't end directories with /
--http-url string URL of HTTP host to connect to
--internetarchive-access-key-id string IAS3 Access Key
--internetarchive-disable-checksum Don't ask the server to test against MD5 checksum calculated by rclone (default true)
--internetarchive-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,CrLf,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--internetarchive-endpoint string IAS3 Endpoint (default "https://s3.us.archive.org")
--internetarchive-front-endpoint string Host of InternetArchive Frontend (default "https://archive.org")
--internetarchive-secret-access-key string IAS3 Secret Key (password)
--internetarchive-wait-archive Duration Timeout for waiting the server's processing tasks (specifically archive and book_op) to finish (default 0s)
--jottacloud-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--jottacloud-hard-delete Delete files permanently rather than putting them into the trash
--jottacloud-md5-memory-limit SizeSuffix Files bigger than this will be cached on disk to calculate the MD5 if required (default 10Mi)
--jottacloud-no-versions Avoid server side versioning by deleting files and recreating files instead of overwriting them
--jottacloud-trashed-only Only show files that are in the trash
--jottacloud-upload-resume-limit SizeSuffix Files bigger than this can be resumed if the upload fail's (default 10Mi)
--koofr-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--koofr-endpoint string The Koofr API endpoint to use
--koofr-mountid string Mount ID of the mount to use
--koofr-password string Your password for rclone (generate one at https://app.koofr.net/app/admin/preferences/password) (obscured)
--koofr-provider string Choose your storage provider
--koofr-setmtime Does the backend support setting modification time (default true)
--koofr-user string Your user name
-l, --links Translate symlinks to/from regular files with a '.rclonelink' extension
--local-case-insensitive Force the filesystem to report itself as case insensitive
--local-case-sensitive Force the filesystem to report itself as case sensitive
--local-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Dot)
--local-no-check-updated Don't check to see if the files change during upload
--local-no-preallocate Disable preallocation of disk space for transferred files
--local-no-set-modtime Disable setting modtime
--local-no-sparse Disable sparse files for multi-thread downloads
--local-nounc Disable UNC (long path names) conversion on Windows
--local-unicode-normalization Apply unicode NFC normalization to paths and filenames
--local-zero-size-links Assume the Stat size of links is zero (and read them instead) (deprecated)
--mailru-check-hash What should copy do if file checksum is mismatched or invalid (default true)
--mailru-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--mailru-pass string Password (obscured)
--mailru-speedup-enable Skip full upload if there is another file with same data hash (default true)
--mailru-speedup-file-patterns string Comma separated list of file name patterns eligible for speedup (put by hash) (default "*.mkv,*.avi,*.mp4,*.mp3,*.zip,*.gz,*.rar,*.pdf")
--mailru-speedup-max-disk SizeSuffix This option allows you to disable speedup (put by hash) for large files (default 3Gi)
--mailru-speedup-max-memory SizeSuffix Files larger than the size given below will always be hashed on disk (default 32Mi)
--mailru-user string User name (usually email)
--mega-debug Output more debug from Mega
--mega-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--mega-hard-delete Delete files permanently rather than putting them into the trash
--mega-pass string Password (obscured)
--mega-user string User name
--netstorage-account string Set the NetStorage account name
--netstorage-host string Domain+path of NetStorage host to connect to
--netstorage-protocol string Select between HTTP or HTTPS protocol (default "https")
--netstorage-secret string Set the NetStorage account secret/G2O key for authentication (obscured)
-x, --one-file-system Don't cross filesystem boundaries (unix/macOS only)
--onedrive-access-scopes SpaceSepList Set scopes to be requested by rclone (default Files.Read Files.ReadWrite Files.Read.All Files.ReadWrite.All Sites.Read.All offline_access)
--onedrive-auth-url string Auth server URL
--onedrive-chunk-size SizeSuffix Chunk size to upload files with - must be multiple of 320k (327,680 bytes) (default 10Mi)
--onedrive-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--onedrive-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--onedrive-drive-id string The ID of the drive to use
--onedrive-drive-type string The type of the drive (personal | business | documentLibrary)
--onedrive-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,LeftTilde,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--onedrive-expose-onenote-files Set to make OneNote files show up in directory listings
--onedrive-link-password string Set the password for links created by the link command
--onedrive-link-scope string Set the scope of the links created by the link command (default "anonymous")
--onedrive-link-type string Set the type of the links created by the link command (default "view")
--onedrive-list-chunk int Size of listing chunk (default 1000)
--onedrive-no-versions Remove all versions on modifying operations
--onedrive-region string Choose national cloud region for OneDrive (default "global")
--onedrive-root-folder-id string ID of the root folder
--onedrive-server-side-across-configs Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different onedrive configs
--onedrive-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--onedrive-token-url string Token server url
--oos-chunk-size SizeSuffix Chunk size to use for uploading (default 5Mi)
--oos-compartment string Object storage compartment OCID
--oos-config-file string Path to OCI config file (default "~/.oci/config")
--oos-config-profile string Profile name inside the oci config file (default "Default")
--oos-copy-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to multipart copy (default 4.656Gi)
--oos-copy-timeout Duration Timeout for copy (default 1m0s)
--oos-disable-checksum Don't store MD5 checksum with object metadata
--oos-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--oos-endpoint string Endpoint for Object storage API
--oos-leave-parts-on-error If true avoid calling abort upload on a failure, leaving all successfully uploaded parts on S3 for manual recovery
--oos-namespace string Object storage namespace
--oos-no-check-bucket If set, don't attempt to check the bucket exists or create it
--oos-provider string Choose your Auth Provider (default "env_auth")
--oos-region string Object storage Region
--oos-upload-concurrency int Concurrency for multipart uploads (default 10)
--oos-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (default 200Mi)
--opendrive-chunk-size SizeSuffix Files will be uploaded in chunks this size (default 10Mi)
--opendrive-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,LeftSpace,LeftCrLfHtVt,RightSpace,RightCrLfHtVt,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--opendrive-password string Password (obscured)
--opendrive-username string Username
--pcloud-auth-url string Auth server URL
--pcloud-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--pcloud-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--pcloud-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--pcloud-hostname string Hostname to connect to (default "api.pcloud.com")
--pcloud-password string Your pcloud password (obscured)
--pcloud-root-folder-id string Fill in for rclone to use a non root folder as its starting point (default "d0")
--pcloud-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--pcloud-token-url string Token server url
--pcloud-username string Your pcloud username
--premiumizeme-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,DoubleQuote,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--putio-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--qingstor-access-key-id string QingStor Access Key ID
--qingstor-chunk-size SizeSuffix Chunk size to use for uploading (default 4Mi)
--qingstor-connection-retries int Number of connection retries (default 3)
--qingstor-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Ctl,InvalidUtf8)
--qingstor-endpoint string Enter an endpoint URL to connection QingStor API
--qingstor-env-auth Get QingStor credentials from runtime
--qingstor-secret-access-key string QingStor Secret Access Key (password)
--qingstor-upload-concurrency int Concurrency for multipart uploads (default 1)
--qingstor-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (default 200Mi)
--qingstor-zone string Zone to connect to
--s3-access-key-id string AWS Access Key ID
--s3-acl string Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects
--s3-bucket-acl string Canned ACL used when creating buckets
--s3-chunk-size SizeSuffix Chunk size to use for uploading (default 5Mi)
--s3-copy-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to multipart copy (default 4.656Gi)
--s3-decompress If set this will decompress gzip encoded objects
--s3-disable-checksum Don't store MD5 checksum with object metadata
--s3-disable-http2 Disable usage of http2 for S3 backends
--s3-download-url string Custom endpoint for downloads
--s3-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--s3-endpoint string Endpoint for S3 API
--s3-env-auth Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars)
--s3-force-path-style If true use path style access if false use virtual hosted style (default true)
--s3-leave-parts-on-error If true avoid calling abort upload on a failure, leaving all successfully uploaded parts on S3 for manual recovery
--s3-list-chunk int Size of listing chunk (response list for each ListObject S3 request) (default 1000)
--s3-list-url-encode Tristate Whether to url encode listings: true/false/unset (default unset)
--s3-list-version int Version of ListObjects to use: 1,2 or 0 for auto
--s3-location-constraint string Location constraint - must be set to match the Region
--s3-max-upload-parts int Maximum number of parts in a multipart upload (default 10000)
--s3-memory-pool-flush-time Duration How often internal memory buffer pools will be flushed (default 1m0s)
--s3-memory-pool-use-mmap Whether to use mmap buffers in internal memory pool
--s3-might-gzip Tristate Set this if the backend might gzip objects (default unset)
--s3-no-check-bucket If set, don't attempt to check the bucket exists or create it
--s3-no-head If set, don't HEAD uploaded objects to check integrity
--s3-no-head-object If set, do not do HEAD before GET when getting objects
--s3-no-system-metadata Suppress setting and reading of system metadata
--s3-profile string Profile to use in the shared credentials file
--s3-provider string Choose your S3 provider
--s3-region string Region to connect to
--s3-requester-pays Enables requester pays option when interacting with S3 bucket
--s3-secret-access-key string AWS Secret Access Key (password)
--s3-server-side-encryption string The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3
--s3-session-token string An AWS session token
--s3-shared-credentials-file string Path to the shared credentials file
--s3-sse-customer-algorithm string If using SSE-C, the server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3
--s3-sse-customer-key string To use SSE-C you may provide the secret encryption key used to encrypt/decrypt your data
--s3-sse-customer-key-base64 string If using SSE-C you must provide the secret encryption key encoded in base64 format to encrypt/decrypt your data
--s3-sse-customer-key-md5 string If using SSE-C you may provide the secret encryption key MD5 checksum (optional)
--s3-sse-kms-key-id string If using KMS ID you must provide the ARN of Key
--s3-storage-class string The storage class to use when storing new objects in S3
--s3-upload-concurrency int Concurrency for multipart uploads (default 4)
--s3-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (default 200Mi)
--s3-use-accelerate-endpoint If true use the AWS S3 accelerated endpoint
--s3-use-multipart-etag Tristate Whether to use ETag in multipart uploads for verification (default unset)
--s3-use-presigned-request Whether to use a presigned request or PutObject for single part uploads
--s3-v2-auth If true use v2 authentication
--s3-version-at Time Show file versions as they were at the specified time (default off)
--s3-versions Include old versions in directory listings
--seafile-2fa Two-factor authentication ('true' if the account has 2FA enabled)
--seafile-create-library Should rclone create a library if it doesn't exist
--seafile-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,DoubleQuote,BackSlash,Ctl,InvalidUtf8)
--seafile-library string Name of the library
--seafile-library-key string Library password (for encrypted libraries only) (obscured)
--seafile-pass string Password (obscured)
--seafile-url string URL of seafile host to connect to
--seafile-user string User name (usually email address)
--sftp-ask-password Allow asking for SFTP password when needed
--sftp-chunk-size SizeSuffix Upload and download chunk size (default 32Ki)
--sftp-concurrency int The maximum number of outstanding requests for one file (default 64)
--sftp-disable-concurrent-reads If set don't use concurrent reads
--sftp-disable-concurrent-writes If set don't use concurrent writes
--sftp-disable-hashcheck Disable the execution of SSH commands to determine if remote file hashing is available
--sftp-host string SSH host to connect to
--sftp-idle-timeout Duration Max time before closing idle connections (default 1m0s)
--sftp-key-file string Path to PEM-encoded private key file
--sftp-key-file-pass string The passphrase to decrypt the PEM-encoded private key file (obscured)
--sftp-key-pem string Raw PEM-encoded private key
--sftp-key-use-agent When set forces the usage of the ssh-agent
--sftp-known-hosts-file string Optional path to known_hosts file
--sftp-md5sum-command string The command used to read md5 hashes
--sftp-pass string SSH password, leave blank to use ssh-agent (obscured)
--sftp-path-override string Override path used by SSH shell commands
--sftp-port int SSH port number (default 22)
--sftp-pubkey-file string Optional path to public key file
--sftp-server-command string Specifies the path or command to run a sftp server on the remote host
--sftp-set-env SpaceSepList Environment variables to pass to sftp and commands
--sftp-set-modtime Set the modified time on the remote if set (default true)
--sftp-sha1sum-command string The command used to read sha1 hashes
--sftp-shell-type string The type of SSH shell on remote server, if any
--sftp-skip-links Set to skip any symlinks and any other non regular files
--sftp-subsystem string Specifies the SSH2 subsystem on the remote host (default "sftp")
--sftp-use-fstat If set use fstat instead of stat
--sftp-use-insecure-cipher Enable the use of insecure ciphers and key exchange methods
--sftp-user string SSH username (default "$USER")
--sharefile-chunk-size SizeSuffix Upload chunk size (default 64Mi)
--sharefile-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,LeftSpace,LeftPeriod,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--sharefile-endpoint string Endpoint for API calls
--sharefile-root-folder-id string ID of the root folder
--sharefile-upload-cutoff SizeSuffix Cutoff for switching to multipart upload (default 128Mi)
--sia-api-password string Sia Daemon API Password (obscured)
--sia-api-url string Sia daemon API URL, like http://sia.daemon.host:9980 (default "http://127.0.0.1:9980")
--sia-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Question,Hash,Percent,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--sia-user-agent string Siad User Agent (default "Sia-Agent")
--skip-links Don't warn about skipped symlinks
--smb-case-insensitive Whether the server is configured to be case-insensitive (default true)
--smb-domain string Domain name for NTLM authentication (default "WORKGROUP")
--smb-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--smb-hide-special-share Hide special shares (e.g. print$) which users aren't supposed to access (default true)
--smb-host string SMB server hostname to connect to
--smb-idle-timeout Duration Max time before closing idle connections (default 1m0s)
--smb-pass string SMB password (obscured)
--smb-port int SMB port number (default 445)
--smb-user string SMB username (default "$USER")
--storj-access-grant string Access grant
--storj-api-key string API key
--storj-passphrase string Encryption passphrase
--storj-provider string Choose an authentication method (default "existing")
--storj-satellite-address string Satellite address (default "us-central-1.storj.io")
--sugarsync-access-key-id string Sugarsync Access Key ID
--sugarsync-app-id string Sugarsync App ID
--sugarsync-authorization string Sugarsync authorization
--sugarsync-authorization-expiry string Sugarsync authorization expiry
--sugarsync-deleted-id string Sugarsync deleted folder id
--sugarsync-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--sugarsync-hard-delete Permanently delete files if true
--sugarsync-private-access-key string Sugarsync Private Access Key
--sugarsync-refresh-token string Sugarsync refresh token
--sugarsync-root-id string Sugarsync root id
--sugarsync-user string Sugarsync user
--swift-application-credential-id string Application Credential ID (OS_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_ID)
--swift-application-credential-name string Application Credential Name (OS_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_NAME)
--swift-application-credential-secret string Application Credential Secret (OS_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_SECRET)
--swift-auth string Authentication URL for server (OS_AUTH_URL)
--swift-auth-token string Auth Token from alternate authentication - optional (OS_AUTH_TOKEN)
--swift-auth-version int AuthVersion - optional - set to (1,2,3) if your auth URL has no version (ST_AUTH_VERSION)
--swift-chunk-size SizeSuffix Above this size files will be chunked into a _segments container (default 5Gi)
--swift-domain string User domain - optional (v3 auth) (OS_USER_DOMAIN_NAME)
--swift-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,InvalidUtf8)
--swift-endpoint-type string Endpoint type to choose from the service catalogue (OS_ENDPOINT_TYPE) (default "public")
--swift-env-auth Get swift credentials from environment variables in standard OpenStack form
--swift-key string API key or password (OS_PASSWORD)
--swift-leave-parts-on-error If true avoid calling abort upload on a failure
--swift-no-chunk Don't chunk files during streaming upload
--swift-no-large-objects Disable support for static and dynamic large objects
--swift-region string Region name - optional (OS_REGION_NAME)
--swift-storage-policy string The storage policy to use when creating a new container
--swift-storage-url string Storage URL - optional (OS_STORAGE_URL)
--swift-tenant string Tenant name - optional for v1 auth, this or tenant_id required otherwise (OS_TENANT_NAME or OS_PROJECT_NAME)
--swift-tenant-domain string Tenant domain - optional (v3 auth) (OS_PROJECT_DOMAIN_NAME)
--swift-tenant-id string Tenant ID - optional for v1 auth, this or tenant required otherwise (OS_TENANT_ID)
--swift-user string User name to log in (OS_USERNAME)
--swift-user-id string User ID to log in - optional - most swift systems use user and leave this blank (v3 auth) (OS_USER_ID)
--union-action-policy string Policy to choose upstream on ACTION category (default "epall")
--union-cache-time int Cache time of usage and free space (in seconds) (default 120)
--union-create-policy string Policy to choose upstream on CREATE category (default "epmfs")
--union-min-free-space SizeSuffix Minimum viable free space for lfs/eplfs policies (default 1Gi)
--union-search-policy string Policy to choose upstream on SEARCH category (default "ff")
--union-upstreams string List of space separated upstreams
--uptobox-access-token string Your access token
--uptobox-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,BackQuote,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--webdav-bearer-token string Bearer token instead of user/pass (e.g. a Macaroon)
--webdav-bearer-token-command string Command to run to get a bearer token
--webdav-encoding string The encoding for the backend
--webdav-headers CommaSepList Set HTTP headers for all transactions
--webdav-pass string Password (obscured)
--webdav-url string URL of http host to connect to
--webdav-user string User name
--webdav-vendor string Name of the WebDAV site/service/software you are using
--yandex-auth-url string Auth server URL
--yandex-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--yandex-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--yandex-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Slash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot)
--yandex-hard-delete Delete files permanently rather than putting them into the trash
--yandex-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--yandex-token-url string Token server url
--zoho-auth-url string Auth server URL
--zoho-client-id string OAuth Client Id
--zoho-client-secret string OAuth Client Secret
--zoho-encoding MultiEncoder The encoding for the backend (default Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8)
--zoho-region string Zoho region to connect to
--zoho-token string OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob
--zoho-token-url string Token server url
Docker Volume Plugin
Introduction
Docker 1.9 has added support for creating named volumes via command-line interface and mounting them in
containers as a way to share data between them. Since Docker 1.10 you can create named volumes with
Docker Compose by descriptions in https://docs.docker.com/compose/compose-file/compose-file-v2/#volume-
configuration-reference docker-com‐ pose.yml files for use by container groups on a single host. As of
Docker 1.12 volumes are supported by Docker Swarm included with Docker Engine and created from
descriptions in https://docs.docker.com/compose/compose-file/compose-file-v3/#volume-configuration-
reference swarm com‐ pose v3 files for use with swarm stacks across multiple cluster nodes.
Docker Volume Plugins augment the default local volume driver included in Docker with stateful volumes
shared across containers and hosts. Unlike local volumes, your data will not be deleted when such volume
is removed. Plugins can run managed by the docker daemon, as a native system service (under systemd,
sysv or upstart) or as a standalone executable. Rclone can run as docker volume plugin in all these
modes. It interacts with the local docker daemon via plugin API and handles mounting of remote file
systems into docker containers so it must run on the same host as the docker daemon or on every Swarm
node.
Getting started
In the first example we will use the SFTP rclone volume with Docker engine on a standalone Ubuntu
machine.
Start from installing Docker on the host.
The FUSE driver is a prerequisite for rclone mounting and should be installed on host:
sudo apt-get -y install fuse
Create two directories required by rclone docker plugin:
sudo mkdir -p /var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/config
sudo mkdir -p /var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/cache
Install the managed rclone docker plugin for your architecture (here amd64):
docker plugin install rclone/docker-volume-rclone:amd64 args="-v" --alias rclone --grant-all-permissions
docker plugin list
Create your SFTP volume:
docker volume create firstvolume -d rclone -o type=sftp -o sftp-host=_hostname_ -o sftp-user=_username_ -o sftp-pass=_password_ -o allow-other=true
Note that since all options are static, you don’t even have to run rclone config or create the
rclone.conf file (but the config directory should still be present). In the simplest case you can use
localhost as hostname and your SSH credentials as username and password. You can also change the remote
path to your home directory on the host, for example -o path=/home/username.
Time to create a test container and mount the volume into it:
docker run --rm -it -v firstvolume:/mnt --workdir /mnt ubuntu:latest bash
If all goes well, you will enter the new container and change right to the mounted SFTP remote. You can
type ls to list the mounted directory or otherwise play with it. Type exit when you are done. The
container will stop but the volume will stay, ready to be reused. When it’s not needed anymore, remove
it:
docker volume list
docker volume remove firstvolume
Now let us try something more elaborate: Google Drive volume on multi-node Docker Swarm.
You should start from installing Docker and FUSE, creating plugin directories and installing rclone
plugin on every swarm node. Then setup the Swarm.
Google Drive volumes need an access token which can be setup via web browser and will be periodically
renewed by rclone. The managed plugin cannot run a browser so we will use a technique similar to the
rclone setup on a headless box.
Run rclone config on another machine equipped with web browser and graphical user interface. Create the
Google Drive remote. When done, transfer the resulting rclone.conf to the Swarm cluster and save as
/var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/config/rclone.conf on every node. By default this location is accessible
only to the root user so you will need appropriate privileges. The resulting config will look like this:
[gdrive]
type = drive
scope = drive
drive_id = 1234567...
root_folder_id = 0Abcd...
token = {"access_token":...}
Now create the file named example.yml with a swarm stack description like this:
version: '3'
services:
heimdall:
image: linuxserver/heimdall:latest
ports: [8080:80]
volumes: [configdata:/config]
volumes:
configdata:
driver: rclone
driver_opts:
remote: 'gdrive:heimdall'
allow_other: 'true'
vfs_cache_mode: full
poll_interval: 0
and run the stack:
docker stack deploy example -c ./example.yml
After a few seconds docker will spread the parsed stack description over cluster, create the
example_heimdall service on port 8080, run service containers on one or more cluster nodes and request
the example_configdata volume from rclone plugins on the node hosts. You can use the following commands
to confirm results:
docker service ls
docker service ps example_heimdall
docker volume ls
Point your browser to http://cluster.host.address:8080 and play with the service. Stop it with docker
stack remove example when you are done. Note that the example_configdata volume(s) created on demand at
the cluster nodes will not be automatically removed together with the stack but stay for future reuse.
You can remove them manually by invoking the docker volume remove example_configdata command on every
node.
Creating Volumes via CLI
Volumes can be created with docker volume create. Here are a few examples:
docker volume create vol1 -d rclone -o remote=storj: -o vfs-cache-mode=full
docker volume create vol2 -d rclone -o remote=:storj,access_grant=xxx:heimdall
docker volume create vol3 -d rclone -o type=storj -o path=heimdall -o storj-access-grant=xxx -o poll-interval=0
Note the -d rclone flag that tells docker to request volume from the rclone driver. This works even if
you installed managed driver by its full name rclone/docker-volume-rclone because you provided the
--alias rclone option.
Volumes can be inspected as follows:
docker volume list
docker volume inspect vol1
Volume Configuration
Rclone flags and volume options are set via the -o flag to the docker volume create command. They
include backend-specific parameters as well as mount and VFS options. Also there are a few special -o
options: remote, fs, type, path, mount-type and persist.
remote determines an existing remote name from the config file, with trailing colon and optionally with a
remote path. See the full syntax in the rclone documentation. This option can be aliased as fs to
prevent confusion with the remote parameter of such backends as crypt or alias.
The remote=:backend:dir/subdir syntax can be used to create on-the-fly (config-less) remotes, while the
type and path options provide a simpler alternative for this. Using two split options
-o type=backend -o path=dir/subdir
is equivalent to the combined syntax
-o remote=:backend:dir/subdir
but is arguably easier to parameterize in scripts. The path part is optional.
Mount and VFS options as well as backend parameters are named like their twin command-line flags without
the -- CLI prefix. Optionally you can use underscores instead of dashes in option names. For example,
--vfs-cache-mode full becomes -o vfs-cache-mode=full or -o vfs_cache_mode=full. Boolean CLI flags
without value will gain the true value, e.g. --allow-other becomes -o allow-other=true or -o
allow_other=true.
Please note that you can provide parameters only for the backend immediately referenced by the backend
type of mounted remote. If this is a wrapping backend like alias, chunker or crypt, you cannot provide
options for the referred to remote or backend. This limitation is imposed by the rclone connection
string parser. The only workaround is to feed plugin with rclone.conf or configure plugin arguments (see
below).
Special Volume Options
mount-type determines the mount method and in general can be one of: mount, cmount, or mount2. This can
be aliased as mount_type. It should be noted that the managed rclone docker plugin currently does not
support the cmount method and mount2 is rarely needed. This option defaults to the first found method,
which is usually mount so you generally won’t need it.
persist is a reserved boolean (true/false) option. In future it will allow to persist on-the-fly remotes
in the plugin rclone.conf file.
Connection Strings
The remote value can be extended with connection strings as an alternative way to supply backend
parameters. This is equivalent to the -o backend options with one syntactic difference. Inside
connection string the backend prefix must be dropped from parameter names but in the -o param=value array
it must be present. For instance, compare the following option array
-o remote=:sftp:/home -o sftp-host=localhost
with equivalent connection string:
-o remote=:sftp,host=localhost:/home
This difference exists because flag options -o key=val include not only backend parameters but also
mount/VFS flags and possibly other settings. Also it allows to discriminate the remote option from the
crypt-remote (or similarly named backend parameters) and arguably simplifies scripting due to clearer
value substitution.
Using with Swarm or Compose
Both Docker Swarm and Docker Compose use YAML-formatted text files to describe groups (stacks) of
containers, their properties, networks and volumes. Compose uses the
https://docs.docker.com/compose/compose-file/compose-file-v2/#volume-configuration-reference compose
v2 format, Swarm uses the https://docs.docker.com/compose/compose-file/compose-file-v3/#volume-
configuration-reference compose v3 format. They are mostly similar, differences are explained in the
https://docs.docker.com/compose/compose-file/compose-versioning/#upgrading docker documentation.
Volumes are described by the children of the top-level volumes: node. Each of them should be named after
its volume and have at least two elements, the self-explanatory driver: rclone value and the driver_opts:
structure playing the same role as -o key=val CLI flags:
volumes:
volume_name_1:
driver: rclone
driver_opts:
remote: 'gdrive:'
allow_other: 'true'
vfs_cache_mode: full
token: '{"type": "borrower", "expires": "2021-12-31"}'
poll_interval: 0
Notice a few important details: - YAML prefers _ in option names instead of -. - YAML treats single and
double quotes interchangeably. Simple strings and integers can be left unquoted. - Boolean values must
be quoted like 'true' or "false" because these two words are reserved by YAML. - The filesystem string
is keyed with remote (or with fs). Normally you can omit quotes here, but if the string ends with colon,
you must quote it like remote: "storage_box:". - YAML is picky about surrounding braces in values as
this is in fact another syntax for key/value mappings. For example, JSON access tokens usually contain
double quotes and surrounding braces, so you must put them in single quotes.
Installing as Managed Plugin
Docker daemon can install plugins from an image registry and run them managed. We maintain the
docker-volume-rclone plugin image on Docker Hub.
Rclone volume plugin requires Docker Engine >= 19.03.15
The plugin requires presence of two directories on the host before it can be installed. Note that plugin
will not create them automatically. By default they must exist on host at the following locations
(though you can tweak the paths): - /var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/config is reserved for the rclone.conf
config file and must exist even if it’s empty and the config file is not present. -
/var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/cache holds the plugin state file as well as optional VFS caches.
You can install managed plugin with default settings as follows:
docker plugin install rclone/docker-volume-rclone:amd64 --grant-all-permissions --alias rclone
The :amd64 part of the image specification after colon is called a tag. Usually you will want to install
the latest plugin for your architecture. In this case the tag will just name it, like amd64 above. The
following plugin architectures are currently available: - amd64 - arm64 - arm-v7
Sometimes you might want a concrete plugin version, not the latest one. Then you should use image tag in
the form :ARCHITECTURE-VERSION. For example, to install plugin version v1.56.2 on architecture arm64 you
will use tag arm64-1.56.2 (note the removed v) so the full image specification becomes
rclone/docker-volume-rclone:arm64-1.56.2.
We also provide the latest plugin tag, but since docker does not support multi-architecture plugins as of
the time of this writing, this tag is currently an alias for amd64. By convention the latest tag is the
default one and can be omitted, thus both rclone/docker-volume-rclone:latest and just
rclone/docker-volume-rclone will refer to the latest plugin release for the amd64 platform.
Also the amd64 part can be omitted from the versioned rclone plugin tags. For example, rclone image
reference rclone/docker-volume-rclone:amd64-1.56.2 can be abbreviated as
rclone/docker-volume-rclone:1.56.2 for convenience. However, for non-intel architectures you still have
to use the full tag as amd64 or latest will fail to start.
Managed plugin is in fact a special container running in a namespace separate from normal docker
containers. Inside it runs the rclone serve docker command. The config and cache directories are
bind-mounted into the container at start. The docker daemon connects to a unix socket created by the
command inside the container. The command creates on-demand remote mounts right inside, then docker
machinery propagates them through kernel mount namespaces and bind-mounts into requesting user
containers.
You can tweak a few plugin settings after installation when it’s disabled (not in use), for instance:
docker plugin disable rclone
docker plugin set rclone RCLONE_VERBOSE=2 config=/etc/rclone args="--vfs-cache-mode=writes --allow-other"
docker plugin enable rclone
docker plugin inspect rclone
Note that if docker refuses to disable the plugin, you should find and remove all active volumes
connected with it as well as containers and swarm services that use them. This is rather tedious so
please carefully plan in advance.
You can tweak the following settings: args, config, cache, HTTP_PROXY, HTTPS_PROXY, NO_PROXY and
RCLONE_VERBOSE. It’s your task to keep plugin settings in sync across swarm cluster nodes.
args sets command-line arguments for the rclone serve docker command (none by default). Arguments should
be separated by space so you will normally want to put them in quotes on the docker plugin set command
line. Both serve docker flags and generic rclone flags are supported, including backend parameters that
will be used as defaults for volume creation. Note that plugin will fail (due to this docker bug) if the
args value is empty. Use e.g. args="-v" as a workaround.
config=/host/dir sets alternative host location for the config directory. Plugin will look for
rclone.conf here. It’s not an error if the config file is not present but the directory must exist.
Please note that plugin can periodically rewrite the config file, for example when it renews storage
access tokens. Keep this in mind and try to avoid races between the plugin and other instances of rclone
on the host that might try to change the config simultaneously resulting in corrupted rclone.conf. You
can also put stuff like private key files for SFTP remotes in this directory. Just note that it’s
bind-mounted inside the plugin container at the predefined path /data/config. For example, if your key
file is named sftp-box1.key on the host, the corresponding volume config option should read -o
sftp-key-file=/data/config/sftp-box1.key.
cache=/host/dir sets alternative host location for the cache directory. The plugin will keep VFS caches
here. Also it will create and maintain the docker-plugin.state file in this directory. When the plugin
is restarted or reinstalled, it will look in this file to recreate any volumes that existed previously.
However, they will not be re-mounted into consuming containers after restart. Usually this is not a
problem as the docker daemon normally will restart affected user containers after failures, daemon
restarts or host reboots.
RCLONE_VERBOSE sets plugin verbosity from 0 (errors only, by default) to 2 (debugging). Verbosity can be
also tweaked via args="-v [-v] ...". Since arguments are more generic, you will rarely need this
setting. The plugin output by default feeds the docker daemon log on local host. Log entries are
reflected as errors in the docker log but retain their actual level assigned by rclone in the
encapsulated message string.
HTTP_PROXY, HTTPS_PROXY, NO_PROXY customize the plugin proxy settings.
You can set custom plugin options right when you install it, in one go:
docker plugin remove rclone
docker plugin install rclone/docker-volume-rclone:amd64 \
--alias rclone --grant-all-permissions \
args="-v --allow-other" config=/etc/rclone
docker plugin inspect rclone
Healthchecks
The docker plugin volume protocol doesn’t provide a way for plugins to inform the docker daemon that a
volume is (un-)available. As a workaround you can setup a healthcheck to verify that the mount is
responding, for example:
services:
my_service:
image: my_image
healthcheck:
test: ls /path/to/rclone/mount || exit 1
interval: 1m
timeout: 15s
retries: 3
start_period: 15s
Running Plugin under Systemd
In most cases you should prefer managed mode. Moreover, MacOS and Windows do not support native Docker
plugins. Please use managed mode on these systems. Proceed further only if you are on Linux.
First, install rclone. You can just run it (type rclone serve docker and hit enter) for the test.
Install FUSE:
sudo apt-get -y install fuse
Download two systemd configuration files: https://raw.githubusercontent.com/rclone/rclone/master/con‐
trib/docker-plugin/systemd/docker-volume- rclone.service docker-volume-rclone.service and
https://raw.githubusercontent.com/rclone/rclone/master/contrib/docker-plugin/systemd/docker-volume-
rclone.socket docker-volume-rclone.socket.
Put them to the /etc/systemd/system/ directory:
cp docker-volume-plugin.service /etc/systemd/system/
cp docker-volume-plugin.socket /etc/systemd/system/
Please note that all commands in this section must be run as root but we omit sudo prefix for brevity.
Now create directories required by the service:
mkdir -p /var/lib/docker-volumes/rclone
mkdir -p /var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/config
mkdir -p /var/lib/docker-plugins/rclone/cache
Run the docker plugin service in the socket activated mode:
systemctl daemon-reload
systemctl start docker-volume-rclone.service
systemctl enable docker-volume-rclone.socket
systemctl start docker-volume-rclone.socket
systemctl restart docker
Or run the service directly: - run systemctl daemon-reload to let systemd pick up new config - run
systemctl enable docker-volume-rclone.service to make the new service start automatically when you power
on your machine. - run systemctl start docker-volume-rclone.service to start the service now. - run
systemctl restart docker to restart docker daemon and let it detect the new plugin socket. Note that
this step is not needed in managed mode where docker knows about plugin state changes.
The two methods are equivalent from the user perspective, but I personally prefer socket activation.
Troubleshooting
You can see managed plugin settings with
docker plugin list
docker plugin inspect rclone
Note that docker (including latest 20.10.7) will not show actual values of args, just the defaults.
Use journalctl --unit docker to see managed plugin output as part of the docker daemon log. Note that
docker reflects plugin lines as errors but their actual level can be seen from encapsulated message
string.
You will usually install the latest version of managed plugin for your platform. Use the following
commands to print the actual installed version:
PLUGID=$(docker plugin list --no-trunc | awk '/rclone/{print$1}')
sudo runc --root /run/docker/runtime-runc/plugins.moby exec $PLUGID rclone version
You can even use runc to run shell inside the plugin container:
sudo runc --root /run/docker/runtime-runc/plugins.moby exec --tty $PLUGID bash
Also you can use curl to check the plugin socket connectivity:
docker plugin list --no-trunc
PLUGID=123abc...
sudo curl -H Content-Type:application/json -XPOST -d {} --unix-socket /run/docker/plugins/$PLUGID/rclone.sock http://localhost/Plugin.Activate
though this is rarely needed.
Caveats
Finally I’d like to mention a caveat with updating volume settings. Docker CLI does not have a dedicated
command like docker volume update. It may be tempting to invoke docker volume create with updated
options on existing volume, but there is a gotcha. The command will do nothing, it won’t even return an
error. I hope that docker maintainers will fix this some day. In the meantime be aware that you must
remove your volume before recreating it with new settings:
docker volume remove my_vol
docker volume create my_vol -d rclone -o opt1=new_val1 ...
and verify that settings did update:
docker volume list
docker volume inspect my_vol
If docker refuses to remove the volume, you should find containers or swarm services that use it and stop
them first.
Getting started
• Install rclone and setup your remotes.
• Bisync will create its working directory at ~/.cache/rclone/bisync on Linux or
C:\Users\MyLogin\AppData\Local\rclone\bisync on Windows. Make sure that this location is writable.
• Run bisync with the --resync flag, specifying the paths to the local and remote sync directory roots.
• For successive sync runs, leave off the --resync flag.
• Consider using a filters file for excluding unnecessary files and directories from the sync.
• Consider setting up the –check-access feature for safety.
• On Linux, consider setting up a crontab entry. bisync can safely run in concurrent cron jobs thanks to
lock files it maintains.
Here is a typical run log (with timestamps removed for clarity):
rclone bisync /testdir/path1/ /testdir/path2/ --verbose
INFO : Synching Path1 "/testdir/path1/" with Path2 "/testdir/path2/"
INFO : Path1 checking for diffs
INFO : - Path1 File is new - file11.txt
INFO : - Path1 File is newer - file2.txt
INFO : - Path1 File is newer - file5.txt
INFO : - Path1 File is newer - file7.txt
INFO : - Path1 File was deleted - file4.txt
INFO : - Path1 File was deleted - file6.txt
INFO : - Path1 File was deleted - file8.txt
INFO : Path1: 7 changes: 1 new, 3 newer, 0 older, 3 deleted
INFO : Path2 checking for diffs
INFO : - Path2 File is new - file10.txt
INFO : - Path2 File is newer - file1.txt
INFO : - Path2 File is newer - file5.txt
INFO : - Path2 File is newer - file6.txt
INFO : - Path2 File was deleted - file3.txt
INFO : - Path2 File was deleted - file7.txt
INFO : - Path2 File was deleted - file8.txt
INFO : Path2: 7 changes: 1 new, 3 newer, 0 older, 3 deleted
INFO : Applying changes
INFO : - Path1 Queue copy to Path2 - /testdir/path2/file11.txt
INFO : - Path1 Queue copy to Path2 - /testdir/path2/file2.txt
INFO : - Path2 Queue delete - /testdir/path2/file4.txt
NOTICE: - WARNING New or changed in both paths - file5.txt
NOTICE: - Path1 Renaming Path1 copy - /testdir/path1/file5.txt..path1
NOTICE: - Path1 Queue copy to Path2 - /testdir/path2/file5.txt..path1
NOTICE: - Path2 Renaming Path2 copy - /testdir/path2/file5.txt..path2
NOTICE: - Path2 Queue copy to Path1 - /testdir/path1/file5.txt..path2
INFO : - Path2 Queue copy to Path1 - /testdir/path1/file6.txt
INFO : - Path1 Queue copy to Path2 - /testdir/path2/file7.txt
INFO : - Path2 Queue copy to Path1 - /testdir/path1/file1.txt
INFO : - Path2 Queue copy to Path1 - /testdir/path1/file10.txt
INFO : - Path1 Queue delete - /testdir/path1/file3.txt
INFO : - Path2 Do queued copies to - Path1
INFO : - Path1 Do queued copies to - Path2
INFO : - Do queued deletes on - Path1
INFO : - Do queued deletes on - Path2
INFO : Updating listings
INFO : Validating listings for Path1 "/testdir/path1/" vs Path2 "/testdir/path2/"
INFO : Bisync successful
Command line syntax
$ rclone bisync --help
Usage:
rclone bisync remote1:path1 remote2:path2 [flags]
Positional arguments:
Path1, Path2 Local path, or remote storage with ':' plus optional path.
Type 'rclone listremotes' for list of configured remotes.
Optional Flags:
--check-access Ensure expected `RCLONE_TEST` files are found on
both Path1 and Path2 filesystems, else abort.
--check-filename FILENAME Filename for `--check-access` (default: `RCLONE_TEST`)
--check-sync CHOICE Controls comparison of final listings:
`true | false | only` (default: true)
If set to `only`, bisync will only compare listings
from the last run but skip actual sync.
--filters-file PATH Read filtering patterns from a file
--max-delete PERCENT Safety check on maximum percentage of deleted files allowed.
If exceeded, the bisync run will abort. (default: 50%)
--force Bypass `--max-delete` safety check and run the sync.
Consider using with `--verbose`
--remove-empty-dirs Remove empty directories at the final cleanup step.
-1, --resync Performs the resync run.
Warning: Path1 files may overwrite Path2 versions.
Consider using `--verbose` or `--dry-run` first.
--localtime Use local time in listings (default: UTC)
--no-cleanup Retain working files (useful for troubleshooting and testing).
--workdir PATH Use custom working directory (useful for testing).
(default: `~/.cache/rclone/bisync`)
-n, --dry-run Go through the motions - No files are copied/deleted.
-v, --verbose Increases logging verbosity.
May be specified more than once for more details.
-h, --help help for bisync
Arbitrary rclone flags may be specified on the bisync command line, for example rclone bisync
./testdir/path1/ gdrive:testdir/path2/ --drive-skip-gdocs -v -v --timeout 10s Note that interactions of
various rclone flags with bisync process flow has not been fully tested yet.
Paths
Path1 and Path2 arguments may be references to any mix of local directory paths (absolute or relative),
UNC paths (//server/share/path), Windows drive paths (with a drive letter and :) or configured
remotes with optional subdirectory paths. Cloud references are distinguished by having a : in the
argument (see Windows support below).
Path1 and Path2 are treated equally, in that neither has priority for file changes, and access efficiency
does not change whether a remote is on Path1 or Path2.
The listings in bisync working directory (default: ~/.cache/rclone/bisync) are named based on the Path1
and Path2 arguments so that separate syncs to individual directories within the tree may be set up, e.g.:
path_to_local_tree..dropbox_subdir.lst.
Any empty directories after the sync on both the Path1 and Path2 filesystems are not deleted by default.
If the --remove-empty-dirs flag is specified, then both paths will have any empty directories purged as
the last step in the process.
Command-line flags
–resync
This will effectively make both Path1 and Path2 filesystems contain a matching superset of all files.
Path2 files that do not exist in Path1 will be copied to Path1, and the process will then sync the Path1
tree to Path2.
The base directories on the both Path1 and Path2 filesystems must exist or bisync will fail. This is
required for safety - that bisync can verify that both paths are valid.
When using --resync a newer version of a file on the Path2 filesystem will be overwritten by the Path1
filesystem version. Carefully evaluate deltas using –dry-run.
For a resync run, one of the paths may be empty (no files in the path tree). The resync run should
result in files on both paths, else a normal non-resync run will fail.
For a non-resync run, either path being empty (no files in the tree) fails with Empty current PathN
listing. Cannot sync to an empty directory: X.pathN.lst This is a safety check that an unexpected empty
path does not result in deleting everything in the other path.
–check-access
Access check files are an additional safety measure against data loss. bisync will ensure it can find
matching RCLONE_TEST files in the same places in the Path1 and Path2 filesystems. Time stamps and file
contents are not important, just the names and locations. Place one or more RCLONE_TEST files in the
Path1 or Path2 filesystem and then do either a run without --check-access or a --resync to set matching
files on both filesystems. If you have symbolic links in your sync tree it is recommended to place
RCLONE_TEST files in the linked-to directory tree to protect against bisync assuming a bunch of deleted
files if the linked-to tree should not be accessible. Also see the --check-filename flag.
–max-delete
As a safety check, if greater than the --max-delete percent of files were deleted on either the Path1 or
Path2 filesystem, then bisync will abort with a warning message, without making any changes. The default
--max-delete is 50%. One way to trigger this limit is to rename a directory that contains more than half
of your files. This will appear to bisync as a bunch of deleted files and a bunch of new files. This
safety check is intended to block bisync from deleting all of the files on both filesystems due to a
temporary network access issue, or if the user had inadvertently deleted the files on one side or the
other. To force the sync either set a different delete percentage limit, e.g. --max-delete 75 (allows up
to 75% deletion), or use --force to bypass the check.
Also see the all files changed check.
–filters-file
By using rclone filter features you can exclude file types or directory sub-trees from the sync. See the
bisync filters section and generic https://rclone.org/filtering/#filter-from-read-filtering-patterns-
from-a-file –filter-from documentation. An example filters file contains filters for non-allowed files
for synching with Dropbox.
If you make changes to your filters file then bisync requires a run with --resync. This is a safety
feature, which avoids existing files on the Path1 and/or Path2 side from seeming to disappear from view
(since they are excluded in the new listings), which would fool bisync into seeing them as deleted (as
compared to the prior run listings), and then bisync would proceed to delete them for real.
To block this from happening bisync calculates an MD5 hash of the filters file and stores the hash in a
.md5 file in the same place as your filters file. On the next runs with --filters-file set, bisync
re-calculates the MD5 hash of the current filters file and compares it to the hash stored in .md5 file.
If they don’t match the run aborts with a critical error and thus forces you to do a --resync, likely
avoiding a disaster.
–check-sync
Enabled by default, the check-sync function checks that all of the same files exist in both the Path1 and
Path2 history listings. This check-sync integrity check is performed at the end of the sync run by
default. Any untrapped failing copy/deletes between the two paths might result in differences between
the two listings and in the untracked file content differences between the two paths. A resync run would
correct the error.
Note that the default-enabled integrity check locally executes a load of both the final Path1 and Path2
listings, and thus adds to the run time of a sync. Using --check-sync=false will disable it and may
significantly reduce the sync run times for very large numbers of files.
The check may be run manually with --check-sync=only. It runs only the integrity check and terminates
without actually synching.
Operation
Runtime flow details
bisync retains the listings of the Path1 and Path2 filesystems from the prior run. On each successive
run it will:
• list files on path1 and path2, and check for changes on each side. Changes include New, Newer, Older,
and Deleted files.
• Propagate changes on path1 to path2, and vice-versa.
Safety measures
• Lock file prevents multiple simultaneous runs when taking a while. This can be particularly useful if
bisync is run by cron scheduler.
• Handle change conflicts non-destructively by creating ..path1 and ..path2 file versions.
• File system access health check using RCLONE_TEST files (see the --check-access flag).
• Abort on excessive deletes - protects against a failed listing being interpreted as all the files were
deleted. See the --max-delete and --force flags.
• If something evil happens, bisync goes into a safe state to block damage by later runs. (See Error
Handling)
Normal sync checks
Type Description Result Implementation
────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Path2 File is new on Path2, does Path2 version rclone copy Path2
new not exist on Path1 survives to Path1
Path2 File is newer on Path2, Path2 version rclone copy Path2
newer unchanged on Path1 survives to Path1
Path2 File is deleted on Path2, File is deleted rclone delete
deleted unchanged on Path1 Path1
Path1 File is new on Path1, does Path1 version rclone copy Path1
new not exist on Path2 survives to Path2
Path1 File is newer on Path1, Path1 version rclone copy Path1
newer unchanged on Path2 survives to Path2
Path1 File is older on Path1, Path1 version rclone copy Path1
older unchanged on Path2 survives to Path2
Path2 File is older on Path2, Path2 version rclone copy Path2
older unchanged on Path1 survives to Path1
Path1 File no longer exists on File is deleted rclone delete
deleted Path1 Path2
Unusual sync checks
Type Description Result Implementation
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Path1 new AND File is new on Path1 Files renamed to rclone copy
Path2 new AND new on Path2 _Path1 and _Path2 _Path2 file to
Path1, rclone
copy _Path1
file to Path2
Path2 newer AND File is newer on Files renamed to rclone copy
Path1 changed Path2 AND also _Path1 and _Path2 _Path2 file to
changed Path1, rclone
(newer/older/size) on copy _Path1
Path1 file to Path2
Path2 newer AND File is newer on Path2 version rclone copy
Path1 deleted Path2 AND also survives Path2 to Path1
deleted on Path1
Path2 deleted AND File is deleted on Path1 version rclone copy
Path1 changed Path2 AND changed survives Path1 to Path2
(newer/older/size) on
Path1
Path1 deleted AND File is deleted on Path2 version rclone copy
Path2 changed Path1 AND changed survives Path2 to Path1
(newer/older/size) on
Path2
All files changed check
if all prior existing files on either of the filesystems have changed (e.g. timestamps have changed due
to changing the system’s timezone) then bisync will abort without making any changes. Any new files are
not considered for this check. You could use --force to force the sync (whichever side has the changed
timestamp files wins). Alternately, a --resync may be used (Path1 versions will be pushed to Path2).
Consider the situation carefully and perhaps use --dry-run before you commit to the changes.
Modification time
Bisync relies on file timestamps to identify changed files and will refuse to operate if backend lacks
the modification time support.
If you or your application should change the content of a file without changing the modification time
then bisync will not notice the change, and thus will not copy it to the other side.
Note that on some cloud storage systems it is not possible to have file timestamps that match precisely
between the local and other filesystems.
Bisync’s approach to this problem is by tracking the changes on each side separately over time with a
local database of files in that side then applying the resulting changes on the other side.
Error handling
Certain bisync critical errors, such as file copy/move failing, will result in a bisync lockout of
following runs. The lockout is asserted because the sync status and history of the Path1 and Path2
filesystems cannot be trusted, so it is safer to block any further changes until someone checks things
out. The recovery is to do a --resync again.
It is recommended to use --resync --dry-run --verbose initially and carefully review what changes will be
made before running the --resync without --dry-run.
Most of these events come up due to a error status from an internal call. On such a critical error the
{...}.path1.lst and {...}.path2.lst listing files are renamed to extension .lst-err, which blocks any
future bisync runs (since the normal .lst files are not found). Bisync keeps them under bisync
subdirectory of the rclone cache directory, typically at ${HOME}/.cache/rclone/bisync/ on Linux.
Some errors are considered temporary and re-running the bisync is not blocked. The critical return
blocks further bisync runs.
Lock file
When bisync is running, a lock file is created in the bisync working directory, typically at
~/.cache/rclone/bisync/PATH1..PATH2.lck on Linux. If bisync should crash or hang, the lock file will
remain in place and block any further runs of bisync for the same paths. Delete the lock file as part of
debugging the situation. The lock file effectively blocks follow-on (e.g., scheduled by cron) runs when
the prior invocation is taking a long time. The lock file contains PID of the blocking process, which
may help in debug.
Note that while concurrent bisync runs are allowed, be very cautious that there is no overlap in the
trees being synched between concurrent runs, lest there be replicated files, deleted files and general
mayhem.
Return codes
rclone bisync returns the following codes to calling program: - 0 on a successful run, - 1 for a
non-critical failing run (a rerun may be successful), - 2 for a critically aborted run (requires a
--resync to recover).
Limitations
Supported backends
Bisync is considered BETA and has been tested with the following backends: - Local filesystem - Google
Drive - Dropbox - OneDrive - S3 - SFTP - Yandex Disk
It has not been fully tested with other services yet. If it works, or sorta works, please let us know
and we’ll update the list. Run the test suite to check for proper operation as described below.
First release of rclone bisync requires that underlying backend supported the modification time feature
and will refuse to run otherwise. This limitation will be lifted in a future rclone bisync release.
Concurrent modifications
When using Local, FTP or SFTP remotes rclone does not create temporary files at the destination when
copying, and thus if the connection is lost the created file may be corrupt, which will likely propagate
back to the original path on the next sync, resulting in data loss. This will be solved in a future
release, there is no workaround at the moment.
Files that change during a bisync run may result in data loss. This has been seen in a highly dynamic
environment, where the filesystem is getting hammered by running processes during the sync. The solution
is to sync at quiet times or filter out unnecessary directories and files.
Empty directories
New empty directories on one path are not propagated to the other side. This is because bisync (and
rclone) natively works on files not directories. The following sequence is a workaround but will not
propagate the delete of an empty directory to the other side:
rclone bisync PATH1 PATH2
rclone copy PATH1 PATH2 --filter "+ */" --filter "- **" --create-empty-src-dirs
rclone copy PATH2 PATH2 --filter "+ */" --filter "- **" --create-empty-src-dirs
Renamed directories
Renaming a folder on the Path1 side results is deleting all files on the Path2 side and then copying all
files again from Path1 to Path2. Bisync sees this as all files in the old directory name as deleted and
all files in the new directory name as new. Similarly, renaming a directory on both sides to the same
name will result in creating ..path1 and ..path2 files on both sides. Currently the most effective and
efficient method of renaming a directory is to rename it on both sides, then do a --resync.
Case sensitivity
Synching with case-insensitive filesystems, such as Windows or Box, can result in file name conflicts.
This will be fixed in a future release. The near term workaround is to make sure that files on both
sides don’t have spelling case differences (Smile.jpg vs. smile.jpg).
Windows support
Bisync has been tested on Windows 8.1, Windows 10 Pro 64-bit and on Windows GitHub runners.
Drive letters are allowed, including drive letters mapped to network drives (rclone bisync J:\localsync
GDrive:). If a drive letter is omitted, the shell current drive is the default. Drive letters are a
single character follows by :, so cloud names must be more than one character long.
Absolute paths (with or without a drive letter), and relative paths (with or without a drive letter) are
supported.
Working directory is created at C:\Users\MyLogin\AppData\Local\rclone\bisync.
Note that bisync output may show a mix of forward / and back \ slashes.
Be careful of case independent directory and file naming on Windows vs. case dependent Linux
Filtering
See filtering documentation for how filter rules are written and interpreted.
Bisync’s --filters-file flag slightly extends the rclone’s https://rclone.org/filtering/#filter-from-
read-filtering-patterns-from-a-file –filter-from filtering mechanism. For a given bisync run you may
provide only one --filters-file. The --include*, --exclude*, and --filter flags are also supported.
How to filter directories
Filtering portions of the directory tree is a critical feature for synching.
Examples of directory trees (always beneath the Path1/Path2 root level) you may want to exclude from your
sync: - Directory trees containing only software build intermediate files. - Directory trees containing
application temporary files and data such as the Windows C:\Users\MyLogin\AppData\ tree. - Directory
trees containing files that are large, less important, or are getting thrashed continuously by ongoing
processes.
On the other hand, there may be only select directories that you actually want to sync, and exclude all
others. See the Example include-style filters for Windows user directories below.
Filters file writing guidelines
1. Begin with excluding directory trees:
• e.g. - /AppData/
• ** on the end is not necessary. Once a given directory level is excluded then everything beneath
it won’t be looked at by rclone.
• Exclude such directories that are unneeded, are big, dynamically thrashed, or where there may be
access permission issues.
• Excluding such dirs first will make rclone operations (much) faster.
• Specific files may also be excluded, as with the Dropbox exclusions example below.
2. Decide if its easier (or cleaner) to:
• Include select directories and therefore exclude everything else – or –
• Exclude select directories and therefore include everything else
3. Include select directories:
• Add lines like: + /Documents/PersonalFiles/** to select which directories to include in the sync.
• ** on the end specifies to include the full depth of the specified tree.
• With Include-style filters, files at the Path1/Path2 root are not included. They may be included
with + /*.
• Place RCLONE_TEST files within these included directory trees. They will only be looked for in
these directory trees.
• Finish by excluding everything else by adding - ** at the end of the filters file.
• Disregard step 4.
4. Exclude select directories:
• Add more lines like in step 1. For example: -/Desktop/tempfiles/, or - /testdir/. Again, a ** on
the end is not necessary.
• Do not add a - ** in the file. Without this line, everything will be included that has not be
explicitly excluded.
• Disregard step 3.
A few rules for the syntax of a filter file expanding on filtering documentation:
• Lines may start with spaces and tabs - rclone strips leading whitespace.
• If the first non-whitespace character is a # then the line is a comment and will be ignored.
• Blank lines are ignored.
• The first non-whitespace character on a filter line must be a + or -.
• Exactly 1 space is allowed between the +/- and the path term.
• Only forward slashes (/) are used in path terms, even on Windows.
• The rest of the line is taken as the path term. Trailing whitespace is taken literally, and probably
is an error.
Example include-style filters for Windows user directories
This Windows include-style example is based on the sync root (Path1) set to C:\Users\MyLogin. The
strategy is to select specific directories to be synched with a network drive (Path2).
• - /AppData/ excludes an entire tree of Windows stored stuff that need not be synched. In my case,
AppData has >11 GB of stuff I don’t care about, and there are some subdirectories beneath AppData that
are not accessible to my user login, resulting in bisync critical aborts.
• Windows creates cache files starting with both upper and lowercase NTUSER at C:\Users\MyLogin. These
files may be dynamic, locked, and are generally don’t care.
• There are just a few directories with my data that I do want synched, in the form of + /<path>. By
selecting only the directory trees I want to avoid the dozen plus directories that various apps make at
C:\Users\MyLogin\Documents.
• Include files in the root of the sync point, C:\Users\MyLogin, by adding the + /* line.
• This is an Include-style filters file, therefore it ends with - ** which excludes everything not
explicitly included.
- /AppData/
- NTUSER*
- ntuser*
+ /Documents/Family/**
+ /Documents/Sketchup/**
+ /Documents/Microcapture_Photo/**
+ /Documents/Microcapture_Video/**
+ /Desktop/**
+ /Pictures/**
+ /*
- **
Note also that Windows implements several “library” links such as C:\Users\MyLogin\My Documents\My Music
pointing to C:\Users\MyLogin\Music. rclone sees these as links, so you must add --links to the bisync
command line if you which to follow these links. I find that I get permission errors in trying to follow
the links, so I don’t include the rclone --links flag, but then you get lots of Can't follow symlink...
noise from rclone about not following the links. This noise can be quashed by adding --quiet to the
bisync command line.
Example exclude-style filters files for use with Dropbox
• Dropbox disallows synching the listed temporary and configuration/data files. The - <filename> filters
exclude these files where ever they may occur in the sync tree. Consider adding similar exclusions for
file types you don’t need to sync, such as core dump and software build files.
• bisync testing creates /testdir/ at the top level of the sync tree, and usually deletes the tree after
the test. If a normal sync should run while the /testdir/ tree exists the --check-access phase may
fail due to unbalanced RCLONE_TEST files. The - /testdir/ filter blocks this tree from being synched.
You don’t need this exclusion if you are not doing bisync development testing.
• Everything else beneath the Path1/Path2 root will be synched.
• RCLONE_TEST files may be placed anywhere within the tree, including the root.
Example filters file for Dropbox
# Filter file for use with bisync
# See https://rclone.org/filtering/ for filtering rules
# NOTICE: If you make changes to this file you MUST do a --resync run.
# Run with --dry-run to see what changes will be made.
# Dropbox wont sync some files so filter them away here.
# See https://help.dropbox.com/installs-integrations/sync-uploads/files-not-syncing
- .dropbox.attr
- ~*.tmp
- ~$*
- .~*
- desktop.ini
- .dropbox
# Used for bisync testing, so excluded from normal runs
- /testdir/
# Other example filters
#- /TiBU/
#- /Photos/
How –check-access handles filters
At the start of a bisync run, listings are gathered for Path1 and Path2 while using the user’s
--filters-file. During the check access phase, bisync scans these listings for RCLONE_TEST files. Any
RCLONE_TEST files hidden by the --filters-file are not in the listings and thus not checked during the
check access phase.
Troubleshooting
Reading bisync logs
Here are two normal runs. The first one has a newer file on the remote. The second has no deltas
between local and remote.
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Synching Path1 "/path/to/local/tree/" with Path2 "dropbox:/"
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Path1 checking for diffs
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : - Path1 File is new - file.txt
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Path1: 1 changes: 1 new, 0 newer, 0 older, 0 deleted
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Path2 checking for diffs
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Applying changes
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : - Path1 Queue copy to Path2 - dropbox:/file.txt
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : - Path1 Do queued copies to - Path2
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Updating listings
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Validating listings for Path1 "/path/to/local/tree/" vs Path2 "dropbox:/"
2021/05/16 00:24:38 INFO : Bisync successful
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : Synching Path1 "/path/to/local/tree/" with Path2 "dropbox:/"
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : Path1 checking for diffs
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : Path2 checking for diffs
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : No changes found
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : Updating listings
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : Validating listings for Path1 "/path/to/local/tree/" vs Path2 "dropbox:/"
2021/05/16 00:36:52 INFO : Bisync successful
Dry run oddity
The --dry-run messages may indicate that it would try to delete some files. For example, if a file is
new on Path2 and does not exist on Path1 then it would normally be copied to Path1, but with --dry-run
enabled those copies don’t happen, which leads to the attempted delete on the Path2, blocked again by
–dry-run: ... Not deleting as --dry-run.
This whole confusing situation is an artifact of the --dry-run flag. Scrutinize the proposed deletes
carefully, and if the files would have been copied to Path1 then the threatened deletes on Path2 may be
disregarded.
Retries
Rclone has built in retries. If you run with --verbose you’ll see error and retry messages such as shown
below. This is usually not a bug. If at the end of the run you see Bisync successful and not Bisync
critical error or Bisync aborted then the run was successful, and you can ignore the error messages.
The following run shows an intermittent fail. Lines 5 and _6- are low level messages. Line 6 is a
bubbled-up warning message, conveying the error. Rclone normally retries failing commands, so there may
be numerous such messages in the log.
Since there are no final error/warning messages on line 7, rclone has recovered from failure after a
retry, and the overall sync was successful.
1: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 INFO : Synching Path1 "/path/to/local/tree" with Path2 "dropbox:"
2: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 INFO : Path1 checking for diffs
3: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 INFO : Path2 checking for diffs
4: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 INFO : Path2: 113 changes: 22 new, 0 newer, 0 older, 91 deleted
5: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 ERROR : /path/to/local/tree/objects/af: error listing: unexpected end of JSON input
6: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 NOTICE: WARNING listing try 1 failed. - dropbox:
7: 2021/05/14 00:44:12 INFO : Bisync successful
This log shows a Critical failure which requires a --resync to recover from. See the Runtime Error
Handling section.
2021/05/12 00:49:40 INFO : Google drive root '': Waiting for checks to finish
2021/05/12 00:49:40 INFO : Google drive root '': Waiting for transfers to finish
2021/05/12 00:49:40 INFO : Google drive root '': not deleting files as there were IO errors
2021/05/12 00:49:40 ERROR : Attempt 3/3 failed with 3 errors and: not deleting files as there were IO errors
2021/05/12 00:49:40 ERROR : Failed to sync: not deleting files as there were IO errors
2021/05/12 00:49:40 NOTICE: WARNING rclone sync try 3 failed. - /path/to/local/tree/
2021/05/12 00:49:40 ERROR : Bisync aborted. Must run --resync to recover.
Denied downloads of “infected” or “abusive” files
Google Drive has a filter for certain file types (.exe, .apk, et cetera) that by default cannot be copied
from Google Drive to the local filesystem. If you are having problems, run with --verbose to see
specifically which files are generating complaints. If the error is This file has been identified as
malware or spam and cannot be downloaded, consider using the flag –drive-acknowledge-abuse.
Google Doc files
Google docs exist as virtual files on Google Drive and cannot be transferred to other filesystems
natively. While it is possible to export a Google doc to a normal file (with .xlsx extension, for
example), it is not possible to import a normal file back into a Google document.
Bisync’s handling of Google Doc files is to flag them in the run log output for user’s attention and
ignore them for any file transfers, deletes, or syncs. They will show up with a length of -1 in the
listings. This bisync run is otherwise successful:
2021/05/11 08:23:15 INFO : Synching Path1 "/path/to/local/tree/base/" with Path2 "GDrive:"
2021/05/11 08:23:15 INFO : ...path2.lst-new: Ignoring incorrect line: "- -1 - - 2018-07-29T08:49:30.136000000+0000 GoogleDoc.docx"
2021/05/11 08:23:15 INFO : Bisync successful
Usage examples
Cron
Rclone does not yet have a built-in capability to monitor the local file system for changes and must be
blindly run periodically. On Windows this can be done using a Task Scheduler, on Linux you can use Cron
which is described below.
The 1st example runs a sync every 5 minutes between a local directory and an OwnCloud server, with output
logged to a runlog file:
# Minute (0-59)
# Hour (0-23)
# Day of Month (1-31)
# Month (1-12 or Jan-Dec)
# Day of Week (0-6 or Sun-Sat)
# Command
*/5 * * * * /path/to/rclone bisync /local/files MyCloud: --check-access --filters-file /path/to/bysync-filters.txt --log-file /path/to//bisync.log
See https://www.man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/crontab.1p.html#INPUT_FILES crontab syntax). for the
details of crontab time interval expressions.
If you run rclone bisync as a cron job, redirect stdout/stderr to a file. The 2nd example runs a sync to
Dropbox every hour and logs all stdout (via the >>) and stderr (via 2>&1) to a log file.
0 * * * * /path/to/rclone bisync /path/to/local/dropbox Dropbox: --check-access --filters-file /home/user/filters.txt >> /path/to/logs/dropbox-run.log 2>&1
Sharing an encrypted folder tree between hosts
bisync can keep a local folder in sync with a cloud service, but what if you have some highly sensitive
files to be synched?
Usage of a cloud service is for exchanging both routine and sensitive personal files between one’s home
network, one’s personal notebook when on the road, and with one’s work computer. The routine data is not
sensitive. For the sensitive data, configure an rclone crypt remote to point to a subdirectory within
the local disk tree that is bisync’d to Dropbox, and then set up an bisync for this local crypt directory
to a directory outside of the main sync tree.
Linux server setup
• /path/to/DBoxroot is the root of my local sync tree. There are numerous subdirectories.
• /path/to/DBoxroot/crypt is the root subdirectory for files that are encrypted. This local directory
target is setup as an rclone crypt remote named Dropcrypt:. See rclone.conf snippet below.
• /path/to/my/unencrypted/files is the root of my sensitive files - not encrypted, not within the tree
synched to Dropbox.
• To sync my local unencrypted files with the encrypted Dropbox versions I manually run bisync
/path/to/my/unencrypted/files DropCrypt:. This step could be bundled into a script to run before and
after the full Dropbox tree sync in the last step, thus actively keeping the sensitive files in sync.
• bisync /path/to/DBoxroot Dropbox: runs periodically via cron, keeping my full local sync tree in sync
with Dropbox.
Windows notebook setup
• The Dropbox client runs keeping the local tree C:\Users\MyLogin\Dropbox always in sync with Dropbox. I
could have used rclone bisync instead.
• A separate directory tree at C:\Users\MyLogin\Documents\DropLocal hosts the tree of unencrypted
files/folders.
• To sync my local unencrypted files with the encrypted Dropbox versions I manually run the following
command: rclone bisync C:\Users\MyLogin\Documents\DropLocal Dropcrypt:.
• The Dropbox client then syncs the changes with Dropbox.
rclone.conf snippet
[Dropbox]
type = dropbox
...
[Dropcrypt]
type = crypt
remote = /path/to/DBoxroot/crypt # on the Linux server
remote = C:\Users\MyLogin\Dropbox\crypt # on the Windows notebook
filename_encryption = standard
directory_name_encryption = true
password = ...
...
Testing
You should read this section only if you are developing for rclone. You need to have rclone source code
locally to work with bisync tests.
Bisync has a dedicated test framework implemented in the bisync_test.go file located in the rclone source
tree. The test suite is based on the go test command. Series of tests are stored in subdirectories
below the cmd/bisync/testdata directory. Individual tests can be invoked by their directory name, e.g.
go test . -case basic -remote local -remote2 gdrive: -v
Tests will make a temporary folder on remote and purge it afterwards. If during test run there are
intermittent errors and rclone retries, these errors will be captured and flagged as invalid MISCOMPAREs.
Rerunning the test will let it pass. Consider such failures as noise.
Test command syntax
usage: go test ./cmd/bisync [options...]
Options:
-case NAME Name(s) of the test case(s) to run. Multiple names should
be separated by commas. You can remove the `test_` prefix
and replace `_` by `-` in test name for convenience.
If not `all`, the name(s) should map to a directory under
`./cmd/bisync/testdata`.
Use `all` to run all tests (default: all)
-remote PATH1 `local` or name of cloud service with `:` (default: local)
-remote2 PATH2 `local` or name of cloud service with `:` (default: local)
-no-compare Disable comparing test results with the golden directory
(default: compare)
-no-cleanup Disable cleanup of Path1 and Path2 testdirs.
Useful for troubleshooting. (default: cleanup)
-golden Store results in the golden directory (default: false)
This flag can be used with multiple tests.
-debug Print debug messages
-stop-at NUM Stop test after given step number. (default: run to the end)
Implies `-no-compare` and `-no-cleanup`, if the test really
ends prematurely. Only meaningful for a single test case.
-refresh-times Force refreshing the target modtime, useful for Dropbox
(default: false)
-verbose Run tests verbosely
Note: unlike rclone flags which must be prefixed by double dash (--), the test command flags can be
equally prefixed by a single - or double dash.
Running tests
• go test . -case basic -remote local -remote2 local runs the test_basic test case using only the local
filesystem, synching one local directory with another local directory. Test script output is to the
console, while commands within scenario.txt have their output sent to the .../workdir/test.log file,
which is finally compared to the golden copy.
• The first argument after go test should be a relative name of the directory containing bisync source
code. If you run tests right from there, the argument will be . (current directory) as in most
examples below. If you run bisync tests from the rclone source directory, the command should be go
test ./cmd/bisync ....
• The test engine will mangle rclone output to ensure comparability with golden listings and logs.
• Test scenarios are located in ./cmd/bisync/testdata. The test -case argument should match the full
name of a subdirectory under that directory. Every test subdirectory name on disk must start with
test_, this prefix can be omitted on command line for brevity. Also, underscores in the name can be
replaced by dashes for convenience.
• go test . -remote local -remote2 local -case all runs all tests.
• Path1 and Path2 may either be the keyword local or may be names of configured cloud services. go test
. -remote gdrive: -remote2 dropbox: -case basic will run the test between these two services, without
transferring any files to the local filesystem.
• Test run stdout and stderr console output may be directed to a file, e.g. go test . -remote gdrive:
-remote2 local -case all > runlog.txt 2>&1
Test execution flow
1. The base setup in the initial directory of the testcase is applied on the Path1 and Path2 filesystems
(via rclone copy the initial directory to Path1, then rclone sync Path1 to Path2).
2. The commands in the scenario.txt file are applied, with output directed to the test.log file in the
test working directory. Typically, the first actual command in the scenario.txt file is to do a
--resync, which establishes the baseline {...}.path1.lst and {...}.path2.lst files in the test working
directory (.../workdir/ relative to the temporary test directory). Various commands and listing
snapshots are done within the test.
3. Finally, the contents of the test working directory are compared to the contents of the testcase’s
golden directory.
Notes about testing
• Test cases are in individual directories beneath ./cmd/bisync/testdata. A command line reference to a
test is understood to reference a directory beneath testdata. For example, go test ./cmd/bisync -case
dry-run -remote gdrive: -remote2 local refers to the test case in ./cmd/bisync/testdata/test_dry_run.
• The test working directory is located at .../workdir relative to a temporary test directory, usually
under /tmp on Linux.
• The local test sync tree is created at a temporary directory named like bisync.XXX under system
temporary directory.
• The remote test sync tree is located at a temporary directory under <remote:>/bisync.XXX/.
• path1 and/or path2 subdirectories are created in a temporary directory under the respective local or
cloud test remote.
• By default, the Path1 and Path2 test dirs and workdir will be deleted after each test run. The
-no-cleanup flag disables purging these directories when validating and debugging a given test. These
directories will be flushed before running another test, independent of the -no-cleanup usage.
• You will likely want to add - /testdir/ to your normal bisync --filters-file so that normal syncs do
not attempt to sync the test temporary directories, which may have RCLONE_TEST miscompares in some
testcases which would otherwise trip the --check-access system. The --check-access mechanism is
hard-coded to ignore RCLONE_TEST files beneath bisync/testdata, so the test cases may reside on the
synched tree even if there are check file mismatches in the test tree.
• Some Dropbox tests can fail, notably printing the following message: src and dst identical but can't
set mod time without deleting and re-uploading This is expected and happens due a way Dropbox handles
modification times. You should use the -refresh-times test flag to make up for this.
• If Dropbox tests hit request limit for you and print error message too_many_requests/...: Too many
requests or write operations. then follow the Dropbox App ID instructions.
Updating golden results
Sometimes even a slight change in the bisync source can cause little changes spread around many log
files. Updating them manually would be a nightmare.
The -golden flag will store the test.log and *.lst listings from each test case into respective golden
directories. Golden results will automatically contain generic strings instead of local or cloud paths
which means that they should match when run with a different cloud service.
Your normal workflow might be as follows: 1. Git-clone the rclone sources locally 2. Modify bisync
source and check that it builds 3. Run the whole test suite go test ./cmd/bisync -remote local 4. If
some tests show log difference, recheck them individually, e.g.: go test ./cmd/bisync -remote local -case
basic 5. If you are convinced with the difference, goldenize all tests at once: go test ./cmd/bisync
-remote local -golden 6. Use word diff: git diff --word-diff ./cmd/bisync/testdata/. Please note that
normal line-level diff is generally useless here. 7. Check the difference carefully! 8. Commit the
change (git commit) only if you are sure. If unsure, save your code changes then wipe the log diffs from
git: git reset [--hard].
Structure of test scenarios
• <testname>/initial/ contains a tree of files that will be set as the initial condition on both Path1
and Path2 testdirs.
• <testname>/modfiles/ contains files that will be used to modify the Path1 and/or Path2 filesystems.
• <testname>/golden/ contains the expected content of the test working directory (workdir) at the
completion of the testcase.
• <testname>/scenario.txt contains the body of the test, in the form of various commands to modify files,
run bisync, and snapshot listings. Output from these commands is captured to .../workdir/test.log for
comparison to the golden files.
Supported test commands
• test <some message> Print the line to the console and to the test.log: test sync is working correctly
with options x, y, z
• copy-listings <prefix> Save a copy of all .lst listings in the test working directory with the
specified prefix: save-listings exclude-pass-run
• move-listings <prefix> Similar to copy-listings but removes the source
• purge-children <dir> This will delete all child files and purge all child subdirs under given directory
but keep the parent intact. This behavior is important for tests with Google Drive because removing
and re-creating the parent would change its ID.
• delete-file <file> Delete a single file.
• delete-glob <dir> <pattern> Delete a group of files located one level deep in the given directory with
names maching a given glob pattern.
• touch-glob YYYY-MM-DD <dir> <pattern> Change modification time on a group of files.
• touch-copy YYYY-MM-DD <source-file> <dest-dir> Change file modification time then copy it to
destination.
• copy-file <source-file> <dest-dir> Copy a single file to given directory.
• copy-as <source-file> <dest-file> Similar to above but destination must include both directory and the
new file name at destination.
• copy-dir <src> <dst> and sync-dir <src> <dst> Copy/sync a directory. Equivalent of rclone copy and
rclone sync.
• list-dirs <dir> Equivalent to rclone lsf -R --dirs-only <dir>
• bisync [options] Runs bisync against -remote and -remote2.
Supported substitution terms
• {testdir/} - the root dir of the testcase
• {datadir/} - the modfiles dir under the testcase root
• {workdir/} - the temporary test working directory
• {path1/} - the root of the Path1 test directory tree
• {path2/} - the root of the Path2 test directory tree
• {session} - base name of the test listings
• {/} - OS-specific path separator
• {spc}, {tab}, {eol} - whitespace
• {chr:HH} - raw byte with given hexadecimal code
Substitution results of the terms named like {dir/} will end with / (or backslash on Windows), so it is
not necessary to include slash in the usage, for example delete-file {path1/}file1.txt.
Benchmarks
This section is work in progress.
Here are a few data points for scale, execution times, and memory usage.
The first set of data was taken between a local disk to Dropbox. The speedtest.net download speed was
~170 Mbps, and upload speed was ~10 Mbps. 500 files (~9.5 MB each) had been already synched. 50 files
were added in a new directory, each ~9.5 MB, ~475 MB total.
Change Operations and times Overall run
time
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
500 files synched 1x listings for Path1 & Path2 1.5 sec
(nothing to move)
500 files synched with 1x listings for Path1 & Path2 1.5 sec
–check-access
50 new files on remote Queued 50 copies down: 27 sec 29 sec
Moved local dir Queued 50 copies up: 410 sec, 50 421 sec
deletes up: 9 sec
Moved remote dir Queued 50 copies down: 31 sec, 50 33 sec
deletes down: <1 sec
Delete local dir Queued 50 deletes up: 9 sec 13 sec
This next data is from a user’s application. They had ~400GB of data over 1.96 million files being
sync’ed between a Windows local disk and some remote cloud. The file full path length was on average 35
characters (which factors into load time and RAM required).
• Loading the prior listing into memory (1.96 million files, listing file size 140 MB) took ~30 sec and
occupied about 1 GB of RAM.
• Getting a fresh listing of the local file system (producing the 140 MB output file) took about XXX sec.
• Getting a fresh listing of the remote file system (producing the 140 MB output file) took about XXX
sec. The network download speed was measured at XXX Mb/s.
• Once the prior and current Path1 and Path2 listings were loaded (a total of four to be loaded, two at a
time), determining the deltas was pretty quick (a few seconds for this test case), and the transfer
time for any files to be copied was dominated by the network bandwidth.
References
rclone’s bisync implementation was derived from the rclonesync-V2 project, including documentation and
test mechanisms, with @cjnaz’s full support and encouragement.
rclone bisync is similar in nature to a range of other projects:
• unison
• syncthing
• cjnaz/rclonesync
• ConorWilliams/rsinc
• jwink3101/syncrclone
• DavideRossi/upback
Bisync adopts the differential synchronization technique, which is based on keeping history of changes
performed by both synchronizing sides. See the Dual Shadow Method section in the Neil Fraser’s article.
Also note a number of academic publications by
http://www.cis.upenn.edu/%7Ebcpierce/papers/index.shtml#File%20Synchronization Benjamin Pierce about
Unison and synchronization in general.
1Fichier
This is a backend for the 1fichier cloud storage service. Note that a Premium subscription is required
to use the API.
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for 1Fichier involves getting the API key from the website which you need to do in your
browser.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / 1Fichier
\ "fichier"
[snip]
Storage> fichier
** See help for fichier backend at: https://rclone.org/fichier/ **
Your API Key, get it from https://1fichier.com/console/params.pl
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
api_key> example_key
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = fichier
api_key = example_key
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your 1Fichier account
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your 1Fichier account
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to a 1Fichier directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
1Fichier does not support modification times. It supports the Whirlpool hash algorithm.
Duplicated files
1Fichier can have two files with exactly the same name and path (unlike a normal file system).
Duplicated files cause problems with the syncing and you will see messages in the log about duplicates.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
” 0x22 ＂
$ 0x24 ＄
` 0x60 ｀
’ 0x27 ＇
File names can also not start or end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are
the first or last character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to fichier (1Fichier).
–fichier-api-key
Your API Key, get it from https://1fichier.com/console/params.pl.
Properties:
• Config: api_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_FICHIER_API_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to fichier (1Fichier).
–fichier-shared-folder
If you want to download a shared folder, add this parameter.
Properties:
• Config: shared_folder
• Env Var: RCLONE_FICHIER_SHARED_FOLDER
• Type: string
• Required: false
–fichier-file-password
If you want to download a shared file that is password protected, add this parameter.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: file_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_FICHIER_FILE_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: false
–fichier-folder-password
If you want to list the files in a shared folder that is password protected, add this parameter.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: folder_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_FICHIER_FOLDER_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: false
–fichier-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_FICHIER_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default:
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,SingleQuote,BackQuote,Dollar,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,RightSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the 1Fichier backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine
free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Alias
The alias remote provides a new name for another remote.
Paths may be as deep as required or a local path, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory or
/directory/subdirectory.
During the initial setup with rclone config you will specify the target remote. The target remote can
either be a local path or another remote.
Subfolders can be used in target remote. Assume an alias remote named backup with the target
mydrive:private/backup. Invoking rclone mkdir backup:desktop is exactly the same as invoking rclone
mkdir mydrive:private/backup/desktop.
There will be no special handling of paths containing .. segments. Invoking rclone mkdir
backup:../desktop is exactly the same as invoking rclone mkdir mydrive:private/backup/../desktop. The
empty path is not allowed as a remote. To alias the current directory use . instead.
The target remote can also be a connection string. This can be used to modify the config of a remote for
different uses, e.g. the alias myDriveTrash with the target remote myDrive,trashed_only: can be used to
only show the trashed files in myDrive.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make an alias called remote for local folder. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Alias for an existing remote
\ "alias"
[snip]
Storage> alias
Remote or path to alias.
Can be "myremote:path/to/dir", "myremote:bucket", "myremote:" or "/local/path".
remote> /mnt/storage/backup
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
remote = /mnt/storage/backup
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
remote alias
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> q
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level in /mnt/storage/backup
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in /mnt/storage/backup
rclone ls remote:
Copy another local directory to the alias directory called source
rclone copy /home/source remote:source
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to alias (Alias for an existing remote).
–alias-remote
Remote or path to alias.
Can be “myremote:path/to/dir”, “myremote:bucket”, “myremote:” or “/local/path”.
Properties:
• Config: remote
• Env Var: RCLONE_ALIAS_REMOTE
• Type: string
• Required: true
Amazon Drive
Amazon Drive, formerly known as Amazon Cloud Drive, is a cloud storage service run by Amazon for
consumers.
Status
Important: rclone supports Amazon Drive only if you have your own set of API keys. Unfortunately the
Amazon Drive developer program is now closed to new entries so if you don’t already have your own set of
keys you will not be able to use rclone with Amazon Drive.
For the history on why rclone no longer has a set of Amazon Drive API keys see
https://forum.rclone.org/t/rclone-has-been-banned-from-amazon-drive/2314 the forum.
If you happen to know anyone who works at Amazon then please ask them to re-instate rclone into the
Amazon Drive developer program - thanks!
Configuration
The initial setup for Amazon Drive involves getting a token from Amazon which you need to do in your
browser. rclone config walks you through it.
The configuration process for Amazon Drive may involve using an oauth proxy. This is used to keep the
Amazon credentials out of the source code. The proxy runs in Google’s very secure App Engine environment
and doesn’t store any credentials which pass through it.
Since rclone doesn’t currently have its own Amazon Drive credentials so you will either need to have your
own client_id and client_secret with Amazon Drive, or use a third-party oauth proxy in which case you
will need to enter client_id, client_secret, auth_url and token_url.
Note also if you are not using Amazon’s auth_url and token_url, (ie you filled in something for those)
then if setting up on a remote machine you can only use the https://rclone.org/remote_setup/#configuring-
by-copying-the-config-file copying the config method of con‐ figuration - rclone authorize will not work.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/r/c/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Amazon Drive
\ "amazon cloud drive"
[snip]
Storage> amazon cloud drive
Amazon Application Client Id - required.
client_id> your client ID goes here
Amazon Application Client Secret - required.
client_secret> your client secret goes here
Auth server URL - leave blank to use Amazon's.
auth_url> Optional auth URL
Token server url - leave blank to use Amazon's.
token_url> Optional token URL
Remote config
Make sure your Redirect URL is set to "http://127.0.0.1:53682/" in your custom config.
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
client_id = your client ID goes here
client_secret = your client secret goes here
auth_url = Optional auth URL
token_url = Optional token URL
token = {"access_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","token_type":"bearer","refresh_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","expiry":"2015-09-06T16:07:39.658438471+01:00"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Amazon.
This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the verification code.
This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it temporarily if you are
running a host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Amazon Drive
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your Amazon Drive
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an Amazon Drive directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and MD5SUMs
Amazon Drive doesn’t allow modification times to be changed via the API so these won’t be accurate or
used for syncing.
It does store MD5SUMs so for a more accurate sync, you can use the --checksum flag.
Restricted filename characters
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Deleting files
Any files you delete with rclone will end up in the trash. Amazon don’t provide an API to permanently
delete files, nor to empty the trash, so you will have to do that with one of Amazon’s apps or via the
Amazon Drive website. As of November 17, 2016, files are automatically deleted by Amazon from the trash
after 30 days.
Using with non .com Amazon accounts
Let’s say you usually use amazon.co.uk. When you authenticate with rclone it will take you to an
amazon.com page to log in. Your amazon.co.uk email and password should work here just fine.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to amazon cloud drive (Amazon Drive).
–acd-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–acd-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to amazon cloud drive (Amazon Drive).
–acd-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–acd-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–acd-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–acd-checkpoint
Checkpoint for internal polling (debug).
Properties:
• Config: checkpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_CHECKPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–acd-upload-wait-per-gb
Additional time per GiB to wait after a failed complete upload to see if it appears.
Sometimes Amazon Drive gives an error when a file has been fully uploaded but the file appears anyway
after a little while. This happens sometimes for files over 1 GiB in size and nearly every time for
files bigger than 10 GiB. This parameter controls the time rclone waits for the file to appear.
The default value for this parameter is 3 minutes per GiB, so by default it will wait 3 minutes for every
GiB uploaded to see if the file appears.
You can disable this feature by setting it to 0. This may cause conflict errors as rclone retries the
failed upload but the file will most likely appear correctly eventually.
These values were determined empirically by observing lots of uploads of big files for a range of file
sizes.
Upload with the “-v” flag to see more info about what rclone is doing in this situation.
Properties:
• Config: upload_wait_per_gb
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_UPLOAD_WAIT_PER_GB
• Type: Duration
• Default: 3m0s
–acd-templink-threshold
Files >= this size will be downloaded via their tempLink.
Files this size or more will be downloaded via their “tempLink”. This is to work around a problem with
Amazon Drive which blocks downloads of files bigger than about 10 GiB. The default for this is 9 GiB
which shouldn’t need to be changed.
To download files above this threshold, rclone requests a “tempLink” which downloads the file through a
temporary URL directly from the underlying S3 storage.
Properties:
• Config: templink_threshold
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_TEMPLINK_THRESHOLD
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 9Gi
–acd-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_ACD_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that Amazon Drive is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
Amazon Drive has rate limiting so you may notice errors in the sync (429 errors). rclone will
automatically retry the sync up to 3 times by default (see --retries flag) which should hopefully work
around this problem.
Amazon Drive has an internal limit of file sizes that can be uploaded to the service. This limit is not
officially published, but all files larger than this will fail.
At the time of writing (Jan 2016) is in the area of 50 GiB per file. This means that larger files are
likely to fail.
Unfortunately there is no way for rclone to see that this failure is because of file size, so it will
retry the operation, as any other failure. To avoid this problem, use --max-size 50000M option to limit
the maximum size of uploaded files. Note that --max-size does not split files into segments, it only
ignores files over this size.
rclone about is not supported by the Amazon Drive backend. Backends without this capability cannot
determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone
union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Amazon S3 Storage Providers
The S3 backend can be used with a number of different providers:
• AWS S3
• Alibaba Cloud (Aliyun) Object Storage System (OSS)
• Ceph
• China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS)
• Cloudflare R2
• Arvan Cloud Object Storage (AOS)
• DigitalOcean Spaces
• Dreamhost
• Huawei OBS
• IBM COS S3
• IDrive e2
• IONOS Cloud
• Minio
• Qiniu Cloud Object Storage (Kodo)
• RackCorp Object Storage
• Scaleway
• Seagate Lyve Cloud
• SeaweedFS
• StackPath
• Storj
• Tencent Cloud Object Storage (COS)
• Wasabi
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:bucket/path/to/dir.
Once you have made a remote (see the provider specific section above) you can use it like this:
See all buckets
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new bucket
rclone mkdir remote:bucket
List the contents of a bucket
rclone ls remote:bucket
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote bucket, deleting any excess files in the bucket.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:bucket
Configuration
Here is an example of making an s3 configuration for the AWS S3 provider. Most applies to the other
providers as well, any differences are described below.
First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Dreamhost, IBM COS, Minio, and Tencent COS
\ "s3"
[snip]
Storage> s3
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Amazon Web Services (AWS) S3
\ "AWS"
2 / Ceph Object Storage
\ "Ceph"
3 / Digital Ocean Spaces
\ "DigitalOcean"
4 / Dreamhost DreamObjects
\ "Dreamhost"
5 / IBM COS S3
\ "IBMCOS"
6 / Minio Object Storage
\ "Minio"
7 / Wasabi Object Storage
\ "Wasabi"
8 / Any other S3 compatible provider
\ "Other"
provider> 1
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars). Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
AWS Access Key ID - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
access_key_id> XXX
AWS Secret Access Key (password) - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
secret_access_key> YYY
Region to connect to.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
/ The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
1 | US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest.
| Leave location constraint empty.
\ "us-east-1"
/ US East (Ohio) Region
2 | Needs location constraint us-east-2.
\ "us-east-2"
/ US West (Oregon) Region
3 | Needs location constraint us-west-2.
\ "us-west-2"
/ US West (Northern California) Region
4 | Needs location constraint us-west-1.
\ "us-west-1"
/ Canada (Central) Region
5 | Needs location constraint ca-central-1.
\ "ca-central-1"
/ EU (Ireland) Region
6 | Needs location constraint EU or eu-west-1.
\ "eu-west-1"
/ EU (London) Region
7 | Needs location constraint eu-west-2.
\ "eu-west-2"
/ EU (Frankfurt) Region
8 | Needs location constraint eu-central-1.
\ "eu-central-1"
/ Asia Pacific (Singapore) Region
9 | Needs location constraint ap-southeast-1.
\ "ap-southeast-1"
/ Asia Pacific (Sydney) Region
10 | Needs location constraint ap-southeast-2.
\ "ap-southeast-2"
/ Asia Pacific (Tokyo) Region
11 | Needs location constraint ap-northeast-1.
\ "ap-northeast-1"
/ Asia Pacific (Seoul)
12 | Needs location constraint ap-northeast-2.
\ "ap-northeast-2"
/ Asia Pacific (Mumbai)
13 | Needs location constraint ap-south-1.
\ "ap-south-1"
/ Asia Pacific (Hong Kong) Region
14 | Needs location constraint ap-east-1.
\ "ap-east-1"
/ South America (Sao Paulo) Region
15 | Needs location constraint sa-east-1.
\ "sa-east-1"
region> 1
Endpoint for S3 API.
Leave blank if using AWS to use the default endpoint for the region.
endpoint>
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region. Used when creating buckets only.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Empty for US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest.
\ ""
2 / US East (Ohio) Region.
\ "us-east-2"
3 / US West (Oregon) Region.
\ "us-west-2"
4 / US West (Northern California) Region.
\ "us-west-1"
5 / Canada (Central) Region.
\ "ca-central-1"
6 / EU (Ireland) Region.
\ "eu-west-1"
7 / EU (London) Region.
\ "eu-west-2"
8 / EU Region.
\ "EU"
9 / Asia Pacific (Singapore) Region.
\ "ap-southeast-1"
10 / Asia Pacific (Sydney) Region.
\ "ap-southeast-2"
11 / Asia Pacific (Tokyo) Region.
\ "ap-northeast-1"
12 / Asia Pacific (Seoul)
\ "ap-northeast-2"
13 / Asia Pacific (Mumbai)
\ "ap-south-1"
14 / Asia Pacific (Hong Kong)
\ "ap-east-1"
15 / South America (Sao Paulo) Region.
\ "sa-east-1"
location_constraint> 1
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and/or storing objects in S3.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. No one else has access rights (default).
\ "private"
2 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AllUsers group gets READ access.
\ "public-read"
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
3 | Granting this on a bucket is generally not recommended.
\ "public-read-write"
4 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access.
\ "authenticated-read"
/ Object owner gets FULL_CONTROL. Bucket owner gets READ access.
5 | If you specify this canned ACL when creating a bucket, Amazon S3 ignores it.
\ "bucket-owner-read"
/ Both the object owner and the bucket owner get FULL_CONTROL over the object.
6 | If you specify this canned ACL when creating a bucket, Amazon S3 ignores it.
\ "bucket-owner-full-control"
acl> 1
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / None
\ ""
2 / AES256
\ "AES256"
server_side_encryption> 1
The storage class to use when storing objects in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Default
\ ""
2 / Standard storage class
\ "STANDARD"
3 / Reduced redundancy storage class
\ "REDUCED_REDUNDANCY"
4 / Standard Infrequent Access storage class
\ "STANDARD_IA"
5 / One Zone Infrequent Access storage class
\ "ONEZONE_IA"
6 / Glacier storage class
\ "GLACIER"
7 / Glacier Deep Archive storage class
\ "DEEP_ARCHIVE"
8 / Intelligent-Tiering storage class
\ "INTELLIGENT_TIERING"
9 / Glacier Instant Retrieval storage class
\ "GLACIER_IR"
storage_class> 1
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = s3
provider = AWS
env_auth = false
access_key_id = XXX
secret_access_key = YYY
region = us-east-1
endpoint =
location_constraint =
acl = private
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d>
Modified time
The modified time is stored as metadata on the object as X-Amz-Meta-Mtime as floating point since the
epoch, accurate to 1 ns.
If the modification time needs to be updated rclone will attempt to perform a server side copy to update
the modification if the object can be copied in a single part. In the case the object is larger than 5Gb
or is in Glacier or Glacier Deep Archive storage the object will be uploaded rather than copied.
Note that reading this from the object takes an additional HEAD request as the metadata isn’t returned in
object listings.
Reducing costs
Avoiding HEAD requests to read the modification time
By default, rclone will use the modification time of objects stored in S3 for syncing. This is stored in
object metadata which unfortunately takes an extra HEAD request to read which can be expensive (in time
and money).
The modification time is used by default for all operations that require checking the time a file was
last updated. It allows rclone to treat the remote more like a true filesystem, but it is inefficient on
S3 because it requires an extra API call to retrieve the metadata.
The extra API calls can be avoided when syncing (using rclone sync or rclone copy) in a few different
ways, each with its own tradeoffs.
• --size-only
• Only checks the size of files.
• Uses no extra transactions.
• If the file doesn’t change size then rclone won’t detect it has changed.
• rclone sync --size-only /path/to/source s3:bucket
• --checksum
• Checks the size and MD5 checksum of files.
• Uses no extra transactions.
• The most accurate detection of changes possible.
• Will cause the source to read an MD5 checksum which, if it is a local disk, will cause lots of disk
activity.
• If the source and destination are both S3 this is the recommended flag to use for maximum efficiency.
• rclone sync --checksum /path/to/source s3:bucket
• --update --use-server-modtime
• Uses no extra transactions.
• Modification time becomes the time the object was uploaded.
• For many operations this is sufficient to determine if it needs uploading.
• Using --update along with --use-server-modtime, avoids the extra API call and uploads files whose
local modification time is newer than the time it was last uploaded.
• Files created with timestamps in the past will be missed by the sync.
• rclone sync --update --use-server-modtime /path/to/source s3:bucket
These flags can and should be used in combination with --fast-list - see below.
If using rclone mount or any command using the VFS (eg rclone serve) commands then you might want to
consider using the VFS flag --no-modtime which will stop rclone reading the modification time for every
object. You could also use --use-server-modtime if you are happy with the modification times of the
objects being the time of upload.
Avoiding GET requests to read directory listings
Rclone’s default directory traversal is to process each directory individually. This takes one API call
per directory. Using the --fast-list flag will read all info about the objects into memory first using a
smaller number of API calls (one per 1000 objects). See the rclone docs for more details.
rclone sync --fast-list --checksum /path/to/source s3:bucket
--fast-list trades off API transactions for memory use. As a rough guide rclone uses 1k of memory per
object stored, so using --fast-list on a sync of a million objects will use roughly 1 GiB of RAM.
If you are only copying a small number of files into a big repository then using --no-traverse is a good
idea. This finds objects directly instead of through directory listings. You can do a “top-up” sync
very cheaply by using --max-age and --no-traverse to copy only recent files, eg
rclone copy --max-age 24h --no-traverse /path/to/source s3:bucket
You’d then do a full rclone sync less often.
Note that --fast-list isn’t required in the top-up sync.
Avoiding HEAD requests after PUT
By default, rclone will HEAD every object it uploads. It does this to check the object got uploaded
correctly.
You can disable this with the –s3-no-head option - see there for more details.
Setting this flag increases the chance for undetected upload failures.
Hashes
For small objects which weren’t uploaded as multipart uploads (objects sized below --s3-upload-cutoff if
uploaded with rclone) rclone uses the ETag: header as an MD5 checksum.
However for objects which were uploaded as multipart uploads or with server side encryption (SSE-AWS or
SSE-C) the ETag header is no longer the MD5 sum of the data, so rclone adds an additional piece of
metadata X-Amz-Meta-Md5chksum which is a base64 encoded MD5 hash (in the same format as is required for
Content-MD5).
For large objects, calculating this hash can take some time so the addition of this hash can be disabled
with --s3-disable-checksum. This will mean that these objects do not have an MD5 checksum.
Note that reading this from the object takes an additional HEAD request as the metadata isn’t returned in
object listings.
Versions
When bucket versioning is enabled (this can be done with rclone with the rclone backend versioning
command) when rclone uploads a new version of a file it creates a
https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/Versioning.html new version of it Likewise when you
delete a file, the old version will be marked hidden and still be available.
Old versions of files, where available, are visible using the --s3-versions flag.
It is also possible to view a bucket as it was at a certain point in time, using the --s3-version-at
flag. This will show the file versions as they were at that time, showing files that have been deleted
afterwards, and hiding files that were created since.
If you wish to remove all the old versions then you can use the rclone backend cleanup-hidden
remote:bucket command which will delete all the old hidden versions of files, leaving the current ones
intact. You can also supply a path and only old versions under that path will be deleted, e.g. rclone
backend cleanup-hidden remote:bucket/path/to/stuff.
When you purge a bucket, the current and the old versions will be deleted then the bucket will be
deleted.
However delete will cause the current versions of the files to become hidden old versions.
Here is a session showing the listing and retrieval of an old version followed by a cleanup of the old
versions.
Show current version and all the versions with --s3-versions flag.
$ rclone -q ls s3:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
$ rclone -q --s3-versions ls s3:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
8 one-v2016-07-04-141032-000.txt
16 one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
15 one-v2016-07-02-155621-000.txt
Retrieve an old version
$ rclone -q --s3-versions copy s3:cleanup-test/one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt /tmp
$ ls -l /tmp/one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
-rw-rw-r-- 1 ncw ncw 16 Jul 2 17:46 /tmp/one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
Clean up all the old versions and show that they’ve gone.
$ rclone -q backend cleanup-hidden s3:cleanup-test
$ rclone -q ls s3:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
$ rclone -q --s3-versions ls s3:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
Cleanup
If you run rclone cleanup s3:bucket then it will remove all pending multipart uploads older than 24
hours. You can use the -i flag to see exactly what it will do. If you want more control over the expiry
date then run rclone backend cleanup s3:bucket -o max-age=1h to expire all uploads older than one hour.
You can use rclone backend list-multipart-uploads s3:bucket to see the pending multipart uploads.
Restricted filename characters
S3 allows any valid UTF-8 string as a key.
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will be replaced, as they can’t be used in XML.
The following characters are replaced since these are problematic when dealing with the REST API:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
The encoding will also encode these file names as they don’t seem to work with the SDK properly:
File name Replacement
────────────────────────
. ．
.. ．．
Multipart uploads
rclone supports multipart uploads with S3 which means that it can upload files bigger than 5 GiB.
Note that files uploaded both with multipart upload and through crypt remotes do not have MD5 sums.
rclone switches from single part uploads to multipart uploads at the point specified by
--s3-upload-cutoff. This can be a maximum of 5 GiB and a minimum of 0 (ie always upload multipart
files).
The chunk sizes used in the multipart upload are specified by --s3-chunk-size and the number of chunks
uploaded concurrently is specified by --s3-upload-concurrency.
Multipart uploads will use --transfers * --s3-upload-concurrency * --s3-chunk-size extra memory. Single
part uploads to not use extra memory.
Single part transfers can be faster than multipart transfers or slower depending on your latency from S3
- the more latency, the more likely single part transfers will be faster.
Increasing --s3-upload-concurrency will increase throughput (8 would be a sensible value) and increasing
--s3-chunk-size also increases throughput (16M would be sensible). Increasing either of these will use
more memory. The default values are high enough to gain most of the possible performance without using
too much memory.
Buckets and Regions
With Amazon S3 you can list buckets (rclone lsd) using any region, but you can only access the content of
a bucket from the region it was created in. If you attempt to access a bucket from the wrong region, you
will get an error, incorrect region, the bucket is not in 'XXX' region.
Authentication
There are a number of ways to supply rclone with a set of AWS credentials, with and without using the
environment.
The different authentication methods are tried in this order:
• Directly in the rclone configuration file (env_auth = false in the config file):
• access_key_id and secret_access_key are required.
• session_token can be optionally set when using AWS STS.
• Runtime configuration (env_auth = true in the config file):
• Export the following environment variables before running rclone:
• Access Key ID: AWS_ACCESS_KEY_ID or AWS_ACCESS_KEY
• Secret Access Key: AWS_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY or AWS_SECRET_KEY
• Session Token: AWS_SESSION_TOKEN (optional)
• Or, use a https://docs.aws.amazon.com/cli/latest/userguide/cli-multiple-profiles.html named profile:
• Profile files are standard files used by AWS CLI tools
• By default it will use the profile in your home directory (e.g. ~/.aws/credentials on unix based
systems) file and the “default” profile, to change set these environment variables:
• AWS_SHARED_CREDENTIALS_FILE to control which file.
• AWS_PROFILE to control which profile to use.
• Or, run rclone in an ECS task with an IAM role (AWS only).
• Or, run rclone on an EC2 instance with an IAM role (AWS only).
• Or, run rclone in an EKS pod with an IAM role that is associated with a service account (AWS only).
If none of these option actually end up providing rclone with AWS credentials then S3 interaction will be
non-authenticated (see below).
S3 Permissions
When using the sync subcommand of rclone the following minimum permissions are required to be available
on the bucket being written to:
• ListBucket
• DeleteObject
• GetObject
• PutObject
• PutObjectACL
When using the lsd subcommand, the ListAllMyBuckets permission is required.
Example policy:
{
"Version": "2012-10-17",
"Statement": [
{
"Effect": "Allow",
"Principal": {
"AWS": "arn:aws:iam::USER_SID:user/USER_NAME"
},
"Action": [
"s3:ListBucket",
"s3:DeleteObject",
"s3:GetObject",
"s3:PutObject",
"s3:PutObjectAcl"
],
"Resource": [
"arn:aws:s3:::BUCKET_NAME/*",
"arn:aws:s3:::BUCKET_NAME"
]
},
{
"Effect": "Allow",
"Action": "s3:ListAllMyBuckets",
"Resource": "arn:aws:s3:::*"
}
]
}
Notes on above:
1. This is a policy that can be used when creating bucket. It assumes that USER_NAME has been created.
2. The Resource entry must include both resource ARNs, as one implies the bucket and the other implies
the bucket’s objects.
For reference, here’s an Ansible script that will generate one or more buckets that will work with rclone
sync.
Key Management System (KMS)
If you are using server-side encryption with KMS then you must make sure rclone is configured with
server_side_encryption = aws:kms otherwise you will find you can’t transfer small objects - these will
create checksum errors.
Glacier and Glacier Deep Archive
You can upload objects using the glacier storage class or transition them to glacier using a
http://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/user-guide/create-lifecycle.html lifecycle policy. The bucket
can still be synced or copied into normally, but if rclone tries to access data from the glacier storage
class you will see an error like below.
2017/09/11 19:07:43 Failed to sync: failed to open source object: Object in GLACIER, restore first: path/to/file
In this case you need to http://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/user-guide/restore-archived-
objects.html restore the object(s) in question before using rclone.
Note that rclone only speaks the S3 API it does not speak the Glacier Vault API, so rclone cannot
directly access Glacier Vaults.
Object-lock enabled S3 bucket
According to AWS’s https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/object-lock-
overview.html#object-lock-permission documentation on S3 Object Lock:
If you configure a default retention period on a bucket, requests to upload objects in such a
bucket must include the Content-MD5 header.
As mentioned in the Hashes section, small files that are not uploaded as multipart, use a different tag,
causing the upload to fail. A simple solution is to set the --s3-upload-cutoff 0 and force all the files
to be uploaded as multipart.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to s3 (Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS,
Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS,
IDrive e2, IONOS Cloud, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj,
Tencent COS, Qiniu and Wasabi).
–s3-provider
Choose your S3 provider.
Properties:
• Config: provider
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_PROVIDER
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “AWS”
• Amazon Web Services (AWS) S3
• “Alibaba”
• Alibaba Cloud Object Storage System (OSS) formerly Aliyun
• “Ceph”
• Ceph Object Storage
• “ChinaMobile”
• China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS)
• “Cloudflare”
• Cloudflare R2 Storage
• “ArvanCloud”
• Arvan Cloud Object Storage (AOS)
• “DigitalOcean”
• Digital Ocean Spaces
• “Dreamhost”
• Dreamhost DreamObjects
• “HuaweiOBS”
• Huawei Object Storage Service
• “IBMCOS”
• IBM COS S3
• “IDrive”
• IDrive e2
• “IONOS”
• IONOS Cloud
• “LyveCloud”
• Seagate Lyve Cloud
• “Minio”
• Minio Object Storage
• “Netease”
• Netease Object Storage (NOS)
• “RackCorp”
• RackCorp Object Storage
• “Scaleway”
• Scaleway Object Storage
• “SeaweedFS”
• SeaweedFS S3
• “StackPath”
• StackPath Object Storage
• “Storj”
• Storj (S3 Compatible Gateway)
• “TencentCOS”
• Tencent Cloud Object Storage (COS)
• “Wasabi”
• Wasabi Object Storage
• “Qiniu”
• Qiniu Object Storage (Kodo)
• “Other”
• Any other S3 compatible provider
–s3-env-auth
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Properties:
• Config: env_auth
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENV_AUTH
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “false”
• Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
• “true”
• Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
–s3-access-key-id
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Properties:
• Config: access_key_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ACCESS_KEY_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-secret-access-key
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Properties:
• Config: secret_access_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-region
Region to connect to.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: AWS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “us-east-1”
• The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
• US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest.
• Leave location constraint empty.
• “us-east-2”
• US East (Ohio) Region.
• Needs location constraint us-east-2.
• “us-west-1”
• US West (Northern California) Region.
• Needs location constraint us-west-1.
• “us-west-2”
• US West (Oregon) Region.
• Needs location constraint us-west-2.
• “ca-central-1”
• Canada (Central) Region.
• Needs location constraint ca-central-1.
• “eu-west-1”
• EU (Ireland) Region.
• Needs location constraint EU or eu-west-1.
• “eu-west-2”
• EU (London) Region.
• Needs location constraint eu-west-2.
• “eu-west-3”
• EU (Paris) Region.
• Needs location constraint eu-west-3.
• “eu-north-1”
• EU (Stockholm) Region.
• Needs location constraint eu-north-1.
• “eu-south-1”
• EU (Milan) Region.
• Needs location constraint eu-south-1.
• “eu-central-1”
• EU (Frankfurt) Region.
• Needs location constraint eu-central-1.
• “ap-southeast-1”
• Asia Pacific (Singapore) Region.
• Needs location constraint ap-southeast-1.
• “ap-southeast-2”
• Asia Pacific (Sydney) Region.
• Needs location constraint ap-southeast-2.
• “ap-northeast-1”
• Asia Pacific (Tokyo) Region.
• Needs location constraint ap-northeast-1.
• “ap-northeast-2”
• Asia Pacific (Seoul).
• Needs location constraint ap-northeast-2.
• “ap-northeast-3”
• Asia Pacific (Osaka-Local).
• Needs location constraint ap-northeast-3.
• “ap-south-1”
• Asia Pacific (Mumbai).
• Needs location constraint ap-south-1.
• “ap-east-1”
• Asia Pacific (Hong Kong) Region.
• Needs location constraint ap-east-1.
• “sa-east-1”
• South America (Sao Paulo) Region.
• Needs location constraint sa-east-1.
• “me-south-1”
• Middle East (Bahrain) Region.
• Needs location constraint me-south-1.
• “af-south-1”
• Africa (Cape Town) Region.
• Needs location constraint af-south-1.
• “cn-north-1”
• China (Beijing) Region.
• Needs location constraint cn-north-1.
• “cn-northwest-1”
• China (Ningxia) Region.
• Needs location constraint cn-northwest-1.
• “us-gov-east-1”
• AWS GovCloud (US-East) Region.
• Needs location constraint us-gov-east-1.
• “us-gov-west-1”
• AWS GovCloud (US) Region.
• Needs location constraint us-gov-west-1.
–s3-region
region - the location where your bucket will be created and your data stored.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: RackCorp
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “global”
• Global CDN (All locations) Region
• “au”
• Australia (All states)
• “au-nsw”
• NSW (Australia) Region
• “au-qld”
• QLD (Australia) Region
• “au-vic”
• VIC (Australia) Region
• “au-wa”
• Perth (Australia) Region
• “ph”
• Manila (Philippines) Region
• “th”
• Bangkok (Thailand) Region
• “hk”
• HK (Hong Kong) Region
• “mn”
• Ulaanbaatar (Mongolia) Region
• “kg”
• Bishkek (Kyrgyzstan) Region
• “id”
• Jakarta (Indonesia) Region
• “jp”
• Tokyo (Japan) Region
• “sg”
• SG (Singapore) Region
• “de”
• Frankfurt (Germany) Region
• “us”
• USA (AnyCast) Region
• “us-east-1”
• New York (USA) Region
• “us-west-1”
• Freemont (USA) Region
• “nz”
• Auckland (New Zealand) Region
–s3-region
Region to connect to.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: Scaleway
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “nl-ams”
• Amsterdam, The Netherlands
• “fr-par”
• Paris, France
• “pl-waw”
• Warsaw, Poland
–s3-region
Region to connect to. - the location where your bucket will be created and your data stored. Need bo be
same with your endpoint.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: HuaweiOBS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “af-south-1”
• AF-Johannesburg
• “ap-southeast-2”
• AP-Bangkok
• “ap-southeast-3”
• AP-Singapore
• “cn-east-3”
• CN East-Shanghai1
• “cn-east-2”
• CN East-Shanghai2
• “cn-north-1”
• CN North-Beijing1
• “cn-north-4”
• CN North-Beijing4
• “cn-south-1”
• CN South-Guangzhou
• “ap-southeast-1”
• CN-Hong Kong
• “sa-argentina-1”
• LA-Buenos Aires1
• “sa-peru-1”
• LA-Lima1
• “na-mexico-1”
• LA-Mexico City1
• “sa-chile-1”
• LA-Santiago2
• “sa-brazil-1”
• LA-Sao Paulo1
• “ru-northwest-2”
• RU-Moscow2
–s3-region
Region to connect to.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: Cloudflare
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “auto”
• R2 buckets are automatically distributed across Cloudflare’s data centers for low latency.
–s3-region
Region to connect to.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: Qiniu
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “cn-east-1”
• The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
• East China Region 1.
• Needs location constraint cn-east-1.
• “cn-east-2”
• East China Region 2.
• Needs location constraint cn-east-2.
• “cn-north-1”
• North China Region 1.
• Needs location constraint cn-north-1.
• “cn-south-1”
• South China Region 1.
• Needs location constraint cn-south-1.
• “us-north-1”
• North America Region.
• Needs location constraint us-north-1.
• “ap-southeast-1”
• Southeast Asia Region 1.
• Needs location constraint ap-southeast-1.
• “ap-northeast-1”
• Northeast Asia Region 1.
• Needs location constraint ap-northeast-1.
–s3-region
Region where your bucket will be created and your data stored.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider: IONOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “de”
• Frankfurt, Germany
• “eu-central-2”
• Berlin, Germany
• “eu-south-2”
• Logrono, Spain
–s3-region
Region to connect to.
Leave blank if you are using an S3 clone and you don’t have a region.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REGION
• Provider:
!AWS,Alibaba,ChinaMobile,Cloudflare,IONOS,ArvanCloud,Qiniu,RackCorp,Scaleway,Storj,TencentCOS,HuaweiOBS,IDrive
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Use this if unsure.
• Will use v4 signatures and an empty region.
• “other-v2-signature”
• Use this only if v4 signatures don’t work.
• E.g. pre Jewel/v10 CEPH.
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for S3 API.
Leave blank if using AWS to use the default endpoint for the region.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: AWS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS) API.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: ChinaMobile
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “eos-wuxi-1.cmecloud.cn”
• The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
• East China (Suzhou)
• “eos-jinan-1.cmecloud.cn”
• East China (Jinan)
• “eos-ningbo-1.cmecloud.cn”
• East China (Hangzhou)
• “eos-shanghai-1.cmecloud.cn”
• East China (Shanghai-1)
• “eos-zhengzhou-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Central China (Zhengzhou)
• “eos-hunan-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Central China (Changsha-1)
• “eos-zhuzhou-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Central China (Changsha-2)
• “eos-guangzhou-1.cmecloud.cn”
• South China (Guangzhou-2)
• “eos-dongguan-1.cmecloud.cn”
• South China (Guangzhou-3)
• “eos-beijing-1.cmecloud.cn”
• North China (Beijing-1)
• “eos-beijing-2.cmecloud.cn”
• North China (Beijing-2)
• “eos-beijing-4.cmecloud.cn”
• North China (Beijing-3)
• “eos-huhehaote-1.cmecloud.cn”
• North China (Huhehaote)
• “eos-chengdu-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Southwest China (Chengdu)
• “eos-chongqing-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Southwest China (Chongqing)
• “eos-guiyang-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Southwest China (Guiyang)
• “eos-xian-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Nouthwest China (Xian)
• “eos-yunnan.cmecloud.cn”
• Yunnan China (Kunming)
• “eos-yunnan-2.cmecloud.cn”
• Yunnan China (Kunming-2)
• “eos-tianjin-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Tianjin China (Tianjin)
• “eos-jilin-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Jilin China (Changchun)
• “eos-hubei-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Hubei China (Xiangyan)
• “eos-jiangxi-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Jiangxi China (Nanchang)
• “eos-gansu-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Gansu China (Lanzhou)
• “eos-shanxi-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Shanxi China (Taiyuan)
• “eos-liaoning-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Liaoning China (Shenyang)
• “eos-hebei-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Hebei China (Shijiazhuang)
• “eos-fujian-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Fujian China (Xiamen)
• “eos-guangxi-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Guangxi China (Nanning)
• “eos-anhui-1.cmecloud.cn”
• Anhui China (Huainan)
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for Arvan Cloud Object Storage (AOS) API.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: ArvanCloud
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3.ir-thr-at1.arvanstorage.com”
• The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
• Tehran Iran (Asiatech)
• “s3.ir-tbz-sh1.arvanstorage.com”
• Tabriz Iran (Shahriar)
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for IBM COS S3 API.
Specify if using an IBM COS On Premise.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: IBMCOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region Endpoint
• “s3.dal.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region Dallas Endpoint
• “s3.wdc.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region Washington DC Endpoint
• “s3.sjc.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region San Jose Endpoint
• “s3.private.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.dal.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region Dallas Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.wdc.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region Washington DC Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.sjc.us.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Cross Region San Jose Private Endpoint
• “s3.us-east.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Region East Endpoint
• “s3.private.us-east.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Region East Private Endpoint
• “s3.us-south.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Region South Endpoint
• “s3.private.us-south.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• US Region South Private Endpoint
• “s3.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Endpoint
• “s3.fra.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Frankfurt Endpoint
• “s3.mil.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Milan Endpoint
• “s3.ams.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Amsterdam Endpoint
• “s3.private.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.fra.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Frankfurt Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.mil.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Milan Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.ams.eu.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Cross Region Amsterdam Private Endpoint
• “s3.eu-gb.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Great Britain Endpoint
• “s3.private.eu-gb.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Great Britain Private Endpoint
• “s3.eu-de.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Region DE Endpoint
• “s3.private.eu-de.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• EU Region DE Private Endpoint
• “s3.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional Endpoint
• “s3.tok.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional Tokyo Endpoint
• “s3.hkg.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional HongKong Endpoint
• “s3.seo.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional Seoul Endpoint
• “s3.private.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.tok.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional Tokyo Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.hkg.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional HongKong Private Endpoint
• “s3.private.seo.ap.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Cross Regional Seoul Private Endpoint
• “s3.jp-tok.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Region Japan Endpoint
• “s3.private.jp-tok.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Region Japan Private Endpoint
• “s3.au-syd.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Region Australia Endpoint
• “s3.private.au-syd.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• APAC Region Australia Private Endpoint
• “s3.ams03.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Amsterdam Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.ams03.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Amsterdam Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.che01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Chennai Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.che01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Chennai Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.mel01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Melbourne Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.mel01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Melbourne Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.osl01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Oslo Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.osl01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Oslo Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.tor01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Toronto Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.tor01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Toronto Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.seo01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Seoul Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.seo01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Seoul Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.mon01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Montreal Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.mon01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Montreal Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.mex01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Mexico Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.mex01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Mexico Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.sjc04.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• San Jose Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.sjc04.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• San Jose Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.mil01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Milan Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.mil01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Milan Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.hkg02.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Hong Kong Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.hkg02.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Hong Kong Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.par01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Paris Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.par01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Paris Single Site Private Endpoint
• “s3.sng01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Singapore Single Site Endpoint
• “s3.private.sng01.cloud-object-storage.appdomain.cloud”
• Singapore Single Site Private Endpoint
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for IONOS S3 Object Storage.
Specify the endpoint from the same region.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: IONOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3-eu-central-1.ionoscloud.com”
• Frankfurt, Germany
• “s3-eu-central-2.ionoscloud.com”
• Berlin, Germany
• “s3-eu-south-2.ionoscloud.com”
• Logrono, Spain
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for OSS API.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: Alibaba
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “oss-accelerate.aliyuncs.com”
• Global Accelerate
• “oss-accelerate-overseas.aliyuncs.com”
• Global Accelerate (outside mainland China)
• “oss-cn-hangzhou.aliyuncs.com”
• East China 1 (Hangzhou)
• “oss-cn-shanghai.aliyuncs.com”
• East China 2 (Shanghai)
• “oss-cn-qingdao.aliyuncs.com”
• North China 1 (Qingdao)
• “oss-cn-beijing.aliyuncs.com”
• North China 2 (Beijing)
• “oss-cn-zhangjiakou.aliyuncs.com”
• North China 3 (Zhangjiakou)
• “oss-cn-huhehaote.aliyuncs.com”
• North China 5 (Hohhot)
• “oss-cn-wulanchabu.aliyuncs.com”
• North China 6 (Ulanqab)
• “oss-cn-shenzhen.aliyuncs.com”
• South China 1 (Shenzhen)
• “oss-cn-heyuan.aliyuncs.com”
• South China 2 (Heyuan)
• “oss-cn-guangzhou.aliyuncs.com”
• South China 3 (Guangzhou)
• “oss-cn-chengdu.aliyuncs.com”
• West China 1 (Chengdu)
• “oss-cn-hongkong.aliyuncs.com”
• Hong Kong (Hong Kong)
• “oss-us-west-1.aliyuncs.com”
• US West 1 (Silicon Valley)
• “oss-us-east-1.aliyuncs.com”
• US East 1 (Virginia)
• “oss-ap-southeast-1.aliyuncs.com”
• Southeast Asia Southeast 1 (Singapore)
• “oss-ap-southeast-2.aliyuncs.com”
• Asia Pacific Southeast 2 (Sydney)
• “oss-ap-southeast-3.aliyuncs.com”
• Southeast Asia Southeast 3 (Kuala Lumpur)
• “oss-ap-southeast-5.aliyuncs.com”
• Asia Pacific Southeast 5 (Jakarta)
• “oss-ap-northeast-1.aliyuncs.com”
• Asia Pacific Northeast 1 (Japan)
• “oss-ap-south-1.aliyuncs.com”
• Asia Pacific South 1 (Mumbai)
• “oss-eu-central-1.aliyuncs.com”
• Central Europe 1 (Frankfurt)
• “oss-eu-west-1.aliyuncs.com”
• West Europe (London)
• “oss-me-east-1.aliyuncs.com”
• Middle East 1 (Dubai)
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for OBS API.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: HuaweiOBS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “obs.af-south-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• AF-Johannesburg
• “obs.ap-southeast-2.myhuaweicloud.com”
• AP-Bangkok
• “obs.ap-southeast-3.myhuaweicloud.com”
• AP-Singapore
• “obs.cn-east-3.myhuaweicloud.com”
• CN East-Shanghai1
• “obs.cn-east-2.myhuaweicloud.com”
• CN East-Shanghai2
• “obs.cn-north-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• CN North-Beijing1
• “obs.cn-north-4.myhuaweicloud.com”
• CN North-Beijing4
• “obs.cn-south-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• CN South-Guangzhou
• “obs.ap-southeast-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• CN-Hong Kong
• “obs.sa-argentina-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• LA-Buenos Aires1
• “obs.sa-peru-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• LA-Lima1
• “obs.na-mexico-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• LA-Mexico City1
• “obs.sa-chile-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• LA-Santiago2
• “obs.sa-brazil-1.myhuaweicloud.com”
• LA-Sao Paulo1
• “obs.ru-northwest-2.myhuaweicloud.com”
• RU-Moscow2
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for Scaleway Object Storage.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: Scaleway
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3.nl-ams.scw.cloud”
• Amsterdam Endpoint
• “s3.fr-par.scw.cloud”
• Paris Endpoint
• “s3.pl-waw.scw.cloud”
• Warsaw Endpoint
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for StackPath Object Storage.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: StackPath
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3.us-east-2.stackpathstorage.com”
• US East Endpoint
• “s3.us-west-1.stackpathstorage.com”
• US West Endpoint
• “s3.eu-central-1.stackpathstorage.com”
• EU Endpoint
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint of the Shared Gateway.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: Storj
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “gateway.eu1.storjshare.io”
• EU1 Shared Gateway
• “gateway.us1.storjshare.io”
• US1 Shared Gateway
• “gateway.ap1.storjshare.io”
• Asia-Pacific Shared Gateway
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for Tencent COS API.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: TencentCOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “cos.ap-beijing.myqcloud.com”
• Beijing Region
• “cos.ap-nanjing.myqcloud.com”
• Nanjing Region
• “cos.ap-shanghai.myqcloud.com”
• Shanghai Region
• “cos.ap-guangzhou.myqcloud.com”
• Guangzhou Region
• “cos.ap-nanjing.myqcloud.com”
• Nanjing Region
• “cos.ap-chengdu.myqcloud.com”
• Chengdu Region
• “cos.ap-chongqing.myqcloud.com”
• Chongqing Region
• “cos.ap-hongkong.myqcloud.com”
• Hong Kong (China) Region
• “cos.ap-singapore.myqcloud.com”
• Singapore Region
• “cos.ap-mumbai.myqcloud.com”
• Mumbai Region
• “cos.ap-seoul.myqcloud.com”
• Seoul Region
• “cos.ap-bangkok.myqcloud.com”
• Bangkok Region
• “cos.ap-tokyo.myqcloud.com”
• Tokyo Region
• “cos.na-siliconvalley.myqcloud.com”
• Silicon Valley Region
• “cos.na-ashburn.myqcloud.com”
• Virginia Region
• “cos.na-toronto.myqcloud.com”
• Toronto Region
• “cos.eu-frankfurt.myqcloud.com”
• Frankfurt Region
• “cos.eu-moscow.myqcloud.com”
• Moscow Region
• “cos.accelerate.myqcloud.com”
• Use Tencent COS Accelerate Endpoint
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for RackCorp Object Storage.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: RackCorp
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3.rackcorp.com”
• Global (AnyCast) Endpoint
• “au.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Australia (Anycast) Endpoint
• “au-nsw.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Sydney (Australia) Endpoint
• “au-qld.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Brisbane (Australia) Endpoint
• “au-vic.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Melbourne (Australia) Endpoint
• “au-wa.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Perth (Australia) Endpoint
• “ph.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Manila (Philippines) Endpoint
• “th.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Bangkok (Thailand) Endpoint
• “hk.s3.rackcorp.com”
• HK (Hong Kong) Endpoint
• “mn.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Ulaanbaatar (Mongolia) Endpoint
• “kg.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Bishkek (Kyrgyzstan) Endpoint
• “id.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Jakarta (Indonesia) Endpoint
• “jp.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Tokyo (Japan) Endpoint
• “sg.s3.rackcorp.com”
• SG (Singapore) Endpoint
• “de.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Frankfurt (Germany) Endpoint
• “us.s3.rackcorp.com”
• USA (AnyCast) Endpoint
• “us-east-1.s3.rackcorp.com”
• New York (USA) Endpoint
• “us-west-1.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Freemont (USA) Endpoint
• “nz.s3.rackcorp.com”
• Auckland (New Zealand) Endpoint
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for Qiniu Object Storage.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider: Qiniu
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “s3-cn-east-1.qiniucs.com”
• East China Endpoint 1
• “s3-cn-east-2.qiniucs.com”
• East China Endpoint 2
• “s3-cn-north-1.qiniucs.com”
• North China Endpoint 1
• “s3-cn-south-1.qiniucs.com”
• South China Endpoint 1
• “s3-us-north-1.qiniucs.com”
• North America Endpoint 1
• “s3-ap-southeast-1.qiniucs.com”
• Southeast Asia Endpoint 1
• “s3-ap-northeast-1.qiniucs.com”
• Northeast Asia Endpoint 1
–s3-endpoint
Endpoint for S3 API.
Required when using an S3 clone.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENDPOINT
• Provider:
!AWS,IBMCOS,IDrive,IONOS,TencentCOS,HuaweiOBS,Alibaba,ChinaMobile,ArvanCloud,Scaleway,StackPath,Storj,RackCorp,Qiniu
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “objects-us-east-1.dream.io”
• Dream Objects endpoint
• “nyc3.digitaloceanspaces.com”
• Digital Ocean Spaces New York 3
• “ams3.digitaloceanspaces.com”
• Digital Ocean Spaces Amsterdam 3
• “sgp1.digitaloceanspaces.com”
• Digital Ocean Spaces Singapore 1
• “localhost:8333”
• SeaweedFS S3 localhost
• “s3.us-east-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com”
• Seagate Lyve Cloud US East 1 (Virginia)
• “s3.us-west-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com”
• Seagate Lyve Cloud US West 1 (California)
• “s3.ap-southeast-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com”
• Seagate Lyve Cloud AP Southeast 1 (Singapore)
• “s3.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi US East 1 (N. Virginia)
• “s3.us-east-2.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi US East 2 (N. Virginia)
• “s3.us-central-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi US Central 1 (Texas)
• “s3.us-west-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi US West 1 (Oregon)
• “s3.ca-central-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi CA Central 1 (Toronto)
• “s3.eu-central-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi EU Central 1 (Amsterdam)
• “s3.eu-central-2.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi EU Central 2 (Frankfurt)
• “s3.eu-west-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi EU West 1 (London)
• “s3.eu-west-2.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi EU West 2 (Paris)
• “s3.ap-northeast-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi AP Northeast 1 (Tokyo) endpoint
• “s3.ap-northeast-2.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi AP Northeast 2 (Osaka) endpoint
• “s3.ap-southeast-1.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi AP Southeast 1 (Singapore)
• “s3.ap-southeast-2.wasabisys.com”
• Wasabi AP Southeast 2 (Sydney)
• “s3.ir-thr-at1.arvanstorage.com”
• ArvanCloud Tehran Iran (Asiatech) endpoint
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region.
Used when creating buckets only.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider: AWS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Empty for US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest
• “us-east-2”
• US East (Ohio) Region
• “us-west-1”
• US West (Northern California) Region
• “us-west-2”
• US West (Oregon) Region
• “ca-central-1”
• Canada (Central) Region
• “eu-west-1”
• EU (Ireland) Region
• “eu-west-2”
• EU (London) Region
• “eu-west-3”
• EU (Paris) Region
• “eu-north-1”
• EU (Stockholm) Region
• “eu-south-1”
• EU (Milan) Region
• “EU”
• EU Region
• “ap-southeast-1”
• Asia Pacific (Singapore) Region
• “ap-southeast-2”
• Asia Pacific (Sydney) Region
• “ap-northeast-1”
• Asia Pacific (Tokyo) Region
• “ap-northeast-2”
• Asia Pacific (Seoul) Region
• “ap-northeast-3”
• Asia Pacific (Osaka-Local) Region
• “ap-south-1”
• Asia Pacific (Mumbai) Region
• “ap-east-1”
• Asia Pacific (Hong Kong) Region
• “sa-east-1”
• South America (Sao Paulo) Region
• “me-south-1”
• Middle East (Bahrain) Region
• “af-south-1”
• Africa (Cape Town) Region
• “cn-north-1”
• China (Beijing) Region
• “cn-northwest-1”
• China (Ningxia) Region
• “us-gov-east-1”
• AWS GovCloud (US-East) Region
• “us-gov-west-1”
• AWS GovCloud (US) Region
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - must match endpoint.
Used when creating buckets only.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider: ChinaMobile
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “wuxi1”
• East China (Suzhou)
• “jinan1”
• East China (Jinan)
• “ningbo1”
• East China (Hangzhou)
• “shanghai1”
• East China (Shanghai-1)
• “zhengzhou1”
• Central China (Zhengzhou)
• “hunan1”
• Central China (Changsha-1)
• “zhuzhou1”
• Central China (Changsha-2)
• “guangzhou1”
• South China (Guangzhou-2)
• “dongguan1”
• South China (Guangzhou-3)
• “beijing1”
• North China (Beijing-1)
• “beijing2”
• North China (Beijing-2)
• “beijing4”
• North China (Beijing-3)
• “huhehaote1”
• North China (Huhehaote)
• “chengdu1”
• Southwest China (Chengdu)
• “chongqing1”
• Southwest China (Chongqing)
• “guiyang1”
• Southwest China (Guiyang)
• “xian1”
• Nouthwest China (Xian)
• “yunnan”
• Yunnan China (Kunming)
• “yunnan2”
• Yunnan China (Kunming-2)
• “tianjin1”
• Tianjin China (Tianjin)
• “jilin1”
• Jilin China (Changchun)
• “hubei1”
• Hubei China (Xiangyan)
• “jiangxi1”
• Jiangxi China (Nanchang)
• “gansu1”
• Gansu China (Lanzhou)
• “shanxi1”
• Shanxi China (Taiyuan)
• “liaoning1”
• Liaoning China (Shenyang)
• “hebei1”
• Hebei China (Shijiazhuang)
• “fujian1”
• Fujian China (Xiamen)
• “guangxi1”
• Guangxi China (Nanning)
• “anhui1”
• Anhui China (Huainan)
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - must match endpoint.
Used when creating buckets only.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider: ArvanCloud
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “ir-thr-at1”
• Tehran Iran (Asiatech)
• “ir-tbz-sh1”
• Tabriz Iran (Shahriar)
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - must match endpoint when using IBM Cloud Public.
For on-prem COS, do not make a selection from this list, hit enter.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider: IBMCOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “us-standard”
• US Cross Region Standard
• “us-vault”
• US Cross Region Vault
• “us-cold”
• US Cross Region Cold
• “us-flex”
• US Cross Region Flex
• “us-east-standard”
• US East Region Standard
• “us-east-vault”
• US East Region Vault
• “us-east-cold”
• US East Region Cold
• “us-east-flex”
• US East Region Flex
• “us-south-standard”
• US South Region Standard
• “us-south-vault”
• US South Region Vault
• “us-south-cold”
• US South Region Cold
• “us-south-flex”
• US South Region Flex
• “eu-standard”
• EU Cross Region Standard
• “eu-vault”
• EU Cross Region Vault
• “eu-cold”
• EU Cross Region Cold
• “eu-flex”
• EU Cross Region Flex
• “eu-gb-standard”
• Great Britain Standard
• “eu-gb-vault”
• Great Britain Vault
• “eu-gb-cold”
• Great Britain Cold
• “eu-gb-flex”
• Great Britain Flex
• “ap-standard”
• APAC Standard
• “ap-vault”
• APAC Vault
• “ap-cold”
• APAC Cold
• “ap-flex”
• APAC Flex
• “mel01-standard”
• Melbourne Standard
• “mel01-vault”
• Melbourne Vault
• “mel01-cold”
• Melbourne Cold
• “mel01-flex”
• Melbourne Flex
• “tor01-standard”
• Toronto Standard
• “tor01-vault”
• Toronto Vault
• “tor01-cold”
• Toronto Cold
• “tor01-flex”
• Toronto Flex
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - the location where your bucket will be located and your data stored.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider: RackCorp
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “global”
• Global CDN Region
• “au”
• Australia (All locations)
• “au-nsw”
• NSW (Australia) Region
• “au-qld”
• QLD (Australia) Region
• “au-vic”
• VIC (Australia) Region
• “au-wa”
• Perth (Australia) Region
• “ph”
• Manila (Philippines) Region
• “th”
• Bangkok (Thailand) Region
• “hk”
• HK (Hong Kong) Region
• “mn”
• Ulaanbaatar (Mongolia) Region
• “kg”
• Bishkek (Kyrgyzstan) Region
• “id”
• Jakarta (Indonesia) Region
• “jp”
• Tokyo (Japan) Region
• “sg”
• SG (Singapore) Region
• “de”
• Frankfurt (Germany) Region
• “us”
• USA (AnyCast) Region
• “us-east-1”
• New York (USA) Region
• “us-west-1”
• Freemont (USA) Region
• “nz”
• Auckland (New Zealand) Region
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region.
Used when creating buckets only.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider: Qiniu
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “cn-east-1”
• East China Region 1
• “cn-east-2”
• East China Region 2
• “cn-north-1”
• North China Region 1
• “cn-south-1”
• South China Region 1
• “us-north-1”
• North America Region 1
• “ap-southeast-1”
• Southeast Asia Region 1
• “ap-northeast-1”
• Northeast Asia Region 1
–s3-location-constraint
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region.
Leave blank if not sure. Used when creating buckets only.
Properties:
• Config: location_constraint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LOCATION_CONSTRAINT
• Provider:
!AWS,Alibaba,HuaweiOBS,ChinaMobile,Cloudflare,IBMCOS,IDrive,IONOS,ArvanCloud,Qiniu,RackCorp,Scaleway,StackPath,Storj,TencentCOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-acl
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
This ACL is used for creating objects and if bucket_acl isn’t set, for creating buckets too.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3 doesn’t copy the ACL from the source
but rather writes a fresh one.
Properties:
• Config: acl
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ACL
• Provider: !Storj,Cloudflare
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “default”
• Owner gets Full_CONTROL.
• No one else has access rights (default).
• “private”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• No one else has access rights (default).
• “public-read”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AllUsers group gets READ access.
• “public-read-write”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
• Granting this on a bucket is generally not recommended.
• “authenticated-read”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access.
• “bucket-owner-read”
• Object owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• Bucket owner gets READ access.
• If you specify this canned ACL when creating a bucket, Amazon S3 ignores it.
• “bucket-owner-full-control”
• Both the object owner and the bucket owner get FULL_CONTROL over the object.
• If you specify this canned ACL when creating a bucket, Amazon S3 ignores it.
• “private”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• No one else has access rights (default).
• This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra), IBM Cloud (Storage), On-Premise COS.
• “public-read”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AllUsers group gets READ access.
• This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra), IBM Cloud (Storage), On-Premise IBM COS.
• “public-read-write”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
• This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra), On-Premise IBM COS.
• “authenticated-read”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access.
• Not supported on Buckets.
• This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra) and On-Premise IBM COS.
–s3-server-side-encryption
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3.
Properties:
• Config: server_side_encryption
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION
• Provider: AWS,Ceph,ChinaMobile,Minio
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• None
• “AES256”
• AES256
• “aws:kms”
• aws:kms
–s3-sse-kms-key-id
If using KMS ID you must provide the ARN of Key.
Properties:
• Config: sse_kms_key_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SSE_KMS_KEY_ID
• Provider: AWS,Ceph,Minio
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• None
• “arn:aws:kms:us-east-1:*”
• arn:aws:kms:*
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in S3.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: AWS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default
• “STANDARD”
• Standard storage class
• “REDUCED_REDUNDANCY”
• Reduced redundancy storage class
• “STANDARD_IA”
• Standard Infrequent Access storage class
• “ONEZONE_IA”
• One Zone Infrequent Access storage class
• “GLACIER”
• Glacier storage class
• “DEEP_ARCHIVE”
• Glacier Deep Archive storage class
• “INTELLIGENT_TIERING”
• Intelligent-Tiering storage class
• “GLACIER_IR”
• Glacier Instant Retrieval storage class
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in OSS.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: Alibaba
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default
• “STANDARD”
• Standard storage class
• “GLACIER”
• Archive storage mode
• “STANDARD_IA”
• Infrequent access storage mode
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in ChinaMobile.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: ChinaMobile
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default
• “STANDARD”
• Standard storage class
• “GLACIER”
• Archive storage mode
• “STANDARD_IA”
• Infrequent access storage mode
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in ArvanCloud.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: ArvanCloud
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “STANDARD”
• Standard storage class
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in Tencent COS.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: TencentCOS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default
• “STANDARD”
• Standard storage class
• “ARCHIVE”
• Archive storage mode
• “STANDARD_IA”
• Infrequent access storage mode
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in S3.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: Scaleway
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default.
• “STANDARD”
• The Standard class for any upload.
• Suitable for on-demand content like streaming or CDN.
• “GLACIER”
• Archived storage.
• Prices are lower, but it needs to be restored first to be accessed.
–s3-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing new objects in Qiniu.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_STORAGE_CLASS
• Provider: Qiniu
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “STANDARD”
• Standard storage class
• “LINE”
• Infrequent access storage mode
• “GLACIER”
• Archive storage mode
• “DEEP_ARCHIVE”
• Deep archive storage mode
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to s3 (Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS,
Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS,
IDrive e2, IONOS Cloud, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj,
Tencent COS, Qiniu and Wasabi).
–s3-bucket-acl
Canned ACL used when creating buckets.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when only when creating buckets. If it isn’t set then “acl” is used
instead.
Properties:
• Config: bucket_acl
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_BUCKET_ACL
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “private”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• No one else has access rights (default).
• “public-read”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AllUsers group gets READ access.
• “public-read-write”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
• Granting this on a bucket is generally not recommended.
• “authenticated-read”
• Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
• The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access.
–s3-requester-pays
Enables requester pays option when interacting with S3 bucket.
Properties:
• Config: requester_pays
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_REQUESTER_PAYS
• Provider: AWS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-sse-customer-algorithm
If using SSE-C, the server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3.
Properties:
• Config: sse_customer_algorithm
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SSE_CUSTOMER_ALGORITHM
• Provider: AWS,Ceph,ChinaMobile,Minio
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• None
• “AES256”
• AES256
–s3-sse-customer-key
To use SSE-C you may provide the secret encryption key used to encrypt/decrypt your data.
Alternatively you can provide –sse-customer-key-base64.
Properties:
• Config: sse_customer_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SSE_CUSTOMER_KEY
• Provider: AWS,Ceph,ChinaMobile,Minio
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• None
–s3-sse-customer-key-base64
If using SSE-C you must provide the secret encryption key encoded in base64 format to encrypt/decrypt
your data.
Alternatively you can provide –sse-customer-key.
Properties:
• Config: sse_customer_key_base64
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SSE_CUSTOMER_KEY_BASE64
• Provider: AWS,Ceph,ChinaMobile,Minio
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• None
–s3-sse-customer-key-md5
If using SSE-C you may provide the secret encryption key MD5 checksum (optional).
If you leave it blank, this is calculated automatically from the sse_customer_key provided.
Properties:
• Config: sse_customer_key_md5
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SSE_CUSTOMER_KEY_MD5
• Provider: AWS,Ceph,ChinaMobile,Minio
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• None
–s3-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to chunked upload.
Any files larger than this will be uploaded in chunks of chunk_size. The minimum is 0 and the maximum is
5 GiB.
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 200Mi
–s3-chunk-size
Chunk size to use for uploading.
When uploading files larger than upload_cutoff or files with unknown size (e.g. from “rclone rcat” or
uploaded with “rclone mount” or google photos or google docs) they will be uploaded as multipart uploads
using this chunk size.
Note that “–s3-upload-concurrency” chunks of this size are buffered in memory per transfer.
If you are transferring large files over high-speed links and you have enough memory, then increasing
this will speed up the transfers.
Rclone will automatically increase the chunk size when uploading a large file of known size to stay below
the 10,000 chunks limit.
Files of unknown size are uploaded with the configured chunk_size. Since the default chunk size is 5 MiB
and there can be at most 10,000 chunks, this means that by default the maximum size of a file you can
stream upload is 48 GiB. If you wish to stream upload larger files then you will need to increase
chunk_size.
Increasing the chunk size decreases the accuracy of the progress statistics displayed with “-P” flag.
Rclone treats chunk as sent when it’s buffered by the AWS SDK, when in fact it may still be uploading. A
bigger chunk size means a bigger AWS SDK buffer and progress reporting more deviating from the truth.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 5Mi
–s3-max-upload-parts
Maximum number of parts in a multipart upload.
This option defines the maximum number of multipart chunks to use when doing a multipart upload.
This can be useful if a service does not support the AWS S3 specification of 10,000 chunks.
Rclone will automatically increase the chunk size when uploading a large file of a known size to stay
below this number of chunks limit.
Properties:
• Config: max_upload_parts
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_MAX_UPLOAD_PARTS
• Type: int
• Default: 10000
–s3-copy-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to multipart copy.
Any files larger than this that need to be server-side copied will be copied in chunks of this size.
The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 5 GiB.
Properties:
• Config: copy_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_COPY_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 4.656Gi
–s3-disable-checksum
Don’t store MD5 checksum with object metadata.
Normally rclone will calculate the MD5 checksum of the input before uploading it so it can add it to
metadata on the object. This is great for data integrity checking but can cause long delays for large
files to start uploading.
Properties:
• Config: disable_checksum
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_DISABLE_CHECKSUM
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-shared-credentials-file
Path to the shared credentials file.
If env_auth = true then rclone can use a shared credentials file.
If this variable is empty rclone will look for the “AWS_SHARED_CREDENTIALS_FILE” env variable. If the
env value is empty it will default to the current user’s home directory.
Linux/OSX: "$HOME/.aws/credentials"
Windows: "%USERPROFILE%\.aws\credentials"
Properties:
• Config: shared_credentials_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SHARED_CREDENTIALS_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-profile
Profile to use in the shared credentials file.
If env_auth = true then rclone can use a shared credentials file. This variable controls which profile
is used in that file.
If empty it will default to the environment variable “AWS_PROFILE” or “default” if that environment
variable is also not set.
Properties:
• Config: profile
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_PROFILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-session-token
An AWS session token.
Properties:
• Config: session_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_SESSION_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-upload-concurrency
Concurrency for multipart uploads.
This is the number of chunks of the same file that are uploaded concurrently.
If you are uploading small numbers of large files over high-speed links and these uploads do not fully
utilize your bandwidth, then increasing this may help to speed up the transfers.
Properties:
• Config: upload_concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_UPLOAD_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 4
–s3-force-path-style
If true use path style access if false use virtual hosted style.
If this is true (the default) then rclone will use path style access, if false then rclone will use
virtual path style. See https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/UsingBucket.html#access-bucket-
intro the AWS S3 docs for more info.
Some providers (e.g. AWS, Aliyun OSS, Netease COS, or Tencent COS) require this set to false - rclone
will do this automatically based on the provider setting.
Properties:
• Config: force_path_style
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_FORCE_PATH_STYLE
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–s3-v2-auth
If true use v2 authentication.
If this is false (the default) then rclone will use v4 authentication. If it is set then rclone will use
v2 authentication.
Use this only if v4 signatures don’t work, e.g. pre Jewel/v10 CEPH.
Properties:
• Config: v2_auth
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_V2_AUTH
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-use-accelerate-endpoint
If true use the AWS S3 accelerated endpoint.
See: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/transfer-acceleration-examples.html AWS S3 Transfer
ac‐ celeration
Properties:
• Config: use_accelerate_endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_USE_ACCELERATE_ENDPOINT
• Provider: AWS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-leave-parts-on-error
If true avoid calling abort upload on a failure, leaving all successfully uploaded parts on S3 for manual
recovery.
It should be set to true for resuming uploads across different sessions.
WARNING: Storing parts of an incomplete multipart upload counts towards space usage on S3 and will add
additional costs if not cleaned up.
Properties:
• Config: leave_parts_on_error
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LEAVE_PARTS_ON_ERROR
• Provider: AWS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-list-chunk
Size of listing chunk (response list for each ListObject S3 request).
This option is also known as “MaxKeys”, “max-items”, or “page-size” from the AWS S3 specification. Most
services truncate the response list to 1000 objects even if requested more than that. In AWS S3 this is
a global maximum and cannot be changed, see AWS S3. In Ceph, this can be increased with the “rgw list
buckets max chunk” option.
Properties:
• Config: list_chunk
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LIST_CHUNK
• Type: int
• Default: 1000
–s3-list-version
Version of ListObjects to use: 1,2 or 0 for auto.
When S3 originally launched it only provided the ListObjects call to enumerate objects in a bucket.
However in May 2016 the ListObjectsV2 call was introduced. This is much higher performance and should be
used if at all possible.
If set to the default, 0, rclone will guess according to the provider set which list objects method to
call. If it guesses wrong, then it may be set manually here.
Properties:
• Config: list_version
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LIST_VERSION
• Type: int
• Default: 0
–s3-list-url-encode
Whether to url encode listings: true/false/unset
Some providers support URL encoding listings and where this is available this is more reliable when using
control characters in file names. If this is set to unset (the default) then rclone will choose
according to the provider setting what to apply, but you can override rclone’s choice here.
Properties:
• Config: list_url_encode
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_LIST_URL_ENCODE
• Type: Tristate
• Default: unset
–s3-no-check-bucket
If set, don’t attempt to check the bucket exists or create it.
This can be useful when trying to minimise the number of transactions rclone does if you know the bucket
exists already.
It can also be needed if the user you are using does not have bucket creation permissions. Before
v1.52.0 this would have passed silently due to a bug.
Properties:
• Config: no_check_bucket
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_NO_CHECK_BUCKET
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-no-head
If set, don’t HEAD uploaded objects to check integrity.
This can be useful when trying to minimise the number of transactions rclone does.
Setting it means that if rclone receives a 200 OK message after uploading an object with PUT then it will
assume that it got uploaded properly.
In particular it will assume:
• the metadata, including modtime, storage class and content type was as uploaded
• the size was as uploaded
It reads the following items from the response for a single part PUT:
• the MD5SUM
• The uploaded date
For multipart uploads these items aren’t read.
If an source object of unknown length is uploaded then rclone will do a HEAD request.
Setting this flag increases the chance for undetected upload failures, in particular an incorrect size,
so it isn’t recommended for normal operation. In practice the chance of an undetected upload failure is
very small even with this flag.
Properties:
• Config: no_head
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_NO_HEAD
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-no-head-object
If set, do not do HEAD before GET when getting objects.
Properties:
• Config: no_head_object
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_NO_HEAD_OBJECT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot
–s3-memory-pool-flush-time
How often internal memory buffer pools will be flushed.
Uploads which requires additional buffers (f.e multipart) will use memory pool for allocations. This
option controls how often unused buffers will be removed from the pool.
Properties:
• Config: memory_pool_flush_time
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_MEMORY_POOL_FLUSH_TIME
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–s3-memory-pool-use-mmap
Whether to use mmap buffers in internal memory pool.
Properties:
• Config: memory_pool_use_mmap
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_MEMORY_POOL_USE_MMAP
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-disable-http2
Disable usage of http2 for S3 backends.
There is currently an unsolved issue with the s3 (specifically minio) backend and HTTP/2. HTTP/2 is
enabled by default for the s3 backend but can be disabled here. When the issue is solved this flag will
be removed.
See: https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/4673, https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/3631
Properties:
• Config: disable_http2
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_DISABLE_HTTP2
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-download-url
Custom endpoint for downloads. This is usually set to a CloudFront CDN URL as AWS S3 offers cheaper
egress for data downloaded through the CloudFront network.
Properties:
• Config: download_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_DOWNLOAD_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–s3-use-multipart-etag
Whether to use ETag in multipart uploads for verification
This should be true, false or left unset to use the default for the provider.
Properties:
• Config: use_multipart_etag
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_USE_MULTIPART_ETAG
• Type: Tristate
• Default: unset
–s3-use-presigned-request
Whether to use a presigned request or PutObject for single part uploads
If this is false rclone will use PutObject from the AWS SDK to upload an object.
Versions of rclone < 1.59 use presigned requests to upload a single part object and setting this flag to
true will re-enable that functionality. This shouldn’t be necessary except in exceptional circumstances
or for testing.
Properties:
• Config: use_presigned_request
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_USE_PRESIGNED_REQUEST
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-versions
Include old versions in directory listings.
Properties:
• Config: versions
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_VERSIONS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-version-at
Show file versions as they were at the specified time.
The parameter should be a date, “2006-01-02”, datetime “2006-01-02 15:04:05” or a duration for that long
ago, eg “100d” or “1h”.
Note that when using this no file write operations are permitted, so you can’t upload files or delete
them.
See the time option docs for valid formats.
Properties:
• Config: version_at
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_VERSION_AT
• Type: Time
• Default: off
–s3-decompress
If set this will decompress gzip encoded objects.
It is possible to upload objects to S3 with “Content-Encoding: gzip” set. Normally rclone will download
these files as compressed objects.
If this flag is set then rclone will decompress these files with “Content-Encoding: gzip” as they are
received. This means that rclone can’t check the size and hash but the file contents will be
decompressed.
Properties:
• Config: decompress
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_DECOMPRESS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–s3-might-gzip
Set this if the backend might gzip objects.
Normally providers will not alter objects when they are downloaded. If an object was not uploaded with
Content-Encoding: gzip then it won’t be set on download.
However some providers may gzip objects even if they weren’t uploaded with Content-Encoding: gzip (eg
Cloudflare).
A symptom of this would be receiving errors like
ERROR corrupted on transfer: sizes differ NNN vs MMM
If you set this flag and rclone downloads an object with Content-Encoding: gzip set and chunked transfer
encoding, then rclone will decompress the object on the fly.
If this is set to unset (the default) then rclone will choose according to the provider setting what to
apply, but you can override rclone’s choice here.
Properties:
• Config: might_gzip
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_MIGHT_GZIP
• Type: Tristate
• Default: unset
–s3-no-system-metadata
Suppress setting and reading of system metadata
Properties:
• Config: no_system_metadata
• Env Var: RCLONE_S3_NO_SYSTEM_METADATA
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Metadata
User metadata is stored as x-amz-meta- keys. S3 metadata keys are case insensitive and are always
returned in lower case.
Here are the possible system metadata items for the s3 backend.
Name Help Type Example Read Only
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
btime Time of RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00 Y
file birth
(creation)
read from
Last-Modified
header
cache-control Cache-Control string no-cache N
header
content-disposition Content-Disposition string inline N
header
content-encoding Content-Encoding string gzip N
header
content-language Content-Language string en-US N
header
content-type Content-Type header string text/plain N
mtime Time of last RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00 N
modification, read
from rclone
metadata
tier Tier of the object string GLACIER Y
See the metadata docs for more info.
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the s3 backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
restore
Restore objects from GLACIER to normal storage
rclone backend restore remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command can be used to restore one or more objects from GLACIER to normal storage.
Usage Examples:
rclone backend restore s3:bucket/path/to/object [-o priority=PRIORITY] [-o lifetime=DAYS]
rclone backend restore s3:bucket/path/to/directory [-o priority=PRIORITY] [-o lifetime=DAYS]
rclone backend restore s3:bucket [-o priority=PRIORITY] [-o lifetime=DAYS]
This flag also obeys the filters. Test first with -i/–interactive or –dry-run flags
rclone -i backend restore --include "*.txt" s3:bucket/path -o priority=Standard
All the objects shown will be marked for restore, then
rclone backend restore --include "*.txt" s3:bucket/path -o priority=Standard
It returns a list of status dictionaries with Remote and Status keys. The Status will be OK if it was
successful or an error message if not.
[
{
"Status": "OK",
"Path": "test.txt"
},
{
"Status": "OK",
"Path": "test/file4.txt"
}
]
Options:
• “description”: The optional description for the job.
• “lifetime”: Lifetime of the active copy in days
• “priority”: Priority of restore: Standard|Expedited|Bulk
list-multipart-uploads
List the unfinished multipart uploads
rclone backend list-multipart-uploads remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command lists the unfinished multipart uploads in JSON format.
rclone backend list-multipart s3:bucket/path/to/object
It returns a dictionary of buckets with values as lists of unfinished multipart uploads.
You can call it with no bucket in which case it lists all bucket, with a bucket or with a bucket and
path.
{
"rclone": [
{
"Initiated": "2020-06-26T14:20:36Z",
"Initiator": {
"DisplayName": "XXX",
"ID": "arn:aws:iam::XXX:user/XXX"
},
"Key": "KEY",
"Owner": {
"DisplayName": null,
"ID": "XXX"
},
"StorageClass": "STANDARD",
"UploadId": "XXX"
}
],
"rclone-1000files": [],
"rclone-dst": []
}
cleanup
Remove unfinished multipart uploads.
rclone backend cleanup remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command removes unfinished multipart uploads of age greater than max-age which defaults to 24 hours.
Note that you can use -i/–dry-run with this command to see what it would do.
rclone backend cleanup s3:bucket/path/to/object
rclone backend cleanup -o max-age=7w s3:bucket/path/to/object
Durations are parsed as per the rest of rclone, 2h, 7d, 7w etc.
Options:
• “max-age”: Max age of upload to delete
cleanup-hidden
Remove old versions of files.
rclone backend cleanup-hidden remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command removes any old hidden versions of files on a versions enabled bucket.
Note that you can use -i/–dry-run with this command to see what it would do.
rclone backend cleanup-hidden s3:bucket/path/to/dir
versioning
Set/get versioning support for a bucket.
rclone backend versioning remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command sets versioning support if a parameter is passed and then returns the current versioning
status for the bucket supplied.
rclone backend versioning s3:bucket # read status only
rclone backend versioning s3:bucket Enabled
rclone backend versioning s3:bucket Suspended
It may return “Enabled”, “Suspended” or “Unversioned”. Note that once versioning has been enabled the
status can’t be set back to “Unversioned”.
Anonymous access to public buckets
If you want to use rclone to access a public bucket, configure with a blank access_key_id and
secret_access_key. Your config should end up looking like this:
[anons3]
type = s3
provider = AWS
env_auth = false
access_key_id =
secret_access_key =
region = us-east-1
endpoint =
location_constraint =
acl = private
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
Then use it as normal with the name of the public bucket, e.g.
rclone lsd anons3:1000genomes
You will be able to list and copy data but not upload it.
Providers
AWS S3
This is the provider used as main example and described in the configuration section above.
AWS Snowball Edge
AWS Snowball is a hardware appliance used for transferring bulk data back to AWS. Its main software
interface is S3 object storage.
To use rclone with AWS Snowball Edge devices, configure as standard for an `S3 Compatible Service'.
If using rclone pre v1.59 be sure to set upload_cutoff = 0 otherwise you will run into authentication
header issues as the snowball device does not support query parameter based authentication.
With rclone v1.59 or later setting upload_cutoff should not be necessary.
eg.
[snowball]
type = s3
provider = Other
access_key_id = YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
secret_access_key = YOUR_SECRET_KEY
endpoint = http://[IP of Snowball]:8080
upload_cutoff = 0
Ceph
Ceph is an open-source, unified, distributed storage system designed for excellent performance,
reliability and scalability. It has an S3 compatible object storage interface.
To use rclone with Ceph, configure as above but leave the region blank and set the endpoint. You should
end up with something like this in your config:
[ceph]
type = s3
provider = Ceph
env_auth = false
access_key_id = XXX
secret_access_key = YYY
region =
endpoint = https://ceph.endpoint.example.com
location_constraint =
acl =
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
If you are using an older version of CEPH (e.g. 10.2.x Jewel) and a version of rclone before v1.59 then
you may need to supply the parameter --s3-upload-cutoff 0 or put this in the config file as upload_cutoff
0 to work around a bug which causes uploading of small files to fail.
Note also that Ceph sometimes puts / in the passwords it gives users. If you read the secret access key
using the command line tools you will get a JSON blob with the / escaped as \/. Make sure you only write
/ in the secret access key.
Eg the dump from Ceph looks something like this (irrelevant keys removed).
{
"user_id": "xxx",
"display_name": "xxxx",
"keys": [
{
"user": "xxx",
"access_key": "xxxxxx",
"secret_key": "xxxxxx\/xxxx"
}
],
}
Because this is a json dump, it is encoding the / as \/, so if you use the secret key as xxxxxx/xxxx it
will work fine.
Cloudflare R2
Cloudflare R2 Storage allows developers to store large amounts of unstructured data without the costly
egress bandwidth fees associated with typical cloud storage services.
Here is an example of making a Cloudflare R2 configuration. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
Note that all buckets are private, and all are stored in the same “auto” region. It is necessary to use
Cloudflare workers to share the content of a bucket publicly.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> r2
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
...
XX / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj, Tencent COS and Wasabi
\ (s3)
...
Storage> s3
Option provider.
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
...
XX / Cloudflare R2 Storage
\ (Cloudflare)
...
provider> Cloudflare
Option env_auth.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth> 1
Option access_key_id.
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> ACCESS_KEY
Option secret_access_key.
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> SECRET_ACCESS_KEY
Option region.
Region to connect to.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / R2 buckets are automatically distributed across Cloudflare's data centers for low latency.
\ (auto)
region> 1
Option endpoint.
Endpoint for S3 API.
Required when using an S3 clone.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
endpoint> https://ACCOUNT_ID.r2.cloudflarestorage.com
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This will leave your config looking something like:
[r2]
type = s3
provider = Cloudflare
access_key_id = ACCESS_KEY
secret_access_key = SECRET_ACCESS_KEY
region = auto
endpoint = https://ACCOUNT_ID.r2.cloudflarestorage.com
acl = private
Now run rclone lsf r2: to see your buckets and rclone lsf r2:bucket to look within a bucket.
Dreamhost
Dreamhost DreamObjects is an object storage system based on CEPH.
To use rclone with Dreamhost, configure as above but leave the region blank and set the endpoint. You
should end up with something like this in your config:
[dreamobjects]
type = s3
provider = DreamHost
env_auth = false
access_key_id = your_access_key
secret_access_key = your_secret_key
region =
endpoint = objects-us-west-1.dream.io
location_constraint =
acl = private
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
DigitalOcean Spaces
Spaces is an S3-interoperable object storage service from cloud provider DigitalOcean.
To connect to DigitalOcean Spaces you will need an access key and secret key. These can be retrieved on
the “Applications & API” page of the DigitalOcean control panel. They will be needed when prompted by
rclone config for your access_key_id and secret_access_key.
When prompted for a region or location_constraint, press enter to use the default value. The region must
be included in the endpoint setting (e.g. nyc3.digitaloceanspaces.com). The default values can be used
for other settings.
Going through the whole process of creating a new remote by running rclone config, each prompt should be
answered as shown below:
Storage> s3
env_auth> 1
access_key_id> YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
secret_access_key> YOUR_SECRET_KEY
region>
endpoint> nyc3.digitaloceanspaces.com
location_constraint>
acl>
storage_class>
The resulting configuration file should look like:
[spaces]
type = s3
provider = DigitalOcean
env_auth = false
access_key_id = YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
secret_access_key = YOUR_SECRET_KEY
region =
endpoint = nyc3.digitaloceanspaces.com
location_constraint =
acl =
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
Once configured, you can create a new Space and begin copying files. For example:
rclone mkdir spaces:my-new-space
rclone copy /path/to/files spaces:my-new-space
Huawei OBS
Object Storage Service (OBS) provides stable, secure, efficient, and easy-to-use cloud storage that lets
you store virtually any volume of unstructured data in any format and access it from anywhere.
OBS provides an S3 interface, you can copy and modify the following configuration and add it to your
rclone configuration file.
[obs]
type = s3
provider = HuaweiOBS
access_key_id = your-access-key-id
secret_access_key = your-secret-access-key
region = af-south-1
endpoint = obs.af-south-1.myhuaweicloud.com
acl = private
Or you can also configure via the interactive command line:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> obs
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
5 / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj, Tencent COS and Wasabi
\ (s3)
[snip]
Storage> 5
Option provider.
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
[snip]
9 / Huawei Object Storage Service
\ (HuaweiOBS)
[snip]
provider> 9
Option env_auth.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth> 1
Option access_key_id.
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> your-access-key-id
Option secret_access_key.
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> your-secret-access-key
Option region.
Region to connect to.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / AF-Johannesburg
\ (af-south-1)
2 / AP-Bangkok
\ (ap-southeast-2)
[snip]
region> 1
Option endpoint.
Endpoint for OBS API.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / AF-Johannesburg
\ (obs.af-south-1.myhuaweicloud.com)
2 / AP-Bangkok
\ (obs.ap-southeast-2.myhuaweicloud.com)
[snip]
endpoint> 1
Option acl.
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
This ACL is used for creating objects and if bucket_acl isn't set, for creating buckets too.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
1 | No one else has access rights (default).
\ (private)
[snip]
acl> 1
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n>
--------------------
[obs]
type = s3
provider = HuaweiOBS
access_key_id = your-access-key-id
secret_access_key = your-secret-access-key
region = af-south-1
endpoint = obs.af-south-1.myhuaweicloud.com
acl = private
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
obs s3
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> q
IBM COS (S3)
Information stored with IBM Cloud Object Storage is encrypted and dispersed across multiple geographic
locations, and accessed through an implementation of the S3 API. This service makes use of the
distributed storage technologies provided by IBM’s Cloud Object Storage System (formerly Cleversafe).
For more information visit: (http://www.ibm.com/cloud/object-storage)
To configure access to IBM COS S3, follow the steps below:
1. Run rclone config and select n for a new remote.
2018/02/14 14:13:11 NOTICE: Config file "C:\\Users\\a\\.config\\rclone\\rclone.conf" not found - using defaults
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
2. Enter the name for the configuration
name> <YOUR NAME>
3. Select “s3” storage.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Alias for an existing remote
\ "alias"
2 / Amazon Drive
\ "amazon cloud drive"
3 / Amazon S3 Complaint Storage Providers (Dreamhost, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Minio, IBM COS)
\ "s3"
4 / Backblaze B2
\ "b2"
[snip]
23 / HTTP
\ "http"
Storage> 3
4. Select IBM COS as the S3 Storage Provider.
Choose the S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Choose this option to configure Storage to AWS S3
\ "AWS"
2 / Choose this option to configure Storage to Ceph Systems
\ "Ceph"
3 / Choose this option to configure Storage to Dreamhost
\ "Dreamhost"
4 / Choose this option to the configure Storage to IBM COS S3
\ "IBMCOS"
5 / Choose this option to the configure Storage to Minio
\ "Minio"
Provider>4
5. Enter the Access Key and Secret.
AWS Access Key ID - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
access_key_id> <>
AWS Secret Access Key (password) - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
secret_access_key> <>
6. Specify the endpoint for IBM COS. For Public IBM COS, choose from the option below. For On Premise
IBM COS, enter an endpoint address.
Endpoint for IBM COS S3 API.
Specify if using an IBM COS On Premise.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / US Cross Region Endpoint
\ "s3-api.us-geo.objectstorage.softlayer.net"
2 / US Cross Region Dallas Endpoint
\ "s3-api.dal.us-geo.objectstorage.softlayer.net"
3 / US Cross Region Washington DC Endpoint
\ "s3-api.wdc-us-geo.objectstorage.softlayer.net"
4 / US Cross Region San Jose Endpoint
\ "s3-api.sjc-us-geo.objectstorage.softlayer.net"
5 / US Cross Region Private Endpoint
\ "s3-api.us-geo.objectstorage.service.networklayer.com"
6 / US Cross Region Dallas Private Endpoint
\ "s3-api.dal-us-geo.objectstorage.service.networklayer.com"
7 / US Cross Region Washington DC Private Endpoint
\ "s3-api.wdc-us-geo.objectstorage.service.networklayer.com"
8 / US Cross Region San Jose Private Endpoint
\ "s3-api.sjc-us-geo.objectstorage.service.networklayer.com"
9 / US Region East Endpoint
\ "s3.us-east.objectstorage.softlayer.net"
10 / US Region East Private Endpoint
\ "s3.us-east.objectstorage.service.networklayer.com"
11 / US Region South Endpoint
[snip]
34 / Toronto Single Site Private Endpoint
\ "s3.tor01.objectstorage.service.networklayer.com"
endpoint>1
7. Specify a IBM COS Location Constraint. The location constraint must match endpoint when using IBM
Cloud Public. For on-prem COS, do not make a selection from this list, hit enter
1 / US Cross Region Standard
\ "us-standard"
2 / US Cross Region Vault
\ "us-vault"
3 / US Cross Region Cold
\ "us-cold"
4 / US Cross Region Flex
\ "us-flex"
5 / US East Region Standard
\ "us-east-standard"
6 / US East Region Vault
\ "us-east-vault"
7 / US East Region Cold
\ "us-east-cold"
8 / US East Region Flex
\ "us-east-flex"
9 / US South Region Standard
\ "us-south-standard"
10 / US South Region Vault
\ "us-south-vault"
[snip]
32 / Toronto Flex
\ "tor01-flex"
location_constraint>1
9. Specify a canned ACL. IBM Cloud (Storage) supports “public-read” and “private”. IBM Cloud(Infra)
supports all the canned ACLs. On-Premise COS supports all the canned ACLs.
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and/or storing objects in S3.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. No one else has access rights (default). This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra), IBM Cloud (Storage), On-Premise COS
\ "private"
2 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AllUsers group gets READ access. This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra), IBM Cloud (Storage), On-Premise IBM COS
\ "public-read"
3 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access. This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra), On-Premise IBM COS
\ "public-read-write"
4 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access. Not supported on Buckets. This acl is available on IBM Cloud (Infra) and On-Premise IBM COS
\ "authenticated-read"
acl> 1
12. Review the displayed configuration and accept to save the “remote” then quit. The config file should
look like this
[xxx]
type = s3
Provider = IBMCOS
access_key_id = xxx
secret_access_key = yyy
endpoint = s3-api.us-geo.objectstorage.softlayer.net
location_constraint = us-standard
acl = private
13. Execute rclone commands
1) Create a bucket.
rclone mkdir IBM-COS-XREGION:newbucket
2) List available buckets.
rclone lsd IBM-COS-XREGION:
-1 2017-11-08 21:16:22 -1 test
-1 2018-02-14 20:16:39 -1 newbucket
3) List contents of a bucket.
rclone ls IBM-COS-XREGION:newbucket
18685952 test.exe
4) Copy a file from local to remote.
rclone copy /Users/file.txt IBM-COS-XREGION:newbucket
5) Copy a file from remote to local.
rclone copy IBM-COS-XREGION:newbucket/file.txt .
6) Delete a file on remote.
rclone delete IBM-COS-XREGION:newbucket/file.txt
IDrive e2
Here is an example of making an IDrive e2 configuration. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
Enter name for new remote.
name> e2
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
XX / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, IDrive e2, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj, Tencent COS and Wasabi
\ (s3)
[snip]
Storage> s3
Option provider.
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
[snip]
XX / IDrive e2
\ (IDrive)
[snip]
provider> IDrive
Option env_auth.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth>
Option access_key_id.
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
Option secret_access_key.
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> YOUR_SECRET_KEY
Option acl.
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
This ACL is used for creating objects and if bucket_acl isn't set, for creating buckets too.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
1 | No one else has access rights (default).
\ (private)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
2 | The AllUsers group gets READ access.
\ (public-read)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
3 | The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
| Granting this on a bucket is generally not recommended.
\ (public-read-write)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
4 | The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access.
\ (authenticated-read)
/ Object owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
5 | Bucket owner gets READ access.
| If you specify this canned ACL when creating a bucket, Amazon S3 ignores it.
\ (bucket-owner-read)
/ Both the object owner and the bucket owner get FULL_CONTROL over the object.
6 | If you specify this canned ACL when creating a bucket, Amazon S3 ignores it.
\ (bucket-owner-full-control)
acl>
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n>
Configuration complete.
Options:
- type: s3
- provider: IDrive
- access_key_id: YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
- secret_access_key: YOUR_SECRET_KEY
- endpoint: q9d9.la12.idrivee2-5.com
Keep this "e2" remote?
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
IONOS Cloud
IONOS S3 Object Storage is a service offered by IONOS for storing and accessing unstructured data. To
connect to the service, you will need an access key and a secret key. These can be found in the Data
Center Designer, by selecting Manager resources > Object Storage Key Manager.
Here is an example of a configuration. First, run rclone config. This will walk you through an
interactive setup process. Type n to add the new remote, and then enter a name:
Enter name for new remote.
name> ionos-fra
Type s3 to choose the connection type:
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
XX / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, IDrive e2, IONOS Cloud, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj, Tencent COS and Wasabi
\ (s3)
[snip]
Storage> s3
Type IONOS:
Option provider.
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
[snip]
XX / IONOS Cloud
\ (IONOS)
[snip]
provider> IONOS
Press Enter to choose the default option Enter AWS credentials in the next step:
Option env_auth.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth>
Enter your Access Key and Secret key. These can be retrieved in the Data Center Designer, click on the
menu “Manager resources” / “Object Storage Key Manager”.
Option access_key_id.
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
Option secret_access_key.
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> YOUR_SECRET_KEY
Choose the region where your bucket is located:
Option region.
Region where your bucket will be created and your data stored.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Frankfurt, Germany
\ (de)
2 / Berlin, Germany
\ (eu-central-2)
3 / Logrono, Spain
\ (eu-south-2)
region> 2
Choose the endpoint from the same region:
Option endpoint.
Endpoint for IONOS S3 Object Storage.
Specify the endpoint from the same region.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Frankfurt, Germany
\ (s3-eu-central-1.ionoscloud.com)
2 / Berlin, Germany
\ (s3-eu-central-2.ionoscloud.com)
3 / Logrono, Spain
\ (s3-eu-south-2.ionoscloud.com)
endpoint> 1
Press Enter to choose the default option or choose the desired ACL setting:
Option acl.
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
This ACL is used for creating objects and if bucket_acl isn't set, for creating buckets too.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
1 | No one else has access rights (default).
\ (private)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
[snip]
acl>
Press Enter to skip the advanced config:
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n>
Press Enter to save the configuration, and then q to quit the configuration process:
Configuration complete.
Options:
- type: s3
- provider: IONOS
- access_key_id: YOUR_ACCESS_KEY
- secret_access_key: YOUR_SECRET_KEY
- endpoint: s3-eu-central-1.ionoscloud.com
Keep this "ionos-fra" remote?
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Done! Now you can try some commands (for macOS, use ./rclone instead of rclone).
1) Create a bucket (the name must be unique within the whole IONOS S3)
rclone mkdir ionos-fra:my-bucket
2) List available buckets
rclone lsd ionos-fra:
4) Copy a file from local to remote
rclone copy /Users/file.txt ionos-fra:my-bucket
3) List contents of a bucket
rclone ls ionos-fra:my-bucket
5) Copy a file from remote to local
rclone copy ionos-fra:my-bucket/file.txt
Minio
Minio is an object storage server built for cloud application developers and devops.
It is very easy to install and provides an S3 compatible server which can be used by rclone.
To use it, install Minio following the instructions here.
When it configures itself Minio will print something like this
Endpoint: http://192.168.1.106:9000 http://172.23.0.1:9000
AccessKey: USWUXHGYZQYFYFFIT3RE
SecretKey: MOJRH0mkL1IPauahWITSVvyDrQbEEIwljvmxdq03
Region: us-east-1
SQS ARNs: arn:minio:sqs:us-east-1:1:redis arn:minio:sqs:us-east-1:2:redis
Browser Access:
http://192.168.1.106:9000 http://172.23.0.1:9000
Command-line Access: https://docs.minio.io/docs/minio-client-quickstart-guide
$ mc config host add myminio http://192.168.1.106:9000 USWUXHGYZQYFYFFIT3RE MOJRH0mkL1IPauahWITSVvyDrQbEEIwljvmxdq03
Object API (Amazon S3 compatible):
Go: https://docs.minio.io/docs/golang-client-quickstart-guide
Java: https://docs.minio.io/docs/java-client-quickstart-guide
Python: https://docs.minio.io/docs/python-client-quickstart-guide
JavaScript: https://docs.minio.io/docs/javascript-client-quickstart-guide
.NET: https://docs.minio.io/docs/dotnet-client-quickstart-guide
Drive Capacity: 26 GiB Free, 165 GiB Total
These details need to go into rclone config like this. Note that it is important to put the region in as
stated above.
env_auth> 1
access_key_id> USWUXHGYZQYFYFFIT3RE
secret_access_key> MOJRH0mkL1IPauahWITSVvyDrQbEEIwljvmxdq03
region> us-east-1
endpoint> http://192.168.1.106:9000
location_constraint>
server_side_encryption>
Which makes the config file look like this
[minio]
type = s3
provider = Minio
env_auth = false
access_key_id = USWUXHGYZQYFYFFIT3RE
secret_access_key = MOJRH0mkL1IPauahWITSVvyDrQbEEIwljvmxdq03
region = us-east-1
endpoint = http://192.168.1.106:9000
location_constraint =
server_side_encryption =
So once set up, for example, to copy files into a bucket
rclone copy /path/to/files minio:bucket
Qiniu Cloud Object Storage (Kodo)
Qiniu Cloud Object Storage (Kodo), a completely independent-researched core technology which is proven by
repeated customer experience has occupied absolute leading market leader position. Kodo can be widely
applied to mass data management.
To configure access to Qiniu Kodo, follow the steps below:
1. Run rclone config and select n for a new remote.
rclone config
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
2. Give the name of the configuration. For example, name it `qiniu'.
name> qiniu
3. Select s3 storage.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / 1Fichier
\ (fichier)
2 / Akamai NetStorage
\ (netstorage)
3 / Alias for an existing remote
\ (alias)
4 / Amazon Drive
\ (amazon cloud drive)
5 / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, China Mobile, Cloudflare, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, IDrive e2, Lyve Cloud, Minio, Netease, RackCorp, Scaleway, SeaweedFS, StackPath, Storj, Tencent COS, Qiniu and Wasabi
\ (s3)
[snip]
Storage> s3
4. Select Qiniu provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Amazon Web Services (AWS) S3
\ "AWS"
[snip]
22 / Qiniu Object Storage (Kodo)
\ (Qiniu)
[snip]
provider> Qiniu
5. Enter your SecretId and SecretKey of Qiniu Kodo.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
access_key_id> AKIDxxxxxxxxxx
AWS Secret Access Key (password)
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
secret_access_key> xxxxxxxxxxx
6. Select endpoint for Qiniu Kodo. This is the standard endpoint for different region.
/ The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
1 | East China Region 1.
| Needs location constraint cn-east-1.
\ (cn-east-1)
/ East China Region 2.
2 | Needs location constraint cn-east-2.
\ (cn-east-2)
/ North China Region 1.
3 | Needs location constraint cn-north-1.
\ (cn-north-1)
/ South China Region 1.
4 | Needs location constraint cn-south-1.
\ (cn-south-1)
/ North America Region.
5 | Needs location constraint us-north-1.
\ (us-north-1)
/ Southeast Asia Region 1.
6 | Needs location constraint ap-southeast-1.
\ (ap-southeast-1)
/ Northeast Asia Region 1.
7 | Needs location constraint ap-northeast-1.
\ (ap-northeast-1)
[snip]
endpoint> 1
Option endpoint.
Endpoint for Qiniu Object Storage.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / East China Endpoint 1
\ (s3-cn-east-1.qiniucs.com)
2 / East China Endpoint 2
\ (s3-cn-east-2.qiniucs.com)
3 / North China Endpoint 1
\ (s3-cn-north-1.qiniucs.com)
4 / South China Endpoint 1
\ (s3-cn-south-1.qiniucs.com)
5 / North America Endpoint 1
\ (s3-us-north-1.qiniucs.com)
6 / Southeast Asia Endpoint 1
\ (s3-ap-southeast-1.qiniucs.com)
7 / Northeast Asia Endpoint 1
\ (s3-ap-northeast-1.qiniucs.com)
endpoint> 1
Option location_constraint.
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region.
Used when creating buckets only.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / East China Region 1
\ (cn-east-1)
2 / East China Region 2
\ (cn-east-2)
3 / North China Region 1
\ (cn-north-1)
4 / South China Region 1
\ (cn-south-1)
5 / North America Region 1
\ (us-north-1)
6 / Southeast Asia Region 1
\ (ap-southeast-1)
7 / Northeast Asia Region 1
\ (ap-northeast-1)
location_constraint> 1
7. Choose acl and storage class.
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
1 | No one else has access rights (default).
\ (private)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
2 | The AllUsers group gets READ access.
\ (public-read)
[snip]
acl> 2
The storage class to use when storing new objects in Tencent COS.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Standard storage class
\ (STANDARD)
2 / Infrequent access storage mode
\ (LINE)
3 / Archive storage mode
\ (GLACIER)
4 / Deep archive storage mode
\ (DEEP_ARCHIVE)
[snip]
storage_class> 1
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[qiniu]
- type: s3
- provider: Qiniu
- access_key_id: xxx
- secret_access_key: xxx
- region: cn-east-1
- endpoint: s3-cn-east-1.qiniucs.com
- location_constraint: cn-east-1
- acl: public-read
- storage_class: STANDARD
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
qiniu s3
RackCorp
RackCorp Object Storage is an S3 compatible object storage platform from your friendly cloud provider
RackCorp. The service is fast, reliable, well priced and located in many strategic locations unserviced
by others, to ensure you can maintain data sovereignty.
Before you can use RackCorp Object Storage, you’ll need to “sign up” for an account on our “portal”.
Next you can create an access key, a secret key and buckets, in your location of choice with ease. These
details are required for the next steps of configuration, when rclone config asks for your access_key_id
and secret_access_key.
Your config should end up looking a bit like this:
[RCS3-demo-config]
type = s3
provider = RackCorp
env_auth = true
access_key_id = YOURACCESSKEY
secret_access_key = YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
region = au-nsw
endpoint = s3.rackcorp.com
location_constraint = au-nsw
Scaleway
Scaleway The Object Storage platform allows you to store anything from backups, logs and web assets to
documents and photos. Files can be dropped from the Scaleway console or transferred through our API and
CLI or using any S3-compatible tool.
Scaleway provides an S3 interface which can be configured for use with rclone like this:
[scaleway]
type = s3
provider = Scaleway
env_auth = false
endpoint = s3.nl-ams.scw.cloud
access_key_id = SCWXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
secret_access_key = 1111111-2222-3333-44444-55555555555555
region = nl-ams
location_constraint =
acl = private
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
C14 Cold Storage is the low-cost S3 Glacier alternative from Scaleway and it works the same way as on S3
by accepting the “GLACIER” storage_class. So you can configure your remote with the storage_class =
GLACIER option to upload directly to C14. Don’t forget that in this state you can’t read files back
after, you will need to restore them to “STANDARD” storage_class first before being able to read them
(see “restore” section above)
Seagate Lyve Cloud
Seagate Lyve Cloud is an S3 compatible object storage platform from Seagate intended for enterprise use.
Here is a config run through for a remote called remote - you may choose a different name of course.
Note that to create an access key and secret key you will need to create a service account first.
$ rclone config
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Choose s3 backend
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
XX / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, Lyve Cloud, Minio, RackCorp, SeaweedFS, and Tencent COS
\ (s3)
[snip]
Storage> s3
Choose LyveCloud as S3 provider
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
[snip]
XX / Seagate Lyve Cloud
\ (LyveCloud)
[snip]
provider> LyveCloud
Take the default (just press enter) to enter access key and secret in the config file.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth>
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> XXX
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> YYY
Leave region blank
Region to connect to.
Leave blank if you are using an S3 clone and you don't have a region.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ Use this if unsure.
1 | Will use v4 signatures and an empty region.
\ ()
/ Use this only if v4 signatures don't work.
2 | E.g. pre Jewel/v10 CEPH.
\ (other-v2-signature)
region>
Choose an endpoint from the list
Endpoint for S3 API.
Required when using an S3 clone.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Seagate Lyve Cloud US East 1 (Virginia)
\ (s3.us-east-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com)
2 / Seagate Lyve Cloud US West 1 (California)
\ (s3.us-west-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com)
3 / Seagate Lyve Cloud AP Southeast 1 (Singapore)
\ (s3.ap-southeast-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com)
endpoint> 1
Leave location constraint blank
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region.
Leave blank if not sure. Used when creating buckets only.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
location_constraint>
Choose default ACL (private).
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
This ACL is used for creating objects and if bucket_acl isn't set, for creating buckets too.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
1 | No one else has access rights (default).
\ (private)
[snip]
acl>
And the config file should end up looking like this:
[remote]
type = s3
provider = LyveCloud
access_key_id = XXX
secret_access_key = YYY
endpoint = s3.us-east-1.lyvecloud.seagate.com
SeaweedFS
SeaweedFS is a distributed storage system for blobs, objects, files, and data lake, with O(1) disk seek
and a scalable file metadata store. It has an S3 compatible object storage interface. SeaweedFS can
also act as a https://github.com/chrislusf/seaweedfs/wiki/Gateway-to-Remote-Object-Storage gateway to
remote S3 compat‐ ible object store to cache data and metadata with asynchronous write back, for fast
local speed and minimize access cost.
Assuming the SeaweedFS are configured with weed shell as such:
> s3.bucket.create -name foo
> s3.configure -access_key=any -secret_key=any -buckets=foo -user=me -actions=Read,Write,List,Tagging,Admin -apply
{
"identities": [
{
"name": "me",
"credentials": [
{
"accessKey": "any",
"secretKey": "any"
}
],
"actions": [
"Read:foo",
"Write:foo",
"List:foo",
"Tagging:foo",
"Admin:foo"
]
}
]
}
To use rclone with SeaweedFS, above configuration should end up with something like this in your config:
[seaweedfs_s3]
type = s3
provider = SeaweedFS
access_key_id = any
secret_access_key = any
endpoint = localhost:8333
So once set up, for example to copy files into a bucket
rclone copy /path/to/files seaweedfs_s3:foo
Wasabi
Wasabi is a cloud-based object storage service for a broad range of applications and use cases. Wasabi
is designed for individuals and organizations that require a high-performance, reliable, and secure data
storage infrastructure at minimal cost.
Wasabi provides an S3 interface which can be configured for use with rclone like this.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
n/s> n
name> wasabi
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Amazon S3 (also Dreamhost, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Minio)
\ "s3"
[snip]
Storage> s3
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars). Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
AWS Access Key ID - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
access_key_id> YOURACCESSKEY
AWS Secret Access Key (password) - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
secret_access_key> YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
Region to connect to.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
/ The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
1 | US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest.
| Leave location constraint empty.
\ "us-east-1"
[snip]
region> us-east-1
Endpoint for S3 API.
Leave blank if using AWS to use the default endpoint for the region.
Specify if using an S3 clone such as Ceph.
endpoint> s3.wasabisys.com
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region. Used when creating buckets only.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Empty for US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest.
\ ""
[snip]
location_constraint>
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and/or storing objects in S3.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. No one else has access rights (default).
\ "private"
[snip]
acl>
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / None
\ ""
2 / AES256
\ "AES256"
server_side_encryption>
The storage class to use when storing objects in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Default
\ ""
2 / Standard storage class
\ "STANDARD"
3 / Reduced redundancy storage class
\ "REDUCED_REDUNDANCY"
4 / Standard Infrequent Access storage class
\ "STANDARD_IA"
storage_class>
Remote config
--------------------
[wasabi]
env_auth = false
access_key_id = YOURACCESSKEY
secret_access_key = YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
region = us-east-1
endpoint = s3.wasabisys.com
location_constraint =
acl =
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This will leave the config file looking like this.
[wasabi]
type = s3
provider = Wasabi
env_auth = false
access_key_id = YOURACCESSKEY
secret_access_key = YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
region =
endpoint = s3.wasabisys.com
location_constraint =
acl =
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
Alibaba OSS
Here is an example of making an Alibaba Cloud (Aliyun) OSS configuration. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> oss
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
4 / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, Minio, and Tencent COS
\ "s3"
[snip]
Storage> s3
Choose your S3 provider.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Amazon Web Services (AWS) S3
\ "AWS"
2 / Alibaba Cloud Object Storage System (OSS) formerly Aliyun
\ "Alibaba"
3 / Ceph Object Storage
\ "Ceph"
[snip]
provider> Alibaba
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
access_key_id> accesskeyid
AWS Secret Access Key (password)
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
secret_access_key> secretaccesskey
Endpoint for OSS API.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / East China 1 (Hangzhou)
\ "oss-cn-hangzhou.aliyuncs.com"
2 / East China 2 (Shanghai)
\ "oss-cn-shanghai.aliyuncs.com"
3 / North China 1 (Qingdao)
\ "oss-cn-qingdao.aliyuncs.com"
[snip]
endpoint> 1
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. No one else has access rights (default).
\ "private"
2 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AllUsers group gets READ access.
\ "public-read"
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
[snip]
acl> 1
The storage class to use when storing new objects in OSS.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Default
\ ""
2 / Standard storage class
\ "STANDARD"
3 / Archive storage mode.
\ "GLACIER"
4 / Infrequent access storage mode.
\ "STANDARD_IA"
storage_class> 1
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[oss]
type = s3
provider = Alibaba
env_auth = false
access_key_id = accesskeyid
secret_access_key = secretaccesskey
endpoint = oss-cn-hangzhou.aliyuncs.com
acl = private
storage_class = Standard
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS)
Here is an example of making an China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS) configuration. First
run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> ChinaMobile
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
...
5 / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, ChinaMobile, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, Lyve Cloud, Minio, RackCorp, SeaweedFS, and Tencent COS
\ (s3)
...
Storage> s3
Option provider.
Choose your S3 provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
...
4 / China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS)
\ (ChinaMobile)
...
provider> ChinaMobile
Option env_auth.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth>
Option access_key_id.
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> accesskeyid
Option secret_access_key.
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> secretaccesskey
Option endpoint.
Endpoint for China Mobile Ecloud Elastic Object Storage (EOS) API.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
1 | East China (Suzhou)
\ (eos-wuxi-1.cmecloud.cn)
2 / East China (Jinan)
\ (eos-jinan-1.cmecloud.cn)
3 / East China (Hangzhou)
\ (eos-ningbo-1.cmecloud.cn)
4 / East China (Shanghai-1)
\ (eos-shanghai-1.cmecloud.cn)
5 / Central China (Zhengzhou)
\ (eos-zhengzhou-1.cmecloud.cn)
6 / Central China (Changsha-1)
\ (eos-hunan-1.cmecloud.cn)
7 / Central China (Changsha-2)
\ (eos-zhuzhou-1.cmecloud.cn)
8 / South China (Guangzhou-2)
\ (eos-guangzhou-1.cmecloud.cn)
9 / South China (Guangzhou-3)
\ (eos-dongguan-1.cmecloud.cn)
10 / North China (Beijing-1)
\ (eos-beijing-1.cmecloud.cn)
11 / North China (Beijing-2)
\ (eos-beijing-2.cmecloud.cn)
12 / North China (Beijing-3)
\ (eos-beijing-4.cmecloud.cn)
13 / North China (Huhehaote)
\ (eos-huhehaote-1.cmecloud.cn)
14 / Southwest China (Chengdu)
\ (eos-chengdu-1.cmecloud.cn)
15 / Southwest China (Chongqing)
\ (eos-chongqing-1.cmecloud.cn)
16 / Southwest China (Guiyang)
\ (eos-guiyang-1.cmecloud.cn)
17 / Nouthwest China (Xian)
\ (eos-xian-1.cmecloud.cn)
18 / Yunnan China (Kunming)
\ (eos-yunnan.cmecloud.cn)
19 / Yunnan China (Kunming-2)
\ (eos-yunnan-2.cmecloud.cn)
20 / Tianjin China (Tianjin)
\ (eos-tianjin-1.cmecloud.cn)
21 / Jilin China (Changchun)
\ (eos-jilin-1.cmecloud.cn)
22 / Hubei China (Xiangyan)
\ (eos-hubei-1.cmecloud.cn)
23 / Jiangxi China (Nanchang)
\ (eos-jiangxi-1.cmecloud.cn)
24 / Gansu China (Lanzhou)
\ (eos-gansu-1.cmecloud.cn)
25 / Shanxi China (Taiyuan)
\ (eos-shanxi-1.cmecloud.cn)
26 / Liaoning China (Shenyang)
\ (eos-liaoning-1.cmecloud.cn)
27 / Hebei China (Shijiazhuang)
\ (eos-hebei-1.cmecloud.cn)
28 / Fujian China (Xiamen)
\ (eos-fujian-1.cmecloud.cn)
29 / Guangxi China (Nanning)
\ (eos-guangxi-1.cmecloud.cn)
30 / Anhui China (Huainan)
\ (eos-anhui-1.cmecloud.cn)
endpoint> 1
Option location_constraint.
Location constraint - must match endpoint.
Used when creating buckets only.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / East China (Suzhou)
\ (wuxi1)
2 / East China (Jinan)
\ (jinan1)
3 / East China (Hangzhou)
\ (ningbo1)
4 / East China (Shanghai-1)
\ (shanghai1)
5 / Central China (Zhengzhou)
\ (zhengzhou1)
6 / Central China (Changsha-1)
\ (hunan1)
7 / Central China (Changsha-2)
\ (zhuzhou1)
8 / South China (Guangzhou-2)
\ (guangzhou1)
9 / South China (Guangzhou-3)
\ (dongguan1)
10 / North China (Beijing-1)
\ (beijing1)
11 / North China (Beijing-2)
\ (beijing2)
12 / North China (Beijing-3)
\ (beijing4)
13 / North China (Huhehaote)
\ (huhehaote1)
14 / Southwest China (Chengdu)
\ (chengdu1)
15 / Southwest China (Chongqing)
\ (chongqing1)
16 / Southwest China (Guiyang)
\ (guiyang1)
17 / Nouthwest China (Xian)
\ (xian1)
18 / Yunnan China (Kunming)
\ (yunnan)
19 / Yunnan China (Kunming-2)
\ (yunnan2)
20 / Tianjin China (Tianjin)
\ (tianjin1)
21 / Jilin China (Changchun)
\ (jilin1)
22 / Hubei China (Xiangyan)
\ (hubei1)
23 / Jiangxi China (Nanchang)
\ (jiangxi1)
24 / Gansu China (Lanzhou)
\ (gansu1)
25 / Shanxi China (Taiyuan)
\ (shanxi1)
26 / Liaoning China (Shenyang)
\ (liaoning1)
27 / Hebei China (Shijiazhuang)
\ (hebei1)
28 / Fujian China (Xiamen)
\ (fujian1)
29 / Guangxi China (Nanning)
\ (guangxi1)
30 / Anhui China (Huainan)
\ (anhui1)
location_constraint> 1
Option acl.
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and storing or copying objects.
This ACL is used for creating objects and if bucket_acl isn't set, for creating buckets too.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
1 | No one else has access rights (default).
\ (private)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
2 | The AllUsers group gets READ access.
\ (public-read)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
3 | The AllUsers group gets READ and WRITE access.
| Granting this on a bucket is generally not recommended.
\ (public-read-write)
/ Owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
4 | The AuthenticatedUsers group gets READ access.
\ (authenticated-read)
/ Object owner gets FULL_CONTROL.
acl> private
Option server_side_encryption.
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / None
\ ()
2 / AES256
\ (AES256)
server_side_encryption>
Option storage_class.
The storage class to use when storing new objects in ChinaMobile.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Default
\ ()
2 / Standard storage class
\ (STANDARD)
3 / Archive storage mode
\ (GLACIER)
4 / Infrequent access storage mode
\ (STANDARD_IA)
storage_class>
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
--------------------
[ChinaMobile]
type = s3
provider = ChinaMobile
access_key_id = accesskeyid
secret_access_key = secretaccesskey
endpoint = eos-wuxi-1.cmecloud.cn
location_constraint = wuxi1
acl = private
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
ArvanCloud
ArvanCloud ArvanCloud Object Storage goes beyond the limited traditional file storage. It gives you
access to backup and archived files and allows sharing. Files like profile image in the app, images sent
by users or scanned documents can be stored securely and easily in our Object Storage service.
ArvanCloud provides an S3 interface which can be configured for use with rclone like this.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
n/s> n
name> ArvanCloud
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Amazon S3 (also Dreamhost, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Minio)
\ "s3"
[snip]
Storage> s3
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars). Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
AWS Access Key ID - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
access_key_id> YOURACCESSKEY
AWS Secret Access Key (password) - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
secret_access_key> YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
Region to connect to.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
/ The default endpoint - a good choice if you are unsure.
1 | US Region, Northern Virginia, or Pacific Northwest.
| Leave location constraint empty.
\ "us-east-1"
[snip]
region>
Endpoint for S3 API.
Leave blank if using ArvanCloud to use the default endpoint for the region.
Specify if using an S3 clone such as Ceph.
endpoint> s3.arvanstorage.com
Location constraint - must be set to match the Region. Used when creating buckets only.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Empty for Iran-Tehran Region.
\ ""
[snip]
location_constraint>
Canned ACL used when creating buckets and/or storing objects in S3.
For more info visit https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/acl-overview.html#canned-acl
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Owner gets FULL_CONTROL. No one else has access rights (default).
\ "private"
[snip]
acl>
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / None
\ ""
2 / AES256
\ "AES256"
server_side_encryption>
The storage class to use when storing objects in S3.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Default
\ ""
2 / Standard storage class
\ "STANDARD"
storage_class>
Remote config
--------------------
[ArvanCloud]
env_auth = false
access_key_id = YOURACCESSKEY
secret_access_key = YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
region = ir-thr-at1
endpoint = s3.arvanstorage.com
location_constraint =
acl =
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This will leave the config file looking like this.
[ArvanCloud]
type = s3
provider = ArvanCloud
env_auth = false
access_key_id = YOURACCESSKEY
secret_access_key = YOURSECRETACCESSKEY
region =
endpoint = s3.arvanstorage.com
location_constraint =
acl =
server_side_encryption =
storage_class =
Tencent COS
Tencent Cloud Object Storage (COS) is a distributed storage service offered by Tencent Cloud for
unstructured data. It is secure, stable, massive, convenient, low-delay and low-cost.
To configure access to Tencent COS, follow the steps below:
1. Run rclone config and select n for a new remote.
rclone config
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
2. Give the name of the configuration. For example, name it `cos'.
name> cos
3. Select s3 storage.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / 1Fichier
\ "fichier"
2 / Alias for an existing remote
\ "alias"
3 / Amazon Drive
\ "amazon cloud drive"
4 / Amazon S3 Compliant Storage Providers including AWS, Alibaba, Ceph, ChinaMobile, ArvanCloud, Digital Ocean, Dreamhost, Huawei OBS, IBM COS, Minio, and Tencent COS
\ "s3"
[snip]
Storage> s3
4. Select TencentCOS provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Amazon Web Services (AWS) S3
\ "AWS"
[snip]
11 / Tencent Cloud Object Storage (COS)
\ "TencentCOS"
[snip]
provider> TencentCOS
5. Enter your SecretId and SecretKey of Tencent Cloud.
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
access_key_id> AKIDxxxxxxxxxx
AWS Secret Access Key (password)
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
secret_access_key> xxxxxxxxxxx
6. Select endpoint for Tencent COS. This is the standard endpoint for different region.
1 / Beijing Region.
\ "cos.ap-beijing.myqcloud.com"
2 / Nanjing Region.
\ "cos.ap-nanjing.myqcloud.com"
3 / Shanghai Region.
\ "cos.ap-shanghai.myqcloud.com"
4 / Guangzhou Region.
\ "cos.ap-guangzhou.myqcloud.com"
[snip]
endpoint> 4
7. Choose acl and storage class.
Note that this ACL is applied when server-side copying objects as S3
doesn't copy the ACL from the source but rather writes a fresh one.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Owner gets Full_CONTROL. No one else has access rights (default).
\ "default"
[snip]
acl> 1
The storage class to use when storing new objects in Tencent COS.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Default
\ ""
[snip]
storage_class> 1
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[cos]
type = s3
provider = TencentCOS
env_auth = false
access_key_id = xxx
secret_access_key = xxx
endpoint = cos.ap-guangzhou.myqcloud.com
acl = default
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
cos s3
Netease NOS
For Netease NOS configure as per the configurator rclone config setting the provider Netease. This will
automatically set force_path_style = false which is necessary for it to run properly.
Storj
Storj is a decentralized cloud storage which can be used through its native protocol or an S3 compatible
gateway.
The S3 compatible gateway is configured using rclone config with a type of s3 and with a provider name of
Storj. Here is an example run of the configurator.
Type of storage to configure.
Storage> s3
Get AWS credentials from runtime (environment variables or EC2/ECS meta data if no env vars).
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own boolean value (true or false).
Press Enter for the default (false).
1 / Enter AWS credentials in the next step.
\ (false)
2 / Get AWS credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
\ (true)
env_auth> 1
Option access_key_id.
AWS Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> XXXX (as shown when creating the access grant)
Option secret_access_key.
AWS Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> XXXX (as shown when creating the access grant)
Option endpoint.
Endpoint of the Shared Gateway.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / EU1 Shared Gateway
\ (gateway.eu1.storjshare.io)
2 / US1 Shared Gateway
\ (gateway.us1.storjshare.io)
3 / Asia-Pacific Shared Gateway
\ (gateway.ap1.storjshare.io)
endpoint> 1 (as shown when creating the access grant)
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Note that s3 credentials are generated when you create an access grant.
Backend quirks
• --chunk-size is forced to be 64 MiB or greater. This will use more memory than the default of 5 MiB.
• Server side copy is disabled as it isn’t currently supported in the gateway.
• GetTier and SetTier are not supported.
Backend bugs
Due to issue #39 uploading multipart files via the S3 gateway causes them to lose their metadata. For
rclone’s purpose this means that the modification time is not stored, nor is any MD5SUM (if one is
available from the source).
This has the following consequences:
• Using rclone rcat will fail as the medatada doesn’t match after upload
• Uploading files with rclone mount will fail for the same reason
• This can worked around by using --vfs-cache-mode writes or --vfs-cache-mode full or setting
--s3-upload-cutoff large
• Files uploaded via a multipart upload won’t have their modtimes
• This will mean that rclone sync will likely keep trying to upload files bigger than
--s3-upload-cutoff
• This can be worked around with --checksum or --size-only or setting --s3-upload-cutoff large
• The maximum value for --s3-upload-cutoff is 5GiB though
One general purpose workaround is to set --s3-upload-cutoff 5G. This means that rclone will upload files
smaller than 5GiB as single parts. Note that this can be set in the config file with upload_cutoff = 5G
or configured in the advanced settings. If you regularly transfer files larger than 5G then using
--checksum or --size-only in rclone sync is the recommended workaround.
Comparison with the native protocol
Use the the native protocol to take advantage of client-side encryption as well as to achieve the best
possible download performance. Uploads will be erasure-coded locally, thus a 1gb upload will result in
2.68gb of data being uploaded to storage nodes across the network.
Use this backend and the S3 compatible Hosted Gateway to increase upload performance and reduce the load
on your systems and network. Uploads will be encrypted and erasure-coded server-side, thus a 1GB upload
will result in only in 1GB of data being uploaded to storage nodes across the network.
For more detailed comparison please check the documentation of the storj backend.
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the S3 backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine free
space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Backblaze B2
B2 is Backblaze’s cloud storage system.
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:bucket/path/to/dir.
Configuration
Here is an example of making a b2 configuration. First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process. To authenticate you will either need your
Account ID (a short hex number) and Master Application Key (a long hex number) OR an Application Key,
which is the recommended method. See below for further details on generating and using an Application
Key.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
q) Quit config
n/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Backblaze B2
\ "b2"
[snip]
Storage> b2
Account ID or Application Key ID
account> 123456789abc
Application Key
key> 0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789
Endpoint for the service - leave blank normally.
endpoint>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
account = 123456789abc
key = 0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789
endpoint =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all buckets
rclone lsd remote:
Create a new bucket
rclone mkdir remote:bucket
List the contents of a bucket
rclone ls remote:bucket
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote bucket, deleting any excess files in the bucket.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:bucket
Application Keys
B2 supports multiple Application Keys for different access permission to B2 Buckets.
You can use these with rclone too; you will need to use rclone version 1.43 or later.
Follow Backblaze’s docs to create an Application Key with the required permission and add the
applicationKeyId as the account and the Application Key itself as the key.
Note that you must put the applicationKeyId as the account – you can’t use the master Account ID. If you
try then B2 will return 401 errors.
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
Modified time
The modified time is stored as metadata on the object as X-Bz-Info-src_last_modified_millis as
milliseconds since 1970-01-01 in the Backblaze standard. Other tools should be able to use this as a
modified time.
Modified times are used in syncing and are fully supported. Note that if a modification time needs to be
updated on an object then it will create a new version of the object.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Note that in 2020-05 Backblaze started allowing characters in file names. Rclone hasn’t changed its
encoding as this could cause syncs to re-transfer files. If you want rclone not to replace then see the
--b2-encoding flag below and remove the BackSlash from the string. This can be set in the config.
SHA1 checksums
The SHA1 checksums of the files are checked on upload and download and will be used in the syncing
process.
Large files (bigger than the limit in --b2-upload-cutoff) which are uploaded in chunks will store their
SHA1 on the object as X-Bz-Info-large_file_sha1 as recommended by Backblaze.
For a large file to be uploaded with an SHA1 checksum, the source needs to support SHA1 checksums. The
local disk supports SHA1 checksums so large file transfers from local disk will have an SHA1. See the
overview for exactly which remotes support SHA1.
Sources which don’t support SHA1, in particular crypt will upload large files without SHA1 checksums.
This may be fixed in the future (see #1767).
Files sizes below --b2-upload-cutoff will always have an SHA1 regardless of the source.
Transfers
Backblaze recommends that you do lots of transfers simultaneously for maximum speed. In tests from my
SSD equipped laptop the optimum setting is about --transfers 32 though higher numbers may be used for a
slight speed improvement. The optimum number for you may vary depending on your hardware, how big the
files are, how much you want to load your computer, etc. The default of --transfers 4 is definitely too
low for Backblaze B2 though.
Note that uploading big files (bigger than 200 MiB by default) will use a 96 MiB RAM buffer by default.
There can be at most --transfers of these in use at any moment, so this sets the upper limit on the
memory used.
Versions
When rclone uploads a new version of a file it creates a new version of it. Likewise when you delete a
file, the old version will be marked hidden and still be available. Conversely, you may opt in to a
“hard delete” of files with the --b2-hard-delete flag which would permanently remove the file instead of
hiding it.
Old versions of files, where available, are visible using the --b2-versions flag.
It is also possible to view a bucket as it was at a certain point in time, using the --b2-version-at
flag. This will show the file versions as they were at that time, showing files that have been deleted
afterwards, and hiding files that were created since.
If you wish to remove all the old versions then you can use the rclone cleanup remote:bucket command
which will delete all the old versions of files, leaving the current ones intact. You can also supply a
path and only old versions under that path will be deleted, e.g. rclone cleanup
remote:bucket/path/to/stuff.
Note that cleanup will remove partially uploaded files from the bucket if they are more than a day old.
When you purge a bucket, the current and the old versions will be deleted then the bucket will be
deleted.
However delete will cause the current versions of the files to become hidden old versions.
Here is a session showing the listing and retrieval of an old version followed by a cleanup of the old
versions.
Show current version and all the versions with --b2-versions flag.
$ rclone -q ls b2:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
$ rclone -q --b2-versions ls b2:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
8 one-v2016-07-04-141032-000.txt
16 one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
15 one-v2016-07-02-155621-000.txt
Retrieve an old version
$ rclone -q --b2-versions copy b2:cleanup-test/one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt /tmp
$ ls -l /tmp/one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
-rw-rw-r-- 1 ncw ncw 16 Jul 2 17:46 /tmp/one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
Clean up all the old versions and show that they’ve gone.
$ rclone -q cleanup b2:cleanup-test
$ rclone -q ls b2:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
$ rclone -q --b2-versions ls b2:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
Data usage
It is useful to know how many requests are sent to the server in different scenarios.
All copy commands send the following 4 requests:
/b2api/v1/b2_authorize_account
/b2api/v1/b2_create_bucket
/b2api/v1/b2_list_buckets
/b2api/v1/b2_list_file_names
The b2_list_file_names request will be sent once for every 1k files in the remote path, providing the
checksum and modification time of the listed files. As of version 1.33 issue #818 causes extra requests
to be sent when using B2 with Crypt. When a copy operation does not require any files to be uploaded, no
more requests will be sent.
Uploading files that do not require chunking, will send 2 requests per file upload:
/b2api/v1/b2_get_upload_url
/b2api/v1/b2_upload_file/
Uploading files requiring chunking, will send 2 requests (one each to start and finish the upload) and
another 2 requests for each chunk:
/b2api/v1/b2_start_large_file
/b2api/v1/b2_get_upload_part_url
/b2api/v1/b2_upload_part/
/b2api/v1/b2_finish_large_file
Versions
Versions can be viewed with the --b2-versions flag. When it is set rclone will show and act on older
versions of files. For example
Listing without --b2-versions
$ rclone -q ls b2:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
And with
$ rclone -q --b2-versions ls b2:cleanup-test
9 one.txt
8 one-v2016-07-04-141032-000.txt
16 one-v2016-07-04-141003-000.txt
15 one-v2016-07-02-155621-000.txt
Showing that the current version is unchanged but older versions can be seen. These have the UTC date
that they were uploaded to the server to the nearest millisecond appended to them.
Note that when using --b2-versions no file write operations are permitted, so you can’t upload files or
delete them.
B2 and rclone link
Rclone supports generating file share links for private B2 buckets. They can either be for a file for
example:
./rclone link B2:bucket/path/to/file.txt
https://f002.backblazeb2.com/file/bucket/path/to/file.txt?Authorization=xxxxxxxx
or if run on a directory you will get:
./rclone link B2:bucket/path
https://f002.backblazeb2.com/file/bucket/path?Authorization=xxxxxxxx
you can then use the authorization token (the part of the url from the ?Authorization= on) on any file
path under that directory. For example:
https://f002.backblazeb2.com/file/bucket/path/to/file1?Authorization=xxxxxxxx
https://f002.backblazeb2.com/file/bucket/path/file2?Authorization=xxxxxxxx
https://f002.backblazeb2.com/file/bucket/path/folder/file3?Authorization=xxxxxxxx
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to b2 (Backblaze B2).
–b2-account
Account ID or Application Key ID.
Properties:
• Config: account
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_ACCOUNT
• Type: string
• Required: true
–b2-key
Application Key.
Properties:
• Config: key
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: true
–b2-hard-delete
Permanently delete files on remote removal, otherwise hide files.
Properties:
• Config: hard_delete
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_HARD_DELETE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to b2 (Backblaze B2).
–b2-endpoint
Endpoint for the service.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–b2-test-mode
A flag string for X-Bz-Test-Mode header for debugging.
This is for debugging purposes only. Setting it to one of the strings below will cause b2 to return
specific errors:
• “fail_some_uploads”
• “expire_some_account_authorization_tokens”
• “force_cap_exceeded”
These will be set in the “X-Bz-Test-Mode” header which is documented in the b2 integrations checklist.
Properties:
• Config: test_mode
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_TEST_MODE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–b2-versions
Include old versions in directory listings.
Note that when using this no file write operations are permitted, so you can’t upload files or delete
them.
Properties:
• Config: versions
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_VERSIONS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–b2-version-at
Show file versions as they were at the specified time.
Note that when using this no file write operations are permitted, so you can’t upload files or delete
them.
Properties:
• Config: version_at
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_VERSION_AT
• Type: Time
• Default: off
–b2-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to chunked upload.
Files above this size will be uploaded in chunks of “–b2-chunk-size”.
This value should be set no larger than 4.657 GiB (== 5 GB).
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 200Mi
–b2-copy-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to multipart copy.
Any files larger than this that need to be server-side copied will be copied in chunks of this size.
The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 4.6 GiB.
Properties:
• Config: copy_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_COPY_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 4Gi
–b2-chunk-size
Upload chunk size.
When uploading large files, chunk the file into this size.
Must fit in memory. These chunks are buffered in memory and there might a maximum of “–transfers” chunks
in progress at once.
5,000,000 Bytes is the minimum size.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 96Mi
–b2-disable-checksum
Disable checksums for large (> upload cutoff) files.
Normally rclone will calculate the SHA1 checksum of the input before uploading it so it can add it to
metadata on the object. This is great for data integrity checking but can cause long delays for large
files to start uploading.
Properties:
• Config: disable_checksum
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_DISABLE_CHECKSUM
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–b2-download-url
Custom endpoint for downloads.
This is usually set to a Cloudflare CDN URL as Backblaze offers free egress for data downloaded through
the Cloudflare network. Rclone works with private buckets by sending an “Authorization” header. If the
custom endpoint rewrites the requests for authentication, e.g., in Cloudflare Workers, this header needs
to be handled properly. Leave blank if you want to use the endpoint provided by Backblaze.
The URL provided here SHOULD have the protocol and SHOULD NOT have a trailing slash or specify the
/file/bucket subpath as rclone will request files with “{download_url}/file/{bucket_name}/{path}”.
Example: > https://mysubdomain.mydomain.tld (No trailing “/”, “file” or “bucket”)
Properties:
• Config: download_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_DOWNLOAD_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–b2-download-auth-duration
Time before the authorization token will expire in s or suffix ms|s|m|h|d.
The duration before the download authorization token will expire. The minimum value is 1 second. The
maximum value is one week.
Properties:
• Config: download_auth_duration
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_DOWNLOAD_AUTH_DURATION
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1w
–b2-memory-pool-flush-time
How often internal memory buffer pools will be flushed. Uploads which requires additional buffers (f.e
multipart) will use memory pool for allocations. This option controls how often unused buffers will be
removed from the pool.
Properties:
• Config: memory_pool_flush_time
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_MEMORY_POOL_FLUSH_TIME
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–b2-memory-pool-use-mmap
Whether to use mmap buffers in internal memory pool.
Properties:
• Config: memory_pool_use_mmap
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_MEMORY_POOL_USE_MMAP
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–b2-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_B2_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the B2 backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine free
space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Box
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
The initial setup for Box involves getting a token from Box which you can do either in your browser, or
with a config.json downloaded from Box to use JWT authentication. rclone config walks you through it.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Box
\ "box"
[snip]
Storage> box
Box App Client Id - leave blank normally.
client_id>
Box App Client Secret - leave blank normally.
client_secret>
Box App config.json location
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
box_config_file>
Box App Primary Access Token
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
access_token>
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("user").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Rclone should act on behalf of a user
\ "user"
2 / Rclone should act on behalf of a service account
\ "enterprise"
box_sub_type>
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
client_id =
client_secret =
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"bearer","refresh_token":"XXX","expiry":"XXX"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Box. This
only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the verification code. This
is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it temporarily if you are running a
host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Box
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your Box
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an Box directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Using rclone with an Enterprise account with SSO
If you have an “Enterprise” account type with Box with single sign on (SSO), you need to create a
password to use Box with rclone. This can be done at your Enterprise Box account by going to Settings,
“Account” Tab, and then set the password in the “Authentication” field.
Once you have done this, you can setup your Enterprise Box account using the same procedure detailed
above in the, using the password you have just set.
Invalid refresh token
According to the https://developer.box.com/v2.0/docs/oauth-20#section-6-using-the-access-and-refresh-
tokens box docs:
Each refresh_token is valid for one use in 60 days.
This means that if you
• Don’t use the box remote for 60 days
• Copy the config file with a box refresh token in and use it in two places
• Get an error on a token refresh
then rclone will return an error which includes the text Invalid refresh token.
To fix this you will need to use oauth2 again to update the refresh token. You can use the methods in
the remote setup docs, bearing in mind that if you use the copy the config file method, you should not
use that remote on the computer you did the authentication on.
Here is how to do it.
$ rclone config
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
remote box
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> e
Choose a number from below, or type in an existing value
1 > remote
remote> remote
--------------------
[remote]
type = box
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"bearer","refresh_token":"XXX","expiry":"2017-07-08T23:40:08.059167677+01:00"}
--------------------
Edit remote
Value "client_id" = ""
Edit? (y/n)>
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Value "client_secret" = ""
Edit? (y/n)>
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
Already have a token - refresh?
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
type = box
token = {"access_token":"YYY","token_type":"bearer","refresh_token":"YYY","expiry":"2017-07-23T12:22:29.259137901+01:00"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Modified time and hashes
Box allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second. These will be used to detect
whether objects need syncing or not.
Box supports SHA1 type hashes, so you can use the --checksum flag.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
File names can also not end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are the last
character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Transfers
For files above 50 MiB rclone will use a chunked transfer. Rclone will upload up to --transfers chunks
at the same time (shared among all the multipart uploads). Chunks are buffered in memory and are
normally 8 MiB so increasing --transfers will increase memory use.
Deleting files
Depending on the enterprise settings for your user, the item will either be actually deleted from Box or
moved to the trash.
Emptying the trash is supported via the rclone however cleanup command however this deletes every trashed
file and folder individually so it may take a very long time. Emptying the trash via the WebUI does not
have this limitation so it is advised to empty the trash via the WebUI.
Root folder ID
You can set the root_folder_id for rclone. This is the directory (identified by its Folder ID) that
rclone considers to be the root of your Box drive.
Normally you will leave this blank and rclone will determine the correct root to use itself.
However you can set this to restrict rclone to a specific folder hierarchy.
In order to do this you will have to find the Folder ID of the directory you wish rclone to display.
This will be the last segment of the URL when you open the relevant folder in the Box web interface.
So if the folder you want rclone to use has a URL which looks like
https://app.box.com/folder/11xxxxxxxxx8 in the browser, then you use 11xxxxxxxxx8 as the root_folder_id
in the config.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to box (Box).
–box-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-box-config-file
Box App config.json location
Leave blank normally.
Leading ~ will be expanded in the file name as will environment variables such as ${RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR}.
Properties:
• Config: box_config_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_BOX_CONFIG_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-access-token
Box App Primary Access Token
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: access_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_ACCESS_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-box-sub-type
Properties:
• Config: box_sub_type
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_BOX_SUB_TYPE
• Type: string
• Default: “user”
• Examples:
• “user”
• Rclone should act on behalf of a user.
• “enterprise”
• Rclone should act on behalf of a service account.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to box (Box).
–box-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-root-folder-id
Fill in for rclone to use a non root folder as its starting point.
Properties:
• Config: root_folder_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_ROOT_FOLDER_ID
• Type: string
• Default: “0”
–box-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to multipart upload (>= 50 MiB).
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 50Mi
–box-commit-retries
Max number of times to try committing a multipart file.
Properties:
• Config: commit_retries
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_COMMIT_RETRIES
• Type: int
• Default: 100
–box-list-chunk
Size of listing chunk 1-1000.
Properties:
• Config: list_chunk
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_LIST_CHUNK
• Type: int
• Default: 1000
–box-owned-by
Only show items owned by the login (email address) passed in.
Properties:
• Config: owned_by
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_OWNED_BY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–box-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_BOX_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,RightSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that Box is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called “hello.doc”.
Box file names can’t have the \ character in. rclone maps this to and from an identical looking unicode
equivalent ＼ (U+FF3C Fullwidth Reverse Solidus).
Box only supports filenames up to 255 characters in length.
rclone about is not supported by the Box backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine free
space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Cache (DEPRECATED)
The cache remote wraps another existing remote and stores file structure and its data for long running
tasks like rclone mount.
Status
The cache backend code is working but it currently doesn’t have a maintainer so there are
https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3Abug+label%3A%22Remote%3A+Cache%22
outstanding bugs which aren’t getting fixed.
The cache backend is due to be phased out in favour of the VFS caching layer eventually which is more
tightly integrated into rclone.
Until this happens we recommend only using the cache backend if you find you can’t work without it.
There are many docs online describing the use of the cache backend to minimize API hits and by-and-large
these are out of date and the cache backend isn’t needed in those scenarios any more.
Configuration
To get started you just need to have an existing remote which can be configured with cache.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called test-cache. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/r/c/s/q> n
name> test-cache
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Cache a remote
\ "cache"
[snip]
Storage> cache
Remote to cache.
Normally should contain a ':' and a path, e.g. "myremote:path/to/dir",
"myremote:bucket" or maybe "myremote:" (not recommended).
remote> local:/test
Optional: The URL of the Plex server
plex_url> http://127.0.0.1:32400
Optional: The username of the Plex user
plex_username> dummyusername
Optional: The password of the Plex user
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank
y/g/n> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
The size of a chunk. Lower value good for slow connections but can affect seamless reading.
Default: 5M
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / 1 MiB
\ "1M"
2 / 5 MiB
\ "5M"
3 / 10 MiB
\ "10M"
chunk_size> 2
How much time should object info (file size, file hashes, etc.) be stored in cache. Use a very high value if you don't plan on changing the source FS from outside the cache.
Accepted units are: "s", "m", "h".
Default: 5m
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / 1 hour
\ "1h"
2 / 24 hours
\ "24h"
3 / 24 hours
\ "48h"
info_age> 2
The maximum size of stored chunks. When the storage grows beyond this size, the oldest chunks will be deleted.
Default: 10G
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / 500 MiB
\ "500M"
2 / 1 GiB
\ "1G"
3 / 10 GiB
\ "10G"
chunk_total_size> 3
Remote config
--------------------
[test-cache]
remote = local:/test
plex_url = http://127.0.0.1:32400
plex_username = dummyusername
plex_password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
chunk_size = 5M
info_age = 48h
chunk_total_size = 10G
You can then use it like this,
List directories in top level of your drive
rclone lsd test-cache:
List all the files in your drive
rclone ls test-cache:
To start a cached mount
rclone mount --allow-other test-cache: /var/tmp/test-cache
Write Features
Offline uploading
In an effort to make writing through cache more reliable, the backend now supports this feature which can
be activated by specifying a cache-tmp-upload-path.
A files goes through these states when using this feature:
1. An upload is started (usually by copying a file on the cache remote)
2. When the copy to the temporary location is complete the file is part of the cached remote and looks
and behaves like any other file (reading included)
3. After cache-tmp-wait-time passes and the file is next in line, rclone move is used to move the file to
the cloud provider
4. Reading the file still works during the upload but most modifications on it will be prohibited
5. Once the move is complete the file is unlocked for modifications as it becomes as any other regular
file
6. If the file is being read through cache when it’s actually deleted from the temporary path then cache
will simply swap the source to the cloud provider without interrupting the reading (small blip can
happen though)
Files are uploaded in sequence and only one file is uploaded at a time. Uploads will be stored in a
queue and be processed based on the order they were added. The queue and the temporary storage is
persistent across restarts but can be cleared on startup with the --cache-db-purge flag.
Write Support
Writes are supported through cache. One caveat is that a mounted cache remote does not add any retry or
fallback mechanism to the upload operation. This will depend on the implementation of the wrapped
remote. Consider using Offline uploading for reliable writes.
One special case is covered with cache-writes which will cache the file data at the same time as the
upload when it is enabled making it available from the cache store immediately once the upload is
finished.
Read Features
Multiple connections
To counter the high latency between a local PC where rclone is running and cloud providers, the cache
remote can split multiple requests to the cloud provider for smaller file chunks and combines them
together locally where they can be available almost immediately before the reader usually needs them.
This is similar to buffering when media files are played online. Rclone will stay around the current
marker but always try its best to stay ahead and prepare the data before.
Plex Integration
There is a direct integration with Plex which allows cache to detect during reading if the file is in
playback or not. This helps cache to adapt how it queries the cloud provider depending on what is needed
for.
Scans will have a minimum amount of workers (1) while in a confirmed playback cache will deploy the
configured number of workers.
This integration opens the doorway to additional performance improvements which will be explored in the
near future.
Note: If Plex options are not configured, cache will function with its configured options without
adapting any of its settings.
How to enable? Run rclone config and add all the Plex options (endpoint, username and password) in your
remote and it will be automatically enabled.
Affected settings: - cache-workers: Configured value during confirmed playback or 1 all the other times
Certificate Validation
When the Plex server is configured to only accept secure connections, it is possible to use .plex.direct
URLs to ensure certificate validation succeeds. These URLs are used by Plex internally to connect to the
Plex server securely.
The format for these URLs is the following:
https://ip-with-dots-replaced.server-hash.plex.direct:32400/
The ip-with-dots-replaced part can be any IPv4 address, where the dots have been replaced with dashes,
e.g. 127.0.0.1 becomes 127-0-0-1.
To get the server-hash part, the easiest way is to visit
https://plex.tv/api/resources?includeHttps=1&X-Plex-Token=your-plex-token
This page will list all the available Plex servers for your account with at least one .plex.direct link
for each. Copy one URL and replace the IP address with the desired address. This can be used as the
plex_url value.
Known issues
Mount and –dir-cache-time
–dir-cache-time controls the first layer of directory caching which works at the mount layer. Being an
independent caching mechanism from the cache backend, it will manage its own entries based on the
configured time.
To avoid getting in a scenario where dir cache has obsolete data and cache would have the correct one,
try to set --dir-cache-time to a lower time than --cache-info-age. Default values are already configured
in this way.
Windows support - Experimental
There are a couple of issues with Windows mount functionality that still require some investigations. It
should be considered as experimental thus far as fixes come in for this OS.
Most of the issues seem to be related to the difference between filesystems on Linux flavors and Windows
as cache is heavily dependent on them.
Any reports or feedback on how cache behaves on this OS is greatly appreciated.
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/1935
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/1907
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/1834
Risk of throttling
Future iterations of the cache backend will make use of the pooling functionality of the cloud provider
to synchronize and at the same time make writing through it more tolerant to failures.
There are a couple of enhancements in track to add these but in the meantime there is a valid concern
that the expiring cache listings can lead to cloud provider throttles or bans due to repeated queries on
it for very large mounts.
Some recommendations: - don’t use a very small interval for entry information (--cache-info-age) - while
writes aren’t yet optimised, you can still write through cache which gives you the advantage of adding
the file in the cache at the same time if configured to do so.
Future enhancements:
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/1937
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/1936
cache and crypt
One common scenario is to keep your data encrypted in the cloud provider using the crypt remote. crypt
uses a similar technique to wrap around an existing remote and handles this translation in a seamless
way.
There is an issue with wrapping the remotes in this order: cloud remote -> crypt -> cache
During testing, I experienced a lot of bans with the remotes in this order. I suspect it might be
related to how crypt opens files on the cloud provider which makes it think we’re downloading the full
file instead of small chunks. Organizing the remotes in this order yields better results: cloud remote
-> cache -> crypt
absolute remote paths
cache can not differentiate between relative and absolute paths for the wrapped remote. Any path given
in the remote config setting and on the command line will be passed to the wrapped remote as is, but for
storing the chunks on disk the path will be made relative by removing any leading / character.
This behavior is irrelevant for most backend types, but there are backends where a leading / changes the
effective directory, e.g. in the sftp backend paths starting with a / are relative to the root of the SSH
server and paths without are relative to the user home directory. As a result sftp:bin and sftp:/bin
will share the same cache folder, even if they represent a different directory on the SSH server.
Cache and Remote Control (–rc)
Cache supports the new --rc mode in rclone and can be remote controlled through the following end points:
By default, the listener is disabled if you do not add the flag.
rc cache/expire
Purge a remote from the cache backend. Supports either a directory or a file. It supports both
encrypted and unencrypted file names if cache is wrapped by crypt.
Params: - remote = path to remote (required) - withData = true/false to delete cached data (chunks) as
well (optional, false by default)
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to cache (Cache a remote).
–cache-remote
Remote to cache.
Normally should contain a `:' and a path, e.g. “myremote:path/to/dir”, “myremote:bucket” or maybe
“myremote:” (not recommended).
Properties:
• Config: remote
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_REMOTE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–cache-plex-url
The URL of the Plex server.
Properties:
• Config: plex_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_PLEX_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–cache-plex-username
The username of the Plex user.
Properties:
• Config: plex_username
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_PLEX_USERNAME
• Type: string
• Required: false
–cache-plex-password
The password of the Plex user.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: plex_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_PLEX_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: false
–cache-chunk-size
The size of a chunk (partial file data).
Use lower numbers for slower connections. If the chunk size is changed, any downloaded chunks will be
invalid and cache-chunk-path will need to be cleared or unexpected EOF errors will occur.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 5Mi
• Examples:
• “1M”
• 1 MiB
• “5M”
• 5 MiB
• “10M”
• 10 MiB
–cache-info-age
How long to cache file structure information (directory listings, file size, times, etc.). If all write
operations are done through the cache then you can safely make this value very large as the cache store
will also be updated in real time.
Properties:
• Config: info_age
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_INFO_AGE
• Type: Duration
• Default: 6h0m0s
• Examples:
• “1h”
• 1 hour
• “24h”
• 24 hours
• “48h”
• 48 hours
–cache-chunk-total-size
The total size that the chunks can take up on the local disk.
If the cache exceeds this value then it will start to delete the oldest chunks until it goes under this
value.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_total_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_CHUNK_TOTAL_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 10Gi
• Examples:
• “500M”
• 500 MiB
• “1G”
• 1 GiB
• “10G”
• 10 GiB
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to cache (Cache a remote).
–cache-plex-token
The plex token for authentication - auto set normally.
Properties:
• Config: plex_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_PLEX_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–cache-plex-insecure
Skip all certificate verification when connecting to the Plex server.
Properties:
• Config: plex_insecure
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_PLEX_INSECURE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–cache-db-path
Directory to store file structure metadata DB.
The remote name is used as the DB file name.
Properties:
• Config: db_path
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_DB_PATH
• Type: string
• Default: “$HOME/.cache/rclone/cache-backend”
–cache-chunk-path
Directory to cache chunk files.
Path to where partial file data (chunks) are stored locally. The remote name is appended to the final
path.
This config follows the “–cache-db-path”. If you specify a custom location for “–cache-db-path” and
don’t specify one for “–cache-chunk-path” then “–cache-chunk-path” will use the same path as
“–cache-db-path”.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_path
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_CHUNK_PATH
• Type: string
• Default: “$HOME/.cache/rclone/cache-backend”
–cache-db-purge
Clear all the cached data for this remote on start.
Properties:
• Config: db_purge
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_DB_PURGE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–cache-chunk-clean-interval
How often should the cache perform cleanups of the chunk storage.
The default value should be ok for most people. If you find that the cache goes over
“cache-chunk-total-size” too often then try to lower this value to force it to perform cleanups more
often.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_clean_interval
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_CHUNK_CLEAN_INTERVAL
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–cache-read-retries
How many times to retry a read from a cache storage.
Since reading from a cache stream is independent from downloading file data, readers can get to a point
where there’s no more data in the cache. Most of the times this can indicate a connectivity issue if
cache isn’t able to provide file data anymore.
For really slow connections, increase this to a point where the stream is able to provide data but your
experience will be very stuttering.
Properties:
• Config: read_retries
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_READ_RETRIES
• Type: int
• Default: 10
–cache-workers
How many workers should run in parallel to download chunks.
Higher values will mean more parallel processing (better CPU needed) and more concurrent requests on the
cloud provider. This impacts several aspects like the cloud provider API limits, more stress on the
hardware that rclone runs on but it also means that streams will be more fluid and data will be available
much more faster to readers.
Note: If the optional Plex integration is enabled then this setting will adapt to the type of reading
performed and the value specified here will be used as a maximum number of workers to use.
Properties:
• Config: workers
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_WORKERS
• Type: int
• Default: 4
–cache-chunk-no-memory
Disable the in-memory cache for storing chunks during streaming.
By default, cache will keep file data during streaming in RAM as well to provide it to readers as fast as
possible.
This transient data is evicted as soon as it is read and the number of chunks stored doesn’t exceed the
number of workers. However, depending on other settings like “cache-chunk-size” and “cache-workers” this
footprint can increase if there are parallel streams too (multiple files being read at the same time).
If the hardware permits it, use this feature to provide an overall better performance during streaming
but it can also be disabled if RAM is not available on the local machine.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_no_memory
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_CHUNK_NO_MEMORY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–cache-rps
Limits the number of requests per second to the source FS (-1 to disable).
This setting places a hard limit on the number of requests per second that cache will be doing to the
cloud provider remote and try to respect that value by setting waits between reads.
If you find that you’re getting banned or limited on the cloud provider through cache and know that a
smaller number of requests per second will allow you to work with it then you can use this setting for
that.
A good balance of all the other settings should make this setting useless but it is available to set for
more special cases.
NOTE: This will limit the number of requests during streams but other API calls to the cloud provider
like directory listings will still pass.
Properties:
• Config: rps
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_RPS
• Type: int
• Default: -1
–cache-writes
Cache file data on writes through the FS.
If you need to read files immediately after you upload them through cache you can enable this flag to
have their data stored in the cache store at the same time during upload.
Properties:
• Config: writes
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_WRITES
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–cache-tmp-upload-path
Directory to keep temporary files until they are uploaded.
This is the path where cache will use as a temporary storage for new files that need to be uploaded to
the cloud provider.
Specifying a value will enable this feature. Without it, it is completely disabled and files will be
uploaded directly to the cloud provider
Properties:
• Config: tmp_upload_path
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_TMP_UPLOAD_PATH
• Type: string
• Required: false
–cache-tmp-wait-time
How long should files be stored in local cache before being uploaded.
This is the duration that a file must wait in the temporary location cache-tmp-upload-path before it is
selected for upload.
Note that only one file is uploaded at a time and it can take longer to start the upload if a queue
formed for this purpose.
Properties:
• Config: tmp_wait_time
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_TMP_WAIT_TIME
• Type: Duration
• Default: 15s
–cache-db-wait-time
How long to wait for the DB to be available - 0 is unlimited.
Only one process can have the DB open at any one time, so rclone waits for this duration for the DB to
become available before it gives an error.
If you set it to 0 then it will wait forever.
Properties:
• Config: db_wait_time
• Env Var: RCLONE_CACHE_DB_WAIT_TIME
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1s
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the cache backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
stats
Print stats on the cache backend in JSON format.
rclone backend stats remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Chunker (BETA)
The chunker overlay transparently splits large files into smaller chunks during upload to wrapped remote
and transparently assembles them back when the file is downloaded. This allows to effectively overcome
size limits imposed by storage providers.
Configuration
To use it, first set up the underlying remote following the configuration instructions for that remote.
You can also use a local pathname instead of a remote.
First check your chosen remote is working - we’ll call it remote:path here. Note that anything inside
remote:path will be chunked and anything outside won’t. This means that if you are using a bucket-based
remote (e.g. S3, B2, swift) then you should probably put the bucket in the remote s3:bucket.
Now configure chunker using rclone config. We will call this one overlay to separate it from the remote
itself.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> overlay
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Transparently chunk/split large files
\ "chunker"
[snip]
Storage> chunker
Remote to chunk/unchunk.
Normally should contain a ':' and a path, e.g. "myremote:path/to/dir",
"myremote:bucket" or maybe "myremote:" (not recommended).
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
remote> remote:path
Files larger than chunk size will be split in chunks.
Enter a size with suffix K,M,G,T. Press Enter for the default ("2G").
chunk_size> 100M
Choose how chunker handles hash sums. All modes but "none" require metadata.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("md5").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Pass any hash supported by wrapped remote for non-chunked files, return nothing otherwise
\ "none"
2 / MD5 for composite files
\ "md5"
3 / SHA1 for composite files
\ "sha1"
4 / MD5 for all files
\ "md5all"
5 / SHA1 for all files
\ "sha1all"
6 / Copying a file to chunker will request MD5 from the source falling back to SHA1 if unsupported
\ "md5quick"
7 / Similar to "md5quick" but prefers SHA1 over MD5
\ "sha1quick"
hash_type> md5
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[overlay]
type = chunker
remote = remote:bucket
chunk_size = 100M
hash_type = md5
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Specifying the remote
In normal use, make sure the remote has a : in. If you specify the remote without a : then rclone will
use a local directory of that name. So if you use a remote of /path/to/secret/files then rclone will
chunk stuff in that directory. If you use a remote of name then rclone will put files in a directory
called name in the current directory.
Chunking
When rclone starts a file upload, chunker checks the file size. If it doesn’t exceed the configured
chunk size, chunker will just pass the file to the wrapped remote. If a file is large, chunker will
transparently cut data in pieces with temporary names and stream them one by one, on the fly. Each data
chunk will contain the specified number of bytes, except for the last one which may have less data. If
file size is unknown in advance (this is called a streaming upload), chunker will internally create a
temporary copy, record its size and repeat the above process.
When upload completes, temporary chunk files are finally renamed. This scheme guarantees that operations
can be run in parallel and look from outside as atomic. A similar method with hidden temporary chunks is
used for other operations (copy/move/rename, etc.). If an operation fails, hidden chunks are normally
destroyed, and the target composite file stays intact.
When a composite file download is requested, chunker transparently assembles it by concatenating data
chunks in order. As the split is trivial one could even manually concatenate data chunks together to
obtain the original content.
When the list rclone command scans a directory on wrapped remote, the potential chunk files are accounted
for, grouped and assembled into composite directory entries. Any temporary chunks are hidden.
List and other commands can sometimes come across composite files with missing or invalid chunks,
e.g. shadowed by like-named directory or another file. This usually means that wrapped file system has
been directly tampered with or damaged. If chunker detects a missing chunk it will by default print
warning, skip the whole incomplete group of chunks but proceed with current command. You can set the
--chunker-fail-hard flag to have commands abort with error message in such cases.
Chunk names
The default chunk name format is *.rclone_chunk.###, hence by default chunk names are
BIG_FILE_NAME.rclone_chunk.001, BIG_FILE_NAME.rclone_chunk.002 etc. You can configure another name
format using the name_format configuration file option. The format uses asterisk * as a placeholder for
the base file name and one or more consecutive hash characters # as a placeholder for sequential chunk
number. There must be one and only one asterisk. The number of consecutive hash characters defines the
minimum length of a string representing a chunk number. If decimal chunk number has less digits than the
number of hashes, it is left-padded by zeros. If the decimal string is longer, it is left intact. By
default numbering starts from 1 but there is another option that allows user to start from 0, e.g. for
compatibility with legacy software.
For example, if name format is big_*-##.part and original file name is data.txt and numbering starts from
0, then the first chunk will be named big_data.txt-00.part, the 99th chunk will be big_data.txt-98.part
and the 302nd chunk will become big_data.txt-301.part.
Note that list assembles composite directory entries only when chunk names match the configured format
and treats non-conforming file names as normal non-chunked files.
When using norename transactions, chunk names will additionally have a unique file version suffix. For
example, BIG_FILE_NAME.rclone_chunk.001_bp562k.
Metadata
Besides data chunks chunker will by default create metadata object for a composite file. The object is
named after the original file. Chunker allows user to disable metadata completely (the none format).
Note that metadata is normally not created for files smaller than the configured chunk size. This may
change in future rclone releases.
Simple JSON metadata format
This is the default format. It supports hash sums and chunk validation for composite files. Meta
objects carry the following fields:
• ver - version of format, currently 1
• size - total size of composite file
• nchunks - number of data chunks in file
• md5 - MD5 hashsum of composite file (if present)
• sha1 - SHA1 hashsum (if present)
• txn - identifies current version of the file
There is no field for composite file name as it’s simply equal to the name of meta object on the wrapped
remote. Please refer to respective sections for details on hashsums and modified time handling.
No metadata
You can disable meta objects by setting the meta format option to none. In this mode chunker will scan
directory for all files that follow configured chunk name format, group them by detecting chunks with the
same base name and show group names as virtual composite files. This method is more prone to missing
chunk errors (especially missing last chunk) than format with metadata enabled.
Hashsums
Chunker supports hashsums only when a compatible metadata is present. Hence, if you choose metadata
format of none, chunker will report hashsum as UNSUPPORTED.
Please note that by default metadata is stored only for composite files. If a file is smaller than
configured chunk size, chunker will transparently redirect hash requests to wrapped remote, so support
depends on that. You will see the empty string as a hashsum of requested type for small files if the
wrapped remote doesn’t support it.
Many storage backends support MD5 and SHA1 hash types, so does chunker. With chunker you can choose one
or another but not both. MD5 is set by default as the most supported type. Since chunker keeps hashes
for composite files and falls back to the wrapped remote hash for non-chunked ones, we advise you to
choose the same hash type as supported by wrapped remote so that your file listings look coherent.
If your storage backend does not support MD5 or SHA1 but you need consistent file hashing, configure
chunker with md5all or sha1all. These two modes guarantee given hash for all files. If wrapped remote
doesn’t support it, chunker will then add metadata to all files, even small. However, this can double
the amount of small files in storage and incur additional service charges. You can even use chunker to
force md5/sha1 support in any other remote at expense of sidecar meta objects by setting
e.g. chunk_type=sha1all to force hashsums and chunk_size=1P to effectively disable chunking.
Normally, when a file is copied to chunker controlled remote, chunker will ask the file source for
compatible file hash and revert to on-the-fly calculation if none is found. This involves some CPU
overhead but provides a guarantee that given hashsum is available. Also, chunker will reject a
server-side copy or move operation if source and destination hashsum types are different resulting in the
extra network bandwidth, too. In some rare cases this may be undesired, so chunker provides two optional
choices: sha1quick and md5quick. If the source does not support primary hash type and the quick mode is
enabled, chunker will try to fall back to the secondary type. This will save CPU and bandwidth but can
result in empty hashsums at destination. Beware of consequences: the sync command will revert (sometimes
silently) to time/size comparison if compatible hashsums between source and target are not found.
Modified time
Chunker stores modification times using the wrapped remote so support depends on that. For a small
non-chunked file the chunker overlay simply manipulates modification time of the wrapped remote file.
For a composite file with metadata chunker will get and set modification time of the metadata object on
the wrapped remote. If file is chunked but metadata format is none then chunker will use modification
time of the first data chunk.
Migrations
The idiomatic way to migrate to a different chunk size, hash type, transaction style or chunk naming
scheme is to:
• Collect all your chunked files under a directory and have your chunker remote point to it.
• Create another directory (most probably on the same cloud storage) and configure a new remote with
desired metadata format, hash type, chunk naming etc.
• Now run rclone sync -i oldchunks: newchunks: and all your data will be transparently converted in
transfer. This may take some time, yet chunker will try server-side copy if possible.
• After checking data integrity you may remove configuration section of the old remote.
If rclone gets killed during a long operation on a big composite file, hidden temporary chunks may stay
in the directory. They will not be shown by the list command but will eat up your account quota. Please
note that the deletefile command deletes only active chunks of a file. As a workaround, you can use
remote of the wrapped file system to see them. An easy way to get rid of hidden garbage is to copy
littered directory somewhere using the chunker remote and purge the original directory. The copy command
will copy only active chunks while the purge will remove everything including garbage.
Caveats and Limitations
Chunker requires wrapped remote to support server-side move (or copy + delete) operations, otherwise it
will explicitly refuse to start. This is because it internally renames temporary chunk files to their
final names when an operation completes successfully.
Chunker encodes chunk number in file name, so with default name_format setting it adds 17 characters.
Also chunker adds 7 characters of temporary suffix during operations. Many file systems limit base file
name without path by 255 characters. Using rclone’s crypt remote as a base file system limits file name
by 143 characters. Thus, maximum name length is 231 for most files and 119 for chunker-over-crypt. A
user in need can change name format to e.g. *.rcc## and save 10 characters (provided at most 99 chunks
per file).
Note that a move implemented using the copy-and-delete method may incur double charging with some cloud
storage providers.
Chunker will not automatically rename existing chunks when you run rclone config on a live remote and
change the chunk name format. Beware that in result of this some files which have been treated as chunks
before the change can pop up in directory listings as normal files and vice versa. The same warning
holds for the chunk size. If you desperately need to change critical chunking settings, you should run
data migration as described above.
If wrapped remote is case insensitive, the chunker overlay will inherit that property (so you can’t have
a file called “Hello.doc” and “hello.doc” in the same directory).
Chunker included in rclone releases up to v1.54 can sometimes fail to detect metadata produced by recent
versions of rclone. We recommend users to keep rclone up-to-date to avoid data corruption.
Changing transactions is dangerous and requires explicit migration.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to chunker (Transparently chunk/split large files).
–chunker-remote
Remote to chunk/unchunk.
Normally should contain a `:' and a path, e.g. “myremote:path/to/dir”, “myremote:bucket” or maybe
“myremote:” (not recommended).
Properties:
• Config: remote
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_REMOTE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–chunker-chunk-size
Files larger than chunk size will be split in chunks.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 2Gi
–chunker-hash-type
Choose how chunker handles hash sums.
All modes but “none” require metadata.
Properties:
• Config: hash_type
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_HASH_TYPE
• Type: string
• Default: “md5”
• Examples:
• “none”
• Pass any hash supported by wrapped remote for non-chunked files.
• Return nothing otherwise.
• “md5”
• MD5 for composite files.
• “sha1”
• SHA1 for composite files.
• “md5all”
• MD5 for all files.
• “sha1all”
• SHA1 for all files.
• “md5quick”
• Copying a file to chunker will request MD5 from the source.
• Falling back to SHA1 if unsupported.
• “sha1quick”
• Similar to “md5quick” but prefers SHA1 over MD5.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to chunker (Transparently chunk/split large files).
–chunker-name-format
String format of chunk file names.
The two placeholders are: base file name (*) and chunk number (#...). There must be one and only one
asterisk and one or more consecutive hash characters. If chunk number has less digits than the number of
hashes, it is left-padded by zeros. If there are more digits in the number, they are left as is.
Possible chunk files are ignored if their name does not match given format.
Properties:
• Config: name_format
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_NAME_FORMAT
• Type: string
• Default: “*.rclone_chunk.###”
–chunker-start-from
Minimum valid chunk number. Usually 0 or 1.
By default chunk numbers start from 1.
Properties:
• Config: start_from
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_START_FROM
• Type: int
• Default: 1
–chunker-meta-format
Format of the metadata object or “none”.
By default “simplejson”. Metadata is a small JSON file named after the composite file.
Properties:
• Config: meta_format
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_META_FORMAT
• Type: string
• Default: “simplejson”
• Examples:
• “none”
• Do not use metadata files at all.
• Requires hash type “none”.
• “simplejson”
• Simple JSON supports hash sums and chunk validation.
• It has the following fields: ver, size, nchunks, md5, sha1.
–chunker-fail-hard
Choose how chunker should handle files with missing or invalid chunks.
Properties:
• Config: fail_hard
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_FAIL_HARD
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “true”
• Report errors and abort current command.
• “false”
• Warn user, skip incomplete file and proceed.
–chunker-transactions
Choose how chunker should handle temporary files during transactions.
Properties:
• Config: transactions
• Env Var: RCLONE_CHUNKER_TRANSACTIONS
• Type: string
• Default: “rename”
• Examples:
• “rename”
• Rename temporary files after a successful transaction.
• “norename”
• Leave temporary file names and write transaction ID to metadata file.
• Metadata is required for no rename transactions (meta format cannot be “none”).
• If you are using norename transactions you should be careful not to downgrade Rclone
• as older versions of Rclone don’t support this transaction style and will misinterpret
• files manipulated by norename transactions.
• This method is EXPERIMENTAL, don’t use on production systems.
• “auto”
• Rename or norename will be used depending on capabilities of the backend.
• If meta format is set to “none”, rename transactions will always be used.
• This method is EXPERIMENTAL, don’t use on production systems.
Citrix ShareFile
Citrix ShareFile is a secure file sharing and transfer service aimed as business.
Configuration
The initial setup for Citrix ShareFile involves getting a token from Citrix ShareFile which you can in
your browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
XX / Citrix Sharefile
\ "sharefile"
Storage> sharefile
** See help for sharefile backend at: https://rclone.org/sharefile/ **
ID of the root folder
Leave blank to access "Personal Folders". You can use one of the
standard values here or any folder ID (long hex number ID).
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Access the Personal Folders. (Default)
\ ""
2 / Access the Favorites folder.
\ "favorites"
3 / Access all the shared folders.
\ "allshared"
4 / Access all the individual connectors.
\ "connectors"
5 / Access the home, favorites, and shared folders as well as the connectors.
\ "top"
root_folder_id>
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth?state=XXX
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
type = sharefile
endpoint = https://XXX.sharefile.com
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"bearer","refresh_token":"XXX","expiry":"2019-09-30T19:41:45.878561877+01:00"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Citrix
ShareFile. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the
verification code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it
temporarily if you are running a host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your ShareFile
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your ShareFile
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an ShareFile directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Modified time and hashes
ShareFile allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second. These will be used to
detect whether objects need syncing or not.
ShareFile supports MD5 type hashes, so you can use the --checksum flag.
Transfers
For files above 128 MiB rclone will use a chunked transfer. Rclone will upload up to --transfers chunks
at the same time (shared among all the multipart uploads). Chunks are buffered in memory and are
normally 64 MiB so increasing --transfers will increase memory use.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
* 0x2A ＊
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
? 0x3F ？
: 0x3A ：
| 0x7C ｜
” 0x22 ＂
File names can also not start or end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are
the first or last character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
. 0x2E ．
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to sharefile (Citrix Sharefile).
–sharefile-root-folder-id
ID of the root folder.
Leave blank to access “Personal Folders”. You can use one of the standard values here or any folder ID
(long hex number ID).
Properties:
• Config: root_folder_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SHAREFILE_ROOT_FOLDER_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Access the Personal Folders (default).
• “favorites”
• Access the Favorites folder.
• “allshared”
• Access all the shared folders.
• “connectors”
• Access all the individual connectors.
• “top”
• Access the home, favorites, and shared folders as well as the connectors.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to sharefile (Citrix Sharefile).
–sharefile-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to multipart upload.
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_SHAREFILE_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 128Mi
–sharefile-chunk-size
Upload chunk size.
Must a power of 2 >= 256k.
Making this larger will improve performance, but note that each chunk is buffered in memory one per
transfer.
Reducing this will reduce memory usage but decrease performance.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_SHAREFILE_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 64Mi
–sharefile-endpoint
Endpoint for API calls.
This is usually auto discovered as part of the oauth process, but can be set manually to something like:
https://XXX.sharefile.com
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_SHAREFILE_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sharefile-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_SHAREFILE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default:
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,LeftSpace,LeftPeriod,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that ShareFile is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
ShareFile only supports filenames up to 256 characters in length.
rclone about is not supported by the Citrix ShareFile backend. Backends without this capability cannot
determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone
union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Crypt
Rclone crypt remotes encrypt and decrypt other remotes.
A remote of type crypt does not access a storage system directly, but instead wraps another remote, which
in turn accesses the storage system. This is similar to how alias, union, chunker and a few others work.
It makes the usage very flexible, as you can add a layer, in this case an encryption layer, on top of any
other backend, even in multiple layers. Rclone’s functionality can be used as with any other remote, for
example you can mount a crypt remote.
Accessing a storage system through a crypt remote realizes client-side encryption, which makes it safe to
keep your data in a location you do not trust will not get compromised. When working against the crypt
remote, rclone will automatically encrypt (before uploading) and decrypt (after downloading) on your
local system as needed on the fly, leaving the data encrypted at rest in the wrapped remote. If you
access the storage system using an application other than rclone, or access the wrapped remote directly
using rclone, there will not be any encryption/decryption: Downloading existing content will just give
you the encrypted (scrambled) format, and anything you upload will not become encrypted.
The encryption is a secret-key encryption (also called symmetric key encryption) algorithm, where a
password (or pass phrase) is used to generate real encryption key. The password can be supplied by user,
or you may chose to let rclone generate one. It will be stored in the configuration file, in a lightly
obscured form. If you are in an environment where you are not able to keep your configuration secured,
you should add configuration encryption as protection. As long as you have this configuration file, you
will be able to decrypt your data. Without the configuration file, as long as you remember the password
(or keep it in a safe place), you can re-create the configuration and gain access to the existing data.
You may also configure a corresponding remote in a different installation to access the same data. See
below for guidance to changing password.
Encryption uses cryptographic salt, to permute the encryption key so that the same string may be
encrypted in different ways. When configuring the crypt remote it is optional to enter a salt, or to let
rclone generate a unique salt. If omitted, rclone uses a built-in unique string. Normally in
cryptography, the salt is stored together with the encrypted content, and do not have to be memorized by
the user. This is not the case in rclone, because rclone does not store any additional information on
the remotes. Use of custom salt is effectively a second password that must be memorized.
File content encryption is performed using NaCl SecretBox, based on XSalsa20 cipher and Poly1305 for
integrity. Names (file- and directory names) are also encrypted by default, but this has some
implications and is therefore possible to turned off.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called secret.
To use crypt, first set up the underlying remote. Follow the rclone config instructions for the specific
backend.
Before configuring the crypt remote, check the underlying remote is working. In this example the
underlying remote is called remote. We will configure a path path within this remote to contain the
encrypted content. Anything inside remote:path will be encrypted and anything outside will not.
Configure crypt using rclone config. In this example the crypt remote is called secret, to differentiate
it from the underlying remote.
When you are done you can use the crypt remote named secret just as you would with any other remote,
e.g. rclone copy D:\docs secret:\docs, and rclone will encrypt and decrypt as needed on the fly. If you
access the wrapped remote remote:path directly you will bypass the encryption, and anything you read will
be in encrypted form, and anything you write will be unencrypted. To avoid issues it is best to
configure a dedicated path for encrypted content, and access it exclusively through a crypt remote.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> secret
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Encrypt/Decrypt a remote
\ "crypt"
[snip]
Storage> crypt
** See help for crypt backend at: https://rclone.org/crypt/ **
Remote to encrypt/decrypt.
Normally should contain a ':' and a path, eg "myremote:path/to/dir",
"myremote:bucket" or maybe "myremote:" (not recommended).
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
remote> remote:path
How to encrypt the filenames.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("standard").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
/ Encrypt the filenames.
1 | See the docs for the details.
\ "standard"
2 / Very simple filename obfuscation.
\ "obfuscate"
/ Don't encrypt the file names.
3 | Adds a ".bin" extension only.
\ "off"
filename_encryption>
Option to either encrypt directory names or leave them intact.
NB If filename_encryption is "off" then this option will do nothing.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("true").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Encrypt directory names.
\ "true"
2 / Don't encrypt directory names, leave them intact.
\ "false"
directory_name_encryption>
Password or pass phrase for encryption.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Password or pass phrase for salt. Optional but recommended.
Should be different to the previous password.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g/n> g
Password strength in bits.
64 is just about memorable
128 is secure
1024 is the maximum
Bits> 128
Your password is: JAsJvRcgR-_veXNfy_sGmQ
Use this password? Please note that an obscured version of this
password (and not the password itself) will be stored under your
configuration file, so keep this generated password in a safe place.
y) Yes (default)
n) No
y/n>
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n>
Remote config
--------------------
[secret]
type = crypt
remote = remote:path
password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
password2 = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d>
Important The crypt password stored in rclone.conf is lightly obscured. That only protects it from
cursory inspection. It is not secure unless configuration encryption of rclone.conf is specified.
A long passphrase is recommended, or rclone config can generate a random one.
The obscured password is created using AES-CTR with a static key. The salt is stored verbatim at the
beginning of the obscured password. This static key is shared between all versions of rclone.
If you reconfigure rclone with the same passwords/passphrases elsewhere it will be compatible, but the
obscured version will be different due to the different salt.
Rclone does not encrypt
• file length - this can be calculated within 16 bytes
• modification time - used for syncing
Specifying the remote
When configuring the remote to encrypt/decrypt, you may specify any string that rclone accepts as a
source/destination of other commands.
The primary use case is to specify the path into an already configured remote (e.g. remote:path/to/dir or
remote:bucket), such that data in a remote untrusted location can be stored encrypted.
You may also specify a local filesystem path, such as /path/to/dir on Linux, C:\path\to\dir on Windows.
By creating a crypt remote pointing to such a local filesystem path, you can use rclone as a utility for
pure local file encryption, for example to keep encrypted files on a removable USB drive.
Note: A string which do not contain a : will by rclone be treated as a relative path in the local
filesystem. For example, if you enter the name remote without the trailing :, it will be treated as a
subdirectory of the current directory with name “remote”.
If a path remote:path/to/dir is specified, rclone stores encrypted files in path/to/dir on the remote.
With file name encryption, files saved to secret:subdir/subfile are stored in the unencrypted path
path/to/dir but the subdir/subpath element is encrypted.
The path you specify does not have to exist, rclone will create it when needed.
If you intend to use the wrapped remote both directly for keeping unencrypted content, as well as through
a crypt remote for encrypted content, it is recommended to point the crypt remote to a separate directory
within the wrapped remote. If you use a bucket-based storage system (e.g. Swift, S3, Google Compute
Storage, B2) it is generally advisable to wrap the crypt remote around a specific bucket (s3:bucket). If
wrapping around the entire root of the storage (s3:), and use the optional file name encryption, rclone
will encrypt the bucket name.
Changing password
Should the password, or the configuration file containing a lightly obscured form of the password, be
compromised, you need to re-encrypt your data with a new password. Since rclone uses secret-key
encryption, where the encryption key is generated directly from the password kept on the client, it is
not possible to change the password/key of already encrypted content. Just changing the password
configured for an existing crypt remote means you will no longer able to decrypt any of the previously
encrypted content. The only possibility is to re-upload everything via a crypt remote configured with
your new password.
Depending on the size of your data, your bandwidth, storage quota etc, there are different approaches you
can take: - If you have everything in a different location, for example on your local system, you could
remove all of the prior encrypted files, change the password for your configured crypt remote (or delete
and re-create the crypt configuration), and then re-upload everything from the alternative location. -
If you have enough space on the storage system you can create a new crypt remote pointing to a separate
directory on the same backend, and then use rclone to copy everything from the original crypt remote to
the new, effectively decrypting everything on the fly using the old password and re-encrypting using the
new password. When done, delete the original crypt remote directory and finally the rclone crypt
configuration with the old password. All data will be streamed from the storage system and back, so you
will get half the bandwidth and be charged twice if you have upload and download quota on the storage
system.
Note: A security problem related to the random password generator was fixed in rclone version 1.53.3
(released 2020-11-19). Passwords generated by rclone config in version 1.49.0 (released 2019-08-26) to
1.53.2 (released 2020-10-26) are not considered secure and should be changed. If you made up your own
password, or used rclone version older than 1.49.0 or newer than 1.53.2 to generate it, you are not
affected by this issue. See issue #4783 for more details, and a tool you can use to check if you are
affected.
Example
Create the following file structure using “standard” file name encryption.
plaintext/
├── file0.txt
├── file1.txt
└── subdir
├── file2.txt
├── file3.txt
└── subsubdir
└── file4.txt
Copy these to the remote, and list them
$ rclone -q copy plaintext secret:
$ rclone -q ls secret:
7 file1.txt
6 file0.txt
8 subdir/file2.txt
10 subdir/subsubdir/file4.txt
9 subdir/file3.txt
The crypt remote looks like
$ rclone -q ls remote:path
55 hagjclgavj2mbiqm6u6cnjjqcg
54 v05749mltvv1tf4onltun46gls
57 86vhrsv86mpbtd3a0akjuqslj8/dlj7fkq4kdq72emafg7a7s41uo
58 86vhrsv86mpbtd3a0akjuqslj8/7uu829995du6o42n32otfhjqp4/b9pausrfansjth5ob3jkdqd4lc
56 86vhrsv86mpbtd3a0akjuqslj8/8njh1sk437gttmep3p70g81aps
The directory structure is preserved
$ rclone -q ls secret:subdir
8 file2.txt
9 file3.txt
10 subsubdir/file4.txt
Without file name encryption .bin extensions are added to underlying names. This prevents the cloud
provider attempting to interpret file content.
$ rclone -q ls remote:path
54 file0.txt.bin
57 subdir/file3.txt.bin
56 subdir/file2.txt.bin
58 subdir/subsubdir/file4.txt.bin
55 file1.txt.bin
File name encryption modes
Off
• doesn’t hide file names or directory structure
• allows for longer file names (~246 characters)
• can use sub paths and copy single files
Standard
• file names encrypted
• file names can’t be as long (~143 characters)
• can use sub paths and copy single files
• directory structure visible
• identical files names will have identical uploaded names
• can use shortcuts to shorten the directory recursion
Obfuscation
This is a simple “rotate” of the filename, with each file having a rot distance based on the filename.
Rclone stores the distance at the beginning of the filename. A file called “hello” may become
“53.jgnnq”.
Obfuscation is not a strong encryption of filenames, but hinders automated scanning tools picking up on
filename patterns. It is an intermediate between “off” and “standard” which allows for longer path
segment names.
There is a possibility with some unicode based filenames that the obfuscation is weak and may map lower
case characters to upper case equivalents.
Obfuscation cannot be relied upon for strong protection.
• file names very lightly obfuscated
• file names can be longer than standard encryption
• can use sub paths and copy single files
• directory structure visible
• identical files names will have identical uploaded names
Cloud storage systems have limits on file name length and total path length which rclone is more likely
to breach using “Standard” file name encryption. Where file names are less than 156 characters in length
issues should not be encountered, irrespective of cloud storage provider.
An experimental advanced option filename_encoding is now provided to address this problem to a certain
degree. For cloud storage systems with case sensitive file names (e.g. Google Drive), base64 can be used
to reduce file name length. For cloud storage systems using UTF-16 to store file names internally
(e.g. OneDrive), base32768 can be used to drastically reduce file name length.
An alternative, future rclone file name encryption mode may tolerate backend provider path length limits.
Directory name encryption
Crypt offers the option of encrypting dir names or leaving them intact. There are two options:
True
Encrypts the whole file path including directory names Example: 1/12/123.txt is encrypted to
p0e52nreeaj0a5ea7s64m4j72s/l42g6771hnv3an9cgc8cr2n1ng/qgm4avr35m5loi1th53ato71v0
False
Only encrypts file names, skips directory names Example: 1/12/123.txt is encrypted to
1/12/qgm4avr35m5loi1th53ato71v0
Modified time and hashes
Crypt stores modification times using the underlying remote so support depends on that.
Hashes are not stored for crypt. However the data integrity is protected by an extremely strong crypto
authenticator.
Use the rclone cryptcheck command to check the integrity of a crypted remote instead of rclone check
which can’t check the checksums properly.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to crypt (Encrypt/Decrypt a remote).
–crypt-remote
Remote to encrypt/decrypt.
Normally should contain a `:' and a path, e.g. “myremote:path/to/dir”, “myremote:bucket” or maybe
“myremote:” (not recommended).
Properties:
• Config: remote
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_REMOTE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–crypt-filename-encryption
How to encrypt the filenames.
Properties:
• Config: filename_encryption
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_FILENAME_ENCRYPTION
• Type: string
• Default: “standard”
• Examples:
• “standard”
• Encrypt the filenames.
• See the docs for the details.
• “obfuscate”
• Very simple filename obfuscation.
• “off”
• Don’t encrypt the file names.
• Adds a “.bin” extension only.
–crypt-directory-name-encryption
Option to either encrypt directory names or leave them intact.
NB If filename_encryption is “off” then this option will do nothing.
Properties:
• Config: directory_name_encryption
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_DIRECTORY_NAME_ENCRYPTION
• Type: bool
• Default: true
• Examples:
• “true”
• Encrypt directory names.
• “false”
• Don’t encrypt directory names, leave them intact.
–crypt-password
Password or pass phrase for encryption.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: true
–crypt-password2
Password or pass phrase for salt.
Optional but recommended. Should be different to the previous password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password2
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_PASSWORD2
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to crypt (Encrypt/Decrypt a remote).
–crypt-server-side-across-configs
Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different crypt configs.
Normally this option is not what you want, but if you have two crypts pointing to the same backend you
can use it.
This can be used, for example, to change file name encryption type without re-uploading all the data.
Just make two crypt backends pointing to two different directories with the single changed parameter and
use rclone move to move the files between the crypt remotes.
Properties:
• Config: server_side_across_configs
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_SERVER_SIDE_ACROSS_CONFIGS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–crypt-show-mapping
For all files listed show how the names encrypt.
If this flag is set then for each file that the remote is asked to list, it will log (at level INFO) a
line stating the decrypted file name and the encrypted file name.
This is so you can work out which encrypted names are which decrypted names just in case you need to do
something with the encrypted file names, or for debugging purposes.
Properties:
• Config: show_mapping
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_SHOW_MAPPING
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–crypt-no-data-encryption
Option to either encrypt file data or leave it unencrypted.
Properties:
• Config: no_data_encryption
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_NO_DATA_ENCRYPTION
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “true”
• Don’t encrypt file data, leave it unencrypted.
• “false”
• Encrypt file data.
–crypt-filename-encoding
How to encode the encrypted filename to text string.
This option could help with shortening the encrypted filename. The suitable option would depend on the
way your remote count the filename length and if it’s case sensitive.
Properties:
• Config: filename_encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_CRYPT_FILENAME_ENCODING
• Type: string
• Default: “base32”
• Examples:
• “base32”
• Encode using base32. Suitable for all remote.
• “base64”
• Encode using base64. Suitable for case sensitive remote.
• “base32768”
• Encode using base32768. Suitable if your remote counts UTF-16 or
• Unicode codepoint instead of UTF-8 byte length. (Eg. Onedrive)
Metadata
Any metadata supported by the underlying remote is read and written.
See the metadata docs for more info.
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the crypt backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
encode
Encode the given filename(s)
rclone backend encode remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This encodes the filenames given as arguments returning a list of strings of the encoded results.
Usage Example:
rclone backend encode crypt: file1 [file2...]
rclone rc backend/command command=encode fs=crypt: file1 [file2...]
decode
Decode the given filename(s)
rclone backend decode remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This decodes the filenames given as arguments returning a list of strings of the decoded results. It
will return an error if any of the inputs are invalid.
Usage Example:
rclone backend decode crypt: encryptedfile1 [encryptedfile2...]
rclone rc backend/command command=decode fs=crypt: encryptedfile1 [encryptedfile2...]
Backing up a crypted remote
If you wish to backup a crypted remote, it is recommended that you use rclone sync on the encrypted
files, and make sure the passwords are the same in the new encrypted remote.
This will have the following advantages
• rclone sync will check the checksums while copying
• you can use rclone check between the encrypted remotes
• you don’t decrypt and encrypt unnecessarily
For example, let’s say you have your original remote at remote: with the encrypted version at eremote:
with path remote:crypt. You would then set up the new remote remote2: and then the encrypted version
eremote2: with path remote2:crypt using the same passwords as eremote:.
To sync the two remotes you would do
rclone sync -i remote:crypt remote2:crypt
And to check the integrity you would do
rclone check remote:crypt remote2:crypt
File formats
File encryption
Files are encrypted 1:1 source file to destination object. The file has a header and is divided into
chunks.
Header
• 8 bytes magic string RCLONE\x00\x00
• 24 bytes Nonce (IV)
The initial nonce is generated from the operating systems crypto strong random number generator. The
nonce is incremented for each chunk read making sure each nonce is unique for each block written. The
chance of a nonce being re-used is minuscule. If you wrote an exabyte of data (10¹⁸ bytes) you would
have a probability of approximately 2×10⁻³² of re-using a nonce.
Chunk
Each chunk will contain 64 KiB of data, except for the last one which may have less data. The data chunk
is in standard NaCl SecretBox format. SecretBox uses XSalsa20 and Poly1305 to encrypt and authenticate
messages.
Each chunk contains:
• 16 Bytes of Poly1305 authenticator
• 1 - 65536 bytes XSalsa20 encrypted data
64k chunk size was chosen as the best performing chunk size (the authenticator takes too much time below
this and the performance drops off due to cache effects above this). Note that these chunks are buffered
in memory so they can’t be too big.
This uses a 32 byte (256 bit key) key derived from the user password.
Examples
1 byte file will encrypt to
• 32 bytes header
• 17 bytes data chunk
49 bytes total
1 MiB (1048576 bytes) file will encrypt to
• 32 bytes header
• 16 chunks of 65568 bytes
1049120 bytes total (a 0.05% overhead). This is the overhead for big files.
Name encryption
File names are encrypted segment by segment - the path is broken up into / separated strings and these
are encrypted individually.
File segments are padded using PKCS#7 to a multiple of 16 bytes before encryption.
They are then encrypted with EME using AES with 256 bit key. EME (ECB-Mix-ECB) is a wide-block
encryption mode presented in the 2003 paper “A Parallelizable Enciphering Mode” by Halevi and Rogaway.
This makes for deterministic encryption which is what we want - the same filename must encrypt to the
same thing otherwise we can’t find it on the cloud storage system.
This means that
• filenames with the same name will encrypt the same
• filenames which start the same won’t have a common prefix
This uses a 32 byte key (256 bits) and a 16 byte (128 bits) IV both of which are derived from the user
password.
After encryption they are written out using a modified version of standard base32 encoding as described
in RFC4648. The standard encoding is modified in two ways:
• it becomes lower case (no-one likes upper case filenames!)
• we strip the padding character =
base32 is used rather than the more efficient base64 so rclone can be used on case insensitive remotes
(e.g. Windows, Amazon Drive).
Key derivation
Rclone uses scrypt with parameters N=16384, r=8, p=1 with an optional user supplied salt (password2) to
derive the 32+32+16 = 80 bytes of key material required. If the user doesn’t supply a salt then rclone
uses an internal one.
scrypt makes it impractical to mount a dictionary attack on rclone encrypted data. For full protection
against this you should always use a salt.
SEE ALSO
• rclone cryptdecode - Show forward/reverse mapping of encrypted filenames
Compress (Experimental)
Warning
This remote is currently experimental. Things may break and data may be lost. Anything you do with this
remote is at your own risk. Please understand the risks associated with using experimental code and
don’t use this remote in critical applications.
The Compress remote adds compression to another remote. It is best used with remotes containing many
large compressible files.
Configuration
To use this remote, all you need to do is specify another remote and a compression mode to use:
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
remote_to_press sometype
e) Edit existing remote
$ rclone config
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> n
name> compress
...
8 / Compress a remote
\ "compress"
...
Storage> compress
** See help for compress backend at: https://rclone.org/compress/ **
Remote to compress.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
remote> remote_to_press:subdir
Compression mode.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("gzip").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Gzip compression balanced for speed and compression strength.
\ "gzip"
compression_mode> gzip
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[compress]
type = compress
remote = remote_to_press:subdir
compression_mode = gzip
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Compression Modes
Currently only gzip compression is supported. It provides a decent balance between speed and size and is
well supported by other applications. Compression strength can further be configured via an advanced
setting where 0 is no compression and 9 is strongest compression.
File types
If you open a remote wrapped by compress, you will see that there are many files with an extension
corresponding to the compression algorithm you chose. These files are standard files that can be opened
by various archive programs, but they have some hidden metadata that allows them to be used by rclone.
While you may download and decompress these files at will, do not manually delete or rename files. Files
without correct metadata files will not be recognized by rclone.
File names
The compressed files will be named *.###########.gz where * is the base file and the # part is base64
encoded size of the uncompressed file. The file names should not be changed by anything other than the
rclone compression backend.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to compress (Compress a remote).
–compress-remote
Remote to compress.
Properties:
• Config: remote
• Env Var: RCLONE_COMPRESS_REMOTE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–compress-mode
Compression mode.
Properties:
• Config: mode
• Env Var: RCLONE_COMPRESS_MODE
• Type: string
• Default: “gzip”
• Examples:
• “gzip”
• Standard gzip compression with fastest parameters.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to compress (Compress a remote).
–compress-level
GZIP compression level (-2 to 9).
Generally -1 (default, equivalent to 5) is recommended. Levels 1 to 9 increase compression at the cost
of speed. Going past 6 generally offers very little return.
Level -2 uses Huffman encoding only. Only use if you know what you are doing. Level 0 turns off
compression.
Properties:
• Config: level
• Env Var: RCLONE_COMPRESS_LEVEL
• Type: int
• Default: -1
–compress-ram-cache-limit
Some remotes don’t allow the upload of files with unknown size. In this case the compressed file will
need to be cached to determine it’s size.
Files smaller than this limit will be cached in RAM, files larger than this limit will be cached on disk.
Properties:
• Config: ram_cache_limit
• Env Var: RCLONE_COMPRESS_RAM_CACHE_LIMIT
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 20Mi
Metadata
Any metadata supported by the underlying remote is read and written.
See the metadata docs for more info.
Combine
The combine backend joins remotes together into a single directory tree.
For example you might have a remote for images on one provider:
$ rclone tree s3:imagesbucket
/
├── image1.jpg
└── image2.jpg
And a remote for files on another:
$ rclone tree drive:important/files
/
├── file1.txt
└── file2.txt
The combine backend can join these together into a synthetic directory structure like this:
$ rclone tree combined:
/
├── files
│ ├── file1.txt
│ └── file2.txt
└── images
├── image1.jpg
└── image2.jpg
You’d do this by specifying an upstreams parameter in the config like this
upstreams = images=s3:imagesbucket files=drive:important/files
During the initial setup with rclone config you will specify the upstreams remotes as a space separated
list. The upstream remotes can either be a local paths or other remotes.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a combine called remote for the example above. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
...
XX / Combine several remotes into one
\ (combine)
...
Storage> combine
Option upstreams.
Upstreams for combining
These should be in the form
dir=remote:path dir2=remote2:path
Where before the = is specified the root directory and after is the remote to
put there.
Embedded spaces can be added using quotes
"dir=remote:path with space" "dir2=remote2:path with space"
Enter a fs.SpaceSepList value.
upstreams> images=s3:imagesbucket files=drive:important/files
--------------------
[remote]
type = combine
upstreams = images=s3:imagesbucket files=drive:important/files
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Configuring for Google Drive Shared Drives
Rclone has a convenience feature for making a combine backend for all the shared drives you have access
to.
Assuming your main (non shared drive) Google drive remote is called drive: you would run
rclone backend -o config drives drive:
This would produce something like this:
[My Drive]
type = alias
remote = drive,team_drive=0ABCDEF-01234567890,root_folder_id=:
[Test Drive]
type = alias
remote = drive,team_drive=0ABCDEFabcdefghijkl,root_folder_id=:
[AllDrives]
type = combine
upstreams = "My Drive=My Drive:" "Test Drive=Test Drive:"
If you then add that config to your config file (find it with rclone config file) then you can access all
the shared drives in one place with the AllDrives: remote.
See the Google Drive docs for full info.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to combine (Combine several remotes into one).
–combine-upstreams
Upstreams for combining
These should be in the form
dir=remote:path dir2=remote2:path
Where before the = is specified the root directory and after is the remote to put there.
Embedded spaces can be added using quotes
"dir=remote:path with space" "dir2=remote2:path with space"
Properties:
• Config: upstreams
• Env Var: RCLONE_COMBINE_UPSTREAMS
• Type: SpaceSepList
• Default:
Metadata
Any metadata supported by the underlying remote is read and written.
See the metadata docs for more info.
Dropbox
Paths are specified as remote:path
Dropbox paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for dropbox involves getting a token from Dropbox which you need to do in your browser.
rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
q) Quit config
e/n/d/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Dropbox
\ "dropbox"
[snip]
Storage> dropbox
Dropbox App Key - leave blank normally.
app_key>
Dropbox App Secret - leave blank normally.
app_secret>
Remote config
Please visit:
https://www.dropbox.com/1/oauth2/authorize?client_id=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX&response_type=code
Enter the code: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX_XXXXXXXXXX
--------------------
[remote]
app_key =
app_secret =
token = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX_XXXX_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
You can then use it like this,
List directories in top level of your dropbox
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your dropbox
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to a dropbox directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Dropbox for business
Rclone supports Dropbox for business and Team Folders.
When using Dropbox for business remote: and remote:path/to/file will refer to your personal folder.
If you wish to see Team Folders you must use a leading / in the path, so rclone lsd remote:/ will refer
to the root and show you all Team Folders and your User Folder.
You can then use team folders like this remote:/TeamFolder and remote:/TeamFolder/path/to/file.
A leading / for a Dropbox personal account will do nothing, but it will take an extra HTTP transaction so
it should be avoided.
Modified time and Hashes
Dropbox supports modified times, but the only way to set a modification time is to re-upload the file.
This means that if you uploaded your data with an older version of rclone which didn’t support the v2 API
and modified times, rclone will decide to upload all your old data to fix the modification times. If you
don’t want this to happen use --size-only or --checksum flag to stop it.
Dropbox supports its own hash type which is checked for all transfers.
Restricted filename characters
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
DEL 0x7F ␡
\ 0x5C ＼
File names can also not end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are the last
character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Batch mode uploads
Using batch mode uploads is very important for performance when using the Dropbox API. See the dropbox
performance guide for more info.
There are 3 modes rclone can use for uploads.
–dropbox-batch-mode off
In this mode rclone will not use upload batching. This was the default before rclone v1.55. It has the
disadvantage that it is very likely to encounter too_many_requests errors like this
NOTICE: too_many_requests/.: Too many requests or write operations. Trying again in 15 seconds.
When rclone receives these it has to wait for 15s or sometimes 300s before continuing which really slows
down transfers.
This will happen especially if --transfers is large, so this mode isn’t recommended except for
compatibility or investigating problems.
–dropbox-batch-mode sync
In this mode rclone will batch up uploads to the size specified by --dropbox-batch-size and commit them
together.
Using this mode means you can use a much higher --transfers parameter (32 or 64 works fine) without
receiving too_many_requests errors.
This mode ensures full data integrity.
Note that there may be a pause when quitting rclone while rclone finishes up the last batch using this
mode.
–dropbox-batch-mode async
In this mode rclone will batch up uploads to the size specified by --dropbox-batch-size and commit them
together.
However it will not wait for the status of the batch to be returned to the caller. This means rclone can
use a much bigger batch size (much bigger than --transfers), at the cost of not being able to check the
status of the upload.
This provides the maximum possible upload speed especially with lots of small files, however rclone can’t
check the file got uploaded properly using this mode.
If you are using this mode then using “rclone check” after the transfer completes is recommended. Or you
could do an initial transfer with --dropbox-batch-mode async then do a final transfer with
--dropbox-batch-mode sync (the default).
Note that there may be a pause when quitting rclone while rclone finishes up the last batch using this
mode.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to dropbox (Dropbox).
–dropbox-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–dropbox-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to dropbox (Dropbox).
–dropbox-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–dropbox-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–dropbox-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–dropbox-chunk-size
Upload chunk size (< 150Mi).
Any files larger than this will be uploaded in chunks of this size.
Note that chunks are buffered in memory (one at a time) so rclone can deal with retries. Setting this
larger will increase the speed slightly (at most 10% for 128 MiB in tests) at the cost of using more
memory. It can be set smaller if you are tight on memory.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 48Mi
–dropbox-impersonate
Impersonate this user when using a business account.
Note that if you want to use impersonate, you should make sure this flag is set when running “rclone
config” as this will cause rclone to request the “members.read” scope which it won’t normally. This is
needed to lookup a members email address into the internal ID that dropbox uses in the API.
Using the “members.read” scope will require a Dropbox Team Admin to approve during the OAuth flow.
You will have to use your own App (setting your own client_id and client_secret) to use this option as
currently rclone’s default set of permissions doesn’t include “members.read”. This can be added once
v1.55 or later is in use everywhere.
Properties:
• Config: impersonate
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_IMPERSONATE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–dropbox-shared-files
Instructs rclone to work on individual shared files.
In this mode rclone’s features are extremely limited - only list (ls, lsl, etc.) operations and read
operations (e.g. downloading) are supported in this mode. All other operations will be disabled.
Properties:
• Config: shared_files
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_SHARED_FILES
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–dropbox-shared-folders
Instructs rclone to work on shared folders.
When this flag is used with no path only the List operation is supported and all available shared folders
will be listed. If you specify a path the first part will be interpreted as the name of shared folder.
Rclone will then try to mount this shared to the root namespace. On success shared folder rclone
proceeds normally. The shared folder is now pretty much a normal folder and all normal operations are
supported.
Note that we don’t unmount the shared folder afterwards so the –dropbox-shared-folders can be omitted
after the first use of a particular shared folder.
Properties:
• Config: shared_folders
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_SHARED_FOLDERS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–dropbox-batch-mode
Upload file batching sync|async|off.
This sets the batch mode used by rclone.
For full info see the main docs
This has 3 possible values
• off - no batching
• sync - batch uploads and check completion (default)
• async - batch upload and don’t check completion
Rclone will close any outstanding batches when it exits which may make a delay on quit.
Properties:
• Config: batch_mode
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_BATCH_MODE
• Type: string
• Default: “sync”
–dropbox-batch-size
Max number of files in upload batch.
This sets the batch size of files to upload. It has to be less than 1000.
By default this is 0 which means rclone which calculate the batch size depending on the setting of
batch_mode.
• batch_mode: async - default batch_size is 100
• batch_mode: sync - default batch_size is the same as –transfers
• batch_mode: off - not in use
Rclone will close any outstanding batches when it exits which may make a delay on quit.
Setting this is a great idea if you are uploading lots of small files as it will make them a lot quicker.
You can use –transfers 32 to maximise throughput.
Properties:
• Config: batch_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_BATCH_SIZE
• Type: int
• Default: 0
–dropbox-batch-timeout
Max time to allow an idle upload batch before uploading.
If an upload batch is idle for more than this long then it will be uploaded.
The default for this is 0 which means rclone will choose a sensible default based on the batch_mode in
use.
• batch_mode: async - default batch_timeout is 500ms
• batch_mode: sync - default batch_timeout is 10s
• batch_mode: off - not in use
Properties:
• Config: batch_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_BATCH_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 0s
–dropbox-batch-commit-timeout
Max time to wait for a batch to finish committing
Properties:
• Config: batch_commit_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_BATCH_COMMIT_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 10m0s
–dropbox-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_DROPBOX_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,RightSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that Dropbox is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
There are some file names such as thumbs.db which Dropbox can’t store. There is a full list of them in
the “Ignored Files” section of this document. Rclone will issue an error message File name disallowed -
not uploading if it attempts to upload one of those file names, but the sync won’t fail.
Some errors may occur if you try to sync copyright-protected files because Dropbox has its own
https://techcrunch.com/2014/03/30/how-dropbox-knows-when-youre-sharing-copyrighted-stuff-without-actual‐
ly-looking-at-your-stuff/ copyright detector that prevents this sort of file being downloaded. This will
return the error ERROR : /path/to/your/file: Failed to copy: failed to open source object:
path/restricted_content/.
If you have more than 10,000 files in a directory then rclone purge dropbox:dir will return the error
Failed to purge: There are too many files involved in this operation. As a work-around do an rclone
delete dropbox:dir followed by an rclone rmdir dropbox:dir.
When using rclone link you’ll need to set --expire if using a non-personal account otherwise the
visibility may not be correct. (Note that --expire isn’t supported on personal accounts). See the forum
discussion and the dropbox SDK issue.
Get your own Dropbox App ID
When you use rclone with Dropbox in its default configuration you are using rclone’s App ID. This is
shared between all the rclone users.
Here is how to create your own Dropbox App ID for rclone:
1. Log into the Dropbox App console with your Dropbox Account (It need not to be the same account as the
Dropbox you want to access)
2. Choose an API => Usually this should be Dropbox API
3. Choose the type of access you want to use => Full Dropbox or App Folder
4. Name your App. The app name is global, so you can’t use rclone for example
5. Click the button Create App
6. Switch to the Permissions tab. Enable at least the following permissions: account_info.read,
files.metadata.write, files.content.write, files.content.read, sharing.write. The files.metadata.read
and sharing.read checkboxes will be marked too. Click Submit
7. Switch to the Settings tab. Fill OAuth2 - Redirect URIs as http://localhost:53682/
8. Find the App key and App secret values on the Settings tab. Use these values in rclone config to add
a new remote or edit an existing remote. The App key setting corresponds to client_id in rclone
config, the App secret corresponds to client_secret
Enterprise File Fabric
This backend supports Storage Made Easy’s Enterprise File Fabric™ which provides a software solution to
integrate and unify File and Object Storage accessible through a global file system.
Configuration
The initial setup for the Enterprise File Fabric backend involves getting a token from the Enterprise
File Fabric which you need to do in your browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Enterprise File Fabric
\ "filefabric"
[snip]
Storage> filefabric
** See help for filefabric backend at: https://rclone.org/filefabric/ **
URL of the Enterprise File Fabric to connect to
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Storage Made Easy US
\ "https://storagemadeeasy.com"
2 / Storage Made Easy EU
\ "https://eu.storagemadeeasy.com"
3 / Connect to your Enterprise File Fabric
\ "https://yourfabric.smestorage.com"
url> https://yourfabric.smestorage.com/
ID of the root folder
Leave blank normally.
Fill in to make rclone start with directory of a given ID.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
root_folder_id>
Permanent Authentication Token
A Permanent Authentication Token can be created in the Enterprise File
Fabric, on the users Dashboard under Security, there is an entry
you'll see called "My Authentication Tokens". Click the Manage button
to create one.
These tokens are normally valid for several years.
For more info see: https://docs.storagemadeeasy.com/organisationcloud/api-tokens
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
permanent_token> xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = filefabric
url = https://yourfabric.smestorage.com/
permanent_token = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Enterprise File Fabric
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your Enterprise File Fabric
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an Enterprise File Fabric directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
The Enterprise File Fabric allows modification times to be set on files accurate to 1 second. These will
be used to detect whether objects need syncing or not.
The Enterprise File Fabric does not support any data hashes at this time.
Restricted filename characters
The default restricted characters set will be replaced.
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Empty files
Empty files aren’t supported by the Enterprise File Fabric. Rclone will therefore upload an empty file
as a single space with a mime type of application/vnd.rclone.empty.file and files with that mime type are
treated as empty.
Root folder ID
You can set the root_folder_id for rclone. This is the directory (identified by its Folder ID) that
rclone considers to be the root of your Enterprise File Fabric.
Normally you will leave this blank and rclone will determine the correct root to use itself.
However you can set this to restrict rclone to a specific folder hierarchy.
In order to do this you will have to find the Folder ID of the directory you wish rclone to display.
These aren’t displayed in the web interface, but you can use rclone lsf to find them, for example
$ rclone lsf --dirs-only -Fip --csv filefabric:
120673758,Burnt PDFs/
120673759,My Quick Uploads/
120673755,My Syncs/
120673756,My backups/
120673757,My contacts/
120673761,S3 Storage/
The ID for “S3 Storage” would be 120673761.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to filefabric (Enterprise File Fabric).
–filefabric-url
URL of the Enterprise File Fabric to connect to.
Properties:
• Config: url
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_URL
• Type: string
• Required: true
• Examples:
• “https://storagemadeeasy.com”
• Storage Made Easy US
• “https://eu.storagemadeeasy.com”
• Storage Made Easy EU
• “https://yourfabric.smestorage.com”
• Connect to your Enterprise File Fabric
–filefabric-root-folder-id
ID of the root folder.
Leave blank normally.
Fill in to make rclone start with directory of a given ID.
Properties:
• Config: root_folder_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_ROOT_FOLDER_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–filefabric-permanent-token
Permanent Authentication Token.
A Permanent Authentication Token can be created in the Enterprise File Fabric, on the users Dashboard
under Security, there is an entry you’ll see called “My Authentication Tokens”. Click the Manage button
to create one.
These tokens are normally valid for several years.
For more info see: https://docs.storagemadeeasy.com/organisationcloud/api-tokens
Properties:
• Config: permanent_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_PERMANENT_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to filefabric (Enterprise File Fabric).
–filefabric-token
Session Token.
This is a session token which rclone caches in the config file. It is usually valid for 1 hour.
Don’t set this value - rclone will set it automatically.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–filefabric-token-expiry
Token expiry time.
Don’t set this value - rclone will set it automatically.
Properties:
• Config: token_expiry
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_TOKEN_EXPIRY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–filefabric-version
Version read from the file fabric.
Don’t set this value - rclone will set it automatically.
Properties:
• Config: version
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_VERSION
• Type: string
• Required: false
–filefabric-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_FILEFABRIC_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
FTP
FTP is the File Transfer Protocol. Rclone FTP support is provided using the
github.com/jlaffaye/ftp package.
Limitations of Rclone’s FTP backend
Paths are specified as remote:path. If the path does not begin with a / it is relative to the home
directory of the user. An empty path remote: refers to the user’s home directory.
Configuration
To create an FTP configuration named remote, run
rclone config
Rclone config guides you through an interactive setup process. A minimal rclone FTP remote definition
only requires host, username and password. For an anonymous FTP server, see below.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/r/c/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / FTP
\ "ftp"
[snip]
Storage> ftp
** See help for ftp backend at: https://rclone.org/ftp/ **
FTP host to connect to
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to ftp.example.com
\ "ftp.example.com"
host> ftp.example.com
FTP username
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("$USER").
user>
FTP port number
Enter a signed integer. Press Enter for the default (21).
port>
FTP password
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Use FTP over TLS (Implicit)
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
tls>
Use FTP over TLS (Explicit)
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
explicit_tls>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = ftp
host = ftp.example.com
pass = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
To see all directories in the home directory of remote
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new directory
rclone mkdir remote:path/to/directory
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:path/to/directory
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote directory, deleting any excess files in the directory.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:directory
Anonymous FTP
When connecting to a FTP server that allows anonymous login, you can use the special “anonymous”
username. Traditionally, this user account accepts any string as a password, although it is common to
use either the password “anonymous” or “guest”. Some servers require the use of a valid e-mail address
as password.
Using on-the-fly or connection string remotes makes it easy to access such servers, without requiring any
configuration in advance. The following are examples of that:
rclone lsf :ftp: --ftp-host=speedtest.tele2.net --ftp-user=anonymous --ftp-pass=$(rclone obscure dummy)
rclone lsf :ftp,host=speedtest.tele2.net,user=anonymous,pass=$(rclone obscure dummy):
The above examples work in Linux shells and in PowerShell, but not Windows Command Prompt. They execute
the rclone obscure command to create a password string in the format required by the pass option. The
following examples are exactly the same, except use an already obscured string representation of the same
password “dummy”, and therefore works even in Windows Command Prompt:
rclone lsf :ftp: --ftp-host=speedtest.tele2.net --ftp-user=anonymous --ftp-pass=IXs2wc8OJOz7SYLBk47Ji1rHTmxM
rclone lsf :ftp,host=speedtest.tele2.net,user=anonymous,pass=IXs2wc8OJOz7SYLBk47Ji1rHTmxM:
Implicit TLS
Rlone FTP supports implicit FTP over TLS servers (FTPS). This has to be enabled in the FTP backend
config for the remote, or with --ftp-tls. The default FTPS port is 990, not 21 and can be set with
--ftp-port.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
File names cannot end with the following characters. Replacement is limited to the last character in a
file name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
Not all FTP servers can have all characters in file names, for example:
FTP Server Forbidden characters
──────────────────────────────────
proftpd *
pureftpd \ [ ]
This backend’s interactive configuration wizard provides a selection of sensible encoding settings for
major FTP servers: ProFTPd, PureFTPd, VsFTPd. Just hit a selection number when prompted.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to ftp (FTP).
–ftp-host
FTP host to connect to.
E.g. “ftp.example.com”.
Properties:
• Config: host
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_HOST
• Type: string
• Required: true
–ftp-user
FTP username.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_USER
• Type: string
• Default: “$USER”
–ftp-port
FTP port number.
Properties:
• Config: port
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_PORT
• Type: int
• Default: 21
–ftp-pass
FTP password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–ftp-tls
Use Implicit FTPS (FTP over TLS).
When using implicit FTP over TLS the client connects using TLS right from the start which breaks
compatibility with non-TLS-aware servers. This is usually served over port 990 rather than port 21.
Cannot be used in combination with explicit FTP.
Properties:
• Config: tls
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_TLS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-explicit-tls
Use Explicit FTPS (FTP over TLS).
When using explicit FTP over TLS the client explicitly requests security from the server in order to
upgrade a plain text connection to an encrypted one. Cannot be used in combination with implicit FTP.
Properties:
• Config: explicit_tls
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_EXPLICIT_TLS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to ftp (FTP).
–ftp-concurrency
Maximum number of FTP simultaneous connections, 0 for unlimited.
Note that setting this is very likely to cause deadlocks so it should be used with care.
If you are doing a sync or copy then make sure concurrency is one more than the sum of --transfers and
--checkers.
If you use --check-first then it just needs to be one more than the maximum of --checkers and
--transfers.
So for concurrency 3 you’d use --checkers 2 --transfers 2 --check-first or --checkers 1 --transfers 1.
Properties:
• Config: concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 0
–ftp-no-check-certificate
Do not verify the TLS certificate of the server.
Properties:
• Config: no_check_certificate
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_NO_CHECK_CERTIFICATE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-disable-epsv
Disable using EPSV even if server advertises support.
Properties:
• Config: disable_epsv
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_DISABLE_EPSV
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-disable-mlsd
Disable using MLSD even if server advertises support.
Properties:
• Config: disable_mlsd
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_DISABLE_MLSD
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-disable-utf8
Disable using UTF-8 even if server advertises support.
Properties:
• Config: disable_utf8
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_DISABLE_UTF8
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-writing-mdtm
Use MDTM to set modification time (VsFtpd quirk)
Properties:
• Config: writing_mdtm
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_WRITING_MDTM
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-force-list-hidden
Use LIST -a to force listing of hidden files and folders. This will disable the use of MLSD.
Properties:
• Config: force_list_hidden
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_FORCE_LIST_HIDDEN
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-idle-timeout
Max time before closing idle connections.
If no connections have been returned to the connection pool in the time given, rclone will empty the
connection pool.
Set to 0 to keep connections indefinitely.
Properties:
• Config: idle_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_IDLE_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–ftp-close-timeout
Maximum time to wait for a response to close.
Properties:
• Config: close_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_CLOSE_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–ftp-tls-cache-size
Size of TLS session cache for all control and data connections.
TLS cache allows to resume TLS sessions and reuse PSK between connections. Increase if default size is
not enough resulting in TLS resumption errors. Enabled by default. Use 0 to disable.
Properties:
• Config: tls_cache_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_TLS_CACHE_SIZE
• Type: int
• Default: 32
–ftp-disable-tls13
Disable TLS 1.3 (workaround for FTP servers with buggy TLS)
Properties:
• Config: disable_tls13
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_DISABLE_TLS13
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-shut-timeout
Maximum time to wait for data connection closing status.
Properties:
• Config: shut_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_SHUT_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–ftp-ask-password
Allow asking for FTP password when needed.
If this is set and no password is supplied then rclone will ask for a password
Properties:
• Config: ask_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_ASK_PASSWORD
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–ftp-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_FTP_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Del,Ctl,RightSpace,Dot
• Examples:
• “Asterisk,Ctl,Dot,Slash”
• ProFTPd can’t handle ’*’ in file names
• “BackSlash,Ctl,Del,Dot,RightSpace,Slash,SquareBracket”
• PureFTPd can’t handle `[]' or ’*’ in file names
• “Ctl,LeftPeriod,Slash”
• VsFTPd can’t handle file names starting with dot
Limitations
FTP servers acting as rclone remotes must support passive mode. The mode cannot be configured as passive
is the only supported one. Rclone’s FTP implementation is not compatible with active mode as the library
it uses doesn’t support it. This will likely never be supported due to security concerns.
Rclone’s FTP backend does not support any checksums but can compare file sizes.
rclone about is not supported by the FTP backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine free
space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
The implementation of : --dump headers, --dump bodies, --dump auth for debugging isn’t the same as for
rclone HTTP based backends - it has less fine grained control.
--timeout isn’t supported (but --contimeout is).
--bind isn’t supported.
Rclone’s FTP backend could support server-side move but does not at present.
The ftp_proxy environment variable is not currently supported.
Modified time
File modification time (timestamps) is supported to 1 second resolution for major FTP servers: ProFTPd,
PureFTPd, VsFTPd, and FileZilla FTP server. The VsFTPd server has non-standard implementation of time
related protocol commands and needs a special configuration setting: writing_mdtm = true.
Support for precise file time with other FTP servers varies depending on what protocol extensions they
advertise. If all the MLSD, MDTM and MFTM extensions are present, rclone will use them together to
provide precise time. Otherwise the times you see on the FTP server through rclone are those of the last
file upload.
You can use the following command to check whether rclone can use precise time with your FTP server:
rclone backend features your_ftp_remote: (the trailing colon is important). Look for the number in the
line tagged by Precision designating the remote time precision expressed as nanoseconds. A value of
1000000000 means that file time precision of 1 second is available. A value of 3153600000000000000 (or
another large number) means “unsupported”.
Google Cloud Storage
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:bucket/path/to/dir.
Configuration
The initial setup for google cloud storage involves getting a token from Google Cloud Storage which you
need to do in your browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
q) Quit config
e/n/d/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Google Cloud Storage (this is not Google Drive)
\ "google cloud storage"
[snip]
Storage> google cloud storage
Google Application Client Id - leave blank normally.
client_id>
Google Application Client Secret - leave blank normally.
client_secret>
Project number optional - needed only for list/create/delete buckets - see your developer console.
project_number> 12345678
Service Account Credentials JSON file path - needed only if you want use SA instead of interactive login.
service_account_file>
Access Control List for new objects.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Object owner gets OWNER access, and all Authenticated Users get READER access.
\ "authenticatedRead"
2 / Object owner gets OWNER access, and project team owners get OWNER access.
\ "bucketOwnerFullControl"
3 / Object owner gets OWNER access, and project team owners get READER access.
\ "bucketOwnerRead"
4 / Object owner gets OWNER access [default if left blank].
\ "private"
5 / Object owner gets OWNER access, and project team members get access according to their roles.
\ "projectPrivate"
6 / Object owner gets OWNER access, and all Users get READER access.
\ "publicRead"
object_acl> 4
Access Control List for new buckets.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Project team owners get OWNER access, and all Authenticated Users get READER access.
\ "authenticatedRead"
2 / Project team owners get OWNER access [default if left blank].
\ "private"
3 / Project team members get access according to their roles.
\ "projectPrivate"
4 / Project team owners get OWNER access, and all Users get READER access.
\ "publicRead"
5 / Project team owners get OWNER access, and all Users get WRITER access.
\ "publicReadWrite"
bucket_acl> 2
Location for the newly created buckets.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Empty for default location (US).
\ ""
2 / Multi-regional location for Asia.
\ "asia"
3 / Multi-regional location for Europe.
\ "eu"
4 / Multi-regional location for United States.
\ "us"
5 / Taiwan.
\ "asia-east1"
6 / Tokyo.
\ "asia-northeast1"
7 / Singapore.
\ "asia-southeast1"
8 / Sydney.
\ "australia-southeast1"
9 / Belgium.
\ "europe-west1"
10 / London.
\ "europe-west2"
11 / Iowa.
\ "us-central1"
12 / South Carolina.
\ "us-east1"
13 / Northern Virginia.
\ "us-east4"
14 / Oregon.
\ "us-west1"
location> 12
The storage class to use when storing objects in Google Cloud Storage.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Default
\ ""
2 / Multi-regional storage class
\ "MULTI_REGIONAL"
3 / Regional storage class
\ "REGIONAL"
4 / Nearline storage class
\ "NEARLINE"
5 / Coldline storage class
\ "COLDLINE"
6 / Durable reduced availability storage class
\ "DURABLE_REDUCED_AVAILABILITY"
storage_class> 5
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine or Y didn't work
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
type = google cloud storage
client_id =
client_secret =
token = {"AccessToken":"xxxx.xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","RefreshToken":"x/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxxxxxxx","Expiry":"2014-07-17T20:49:14.929208288+01:00","Extra":null}
project_number = 12345678
object_acl = private
bucket_acl = private
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Google if
you use auto config mode. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get
back the verification code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it
temporarily if you are running a host firewall, or use manual mode.
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all the buckets in your project
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new bucket
rclone mkdir remote:bucket
List the contents of a bucket
rclone ls remote:bucket
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote bucket, deleting any excess files in the bucket.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:bucket
Service Account support
You can set up rclone with Google Cloud Storage in an unattended mode, i.e. not tied to a specific
end-user Google account. This is useful when you want to synchronise files onto machines that don’t have
actively logged-in users, for example build machines.
To get credentials for Google Cloud Platform IAM Service Accounts, please head to the Service
Account section of the Google Developer Console. Service Accounts behave just like normal User
permissions in Google Cloud Storage ACLs, so you can limit their access (e.g. make them read only).
After creating an account, a JSON file containing the Service Account’s credentials will be downloaded
onto your machines. These credentials are what rclone will use for authentication.
To use a Service Account instead of OAuth2 token flow, enter the path to your Service Account credentials
at the service_account_file prompt and rclone won’t use the browser based authentication flow. If you’d
rather stuff the contents of the credentials file into the rclone config file, you can set
service_account_credentials with the actual contents of the file instead, or set the equivalent
environment variable.
Anonymous Access
For downloads of objects that permit public access you can configure rclone to use anonymous access by
setting anonymous to true. With unauthorized access you can’t write or create files but only read or
list those buckets and objects that have public read access.
Application Default Credentials
If no other source of credentials is provided, rclone will fall back to https://cloud.google.com/video-
intelligence/docs/common/auth#authenticating_with_application_default_cre‐ dentials Application Default
Credentials this is useful both when you already have configured authentication for your developer
account, or in production when running on a google compute host. Note that if running in docker, you may
need to run additional commands on your google compute machine - https://cloud.google.com/container-reg‐
istry/docs/advanced-authentication#gcloud_as_a_docker_creden‐ tial_helper see this page.
Note that in the case application default credentials are used, there is no need to explicitly configure
a project number.
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
Custom upload headers
You can set custom upload headers with the --header-upload flag. Google Cloud Storage supports the
headers as described in the
https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/gsutil/addlhelp/WorkingWithObjectMetadata working with metadata
documentation
• Cache-Control
• Content-Disposition
• Content-Encoding
• Content-Language
• Content-Type
• X-Goog-Storage-Class
• X-Goog-Meta-
Eg --header-upload "Content-Type text/potato"
Note that the last of these is for setting custom metadata in the form --header-upload "x-goog-meta-key:
value"
Modification time
Google Cloud Storage stores md5sum natively. Google’s gsutil tool stores modification time with
one-second precision as goog-reserved-file-mtime in file metadata.
To ensure compatibility with gsutil, rclone stores modification time in 2 separate metadata entries.
mtime uses RFC3339 format with one-nanosecond precision. goog-reserved-file-mtime uses Unix timestamp
format with one-second precision. To get modification time from object metadata, rclone reads the
metadata in the following order: mtime, goog-reserved-file-mtime, object updated time.
Note that rclone’s default modify window is 1ns. Files uploaded by gsutil only contain timestamps with
one-second precision. If you use rclone to sync files previously uploaded by gsutil, rclone will attempt
to update modification time for all these files. To avoid these possibly unnecessary updates, use
--modify-window 1s.
Restricted filename characters
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
LF 0x0A ␊
CR 0x0D ␍
/ 0x2F ／
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to google cloud storage (Google Cloud Storage (this is not Google
Drive)).
–gcs-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-project-number
Project number.
Optional - needed only for list/create/delete buckets - see your developer console.
Properties:
• Config: project_number
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_PROJECT_NUMBER
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-service-account-file
Service Account Credentials JSON file path.
Leave blank normally. Needed only if you want use SA instead of interactive login.
Leading ~ will be expanded in the file name as will environment variables such as ${RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR}.
Properties:
• Config: service_account_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_SERVICE_ACCOUNT_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-service-account-credentials
Service Account Credentials JSON blob.
Leave blank normally. Needed only if you want use SA instead of interactive login.
Properties:
• Config: service_account_credentials
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_SERVICE_ACCOUNT_CREDENTIALS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-anonymous
Access public buckets and objects without credentials.
Set to `true' if you just want to download files and don’t configure credentials.
Properties:
• Config: anonymous
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_ANONYMOUS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–gcs-object-acl
Access Control List for new objects.
Properties:
• Config: object_acl
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_OBJECT_ACL
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “authenticatedRead”
• Object owner gets OWNER access.
• All Authenticated Users get READER access.
• “bucketOwnerFullControl”
• Object owner gets OWNER access.
• Project team owners get OWNER access.
• “bucketOwnerRead”
• Object owner gets OWNER access.
• Project team owners get READER access.
• “private”
• Object owner gets OWNER access.
• Default if left blank.
• “projectPrivate”
• Object owner gets OWNER access.
• Project team members get access according to their roles.
• “publicRead”
• Object owner gets OWNER access.
• All Users get READER access.
–gcs-bucket-acl
Access Control List for new buckets.
Properties:
• Config: bucket_acl
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_BUCKET_ACL
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “authenticatedRead”
• Project team owners get OWNER access.
• All Authenticated Users get READER access.
• “private”
• Project team owners get OWNER access.
• Default if left blank.
• “projectPrivate”
• Project team members get access according to their roles.
• “publicRead”
• Project team owners get OWNER access.
• All Users get READER access.
• “publicReadWrite”
• Project team owners get OWNER access.
• All Users get WRITER access.
–gcs-bucket-policy-only
Access checks should use bucket-level IAM policies.
If you want to upload objects to a bucket with Bucket Policy Only set then you will need to set this.
When it is set, rclone:
• ignores ACLs set on buckets
• ignores ACLs set on objects
• creates buckets with Bucket Policy Only set
Docs: https://cloud.google.com/storage/docs/bucket-policy-only
Properties:
• Config: bucket_policy_only
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_BUCKET_POLICY_ONLY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–gcs-location
Location for the newly created buckets.
Properties:
• Config: location
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_LOCATION
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Empty for default location (US)
• “asia”
• Multi-regional location for Asia
• “eu”
• Multi-regional location for Europe
• “us”
• Multi-regional location for United States
• “asia-east1”
• Taiwan
• “asia-east2”
• Hong Kong
• “asia-northeast1”
• Tokyo
• “asia-northeast2”
• Osaka
• “asia-northeast3”
• Seoul
• “asia-south1”
• Mumbai
• “asia-south2”
• Delhi
• “asia-southeast1”
• Singapore
• “asia-southeast2”
• Jakarta
• “australia-southeast1”
• Sydney
• “australia-southeast2”
• Melbourne
• “europe-north1”
• Finland
• “europe-west1”
• Belgium
• “europe-west2”
• London
• “europe-west3”
• Frankfurt
• “europe-west4”
• Netherlands
• “europe-west6”
• Zürich
• “europe-central2”
• Warsaw
• “us-central1”
• Iowa
• “us-east1”
• South Carolina
• “us-east4”
• Northern Virginia
• “us-west1”
• Oregon
• “us-west2”
• California
• “us-west3”
• Salt Lake City
• “us-west4”
• Las Vegas
• “northamerica-northeast1”
• Montréal
• “northamerica-northeast2”
• Toronto
• “southamerica-east1”
• São Paulo
• “southamerica-west1”
• Santiago
• “asia1”
• Dual region: asia-northeast1 and asia-northeast2.
• “eur4”
• Dual region: europe-north1 and europe-west4.
• “nam4”
• Dual region: us-central1 and us-east1.
–gcs-storage-class
The storage class to use when storing objects in Google Cloud Storage.
Properties:
• Config: storage_class
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_STORAGE_CLASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default
• “MULTI_REGIONAL”
• Multi-regional storage class
• “REGIONAL”
• Regional storage class
• “NEARLINE”
• Nearline storage class
• “COLDLINE”
• Coldline storage class
• “ARCHIVE”
• Archive storage class
• “DURABLE_REDUCED_AVAILABILITY”
• Durable reduced availability storage class
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to google cloud storage (Google Cloud Storage (this is not Google
Drive)).
–gcs-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-no-check-bucket
If set, don’t attempt to check the bucket exists or create it.
This can be useful when trying to minimise the number of transactions rclone does if you know the bucket
exists already.
Properties:
• Config: no_check_bucket
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_NO_CHECK_BUCKET
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–gcs-decompress
If set this will decompress gzip encoded objects.
It is possible to upload objects to GCS with “Content-Encoding: gzip” set. Normally rclone will download
these files as compressed objects.
If this flag is set then rclone will decompress these files with “Content-Encoding: gzip” as they are
received. This means that rclone can’t check the size and hash but the file contents will be
decompressed.
Properties:
• Config: decompress
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_DECOMPRESS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–gcs-endpoint
Endpoint for the service.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gcs-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_GCS_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,CrLf,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the Google Cloud Storage backend. Backends without this capability
cannot determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an
rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Google Drive
Paths are specified as drive:path
Drive paths may be as deep as required, e.g. drive:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for drive involves getting a token from Google drive which you need to do in your
browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/r/c/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Google Drive
\ "drive"
[snip]
Storage> drive
Google Application Client Id - leave blank normally.
client_id>
Google Application Client Secret - leave blank normally.
client_secret>
Scope that rclone should use when requesting access from drive.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Full access all files, excluding Application Data Folder.
\ "drive"
2 / Read-only access to file metadata and file contents.
\ "drive.readonly"
/ Access to files created by rclone only.
3 | These are visible in the drive website.
| File authorization is revoked when the user deauthorizes the app.
\ "drive.file"
/ Allows read and write access to the Application Data folder.
4 | This is not visible in the drive website.
\ "drive.appfolder"
/ Allows read-only access to file metadata but
5 | does not allow any access to read or download file content.
\ "drive.metadata.readonly"
scope> 1
Service Account Credentials JSON file path - needed only if you want use SA instead of interactive login.
service_account_file>
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine or Y didn't work
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
Configure this as a Shared Drive (Team Drive)?
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
--------------------
[remote]
client_id =
client_secret =
scope = drive
root_folder_id =
service_account_file =
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"Bearer","refresh_token":"XXX","expiry":"2014-03-16T13:57:58.955387075Z"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Google if
you use auto config mode. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get
back the verification code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and it may require you to unblock it
temporarily if you are running a host firewall, or use manual mode.
You can then use it like this,
List directories in top level of your drive
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your drive
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to a drive directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Scopes
Rclone allows you to select which scope you would like for rclone to use. This changes what type of
token is granted to rclone. The scopes are defined here.
The scope are
drive
This is the default scope and allows full access to all files, except for the Application Data Folder
(see below).
Choose this one if you aren’t sure.
drive.readonly
This allows read only access to all files. Files may be listed and downloaded but not uploaded, renamed
or deleted.
drive.file
With this scope rclone can read/view/modify only those files and folders it creates.
So if you uploaded files to drive via the web interface (or any other means) they will not be visible to
rclone.
This can be useful if you are using rclone to backup data and you want to be sure confidential data on
your drive is not visible to rclone.
Files created with this scope are visible in the web interface.
drive.appfolder
This gives rclone its own private area to store files. Rclone will not be able to see any other files on
your drive and you won’t be able to see rclone’s files from the web interface either.
drive.metadata.readonly
This allows read only access to file names only. It does not allow rclone to download or upload data, or
rename or delete files or directories.
Root folder ID
This option has been moved to the advanced section. You can set the root_folder_id for rclone. This is
the directory (identified by its Folder ID) that rclone considers to be the root of your drive.
Normally you will leave this blank and rclone will determine the correct root to use itself.
However you can set this to restrict rclone to a specific folder hierarchy or to access data within the
“Computers” tab on the drive web interface (where files from Google’s Backup and Sync desktop program
go).
In order to do this you will have to find the Folder ID of the directory you wish rclone to display.
This will be the last segment of the URL when you open the relevant folder in the drive web interface.
So if the folder you want rclone to use has a URL which looks like
https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1XyfxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxKHCh in the browser, then you use
1XyfxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxKHCh as the root_folder_id in the config.
NB folders under the “Computers” tab seem to be read only (drive gives a 500 error) when using rclone.
There doesn’t appear to be an API to discover the folder IDs of the “Computers” tab - please contact us
if you know otherwise!
Note also that rclone can’t access any data under the “Backups” tab on the google drive web interface
yet.
Service Account support
You can set up rclone with Google Drive in an unattended mode, i.e. not tied to a specific end-user
Google account. This is useful when you want to synchronise files onto machines that don’t have actively
logged-in users, for example build machines.
To use a Service Account instead of OAuth2 token flow, enter the path to your Service Account credentials
at the service_account_file prompt during rclone config and rclone won’t use the browser based
authentication flow. If you’d rather stuff the contents of the credentials file into the rclone config
file, you can set service_account_credentials with the actual contents of the file instead, or set the
equivalent environment variable.
Use case - Google Apps/G-suite account and individual Drive
Let’s say that you are the administrator of a Google Apps (old) or G-suite account. The goal is to store
data on an individual’s Drive account, who IS a member of the domain. We’ll call the domain example.com,
and the user foo@example.com.
There’s a few steps we need to go through to accomplish this:
1. Create a service account for example.com
• To create a service account and obtain its credentials, go to the Google Developer Console.
• You must have a project - create one if you don’t.
• Then go to “IAM & admin” -> “Service Accounts”.
• Use the “Create Credentials” button. Fill in “Service account name” with something that identifies
your client. “Role” can be empty.
• Tick “Furnish a new private key” - select “Key type JSON”.
• Tick “Enable G Suite Domain-wide Delegation”. This option makes “impersonation” possible, as
documented here:
https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/OAuth2ServiceAccount#delegatingauthority Delegating
domain-wide authority to the service account
• These credentials are what rclone will use for authentication. If you ever need to remove access,
press the “Delete service account key” button.
2. Allowing API access to example.com Google Drive
• Go to example.com’s admin console
• Go into “Security” (or use the search bar)
• Select “Show more” and then “Advanced settings”
• Select “Manage API client access” in the “Authentication” section
• In the “Client Name” field enter the service account’s “Client ID” - this can be found in the Developer
Console under “IAM & Admin” -> “Service Accounts”, then “View Client ID” for the newly created service
account. It is a ~21 character numerical string.
• In the next field, “One or More API Scopes”, enter https://www.googleapis.com/auth/drive to grant
access to Google Drive specifically.
3. Configure rclone, assuming a new install
rclone config
n/s/q> n # New
name>gdrive # Gdrive is an example name
Storage> # Select the number shown for Google Drive
client_id> # Can be left blank
client_secret> # Can be left blank
scope> # Select your scope, 1 for example
root_folder_id> # Can be left blank
service_account_file> /home/foo/myJSONfile.json # This is where the JSON file goes!
y/n> # Auto config, n
4. Verify that it’s working
• rclone -v --drive-impersonate foo@example.com lsf gdrive:backup
• The arguments do:
• -v - verbose logging
• --drive-impersonate foo@example.com - this is what does the magic, pretending to be user foo.
• lsf - list files in a parsing friendly way
• gdrive:backup - use the remote called gdrive, work in the folder named backup.
Note: in case you configured a specific root folder on gdrive and rclone is unable to access the contents
of that folder when using --drive-impersonate, do this instead: - in the gdrive web interface, share your
root folder with the user/email of the new Service Account you created/selected at step #1 - use rclone
without specifying the --drive-impersonate option, like this: rclone -v lsf gdrive:backup
Shared drives (team drives)
If you want to configure the remote to point to a Google Shared Drive (previously known as Team Drives)
then answer y to the question Configure this as a Shared Drive (Team Drive)?.
This will fetch the list of Shared Drives from google and allow you to configure which one you want to
use. You can also type in a Shared Drive ID if you prefer.
For example:
Configure this as a Shared Drive (Team Drive)?
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
Fetching Shared Drive list...
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Rclone Test
\ "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx"
2 / Rclone Test 2
\ "yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy"
3 / Rclone Test 3
\ "zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz"
Enter a Shared Drive ID> 1
--------------------
[remote]
client_id =
client_secret =
token = {"AccessToken":"xxxx.x.xxxxx_xxxxxxxxxxx_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","RefreshToken":"1/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","Expiry":"2014-03-16T13:57:58.955387075Z","Extra":null}
team_drive = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
It does this by combining multiple list calls into a single API request.
This works by combining many '%s' in parents filters into one expression. To list the contents of
directories a, b and c, the following requests will be send by the regular List function:
trashed=false and 'a' in parents
trashed=false and 'b' in parents
trashed=false and 'c' in parents
These can now be combined into a single request:
trashed=false and ('a' in parents or 'b' in parents or 'c' in parents)
The implementation of ListR will put up to 50 parents filters into one request. It will use the
--checkers value to specify the number of requests to run in parallel.
In tests, these batch requests were up to 20x faster than the regular method. Running the following
command against different sized folders gives:
rclone lsjson -vv -R --checkers=6 gdrive:folder
small folder (220 directories, 700 files):
• without --fast-list: 38s
• with --fast-list: 10s
large folder (10600 directories, 39000 files):
• without --fast-list: 22:05 min
• with --fast-list: 58s
Modified time
Google drive stores modification times accurate to 1 ms.
Restricted filename characters
Only Invalid UTF-8 bytes will be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
In contrast to other backends, / can also be used in names and . or .. are valid names.
Revisions
Google drive stores revisions of files. When you upload a change to an existing file to google drive
using rclone it will create a new revision of that file.
Revisions follow the standard google policy which at time of writing was
• They are deleted after 30 days or 100 revisions (whatever comes first).
• They do not count towards a user storage quota.
Deleting files
By default rclone will send all files to the trash when deleting files. If deleting them permanently is
required then use the --drive-use-trash=false flag, or set the equivalent environment variable.
Shortcuts
In March 2020 Google introduced a new feature in Google Drive called drive shortcuts (API). These will
(by September 2020) https://cloud.google.com/blog/products/g-suite/simplifying-google-drives-folder-
structure-and-sharing- models replace the ability for files or folders to be in multiple folders at once.
Shortcuts are files that link to other files on Google Drive somewhat like a symlink in unix, except they
point to the underlying file data (e.g. the inode in unix terms) so they don’t break if the source is
renamed or moved about.
Be default rclone treats these as follows.
For shortcuts pointing to files:
• When listing a file shortcut appears as the destination file.
• When downloading the contents of the destination file is downloaded.
• When updating shortcut file with a non shortcut file, the shortcut is removed then a new file is
uploaded in place of the shortcut.
• When server-side moving (renaming) the shortcut is renamed, not the destination file.
• When server-side copying the shortcut is copied, not the contents of the shortcut. (unless
--drive-copy-shortcut-content is in use in which case the contents of the shortcut gets copied).
• When deleting the shortcut is deleted not the linked file.
• When setting the modification time, the modification time of the linked file will be set.
For shortcuts pointing to folders:
• When listing the shortcut appears as a folder and that folder will contain the contents of the linked
folder appear (including any sub folders)
• When downloading the contents of the linked folder and sub contents are downloaded
• When uploading to a shortcut folder the file will be placed in the linked folder
• When server-side moving (renaming) the shortcut is renamed, not the destination folder
• When server-side copying the contents of the linked folder is copied, not the shortcut.
• When deleting with rclone rmdir or rclone purge the shortcut is deleted not the linked folder.
• NB When deleting with rclone remove or rclone mount the contents of the linked folder will be deleted.
The rclone backend command can be used to create shortcuts.
Shortcuts can be completely ignored with the --drive-skip-shortcuts flag or the corresponding
skip_shortcuts configuration setting.
Emptying trash
If you wish to empty your trash you can use the rclone cleanup remote: command which will permanently
delete all your trashed files. This command does not take any path arguments.
Note that Google Drive takes some time (minutes to days) to empty the trash even though the command
returns within a few seconds. No output is echoed, so there will be no confirmation even using -v or
-vv.
Quota information
To view your current quota you can use the rclone about remote: command which will display your usage
limit (quota), the usage in Google Drive, the size of all files in the Trash and the space used by other
Google services such as Gmail. This command does not take any path arguments.
Import/Export of google documents
Google documents can be exported from and uploaded to Google Drive.
When rclone downloads a Google doc it chooses a format to download depending upon the
--drive-export-formats setting. By default the export formats are docx,xlsx,pptx,svg which are a
sensible default for an editable document.
When choosing a format, rclone runs down the list provided in order and chooses the first file format the
doc can be exported as from the list. If the file can’t be exported to a format on the formats list,
then rclone will choose a format from the default list.
If you prefer an archive copy then you might use --drive-export-formats pdf, or if you prefer
openoffice/libreoffice formats you might use --drive-export-formats ods,odt,odp.
Note that rclone adds the extension to the google doc, so if it is called My Spreadsheet on google docs,
it will be exported as My Spreadsheet.xlsx or My Spreadsheet.pdf etc.
When importing files into Google Drive, rclone will convert all files with an extension in
--drive-import-formats to their associated document type. rclone will not convert any files by default,
since the conversion is lossy process.
The conversion must result in a file with the same extension when the --drive-export-formats rules are
applied to the uploaded document.
Here are some examples for allowed and prohibited conversions.
export-formats import-formats Upload Ext Document Ext Allowed
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
odt odt odt odt Yes
odt docx,odt odt odt Yes
docx docx docx Yes
odt odt docx No
odt,docx docx,odt docx odt No
docx,odt docx,odt docx docx Yes
docx,odt docx,odt odt docx No
This limitation can be disabled by specifying --drive-allow-import-name-change. When using this flag,
rclone can convert multiple files types resulting in the same document type at once, e.g. with
--drive-import-formats docx,odt,txt, all files having these extension would result in a document
represented as a docx file. This brings the additional risk of overwriting a document, if multiple files
have the same stem. Many rclone operations will not handle this name change in any way. They assume an
equal name when copying files and might copy the file again or delete them when the name changes.
Here are the possible export extensions with their corresponding mime types. Most of these can also be
used for importing, but there more that are not listed here. Some of these additional ones might only be
available when the operating system provides the correct MIME type entries.
This list can be changed by Google Drive at any time and might not represent the currently available
conversions.
Extension Mime Type Description
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
bmp image/bmp Windows Bitmap format
csv text/csv Standard CSV format for
Spreadsheets
doc application/msword Classic Word file
docx application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.document Microsoft Office Document
epub application/epub+zip E-book format
html text/html An HTML Document
jpg image/jpeg A JPEG Image File
json application/vnd.google-apps.script+json JSON Text Format for
Google Apps scripts
odp application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation Openoffice Presentation
ods application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet Openoffice Spreadsheet
ods application/x-vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet Openoffice Spreadsheet
odt application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text Openoffice Document
pdf application/pdf Adobe PDF Format
pjpeg image/pjpeg Progressive JPEG Image
png image/png PNG Image Format
pptx application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.presentation Microsoft Office
Powerpoint
rtf application/rtf Rich Text Format
svg image/svg+xml Scalable Vector Graphics
Format
tsv text/tab-separated-values Standard TSV format for
spreadsheets
txt text/plain Plain Text
wmf application/x-msmetafile Windows Meta File
xls application/vnd.ms-excel Classic Excel file
xlsx application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet Microsoft Office
Spreadsheet
zip application/zip A ZIP file of HTML, Images
CSS
Google documents can also be exported as link files. These files will open a browser window for the
Google Docs website of that document when opened. The link file extension has to be specified as a
--drive-export-formats parameter. They will match all available Google Documents.
Extension Description OS Support
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
desktop freedesktop.org specified Linux
desktop entry
link.html An HTML Document with a All
redirect
url INI style link file macOS, Windows
webloc macOS specific XML format macOS
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to drive (Google Drive).
–drive-client-id
Google Application Client Id Setting your own is recommended. See
https://rclone.org/drive/#making-your-own-client-id for how to create your own. If you leave this blank,
it will use an internal key which is low performance.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-scope
Scope that rclone should use when requesting access from drive.
Properties:
• Config: scope
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SCOPE
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “drive”
• Full access all files, excluding Application Data Folder.
• “drive.readonly”
• Read-only access to file metadata and file contents.
• “drive.file”
• Access to files created by rclone only.
• These are visible in the drive website.
• File authorization is revoked when the user deauthorizes the app.
• “drive.appfolder”
• Allows read and write access to the Application Data folder.
• This is not visible in the drive website.
• “drive.metadata.readonly”
• Allows read-only access to file metadata but
• does not allow any access to read or download file content.
–drive-service-account-file
Service Account Credentials JSON file path.
Leave blank normally. Needed only if you want use SA instead of interactive login.
Leading ~ will be expanded in the file name as will environment variables such as ${RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR}.
Properties:
• Config: service_account_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SERVICE_ACCOUNT_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-alternate-export
Deprecated: No longer needed.
Properties:
• Config: alternate_export
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_ALTERNATE_EXPORT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to drive (Google Drive).
–drive-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-root-folder-id
ID of the root folder. Leave blank normally.
Fill in to access “Computers” folders (see docs), or for rclone to use a non root folder as its starting
point.
Properties:
• Config: root_folder_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_ROOT_FOLDER_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-service-account-credentials
Service Account Credentials JSON blob.
Leave blank normally. Needed only if you want use SA instead of interactive login.
Properties:
• Config: service_account_credentials
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SERVICE_ACCOUNT_CREDENTIALS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-team-drive
ID of the Shared Drive (Team Drive).
Properties:
• Config: team_drive
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_TEAM_DRIVE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-auth-owner-only
Only consider files owned by the authenticated user.
Properties:
• Config: auth_owner_only
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_AUTH_OWNER_ONLY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-use-trash
Send files to the trash instead of deleting permanently.
Defaults to true, namely sending files to the trash. Use --drive-use-trash=false to delete files
permanently instead.
Properties:
• Config: use_trash
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_USE_TRASH
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–drive-copy-shortcut-content
Server side copy contents of shortcuts instead of the shortcut.
When doing server side copies, normally rclone will copy shortcuts as shortcuts.
If this flag is used then rclone will copy the contents of shortcuts rather than shortcuts themselves
when doing server side copies.
Properties:
• Config: copy_shortcut_content
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_COPY_SHORTCUT_CONTENT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-skip-gdocs
Skip google documents in all listings.
If given, gdocs practically become invisible to rclone.
Properties:
• Config: skip_gdocs
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SKIP_GDOCS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-skip-checksum-gphotos
Skip MD5 checksum on Google photos and videos only.
Use this if you get checksum errors when transferring Google photos or videos.
Setting this flag will cause Google photos and videos to return a blank MD5 checksum.
Google photos are identified by being in the “photos” space.
Corrupted checksums are caused by Google modifying the image/video but not updating the checksum.
Properties:
• Config: skip_checksum_gphotos
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SKIP_CHECKSUM_GPHOTOS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-shared-with-me
Only show files that are shared with me.
Instructs rclone to operate on your “Shared with me” folder (where Google Drive lets you access the files
and folders others have shared with you).
This works both with the “list” (lsd, lsl, etc.) and the “copy” commands (copy, sync, etc.), and with
all other commands too.
Properties:
• Config: shared_with_me
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SHARED_WITH_ME
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-trashed-only
Only show files that are in the trash.
This will show trashed files in their original directory structure.
Properties:
• Config: trashed_only
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_TRASHED_ONLY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-starred-only
Only show files that are starred.
Properties:
• Config: starred_only
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_STARRED_ONLY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-formats
Deprecated: See export_formats.
Properties:
• Config: formats
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_FORMATS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-export-formats
Comma separated list of preferred formats for downloading Google docs.
Properties:
• Config: export_formats
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_EXPORT_FORMATS
• Type: string
• Default: “docx,xlsx,pptx,svg”
–drive-import-formats
Comma separated list of preferred formats for uploading Google docs.
Properties:
• Config: import_formats
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_IMPORT_FORMATS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-allow-import-name-change
Allow the filetype to change when uploading Google docs.
E.g. file.doc to file.docx. This will confuse sync and reupload every time.
Properties:
• Config: allow_import_name_change
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_ALLOW_IMPORT_NAME_CHANGE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-use-created-date
Use file created date instead of modified date.
Useful when downloading data and you want the creation date used in place of the last modified date.
WARNING: This flag may have some unexpected consequences.
When uploading to your drive all files will be overwritten unless they haven’t been modified since their
creation. And the inverse will occur while downloading. This side effect can be avoided by using the
“–checksum” flag.
This feature was implemented to retain photos capture date as recorded by google photos. You will first
need to check the “Create a Google Photos folder” option in your google drive settings. You can then
copy or move the photos locally and use the date the image was taken (created) set as the modification
date.
Properties:
• Config: use_created_date
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_USE_CREATED_DATE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-use-shared-date
Use date file was shared instead of modified date.
Note that, as with “–drive-use-created-date”, this flag may have unexpected consequences when
uploading/downloading files.
If both this flag and “–drive-use-created-date” are set, the created date is used.
Properties:
• Config: use_shared_date
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_USE_SHARED_DATE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-list-chunk
Size of listing chunk 100-1000, 0 to disable.
Properties:
• Config: list_chunk
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_LIST_CHUNK
• Type: int
• Default: 1000
–drive-impersonate
Impersonate this user when using a service account.
Properties:
• Config: impersonate
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_IMPERSONATE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to chunked upload.
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 8Mi
–drive-chunk-size
Upload chunk size.
Must a power of 2 >= 256k.
Making this larger will improve performance, but note that each chunk is buffered in memory one per
transfer.
Reducing this will reduce memory usage but decrease performance.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 8Mi
–drive-acknowledge-abuse
Set to allow files which return cannotDownloadAbusiveFile to be downloaded.
If downloading a file returns the error “This file has been identified as malware or spam and cannot be
downloaded” with the error code “cannotDownloadAbusiveFile” then supply this flag to rclone to indicate
you acknowledge the risks of downloading the file and rclone will download it anyway.
Properties:
• Config: acknowledge_abuse
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_ACKNOWLEDGE_ABUSE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-keep-revision-forever
Keep new head revision of each file forever.
Properties:
• Config: keep_revision_forever
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_KEEP_REVISION_FOREVER
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-size-as-quota
Show sizes as storage quota usage, not actual size.
Show the size of a file as the storage quota used. This is the current version plus any older versions
that have been set to keep forever.
WARNING: This flag may have some unexpected consequences.
It is not recommended to set this flag in your config - the recommended usage is using the flag form
–drive-size-as-quota when doing rclone ls/lsl/lsf/lsjson/etc only.
If you do use this flag for syncing (not recommended) then you will need to use –ignore size also.
Properties:
• Config: size_as_quota
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SIZE_AS_QUOTA
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-v2-download-min-size
If Object’s are greater, use drive v2 API to download.
Properties:
• Config: v2_download_min_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_V2_DOWNLOAD_MIN_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: off
–drive-pacer-min-sleep
Minimum time to sleep between API calls.
Properties:
• Config: pacer_min_sleep
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_PACER_MIN_SLEEP
• Type: Duration
• Default: 100ms
–drive-pacer-burst
Number of API calls to allow without sleeping.
Properties:
• Config: pacer_burst
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_PACER_BURST
• Type: int
• Default: 100
–drive-server-side-across-configs
Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different drive configs.
This can be useful if you wish to do a server-side copy between two different Google drives. Note that
this isn’t enabled by default because it isn’t easy to tell if it will work between any two
configurations.
Properties:
• Config: server_side_across_configs
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SERVER_SIDE_ACROSS_CONFIGS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-disable-http2
Disable drive using http2.
There is currently an unsolved issue with the google drive backend and HTTP/2. HTTP/2 is therefore
disabled by default for the drive backend but can be re-enabled here. When the issue is solved this flag
will be removed.
See: https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/3631
Properties:
• Config: disable_http2
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_DISABLE_HTTP2
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–drive-stop-on-upload-limit
Make upload limit errors be fatal.
At the time of writing it is only possible to upload 750 GiB of data to Google Drive a day (this is an
undocumented limit). When this limit is reached Google Drive produces a slightly different error
message. When this flag is set it causes these errors to be fatal. These will stop the in-progress
sync.
Note that this detection is relying on error message strings which Google don’t document so it may break
in the future.
See: https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues/3857
Properties:
• Config: stop_on_upload_limit
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_STOP_ON_UPLOAD_LIMIT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-stop-on-download-limit
Make download limit errors be fatal.
At the time of writing it is only possible to download 10 TiB of data from Google Drive a day (this is an
undocumented limit). When this limit is reached Google Drive produces a slightly different error
message. When this flag is set it causes these errors to be fatal. These will stop the in-progress
sync.
Note that this detection is relying on error message strings which Google don’t document so it may break
in the future.
Properties:
• Config: stop_on_download_limit
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_STOP_ON_DOWNLOAD_LIMIT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-skip-shortcuts
If set skip shortcut files.
Normally rclone dereferences shortcut files making them appear as if they are the original file (see the
shortcuts section). If this flag is set then rclone will ignore shortcut files completely.
Properties:
• Config: skip_shortcuts
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SKIP_SHORTCUTS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-skip-dangling-shortcuts
If set skip dangling shortcut files.
If this is set then rclone will not show any dangling shortcuts in listings.
Properties:
• Config: skip_dangling_shortcuts
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_SKIP_DANGLING_SHORTCUTS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–drive-resource-key
Resource key for accessing a link-shared file.
If you need to access files shared with a link like this
https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/XXX?resourcekey=YYY&usp=sharing
Then you will need to use the first part “XXX” as the “root_folder_id” and the second part “YYY” as the
“resource_key” otherwise you will get 404 not found errors when trying to access the directory.
See: https://developers.google.com/drive/api/guides/resource-keys
This resource key requirement only applies to a subset of old files.
Note also that opening the folder once in the web interface (with the user you’ve authenticated rclone
with) seems to be enough so that the resource key is no needed.
Properties:
• Config: resource_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_RESOURCE_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–drive-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_DRIVE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: InvalidUtf8
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the drive backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
get
Get command for fetching the drive config parameters
rclone backend get remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This is a get command which will be used to fetch the various drive config parameters
Usage Examples:
rclone backend get drive: [-o service_account_file] [-o chunk_size]
rclone rc backend/command command=get fs=drive: [-o service_account_file] [-o chunk_size]
Options:
• “chunk_size”: show the current upload chunk size
• “service_account_file”: show the current service account file
set
Set command for updating the drive config parameters
rclone backend set remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This is a set command which will be used to update the various drive config parameters
Usage Examples:
rclone backend set drive: [-o service_account_file=sa.json] [-o chunk_size=67108864]
rclone rc backend/command command=set fs=drive: [-o service_account_file=sa.json] [-o chunk_size=67108864]
Options:
• “chunk_size”: update the current upload chunk size
• “service_account_file”: update the current service account file
shortcut
Create shortcuts from files or directories
rclone backend shortcut remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command creates shortcuts from files or directories.
Usage:
rclone backend shortcut drive: source_item destination_shortcut
rclone backend shortcut drive: source_item -o target=drive2: destination_shortcut
In the first example this creates a shortcut from the “source_item” which can be a file or a directory to
the “destination_shortcut”. The “source_item” and the “destination_shortcut” should be relative paths
from “drive:”
In the second example this creates a shortcut from the “source_item” relative to “drive:” to the
“destination_shortcut” relative to “drive2:”. This may fail with a permission error if the user
authenticated with “drive2:” can’t read files from “drive:”.
Options:
• “target”: optional target remote for the shortcut destination
drives
List the Shared Drives available to this account
rclone backend drives remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command lists the Shared Drives (Team Drives) available to this account.
Usage:
rclone backend [-o config] drives drive:
This will return a JSON list of objects like this
[
{
"id": "0ABCDEF-01234567890",
"kind": "drive#teamDrive",
"name": "My Drive"
},
{
"id": "0ABCDEFabcdefghijkl",
"kind": "drive#teamDrive",
"name": "Test Drive"
}
]
With the -o config parameter it will output the list in a format suitable for adding to a config file to
make aliases for all the drives found and a combined drive.
[My Drive]
type = alias
remote = drive,team_drive=0ABCDEF-01234567890,root_folder_id=:
[Test Drive]
type = alias
remote = drive,team_drive=0ABCDEFabcdefghijkl,root_folder_id=:
[AllDrives]
type = combine
upstreams = "My Drive=My Drive:" "Test Drive=Test Drive:"
Adding this to the rclone config file will cause those team drives to be accessible with the aliases
shown. Any illegal characters will be substituted with “_” and duplicate names will have numbers
suffixed. It will also add a remote called AllDrives which shows all the shared drives combined into one
directory tree.
untrash
Untrash files and directories
rclone backend untrash remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command untrashes all the files and directories in the directory passed in recursively.
Usage:
This takes an optional directory to trash which make this easier to use via the API.
rclone backend untrash drive:directory
rclone backend -i untrash drive:directory subdir
Use the -i flag to see what would be restored before restoring it.
Result:
{
"Untrashed": 17,
"Errors": 0
}
copyid
Copy files by ID
rclone backend copyid remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command copies files by ID
Usage:
rclone backend copyid drive: ID path
rclone backend copyid drive: ID1 path1 ID2 path2
It copies the drive file with ID given to the path (an rclone path which will be passed internally to
rclone copyto). The ID and path pairs can be repeated.
The path should end with a / to indicate copy the file as named to this directory. If it doesn’t end
with a / then the last path component will be used as the file name.
If the destination is a drive backend then server-side copying will be attempted if possible.
Use the -i flag to see what would be copied before copying.
exportformats
Dump the export formats for debug purposes
rclone backend exportformats remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
importformats
Dump the import formats for debug purposes
rclone backend importformats remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Limitations
Drive has quite a lot of rate limiting. This causes rclone to be limited to transferring about 2 files
per second only. Individual files may be transferred much faster at 100s of MiB/s but lots of small
files can take a long time.
Server side copies are also subject to a separate rate limit. If you see User rate limit exceeded
errors, wait at least 24 hours and retry. You can disable server-side copies with --disable copy to
download and upload the files if you prefer.
Limitations of Google Docs
Google docs will appear as size -1 in rclone ls, rclone ncdu etc, and as size 0 in anything which uses
the VFS layer, e.g. rclone mount and rclone serve. When calculating directory totals, e.g. in rclone
size and rclone ncdu, they will be counted in as empty files.
This is because rclone can’t find out the size of the Google docs without downloading them.
Google docs will transfer correctly with rclone sync, rclone copy etc as rclone knows to ignore the size
when doing the transfer.
However an unfortunate consequence of this is that you may not be able to download Google docs using
rclone mount. If it doesn’t work you will get a 0 sized file. If you try again the doc may gain its
correct size and be downloadable. Whether it will work on not depends on the application accessing the
mount and the OS you are running - experiment to find out if it does work for you!
Duplicated files
Sometimes, for no reason I’ve been able to track down, drive will duplicate a file that rclone uploads.
Drive unlike all the other remotes can have duplicated files.
Duplicated files cause problems with the syncing and you will see messages in the log about duplicates.
Use rclone dedupe to fix duplicated files.
Note that this isn’t just a problem with rclone, even Google Photos on Android duplicates files on drive
sometimes.
Rclone appears to be re-copying files it shouldn’t
The most likely cause of this is the duplicated file issue above - run rclone dedupe and check your logs
for duplicate object or directory messages.
This can also be caused by a delay/caching on google drive’s end when comparing directory listings.
Specifically with team drives used in combination with –fast-list. Files that were uploaded recently may
not appear on the directory list sent to rclone when using –fast-list.
Waiting a moderate period of time between attempts (estimated to be approximately 1 hour) and/or not
using –fast-list both seem to be effective in preventing the problem.
Making your own client_id
When you use rclone with Google drive in its default configuration you are using rclone’s client_id.
This is shared between all the rclone users. There is a global rate limit on the number of queries per
second that each client_id can do set by Google. rclone already has a high quota and I will continue to
make sure it is high enough by contacting Google.
It is strongly recommended to use your own client ID as the default rclone ID is heavily used. If you
have multiple services running, it is recommended to use an API key for each service. The default Google
quota is 10 transactions per second so it is recommended to stay under that number as if you use more
than that, it will cause rclone to rate limit and make things slower.
Here is how to create your own Google Drive client ID for rclone:
1. Log into the Google API Console with your Google account. It doesn’t matter what Google account you
use. (It need not be the same account as the Google Drive you want to access)
2. Select a project or create a new project.
3. Under “ENABLE APIS AND SERVICES” search for “Drive”, and enable the “Google Drive API”.
4. Click “Credentials” in the left-side panel (not “Create credentials”, which opens the wizard), then
“Create credentials”
5. If you already configured an “Oauth Consent Screen”, then skip to the next step; if not, click on
“CONFIGURE CONSENT SCREEN” button (near the top right corner of the right panel), then select
“External” and click on “CREATE”; on the next screen, enter an “Application name” (“rclone” is OK);
enter “User Support Email” (your own email is OK); enter “Developer Contact Email” (your own email is
OK); then click on “Save” (all other data is optional). Click again on “Credentials” on the left
panel to go back to the “Credentials” screen.
(PS: if you are a GSuite user, you could also select “Internal” instead of “External” above, but this
will restrict API use to Google Workspace users in your organisation).
6. Click on the “+ CREATE CREDENTIALS” button at the top of the screen, then select “OAuth client ID”.
7. Choose an application type of “Desktop app” and click “Create”. (the default name is fine)
8. It will show you a client ID and client secret. Make a note of these.
(If you selected “External” at Step 5 continue to “Publish App” in the Steps 9 and 10. If you chose
“Internal” you don’t need to publish and can skip straight to Step 11.)
9. Go to “Oauth consent screen” and press “Publish App”
10. Click “OAuth consent screen”, then click “PUBLISH APP” button and confirm, or add your account under
“Test users”.
11. Provide the noted client ID and client secret to rclone.
Be aware that, due to the “enhanced security” recently introduced by Google, you are theoretically
expected to “submit your app for verification” and then wait a few weeks(!) for their response; in
practice, you can go right ahead and use the client ID and client secret with rclone, the only issue will
be a very scary confirmation screen shown when you connect via your browser for rclone to be able to get
its token-id (but as this only happens during the remote configuration, it’s not such a big deal).
(Thanks to @balazer on github for these instructions.)
Sometimes, creation of an OAuth consent in Google API Console fails due to an error message “The request
failed because changes to one of the field of the resource is not supported”. As a convenient
workaround, the necessary Google Drive API key can be created on the Python Quickstart page. Just push
the Enable the Drive API button to receive the Client ID and Secret. Note that it will automatically
create a new project in the API Console.
Google Photos
The rclone backend for Google Photos is a specialized backend for transferring photos and videos to and
from Google Photos.
NB The Google Photos API which rclone uses has quite a few limitations, so please read the limitations
section carefully to make sure it is suitable for your use.
Configuration
The initial setup for google cloud storage involves getting a token from Google Photos which you need to
do in your browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Google Photos
\ "google photos"
[snip]
Storage> google photos
** See help for google photos backend at: https://rclone.org/googlephotos/ **
Google Application Client Id
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
client_id>
Google Application Client Secret
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
client_secret>
Set to make the Google Photos backend read only.
If you choose read only then rclone will only request read only access
to your photos, otherwise rclone will request full access.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
read_only>
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
*** IMPORTANT: All media items uploaded to Google Photos with rclone
*** are stored in full resolution at original quality. These uploads
*** will count towards storage in your Google Account.
--------------------
[remote]
type = google photos
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"Bearer","refresh_token":"XXX","expiry":"2019-06-28T17:38:04.644930156+01:00"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Google if
you use auto config mode. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get
back the verification code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this may require you to unblock it
temporarily if you are running a host firewall, or use manual mode.
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all the albums in your photos
rclone lsd remote:album
Make a new album
rclone mkdir remote:album/newAlbum
List the contents of an album
rclone ls remote:album/newAlbum
Sync /home/local/images to the Google Photos, removing any excess files in the album.
rclone sync -i /home/local/image remote:album/newAlbum
Layout
As Google Photos is not a general purpose cloud storage system the backend is laid out to help you
navigate it.
The directories under media show different ways of categorizing the media. Each file will appear
multiple times. So if you want to make a backup of your google photos you might choose to backup
remote:media/by-month. (NB remote:media/by-day is rather slow at the moment so avoid for syncing.)
Note that all your photos and videos will appear somewhere under media, but they may not appear under
album unless you’ve put them into albums.
/
- upload
- file1.jpg
- file2.jpg
- ...
- media
- all
- file1.jpg
- file2.jpg
- ...
- by-year
- 2000
- file1.jpg
- ...
- 2001
- file2.jpg
- ...
- ...
- by-month
- 2000
- 2000-01
- file1.jpg
- ...
- 2000-02
- file2.jpg
- ...
- ...
- by-day
- 2000
- 2000-01-01
- file1.jpg
- ...
- 2000-01-02
- file2.jpg
- ...
- ...
- album
- album name
- album name/sub
- shared-album
- album name
- album name/sub
- feature
- favorites
- file1.jpg
- file2.jpg
There are two writable parts of the tree, the upload directory and sub directories of the album
directory.
The upload directory is for uploading files you don’t want to put into albums. This will be empty to
start with and will contain the files you’ve uploaded for one rclone session only, becoming empty again
when you restart rclone. The use case for this would be if you have a load of files you just want to
once off dump into Google Photos. For repeated syncing, uploading to album will work better.
Directories within the album directory are also writeable and you may create new directories (albums)
under album. If you copy files with a directory hierarchy in there then rclone will create albums with
the / character in them. For example if you do
rclone copy /path/to/images remote:album/images
and the images directory contains
images
- file1.jpg
dir
file2.jpg
dir2
dir3
file3.jpg
Then rclone will create the following albums with the following files in
• images
• file1.jpg
• images/dir
• file2.jpg
• images/dir2/dir3
• file3.jpg
This means that you can use the album path pretty much like a normal filesystem and it is a good target
for repeated syncing.
The shared-album directory shows albums shared with you or by you. This is similar to the Sharing tab in
the Google Photos web interface.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to google photos (Google Photos).
–gphotos-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gphotos-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gphotos-read-only
Set to make the Google Photos backend read only.
If you choose read only then rclone will only request read only access to your photos, otherwise rclone
will request full access.
Properties:
• Config: read_only
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_READ_ONLY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to google photos (Google Photos).
–gphotos-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gphotos-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gphotos-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–gphotos-read-size
Set to read the size of media items.
Normally rclone does not read the size of media items since this takes another transaction. This isn’t
necessary for syncing. However rclone mount needs to know the size of files in advance of reading them,
so setting this flag when using rclone mount is recommended if you want to read the media.
Properties:
• Config: read_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_READ_SIZE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–gphotos-start-year
Year limits the photos to be downloaded to those which are uploaded after the given year.
Properties:
• Config: start_year
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_START_YEAR
• Type: int
• Default: 2000
–gphotos-include-archived
Also view and download archived media.
By default, rclone does not request archived media. Thus, when syncing, archived media is not visible in
directory listings or transferred.
Note that media in albums is always visible and synced, no matter their archive status.
With this flag, archived media are always visible in directory listings and transferred.
Without this flag, archived media will not be visible in directory listings and won’t be transferred.
Properties:
• Config: include_archived
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_INCLUDE_ARCHIVED
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–gphotos-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_GPHOTOS_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,CrLf,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Only images and videos can be uploaded. If you attempt to upload non videos or images or formats that
Google Photos doesn’t understand, rclone will upload the file, then Google Photos will give an error when
it is put turned into a media item.
Note that all media items uploaded to Google Photos through the API are stored in full resolution at
“original quality” and will count towards your storage quota in your Google Account. The API does not
offer a way to upload in “high quality” mode..
rclone about is not supported by the Google Photos backend. Backends without this capability cannot
determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone
union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about See rclone about
Downloading Images
When Images are downloaded this strips EXIF location (according to the docs and my tests). This is a
limitation of the Google Photos API and is covered by bug #112096115.
The current google API does not allow photos to be downloaded at original resolution. This is very
important if you are, for example, relying on “Google Photos” as a backup of your photos. You will not
be able to use rclone to redownload original images. You could use `google takeout' to recover the
original photos as a last resort
Downloading Videos
When videos are downloaded they are downloaded in a really compressed version of the video compared to
downloading it via the Google Photos web interface. This is covered by bug #113672044.
Duplicates
If a file name is duplicated in a directory then rclone will add the file ID into its name. So two files
called file.jpg would then appear as file {123456}.jpg and file {ABCDEF}.jpg (the actual IDs are a lot
longer alas!).
If you upload the same image (with the same binary data) twice then Google Photos will deduplicate it.
However it will retain the filename from the first upload which may confuse rclone. For example if you
uploaded an image to upload then uploaded the same image to album/my_album the filename of the image in
album/my_album will be what it was uploaded with initially, not what you uploaded it with to album. In
practise this shouldn’t cause too many problems.
Modified time
The date shown of media in Google Photos is the creation date as determined by the EXIF information, or
the upload date if that is not known.
This is not changeable by rclone and is not the modification date of the media on local disk. This means
that rclone cannot use the dates from Google Photos for syncing purposes.
Size
The Google Photos API does not return the size of media. This means that when syncing to Google Photos,
rclone can only do a file existence check.
It is possible to read the size of the media, but this needs an extra HTTP HEAD request per media item so
is very slow and uses up a lot of transactions. This can be enabled with the --gphotos-read-size option
or the read_size = true config parameter.
If you want to use the backend with rclone mount you may need to enable this flag (depending on your OS
and application using the photos) otherwise you may not be able to read media off the mount. You’ll need
to experiment to see if it works for you without the flag.
Albums
Rclone can only upload files to albums it created. This is a limitation of the Google Photos API.
Rclone can remove files it uploaded from albums it created only.
Deleting files
Rclone can remove files from albums it created, but note that the Google Photos API does not allow media
to be deleted permanently so this media will still remain. See bug #109759781.
Rclone cannot delete files anywhere except under album.
Deleting albums
The Google Photos API does not support deleting albums - see bug #135714733.
Hasher (EXPERIMENTAL)
Hasher is a special overlay backend to create remotes which handle checksums for other remotes. It’s
main functions include: - Emulate hash types unimplemented by backends - Cache checksums to help with
slow hashing of large local or (S)FTP files - Warm up checksum cache from external SUM files
Getting started
To use Hasher, first set up the underlying remote following the configuration instructions for that
remote. You can also use a local pathname instead of a remote. Check that your base remote is working.
Let’s call the base remote myRemote:path here. Note that anything inside myRemote:path will be handled
by hasher and anything outside won’t. This means that if you are using a bucket based remote (S3, B2,
Swift) then you should put the bucket in the remote s3:bucket.
Now proceed to interactive or manual configuration.
Interactive configuration
Run rclone config:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> Hasher1
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Handle checksums for other remotes
\ "hasher"
[snip]
Storage> hasher
Remote to cache checksums for, like myremote:mypath.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
remote> myRemote:path
Comma separated list of supported checksum types.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("md5,sha1").
hashsums> md5
Maximum time to keep checksums in cache. 0 = no cache, off = cache forever.
max_age> off
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[Hasher1]
type = hasher
remote = myRemote:path
hashsums = md5
max_age = off
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Manual configuration
Run rclone config path to see the path of current active config file, usually
YOURHOME/.config/rclone/rclone.conf. Open it in your favorite text editor, find section for the base
remote and create new section for hasher like in the following examples:
[Hasher1]
type = hasher
remote = myRemote:path
hashes = md5
max_age = off
[Hasher2]
type = hasher
remote = /local/path
hashes = dropbox,sha1
max_age = 24h
Hasher takes basically the following parameters: - remote is required, - hashes is a comma separated list
of supported checksums (by default md5,sha1), - max_age - maximum time to keep a checksum value in the
cache, 0 will disable caching completely, off will cache “forever” (that is until the files get changed).
Make sure the remote has : (colon) in. If you specify the remote without a colon then rclone will use a
local directory of that name. So if you use a remote of /local/path then rclone will handle hashes for
that directory. If you use remote = name literally then rclone will put files in a directory called name
located under current directory.
Usage
Basic operations
Now you can use it as Hasher2:subdir/file instead of base remote. Hasher will transparently update cache
with new checksums when a file is fully read or overwritten, like:
rclone copy External:path/file Hasher:dest/path
rclone cat Hasher:path/to/file > /dev/null
The way to refresh all cached checksums (even unsupported by the base backend) for a subtree is to
re-download all files in the subtree. For example, use hashsum --download using any supported hashsum on
the command line (we just care to re-read):
rclone hashsum MD5 --download Hasher:path/to/subtree > /dev/null
rclone backend dump Hasher:path/to/subtree
You can print or drop hashsum cache using custom backend commands:
rclone backend dump Hasher:dir/subdir
rclone backend drop Hasher:
Pre-Seed from a SUM File
Hasher supports two backend commands: generic SUM file import and faster but less consistent
stickyimport.
rclone backend import Hasher:dir/subdir SHA1 /path/to/SHA1SUM [--checkers 4]
Instead of SHA1 it can be any hash supported by the remote. The last argument can point to either a
local or an other-remote:path text file in SUM format. The command will parse the SUM file, then walk
down the path given by the first argument, snapshot current fingerprints and fill in the cache entries
correspondingly. - Paths in the SUM file are treated as relative to hasher:dir/subdir. - The command
will not check that supplied values are correct. You must know what you are doing. - This is a one-time
action. The SUM file will not get “attached” to the remote. Cache entries can still be overwritten
later, should the object’s fingerprint change. - The tree walk can take long depending on the tree size.
You can increase --checkers to make it faster. Or use stickyimport if you don’t care about fingerprints
and consistency.
rclone backend stickyimport hasher:path/to/data sha1 remote:/path/to/sum.sha1
stickyimport is similar to import but works much faster because it does not need to stat existing files
and skips initial tree walk. Instead of binding cache entries to file fingerprints it creates sticky
entries bound to the file name alone ignoring size, modification time etc. Such hash entries can be
replaced only by purge, delete, backend drop or by full re-read/re-write of the files.
Configuration reference
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to hasher (Better checksums for other remotes).
–hasher-remote
Remote to cache checksums for (e.g. myRemote:path).
Properties:
• Config: remote
• Env Var: RCLONE_HASHER_REMOTE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–hasher-hashes
Comma separated list of supported checksum types.
Properties:
• Config: hashes
• Env Var: RCLONE_HASHER_HASHES
• Type: CommaSepList
• Default: md5,sha1
–hasher-max-age
Maximum time to keep checksums in cache (0 = no cache, off = cache forever).
Properties:
• Config: max_age
• Env Var: RCLONE_HASHER_MAX_AGE
• Type: Duration
• Default: off
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to hasher (Better checksums for other remotes).
–hasher-auto-size
Auto-update checksum for files smaller than this size (disabled by default).
Properties:
• Config: auto_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_HASHER_AUTO_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 0
Metadata
Any metadata supported by the underlying remote is read and written.
See the metadata docs for more info.
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the hasher backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
drop
Drop cache
rclone backend drop remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Completely drop checksum cache. Usage Example: rclone backend drop hasher:
dump
Dump the database
rclone backend dump remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Dump cache records covered by the current remote
fulldump
Full dump of the database
rclone backend fulldump remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Dump all cache records in the database
import
Import a SUM file
rclone backend import remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Amend hash cache from a SUM file and bind checksums to files by size/time. Usage Example: rclone backend
import hasher:subdir md5 /path/to/sum.md5
stickyimport
Perform fast import of a SUM file
rclone backend stickyimport remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
Fill hash cache from a SUM file without verifying file fingerprints. Usage Example: rclone backend
stickyimport hasher:subdir md5 remote:path/to/sum.md5
Implementation details (advanced)
This section explains how various rclone operations work on a hasher remote.
Disclaimer. This section describes current implementation which can change in future rclone versions!.
Hashsum command
The rclone hashsum (or md5sum or sha1sum) command will:
1. if requested hash is supported by lower level, just pass it.
2. if object size is below auto_size then download object and calculate requested hashes on the fly.
3. if unsupported and the size is big enough, build object fingerprint (including size, modtime if
supported, first-found other hash if any).
4. if the strict match is found in cache for the requested remote, return the stored hash.
5. if remote found but fingerprint mismatched, then purge the entry and proceed to step 6.
6. if remote not found or had no requested hash type or after step 5: download object, calculate all
supported hashes on the fly and store in cache; return requested hash.
Other operations
• whenever a file is uploaded or downloaded in full, capture the stream to calculate all supported hashes
on the fly and update database
• server-side move will update keys of existing cache entries
• deletefile will remove a single cache entry
• purge will remove all cache entries under the purged path
Note that setting max_age = 0 will disable checksum caching completely.
If you set max_age = off, checksums in cache will never age, unless you fully rewrite or delete the file.
Cache storage
Cached checksums are stored as bolt database files under rclone cache directory, usually
~/.cache/rclone/kv/. Databases are maintained one per base backend, named like BaseRemote~hasher.bolt.
Checksums for multiple alias-es into a single base backend will be stored in the single database. All
local paths are treated as aliases into the local backend (unless crypted or chunked) and stored in
~/.cache/rclone/kv/local~hasher.bolt. Databases can be shared between multiple rclone processes.
HDFS
https://hadoop.apache.org/docs/stable/hadoop-project-dist/hadoop-hdfs/HdfsDesign.html HDFS is a
distributed file-system, part of the Apache Hadoop framework.
Paths are specified as remote: or remote:path/to/dir.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[skip]
XX / Hadoop distributed file system
\ "hdfs"
[skip]
Storage> hdfs
** See help for hdfs backend at: https://rclone.org/hdfs/ **
hadoop name node and port
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to host namenode at port 8020
\ "namenode:8020"
namenode> namenode.hadoop:8020
hadoop user name
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to hdfs as root
\ "root"
username> root
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = hdfs
namenode = namenode.hadoop:8020
username = root
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
hadoop hdfs
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> q
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all the top level directories
rclone lsd remote:
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:directory
Sync the remote directory to /home/local/directory, deleting any excess files.
rclone sync -i remote:directory /home/local/directory
Setting up your own HDFS instance for testing
You may start with a https://hadoop.apache.org/docs/stable/hadoop-project-dist/hadoop-
common/SingleCluster.html manual setup or use the docker image from the tests:
If you want to build the docker image
git clone https://github.com/rclone/rclone.git
cd rclone/fstest/testserver/images/test-hdfs
docker build --rm -t rclone/test-hdfs .
Or you can just use the latest one pushed
docker run --rm --name "rclone-hdfs" -p 127.0.0.1:9866:9866 -p 127.0.0.1:8020:8020 --hostname "rclone-hdfs" rclone/test-hdfs
NB it need few seconds to startup.
For this docker image the remote needs to be configured like this:
[remote]
type = hdfs
namenode = 127.0.0.1:8020
username = root
You can stop this image with docker kill rclone-hdfs (NB it does not use volumes, so all data uploaded
will be lost.)
Modified time
Time accurate to 1 second is stored.
Checksum
No checksums are implemented.
Usage information
You can use the rclone about remote: command which will display filesystem size and current usage.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
: 0x3A ：
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to hdfs (Hadoop distributed file system).
–hdfs-namenode
Hadoop name node and port.
E.g. “namenode:8020” to connect to host namenode at port 8020.
Properties:
• Config: namenode
• Env Var: RCLONE_HDFS_NAMENODE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–hdfs-username
Hadoop user name.
Properties:
• Config: username
• Env Var: RCLONE_HDFS_USERNAME
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “root”
• Connect to hdfs as root.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to hdfs (Hadoop distributed file system).
–hdfs-service-principal-name
Kerberos service principal name for the namenode.
Enables KERBEROS authentication. Specifies the Service Principal Name (SERVICE/FQDN) for the namenode.
E.g. "hdfs/namenode.hadoop.docker" for namenode running as service `hdfs' with FQDN
`namenode.hadoop.docker'.
Properties:
• Config: service_principal_name
• Env Var: RCLONE_HDFS_SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_NAME
• Type: string
• Required: false
–hdfs-data-transfer-protection
Kerberos data transfer protection: authentication|integrity|privacy.
Specifies whether or not authentication, data signature integrity checks, and wire encryption is required
when communicating the the datanodes. Possible values are `authentication', `integrity' and `privacy'.
Used only with KERBEROS enabled.
Properties:
• Config: data_transfer_protection
• Env Var: RCLONE_HDFS_DATA_TRANSFER_PROTECTION
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “privacy”
• Ensure authentication, integrity and encryption enabled.
–hdfs-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_HDFS_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Colon,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
• No server-side Move or DirMove.
• Checksums not implemented.
HiDrive
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
The initial setup for hidrive involves getting a token from HiDrive which you need to do in your browser.
rclone config walks you through it.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found - make a new one
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / HiDrive
\ "hidrive"
[snip]
Storage> hidrive
OAuth Client Id - Leave blank normally.
client_id>
OAuth Client Secret - Leave blank normally.
client_secret>
Access permissions that rclone should use when requesting access from HiDrive.
Leave blank normally.
scope_access>
Edit advanced config?
y/n> n
Use auto config?
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth?state=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
type = hidrive
token = {"access_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","token_type":"Bearer","refresh_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","expiry":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
You should be aware that OAuth-tokens can be used to access your account and hence should not be shared
with other persons. See the below section for more information.
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from HiDrive.
This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the verification code.
The webserver runs on http://127.0.0.1:53682/. If local port 53682 is protected by a firewall you may
need to temporarily unblock the firewall to complete authorization.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your HiDrive root folder
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your HiDrive filesystem
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to a HiDrive directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Keeping your tokens safe
Any OAuth-tokens will be stored by rclone in the remote’s configuration file as unencrypted text. Anyone
can use a valid refresh-token to access your HiDrive filesystem without knowing your password. Therefore
you should make sure no one else can access your configuration.
It is possible to encrypt rclone’s configuration file. You can find information on securing your
configuration file by viewing the configuration encryption docs.
Invalid refresh token
As can be verified here, each refresh_token (for Native Applications) is valid for 60 days. If used to
access HiDrivei, its validity will be automatically extended.
This means that if you
• Don’t use the HiDrive remote for 60 days
then rclone will return an error which includes a text that implies the refresh token is invalid or
expired.
To fix this you will need to authorize rclone to access your HiDrive account again.
Using
rclone config reconnect remote:
the process is very similar to the process of initial setup exemplified before.
Modified time and hashes
HiDrive allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second.
HiDrive supports its own hash type which is used to verify the integrity of file contents after
successful transfers.
Restricted filename characters
HiDrive cannot store files or folders that include / (0x2F) or null-bytes (0x00) in their name. Any
other characters can be used in the names of files or folders. Additionally, files or folders cannot be
named either of the following: . or ..
Therefore rclone will automatically replace these characters, if files or folders are stored or accessed
with such names.
You can read about how this filename encoding works in general here.
Keep in mind that HiDrive only supports file or folder names with a length of 255 characters or less.
Transfers
HiDrive limits file sizes per single request to a maximum of 2 GiB. To allow storage of larger files and
allow for better upload performance, the hidrive backend will use a chunked transfer for files larger
than 96 MiB. Rclone will upload multiple parts/chunks of the file at the same time. Chunks in the
process of being uploaded are buffered in memory, so you may want to restrict this behaviour on systems
with limited resources.
You can customize this behaviour using the following options:
• chunk_size: size of file parts
• upload_cutoff: files larger or equal to this in size will use a chunked transfer
• upload_concurrency: number of file-parts to upload at the same time
See the below section about configuration options for more details.
Root folder
You can set the root folder for rclone. This is the directory that rclone considers to be the root of
your HiDrive.
Usually, you will leave this blank, and rclone will use the root of the account.
However, you can set this to restrict rclone to a specific folder hierarchy.
This works by prepending the contents of the root_prefix option to any paths accessed by rclone. For
example, the following two ways to access the home directory are equivalent:
rclone lsd --hidrive-root-prefix="/users/test/" remote:path
rclone lsd remote:/users/test/path
See the below section about configuration options for more details.
Directory member count
By default, rclone will know the number of directory members contained in a directory. For example,
rclone lsd uses this information.
The acquisition of this information will result in additional time costs for HiDrive’s API. When dealing
with large directory structures, it may be desirable to circumvent this time cost, especially when this
information is not explicitly needed. For this, the disable_fetching_member_count option can be used.
See the below section about configuration options for more details.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to hidrive (HiDrive).
–hidrive-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–hidrive-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–hidrive-scope-access
Access permissions that rclone should use when requesting access from HiDrive.
Properties:
• Config: scope_access
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_SCOPE_ACCESS
• Type: string
• Default: “rw”
• Examples:
• “rw”
• Read and write access to resources.
• “ro”
• Read-only access to resources.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to hidrive (HiDrive).
–hidrive-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–hidrive-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–hidrive-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–hidrive-scope-role
User-level that rclone should use when requesting access from HiDrive.
Properties:
• Config: scope_role
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_SCOPE_ROLE
• Type: string
• Default: “user”
• Examples:
• “user”
• User-level access to management permissions.
• This will be sufficient in most cases.
• “admin”
• Extensive access to management permissions.
• “owner”
• Full access to management permissions.
–hidrive-root-prefix
The root/parent folder for all paths.
Fill in to use the specified folder as the parent for all paths given to the remote. This way rclone can
use any folder as its starting point.
Properties:
• Config: root_prefix
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_ROOT_PREFIX
• Type: string
• Default: “/”
• Examples:
• “/”
• The topmost directory accessible by rclone.
• This will be equivalent with “root” if rclone uses a regular HiDrive user account.
• “root”
• The topmost directory of the HiDrive user account
• “”
• This specifies that there is no root-prefix for your paths.
• When using this you will always need to specify paths to this remote with a valid parent
e.g. “remote:/path/to/dir” or “remote:root/path/to/dir”.
–hidrive-endpoint
Endpoint for the service.
This is the URL that API-calls will be made to.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Default: “https://api.hidrive.strato.com/2.1”
–hidrive-disable-fetching-member-count
Do not fetch number of objects in directories unless it is absolutely necessary.
Requests may be faster if the number of objects in subdirectories is not fetched.
Properties:
• Config: disable_fetching_member_count
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_DISABLE_FETCHING_MEMBER_COUNT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–hidrive-chunk-size
Chunksize for chunked uploads.
Any files larger than the configured cutoff (or files of unknown size) will be uploaded in chunks of this
size.
The upper limit for this is 2147483647 bytes (about 2.000Gi). That is the maximum amount of bytes a
single upload-operation will support. Setting this above the upper limit or to a negative value will
cause uploads to fail.
Setting this to larger values may increase the upload speed at the cost of using more memory. It can be
set to smaller values smaller to save on memory.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 48Mi
–hidrive-upload-cutoff
Cutoff/Threshold for chunked uploads.
Any files larger than this will be uploaded in chunks of the configured chunksize.
The upper limit for this is 2147483647 bytes (about 2.000Gi). That is the maximum amount of bytes a
single upload-operation will support. Setting this above the upper limit will cause uploads to fail.
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 96Mi
–hidrive-upload-concurrency
Concurrency for chunked uploads.
This is the upper limit for how many transfers for the same file are running concurrently. Setting this
above to a value smaller than 1 will cause uploads to deadlock.
If you are uploading small numbers of large files over high-speed links and these uploads do not fully
utilize your bandwidth, then increasing this may help to speed up the transfers.
Properties:
• Config: upload_concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_UPLOAD_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 4
–hidrive-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_HIDRIVE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Dot
Limitations
Symbolic links
HiDrive is able to store symbolic links (symlinks) by design, for example, when unpacked from a zip
archive.
There exists no direct mechanism to manage native symlinks in remotes. As such this implementation has
chosen to ignore any native symlinks present in the remote. rclone will not be able to access or show
any symlinks stored in the hidrive-remote. This means symlinks cannot be individually removed, copied,
or moved, except when removing, copying, or moving the parent folder.
This does not affect the .rclonelink-files that rclone uses to encode and store symbolic links.
Sparse files
It is possible to store sparse files in HiDrive.
Note that copying a sparse file will expand the holes into null-byte (0x00) regions that will then
consume disk space. Likewise, when downloading a sparse file, the resulting file will have null-byte
regions in the place of file holes.
HTTP
The HTTP remote is a read only remote for reading files of a webserver. The webserver should provide
file listings which rclone will read and turn into a remote. This has been tested with common webservers
such as Apache/Nginx/Caddy and will likely work with file listings from most web servers. (If it doesn’t
then please file an issue, or send a pull request!)
Paths are specified as remote: or remote:path.
The remote: represents the configured url, and any path following it will be resolved relative to this
url, according to the URL standard. This means with remote url https://beta.rclone.org/branch and path
fix, the resolved URL will be https://beta.rclone.org/branch/fix, while with path /fix the resolved URL
will be https://beta.rclone.org/fix as the absolute path is resolved from the root of the domain.
If the path following the remote: ends with / it will be assumed to point to a directory. If the path
does not end with /, then a HEAD request is sent and the response used to decide if it it is treated as a
file or a directory (run with -vv to see details). When –http-no-head is specified, a path without
ending / is always assumed to be a file. If rclone incorrectly assumes the path is a file, the solution
is to specify the path with ending /. When you know the path is a directory, ending it with / is always
better as it avoids the initial HEAD request.
To just download a single file it is easier to use copyurl.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / HTTP
\ "http"
[snip]
Storage> http
URL of http host to connect to
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to example.com
\ "https://example.com"
url> https://beta.rclone.org
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
url = https://beta.rclone.org
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
remote http
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> q
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all the top level directories
rclone lsd remote:
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:directory
Sync the remote directory to /home/local/directory, deleting any excess files.
rclone sync -i remote:directory /home/local/directory
Read only
This remote is read only - you can’t upload files to an HTTP server.
Modified time
Most HTTP servers store time accurate to 1 second.
Checksum
No checksums are stored.
Usage without a config file
Since the http remote only has one config parameter it is easy to use without a config file:
rclone lsd --http-url https://beta.rclone.org :http:
or:
rclone lsd :http,url='https://beta.rclone.org':
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to http (HTTP).
–http-url
URL of HTTP host to connect to.
E.g. “https://example.com”, or “https://user:pass@example.com” to use a username and password.
Properties:
• Config: url
• Env Var: RCLONE_HTTP_URL
• Type: string
• Required: true
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to http (HTTP).
–http-headers
Set HTTP headers for all transactions.
Use this to set additional HTTP headers for all transactions.
The input format is comma separated list of key,value pairs. Standard CSV encoding may be used.
For example, to set a Cookie use `Cookie,name=value', or `“Cookie”,“name=value”'.
You can set multiple headers, e.g. `“Cookie”,“name=value”,“Authorization”,“xxx”'.
Properties:
• Config: headers
• Env Var: RCLONE_HTTP_HEADERS
• Type: CommaSepList
• Default:
–http-no-slash
Set this if the site doesn’t end directories with /.
Use this if your target website does not use / on the end of directories.
A / on the end of a path is how rclone normally tells the difference between files and directories. If
this flag is set, then rclone will treat all files with Content-Type: text/html as directories and read
URLs from them rather than downloading them.
Note that this may cause rclone to confuse genuine HTML files with directories.
Properties:
• Config: no_slash
• Env Var: RCLONE_HTTP_NO_SLASH
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–http-no-head
Don’t use HEAD requests.
HEAD requests are mainly used to find file sizes in dir listing. If your site is being very slow to load
then you can try this option. Normally rclone does a HEAD request for each potential file in a directory
listing to:
• find its size
• check it really exists
• check to see if it is a directory
If you set this option, rclone will not do the HEAD request. This will mean that directory listings are
much quicker, but rclone won’t have the times or sizes of any files, and some files that don’t exist may
be in the listing.
Properties:
• Config: no_head
• Env Var: RCLONE_HTTP_NO_HEAD
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the HTTP backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine
free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Internet Archive
The Internet Archive backend utilizes Items on archive.org
Refer to IAS3 API documentation for the API this backend uses.
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:item/path/to/dir.
Unlike S3, listing up all items uploaded by you isn’t supported.
Once you have made a remote, you can use it like this:
Make a new item
rclone mkdir remote:item
List the contents of a item
rclone ls remote:item
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote item, deleting any excess files in the item.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:item
Notes
Because of Internet Archive’s architecture, it enqueues write operations (and extra post-processings) in
a per-item queue. You can check item’s queue at https://catalogd.archive.org/history/item-name-here .
Because of that, all uploads/deletes will not show up immediately and takes some time to be available.
The per-item queue is enqueued to an another queue, Item Deriver Queue. You can check the status of Item
Deriver Queue here. This queue has a limit, and it may block you from uploading, or even deleting. You
should avoid uploading a lot of small files for better behavior.
You can optionally wait for the server’s processing to finish, by setting non-zero value to wait_archive
key. By making it wait, rclone can do normal file comparison. Make sure to set a large enough value
(e.g. 30m0s for smaller files) as it can take a long time depending on server’s queue.
About metadata
This backend supports setting, updating and reading metadata of each file. The metadata will appear as
file metadata on Internet Archive. However, some fields are reserved by both Internet Archive and
rclone.
The following are reserved by Internet Archive: - name - source - size - md5 - crc32 - sha1 - format -
old_version - viruscheck - summation
Trying to set values to these keys is ignored with a warning. Only setting mtime is an exception. Doing
so make it the identical behavior as setting ModTime.
rclone reserves all the keys starting with rclone-. Setting value for these keys will give you warnings,
but values are set according to request.
If there are multiple values for a key, only the first one is returned. This is a limitation of rclone,
that supports one value per one key. It can be triggered when you did a server-side copy.
Reading metadata will also provide custom (non-standard nor reserved) ones.
Configuration
Here is an example of making an internetarchive configuration. Most applies to the other providers as
well, any differences are described below.
First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
XX / InternetArchive Items
\ (internetarchive)
Storage> internetarchive
Option access_key_id.
IAS3 Access Key.
Leave blank for anonymous access.
You can find one here: https://archive.org/account/s3.php
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
access_key_id> XXXX
Option secret_access_key.
IAS3 Secret Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
secret_access_key> XXXX
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> y
Option endpoint.
IAS3 Endpoint.
Leave blank for default value.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default (https://s3.us.archive.org).
endpoint>
Option front_endpoint.
Host of InternetArchive Frontend.
Leave blank for default value.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default (https://archive.org).
front_endpoint>
Option disable_checksum.
Don't store MD5 checksum with object metadata.
Normally rclone will calculate the MD5 checksum of the input before
uploading it so it can ask the server to check the object against checksum.
This is great for data integrity checking but can cause long delays for
large files to start uploading.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default (true).
disable_checksum> true
Option encoding.
The encoding for the backend.
See the [encoding section in the overview](https://rclone.org/overview/#encoding) for more info.
Enter a encoder.MultiEncoder value. Press Enter for the default (Slash,Question,Hash,Percent,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot).
encoding>
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
--------------------
[remote]
type = internetarchive
access_key_id = XXXX
secret_access_key = XXXX
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to internetarchive (Internet Archive).
–internetarchive-access-key-id
IAS3 Access Key.
Leave blank for anonymous access. You can find one here: https://archive.org/account/s3.php
Properties:
• Config: access_key_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_ACCESS_KEY_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–internetarchive-secret-access-key
IAS3 Secret Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access.
Properties:
• Config: secret_access_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to internetarchive (Internet Archive).
–internetarchive-endpoint
IAS3 Endpoint.
Leave blank for default value.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Default: “https://s3.us.archive.org”
–internetarchive-front-endpoint
Host of InternetArchive Frontend.
Leave blank for default value.
Properties:
• Config: front_endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_FRONT_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Default: “https://archive.org”
–internetarchive-disable-checksum
Don’t ask the server to test against MD5 checksum calculated by rclone. Normally rclone will calculate
the MD5 checksum of the input before uploading it so it can ask the server to check the object against
checksum. This is great for data integrity checking but can cause long delays for large files to start
uploading.
Properties:
• Config: disable_checksum
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_DISABLE_CHECKSUM
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–internetarchive-wait-archive
Timeout for waiting the server’s processing tasks (specifically archive and book_op) to finish. Only
enable if you need to be guaranteed to be reflected after write operations. 0 to disable waiting. No
errors to be thrown in case of timeout.
Properties:
• Config: wait_archive
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_WAIT_ARCHIVE
• Type: Duration
• Default: 0s
–internetarchive-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_INTERNETARCHIVE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,LtGt,CrLf,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Metadata
Metadata fields provided by Internet Archive. If there are multiple values for a key, only the first one
is returned. This is a limitation of Rclone, that supports one value per one key.
Owner is able to add custom keys. Metadata feature grabs all the keys including them.
Here are the possible system metadata items for the internetarchive backend.
Name Help Type Example Read Only
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
crc32 CRC32 string 01234567 Y
calculated
by Internet
Archive
format Name of string Comma-Separated Y
format Values
identified
by Internet
Archive
md5 MD5 hash string 01234567012345670123456701234567 Y
calculated
by Internet
Archive
mtime Time of RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z Y
last
modification,
managed by
Rclone
name Full file filename backend/internetarchive/internetarchive.go Y
path, without
the bucket
part
old_version Whether the boolean true Y
file was
replaced and
moved by
keep-old-version
flag
rclone-ia-mtime Time of last RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z N
modification,
managed by
Internet Archive
rclone-mtime Time of last RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z N
modification,
managed by
Rclone
rclone-update-track Random value string aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa N
used by Rclone
for tracking
changes inside
Internet Archive
sha1 SHA1 hash string 0123456701234567012345670123456701234567 Y
calculated by
Internet Archive
size File size in decimal 123456 Y
bytes number
source The source of string original Y
the file
summation Check string md5 Y
https://forum.rclone.org/t/31922
for how it is
used
viruscheck The last time viruscheck process unixtime 1654191352 Y
was run for the file (?)
See the metadata docs for more info.
Jottacloud
Jottacloud is a cloud storage service provider from a Norwegian company, using its own datacenters in
Norway. In addition to the official service at jottacloud.com, it also provides white-label solutions to
different companies, such as: * Telia * Telia Cloud (cloud.telia.se) * Telia Sky (sky.telia.no) * Tele2 *
Tele2 Cloud (mittcloud.tele2.se) * Elkjøp (with subsidiaries): * Elkjøp Cloud (cloud.elkjop.no) *
Elgiganten Sweden (cloud.elgiganten.se) * Elgiganten Denmark (cloud.elgiganten.dk) * Giganti Cloud
(cloud.gigantti.fi) * ELKO Cloud (cloud.elko.is)
Most of the white-label versions are supported by this backend, although may require different
authentication setup - described below.
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Authentication types
Some of the whitelabel versions uses a different authentication method than the official service, and you
have to choose the correct one when setting up the remote.
Standard authentication
The standard authentication method used by the official service (jottacloud.com), as well as some of the
whitelabel services, requires you to generate a single-use personal login token from the account security
settings in the service’s web interface. Log in to your account, go to “Settings” and then “Security”,
or use the direct link presented to you by rclone when configuring the remote:
https://www.jottacloud.com/web/secure. Scroll down to the section “Personal login token”, and click the
“Generate” button. Note that if you are using a whitelabel service you probably can’t use the direct
link, you need to find the same page in their dedicated web interface, and also it may be in a different
location than described above.
To access your account from multiple instances of rclone, you need to configure each of them with a
separate personal login token. E.g. you create a Jottacloud remote with rclone in one location, and
copy the configuration file to a second location where you also want to run rclone and access the same
remote. Then you need to replace the token for one of them, using the config reconnect command, which
requires you to generate a new personal login token and supply as input. If you do not do this, the
token may easily end up being invalidated, resulting in both instances failing with an error message
something along the lines of:
oauth2: cannot fetch token: 400 Bad Request
Response: {"error":"invalid_grant","error_description":"Stale token"}
When this happens, you need to replace the token as described above to be able to use your remote again.
All personal login tokens you have taken into use will be listed in the web interface under “My logged in
devices”, and from the right side of that list you can click the “X” button to revoke individual tokens.
Legacy authentication
If you are using one of the whitelabel versions (e.g. from Elkjøp) you may not have the option to
generate a CLI token. In this case you’ll have to use the legacy authentication. To do this select yes
when the setup asks for legacy authentication and enter your username and password. The rest of the
setup is identical to the default setup.
Telia Cloud authentication
Similar to other whitelabel versions Telia Cloud doesn’t offer the option of creating a CLI token, and
additionally uses a separate authentication flow where the username is generated internally. To setup
rclone to use Telia Cloud, choose Telia Cloud authentication in the setup. The rest of the setup is
identical to the default setup.
Tele2 Cloud authentication
As Tele2-Com Hem merger was completed this authentication can be used for former Com Hem Cloud and Tele2
Cloud customers as no support for creating a CLI token exists, and additionally uses a separate
authentication flow where the username is generated internally. To setup rclone to use Tele2 Cloud,
choose Tele2 Cloud authentication in the setup. The rest of the setup is identical to the default setup.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote with the default setup. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
XX / Jottacloud
\ (jottacloud)
[snip]
Storage> jottacloud
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Option config_type.
Select authentication type.
Choose a number from below, or type in an existing string value.
Press Enter for the default (standard).
/ Standard authentication.
1 | Use this if you're a normal Jottacloud user.
\ (standard)
/ Legacy authentication.
2 | This is only required for certain whitelabel versions of Jottacloud and not recommended for normal users.
\ (legacy)
/ Telia Cloud authentication.
3 | Use this if you are using Telia Cloud.
\ (telia)
/ Tele2 Cloud authentication.
4 | Use this if you are using Tele2 Cloud.
\ (tele2)
config_type> 1
Personal login token.
Generate here: https://www.jottacloud.com/web/secure
Login Token> <your token here>
Use a non-standard device/mountpoint?
Choosing no, the default, will let you access the storage used for the archive
section of the official Jottacloud client. If you instead want to access the
sync or the backup section, for example, you must choose yes.
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> y
Option config_device.
The device to use. In standard setup the built-in Jotta device is used,
which contains predefined mountpoints for archive, sync etc. All other devices
are treated as backup devices by the official Jottacloud client. You may create
a new by entering a unique name.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own string value.
Press Enter for the default (DESKTOP-3H31129).
1 > DESKTOP-3H31129
2 > Jotta
config_device> 2
Option config_mountpoint.
The mountpoint to use for the built-in device Jotta.
The standard setup is to use the Archive mountpoint. Most other mountpoints
have very limited support in rclone and should generally be avoided.
Choose a number from below, or type in an existing string value.
Press Enter for the default (Archive).
1 > Archive
2 > Shared
3 > Sync
config_mountpoint> 1
--------------------
[remote]
type = jottacloud
configVersion = 1
client_id = jottacli
client_secret =
tokenURL = https://id.jottacloud.com/auth/realms/jottacloud/protocol/openid-connect/token
token = {........}
username = 2940e57271a93d987d6f8a21
device = Jotta
mountpoint = Archive
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Jottacloud
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your Jottacloud
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an Jottacloud directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Devices and Mountpoints
The official Jottacloud client registers a device for each computer you install it on, and shows them in
the backup section of the user interface. For each folder you select for backup it will create a
mountpoint within this device. A built-in device called Jotta is special, and contains mountpoints
Archive, Sync and some others, used for corresponding features in official clients.
With rclone you’ll want to use the standard Jotta/Archive device/mountpoint in most cases. However, you
may for example want to access files from the sync or backup functionality provided by the official
clients, and rclone therefore provides the option to select other devices and mountpoints during config.
You are allowed to create new devices and mountpoints. All devices except the built-in Jotta device are
treated as backup devices by official Jottacloud clients, and the mountpoints on them are individual
backup sets.
With the built-in Jotta device, only existing, built-in, mountpoints can be selected. In addition to the
mentioned Archive and Sync, it may contain several other mountpoints such as: Latest, Links, Shared and
Trash. All of these are special mountpoints with a different internal representation than the “regular”
mountpoints. Rclone will only to a very limited degree support them. Generally you should avoid these,
unless you know what you are doing.
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
Note that the implementation in Jottacloud always uses only a single API request to get the entire list,
so for large folders this could lead to long wait time before the first results are shown.
Note also that with rclone version 1.58 and newer information about MIME types are not available when
using --fast-list.
Modified time and hashes
Jottacloud allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second. These will be used to
detect whether objects need syncing or not.
Jottacloud supports MD5 type hashes, so you can use the --checksum flag.
Note that Jottacloud requires the MD5 hash before upload so if the source does not have an MD5 checksum
then the file will be cached temporarily on disk (in location given by –temp-dir) before it is uploaded.
Small files will be cached in memory - see the –jottacloud-md5-memory-limit flag. When uploading from
local disk the source checksum is always available, so this does not apply. Starting with rclone version
1.52 the same is true for crypted remotes (in older versions the crypt backend would not calculate hashes
for uploads from local disk, so the Jottacloud backend had to do it as described above).
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
” 0x22 ＂
* 0x2A ＊
: 0x3A ：
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
? 0x3F ？
| 0x7C ｜
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in XML strings.
Deleting files
By default, rclone will send all files to the trash when deleting files. They will be permanently
deleted automatically after 30 days. You may bypass the trash and permanently delete files immediately
by using the –jottacloud-hard-delete flag, or set the equivalent environment variable. Emptying the
trash is supported by the cleanup command.
Versions
Jottacloud supports file versioning. When rclone uploads a new version of a file it creates a new
version of it. Currently rclone only supports retrieving the current version but older versions can be
accessed via the Jottacloud Website.
Versioning can be disabled by --jottacloud-no-versions option. This is achieved by deleting the remote
file prior to uploading a new version. If the upload the fails no version of the file will be available
in the remote.
Quota information
To view your current quota you can use the rclone about remote: command which will display your usage
limit (unless it is unlimited) and the current usage.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to jottacloud (Jottacloud).
–jottacloud-md5-memory-limit
Files bigger than this will be cached on disk to calculate the MD5 if required.
Properties:
• Config: md5_memory_limit
• Env Var: RCLONE_JOTTACLOUD_MD5_MEMORY_LIMIT
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 10Mi
–jottacloud-trashed-only
Only show files that are in the trash.
This will show trashed files in their original directory structure.
Properties:
• Config: trashed_only
• Env Var: RCLONE_JOTTACLOUD_TRASHED_ONLY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–jottacloud-hard-delete
Delete files permanently rather than putting them into the trash.
Properties:
• Config: hard_delete
• Env Var: RCLONE_JOTTACLOUD_HARD_DELETE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–jottacloud-upload-resume-limit
Files bigger than this can be resumed if the upload fail’s.
Properties:
• Config: upload_resume_limit
• Env Var: RCLONE_JOTTACLOUD_UPLOAD_RESUME_LIMIT
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 10Mi
–jottacloud-no-versions
Avoid server side versioning by deleting files and recreating files instead of overwriting them.
Properties:
• Config: no_versions
• Env Var: RCLONE_JOTTACLOUD_NO_VERSIONS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–jottacloud-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_JOTTACLOUD_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that Jottacloud is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
There are quite a few characters that can’t be in Jottacloud file names. Rclone will map these names to
and from an identical looking unicode equivalent. For example if a file has a ? in it will be mapped to
？ instead.
Jottacloud only supports filenames up to 255 characters in length.
Troubleshooting
Jottacloud exhibits some inconsistent behaviours regarding deleted files and folders which may cause
Copy, Move and DirMove operations to previously deleted paths to fail. Emptying the trash should help in
such cases.
Koofr
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for Koofr involves creating an application password for rclone. You can do that by
opening the Koofr web application, giving the password a nice name like rclone and clicking on generate.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called koofr. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> koofr
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
22 / Koofr, Digi Storage and other Koofr-compatible storage providers
\ (koofr)
[snip]
Storage> koofr
Option provider.
Choose your storage provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Koofr, https://app.koofr.net/
\ (koofr)
2 / Digi Storage, https://storage.rcs-rds.ro/
\ (digistorage)
3 / Any other Koofr API compatible storage service
\ (other)
provider> 1
Option user.
Your user name.
Enter a value.
user> USERNAME
Option password.
Your password for rclone (generate one at https://app.koofr.net/app/admin/preferences/password).
Choose an alternative below.
y) Yes, type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[koofr]
type = koofr
provider = koofr
user = USERNAME
password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
You can choose to edit advanced config in order to enter your own service URL if you use an on-premise or
white label Koofr instance, or choose an alternative mount instead of your primary storage.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Koofr
rclone lsd koofr:
List all the files in your Koofr
rclone ls koofr:
To copy a local directory to an Koofr directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source koofr:backup
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in XML strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to koofr (Koofr, Digi Storage and other Koofr-compatible storage
providers).
–koofr-provider
Choose your storage provider.
Properties:
• Config: provider
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_PROVIDER
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “koofr”
• Koofr, https://app.koofr.net/
• “digistorage”
• Digi Storage, https://storage.rcs-rds.ro/
• “other”
• Any other Koofr API compatible storage service
–koofr-endpoint
The Koofr API endpoint to use.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_ENDPOINT
• Provider: other
• Type: string
• Required: true
–koofr-user
Your user name.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_USER
• Type: string
• Required: true
–koofr-password
Your password for rclone (generate one at https://app.koofr.net/app/admin/preferences/password).
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_PASSWORD
• Provider: koofr
• Type: string
• Required: true
–koofr-password
Your password for rclone (generate one at https://storage.rcs-rds.ro/app/admin/preferences/password).
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_PASSWORD
• Provider: digistorage
• Type: string
• Required: true
–koofr-password
Your password for rclone (generate one at your service’s settings page).
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_PASSWORD
• Provider: other
• Type: string
• Required: true
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to koofr (Koofr, Digi Storage and other Koofr-compatible storage
providers).
–koofr-mountid
Mount ID of the mount to use.
If omitted, the primary mount is used.
Properties:
• Config: mountid
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_MOUNTID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–koofr-setmtime
Does the backend support setting modification time.
Set this to false if you use a mount ID that points to a Dropbox or Amazon Drive backend.
Properties:
• Config: setmtime
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_SETMTIME
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–koofr-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_KOOFR_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that Koofr is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
Providers
Koofr
This is the original Koofr storage provider used as main example and described in the configuration
section above.
Digi Storage
Digi Storage is a cloud storage service run by Digi.ro that provides a Koofr API.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called ds. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> ds
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
22 / Koofr, Digi Storage and other Koofr-compatible storage providers
\ (koofr)
[snip]
Storage> koofr
Option provider.
Choose your storage provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Koofr, https://app.koofr.net/
\ (koofr)
2 / Digi Storage, https://storage.rcs-rds.ro/
\ (digistorage)
3 / Any other Koofr API compatible storage service
\ (other)
provider> 2
Option user.
Your user name.
Enter a value.
user> USERNAME
Option password.
Your password for rclone (generate one at https://storage.rcs-rds.ro/app/admin/preferences/password).
Choose an alternative below.
y) Yes, type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
--------------------
[ds]
type = koofr
provider = digistorage
user = USERNAME
password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Other
You may also want to use another, public or private storage provider that runs a Koofr API compatible
service, by simply providing the base URL to connect to.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called other. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> other
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
22 / Koofr, Digi Storage and other Koofr-compatible storage providers
\ (koofr)
[snip]
Storage> koofr
Option provider.
Choose your storage provider.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
Press Enter to leave empty.
1 / Koofr, https://app.koofr.net/
\ (koofr)
2 / Digi Storage, https://storage.rcs-rds.ro/
\ (digistorage)
3 / Any other Koofr API compatible storage service
\ (other)
provider> 3
Option endpoint.
The Koofr API endpoint to use.
Enter a value.
endpoint> https://koofr.other.org
Option user.
Your user name.
Enter a value.
user> USERNAME
Option password.
Your password for rclone (generate one at your service's settings page).
Choose an alternative below.
y) Yes, type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
--------------------
[other]
type = koofr
provider = other
endpoint = https://koofr.other.org
user = USERNAME
password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Mail.ru Cloud
Mail.ru Cloud is a cloud storage provided by a Russian internet company Mail.Ru Group. The official
desktop client is Disk-O:, available on Windows and Mac OS.
Currently it is recommended to disable 2FA on Mail.ru accounts intended for rclone until it gets
eventually implemented.
Features highlights
• Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory
• Files have a last modified time property, directories don’t
• Deleted files are by default moved to the trash
• Files and directories can be shared via public links
• Partial uploads or streaming are not supported, file size must be known before upload
• Maximum file size is limited to 2G for a free account, unlimited for paid accounts
• Storage keeps hash for all files and performs transparent deduplication, the hash algorithm is a
modified SHA1
• If a particular file is already present in storage, one can quickly submit file hash instead of long
file upload (this optimization is supported by rclone)
Configuration
Here is an example of making a mailru configuration.
First create a Mail.ru Cloud account and choose a tariff.
You will need to log in and create an app password for rclone. Rclone will not work with your normal
username and password - it will give an error like oauth2: server response missing access_token.
• Click on your user icon in the top right
• Go to Security / “Пароль и безопасность”
• Click password for apps / “Пароли для внешних приложений”
• Add the password - give it a name - eg “rclone”
• Copy the password and use this password below - your normal login password won’t work.
Now run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Mail.ru Cloud
\ "mailru"
[snip]
Storage> mailru
User name (usually email)
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
user> username@mail.ru
Password
This must be an app password - rclone will not work with your normal
password. See the Configuration section in the docs for how to make an
app password.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Skip full upload if there is another file with same data hash.
This feature is called "speedup" or "put by hash". It is especially efficient
in case of generally available files like popular books, video or audio clips
[snip]
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("true").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enable
\ "true"
2 / Disable
\ "false"
speedup_enable> 1
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = mailru
user = username@mail.ru
pass = *** ENCRYPTED ***
speedup_enable = true
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Configuration of this backend does not require a local web browser. You can use the configured backend
as shown below:
See top level directories
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new directory
rclone mkdir remote:directory
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:directory
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote path, deleting any excess files in the path.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:directory
Modified time
Files support a modification time attribute with up to 1 second precision. Directories do not have a
modification time, which is shown as “Jan 1 1970”.
Hash checksums
Hash sums use a custom Mail.ru algorithm based on SHA1. If file size is less than or equal to the SHA1
block size (20 bytes), its hash is simply its data right-padded with zero bytes. Hash sum of a larger
file is computed as a SHA1 sum of the file data bytes concatenated with a decimal representation of the
data length.
Emptying Trash
Removing a file or directory actually moves it to the trash, which is not visible to rclone but can be
seen in a web browser. The trashed file still occupies part of total quota. If you wish to empty your
trash and free some quota, you can use the rclone cleanup remote: command, which will permanently delete
all your trashed files. This command does not take any path arguments.
Quota information
To view your current quota you can use the rclone about remote: command which will display your usage
limit (quota) and the current usage.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
” 0x22 ＂
* 0x2A ＊
: 0x3A ：
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
? 0x3F ？
\ 0x5C ＼
| 0x7C ｜
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to mailru (Mail.ru Cloud).
–mailru-user
User name (usually email).
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_USER
• Type: string
• Required: true
–mailru-pass
Password.
This must be an app password - rclone will not work with your normal password. See the Configuration
section in the docs for how to make an app password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: true
–mailru-speedup-enable
Skip full upload if there is another file with same data hash.
This feature is called “speedup” or “put by hash”. It is especially efficient in case of generally
available files like popular books, video or audio clips, because files are searched by hash in all
accounts of all mailru users. It is meaningless and ineffective if source file is unique or encrypted.
Please note that rclone may need local memory and disk space to calculate content hash in advance and
decide whether full upload is required. Also, if rclone does not know file size in advance (e.g. in case
of streaming or partial uploads), it will not even try this optimization.
Properties:
• Config: speedup_enable
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_SPEEDUP_ENABLE
• Type: bool
• Default: true
• Examples:
• “true”
• Enable
• “false”
• Disable
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to mailru (Mail.ru Cloud).
–mailru-speedup-file-patterns
Comma separated list of file name patterns eligible for speedup (put by hash).
Patterns are case insensitive and can contain ’*’ or `?' meta characters.
Properties:
• Config: speedup_file_patterns
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_SPEEDUP_FILE_PATTERNS
• Type: string
• Default: “.mkv,.avi,.mp4,.mp3,.zip,.gz,.rar,.pdf”
• Examples:
• “”
• Empty list completely disables speedup (put by hash).
• “*”
• All files will be attempted for speedup.
• “.mkv,.avi,.mp4,.mp3”
• Only common audio/video files will be tried for put by hash.
• “.zip,.gz,.rar,.pdf”
• Only common archives or PDF books will be tried for speedup.
–mailru-speedup-max-disk
This option allows you to disable speedup (put by hash) for large files.
Reason is that preliminary hashing can exhaust your RAM or disk space.
Properties:
• Config: speedup_max_disk
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_SPEEDUP_MAX_DISK
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 3Gi
• Examples:
• “0”
• Completely disable speedup (put by hash).
• “1G”
• Files larger than 1Gb will be uploaded directly.
• “3G”
• Choose this option if you have less than 3Gb free on local disk.
–mailru-speedup-max-memory
Files larger than the size given below will always be hashed on disk.
Properties:
• Config: speedup_max_memory
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_SPEEDUP_MAX_MEMORY
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 32Mi
• Examples:
• “0”
• Preliminary hashing will always be done in a temporary disk location.
• “32M”
• Do not dedicate more than 32Mb RAM for preliminary hashing.
• “256M”
• You have at most 256Mb RAM free for hash calculations.
–mailru-check-hash
What should copy do if file checksum is mismatched or invalid.
Properties:
• Config: check_hash
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_CHECK_HASH
• Type: bool
• Default: true
• Examples:
• “true”
• Fail with error.
• “false”
• Ignore and continue.
–mailru-user-agent
HTTP user agent used internally by client.
Defaults to “rclone/VERSION” or “–user-agent” provided on command line.
Properties:
• Config: user_agent
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_USER_AGENT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–mailru-quirks
Comma separated list of internal maintenance flags.
This option must not be used by an ordinary user. It is intended only to facilitate remote
troubleshooting of backend issues. Strict meaning of flags is not documented and not guaranteed to
persist between releases. Quirks will be removed when the backend grows stable. Supported quirks:
atomicmkdir binlist unknowndirs
Properties:
• Config: quirks
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_QUIRKS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–mailru-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_MAILRU_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
File size limits depend on your account. A single file size is limited by 2G for a free account and
unlimited for paid tariffs. Please refer to the Mail.ru site for the total uploaded size limits.
Note that Mailru is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
Mega
Mega is a cloud storage and file hosting service known for its security feature where all files are
encrypted locally before they are uploaded. This prevents anyone (including employees of Mega) from
accessing the files without knowledge of the key used for encryption.
This is an rclone backend for Mega which supports the file transfer features of Mega using the same
client side encryption.
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Mega
\ "mega"
[snip]
Storage> mega
User name
user> you@example.com
Password.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank
y/g/n> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = mega
user = you@example.com
pass = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
NOTE: The encryption keys need to have been already generated after a regular login via the browser,
otherwise attempting to use the credentials in rclone will fail.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Mega
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your Mega
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an Mega directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
Mega does not support modification times or hashes yet.
Restricted filename characters
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Duplicated files
Mega can have two files with exactly the same name and path (unlike a normal file system).
Duplicated files cause problems with the syncing and you will see messages in the log about duplicates.
Use rclone dedupe to fix duplicated files.
Failure to log-in
Object not found
If you are connecting to your Mega remote for the first time, to test access and synchronization, you may
receive an error such as
Failed to create file system for "my-mega-remote:":
couldn't login: Object (typically, node or user) not found
The diagnostic steps often recommended in the rclone forum start with the MEGAcmd utility. Note that
this refers to the official C++ command from https://github.com/meganz/MEGAcmd and not the go language
built command from t3rm1n4l/megacmd that is no longer maintained.
Follow the instructions for installing MEGAcmd and try accessing your remote as they recommend. You can
establish whether or not you can log in using MEGAcmd, and obtain diagnostic information to help you, and
search or work with others in the forum.
MEGA CMD> login me@example.com
Password:
Fetching nodes ...
Loading transfers from local cache
Login complete as me@example.com
me@example.com:/$
Note that some have found issues with passwords containing special characters. If you can not log on
with rclone, but MEGAcmd logs on just fine, then consider changing your password temporarily to pure
alphanumeric characters, in case that helps.
Repeated commands blocks access
Mega remotes seem to get blocked (reject logins) under “heavy use”. We haven’t worked out the exact
blocking rules but it seems to be related to fast paced, successive rclone commands.
For example, executing this command 90 times in a row rclone link remote:file will cause the remote to
become “blocked”. This is not an abnormal situation, for example if you wish to get the public links of
a directory with hundred of files... After more or less a week, the remote will remote accept rclone
logins normally again.
You can mitigate this issue by mounting the remote it with rclone mount. This will log-in when mounting
and a log-out when unmounting only. You can also run rclone rcd and then use rclone rc to run the
commands over the API to avoid logging in each time.
Rclone does not currently close mega sessions (you can see them in the web interface), however closing
the sessions does not solve the issue.
If you space rclone commands by 3 seconds it will avoid blocking the remote. We haven’t identified the
exact blocking rules, so perhaps one could execute the command 80 times without waiting and avoid
blocking by waiting 3 seconds, then continuing...
Note that this has been observed by trial and error and might not be set in stone.
Other tools seem not to produce this blocking effect, as they use a different working approach
(state-based, using sessionIDs instead of log-in) which isn’t compatible with the current stateless
rclone approach.
Note that once blocked, the use of other tools (such as megacmd) is not a sure workaround: following
megacmd login times have been observed in succession for blocked remote: 7 minutes, 20 min, 30min, 30
min, 30min. Web access looks unaffected though.
Investigation is continuing in relation to workarounds based on timeouts, pacers, retrials and tpslimits
- if you discover something relevant, please post on the forum.
So, if rclone was working nicely and suddenly you are unable to log-in and you are sure the user and the
password are correct, likely you have got the remote blocked for a while.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to mega (Mega).
–mega-user
User name.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_MEGA_USER
• Type: string
• Required: true
–mega-pass
Password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_MEGA_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: true
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to mega (Mega).
–mega-debug
Output more debug from Mega.
If this flag is set (along with -vv) it will print further debugging information from the mega backend.
Properties:
• Config: debug
• Env Var: RCLONE_MEGA_DEBUG
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–mega-hard-delete
Delete files permanently rather than putting them into the trash.
Normally the mega backend will put all deletions into the trash rather than permanently deleting them.
If you specify this then rclone will permanently delete objects instead.
Properties:
• Config: hard_delete
• Env Var: RCLONE_MEGA_HARD_DELETE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–mega-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_MEGA_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
This backend uses the go-mega go library which is an opensource go library implementing the Mega API.
There doesn’t appear to be any documentation for the mega protocol beyond the mega C++ SDK source code so
there are likely quite a few errors still remaining in this library.
Mega allows duplicate files which may confuse rclone.
Memory
The memory backend is an in RAM backend. It does not persist its data - use the local backend for that.
The memory backend behaves like a bucket-based remote (e.g. like s3). Because it has no parameters you
can just use it with the :memory: remote name.
Configuration
You can configure it as a remote like this with rclone config too if you want to:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Memory
\ "memory"
[snip]
Storage> memory
** See help for memory backend at: https://rclone.org/memory/ **
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = memory
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Because the memory backend isn’t persistent it is most useful for testing or with an rclone server or
rclone mount, e.g.
rclone mount :memory: /mnt/tmp
rclone serve webdav :memory:
rclone serve sftp :memory:
Modified time and hashes
The memory backend supports MD5 hashes and modification times accurate to 1 nS.
Restricted filename characters
The memory backend replaces the default restricted characters set.
Akamai NetStorage
Paths are specified as remote: You may put subdirectories in too, e.g. remote:/path/to/dir. If you have
a CP code you can use that as the folder after the domain such as <domain>/<cpcode>/<internal directories
within cpcode>.
For example, this is commonly configured with or without a CP code: * With a CP code.
[your-domain-prefix]-nsu.akamaihd.net/123456/subdirectory/ * Without a CP code.
[your-domain-prefix]-nsu.akamaihd.net
See all buckets rclone lsd remote: The initial setup for Netstorage involves getting an account and
secret. Use rclone config to walk you through the setup process.
Configuration
Here’s an example of how to make a remote called ns1.
1. To begin the interactive configuration process, enter this command:
rclone config
2. Type n to create a new remote.
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
q) Quit config
e/n/d/q> n
3. For this example, enter ns1 when you reach the name> prompt.
name> ns1
4. Enter netstorage as the type of storage to configure.
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
XX / NetStorage
\ "netstorage"
Storage> netstorage
5. Select between the HTTP or HTTPS protocol. Most users should choose HTTPS, which is the default.
HTTP is provided primarily for debugging purposes.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / HTTP protocol
\ "http"
2 / HTTPS protocol
\ "https"
protocol> 1
6. Specify your NetStorage host, CP code, and any necessary content paths using this format:
<domain>/<cpcode>/<content>/
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
host> baseball-nsu.akamaihd.net/123456/content/
7. Set the netstorage account name
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
account> username
8. Set the Netstorage account secret/G2O key which will be used for authentication purposes. Select the
y option to set your own password then enter your secret. Note: The secret is stored in the
rclone.conf file with hex-encoded encryption.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
9. View the summary and confirm your remote configuration.
[ns1]
type = netstorage
protocol = http
host = baseball-nsu.akamaihd.net/123456/content/
account = username
secret = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This remote is called ns1 and can now be used.
Example operations
Get started with rclone and NetStorage with these examples. For additional rclone commands, visit
https://rclone.org/commands/.
See contents of a directory in your project
rclone lsd ns1:/974012/testing/
Sync the contents local with remote
rclone sync . ns1:/974012/testing/
Upload local content to remote
rclone copy notes.txt ns1:/974012/testing/
Delete content on remote
rclone delete ns1:/974012/testing/notes.txt
Move or copy content between CP codes.
Your credentials must have access to two CP codes on the same remote. You can’t perform operations
between different remotes.
rclone move ns1:/974012/testing/notes.txt ns1:/974450/testing2/
Features
Symlink Support
The Netstorage backend changes the rclone --links, -l behavior. When uploading, instead of creating the
.rclonelink file, use the “symlink” API in order to create the corresponding symlink on the remote. The
.rclonelink file will not be created, the upload will be intercepted and only the symlink file that
matches the source file name with no suffix will be created on the remote.
This will effectively allow commands like copy/copyto, move/moveto and sync to upload from local to
remote and download from remote to local directories with symlinks. Due to internal rclone limitations,
it is not possible to upload an individual symlink file to any remote backend. You can always use the
“backend symlink” command to create a symlink on the NetStorage server, refer to “symlink” section below.
Individual symlink files on the remote can be used with the commands like “cat” to print the destination
name, or “delete” to delete symlink, or copy, copy/to and move/moveto to download from the remote to
local. Note: individual symlink files on the remote should be specified including the suffix
.rclonelink.
Note: No file with the suffix .rclonelink should ever exist on the server since it is not possible to
actually upload/create a file with .rclonelink suffix with rclone, it can only exist if it is manually
created through a non-rclone method on the remote.
Implicit vs. Explicit Directories
With NetStorage, directories can exist in one of two forms:
1. Explicit Directory. This is an actual, physical directory that you have created in a storage group.
2. Implicit Directory. This refers to a directory within a path that has not been physically created.
For example, during upload of a file, nonexistent subdirectories can be specified in the target path.
NetStorage creates these as “implicit.” While the directories aren’t physically created, they exist
implicitly and the noted path is connected with the uploaded file.
Rclone will intercept all file uploads and mkdir commands for the NetStorage remote and will explicitly
issue the mkdir command for each directory in the uploading path. This will help with the
interoperability with the other Akamai services such as SFTP and the Content Management Shell (CMShell).
Rclone will not guarantee correctness of operations with implicit directories which might have been
created as a result of using an upload API directly.
--fast-list / ListR support
NetStorage remote supports the ListR feature by using the “list” NetStorage API action to return a
lexicographical list of all objects within the specified CP code, recursing into subdirectories as
they’re encountered.
• Rclone will use the ListR method for some commands by default. Commands such as lsf -R will use ListR
by default. To disable this, include the --disable listR option to use the non-recursive method of
listing objects.
• Rclone will not use the ListR method for some commands. Commands such as sync don’t use ListR by
default. To force using the ListR method, include the --fast-list option.
There are pros and cons of using the ListR method, refer to rclone documentation. In general, the sync
command over an existing deep tree on the remote will run faster with the “–fast-list” flag but with
extra memory usage as a side effect. It might also result in higher CPU utilization but the whole task
can be completed faster.
Note: There is a known limitation that “lsf -R” will display number of files in the directory and
directory size as -1 when ListR method is used. The workaround is to pass “–disable listR” flag if these
numbers are important in the output.
Purge
NetStorage remote supports the purge feature by using the “quick-delete” NetStorage API action. The
quick-delete action is disabled by default for security reasons and can be enabled for the account
through the Akamai portal. Rclone will first try to use quick-delete action for the purge command and if
this functionality is disabled then will fall back to a standard delete method.
Note: Read the https://learn.akamai.com/en-us/webhelp/netstorage/netstorage-http-api-developer-
guide/GUID-15836617-9F50-405A-833C-EA2556756A30.html NetStorage Usage API for considerations when using
“quick-delete”. In general, using quick-delete method will not delete the tree immediately and objects
targeted for quick-delete may still be accessible.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to netstorage (Akamai NetStorage).
–netstorage-host
Domain+path of NetStorage host to connect to.
Format should be <domain>/<internal folders>
Properties:
• Config: host
• Env Var: RCLONE_NETSTORAGE_HOST
• Type: string
• Required: true
–netstorage-account
Set the NetStorage account name
Properties:
• Config: account
• Env Var: RCLONE_NETSTORAGE_ACCOUNT
• Type: string
• Required: true
–netstorage-secret
Set the NetStorage account secret/G2O key for authentication.
Please choose the `y' option to set your own password then enter your secret.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_NETSTORAGE_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: true
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to netstorage (Akamai NetStorage).
–netstorage-protocol
Select between HTTP or HTTPS protocol.
Most users should choose HTTPS, which is the default. HTTP is provided primarily for debugging purposes.
Properties:
• Config: protocol
• Env Var: RCLONE_NETSTORAGE_PROTOCOL
• Type: string
• Default: “https”
• Examples:
• “http”
• HTTP protocol
• “https”
• HTTPS protocol
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the netstorage backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
du
Return disk usage information for a specified directory
rclone backend du remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
The usage information returned, includes the targeted directory as well as all files stored in any
sub-directories that may exist.
symlink
You can create a symbolic link in ObjectStore with the symlink action.
rclone backend symlink remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
The desired path location (including applicable sub-directories) ending in the object that will be the
target of the symlink (for example, /links/mylink). Include the file extension for the object, if
applicable. rclone backend symlink <src> <path>
Microsoft Azure Blob Storage
Paths are specified as remote:container (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:container/path/to/dir.
Configuration
Here is an example of making a Microsoft Azure Blob Storage configuration. For a remote called remote.
First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Microsoft Azure Blob Storage
\ "azureblob"
[snip]
Storage> azureblob
Storage Account Name
account> account_name
Storage Account Key
key> base64encodedkey==
Endpoint for the service - leave blank normally.
endpoint>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
account = account_name
key = base64encodedkey==
endpoint =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See all containers
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new container
rclone mkdir remote:container
List the contents of a container
rclone ls remote:container
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote container, deleting any excess files in the container.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:container
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
Modified time
The modified time is stored as metadata on the object with the mtime key. It is stored using RFC3339
Format time with nanosecond precision. The metadata is supplied during directory listings so there is no
overhead to using it.
Performance
When uploading large files, increasing the value of --azureblob-upload-concurrency will increase
performance at the cost of using more memory. The default of 16 is set quite conservatively to use less
memory. It maybe be necessary raise it to 64 or higher to fully utilize a 1 GBit/s link with a single
file transfer.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
/ 0x2F ／
\ 0x5C ＼
File names can also not end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are the last
character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
. 0x2E ．
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Hashes
MD5 hashes are stored with blobs. However blobs that were uploaded in chunks only have an MD5 if the
source remote was capable of MD5 hashes, e.g. the local disk.
Authenticating with Azure Blob Storage
Rclone has 3 ways of authenticating with Azure Blob Storage:
Account and Key
This is the most straight forward and least flexible way. Just fill in the account and key lines and
leave the rest blank.
SAS URL
This can be an account level SAS URL or container level SAS URL.
To use it leave account, key blank and fill in sas_url.
An account level SAS URL or container level SAS URL can be obtained from the Azure portal or the Azure
Storage Explorer. To get a container level SAS URL right click on a container in the Azure Blob explorer
in the Azure portal.
If you use a container level SAS URL, rclone operations are permitted only on a particular container,
e.g.
rclone ls azureblob:container
You can also list the single container from the root. This will only show the container specified by the
SAS URL.
$ rclone lsd azureblob:
container/
Note that you can’t see or access any other containers - this will fail
rclone ls azureblob:othercontainer
Container level SAS URLs are useful for temporarily allowing third parties access to a single container
or putting credentials into an untrusted environment such as a CI build server.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to azureblob (Microsoft Azure Blob Storage).
–azureblob-account
Storage Account Name.
Leave blank to use SAS URL or Emulator.
Properties:
• Config: account
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_ACCOUNT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-service-principal-file
Path to file containing credentials for use with a service principal.
Leave blank normally. Needed only if you want to use a service principal instead of interactive login.
$ az ad sp create-for-rbac --name "<name>" \
--role "Storage Blob Data Owner" \
--scopes "/subscriptions/<subscription>/resourceGroups/<resource-group>/providers/Microsoft.Storage/storageAccounts/<storage-account>/blobServices/default/containers/<container>" \
> azure-principal.json
See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/cli/azure/create-an-azure-service-principal-azure-cli “Create an
Azure service principal” and https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/storage/common/storage-auth-aad-rbac-
cli “Assign an Azure role for access to blob data” pages for more details.
Properties:
• Config: service_principal_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_SERVICE_PRINCIPAL_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-key
Storage Account Key.
Leave blank to use SAS URL or Emulator.
Properties:
• Config: key
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-sas-url
SAS URL for container level access only.
Leave blank if using account/key or Emulator.
Properties:
• Config: sas_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_SAS_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-use-msi
Use a managed service identity to authenticate (only works in Azure).
When true, use a https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/managed-identities-azure-
resources/ managed ser‐ vice identity to authenticate to Azure Storage instead of a SAS token or account
key.
If the VM(SS) on which this program is running has a system-assigned identity, it will be used by
default. If the resource has no system-assigned but exactly one user-assigned identity, the
user-assigned identity will be used by default. If the resource has multiple user-assigned identities,
the identity to use must be explicitly specified using exactly one of the msi_object_id, msi_client_id,
or msi_mi_res_id parameters.
Properties:
• Config: use_msi
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_USE_MSI
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–azureblob-use-emulator
Uses local storage emulator if provided as `true'.
Leave blank if using real azure storage endpoint.
Properties:
• Config: use_emulator
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_USE_EMULATOR
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to azureblob (Microsoft Azure Blob Storage).
–azureblob-msi-object-id
Object ID of the user-assigned MSI to use, if any.
Leave blank if msi_client_id or msi_mi_res_id specified.
Properties:
• Config: msi_object_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_MSI_OBJECT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-msi-client-id
Object ID of the user-assigned MSI to use, if any.
Leave blank if msi_object_id or msi_mi_res_id specified.
Properties:
• Config: msi_client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_MSI_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-msi-mi-res-id
Azure resource ID of the user-assigned MSI to use, if any.
Leave blank if msi_client_id or msi_object_id specified.
Properties:
• Config: msi_mi_res_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_MSI_MI_RES_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-endpoint
Endpoint for the service.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to chunked upload (<= 256 MiB) (deprecated).
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-chunk-size
Upload chunk size.
Note that this is stored in memory and there may be up to “–transfers” * “–azureblob-upload-concurrency”
chunks stored at once in memory.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 4Mi
–azureblob-upload-concurrency
Concurrency for multipart uploads.
This is the number of chunks of the same file that are uploaded concurrently.
If you are uploading small numbers of large files over high-speed links and these uploads do not fully
utilize your bandwidth, then increasing this may help to speed up the transfers.
In tests, upload speed increases almost linearly with upload concurrency. For example to fill a gigabit
pipe it may be necessary to raise this to 64. Note that this will use more memory.
Note that chunks are stored in memory and there may be up to “–transfers” *
“–azureblob-upload-concurrency” chunks stored at once in memory.
Properties:
• Config: upload_concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_UPLOAD_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 16
–azureblob-list-chunk
Size of blob list.
This sets the number of blobs requested in each listing chunk. Default is the maximum, 5000. “List
blobs” requests are permitted 2 minutes per megabyte to complete. If an operation is taking longer than
2 minutes per megabyte on average, it will time out ( https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/storage‐
services/setting-timeouts-for-blob-service-opera‐ tions#exceptions-to-default-timeout-interval source ).
This can be used to limit the number of blobs items to return, to avoid the time out.
Properties:
• Config: list_chunk
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_LIST_CHUNK
• Type: int
• Default: 5000
–azureblob-access-tier
Access tier of blob: hot, cool or archive.
Archived blobs can be restored by setting access tier to hot or cool. Leave blank if you intend to use
default access tier, which is set at account level
If there is no “access tier” specified, rclone doesn’t apply any tier. rclone performs “Set Tier”
operation on blobs while uploading, if objects are not modified, specifying “access tier” to new one will
have no effect. If blobs are in “archive tier” at remote, trying to perform data transfer operations
from remote will not be allowed. User should first restore by tiering blob to “Hot” or “Cool”.
Properties:
• Config: access_tier
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_ACCESS_TIER
• Type: string
• Required: false
–azureblob-archive-tier-delete
Delete archive tier blobs before overwriting.
Archive tier blobs cannot be updated. So without this flag, if you attempt to update an archive tier
blob, then rclone will produce the error:
can't update archive tier blob without --azureblob-archive-tier-delete
With this flag set then before rclone attempts to overwrite an archive tier blob, it will delete the
existing blob before uploading its replacement. This has the potential for data loss if the upload fails
(unlike updating a normal blob) and also may cost more since deleting archive tier blobs early may be
chargable.
Properties:
• Config: archive_tier_delete
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_ARCHIVE_TIER_DELETE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–azureblob-disable-checksum
Don’t store MD5 checksum with object metadata.
Normally rclone will calculate the MD5 checksum of the input before uploading it so it can add it to
metadata on the object. This is great for data integrity checking but can cause long delays for large
files to start uploading.
Properties:
• Config: disable_checksum
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_DISABLE_CHECKSUM
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–azureblob-memory-pool-flush-time
How often internal memory buffer pools will be flushed.
Uploads which requires additional buffers (f.e multipart) will use memory pool for allocations. This
option controls how often unused buffers will be removed from the pool.
Properties:
• Config: memory_pool_flush_time
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_MEMORY_POOL_FLUSH_TIME
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–azureblob-memory-pool-use-mmap
Whether to use mmap buffers in internal memory pool.
Properties:
• Config: memory_pool_use_mmap
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_MEMORY_POOL_USE_MMAP
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–azureblob-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8
–azureblob-public-access
Public access level of a container: blob or container.
Properties:
• Config: public_access
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_PUBLIC_ACCESS
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• The container and its blobs can be accessed only with an authorized request.
• It’s a default value.
• “blob”
• Blob data within this container can be read via anonymous request.
• “container”
• Allow full public read access for container and blob data.
–azureblob-no-head-object
If set, do not do HEAD before GET when getting objects.
Properties:
• Config: no_head_object
• Env Var: RCLONE_AZUREBLOB_NO_HEAD_OBJECT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Limitations
MD5 sums are only uploaded with chunked files if the source has an MD5 sum. This will always be the case
for a local to azure copy.
rclone about is not supported by the Microsoft Azure Blob storage backend. Backends without this
capability cannot determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a
member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Azure Storage Emulator Support
You can run rclone with storage emulator (usually azurite).
To do this, just set up a new remote with rclone config following instructions described in introduction
and set use_emulator config as true. You do not need to provide default account name neither an account
key.
Also, if you want to access a storage emulator instance running on a different machine, you can override
Endpoint parameter in advanced settings, setting it to http(s)://<host>:<port>/devstoreaccount1
(e.g. http://10.254.2.5:10000/devstoreaccount1).
Microsoft OneDrive
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for OneDrive involves getting a token from Microsoft which you need to do in your
browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Microsoft OneDrive
\ "onedrive"
[snip]
Storage> onedrive
Microsoft App Client Id
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
client_id>
Microsoft App Client Secret
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
client_secret>
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> n
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
Choose a number from below, or type in an existing value
1 / OneDrive Personal or Business
\ "onedrive"
2 / Sharepoint site
\ "sharepoint"
3 / Type in driveID
\ "driveid"
4 / Type in SiteID
\ "siteid"
5 / Search a Sharepoint site
\ "search"
Your choice> 1
Found 1 drives, please select the one you want to use:
0: OneDrive (business) id=b!Eqwertyuiopasdfghjklzxcvbnm-7mnbvcxzlkjhgfdsapoiuytrewqk
Chose drive to use:> 0
Found drive 'root' of type 'business', URL: https://org-my.sharepoint.com/personal/you/Documents
Is that okay?
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
--------------------
[remote]
type = onedrive
token = {"access_token":"youraccesstoken","token_type":"Bearer","refresh_token":"yourrefreshtoken","expiry":"2018-08-26T22:39:52.486512262+08:00"}
drive_id = b!Eqwertyuiopasdfghjklzxcvbnm-7mnbvcxzlkjhgfdsapoiuytrewqk
drive_type = business
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Microsoft.
This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the verification code.
This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it temporarily if you are
running a host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your OneDrive
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your OneDrive
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an OneDrive directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Getting your own Client ID and Key
rclone uses a default Client ID when talking to OneDrive, unless a custom client_id is specified in the
config. The default Client ID and Key are shared by all rclone users when performing requests.
You may choose to create and use your own Client ID, in case the default one does not work well for you.
For example, you might see throttling.
Creating Client ID for OneDrive Personal
To create your own Client ID, please follow these steps:
1. Open https://portal.azure.com/#blade/Microsoft_AAD_RegisteredApps/ApplicationsListBlade and then click
New registration.
2. Enter a name for your app, choose account type Accounts in any organizational directory (Any Azure AD
directory - Multitenant) and personal Microsoft accounts (e.g. Skype, Xbox), select Web in Redirect
URI, then type (do not copy and paste) http://localhost:53682/ and click Register. Copy and keep the
Application (client) ID under the app name for later use.
3. Under manage select Certificates & secrets, click New client secret. Enter a description (can be
anything) and set Expires to 24 months. Copy and keep that secret Value for later use (you won’t be
able to see this value afterwards).
4. Under manage select API permissions, click Add a permission and select Microsoft Graph then select
delegated permissions.
5. Search and select the following permissions: Files.Read, Files.ReadWrite, Files.Read.All,
Files.ReadWrite.All, offline_access, User.Read and Sites.Read.All (if custom access scopes are
configured, select the permissions accordingly). Once selected click Add permissions at the bottom.
Now the application is complete. Run rclone config to create or edit a OneDrive remote. Supply the app
ID and password as Client ID and Secret, respectively. rclone will walk you through the remaining steps.
The access_scopes option allows you to configure the permissions requested by rclone. See
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/graph/permissions-reference#files-permissions Microsoft Docs for more
information about the different scopes.
The Sites.Read.All permission is required if you need to search SharePoint sites when configuring the
remote. However, if that permission is not assigned, you need to exclude Sites.Read.All from your access
scopes or set disable_site_permission option to true in the advanced options.
Creating Client ID for OneDrive Business
The steps for OneDrive Personal may or may not work for OneDrive Business, depending on the security
settings of the organization. A common error is that the publisher of the App is not verified.
You may try to https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/develop/publisher-verification-
overview verify you account, or try to limit the App to your organization only, as shown below.
1. Make sure to create the App with your business account.
2. Follow the steps above to create an App. However, we need a different account type here: Accounts in
this organizational directory only (*** - Single tenant). Note that you can also change the account
type after creating the App.
3. Find the https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-how-to-
find-ten‐ ant tenant ID of your organization.
4. In the rclone config, set auth_url to
https://login.microsoftonline.com/YOUR_TENANT_ID/oauth2/v2.0/authorize.
5. In the rclone config, set token_url to
https://login.microsoftonline.com/YOUR_TENANT_ID/oauth2/v2.0/token.
Note: If you have a special region, you may need a different host in step 4 and 5. Here are
https://github.com/rclone/rclone/blob/bc23bf11db1c78c6ebbf8ea538fbebf7058b4176/back‐
end/onedrive/onedrive.go#L86 some hints.
Modification time and hashes
OneDrive allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second. These will be used to
detect whether objects need syncing or not.
OneDrive personal supports SHA1 type hashes. OneDrive for business and Sharepoint Server support
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/onedrive/developer/code-snippets/quickxorhash QuickXorHash.
For all types of OneDrive you can use the --checksum flag.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
” 0x22 ＂
* 0x2A ＊
: 0x3A ：
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
? 0x3F ？
\ 0x5C ＼
| 0x7C ｜
File names can also not end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are the last
character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
. 0x2E ．
File names can also not begin with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are the
first character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
~ 0x7E ～
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Deleting files
Any files you delete with rclone will end up in the trash. Microsoft doesn’t provide an API to
permanently delete files, nor to empty the trash, so you will have to do that with one of Microsoft’s
apps or via the OneDrive website.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to onedrive (Microsoft OneDrive).
–onedrive-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-region
Choose national cloud region for OneDrive.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_REGION
• Type: string
• Default: “global”
• Examples:
• “global”
• Microsoft Cloud Global
• “us”
• Microsoft Cloud for US Government
• “de”
• Microsoft Cloud Germany
• “cn”
• Azure and Office 365 operated by Vnet Group in China
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to onedrive (Microsoft OneDrive).
–onedrive-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-chunk-size
Chunk size to upload files with - must be multiple of 320k (327,680 bytes).
Above this size files will be chunked - must be multiple of 320k (327,680 bytes) and should not exceed
250M (262,144,000 bytes) else you may encounter "Microsoft.SharePoint.Client.InvalidClientQueryException:
The request message is too big." Note that the chunks will be buffered into memory.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 10Mi
–onedrive-drive-id
The ID of the drive to use.
Properties:
• Config: drive_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_DRIVE_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-drive-type
The type of the drive (personal | business | documentLibrary).
Properties:
• Config: drive_type
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_DRIVE_TYPE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-root-folder-id
ID of the root folder.
This isn’t normally needed, but in special circumstances you might know the folder ID that you wish to
access but not be able to get there through a path traversal.
Properties:
• Config: root_folder_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_ROOT_FOLDER_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-access-scopes
Set scopes to be requested by rclone.
Choose or manually enter a custom space separated list with all scopes, that rclone should request.
Properties:
• Config: access_scopes
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_ACCESS_SCOPES
• Type: SpaceSepList
• Default: Files.Read Files.ReadWrite Files.Read.All Files.ReadWrite.All Sites.Read.All offline_access
• Examples:
• “Files.Read Files.ReadWrite Files.Read.All Files.ReadWrite.All Sites.Read.All offline_access”
• Read and write access to all resources
• “Files.Read Files.Read.All Sites.Read.All offline_access”
• Read only access to all resources
• “Files.Read Files.ReadWrite Files.Read.All Files.ReadWrite.All offline_access”
• Read and write access to all resources, without the ability to browse SharePoint sites.
• Same as if disable_site_permission was set to true
–onedrive-disable-site-permission
Disable the request for Sites.Read.All permission.
If set to true, you will no longer be able to search for a SharePoint site when configuring drive ID,
because rclone will not request Sites.Read.All permission. Set it to true if your organization didn’t
assign Sites.Read.All permission to the application, and your organization disallows users to consent app
permission request on their own.
Properties:
• Config: disable_site_permission
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_DISABLE_SITE_PERMISSION
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–onedrive-expose-onenote-files
Set to make OneNote files show up in directory listings.
By default, rclone will hide OneNote files in directory listings because operations like “Open” and
“Update” won’t work on them. But this behaviour may also prevent you from deleting them. If you want to
delete OneNote files or otherwise want them to show up in directory listing, set this option.
Properties:
• Config: expose_onenote_files
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_EXPOSE_ONENOTE_FILES
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–onedrive-server-side-across-configs
Allow server-side operations (e.g. copy) to work across different onedrive configs.
This will only work if you are copying between two OneDrive Personal drives AND the files to copy are
already shared between them. In other cases, rclone will fall back to normal copy (which will be
slightly slower).
Properties:
• Config: server_side_across_configs
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_SERVER_SIDE_ACROSS_CONFIGS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–onedrive-list-chunk
Size of listing chunk.
Properties:
• Config: list_chunk
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_LIST_CHUNK
• Type: int
• Default: 1000
–onedrive-no-versions
Remove all versions on modifying operations.
Onedrive for business creates versions when rclone uploads new files overwriting an existing one and when
it sets the modification time.
These versions take up space out of the quota.
This flag checks for versions after file upload and setting modification time and removes all but the
last version.
NB Onedrive personal can’t currently delete versions so don’t use this flag there.
Properties:
• Config: no_versions
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_NO_VERSIONS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–onedrive-link-scope
Set the scope of the links created by the link command.
Properties:
• Config: link_scope
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_LINK_SCOPE
• Type: string
• Default: “anonymous”
• Examples:
• “anonymous”
• Anyone with the link has access, without needing to sign in.
• This may include people outside of your organization.
• Anonymous link support may be disabled by an administrator.
• “organization”
• Anyone signed into your organization (tenant) can use the link to get access.
• Only available in OneDrive for Business and SharePoint.
–onedrive-link-type
Set the type of the links created by the link command.
Properties:
• Config: link_type
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_LINK_TYPE
• Type: string
• Default: “view”
• Examples:
• “view”
• Creates a read-only link to the item.
• “edit”
• Creates a read-write link to the item.
• “embed”
• Creates an embeddable link to the item.
–onedrive-link-password
Set the password for links created by the link command.
At the time of writing this only works with OneDrive personal paid accounts.
Properties:
• Config: link_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_LINK_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: false
–onedrive-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_ONEDRIVE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default:
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,LeftTilde,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
If you don’t use rclone for 90 days the refresh token will expire. This will result in authorization
problems. This is easy to fix by running the rclone config reconnect remote: command to get a new token
and refresh token.
Naming
Note that OneDrive is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
There are quite a few characters that can’t be in OneDrive file names. These can’t occur on Windows
platforms, but on non-Windows platforms they are common. Rclone will map these names to and from an
identical looking unicode equivalent. For example if a file has a ? in it will be mapped to ？ instead.
File sizes
The largest allowed file size is 250 GiB for both OneDrive Personal and OneDrive for Business
https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/invalid-file-names-and-file-types-in-onedrive-and-share‐
point-64883a5d-228e-48f5-b3d2-eb39e07630fa?ui=en-us&rs=en-us&ad=us#individualfilesize (Updated 13 Jan
2021).
Path length
The entire path, including the file name, must contain fewer than 400 characters for OneDrive, OneDrive
for Business and SharePoint Online. If you are encrypting file and folder names with rclone, you may
want to pay attention to this limitation because the encrypted names are typically longer than the
original ones.
Number of files
OneDrive seems to be OK with at least 50,000 files in a folder, but at 100,000 rclone will get errors
listing the directory like couldn’t list files: UnknownError:. See #2707 for more info.
An official document about the limitations for different types of OneDrive can be found https://sup‐
port.office.com/en-us/article/invalid-file-names-and-file-types-in-onedrive-onedrive-for-busi‐ ness-and-
sharepoint-64883a5d-228e-48f5-b3d2-eb39e07630fa here.
Versions
Every change in a file OneDrive causes the service to create a new version of the file. This counts
against a users quota. For example changing the modification time of a file creates a second version, so
the file apparently uses twice the space.
For example the copy command is affected by this as rclone copies the file and then afterwards sets the
modification time to match the source file which uses another version.
You can use the rclone cleanup command (see below) to remove all old versions.
Or you can set the no_versions parameter to true and rclone will remove versions after operations which
create new versions. This takes extra transactions so only enable it if you need it.
Note At the time of writing Onedrive Personal creates versions (but not for setting the modification
time) but the API for removing them returns “API not found” so cleanup and no_versions should not be used
on Onedrive Personal.
Disabling versioning
Starting October 2018, users will no longer be able to disable versioning by default. This is because
Microsoft has brought an https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/Microsoft-OneDrive-Blog/New-Updates-to-
OneDrive-and-SharePoint- Team-Site-Versioning/ba-p/204390 update to the mechanism. To change this new
default setting, a PowerShell command is required to be run by a SharePoint admin. If you are an admin,
you can run these commands in PowerShell to change that setting:
1. Install-Module -Name Microsoft.Online.SharePoint.PowerShell (in case you haven’t installed this
already)
2. Import-Module Microsoft.Online.SharePoint.PowerShell -DisableNameChecking
3. Connect-SPOService -Url https://YOURSITE-admin.sharepoint.com -Credential YOU@YOURSITE.COM (replacing
YOURSITE, YOU, YOURSITE.COM with the actual values; this will prompt for your credentials)
4. Set-SPOTenant -EnableMinimumVersionRequirement $False
5. Disconnect-SPOService (to disconnect from the server)
Below are the steps for normal users to disable versioning. If you don’t see the “No Versioning” option,
make sure the above requirements are met.
User Weropol has found a method to disable versioning on OneDrive
1. Open the settings menu by clicking on the gear symbol at the top of the OneDrive Business page.
2. Click Site settings.
3. Once on the Site settings page, navigate to Site Administration > Site libraries and lists.
4. Click Customize “Documents”.
5. Click General Settings > Versioning Settings.
6. Under Document Version History select the option No versioning. Note: This will disable the creation
of new file versions, but will not remove any previous versions. Your documents are safe.
7. Apply the changes by clicking OK.
8. Use rclone to upload or modify files. (I also use the –no-update-modtime flag)
9. Restore the versioning settings after using rclone. (Optional)
Cleanup
OneDrive supports rclone cleanup which causes rclone to look through every file under the path supplied
and delete all version but the current version. Because this involves traversing all the files, then
querying each file for versions it can be quite slow. Rclone does --checkers tests in parallel. The
command also supports -i which is a great way to see what it would do.
rclone cleanup -i remote:path/subdir # interactively remove all old version for path/subdir
rclone cleanup remote:path/subdir # unconditionally remove all old version for path/subdir
NB Onedrive personal can’t currently delete versions
Troubleshooting
Excessive throttling or blocked on SharePoint
If you experience excessive throttling or is being blocked on SharePoint then it may help to set the user
agent explicitly with a flag like this: --user-agent "ISV|rclone.org|rclone/v1.55.1"
The specific details can be found in the Microsoft document: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/share‐
point/dev/general-development/how-to-avoid-getting-throttled-or- blocked-in-sharepoint-online#how-to-dec‐
orate-your-http-traffic-to-avoid-throttling Avoid getting throt‐ tled or blocked in SharePoint Online
Unexpected file size/hash differences on Sharepoint
It is a https://github.com/OneDrive/onedrive-api-docs/issues/935#issuecomment-441741631 known issue that
Sharepoint (not OneDrive or OneDrive for Business) silently modifies uploaded files, mainly Office files
(.docx, .xlsx, etc.), causing file size and hash checks to fail. There are also other situations that
will cause OneDrive to report inconsistent file sizes. To use rclone with such affected files on
Sharepoint, you may disable these checks with the following command line arguments:
--ignore-checksum --ignore-size
Alternatively, if you have write access to the OneDrive files, it may be possible to fix this problem for
certain files, by attempting the steps below. Open the web interface for OneDrive and find the affected
files (which will be in the error messages/log for rclone). Simply click on each of these files, causing
OneDrive to open them on the web. This will cause each file to be converted in place to a format that is
functionally equivalent but which will no longer trigger the size discrepancy. Once all problematic
files are converted you will no longer need the ignore options above.
Replacing/deleting existing files on Sharepoint gets “item not found”
It is a known issue that Sharepoint (not OneDrive or OneDrive for Business) may return “item not found”
errors when users try to replace or delete uploaded files; this seems to mainly affect Office files
(.docx, .xlsx, etc.) and web files (.html, .aspx, etc.). As a workaround, you may use the --backup-dir
<BACKUP_DIR> command line argument so rclone moves the files to be replaced/deleted into a given backup
directory (instead of directly replacing/deleting them). For example, to instruct rclone to move the
files into the directory rclone-backup-dir on backend mysharepoint, you may use:
--backup-dir mysharepoint:rclone-backup-dir
access_denied (AADSTS65005)
Error: access_denied
Code: AADSTS65005
Description: Using application 'rclone' is currently not supported for your organization [YOUR_ORGANIZATION] because it is in an unmanaged state. An administrator needs to claim ownership of the company by DNS validation of [YOUR_ORGANIZATION] before the application rclone can be provisioned.
This means that rclone can’t use the OneDrive for Business API with your account. You can’t do much
about it, maybe write an email to your admins.
However, there are other ways to interact with your OneDrive account. Have a look at the WebDAV backend:
https://rclone.org/webdav/#sharepoint
invalid_grant (AADSTS50076)
Error: invalid_grant
Code: AADSTS50076
Description: Due to a configuration change made by your administrator, or because you moved to a new location, you must use multi-factor authentication to access '...'.
If you see the error above after enabling multi-factor authentication for your account, you can fix it by
refreshing your OAuth refresh token. To do that, run rclone config, and choose to edit your OneDrive
backend. Then, you don’t need to actually make any changes until you reach this question: Already have a
token - refresh?. For this question, answer y and go through the process to refresh your token, just
like the first time the backend is configured. After this, rclone should work again for this backend.
Invalid request when making public links
On Sharepoint and OneDrive for Business, rclone link may return an “Invalid request” error. A possible
cause is that the organisation admin didn’t allow public links to be made for the organisation/sharepoint
library. To fix the permissions as an admin, take a look at the docs: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-
us/sharepoint/turn-external-sharing-on-or-off 1, https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/set-up-and-
manage-access-re‐ quests-94b26e0b-2822-49d4-929a-8455698654b3 2.
OpenDrive
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
q) Quit config
e/n/d/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / OpenDrive
\ "opendrive"
[snip]
Storage> opendrive
Username
username>
Password
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
--------------------
[remote]
username =
password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
List directories in top level of your OpenDrive
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your OpenDrive
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an OpenDrive directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and MD5SUMs
OpenDrive allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second. These will be used to
detect whether objects need syncing or not.
Restricted filename characters
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
” 0x22 ＂
* 0x2A ＊
: 0x3A ：
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
? 0x3F ？
\ 0x5C ＼
| 0x7C ｜
File names can also not begin or end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they are
the first or last character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
HT 0x09 ␉
LF 0x0A ␊
VT 0x0B ␋
CR 0x0D ␍
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to opendrive (OpenDrive).
–opendrive-username
Username.
Properties:
• Config: username
• Env Var: RCLONE_OPENDRIVE_USERNAME
• Type: string
• Required: true
–opendrive-password
Password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password
• Env Var: RCLONE_OPENDRIVE_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: true
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to opendrive (OpenDrive).
–opendrive-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_OPENDRIVE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default:
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,LeftSpace,LeftCrLfHtVt,RightSpace,RightCrLfHtVt,InvalidUtf8,Dot
–opendrive-chunk-size
Files will be uploaded in chunks this size.
Note that these chunks are buffered in memory so increasing them will increase memory use.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_OPENDRIVE_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 10Mi
Limitations
Note that OpenDrive is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
There are quite a few characters that can’t be in OpenDrive file names. These can’t occur on Windows
platforms, but on non-Windows platforms they are common. Rclone will map these names to and from an
identical looking unicode equivalent. For example if a file has a ? in it will be mapped to ？ instead.
rclone about is not supported by the OpenDrive backend. Backends without this capability cannot
determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone
union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Oracle Object Storage
https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/Object/Concepts/objectstorageoverview.htm Oracle Object Stor‐
age Overview
Oracle Object Storage FAQ
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:bucket/path/to/dir.
Configuration
Here is an example of making an oracle object storage configuration. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> n
Enter name for new remote.
name> remote
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
[snip]
XX / Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Object Storage
\ (oracleobjectstorage)
Storage> oracleobjectstorage
Option provider.
Choose your Auth Provider
Choose a number from below, or type in your own string value.
Press Enter for the default (env_auth).
1 / automatically pickup the credentials from runtime(env), first one to provide auth wins
\ (env_auth)
/ use an OCI user and an API key for authentication.
2 | you’ll need to put in a config file your tenancy OCID, user OCID, region, the path, fingerprint to an API key.
| https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/Concepts/sdkconfig.htm
\ (user_principal_auth)
/ use instance principals to authorize an instance to make API calls.
3 | each instance has its own identity, and authenticates using the certificates that are read from instance metadata.
| https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/Identity/Tasks/callingservicesfrominstances.htm
\ (instance_principal_auth)
4 / use resource principals to make API calls
\ (resource_principal_auth)
5 / no credentials needed, this is typically for reading public buckets
\ (no_auth)
provider> 2
Option namespace.
Object storage namespace
Enter a value.
namespace> idbamagbg734
Option compartment.
Object storage compartment OCID
Enter a value.
compartment> ocid1.compartment.oc1..aaaaaaaapufkxc7ame3sthry5i7ujrwfc7ejnthhu6bhanm5oqfjpyasjkba
Option region.
Object storage Region
Enter a value.
region> us-ashburn-1
Option endpoint.
Endpoint for Object storage API.
Leave blank to use the default endpoint for the region.
Enter a value. Press Enter to leave empty.
endpoint>
Option config_file.
Path to OCI config file
Choose a number from below, or type in your own string value.
Press Enter for the default (~/.oci/config).
1 / oci configuration file location
\ (~/.oci/config)
config_file> /etc/oci/dev.conf
Option config_profile.
Profile name inside OCI config file
Choose a number from below, or type in your own string value.
Press Enter for the default (Default).
1 / Use the default profile
\ (Default)
config_profile> Test
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Configuration complete.
Options:
- type: oracleobjectstorage
- namespace: idbamagbg734
- compartment: ocid1.compartment.oc1..aaaaaaaapufkxc7ame3sthry5i7ujrwfc7ejnthhu6bhanm5oqfjpyasjkba
- region: us-ashburn-1
- provider: user_principal_auth
- config_file: /etc/oci/dev.conf
- config_profile: Test
Keep this "remote" remote?
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See all buckets
rclone lsd remote:
Create a new bucket
rclone mkdir remote:bucket
List the contents of a bucket
rclone ls remote:bucket
rclone ls remote:bucket --max-depth 1
Modified time
The modified time is stored as metadata on the object as opc-meta-mtime as floating point since the
epoch, accurate to 1 ns.
If the modification time needs to be updated rclone will attempt to perform a server side copy to update
the modification if the object can be copied in a single part. In the case the object is larger than
5Gb, the object will be uploaded rather than copied.
Note that reading this from the object takes an additional HEAD request as the metadata isn’t returned in
object listings.
Multipart uploads
rclone supports multipart uploads with OOS which means that it can upload files bigger than 5 GiB.
Note that files uploaded both with multipart upload and through crypt remotes do not have MD5 sums.
rclone switches from single part uploads to multipart uploads at the point specified by
--oos-upload-cutoff. This can be a maximum of 5 GiB and a minimum of 0 (ie always upload multipart
files).
The chunk sizes used in the multipart upload are specified by --oos-chunk-size and the number of chunks
uploaded concurrently is specified by --oos-upload-concurrency.
Multipart uploads will use --transfers * --oos-upload-concurrency * --oos-chunk-size extra memory.
Single part uploads to not use extra memory.
Single part transfers can be faster than multipart transfers or slower depending on your latency from oos
- the more latency, the more likely single part transfers will be faster.
Increasing --oos-upload-concurrency will increase throughput (8 would be a sensible value) and increasing
--oos-chunk-size also increases throughput (16M would be sensible). Increasing either of these will use
more memory. The default values are high enough to gain most of the possible performance without using
too much memory.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to oracleobjectstorage (Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Object
Storage).
–oos-provider
Choose your Auth Provider
Properties:
• Config: provider
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_PROVIDER
• Type: string
• Default: “env_auth”
• Examples:
• “env_auth”
• automatically pickup the credentials from runtime(env), first one to provide auth wins
• “user_principal_auth”
• use an OCI user and an API key for authentication.
• you’ll need to put in a config file your tenancy OCID, user OCID, region, the path, fingerprint to
an API key.
• https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/API/Concepts/sdkconfig.htm
• “instance_principal_auth”
• use instance principals to authorize an instance to make API calls.
• each instance has its own identity, and authenticates using the certificates that are read from
instance metadata.
• https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/Content/Identity/Tasks/callingservicesfrominstances.htm
• “resource_principal_auth”
• use resource principals to make API calls
• “no_auth”
• no credentials needed, this is typically for reading public buckets
–oos-namespace
Object storage namespace
Properties:
• Config: namespace
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_NAMESPACE
• Type: string
• Required: true
–oos-compartment
Object storage compartment OCID
Properties:
• Config: compartment
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_COMPARTMENT
• Provider: !no_auth
• Type: string
• Required: true
–oos-region
Object storage Region
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_REGION
• Type: string
• Required: true
–oos-endpoint
Endpoint for Object storage API.
Leave blank to use the default endpoint for the region.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–oos-config-file
Path to OCI config file
Properties:
• Config: config_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_CONFIG_FILE
• Provider: user_principal_auth
• Type: string
• Default: “~/.oci/config”
• Examples:
• “~/.oci/config”
• oci configuration file location
–oos-config-profile
Profile name inside the oci config file
Properties:
• Config: config_profile
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_CONFIG_PROFILE
• Provider: user_principal_auth
• Type: string
• Default: “Default”
• Examples:
• “Default”
• Use the default profile
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to oracleobjectstorage (Oracle Cloud Infrastructure Object
Storage).
–oos-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to chunked upload.
Any files larger than this will be uploaded in chunks of chunk_size. The minimum is 0 and the maximum is
5 GiB.
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 200Mi
–oos-chunk-size
Chunk size to use for uploading.
When uploading files larger than upload_cutoff or files with unknown size (e.g. from “rclone rcat” or
uploaded with “rclone mount” or google photos or google docs) they will be uploaded as multipart uploads
using this chunk size.
Note that “upload_concurrency” chunks of this size are buffered in memory per transfer.
If you are transferring large files over high-speed links and you have enough memory, then increasing
this will speed up the transfers.
Rclone will automatically increase the chunk size when uploading a large file of known size to stay below
the 10,000 chunks limit.
Files of unknown size are uploaded with the configured chunk_size. Since the default chunk size is 5 MiB
and there can be at most 10,000 chunks, this means that by default the maximum size of a file you can
stream upload is 48 GiB. If you wish to stream upload larger files then you will need to increase
chunk_size.
Increasing the chunk size decreases the accuracy of the progress statistics displayed with “-P” flag.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 5Mi
–oos-upload-concurrency
Concurrency for multipart uploads.
This is the number of chunks of the same file that are uploaded concurrently.
If you are uploading small numbers of large files over high-speed links and these uploads do not fully
utilize your bandwidth, then increasing this may help to speed up the transfers.
Properties:
• Config: upload_concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_UPLOAD_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 10
–oos-copy-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to multipart copy.
Any files larger than this that need to be server-side copied will be copied in chunks of this size.
The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 5 GiB.
Properties:
• Config: copy_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_COPY_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 4.656Gi
–oos-copy-timeout
Timeout for copy.
Copy is an asynchronous operation, specify timeout to wait for copy to succeed
Properties:
• Config: copy_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_COPY_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–oos-disable-checksum
Don’t store MD5 checksum with object metadata.
Normally rclone will calculate the MD5 checksum of the input before uploading it so it can add it to
metadata on the object. This is great for data integrity checking but can cause long delays for large
files to start uploading.
Properties:
• Config: disable_checksum
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_DISABLE_CHECKSUM
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–oos-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,InvalidUtf8,Dot
–oos-leave-parts-on-error
If true avoid calling abort upload on a failure, leaving all successfully uploaded parts on S3 for manual
recovery.
It should be set to true for resuming uploads across different sessions.
WARNING: Storing parts of an incomplete multipart upload counts towards space usage on object storage and
will add additional costs if not cleaned up.
Properties:
• Config: leave_parts_on_error
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_LEAVE_PARTS_ON_ERROR
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–oos-no-check-bucket
If set, don’t attempt to check the bucket exists or create it.
This can be useful when trying to minimise the number of transactions rclone does if you know the bucket
exists already.
It can also be needed if the user you are using does not have bucket creation permissions.
Properties:
• Config: no_check_bucket
• Env Var: RCLONE_OOS_NO_CHECK_BUCKET
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the oracleobjectstorage backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
rename
change the name of an object
rclone backend rename remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command can be used to rename a object.
Usage Examples:
rclone backend rename oos:bucket relative-object-path-under-bucket object-new-name
list-multipart-uploads
List the unfinished multipart uploads
rclone backend list-multipart-uploads remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command lists the unfinished multipart uploads in JSON format.
rclone backend list-multipart-uploads oos:bucket/path/to/object
It returns a dictionary of buckets with values as lists of unfinished multipart uploads.
You can call it with no bucket in which case it lists all bucket, with a bucket or with a bucket and
path.
{
"test-bucket": [
{
"namespace": "test-namespace",
"bucket": "test-bucket",
"object": "600m.bin",
"uploadId": "51dd8114-52a4-b2f2-c42f-5291f05eb3c8",
"timeCreated": "2022-07-29T06:21:16.595Z",
"storageTier": "Standard"
}
]
cleanup
Remove unfinished multipart uploads.
rclone backend cleanup remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This command removes unfinished multipart uploads of age greater than max-age which defaults to 24 hours.
Note that you can use -i/–dry-run with this command to see what it would do.
rclone backend cleanup oos:bucket/path/to/object
rclone backend cleanup -o max-age=7w oos:bucket/path/to/object
Durations are parsed as per the rest of rclone, 2h, 7d, 7w etc.
Options:
• “max-age”: Max age of upload to delete
QingStor
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:bucket/path/to/dir.
Configuration
Here is an example of making an QingStor configuration. First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/r/c/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / QingStor Object Storage
\ "qingstor"
[snip]
Storage> qingstor
Get QingStor credentials from runtime. Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter QingStor credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get QingStor credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM)
\ "true"
env_auth> 1
QingStor Access Key ID - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
access_key_id> access_key
QingStor Secret Access Key (password) - leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
secret_access_key> secret_key
Enter an endpoint URL to connection QingStor API.
Leave blank will use the default value "https://qingstor.com:443"
endpoint>
Zone connect to. Default is "pek3a".
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
/ The Beijing (China) Three Zone
1 | Needs location constraint pek3a.
\ "pek3a"
/ The Shanghai (China) First Zone
2 | Needs location constraint sh1a.
\ "sh1a"
zone> 1
Number of connection retry.
Leave blank will use the default value "3".
connection_retries>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
env_auth = false
access_key_id = access_key
secret_access_key = secret_key
endpoint =
zone = pek3a
connection_retries =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all buckets
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new bucket
rclone mkdir remote:bucket
List the contents of a bucket
rclone ls remote:bucket
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote bucket, deleting any excess files in the bucket.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:bucket
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
Multipart uploads
rclone supports multipart uploads with QingStor which means that it can upload files bigger than 5 GiB.
Note that files uploaded with multipart upload don’t have an MD5SUM.
Note that incomplete multipart uploads older than 24 hours can be removed with rclone cleanup
remote:bucket just for one bucket rclone cleanup remote: for all buckets. QingStor does not ever remove
incomplete multipart uploads so it may be necessary to run this from time to time.
Buckets and Zone
With QingStor you can list buckets (rclone lsd) using any zone, but you can only access the content of a
bucket from the zone it was created in. If you attempt to access a bucket from the wrong zone, you will
get an error, incorrect zone, the bucket is not in 'XXX' zone.
Authentication
There are two ways to supply rclone with a set of QingStor credentials. In order of precedence:
• Directly in the rclone configuration file (as configured by rclone config)
• set access_key_id and secret_access_key
• Runtime configuration:
• set env_auth to true in the config file
• Exporting the following environment variables before running rclone
• Access Key ID: QS_ACCESS_KEY_ID or QS_ACCESS_KEY
• Secret Access Key: QS_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY or QS_SECRET_KEY
Restricted filename characters
The control characters 0x00-0x1F and / are replaced as in the default restricted characters set. Note
that 0x7F is not replaced.
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to qingstor (QingCloud Object Storage).
–qingstor-env-auth
Get QingStor credentials from runtime.
Only applies if access_key_id and secret_access_key is blank.
Properties:
• Config: env_auth
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_ENV_AUTH
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “false”
• Enter QingStor credentials in the next step.
• “true”
• Get QingStor credentials from the environment (env vars or IAM).
–qingstor-access-key-id
QingStor Access Key ID.
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Properties:
• Config: access_key_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_ACCESS_KEY_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–qingstor-secret-access-key
QingStor Secret Access Key (password).
Leave blank for anonymous access or runtime credentials.
Properties:
• Config: secret_access_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–qingstor-endpoint
Enter an endpoint URL to connection QingStor API.
Leave blank will use the default value “https://qingstor.com:443”.
Properties:
• Config: endpoint
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_ENDPOINT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–qingstor-zone
Zone to connect to.
Default is “pek3a”.
Properties:
• Config: zone
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_ZONE
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “pek3a”
• The Beijing (China) Three Zone.
• Needs location constraint pek3a.
• “sh1a”
• The Shanghai (China) First Zone.
• Needs location constraint sh1a.
• “gd2a”
• The Guangdong (China) Second Zone.
• Needs location constraint gd2a.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to qingstor (QingCloud Object Storage).
–qingstor-connection-retries
Number of connection retries.
Properties:
• Config: connection_retries
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_CONNECTION_RETRIES
• Type: int
• Default: 3
–qingstor-upload-cutoff
Cutoff for switching to chunked upload.
Any files larger than this will be uploaded in chunks of chunk_size. The minimum is 0 and the maximum is
5 GiB.
Properties:
• Config: upload_cutoff
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_UPLOAD_CUTOFF
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 200Mi
–qingstor-chunk-size
Chunk size to use for uploading.
When uploading files larger than upload_cutoff they will be uploaded as multipart uploads using this
chunk size.
Note that “–qingstor-upload-concurrency” chunks of this size are buffered in memory per transfer.
If you are transferring large files over high-speed links and you have enough memory, then increasing
this will speed up the transfers.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 4Mi
–qingstor-upload-concurrency
Concurrency for multipart uploads.
This is the number of chunks of the same file that are uploaded concurrently.
NB if you set this to > 1 then the checksums of multipart uploads become corrupted (the uploads
themselves are not corrupted though).
If you are uploading small numbers of large files over high-speed links and these uploads do not fully
utilize your bandwidth, then increasing this may help to speed up the transfers.
Properties:
• Config: upload_concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_UPLOAD_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 1
–qingstor-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_QINGSTOR_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Ctl,InvalidUtf8
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the qingstor backend. Backends without this capability cannot determine
free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Sia
Sia (sia.tech) is a decentralized cloud storage platform based on the blockchain technology. With rclone
you can use it like any other remote filesystem or mount Sia folders locally. The technology behind it
involves a number of new concepts such as Siacoins and Wallet, Blockchain and Consensus, Renting and
Hosting, and so on. If you are new to it, you’d better first familiarize yourself using their excellent
support documentation.
Introduction
Before you can use rclone with Sia, you will need to have a running copy of Sia-UI or siad (the Sia
daemon) locally on your computer or on local network (e.g. a NAS). Please follow the Get started guide
and install one.
rclone interacts with Sia network by talking to the Sia daemon via HTTP API which is usually available on
port 9980. By default you will run the daemon locally on the same computer so it’s safe to leave the API
password blank (the API URL will be http://127.0.0.1:9980 making external access impossible).
However, if you want to access Sia daemon running on another node, for example due to memory constraints
or because you want to share single daemon between several rclone and Sia-UI instances, you’ll need to
make a few more provisions: - Ensure you have Sia daemon installed directly or in a docker
container because Sia-UI does not support this mode natively. - Run it on externally accessible port,
for example provide --api-addr :9980 and --disable-api-security arguments on the daemon command line. -
Enforce API password for the siad daemon via environment variable SIA_API_PASSWORD or text file named
apipassword in the daemon directory. - Set rclone backend option api_password taking it from above
locations.
Notes: 1. If your wallet is locked, rclone cannot unlock it automatically. You should either unlock it
in advance by using Sia-UI or via command line siac wallet unlock. Alternatively you can make siad
unlock your wallet automatically upon startup by running it with environment variable
SIA_WALLET_PASSWORD. 2. If siad cannot find the SIA_API_PASSWORD variable or the apipassword file in
the SIA_DIR directory, it will generate a random password and store in the text file named apipassword
under YOUR_HOME/.sia/ directory on Unix or C:\Users\YOUR_HOME\AppData\Local\Sia\apipassword on Windows.
Remember this when you configure password in rclone. 3. The only way to use siad without API password
is to run it on localhost with command line argument --authorize-api=false, but this is insecure and
strongly discouraged.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a sia remote called mySia. First, run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> mySia
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
...
29 / Sia Decentralized Cloud
\ "sia"
...
Storage> sia
Sia daemon API URL, like http://sia.daemon.host:9980.
Note that siad must run with --disable-api-security to open API port for other hosts (not recommended).
Keep default if Sia daemon runs on localhost.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("http://127.0.0.1:9980").
api_url> http://127.0.0.1:9980
Sia Daemon API Password.
Can be found in the apipassword file located in HOME/.sia/ or in the daemon directory.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g/n> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
--------------------
[mySia]
type = sia
api_url = http://127.0.0.1:9980
api_password = *** ENCRYPTED ***
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Once configured, you can then use rclone like this:
• List directories in top level of your Sia storage
rclone lsd mySia:
• List all the files in your Sia storage
rclone ls mySia:
• Upload a local directory to the Sia directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source mySia:backup
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to sia (Sia Decentralized Cloud).
–sia-api-url
Sia daemon API URL, like http://sia.daemon.host:9980.
Note that siad must run with –disable-api-security to open API port for other hosts (not recommended).
Keep default if Sia daemon runs on localhost.
Properties:
• Config: api_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_SIA_API_URL
• Type: string
• Default: “http://127.0.0.1:9980”
–sia-api-password
Sia Daemon API Password.
Can be found in the apipassword file located in HOME/.sia/ or in the daemon directory.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: api_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_SIA_API_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to sia (Sia Decentralized Cloud).
–sia-user-agent
Siad User Agent
Sia daemon requires the `Sia-Agent' user agent by default for security
Properties:
• Config: user_agent
• Env Var: RCLONE_SIA_USER_AGENT
• Type: string
• Default: “Sia-Agent”
–sia-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_SIA_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Question,Hash,Percent,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
• Modification times not supported
• Checksums not supported
• rclone about not supported
• rclone can work only with Siad or Sia-UI at the moment, the SkyNet daemon is not supported yet.
• Sia does not allow control characters or symbols like question and pound signs in file names. rclone
will transparently encode them for you, but you’d better be aware
Swift
Swift refers to OpenStack Object Storage. Commercial implementations of that being:
• Rackspace Cloud Files
• Memset Memstore
• OVH Object Storage
• https://docs.oracle.com/en-us/iaas/integration/doc/configure-object-storage.html Oracle Cloud Storage
• https://console.bluemix.net/docs/infrastructure/objectstorage-swift/index.html IBM Bluemix Cloud Ob‐
jectStorage Swift
Paths are specified as remote:container (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:container/path/to/dir.
Configuration
Here is an example of making a swift configuration. First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / OpenStack Swift (Rackspace Cloud Files, Memset Memstore, OVH)
\ "swift"
[snip]
Storage> swift
Get swift credentials from environment variables in standard OpenStack form.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Enter swift credentials in the next step
\ "false"
2 / Get swift credentials from environment vars. Leave other fields blank if using this.
\ "true"
env_auth> true
User name to log in (OS_USERNAME).
user>
API key or password (OS_PASSWORD).
key>
Authentication URL for server (OS_AUTH_URL).
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Rackspace US
\ "https://auth.api.rackspacecloud.com/v1.0"
2 / Rackspace UK
\ "https://lon.auth.api.rackspacecloud.com/v1.0"
3 / Rackspace v2
\ "https://identity.api.rackspacecloud.com/v2.0"
4 / Memset Memstore UK
\ "https://auth.storage.memset.com/v1.0"
5 / Memset Memstore UK v2
\ "https://auth.storage.memset.com/v2.0"
6 / OVH
\ "https://auth.cloud.ovh.net/v3"
auth>
User ID to log in - optional - most swift systems use user and leave this blank (v3 auth) (OS_USER_ID).
user_id>
User domain - optional (v3 auth) (OS_USER_DOMAIN_NAME)
domain>
Tenant name - optional for v1 auth, this or tenant_id required otherwise (OS_TENANT_NAME or OS_PROJECT_NAME)
tenant>
Tenant ID - optional for v1 auth, this or tenant required otherwise (OS_TENANT_ID)
tenant_id>
Tenant domain - optional (v3 auth) (OS_PROJECT_DOMAIN_NAME)
tenant_domain>
Region name - optional (OS_REGION_NAME)
region>
Storage URL - optional (OS_STORAGE_URL)
storage_url>
Auth Token from alternate authentication - optional (OS_AUTH_TOKEN)
auth_token>
AuthVersion - optional - set to (1,2,3) if your auth URL has no version (ST_AUTH_VERSION)
auth_version>
Endpoint type to choose from the service catalogue (OS_ENDPOINT_TYPE)
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Public (default, choose this if not sure)
\ "public"
2 / Internal (use internal service net)
\ "internal"
3 / Admin
\ "admin"
endpoint_type>
Remote config
--------------------
[test]
env_auth = true
user =
key =
auth =
user_id =
domain =
tenant =
tenant_id =
tenant_domain =
region =
storage_url =
auth_token =
auth_version =
endpoint_type =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this
See all containers
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new container
rclone mkdir remote:container
List the contents of a container
rclone ls remote:container
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote container, deleting any excess files in the container.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:container
Configuration from an OpenStack credentials file
An OpenStack credentials file typically looks something something like this (without the comments)
export OS_AUTH_URL=https://a.provider.net/v2.0
export OS_TENANT_ID=ffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
export OS_TENANT_NAME="1234567890123456"
export OS_USERNAME="123abc567xy"
echo "Please enter your OpenStack Password: "
read -sr OS_PASSWORD_INPUT
export OS_PASSWORD=$OS_PASSWORD_INPUT
export OS_REGION_NAME="SBG1"
if [ -z "$OS_REGION_NAME" ]; then unset OS_REGION_NAME; fi
The config file needs to look something like this where $OS_USERNAME represents the value of the
OS_USERNAME variable - 123abc567xy in the example above.
[remote]
type = swift
user = $OS_USERNAME
key = $OS_PASSWORD
auth = $OS_AUTH_URL
tenant = $OS_TENANT_NAME
Note that you may (or may not) need to set region too - try without first.
Configuration from the environment
If you prefer you can configure rclone to use swift using a standard set of OpenStack environment
variables.
When you run through the config, make sure you choose true for env_auth and leave everything else blank.
rclone will then set any empty config parameters from the environment using standard OpenStack
environment variables. There is a list of the variables in the docs for the swift library.
Using an alternate authentication method
If your OpenStack installation uses a non-standard authentication method that might not be yet supported
by rclone or the underlying swift library, you can authenticate externally (e.g. calling manually the
openstack commands to get a token). Then, you just need to pass the two configuration variables
auth_token and storage_url. If they are both provided, the other variables are ignored. rclone will not
try to authenticate but instead assume it is already authenticated and use these two variables to access
the OpenStack installation.
Using rclone without a config file
You can use rclone with swift without a config file, if desired, like this:
source openstack-credentials-file
export RCLONE_CONFIG_MYREMOTE_TYPE=swift
export RCLONE_CONFIG_MYREMOTE_ENV_AUTH=true
rclone lsd myremote:
–fast-list
This remote supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more memory.
See the rclone docs for more details.
–update and –use-server-modtime
As noted below, the modified time is stored on metadata on the object. It is used by default for all
operations that require checking the time a file was last updated. It allows rclone to treat the remote
more like a true filesystem, but it is inefficient because it requires an extra API call to retrieve the
metadata.
For many operations, the time the object was last uploaded to the remote is sufficient to determine if it
is “dirty”. By using --update along with --use-server-modtime, you can avoid the extra API call and
simply upload files whose local modtime is newer than the time it was last uploaded.
Modified time
The modified time is stored as metadata on the object as X-Object-Meta-Mtime as floating point since the
epoch accurate to 1 ns.
This is a de facto standard (used in the official python-swiftclient amongst others) for storing the
modification time for an object.
Restricted filename characters
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to swift (OpenStack Swift (Rackspace Cloud Files, Memset Memstore,
OVH)).
–swift-env-auth
Get swift credentials from environment variables in standard OpenStack form.
Properties:
• Config: env_auth
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_ENV_AUTH
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “false”
• Enter swift credentials in the next step.
• “true”
• Get swift credentials from environment vars.
• Leave other fields blank if using this.
–swift-user
User name to log in (OS_USERNAME).
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_USER
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-key
API key or password (OS_PASSWORD).
Properties:
• Config: key
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-auth
Authentication URL for server (OS_AUTH_URL).
Properties:
• Config: auth
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_AUTH
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “https://auth.api.rackspacecloud.com/v1.0”
• Rackspace US
• “https://lon.auth.api.rackspacecloud.com/v1.0”
• Rackspace UK
• “https://identity.api.rackspacecloud.com/v2.0”
• Rackspace v2
• “https://auth.storage.memset.com/v1.0”
• Memset Memstore UK
• “https://auth.storage.memset.com/v2.0”
• Memset Memstore UK v2
• “https://auth.cloud.ovh.net/v3”
• OVH
–swift-user-id
User ID to log in - optional - most swift systems use user and leave this blank (v3 auth) (OS_USER_ID).
Properties:
• Config: user_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_USER_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-domain
User domain - optional (v3 auth) (OS_USER_DOMAIN_NAME)
Properties:
• Config: domain
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_DOMAIN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-tenant
Tenant name - optional for v1 auth, this or tenant_id required otherwise (OS_TENANT_NAME or
OS_PROJECT_NAME).
Properties:
• Config: tenant
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_TENANT
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-tenant-id
Tenant ID - optional for v1 auth, this or tenant required otherwise (OS_TENANT_ID).
Properties:
• Config: tenant_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_TENANT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-tenant-domain
Tenant domain - optional (v3 auth) (OS_PROJECT_DOMAIN_NAME).
Properties:
• Config: tenant_domain
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_TENANT_DOMAIN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-region
Region name - optional (OS_REGION_NAME).
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_REGION
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-storage-url
Storage URL - optional (OS_STORAGE_URL).
Properties:
• Config: storage_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_STORAGE_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-auth-token
Auth Token from alternate authentication - optional (OS_AUTH_TOKEN).
Properties:
• Config: auth_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_AUTH_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-application-credential-id
Application Credential ID (OS_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_ID).
Properties:
• Config: application_credential_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-application-credential-name
Application Credential Name (OS_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_NAME).
Properties:
• Config: application_credential_name
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_NAME
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-application-credential-secret
Application Credential Secret (OS_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_SECRET).
Properties:
• Config: application_credential_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_APPLICATION_CREDENTIAL_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–swift-auth-version
AuthVersion - optional - set to (1,2,3) if your auth URL has no version (ST_AUTH_VERSION).
Properties:
• Config: auth_version
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_AUTH_VERSION
• Type: int
• Default: 0
–swift-endpoint-type
Endpoint type to choose from the service catalogue (OS_ENDPOINT_TYPE).
Properties:
• Config: endpoint_type
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_ENDPOINT_TYPE
• Type: string
• Default: “public”
• Examples:
• “public”
• Public (default, choose this if not sure)
• “internal”
• Internal (use internal service net)
• “admin”
• Admin
–swift-storage-policy
The storage policy to use when creating a new container.
This applies the specified storage policy when creating a new container. The policy cannot be changed
afterwards. The allowed configuration values and their meaning depend on your Swift storage provider.
Properties:
• Config: storage_policy
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_STORAGE_POLICY
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “”
• Default
• “pcs”
• OVH Public Cloud Storage
• “pca”
• OVH Public Cloud Archive
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to swift (OpenStack Swift (Rackspace Cloud Files, Memset Memstore,
OVH)).
–swift-leave-parts-on-error
If true avoid calling abort upload on a failure.
It should be set to true for resuming uploads across different sessions.
Properties:
• Config: leave_parts_on_error
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_LEAVE_PARTS_ON_ERROR
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–swift-chunk-size
Above this size files will be chunked into a _segments container.
Above this size files will be chunked into a _segments container. The default for this is 5 GiB which is
its maximum value.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 5Gi
–swift-no-chunk
Don’t chunk files during streaming upload.
When doing streaming uploads (e.g. using rcat or mount) setting this flag will cause the swift backend to
not upload chunked files.
This will limit the maximum upload size to 5 GiB. However non chunked files are easier to deal with and
have an MD5SUM.
Rclone will still chunk files bigger than chunk_size when doing normal copy operations.
Properties:
• Config: no_chunk
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_NO_CHUNK
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–swift-no-large-objects
Disable support for static and dynamic large objects
Swift cannot transparently store files bigger than 5 GiB. There are two schemes for doing that, static
or dynamic large objects, and the API does not allow rclone to determine whether a file is a static or
dynamic large object without doing a HEAD on the object. Since these need to be treated differently,
this means rclone has to issue HEAD requests for objects for example when reading checksums.
When no_large_objects is set, rclone will assume that there are no static or dynamic large objects
stored. This means it can stop doing the extra HEAD calls which in turn increases performance greatly
especially when doing a swift to swift transfer with --checksum set.
Setting this option implies no_chunk and also that no files will be uploaded in chunks, so files bigger
than 5 GiB will just fail on upload.
If you set this option and there are static or dynamic large objects, then this will give incorrect
hashes for them. Downloads will succeed, but other operations such as Remove and Copy will fail.
Properties:
• Config: no_large_objects
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_NO_LARGE_OBJECTS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–swift-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_SWIFT_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,InvalidUtf8
Limitations
The Swift API doesn’t return a correct MD5SUM for segmented files (Dynamic or Static Large Objects) so
rclone won’t check or use the MD5SUM for these.
Troubleshooting
Rclone gives Failed to create file system for “remote:”: Bad Request
Due to an oddity of the underlying swift library, it gives a “Bad Request” error rather than a more
sensible error when the authentication fails for Swift.
So this most likely means your username / password is wrong. You can investigate further with the
--dump-bodies flag.
This may also be caused by specifying the region when you shouldn’t have (e.g. OVH).
Rclone gives Failed to create file system: Response didn’t have storage url and auth token
This is most likely caused by forgetting to specify your tenant when setting up a swift remote.
OVH Cloud Archive
To use rclone with OVH cloud archive, first use rclone config to set up a swift backend with OVH,
choosing pca as the storage_policy.
Uploading Objects
Uploading objects to OVH cloud archive is no different to object storage, you just simply run the command
you like (move, copy or sync) to upload the objects. Once uploaded the objects will show in a “Frozen”
state within the OVH control panel.
Retrieving Objects
To retrieve objects use rclone copy as normal. If the objects are in a frozen state then rclone will ask
for them all to be unfrozen and it will wait at the end of the output with a message like the following:
2019/03/23 13:06:33 NOTICE: Received retry after error - sleeping until
2019-03-23T13:16:33.481657164+01:00 (9m59.99985121s)
Rclone will wait for the time specified then retry the copy.
pCloud
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for pCloud involves getting a token from pCloud which you need to do in your browser.
rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Pcloud
\ "pcloud"
[snip]
Storage> pcloud
Pcloud App Client Id - leave blank normally.
client_id>
Pcloud App Client Secret - leave blank normally.
client_secret>
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
client_id =
client_secret =
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"bearer","expiry":"0001-01-01T00:00:00Z"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from pCloud.
This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the verification code.
This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it temporarily if you are
running a host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your pCloud
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your pCloud
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to a pCloud directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
pCloud allows modification times to be set on objects accurate to 1 second. These will be used to detect
whether objects need syncing or not. In order to set a Modification time pCloud requires the object be
re-uploaded.
pCloud supports MD5 and SHA1 hashes in the US region, and SHA1 and SHA256 hashes in the EU region, so you
can use the --checksum flag.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Deleting files
Deleted files will be moved to the trash. Your subscription level will determine how long items stay in
the trash. rclone cleanup can be used to empty the trash.
Emptying the trash
Due to an API limitation, the rclone cleanup command will only work if you set your username and password
in the advanced options for this backend. Since we generally want to avoid storing user passwords in the
rclone config file, we advise you to only set this up if you need the rclone cleanup command to work.
Root folder ID
You can set the root_folder_id for rclone. This is the directory (identified by its Folder ID) that
rclone considers to be the root of your pCloud drive.
Normally you will leave this blank and rclone will determine the correct root to use itself.
However you can set this to restrict rclone to a specific folder hierarchy.
In order to do this you will have to find the Folder ID of the directory you wish rclone to display.
This will be the folder field of the URL when you open the relevant folder in the pCloud web interface.
So if the folder you want rclone to use has a URL which looks like
https://my.pcloud.com/#page=filemanager&folder=5xxxxxxxx8&tpl=foldergrid in the browser, then you use
5xxxxxxxx8 as the root_folder_id in the config.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to pcloud (Pcloud).
–pcloud-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–pcloud-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to pcloud (Pcloud).
–pcloud-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–pcloud-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–pcloud-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–pcloud-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
–pcloud-root-folder-id
Fill in for rclone to use a non root folder as its starting point.
Properties:
• Config: root_folder_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_ROOT_FOLDER_ID
• Type: string
• Default: “d0”
–pcloud-hostname
Hostname to connect to.
This is normally set when rclone initially does the oauth connection, however you will need to set it by
hand if you are using remote config with rclone authorize.
Properties:
• Config: hostname
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_HOSTNAME
• Type: string
• Default: “api.pcloud.com”
• Examples:
• “api.pcloud.com”
• Original/US region
• “eapi.pcloud.com”
• EU region
–pcloud-username
Your pcloud username.
This is only required when you want to use the cleanup command. Due to a bug in the pcloud API the
required API does not support OAuth authentication so we have to rely on user password authentication for
it.
Properties:
• Config: username
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_USERNAME
• Type: string
• Required: false
–pcloud-password
Your pcloud password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: password
• Env Var: RCLONE_PCLOUD_PASSWORD
• Type: string
• Required: false
premiumize.me
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for premiumize.me involves getting a token from premiumize.me which you need to do in
your browser. rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / premiumize.me
\ "premiumizeme"
[snip]
Storage> premiumizeme
** See help for premiumizeme backend at: https://rclone.org/premiumizeme/ **
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
type = premiumizeme
token = {"access_token":"XXX","token_type":"Bearer","refresh_token":"XXX","expiry":"2029-08-07T18:44:15.548915378+01:00"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d>
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from
premiumize.me. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the
verification code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it
temporarily if you are running a host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your premiumize.me
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your premiumize.me
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an premiumize.me directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
premiumize.me does not support modification times or hashes, therefore syncing will default to
--size-only checking. Note that using --update will work.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
” 0x22 ＂
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to premiumizeme (premiumize.me).
–premiumizeme-api-key
API Key.
This is not normally used - use oauth instead.
Properties:
• Config: api_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_PREMIUMIZEME_API_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to premiumizeme (premiumize.me).
–premiumizeme-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_PREMIUMIZEME_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,DoubleQuote,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Note that premiumize.me is case insensitive so you can’t have a file called “Hello.doc” and one called
“hello.doc”.
premiumize.me file names can’t have the \ or " characters in. rclone maps these to and from an identical
looking unicode equivalents ＼ and ＂
premiumize.me only supports filenames up to 255 characters in length.
put.io
Paths are specified as remote:path
put.io paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
The initial setup for put.io involves getting a token from put.io which you need to do in your browser.
rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> putio
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Put.io
\ "putio"
[snip]
Storage> putio
** See help for putio backend at: https://rclone.org/putio/ **
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[putio]
type = putio
token = {"access_token":"XXXXXXXX","expiry":"0001-01-01T00:00:00Z"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
putio putio
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> q
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Google if
you use auto config mode. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get
back the verification code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it
temporarily if you are running a host firewall, or use manual mode.
You can then use it like this,
List directories in top level of your put.io
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your put.io
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to a put.io directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
\ 0x5C ＼
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to putio (Put.io).
–putio-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_PUTIO_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
put.io has rate limiting. When you hit a limit, rclone automatically retries after waiting the amount of
time requested by the server.
If you want to avoid ever hitting these limits, you may use the --tpslimit flag with a low number. Note
that the imposed limits may be different for different operations, and may change over time.
Seafile
This is a backend for the Seafile storage service: - It works with both the free community edition or the
professional edition. - Seafile versions 6.x and 7.x are all supported. - Encrypted libraries are also
supported. - It supports 2FA enabled users
Configuration
There are two distinct modes you can setup your remote: - you point your remote to the root of the
server, meaning you don’t specify a library during the configuration: Paths are specified as
remote:library. You may put subdirectories in too, e.g. remote:library/path/to/dir. - you point your
remote to a specific library during the configuration: Paths are specified as remote:path/to/dir. This
is the recommended mode when using encrypted libraries. (This mode is possibly slightly faster than the
root mode)
Configuration in root mode
Here is an example of making a seafile configuration for a user with no two-factor authentication. First
run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process. To authenticate you will need the URL of your
server, your email (or username) and your password.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> seafile
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Seafile
\ "seafile"
[snip]
Storage> seafile
** See help for seafile backend at: https://rclone.org/seafile/ **
URL of seafile host to connect to
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to cloud.seafile.com
\ "https://cloud.seafile.com/"
url> http://my.seafile.server/
User name (usually email address)
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
user> me@example.com
Password
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Two-factor authentication ('true' if the account has 2FA enabled)
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
2fa> false
Name of the library. Leave blank to access all non-encrypted libraries.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
library>
Library password (for encrypted libraries only). Leave blank if you pass it through the command line.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g/n> n
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
Two-factor authentication is not enabled on this account.
--------------------
[seafile]
type = seafile
url = http://my.seafile.server/
user = me@example.com
pass = *** ENCRYPTED ***
2fa = false
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This remote is called seafile. It’s pointing to the root of your seafile server and can now be used like
this:
See all libraries
rclone lsd seafile:
Create a new library
rclone mkdir seafile:library
List the contents of a library
rclone ls seafile:library
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote library, deleting any excess files in the library.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory seafile:library
Configuration in library mode
Here’s an example of a configuration in library mode with a user that has the two-factor authentication
enabled. Your 2FA code will be asked at the end of the configuration, and will attempt to authenticate
you:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> seafile
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Seafile
\ "seafile"
[snip]
Storage> seafile
** See help for seafile backend at: https://rclone.org/seafile/ **
URL of seafile host to connect to
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to cloud.seafile.com
\ "https://cloud.seafile.com/"
url> http://my.seafile.server/
User name (usually email address)
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
user> me@example.com
Password
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Two-factor authentication ('true' if the account has 2FA enabled)
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
2fa> true
Name of the library. Leave blank to access all non-encrypted libraries.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
library> My Library
Library password (for encrypted libraries only). Leave blank if you pass it through the command line.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g/n> n
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
Two-factor authentication: please enter your 2FA code
2fa code> 123456
Authenticating...
Success!
--------------------
[seafile]
type = seafile
url = http://my.seafile.server/
user = me@example.com
pass =
2fa = true
library = My Library
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
You’ll notice your password is blank in the configuration. It’s because we only need the password to
authenticate you once.
You specified My Library during the configuration. The root of the remote is pointing at the root of the
library My Library:
See all files in the library:
rclone lsd seafile:
Create a new directory inside the library
rclone mkdir seafile:directory
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls seafile:directory
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote library, deleting any excess files in the library.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory seafile:
–fast-list
Seafile version 7+ supports --fast-list which allows you to use fewer transactions in exchange for more
memory. See the rclone docs for more details. Please note this is not supported on seafile server
version 6.x
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
/ 0x2F ／
” 0x22 ＂
\ 0x5C ＼
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Seafile and rclone link
Rclone supports generating share links for non-encrypted libraries only. They can either be for a file
or a directory:
rclone link seafile:seafile-tutorial.doc
http://my.seafile.server/f/fdcd8a2f93f84b8b90f4/
or if run on a directory you will get:
rclone link seafile:dir
http://my.seafile.server/d/9ea2455f6f55478bbb0d/
Please note a share link is unique for each file or directory. If you run a link command on a file/dir
that has already been shared, you will get the exact same link.
Compatibility
It has been actively tested using the seafile docker image of these versions: - 6.3.4 community edition -
7.0.5 community edition - 7.1.3 community edition
Versions below 6.0 are not supported. Versions between 6.0 and 6.3 haven’t been tested and might not
work properly.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to seafile (seafile).
–seafile-url
URL of seafile host to connect to.
Properties:
• Config: url
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_URL
• Type: string
• Required: true
• Examples:
• “https://cloud.seafile.com/”
• Connect to cloud.seafile.com.
–seafile-user
User name (usually email address).
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_USER
• Type: string
• Required: true
–seafile-pass
Password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–seafile-2fa
Two-factor authentication (`true' if the account has 2FA enabled).
Properties:
• Config: 2fa
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_2FA
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–seafile-library
Name of the library.
Leave blank to access all non-encrypted libraries.
Properties:
• Config: library
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_LIBRARY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–seafile-library-key
Library password (for encrypted libraries only).
Leave blank if you pass it through the command line.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: library_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_LIBRARY_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–seafile-auth-token
Authentication token.
Properties:
• Config: auth_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_AUTH_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to seafile (seafile).
–seafile-create-library
Should rclone create a library if it doesn’t exist.
Properties:
• Config: create_library
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_CREATE_LIBRARY
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–seafile-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_SEAFILE_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,DoubleQuote,BackSlash,Ctl,InvalidUtf8
SFTP
SFTP is the Secure (or SSH) File Transfer Protocol.
The SFTP backend can be used with a number of different providers:
• Hetzner Storage Box
• rsync.net
SFTP runs over SSH v2 and is installed as standard with most modern SSH installations.
Paths are specified as remote:path. If the path does not begin with a / it is relative to the home
directory of the user. An empty path remote: refers to the user’s home directory. For example, rclone
lsd remote: would list the home directory of the user configured in the rclone remote config (i.e
/home/sftpuser). However, rclone lsd remote:/ would list the root directory for remote machine (i.e. /)
Note that some SFTP servers will need the leading / - Synology is a good example of this. rsync.net and
Hetzner, on the other hand, requires users to OMIT the leading /.
Note that by default rclone will try to execute shell commands on the server, see shell access
considerations.
Configuration
Here is an example of making an SFTP configuration. First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / SSH/SFTP
\ "sftp"
[snip]
Storage> sftp
SSH host to connect to
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to example.com
\ "example.com"
host> example.com
SSH username
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("$USER").
user> sftpuser
SSH port number
Enter a signed integer. Press Enter for the default (22).
port>
SSH password, leave blank to use ssh-agent.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank
y/g/n> n
Path to unencrypted PEM-encoded private key file, leave blank to use ssh-agent.
key_file>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
host = example.com
user = sftpuser
port =
pass =
key_file =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
This remote is called remote and can now be used like this:
See all directories in the home directory
rclone lsd remote:
See all directories in the root directory
rclone lsd remote:/
Make a new directory
rclone mkdir remote:path/to/directory
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:path/to/directory
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote directory, deleting any excess files in the directory.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:directory
Mount the remote path /srv/www-data/ to the local path /mnt/www-data
rclone mount remote:/srv/www-data/ /mnt/www-data
SSH Authentication
The SFTP remote supports three authentication methods:
• Password
• Key file, including certificate signed keys
• ssh-agent
Key files should be PEM-encoded private key files. For instance /home/$USER/.ssh/id_rsa. Only
unencrypted OpenSSH or PEM encrypted files are supported.
The key file can be specified in either an external file (key_file) or contained within the rclone config
file (key_pem). If using key_pem in the config file, the entry should be on a single line with new line
(`' or `') separating lines. i.e.
key_pem = -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----\nMaMbaIXtE\n0gAMbMbaSsd\nMbaass\n-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
This will generate it correctly for key_pem for use in the config:
awk '{printf "%s\\n", $0}' < ~/.ssh/id_rsa
If you don’t specify pass, key_file, or key_pem or ask_password then rclone will attempt to contact an
ssh-agent. You can also specify key_use_agent to force the usage of an ssh-agent. In this case key_file
or key_pem can also be specified to force the usage of a specific key in the ssh-agent.
Using an ssh-agent is the only way to load encrypted OpenSSH keys at the moment.
If you set the ask_password option, rclone will prompt for a password when needed and no password has
been configured.
Certificate-signed keys
With traditional key-based authentication, you configure your private key only, and the public key built
into it will be used during the authentication process.
If you have a certificate you may use it to sign your public key, creating a separate SSH user
certificate that should be used instead of the plain public key extracted from the private key. Then you
must provide the path to the user certificate public key file in pubkey_file.
Note: This is not the traditional public key paired with your private key, typically saved as
/home/$USER/.ssh/id_rsa.pub. Setting this path in pubkey_file will not work.
Example:
[remote]
type = sftp
host = example.com
user = sftpuser
key_file = ~/id_rsa
pubkey_file = ~/id_rsa-cert.pub
If you concatenate a cert with a private key then you can specify the merged file in both places.
Note: the cert must come first in the file. e.g.
cat id_rsa-cert.pub id_rsa > merged_key
Host key validation
By default rclone will not check the server’s host key for validation. This can allow an attacker to
replace a server with their own and if you use password authentication then this can lead to that
password being exposed.
Host key matching, using standard known_hosts files can be turned on by enabling the known_hosts_file
option. This can point to the file maintained by OpenSSH or can point to a unique file.
e.g. using the OpenSSH known_hosts file:
[remote]
type = sftp
host = example.com
user = sftpuser
pass =
known_hosts_file = ~/.ssh/known_hosts
Alternatively you can create your own known hosts file like this:
ssh-keyscan -t dsa,rsa,ecdsa,ed25519 example.com >> known_hosts
There are some limitations:
• rclone will not manage this file for you. If the key is missing or wrong then the connection will be
refused.
• If the server is set up for a certificate host key then the entry in the known_hosts file must be the
@cert-authority entry for the CA
If the host key provided by the server does not match the one in the file (or is missing) then the
connection will be aborted and an error returned such as
NewFs: couldn't connect SSH: ssh: handshake failed: knownhosts: key mismatch
or
NewFs: couldn't connect SSH: ssh: handshake failed: knownhosts: key is unknown
If you see an error such as
NewFs: couldn't connect SSH: ssh: handshake failed: ssh: no authorities for hostname: example.com:22
then it is likely the server has presented a CA signed host certificate and you will need to add the
appropriate @cert-authority entry.
The known_hosts_file setting can be set during rclone config as an advanced option.
ssh-agent on macOS
Note that there seem to be various problems with using an ssh-agent on macOS due to recent changes in the
OS. The most effective work-around seems to be to start an ssh-agent in each session, e.g.
eval `ssh-agent -s` && ssh-add -A
And then at the end of the session
eval `ssh-agent -k`
These commands can be used in scripts of course.
Shell access
Some functionality of the SFTP backend relies on remote shell access, and the possibility to execute
commands. This includes checksum, and in some cases also about. The shell commands that must be
executed may be different on different type of shells, and also quoting/escaping of file path arguments
containing special characters may be different. Rclone therefore needs to know what type of shell it is,
and if shell access is available at all.
Most servers run on some version of Unix, and then a basic Unix shell can be assumed, without further
distinction. Windows 10, Server 2019, and later can also run a SSH server, which is a port of OpenSSH
(see official https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-
server/administration/openssh/openssh_install_firstuse installa‐ tion guide). On a Windows server the
shell handling is different: Although it can also be set up to use a Unix type shell, e.g. Cygwin bash,
the default is to use Windows Command Prompt (cmd.exe), and PowerShell is a recommended alternative. All
of these have behave differently, which rclone must handle.
Rclone tries to auto-detect what type of shell is used on the server, first time you access the SFTP
remote. If a remote shell session is successfully created, it will look for indications that it is CMD
or PowerShell, with fall-back to Unix if not something else is detected. If unable to even create a
remote shell session, then shell command execution will be disabled entirely. The result is stored in
the SFTP remote configuration, in option shell_type, so that the auto-detection only have to be performed
once. If you manually set a value for this option before first run, the auto-detection will be skipped,
and if you set a different value later this will override any existing. Value none can be set to avoid
any attempts at executing shell commands, e.g. if this is not allowed on the server.
When the server is rclone serve sftp, the rclone SFTP remote will detect this as a Unix type shell - even
if it is running on Windows. This server does not actually have a shell, but it accepts input commands
matching the specific ones that the SFTP backend relies on for Unix shells, e.g. md5sum and df. Also it
handles the string escape rules used for Unix shell. Treating it as a Unix type shell from a SFTP remote
will therefore always be correct, and support all features.
Shell access considerations
The shell type auto-detection logic, described above, means that by default rclone will try to run a
shell command the first time a new sftp remote is accessed. If you configure a sftp remote without a
config file, e.g. an on the fly remote, rclone will have nowhere to store the result, and it will re-run
the command on every access. To avoid this you should explicitly set the shell_type option to the
correct value, or to none if you want to prevent rclone from executing any remote shell commands.
It is also important to note that, since the shell type decides how quoting and escaping of file paths
used as command-line arguments are performed, configuring the wrong shell type may leave you exposed to
command injection exploits. Make sure to confirm the auto-detected shell type, or explicitly set the
shell type you know is correct, or disable shell access until you know.
Checksum
SFTP does not natively support checksums (file hash), but rclone is able to use checksumming if the same
login has shell access, and can execute remote commands. If there is a command that can calculate
compatible checksums on the remote system, Rclone can then be configured to execute this whenever a
checksum is needed, and read back the results. Currently MD5 and SHA-1 are supported.
Normally this requires an external utility being available on the server. By default rclone will try
commands md5sum, md5 and rclone md5sum for MD5 checksums, and the first one found usable will be picked.
Same with sha1sum, sha1 and rclone sha1sum commands for SHA-1 checksums. These utilities normally need
to be in the remote’s PATH to be found.
In some cases the shell itself is capable of calculating checksums. PowerShell is an example of such a
shell. If rclone detects that the remote shell is PowerShell, which means it most probably is a Windows
OpenSSH server, rclone will use a predefined script block to produce the checksums when no external
checksum commands are found (see shell access). This assumes PowerShell version 4.0 or newer.
The options md5sum_command and sha1_command can be used to customize the command to be executed for
calculation of checksums. You can for example set a specific path to where md5sum and sha1sum
executables are located, or use them to specify some other tools that print checksums in compatible
format. The value can include command-line arguments, or even shell script blocks as with PowerShell.
Rclone has subcommands md5sum and sha1sum that use compatible format, which means if you have an rclone
executable on the server it can be used. As mentioned above, they will be automatically picked up if
found in PATH, but if not you can set something like /path/to/rclone md5sum as the value of option
md5sum_command to make sure a specific executable is used.
Remote checksumming is recommended and enabled by default. First time rclone is using a SFTP remote, if
options md5sum_command or sha1_command are not set, it will check if any of the default commands for each
of them, as described above, can be used. The result will be saved in the remote configuration, so next
time it will use the same. Value none will be set if none of the default commands could be used for a
specific algorithm, and this algorithm will not be supported by the remote.
Disabling the checksumming may be required if you are connecting to SFTP servers which are not under your
control, and to which the execution of remote shell commands is prohibited. Set the configuration option
disable_hashcheck to true to disable checksumming entirely, or set shell_type to none to disable all
functionality based on remote shell command execution.
Modified time
Modified times are stored on the server to 1 second precision.
Modified times are used in syncing and are fully supported.
Some SFTP servers disable setting/modifying the file modification time after upload (for example, certain
configurations of ProFTPd with mod_sftp). If you are using one of these servers, you can set the option
set_modtime = false in your RClone backend configuration to disable this behaviour.
About command
The about command returns the total space, free space, and used space on the remote for the disk of the
specified path on the remote or, if not set, the disk of the root on the remote.
SFTP usually supports the about command, but it depends on the server. If the server implements the
vendor-specific VFS statistics extension, which is normally the case with OpenSSH instances, it will be
used. If not, but the same login has access to a Unix shell, where the df command is available (e.g. in
the remote’s PATH), then this will be used instead. If the server shell is PowerShell, probably with a
Windows OpenSSH server, rclone will use a built-in shell command (see shell access). If none of the
above is applicable, about will fail.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to sftp (SSH/SFTP).
–sftp-host
SSH host to connect to.
E.g. “example.com”.
Properties:
• Config: host
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_HOST
• Type: string
• Required: true
–sftp-user
SSH username.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_USER
• Type: string
• Default: “$USER”
–sftp-port
SSH port number.
Properties:
• Config: port
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_PORT
• Type: int
• Default: 22
–sftp-pass
SSH password, leave blank to use ssh-agent.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-key-pem
Raw PEM-encoded private key.
If specified, will override key_file parameter.
Properties:
• Config: key_pem
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_KEY_PEM
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-key-file
Path to PEM-encoded private key file.
Leave blank or set key-use-agent to use ssh-agent.
Leading ~ will be expanded in the file name as will environment variables such as ${RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR}.
Properties:
• Config: key_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_KEY_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-key-file-pass
The passphrase to decrypt the PEM-encoded private key file.
Only PEM encrypted key files (old OpenSSH format) are supported. Encrypted keys in the new OpenSSH
format can’t be used.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: key_file_pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_KEY_FILE_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-pubkey-file
Optional path to public key file.
Set this if you have a signed certificate you want to use for authentication.
Leading ~ will be expanded in the file name as will environment variables such as ${RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR}.
Properties:
• Config: pubkey_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_PUBKEY_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-key-use-agent
When set forces the usage of the ssh-agent.
When key-file is also set, the “.pub” file of the specified key-file is read and only the associated key
is requested from the ssh-agent. This allows to avoid Too many authentication failures for *username*
errors when the ssh-agent contains many keys.
Properties:
• Config: key_use_agent
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_KEY_USE_AGENT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–sftp-use-insecure-cipher
Enable the use of insecure ciphers and key exchange methods.
This enables the use of the following insecure ciphers and key exchange methods:
• aes128-cbc
• aes192-cbc
• aes256-cbc
• 3des-cbc
• diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256
• diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1
Those algorithms are insecure and may allow plaintext data to be recovered by an attacker.
Properties:
• Config: use_insecure_cipher
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_USE_INSECURE_CIPHER
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “false”
• Use default Cipher list.
• “true”
• Enables the use of the aes128-cbc cipher and diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256,
diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 key exchange.
–sftp-disable-hashcheck
Disable the execution of SSH commands to determine if remote file hashing is available.
Leave blank or set to false to enable hashing (recommended), set to true to disable hashing.
Properties:
• Config: disable_hashcheck
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_DISABLE_HASHCHECK
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to sftp (SSH/SFTP).
–sftp-known-hosts-file
Optional path to known_hosts file.
Set this value to enable server host key validation.
Leading ~ will be expanded in the file name as will environment variables such as ${RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR}.
Properties:
• Config: known_hosts_file
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_KNOWN_HOSTS_FILE
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “~/.ssh/known_hosts”
• Use OpenSSH’s known_hosts file.
–sftp-ask-password
Allow asking for SFTP password when needed.
If this is set and no password is supplied then rclone will: - ask for a password - not contact the ssh
agent
Properties:
• Config: ask_password
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_ASK_PASSWORD
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–sftp-path-override
Override path used by SSH shell commands.
This allows checksum calculation when SFTP and SSH paths are different. This issue affects among others
Synology NAS boxes.
E.g. if shared folders can be found in directories representing volumes:
rclone sync /home/local/directory remote:/directory --sftp-path-override /volume2/directory
E.g. if home directory can be found in a shared folder called “home”:
rclone sync /home/local/directory remote:/home/directory --sftp-path-override /volume1/homes/USER/directory
Properties:
• Config: path_override
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_PATH_OVERRIDE
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-set-modtime
Set the modified time on the remote if set.
Properties:
• Config: set_modtime
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SET_MODTIME
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–sftp-shell-type
The type of SSH shell on remote server, if any.
Leave blank for autodetect.
Properties:
• Config: shell_type
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SHELL_TYPE
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “none”
• No shell access
• “unix”
• Unix shell
• “powershell”
• PowerShell
• “cmd”
• Windows Command Prompt
–sftp-md5sum-command
The command used to read md5 hashes.
Leave blank for autodetect.
Properties:
• Config: md5sum_command
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_MD5SUM_COMMAND
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-sha1sum-command
The command used to read sha1 hashes.
Leave blank for autodetect.
Properties:
• Config: sha1sum_command
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SHA1SUM_COMMAND
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-skip-links
Set to skip any symlinks and any other non regular files.
Properties:
• Config: skip_links
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SKIP_LINKS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–sftp-subsystem
Specifies the SSH2 subsystem on the remote host.
Properties:
• Config: subsystem
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SUBSYSTEM
• Type: string
• Default: “sftp”
–sftp-server-command
Specifies the path or command to run a sftp server on the remote host.
The subsystem option is ignored when server_command is defined.
Properties:
• Config: server_command
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SERVER_COMMAND
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sftp-use-fstat
If set use fstat instead of stat.
Some servers limit the amount of open files and calling Stat after opening the file will throw an error
from the server. Setting this flag will call Fstat instead of Stat which is called on an already open
file handle.
It has been found that this helps with IBM Sterling SFTP servers which have “extractability” level set to
1 which means only 1 file can be opened at any given time.
Properties:
• Config: use_fstat
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_USE_FSTAT
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–sftp-disable-concurrent-reads
If set don’t use concurrent reads.
Normally concurrent reads are safe to use and not using them will degrade performance, so this option is
disabled by default.
Some servers limit the amount number of times a file can be downloaded. Using concurrent reads can
trigger this limit, so if you have a server which returns
Failed to copy: file does not exist
Then you may need to enable this flag.
If concurrent reads are disabled, the use_fstat option is ignored.
Properties:
• Config: disable_concurrent_reads
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_DISABLE_CONCURRENT_READS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–sftp-disable-concurrent-writes
If set don’t use concurrent writes.
Normally rclone uses concurrent writes to upload files. This improves the performance greatly,
especially for distant servers.
This option disables concurrent writes should that be necessary.
Properties:
• Config: disable_concurrent_writes
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_DISABLE_CONCURRENT_WRITES
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–sftp-idle-timeout
Max time before closing idle connections.
If no connections have been returned to the connection pool in the time given, rclone will empty the
connection pool.
Set to 0 to keep connections indefinitely.
Properties:
• Config: idle_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_IDLE_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–sftp-chunk-size
Upload and download chunk size.
This controls the maximum size of payload in SFTP protocol packets. The RFC limits this to 32768 bytes
(32k), which is the default. However, a lot of servers support larger sizes, typically limited to a
maximum total package size of 256k, and setting it larger will increase transfer speed dramatically on
high latency links. This includes OpenSSH, and, for example, using the value of 255k works well, leaving
plenty of room for overhead while still being within a total packet size of 256k.
Make sure to test thoroughly before using a value higher than 32k, and only use it if you always connect
to the same server or after sufficiently broad testing. If you get errors such as “failed to send packet
payload: EOF”, lots of “connection lost”, or “corrupted on transfer”, when copying a larger file, try
lowering the value. The server run by rclone serve sftp sends packets with standard 32k maximum payload
so you must not set a different chunk_size when downloading files, but it accepts packets up to the 256k
total size, so for uploads the chunk_size can be set as for the OpenSSH example above.
Properties:
• Config: chunk_size
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_CHUNK_SIZE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 32Ki
–sftp-concurrency
The maximum number of outstanding requests for one file
This controls the maximum number of outstanding requests for one file. Increasing it will increase
throughput on high latency links at the cost of using more memory.
Properties:
• Config: concurrency
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_CONCURRENCY
• Type: int
• Default: 64
–sftp-set-env
Environment variables to pass to sftp and commands
Set environment variables in the form:
VAR=value
to be passed to the sftp client and to any commands run (eg md5sum).
Pass multiple variables space separated, eg
VAR1=value VAR2=value
and pass variables with spaces in in quotes, eg
"VAR3=value with space" "VAR4=value with space" VAR5=nospacehere
Properties:
• Config: set_env
• Env Var: RCLONE_SFTP_SET_ENV
• Type: SpaceSepList
• Default:
Limitations
On some SFTP servers (e.g. Synology) the paths are different for SSH and SFTP so the hashes can’t be
calculated properly. For them using disable_hashcheck is a good idea.
The only ssh agent supported under Windows is Putty’s pageant.
The Go SSH library disables the use of the aes128-cbc cipher by default, due to security concerns. This
can be re-enabled on a per-connection basis by setting the use_insecure_cipher setting in the
configuration file to true. Further details on the insecurity of this cipher can be found in this paper.
SFTP isn’t supported under plan9 until this issue is fixed.
Note that since SFTP isn’t HTTP based the following flags don’t work with it: --dump-headers,
--dump-bodies, --dump-auth.
Note that --timeout and --contimeout are both supported.
rsync.net
rsync.net is supported through the SFTP backend.
See rsync.net’s documentation of rclone examples.
Hetzner Storage Box
Hetzner Storage Boxes are supported through the SFTP backend on port 23.
See https://docs.hetzner.com/robot/storage-box/access/access-ssh-rsync-borg#rclone Hetzner’s
documentation for details
SMB
SMB is a communication protocol to share files over network.
This relies on go-smb2 library for communication with SMB protocol.
Paths are specified as remote:sharename (or remote: for the lsd command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:item/path/to/dir.
Notes
The first path segment must be the name of the share, which you entered when you started to share on
Windows. On smbd, it’s the section title in smb.conf (usually in /etc/samba/) file. You can find shares
by quering the root if you’re unsure (e.g. rclone lsd remote:).
You can’t access to the shared printers from rclone, obviously.
You can’t use Anonymous access for logging in. You have to use the guest user with an empty password
instead. The rclone client tries to avoid 8.3 names when uploading files by encoding trailing spaces and
periods. Alternatively, the local backend on Windows can access SMB servers using UNC paths, by
\\server\share. This doesn’t apply to non-Windows OSes, such as Linux and macOS.
Configuration
Here is an example of making a SMB configuration.
First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process.
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Option Storage.
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value.
XX / SMB / CIFS
\ (smb)
Storage> smb
Option host.
Samba hostname to connect to.
E.g. "example.com".
Enter a value.
host> localhost
Option user.
Samba username.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default (lesmi).
user> guest
Option port.
Samba port number.
Enter a signed integer. Press Enter for the default (445).
port>
Option pass.
Samba password.
Choose an alternative below. Press Enter for the default (n).
y) Yes, type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No, leave this optional password blank (default)
y/g/n> g
Password strength in bits.
64 is just about memorable
128 is secure
1024 is the maximum
Bits> 64
Your password is: XXXX
Use this password? Please note that an obscured version of this
password (and not the password itself) will be stored under your
configuration file, so keep this generated password in a safe place.
y) Yes (default)
n) No
y/n> y
Option domain.
Domain name for NTLM authentication.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default (WORKGROUP).
domain>
Edit advanced config?
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Configuration complete.
Options:
- type: samba
- host: localhost
- user: guest
- pass: *** ENCRYPTED ***
Keep this "remote" remote?
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> d
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to smb (SMB / CIFS).
–smb-host
SMB server hostname to connect to.
E.g. “example.com”.
Properties:
• Config: host
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_HOST
• Type: string
• Required: true
–smb-user
SMB username.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_USER
• Type: string
• Default: “$USER”
–smb-port
SMB port number.
Properties:
• Config: port
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_PORT
• Type: int
• Default: 445
–smb-pass
SMB password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–smb-domain
Domain name for NTLM authentication.
Properties:
• Config: domain
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_DOMAIN
• Type: string
• Default: “WORKGROUP”
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to smb (SMB / CIFS).
–smb-idle-timeout
Max time before closing idle connections.
If no connections have been returned to the connection pool in the time given, rclone will empty the
connection pool.
Set to 0 to keep connections indefinitely.
Properties:
• Config: idle_timeout
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_IDLE_TIMEOUT
• Type: Duration
• Default: 1m0s
–smb-hide-special-share
Hide special shares (e.g. print$) which users aren’t supposed to access.
Properties:
• Config: hide_special_share
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_HIDE_SPECIAL_SHARE
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–smb-case-insensitive
Whether the server is configured to be case-insensitive.
Always true on Windows shares.
Properties:
• Config: case_insensitive
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_CASE_INSENSITIVE
• Type: bool
• Default: true
–smb-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_SMB_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default:
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,BackSlash,Ctl,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Storj
Storj is an encrypted, secure, and cost-effective object storage service that enables you to store, back
up, and archive large amounts of data in a decentralized manner.
Backend options
Storj can be used both with this native backend and with the s3 backend using the Storj S3 compatible
gateway (shared or private).
Use this backend to take advantage of client-side encryption as well as to achieve the best possible
download performance. Uploads will be erasure-coded locally, thus a 1gb upload will result in 2.68gb of
data being uploaded to storage nodes across the network.
Use the s3 backend and one of the S3 compatible Hosted Gateways to increase upload performance and reduce
the load on your systems and network. Uploads will be encrypted and erasure-coded server-side, thus a
1GB upload will result in only in 1GB of data being uploaded to storage nodes across the network.
Side by side comparison with more details:
• Characteristics:
• Storj backend: Uses native RPC protocol, connects directly to the storage nodes which hosts the data.
Requires more CPU resource of encoding/decoding and has network amplification (especially during the
upload), uses lots of TCP connections
• S3 backend: Uses S3 compatible HTTP Rest API via the shared gateways. There is no network
amplification, but performance depends on the shared gateways and the secret encryption key is shared
with the gateway.
• Typical usage:
• Storj backend: Server environments and desktops with enough resources, internet speed and
connectivity - and applications where storjs client-side encryption is required.
• S3 backend: Desktops and similar with limited resources, internet speed or connectivity.
• Security:
• Storj backend: strong. Private encryption key doesn’t need to leave the local computer.
• S3 backend: weaker. Private encryption key is https://docs.storj.io/dcs/api-reference/s3-compatible-
gateway#security-and-encryption shared with the authentication service of the hosted gateway, where
it’s stored encrypted. It can be stronger when combining with the rclone crypt backend.
• Bandwidth usage (upload):
• Storj backend: higher. As data is erasure coded on the client side both the original data and the
parities should be uploaded. About ~2.7 times more data is required to be uploaded. Client may
start to upload with even higher number of nodes (~3.7 times more) and abandon/stop the slow uploads.
• S3 backend: normal. Only the raw data is uploaded, erasure coding happens on the gateway.
• Bandwidth usage (download)
• Storj backend: almost normal. Only the minimal number of data is required, but to avoid very slow
data providers a few more sources are used and the slowest are ignored (max 1.2x overhead).
• S3 backend: normal. Only the raw data is downloaded, erasure coding happens on the shared gateway.
• CPU usage:
• Storj backend: higher, but more predictable. Erasure code and encryption/decryption happens locally
which requires significant CPU usage.
• S3 backend: less. Erasure code and encryption/decryption happens on shared s3 gateways (and as is,
it depends on the current load on the gateways)
• TCP connection usage:
• Storj backend: high. A direct connection is required to each of the Storj nodes resulting in 110
connections on upload and 35 on download per 64 MB segment. Not all the connections are actively
used (slow ones are pruned), but they are all opened. Adjusting the max open file limit may be
required.
• S3 backend: normal. Only one connection per download/upload thread is required to the shared
gateway.
• Overall performance:
• Storj backend: with enough resources (CPU and bandwidth) storj backend can provide even 2x better
performance. Data is directly downloaded to / uploaded from to the client instead of the gateway.
• S3 backend: Can be faster on edge devices where CPU and network bandwidth is limited as the shared S3
compatible gateways take care about the encrypting/decryption and erasure coding and no
download/upload amplification.
• Decentralization:
• Storj backend: high. Data is downloaded directly from the distributed cloud of storage providers.
• S3 backend: low. Requires a running S3 gateway (either self-hosted or Storj-hosted).
• Limitations:
• Storj backend: rclone checksum is not possible without download, as checksum metadata is not
calculated during upload
• S3 backend: secret encryption key is shared with the gateway
Configuration
To make a new Storj configuration you need one of the following: * Access Grant that someone else shared
with you. * https://documentation.storj.io/getting-started/uploading-your-first-object/create-an-api-key
API Key of a Storj project you are a member of.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
Setup with access grant
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Storj Decentralized Cloud Storage
\ "storj"
[snip]
Storage> storj
** See help for storj backend at: https://rclone.org/storj/ **
Choose an authentication method.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("existing").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Use an existing access grant.
\ "existing"
2 / Create a new access grant from satellite address, API key, and passphrase.
\ "new"
provider> existing
Access Grant.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
access_grant> your-access-grant-received-by-someone-else
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = storj
access_grant = your-access-grant-received-by-someone-else
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Setup with API key and passphrase
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Storj Decentralized Cloud Storage
\ "storj"
[snip]
Storage> storj
** See help for storj backend at: https://rclone.org/storj/ **
Choose an authentication method.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("existing").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Use an existing access grant.
\ "existing"
2 / Create a new access grant from satellite address, API key, and passphrase.
\ "new"
provider> new
Satellite Address. Custom satellite address should match the format: `<nodeid>@<address>:<port>`.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("us-central-1.storj.io").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / US Central 1
\ "us-central-1.storj.io"
2 / Europe West 1
\ "europe-west-1.storj.io"
3 / Asia East 1
\ "asia-east-1.storj.io"
satellite_address> 1
API Key.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
api_key> your-api-key-for-your-storj-project
Encryption Passphrase. To access existing objects enter passphrase used for uploading.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
passphrase> your-human-readable-encryption-passphrase
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = storj
satellite_address = 12EayRS2V1kEsWESU9QMRseFhdxYxKicsiFmxrsLZHeLUtdps3S@us-central-1.tardigrade.io:7777
api_key = your-api-key-for-your-storj-project
passphrase = your-human-readable-encryption-passphrase
access_grant = the-access-grant-generated-from-the-api-key-and-passphrase
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to storj (Storj Decentralized Cloud Storage).
–storj-provider
Choose an authentication method.
Properties:
• Config: provider
• Env Var: RCLONE_STORJ_PROVIDER
• Type: string
• Default: “existing”
• Examples:
• “existing”
• Use an existing access grant.
• “new”
• Create a new access grant from satellite address, API key, and passphrase.
–storj-access-grant
Access grant.
Properties:
• Config: access_grant
• Env Var: RCLONE_STORJ_ACCESS_GRANT
• Provider: existing
• Type: string
• Required: false
–storj-satellite-address
Satellite address.
Custom satellite address should match the format: <nodeid>@<address>:<port>.
Properties:
• Config: satellite_address
• Env Var: RCLONE_STORJ_SATELLITE_ADDRESS
• Provider: new
• Type: string
• Default: “us-central-1.storj.io”
• Examples:
• “us-central-1.storj.io”
• US Central 1
• “europe-west-1.storj.io”
• Europe West 1
• “asia-east-1.storj.io”
• Asia East 1
–storj-api-key
API key.
Properties:
• Config: api_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_STORJ_API_KEY
• Provider: new
• Type: string
• Required: false
–storj-passphrase
Encryption passphrase.
To access existing objects enter passphrase used for uploading.
Properties:
• Config: passphrase
• Env Var: RCLONE_STORJ_PASSPHRASE
• Provider: new
• Type: string
• Required: false
Usage
Paths are specified as remote:bucket (or remote: for the lsf command.) You may put subdirectories in
too, e.g. remote:bucket/path/to/dir.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this.
Create a new bucket
Use the mkdir command to create new bucket, e.g. bucket.
rclone mkdir remote:bucket
List all buckets
Use the lsf command to list all buckets.
rclone lsf remote:
Note the colon (:) character at the end of the command line.
Delete a bucket
Use the rmdir command to delete an empty bucket.
rclone rmdir remote:bucket
Use the purge command to delete a non-empty bucket with all its content.
rclone purge remote:bucket
Upload objects
Use the copy command to upload an object.
rclone copy --progress /home/local/directory/file.ext remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
The --progress flag is for displaying progress information. Remove it if you don’t need this
information.
Use a folder in the local path to upload all its objects.
rclone copy --progress /home/local/directory/ remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
Only modified files will be copied.
List objects
Use the ls command to list recursively all objects in a bucket.
rclone ls remote:bucket
Add the folder to the remote path to list recursively all objects in this folder.
rclone ls remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
Use the lsf command to list non-recursively all objects in a bucket or a folder.
rclone lsf remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
Download objects
Use the copy command to download an object.
rclone copy --progress remote:bucket/path/to/dir/file.ext /home/local/directory/
The --progress flag is for displaying progress information. Remove it if you don’t need this
information.
Use a folder in the remote path to download all its objects.
rclone copy --progress remote:bucket/path/to/dir/ /home/local/directory/
Delete objects
Use the deletefile command to delete a single object.
rclone deletefile remote:bucket/path/to/dir/file.ext
Use the delete command to delete all object in a folder.
rclone delete remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
Print the total size of objects
Use the size command to print the total size of objects in a bucket or a folder.
rclone size remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
Sync two Locations
Use the sync command to sync the source to the destination, changing the destination only, deleting any
excess files.
rclone sync -i --progress /home/local/directory/ remote:bucket/path/to/dir/
The --progress flag is for displaying progress information. Remove it if you don’t need this
information.
Since this can cause data loss, test first with the --dry-run flag to see exactly what would be copied
and deleted.
The sync can be done also from Storj to the local file system.
rclone sync -i --progress remote:bucket/path/to/dir/ /home/local/directory/
Or between two Storj buckets.
rclone sync -i --progress remote-us:bucket/path/to/dir/ remote-europe:bucket/path/to/dir/
Or even between another cloud storage and Storj.
rclone sync -i --progress s3:bucket/path/to/dir/ storj:bucket/path/to/dir/
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the rclone Storj backend. Backends without this capability cannot
determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone
union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Known issues
If you get errors like too many open files this usually happens when the default ulimit for system max
open files is exceeded. Native Storj protocol opens a large number of TCP connections (each of which is
counted as an open file). For a single upload stream you can expect 110 TCP connections to be opened.
For a single download stream you can expect 35. This batch of connections will be opened for every 64
MiB segment and you should also expect TCP connections to be reused. If you do many transfers you
eventually open a connection to most storage nodes (thousands of nodes).
To fix these, please raise your system limits. You can do this issuing a ulimit -n 65536 just before you
run rclone. To change the limits more permanently you can add this to your shell startup script,
e.g. $HOME/.bashrc, or change the system-wide configuration, usually /etc/sysctl.conf and/or
/etc/security/limits.conf, but please refer to your operating system manual.
SugarSync
SugarSync is a cloud service that enables active synchronization of files across computers and other
devices for file backup, access, syncing, and sharing.
Configuration
The initial setup for SugarSync involves getting a token from SugarSync which you can do with rclone.
rclone config walks you through it.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Sugarsync
\ "sugarsync"
[snip]
Storage> sugarsync
** See help for sugarsync backend at: https://rclone.org/sugarsync/ **
Sugarsync App ID.
Leave blank to use rclone's.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
app_id>
Sugarsync Access Key ID.
Leave blank to use rclone's.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
access_key_id>
Sugarsync Private Access Key
Leave blank to use rclone's.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
private_access_key>
Permanently delete files if true
otherwise put them in the deleted files.
Enter a boolean value (true or false). Press Enter for the default ("false").
hard_delete>
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
Username (email address)> nick@craig-wood.com
Your Sugarsync password is only required during setup and will not be stored.
password:
--------------------
[remote]
type = sugarsync
refresh_token = https://api.sugarsync.com/app-authorization/XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Note that the config asks for your email and password but doesn’t store them, it only uses them to get
the initial token.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories (sync folders) in top level of your SugarSync
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your SugarSync folder “Test”
rclone ls remote:Test
To copy a local directory to an SugarSync folder called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
NB you can’t create files in the top level folder you have to create a folder, which rclone will create
as a “Sync Folder” with SugarSync.
Modified time and hashes
SugarSync does not support modification times or hashes, therefore syncing will default to --size-only
checking. Note that using --update will work as rclone can read the time files were uploaded.
Restricted filename characters
SugarSync replaces the default restricted characters set except for DEL.
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in XML strings.
Deleting files
Deleted files will be moved to the “Deleted items” folder by default.
However you can supply the flag --sugarsync-hard-delete or set the config parameter hard_delete = true if
you would like files to be deleted straight away.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to sugarsync (Sugarsync).
–sugarsync-app-id
Sugarsync App ID.
Leave blank to use rclone’s.
Properties:
• Config: app_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_APP_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-access-key-id
Sugarsync Access Key ID.
Leave blank to use rclone’s.
Properties:
• Config: access_key_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_ACCESS_KEY_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-private-access-key
Sugarsync Private Access Key.
Leave blank to use rclone’s.
Properties:
• Config: private_access_key
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_PRIVATE_ACCESS_KEY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-hard-delete
Permanently delete files if true otherwise put them in the deleted files.
Properties:
• Config: hard_delete
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_HARD_DELETE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to sugarsync (Sugarsync).
–sugarsync-refresh-token
Sugarsync refresh token.
Leave blank normally, will be auto configured by rclone.
Properties:
• Config: refresh_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_REFRESH_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-authorization
Sugarsync authorization.
Leave blank normally, will be auto configured by rclone.
Properties:
• Config: authorization
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_AUTHORIZATION
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-authorization-expiry
Sugarsync authorization expiry.
Leave blank normally, will be auto configured by rclone.
Properties:
• Config: authorization_expiry
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_AUTHORIZATION_EXPIRY
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-user
Sugarsync user.
Leave blank normally, will be auto configured by rclone.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_USER
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-root-id
Sugarsync root id.
Leave blank normally, will be auto configured by rclone.
Properties:
• Config: root_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_ROOT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-deleted-id
Sugarsync deleted folder id.
Leave blank normally, will be auto configured by rclone.
Properties:
• Config: deleted_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_DELETED_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–sugarsync-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_SUGARSYNC_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
rclone about is not supported by the SugarSync backend. Backends without this capability cannot
determine free space for an rclone mount or use policy mfs (most free space) as a member of an rclone
union remote.
See List of backends that do not support rclone about and rclone about
Tardigrade
The Tardigrade backend has been renamed to be the Storj backend. Old configuration files will continue
to work.
Uptobox
This is a Backend for Uptobox file storage service. Uptobox is closer to a one-click hoster than a
traditional cloud storage provider and therefore not suitable for long term storage.
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
To configure an Uptobox backend you’ll need your personal api token. You’ll find it in your account
settings
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote with the default setup. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
TestUptobox uptobox
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> n
name> uptobox
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[...]
37 / Uptobox
\ "uptobox"
[...]
Storage> uptobox
** See help for uptobox backend at: https://rclone.org/uptobox/ **
Your API Key, get it from https://uptobox.com/my_account
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
api_key> xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
--------------------
[uptobox]
type = uptobox
api_key = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d>
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your Uptobox
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your Uptobox
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an Uptobox directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
Uptobox supports neither modified times nor checksums.
Restricted filename characters
In addition to the default restricted characters set the following characters are also replaced:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
” 0x22 ＂
` 0x41 ｀
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in XML strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to uptobox (Uptobox).
–uptobox-access-token
Your access token.
Get it from https://uptobox.com/my_account.
Properties:
• Config: access_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_UPTOBOX_ACCESS_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to uptobox (Uptobox).
–uptobox-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_UPTOBOX_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,BackQuote,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
Uptobox will delete inactive files that have not been accessed in 60 days.
rclone about is not supported by this backend an overview of used space can however been seen in the
uptobox web interface.
Union
The union remote provides a unification similar to UnionFS using other remotes.
Paths may be as deep as required or a local path, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory or
/directory/subdirectory.
During the initial setup with rclone config you will specify the upstream remotes as a space separated
list. The upstream remotes can either be a local paths or other remotes.
Attribute :ro and :nc can be attach to the end of path to tag the remote as read only or no create,
e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory:ro or remote:directory/subdirectory:nc.
Subfolders can be used in upstream remotes. Assume a union remote named backup with the remotes
mydrive:private/backup. Invoking rclone mkdir backup:desktop is exactly the same as invoking rclone
mkdir mydrive:private/backup/desktop.
There will be no special handling of paths containing .. segments. Invoking rclone mkdir
backup:../desktop is exactly the same as invoking rclone mkdir mydrive:private/backup/../desktop.
Configuration
Here is an example of how to make a union called remote for local folders. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Union merges the contents of several remotes
\ "union"
[snip]
Storage> union
List of space separated upstreams.
Can be 'upstreama:test/dir upstreamb:', '\"upstreama:test/space:ro dir\" upstreamb:', etc.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
upstreams> remote1:dir1 remote2:dir2 remote3:dir3
Policy to choose upstream on ACTION class.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("epall").
action_policy>
Policy to choose upstream on CREATE class.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("epmfs").
create_policy>
Policy to choose upstream on SEARCH class.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("ff").
search_policy>
Cache time of usage and free space (in seconds). This option is only useful when a path preserving policy is used.
Enter a signed integer. Press Enter for the default ("120").
cache_time>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = union
upstreams = remote1:dir1 remote2:dir2 remote3:dir3
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Current remotes:
Name Type
==== ====
remote union
e) Edit existing remote
n) New remote
d) Delete remote
r) Rename remote
c) Copy remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
e/n/d/r/c/s/q> q
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level in remote1:dir1, remote2:dir2 and remote3:dir3
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in remote1:dir1, remote2:dir2 and remote3:dir3
rclone ls remote:
Copy another local directory to the union directory called source, which will be placed into remote3:dir3
rclone copy C:\source remote:source
Behavior / Policies
The behavior of union backend is inspired by trapexit/mergerfs. All functions are grouped into 3
categories: action, create and search. These functions and categories can be assigned a policy which
dictates what file or directory is chosen when performing that behavior. Any policy can be assigned to a
function or category though some may not be very useful in practice. For instance: rand (random) may be
useful for file creation (create) but could lead to very odd behavior if used for delete if there were
more than one copy of the file.
Function / Category classifications
Category Description Functions
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
action Writing move, rmdir, rmdirs, delete, purge and copy, sync
Existing file (as destination when file exist)
create Create copy, sync (as destination when file not exist)
non-existing
file
search Reading and ls, lsd, lsl, cat, md5sum, sha1sum and copy, sync
listing file (as source)
N/A size, about
Path Preservation
Policies, as described below, are of two basic types. path preserving and non-path preserving.
All policies which start with ep (epff, eplfs, eplus, epmfs, eprand) are path preserving. ep stands for
existing path.
A path preserving policy will only consider upstreams where the relative path being accessed already
exists.
When using non-path preserving policies paths will be created in target upstreams as necessary.
Quota Relevant Policies
Some policies rely on quota information. These policies should be used only if your upstreams support
the respective quota fields.
Policy Required Field
────────────────────────────
lfs, eplfs Free
mfs, epmfs Free
lus, eplus Used
lno, eplno Objects
To check if your upstream supports the field, run rclone about remote: [flags] and see if the required
field exists.
Filters
Policies basically search upstream remotes and create a list of files / paths for functions to work on.
The policy is responsible for filtering and sorting. The policy type defines the sorting but filtering
is mostly uniform as described below.
• No search policies filter.
• All action policies will filter out remotes which are tagged as read-only.
• All create policies will filter out remotes which are tagged read-only or no-create.
If all remotes are filtered an error will be returned.
Policy descriptions
The policies definition are inspired by trapexit/mergerfs but not exactly the same. Some policy
definition could be different due to the much larger latency of remote file systems.
Policy Description
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
all Search category: same as epall. Action category: same
as epall. Create category: act on all upstreams.
epall (existing Search category: Given this order configured, act on
path, all) the first one found where the relative path exists.
Action category: apply to all found. Create category:
act on all upstreams where the relative path exists.
epff (existing Act on the first one found, by the time upstreams
path, first reply, where the relative path exists.
found)
eplfs (existing Of all the upstreams on which the relative path exists
path, least free choose the one with the least free space.
space)
eplus (existing Of all the upstreams on which the relative path exists
path, least used choose the one with the least used space.
space)
eplno (existing Of all the upstreams on which the relative path exists
path, least choose the one with the least number of objects.
number of
objects)
epmfs (existing Of all the upstreams on which the relative path exists
path, most free choose the one with the most free space.
space)
eprand (existing Calls epall and then randomizes. Returns only one
path, random) upstream.
ff (first found) Search category: same as epff. Action category: same
as epff. Create category: Act on the first one found
by the time upstreams reply.
lfs (least free Search category: same as eplfs. Action category: same
space) as eplfs. Create category: Pick the upstream with the
least available free space.
lus (least used Search category: same as eplus. Action category: same
space) as eplus. Create category: Pick the upstream with the
least used space.
lno (least Search category: same as eplno. Action category: same
number of as eplno. Create category: Pick the upstream with the
objects) least number of objects.
mfs (most free Search category: same as epmfs. Action category: same
space) as epmfs. Create category: Pick the upstream with the
most available free space.
newest Pick the file / directory with the largest mtime.
rand (random) Calls all and then randomizes. Returns only one
upstream.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to union (Union merges the contents of several upstream fs).
–union-upstreams
List of space separated upstreams.
Can be `upstreama:test/dir upstreamb:', `“upstreama:test/space:ro dir” upstreamb:', etc.
Properties:
• Config: upstreams
• Env Var: RCLONE_UNION_UPSTREAMS
• Type: string
• Required: true
–union-action-policy
Policy to choose upstream on ACTION category.
Properties:
• Config: action_policy
• Env Var: RCLONE_UNION_ACTION_POLICY
• Type: string
• Default: “epall”
–union-create-policy
Policy to choose upstream on CREATE category.
Properties:
• Config: create_policy
• Env Var: RCLONE_UNION_CREATE_POLICY
• Type: string
• Default: “epmfs”
–union-search-policy
Policy to choose upstream on SEARCH category.
Properties:
• Config: search_policy
• Env Var: RCLONE_UNION_SEARCH_POLICY
• Type: string
• Default: “ff”
–union-cache-time
Cache time of usage and free space (in seconds).
This option is only useful when a path preserving policy is used.
Properties:
• Config: cache_time
• Env Var: RCLONE_UNION_CACHE_TIME
• Type: int
• Default: 120
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to union (Union merges the contents of several upstream fs).
–union-min-free-space
Minimum viable free space for lfs/eplfs policies.
If a remote has less than this much free space then it won’t be considered for use in lfs or eplfs
policies.
Properties:
• Config: min_free_space
• Env Var: RCLONE_UNION_MIN_FREE_SPACE
• Type: SizeSuffix
• Default: 1Gi
Metadata
Any metadata supported by the underlying remote is read and written.
See the metadata docs for more info.
WebDAV
Paths are specified as remote:path
Paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Configuration
To configure the WebDAV remote you will need to have a URL for it, and a username and password. If you
know what kind of system you are connecting to then rclone can enable extra features.
Here is an example of how to make a remote called remote. First run:
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
q) Quit config
n/s/q> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / WebDAV
\ "webdav"
[snip]
Storage> webdav
URL of http host to connect to
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Connect to example.com
\ "https://example.com"
url> https://example.com/remote.php/webdav/
Name of the WebDAV site/service/software you are using
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / Nextcloud
\ "nextcloud"
2 / Owncloud
\ "owncloud"
3 / Sharepoint Online, authenticated by Microsoft account.
\ "sharepoint"
4 / Sharepoint with NTLM authentication. Usually self-hosted or on-premises.
\ "sharepoint-ntlm"
5 / Other site/service or software
\ "other"
vendor> 1
User name
user> user
Password.
y) Yes type in my own password
g) Generate random password
n) No leave this optional password blank
y/g/n> y
Enter the password:
password:
Confirm the password:
password:
Bearer token instead of user/pass (e.g. a Macaroon)
bearer_token>
Remote config
--------------------
[remote]
type = webdav
url = https://example.com/remote.php/webdav/
vendor = nextcloud
user = user
pass = *** ENCRYPTED ***
bearer_token =
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
List directories in top level of your WebDAV
rclone lsd remote:
List all the files in your WebDAV
rclone ls remote:
To copy a local directory to an WebDAV directory called backup
rclone copy /home/source remote:backup
Modified time and hashes
Plain WebDAV does not support modified times. However when used with Owncloud or Nextcloud rclone will
support modified times.
Likewise plain WebDAV does not support hashes, however when used with Owncloud or Nextcloud rclone will
support SHA1 and MD5 hashes. Depending on the exact version of Owncloud or Nextcloud hashes may appear
on all objects, or only on objects which had a hash uploaded with them.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to webdav (WebDAV).
–webdav-url
URL of http host to connect to.
E.g. https://example.com.
Properties:
• Config: url
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_URL
• Type: string
• Required: true
–webdav-vendor
Name of the WebDAV site/service/software you are using.
Properties:
• Config: vendor
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_VENDOR
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “nextcloud”
• Nextcloud
• “owncloud”
• Owncloud
• “sharepoint”
• Sharepoint Online, authenticated by Microsoft account
• “sharepoint-ntlm”
• Sharepoint with NTLM authentication, usually self-hosted or on-premises
• “other”
• Other site/service or software
–webdav-user
User name.
In case NTLM authentication is used, the username should be in the format `Domain'.
Properties:
• Config: user
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_USER
• Type: string
• Required: false
–webdav-pass
Password.
NB Input to this must be obscured - see rclone obscure.
Properties:
• Config: pass
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_PASS
• Type: string
• Required: false
–webdav-bearer-token
Bearer token instead of user/pass (e.g. a Macaroon).
Properties:
• Config: bearer_token
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_BEARER_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to webdav (WebDAV).
–webdav-bearer-token-command
Command to run to get a bearer token.
Properties:
• Config: bearer_token_command
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_BEARER_TOKEN_COMMAND
• Type: string
• Required: false
–webdav-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Default encoding is
Slash,LtGt,DoubleQuote,Colon,Question,Asterisk,Pipe,Hash,Percent,BackSlash,Del,Ctl,LeftSpace,LeftTilde,RightSpace,RightPeriod,InvalidUtf8
for sharepoint-ntlm or identity otherwise.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_ENCODING
• Type: string
• Required: false
–webdav-headers
Set HTTP headers for all transactions.
Use this to set additional HTTP headers for all transactions
The input format is comma separated list of key,value pairs. Standard CSV encoding may be used.
For example, to set a Cookie use `Cookie,name=value', or `“Cookie”,“name=value”'.
You can set multiple headers, e.g. `“Cookie”,“name=value”,“Authorization”,“xxx”'.
Properties:
• Config: headers
• Env Var: RCLONE_WEBDAV_HEADERS
• Type: CommaSepList
• Default:
Provider notes
See below for notes on specific providers.
Owncloud
Click on the settings cog in the bottom right of the page and this will show the WebDAV URL that rclone
needs in the config step. It will look something like https://example.com/remote.php/webdav/.
Owncloud supports modified times using the X-OC-Mtime header.
Nextcloud
This is configured in an identical way to Owncloud. Note that Nextcloud initially did not support
streaming of files (rcat) whereas Owncloud did, but this seems to be fixed as of 2020-11-27 (tested with
rclone v1.53.1 and Nextcloud Server v19).
Sharepoint Online
Rclone can be used with Sharepoint provided by OneDrive for Business or Office365 Education Accounts.
This feature is only needed for a few of these Accounts, mostly Office365 Education ones. These accounts
are sometimes not verified by the domain owner github#1975
This means that these accounts can’t be added using the official API (other Accounts should work with the
“onedrive” option). However, it is possible to access them using webdav.
To use a sharepoint remote with rclone, add it like this: First, you need to get your remote’s URL:
• Go here to open your OneDrive or to sign in
• Now take a look at your address bar, the URL should look like this:
https://[YOUR-DOMAIN]-my.sharepoint.com/personal/[YOUR-EMAIL]/_layouts/15/onedrive.aspx
You’ll only need this URL up to the email address. After that, you’ll most likely want to add
“/Documents”. That subdirectory contains the actual data stored on your OneDrive.
Add the remote to rclone like this: Configure the url as
https://[YOUR-DOMAIN]-my.sharepoint.com/personal/[YOUR-EMAIL]/Documents and use your normal account email
and password for user and pass. If you have 2FA enabled, you have to generate an app password. Set the
vendor to sharepoint.
Your config file should look like this:
[sharepoint]
type = webdav
url = https://[YOUR-DOMAIN]-my.sharepoint.com/personal/[YOUR-EMAIL]/Documents
vendor = sharepoint
user = YourEmailAddress
pass = encryptedpassword
Sharepoint with NTLM Authentication
Use this option in case your (hosted) Sharepoint is not tied to OneDrive accounts and uses NTLM
authentication.
To get the url configuration, similarly to the above, first navigate to the desired directory in your
browser to get the URL, then strip everything after the name of the opened directory.
Example: If the URL is: https://example.sharepoint.com/sites/12345/Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx
The configuration to use would be: https://example.sharepoint.com/sites/12345/Documents
Set the vendor to sharepoint-ntlm.
NTLM uses domain and user name combination for authentication, set user to DOMAIN\username.
Your config file should look like this:
[sharepoint]
type = webdav
url = https://[YOUR-DOMAIN]/some-path-to/Documents
vendor = sharepoint-ntlm
user = DOMAIN\user
pass = encryptedpassword
Required Flags for SharePoint
As SharePoint does some special things with uploaded documents, you won’t be able to use the documents
size or the documents hash to compare if a file has been changed since the upload / which file is newer.
For Rclone calls copying files (especially Office files such as .docx, .xlsx, etc.) from/to SharePoint
(like copy, sync, etc.), you should append these flags to ensure Rclone uses the “Last Modified” datetime
property to compare your documents:
--ignore-size --ignore-checksum --update
dCache
dCache is a storage system that supports many protocols and authentication/authorisation schemes. For
WebDAV clients, it allows users to authenticate with username and password (BASIC), X.509, Kerberos, and
various bearer tokens, including
https://www.dcache.org/manuals/workshop-2017-05-29-Umea/000-Final/anupam_macaroons_v02.pdf Macaroons and
OpenID-Connect access tokens.
Configure as normal using the other type. Don’t enter a username or password, instead enter your
Macaroon as the bearer_token.
The config will end up looking something like this.
[dcache]
type = webdav
url = https://dcache...
vendor = other
user =
pass =
bearer_token = your-macaroon
There is a script that obtains a Macaroon from a dCache WebDAV endpoint, and creates an rclone config
file.
Macaroons may also be obtained from the dCacheView web-browser/JavaScript client that comes with dCache.
OpenID-Connect
dCache also supports authenticating with OpenID-Connect access tokens. OpenID-Connect is a protocol
(based on OAuth 2.0) that allows services to identify users who have authenticated with some central
service.
Support for OpenID-Connect in rclone is currently achieved using another software package called
oidc-agent. This is a command-line tool that facilitates obtaining an access token. Once installed and
configured, an access token is obtained by running the oidc-token command. The following example shows a
(shortened) access token obtained from the XDC OIDC Provider.
paul@celebrimbor:~$ oidc-token XDC
eyJraWQ[...]QFXDt0
paul@celebrimbor:~$
Note Before the oidc-token command will work, the refresh token must be loaded into the oidc agent. This
is done with the oidc-add command (e.g., oidc-add XDC). This is typically done once per login session.
Full details on this and how to register oidc-agent with your OIDC Provider are provided in the
oidc-agent documentation.
The rclone bearer_token_command configuration option is used to fetch the access token from oidc-agent.
Configure as a normal WebDAV endpoint, using the `other' vendor, leaving the username and password empty.
When prompted, choose to edit the advanced config and enter the command to get a bearer token (e.g.,
oidc-agent XDC).
The following example config shows a WebDAV endpoint that uses oidc-agent to supply an access token from
the XDC OIDC Provider.
[dcache]
type = webdav
url = https://dcache.example.org/
vendor = other
bearer_token_command = oidc-token XDC
Yandex Disk
Yandex Disk is a cloud storage solution created by Yandex.
Configuration
Here is an example of making a yandex configuration. First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
n/s> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Yandex Disk
\ "yandex"
[snip]
Storage> yandex
Yandex Client Id - leave blank normally.
client_id>
Yandex Client Secret - leave blank normally.
client_secret>
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes
n) No
y/n> y
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
--------------------
[remote]
client_id =
client_secret =
token = {"access_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","token_type":"OAuth","expiry":"2016-12-29T12:27:11.362788025Z"}
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d> y
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Note that rclone runs a webserver on your local machine to collect the token as returned from Yandex
Disk. This only runs from the moment it opens your browser to the moment you get back the verification
code. This is on http://127.0.0.1:53682/ and this it may require you to unblock it temporarily if you
are running a host firewall.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
See top level directories
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new directory
rclone mkdir remote:directory
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:directory
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote path, deleting any excess files in the path.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:directory
Yandex paths may be as deep as required, e.g. remote:directory/subdirectory.
Modified time
Modified times are supported and are stored accurate to 1 ns in custom metadata called rclone_modified in
RFC3339 with nanoseconds format.
MD5 checksums
MD5 checksums are natively supported by Yandex Disk.
Emptying Trash
If you wish to empty your trash you can use the rclone cleanup remote: command which will permanently
delete all your trashed files. This command does not take any path arguments.
Quota information
To view your current quota you can use the rclone about remote: command which will display your usage
limit (quota) and the current usage.
Restricted filename characters
The default restricted characters set are replaced.
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be used in JSON strings.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to yandex (Yandex Disk).
–yandex-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–yandex-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to yandex (Yandex Disk).
–yandex-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–yandex-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–yandex-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–yandex-hard-delete
Delete files permanently rather than putting them into the trash.
Properties:
• Config: hard_delete
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_HARD_DELETE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–yandex-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_YANDEX_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8,Dot
Limitations
When uploading very large files (bigger than about 5 GiB) you will need to increase the --timeout
parameter. This is because Yandex pauses (perhaps to calculate the MD5SUM for the entire file) before
returning confirmation that the file has been uploaded. The default handling of timeouts in rclone is to
assume a 5 minute pause is an error and close the connection - you’ll see net/http: timeout awaiting
response headers errors in the logs if this is happening. Setting the timeout to twice the max size of
file in GiB should be enough, so if you want to upload a 30 GiB file set a timeout of 2 * 30 = 60m, that
is --timeout 60m.
Having a Yandex Mail account is mandatory to use the Yandex.Disk subscription. Token generation will
work without a mail account, but Rclone won’t be able to complete any actions.
[403 - DiskUnsupportedUserAccountTypeError] User account type is not supported.
Zoho Workdrive
Zoho WorkDrive is a cloud storage solution created by Zoho.
Configuration
Here is an example of making a zoho configuration. First run
rclone config
This will guide you through an interactive setup process:
No remotes found, make a new one?
n) New remote
s) Set configuration password
n/s> n
name> remote
Type of storage to configure.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
[snip]
XX / Zoho
\ "zoho"
[snip]
Storage> zoho
** See help for zoho backend at: https://rclone.org/zoho/ **
OAuth Client Id
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
client_id>
OAuth Client Secret
Leave blank normally.
Enter a string value. Press Enter for the default ("").
client_secret>
Edit advanced config? (y/n)
y) Yes
n) No (default)
y/n> n
Remote config
Use auto config?
* Say Y if not sure
* Say N if you are working on a remote or headless machine
y) Yes (default)
n) No
y/n>
If your browser doesn't open automatically go to the following link: http://127.0.0.1:53682/auth?state=LVn0IHzxej1ZkmQw31d0wQ
Log in and authorize rclone for access
Waiting for code...
Got code
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / MyTeam
\ "4u28602177065ff22426787a6745dba8954eb"
Enter a Team ID> 1
Choose a number from below, or type in your own value
1 / General
\ "4u2869d2aa6fca04f4f2f896b6539243b85b1"
Enter a Workspace ID> 1
--------------------
[remote]
type = zoho
token = {"access_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","token_type":"Zoho-oauthtoken","refresh_token":"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx","expiry":"2020-10-12T00:54:52.370275223+02:00"}
root_folder_id = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
--------------------
y) Yes this is OK (default)
e) Edit this remote
d) Delete this remote
y/e/d>
See the remote setup docs for how to set it up on a machine with no Internet browser available.
Rclone runs a webserver on your local computer to collect the authorization token from Zoho Workdrive.
This is only from the moment your browser is opened until the token is returned. The webserver runs on
http://127.0.0.1:53682/. If local port 53682 is protected by a firewall you may need to temporarily
unblock the firewall to complete authorization.
Once configured you can then use rclone like this,
See top level directories
rclone lsd remote:
Make a new directory
rclone mkdir remote:directory
List the contents of a directory
rclone ls remote:directory
Sync /home/local/directory to the remote path, deleting any excess files in the path.
rclone sync -i /home/local/directory remote:directory
Zoho paths may be as deep as required, eg remote:directory/subdirectory.
Modified time
Modified times are currently not supported for Zoho Workdrive
Checksums
No checksums are supported.
Usage information
To view your current quota you can use the rclone about remote: command which will display your current
usage.
Restricted filename characters
Only control characters and invalid UTF-8 are replaced. In addition most Unicode full-width characters
are not supported at all and will be removed from filenames during upload.
Standard options
Here are the Standard options specific to zoho (Zoho).
–zoho-client-id
OAuth Client Id.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_id
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_CLIENT_ID
• Type: string
• Required: false
–zoho-client-secret
OAuth Client Secret.
Leave blank normally.
Properties:
• Config: client_secret
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_CLIENT_SECRET
• Type: string
• Required: false
–zoho-region
Zoho region to connect to.
You’ll have to use the region your organization is registered in. If not sure use the same top level
domain as you connect to in your browser.
Properties:
• Config: region
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_REGION
• Type: string
• Required: false
• Examples:
• “com”
• United states / Global
• “eu”
• Europe
• “in”
• India
• “jp”
• Japan
• “com.cn”
• China
• “com.au”
• Australia
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to zoho (Zoho).
–zoho-token
OAuth Access Token as a JSON blob.
Properties:
• Config: token
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_TOKEN
• Type: string
• Required: false
–zoho-auth-url
Auth server URL.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: auth_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_AUTH_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–zoho-token-url
Token server url.
Leave blank to use the provider defaults.
Properties:
• Config: token_url
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_TOKEN_URL
• Type: string
• Required: false
–zoho-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_ZOHO_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Del,Ctl,InvalidUtf8
Setting up your own client_id
For Zoho we advise you to set up your own client_id. To do so you have to complete the following steps.
1. Log in to the Zoho API Console
2. Create a new client of type “Server-based Application”. The name and website don’t matter, but you
must add the redirect URL http://localhost:53682/.
3. Once the client is created, you can go to the settings tab and enable it in other regions.
The client id and client secret can now be used with rclone.
Local Filesystem
Local paths are specified as normal filesystem paths, e.g. /path/to/wherever, so
rclone sync -i /home/source /tmp/destination
Will sync /home/source to /tmp/destination.
Configuration
For consistencies sake one can also configure a remote of type local in the config file, and access the
local filesystem using rclone remote paths, e.g. remote:path/to/wherever, but it is probably easier not
to.
Modified time
Rclone reads and writes the modified time using an accuracy determined by the OS. Typically this is 1ns
on Linux, 10 ns on Windows and 1 Second on OS X.
Filenames
Filenames should be encoded in UTF-8 on disk. This is the normal case for Windows and OS X.
There is a bit more uncertainty in the Linux world, but new distributions will have UTF-8 encoded files
names. If you are using an old Linux filesystem with non UTF-8 file names (e.g. latin1) then you can use
the convmv tool to convert the filesystem to UTF-8. This tool is available in most distributions’
package managers.
If an invalid (non-UTF8) filename is read, the invalid characters will be replaced with a quoted
representation of the invalid bytes. The name gro\xdf will be transferred as gro‛DF. rclone will emit a
debug message in this case (use -v to see), e.g.
Local file system at .: Replacing invalid UTF-8 characters in "gro\xdf"
Restricted characters
With the local backend, restrictions on the characters that are usable in file or directory names depend
on the operating system. To check what rclone will replace by default on your system, run rclone help
flags local-encoding.
On non Windows platforms the following characters are replaced when handling file names.
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
/ 0x2F ／
When running on Windows the following characters are replaced. This list is based on the
https://docs.microsoft.com/de-de/windows/desktop/FileIO/naming-a-file#naming-conventions Windows file
naming conventions.
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
NUL 0x00 ␀
SOH 0x01 ␁
STX 0x02 ␂
ETX 0x03 ␃
EOT 0x04 ␄
ENQ 0x05 ␅
ACK 0x06 ␆
BEL 0x07 ␇
BS 0x08 ␈
HT 0x09 ␉
LF 0x0A ␊
VT 0x0B ␋
FF 0x0C ␌
CR 0x0D ␍
SO 0x0E ␎
SI 0x0F ␏
DLE 0x10 ␐
DC1 0x11 ␑
DC2 0x12 ␒
DC3 0x13 ␓
DC4 0x14 ␔
NAK 0x15 ␕
SYN 0x16 ␖
ETB 0x17 ␗
CAN 0x18 ␘
EM 0x19 ␙
SUB 0x1A ␚
ESC 0x1B ␛
FS 0x1C ␜
GS 0x1D ␝
RS 0x1E ␞
US 0x1F ␟
/ 0x2F ／
” 0x22 ＂
* 0x2A ＊
: 0x3A ：
< 0x3C ＜
> 0x3E ＞
? 0x3F ？
\ 0x5C ＼
| 0x7C ｜
File names on Windows can also not end with the following characters. These only get replaced if they
are the last character in the name:
Character Value Replacement
────────────────────────────────
SP 0x20 ␠
. 0x2E ．
Invalid UTF-8 bytes will also be replaced, as they can’t be converted to UTF-16.
Paths on Windows
On Windows there are many ways of specifying a path to a file system resource. Local paths can be
absolute, like C:\path\to\wherever, or relative, like ..\wherever. Network paths in UNC format,
\\server\share, are also supported. Path separator can be either \ (as in C:\path\to\wherever) or / (as
in C:/path/to/wherever). Length of these paths are limited to 259 characters for files and 247
characters for directories, but there is an alternative extended-length path format increasing the limit
to (approximately) 32,767 characters. This format requires absolute paths and the use of prefix \\?\,
e.g. \\?\D:\some\very\long\path. For convenience rclone will automatically convert regular paths into
the corresponding extended-length paths, so in most cases you do not have to worry about this (read more
below).
Note that Windows supports using the same prefix \\?\ to specify path to volumes identified by their
GUID, e.g. \\?\Volume{b75e2c83-0000-0000-0000-602f00000000}\some\path. This is not supported in rclone,
due to an issue in go.
Long paths
Rclone handles long paths automatically, by converting all paths to https://docs.microsoft.com/en-
us/windows/win32/fileio/maximum-file-path-limitation extended-length path format, which allows paths up
to 32,767 characters.
This conversion will ensure paths are absolute and prefix them with the \\?\. This is why you will see
that your paths, for instance .\files is shown as path \\?\C:\files in the output, and \\server\share as
\\?\UNC\server\share.
However, in rare cases this may cause problems with buggy file system drivers like EncFS. To disable UNC
conversion globally, add this to your .rclone.conf file:
[local]
nounc = true
If you want to selectively disable UNC, you can add it to a separate entry like this:
[nounc]
type = local
nounc = true
And use rclone like this:
rclone copy c:\src nounc:z:\dst
This will use UNC paths on c:\src but not on z:\dst. Of course this will cause problems if the absolute
path length of a file exceeds 259 characters on z, so only use this option if you have to.
Symlinks / Junction points
Normally rclone will ignore symlinks or junction points (which behave like symlinks under Windows).
If you supply --copy-links or -L then rclone will follow the symlink and copy the pointed to file or
directory. Note that this flag is incompatible with --links / -l.
This flag applies to all commands.
For example, supposing you have a directory structure like this
$ tree /tmp/a
/tmp/a
├── b -> ../b
├── expected -> ../expected
├── one
└── two
└── three
Then you can see the difference with and without the flag like this
$ rclone ls /tmp/a
6 one
6 two/three
and
$ rclone -L ls /tmp/a
4174 expected
6 one
6 two/three
6 b/two
6 b/one
–links, -l
Normally rclone will ignore symlinks or junction points (which behave like symlinks under Windows).
If you supply this flag then rclone will copy symbolic links from the local storage, and store them as
text files, with a `.rclonelink' suffix in the remote storage.
The text file will contain the target of the symbolic link (see example).
This flag applies to all commands.
For example, supposing you have a directory structure like this
$ tree /tmp/a
/tmp/a
├── file1 -> ./file4
└── file2 -> /home/user/file3
Copying the entire directory with `-l'
$ rclone copyto -l /tmp/a/file1 remote:/tmp/a/
The remote files are created with a `.rclonelink' suffix
$ rclone ls remote:/tmp/a
5 file1.rclonelink
14 file2.rclonelink
The remote files will contain the target of the symbolic links
$ rclone cat remote:/tmp/a/file1.rclonelink
./file4
$ rclone cat remote:/tmp/a/file2.rclonelink
/home/user/file3
Copying them back with `-l'
$ rclone copyto -l remote:/tmp/a/ /tmp/b/
$ tree /tmp/b
/tmp/b
├── file1 -> ./file4
└── file2 -> /home/user/file3
However, if copied back without `-l'
$ rclone copyto remote:/tmp/a/ /tmp/b/
$ tree /tmp/b
/tmp/b
├── file1.rclonelink
└── file2.rclonelink
Note that this flag is incompatible with -copy-links / -L.
Restricting filesystems with –one-file-system
Normally rclone will recurse through filesystems as mounted.
However if you set --one-file-system or -x this tells rclone to stay in the filesystem specified by the
root and not to recurse into different file systems.
For example if you have a directory hierarchy like this
root
├── disk1 - disk1 mounted on the root
│ └── file3 - stored on disk1
├── disk2 - disk2 mounted on the root
│ └── file4 - stored on disk12
├── file1 - stored on the root disk
└── file2 - stored on the root disk
Using rclone --one-file-system copy root remote: will only copy file1 and file2. Eg
$ rclone -q --one-file-system ls root
0 file1
0 file2
$ rclone -q ls root
0 disk1/file3
0 disk2/file4
0 file1
0 file2
NB Rclone (like most unix tools such as du, rsync and tar) treats a bind mount to the same device as
being on the same filesystem.
NB This flag is only available on Unix based systems. On systems where it isn’t supported (e.g. Windows)
it will be ignored.
Advanced options
Here are the Advanced options specific to local (Local Disk).
–local-nounc
Disable UNC (long path names) conversion on Windows.
Properties:
• Config: nounc
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_NOUNC
• Type: bool
• Default: false
• Examples:
• “true”
• Disables long file names.
–copy-links / -L
Follow symlinks and copy the pointed to item.
Properties:
• Config: copy_links
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_COPY_LINKS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–links / -l
Translate symlinks to/from regular files with a `.rclonelink' extension.
Properties:
• Config: links
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_LINKS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–skip-links
Don’t warn about skipped symlinks.
This flag disables warning messages on skipped symlinks or junction points, as you explicitly acknowledge
that they should be skipped.
Properties:
• Config: skip_links
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_SKIP_LINKS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-zero-size-links
Assume the Stat size of links is zero (and read them instead) (deprecated).
Rclone used to use the Stat size of links as the link size, but this fails in quite a few places:
• Windows
• On some virtual filesystems (such ash LucidLink)
• Android
So rclone now always reads the link.
Properties:
• Config: zero_size_links
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_ZERO_SIZE_LINKS
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-unicode-normalization
Apply unicode NFC normalization to paths and filenames.
This flag can be used to normalize file names into unicode NFC form that are read from the local
filesystem.
Rclone does not normally touch the encoding of file names it reads from the file system.
This can be useful when using macOS as it normally provides decomposed (NFD) unicode which in some
language (eg Korean) doesn’t display properly on some OSes.
Note that rclone compares filenames with unicode normalization in the sync routine so this flag shouldn’t
normally be used.
Properties:
• Config: unicode_normalization
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_UNICODE_NORMALIZATION
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-no-check-updated
Don’t check to see if the files change during upload.
Normally rclone checks the size and modification time of files as they are being uploaded and aborts with
a message which starts “can’t copy - source file is being updated” if the file changes during upload.
However on some file systems this modification time check may fail (e.g. Glusterfs #2206) so this check
can be disabled with this flag.
If this flag is set, rclone will use its best efforts to transfer a file which is being updated. If the
file is only having things appended to it (e.g. a log) then rclone will transfer the log file with the
size it had the first time rclone saw it.
If the file is being modified throughout (not just appended to) then the transfer may fail with a hash
check failure.
In detail, once the file has had stat() called on it for the first time we:
• Only transfer the size that stat gave
• Only checksum the size that stat gave
• Don’t update the stat info for the file
Properties:
• Config: no_check_updated
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_NO_CHECK_UPDATED
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–one-file-system / -x
Don’t cross filesystem boundaries (unix/macOS only).
Properties:
• Config: one_file_system
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_ONE_FILE_SYSTEM
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-case-sensitive
Force the filesystem to report itself as case sensitive.
Normally the local backend declares itself as case insensitive on Windows/macOS and case sensitive for
everything else. Use this flag to override the default choice.
Properties:
• Config: case_sensitive
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_CASE_SENSITIVE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-case-insensitive
Force the filesystem to report itself as case insensitive.
Normally the local backend declares itself as case insensitive on Windows/macOS and case sensitive for
everything else. Use this flag to override the default choice.
Properties:
• Config: case_insensitive
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_CASE_INSENSITIVE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-no-preallocate
Disable preallocation of disk space for transferred files.
Preallocation of disk space helps prevent filesystem fragmentation. However, some virtual filesystem
layers (such as Google Drive File Stream) may incorrectly set the actual file size equal to the
preallocated space, causing checksum and file size checks to fail. Use this flag to disable
preallocation.
Properties:
• Config: no_preallocate
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_NO_PREALLOCATE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-no-sparse
Disable sparse files for multi-thread downloads.
On Windows platforms rclone will make sparse files when doing multi-thread downloads. This avoids long
pauses on large files where the OS zeros the file. However sparse files may be undesirable as they cause
disk fragmentation and can be slow to work with.
Properties:
• Config: no_sparse
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_NO_SPARSE
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-no-set-modtime
Disable setting modtime.
Normally rclone updates modification time of files after they are done uploading. This can cause
permissions issues on Linux platforms when the user rclone is running as does not own the file uploaded,
such as when copying to a CIFS mount owned by another user. If this option is enabled, rclone will no
longer update the modtime after copying a file.
Properties:
• Config: no_set_modtime
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_NO_SET_MODTIME
• Type: bool
• Default: false
–local-encoding
The encoding for the backend.
See the encoding section in the overview for more info.
Properties:
• Config: encoding
• Env Var: RCLONE_LOCAL_ENCODING
• Type: MultiEncoder
• Default: Slash,Dot
Metadata
Depending on which OS is in use the local backend may return only some of the system metadata. Setting
system metadata is supported on all OSes but setting user metadata is only supported on linux, freebsd,
netbsd, macOS and Solaris. It is not supported on Windows yet (see pkg/attrs#47).
User metadata is stored as extended attributes (which may not be supported by all file systems) under the
“user.*” prefix.
Here are the possible system metadata items for the local backend.
Name Help Type Example Read Only
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
atime Time of RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00 N
last access
btime Time of RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00 N
file birth
(creation)
gid Group ID of decimal 500 N
owner number
mode File type octal, unix 0100664 N
and mode style
mtime Time of RFC 3339 2006-01-02T15:04:05.999999999Z07:00 N
last
modification
rdev Device ID hexadecimal 1abc N
(if special
file)
uid User ID of decimal 500 N
owner number
See the metadata docs for more info.
Backend commands
Here are the commands specific to the local backend.
Run them with
rclone backend COMMAND remote:
The help below will explain what arguments each command takes.
See the backend command for more info on how to pass options and arguments.
These can be run on a running backend using the rc command backend/command.
noop
A null operation for testing backend commands
rclone backend noop remote: [options] [<arguments>+]
This is a test command which has some options you can try to change the output.
Options:
• “echo”: echo the input arguments
• “error”: return an error based on option value
Changelog
v1.60.1 - 2022-11-17
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• lib/cache: Fix alias backend shutting down too soon (Nick Craig-Wood)
• wasm: Fix walltime link error by adding up-to-date wasm_exec.js (João Henrique Franco)
• docs
• Update faq.md with bisync (Samuel Johnson)
• Corrected download links in windows install docs (coultonluke)
• Add direct download link for windows arm64 (albertony)
• Remove link to rclone slack as it is no longer supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Faq: how to use a proxy server that requires a username and password (asdffdsazqqq)
• Oracle-object-storage: doc fix (Manoj Ghosh)
• Fix typo remove in rclone_serve_restic command (Joda Stößer)
• Fix character that was incorrectly interpreted as markdown (Clément Notin)
• VFS
• Fix deadlock caused by cache cleaner and upload finishing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Clean absolute paths (albertony)
• Fix -L/–copy-links with filters missing directories (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mailru
• Note that an app password is now needed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Allow timestamps to be before the epoch 1970-01-01 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Add provider quirk --s3-might-gzip to fix corrupted on transfer: sizes differ (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Allow Storj to server side copy since it seems to work now (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix for unchecked err value in s3 listv2 (Aaron Gokaslan)
• Add additional Wasabi locations (techknowlogick)
• Smb
• Fix Failed to sync: context canceled at the end of syncs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Fix Move/Copy/DirMove when using -server-side-across-configs (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.60.0 - 2022-10-21
See commits
• New backends
• Oracle object storage (Manoj Ghosh)
• SMB / CIFS (Windows file sharing) (Lesmiscore)
• New S3 providers
• IONOS Cloud Storage (Dmitry Deniskin)
• Qiniu KODO (Bachue Zhou)
• New Features
• build
• Update to go1.19 and make go1.17 the minimum required version (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Install.sh: fix arm-v7 download (Ole Frost)
• fs: Warn the user when using an existing remote name without a colon (Nick Craig-Wood)
• httplib: Add --xxx-min-tls-version option to select minimum TLS version for HTTP servers (Robert
Newson)
• librclone: Add PHP bindings and test program (Jordi Gonzalez Muñoz)
• operations
• Add --server-side-across-configs global flag for any backend (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Optimise --copy-dest and --compare-dest (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc: add job/stopgroup to stop group (Evan Spensley)
• serve dlna
• Add --announce-interval to control SSDP Announce Interval (YanceyChiew)
• Add --interface to Specify SSDP interface names line (Simon Bos)
• Add support for more external subtitles (YanceyChiew)
• Add verification of addresses (YanceyChiew)
• sync: Optimise --copy-dest and --compare-dest (Nick Craig-Wood)
• doc updates (albertony, Alexander Knorr, anonion, João Henrique Franco, Josh Soref, Lorenzo Milesi,
Marco Molteni, Mark Trolley, Ole Frost, partev, Ryan Morey, Tom Mombourquette, YFdyh000)
• Bug Fixes
• filter
• Fix incorrect filtering with UseFilter context flag and wrapping backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make sure we check --files-from when looking for a single file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Fix mount/listmounts not returning the full Fs entered in mount/mount (Tom Mombourquette)
• Handle external unmount when mounting (Isaac Aymerich)
• Validate Daemon option is not set when mounting a volume via RC (Isaac Aymerich)
• sync: Update docs and error messages to reflect fixes to overlap checks (Nick Naumann)
• VFS
• Reduce memory use by embedding sync.Cond (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Reduce memory usage by re-ordering commonly used structures (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix excess CPU used by VFS cache cleaner looping (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Obey file filters in listing to fix errors on excluded files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “Failed to read metadata: function not implemented” on old Linux kernels (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Compress
• Fix crash due to nil metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix error handling to not use or return nil objects (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Make --drive-stop-on-upload-limit obey quota exceeded error (Steve Kowalik)
• FTP
• Add --ftp-force-list-hidden option to show hidden items (Øyvind Heddeland Instefjord)
• Fix hang when using ExplicitTLS to certain servers. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add --gcs-endpoint flag and config parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hubic
• Remove backend as service has now shut down (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Rename Onedrive(cn) 21Vianet to Vnet Group (Yen Hu)
• Disable change notify in China region since it is not supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Implement --s3-versions flag to show old versions of objects if enabled (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement --s3-version-at flag to show versions of objects at a particular time (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement backend versioning command to get/set bucket versioning (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement Purge to purge versions and backend cleanup-hidden (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-decompress flag to decompress gzip-encoded files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-sse-customer-key-base64 to supply keys with binary data (Richard Bateman)
• Try to keep the maximum precision in ModTime with --user-server-modtime (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drop binary metadata with an ERROR message as it can’t be stored (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-no-system-metadata to suppress read and write of system metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Fix directory creation races (Lesmiscore)
• Swift
• Add --swift-no-large-objects to reduce HEAD requests (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Union
• Propagate SlowHash feature to fix hasher interaction (Lesmiscore)
v1.59.2 - 2022-09-15
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• config: Move locking to fix fatal error: concurrent map read and map write (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Disable xattr support if the filesystems indicates it is not supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Fix chunksize calculations producing too many parts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Fix chunksize calculations producing too many parts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix chunksize calculations producing too many parts (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.59.1 - 2022-08-08
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix panic in core/stats-reset with unknown group (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build: Fix android build after GitHub actions change (Nick Craig-Wood)
• dlna: Fix SOAP action header parsing (Joram Schrijver)
• docs: Fix links to mount command from install docs (albertony)
• dropbox: Fix ChangeNotify was unable to decrypt errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fs: Fix parsing of times and durations of the form “YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS” (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve sftp: Fix checksum detection (Nick Craig-Wood)
• sync: Add accidentally missed filter-sensitivity to –backup-dir option (Nick Naumann)
• Combine
• Fix docs showing remote= instead of upstreams= (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Throw error if duplicate directory name is specified (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix errors with backends shutting down while in use (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Fix hang on quit with –dropbox-batch-mode off (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix infinite loop on uploading a corrupted file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Internetarchive
• Ignore checksums for files using the different method (Lesmiscore)
• Handle hash symbol in the middle of filename (Lesmiscore)
• Jottacloud
• Fix working with whitelabel Elgiganten Cloud
• Do not store username in config when using standard auth (albertony)
• Mega
• Fix nil pointer exception when bad node received (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix –s3-no-head panic: reflect: Elem of invalid type s3.PutObjectInput (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Fix issue with WS_FTP by working around failing RealPath (albertony)
• Union
• Fix duplicated files when using directories with leading / (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix multiple files being uploaded when roots don’t exist (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix panic due to misalignment of struct field in 32 bit architectures (r-ricci)
v1.59.0 - 2022-07-09
See commits
• New backends
• Combine multiple remotes in one directory tree (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hidrive (Ovidiu Victor Tatar)
• Internet Archive (Lesmiscore (Naoya Ozaki))
• New S3 providers
• ArvanCloud AOS (ehsantdy)
• Cloudflare R2 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Huawei OBS (m00594701)
• IDrive e2 (vyloy)
• New commands
• test makefile: Create a single file for testing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New Features
• Metadata framework to read and write system and user metadata on backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implemented initially for local, s3 and internetarchive backends
• --metadata/-M flag to control whether metadata is copied
• --metadata-set flag to specify metadata for uploads
• Thanks to Manz Solutions for sponsoring this work.
• build
• Update to go1.18 and make go1.16 the minimum required version (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update android go build to 1.18.x and NDK to 23.1.7779620 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• All windows binaries now no longer CGO (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add linux/arm/v6 to docker images (Nick Craig-Wood)
• A huge number of fixes found with staticcheck (albertony)
• Configurable version suffix independent of version number (albertony)
• check: Implement --no-traverse and --no-unicode-normalization (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config: Readability improvements (albertony)
• copyurl: Add --header-filename to honor the HTTP header filename directive (J-P Treen)
• filter: Allow multiple --exclude-if-present flags (albertony)
• fshttp: Add --disable-http-keep-alives to disable HTTP Keep Alives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• install.sh
• Set the modes on the files and/or directories on macOS (Michael C Tiernan - MIT-Research Computing
Project)
• Pre verify sudo authorization -v before calling curl. (Michael C Tiernan - MIT-Research Computing
Project)
• lib/encoder: Add Semicolon encoding (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsf: Add metadata support with M flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsjson: Add --metadata/-M flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• ncdu
• Implement multi selection (CrossR)
• Replace termbox with tcell’s termbox wrapper (eNV25)
• Display correct path in delete confirmation dialog (Roberto Ricci)
• operations
• Speed up hash checking by aborting the other hash if first returns nothing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use correct src/dst in some log messages (zzr93)
• rcat: Check checksums by default like copy does (Nick Craig-Wood)
• selfupdate: Replace deprecated x/crypto/openpgp package with ProtonMail/go-crypto (albertony)
• serve ftp: Check --passive-port arguments are correct (Nick Craig-Wood)
• size: Warn about inaccurate results when objects with unknown size (albertony)
• sync: Overlap check is now filter-sensitive so --backup-dir can be in the root provided it is
filtered (Nick)
• test info: Check file name lengths using 1,2,3,4 byte unicode characters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• test makefile(s): --sparse, --zero, --pattern, --ascii, --chargen flags to control file contents
(Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make sure we call the Shutdown method on backends (Martin Czygan)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix unknown length file transfers counting 3 transfers each (buda)
• ncdu: Fix issue where dir size is summed when file sizes are -1 (albertony)
• sync/copy/move
• Fix --fast-list --create-empty-src-dirs and --exclude (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --max-duration and --cutoff-mode soft (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix fs cache unpin (Martin Czygan)
• Set proper exit code for errors that are not low-level retried (e.g. size/timestamp changing)
(albertony)
• Mount
• Support windows/arm64 (may still be problems - see #5828) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Log IO errors at ERROR level (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Ignore _netdev mount argument (Hugal31)
• VFS
• Add --vfs-fast-fingerprint for less accurate but faster fingerprints (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --vfs-disk-space-total-size option to manually set the total disk space (Claudio Maradonna)
• vfscache: Fix fatal error: sync: unlock of unlocked mutex error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Fix parsing of --local-nounc flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add Metadata support (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Support metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Calculate Chunksize/blocksize to stay below maxUploadParts (Leroy van Logchem)
• Use chunksize lib to determine chunksize dynamically (Derek Battams)
• Case insensitive access tier (Rob Pickerill)
• Allow remote emulator (azurite) (Lorenzo Maiorfi)
• B2
• Add --b2-version-at flag to show file versions at time specified (SwazRGB)
• Use chunksize lib to determine chunksize dynamically (Derek Battams)
• Chunker
• Mark as not supporting metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Compress
• Support metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Make backend config -o config add a combined AllDrives: remote (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --drive-shared-with-me work with shared drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --drive-resource-key for accessing link-shared files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add backend commands exportformats and importformats for debugging (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix 404 errors on copy/server side copy objects from public folder (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update Internal OAuth consent screen docs (Phil Shackleton)
• Moved root_folder_id to advanced section (Abhiraj)
• Dropbox
• Migrate from deprecated api (m8rge)
• Add logs to show when poll interval limits are exceeded (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix nil pointer exception on dropbox impersonate user not found (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fichier
• Parse api error codes and them accordingly (buengese)
• FTP
• Add support for disable_utf8 option (Jason Zheng)
• Revert to upstream github.com/jlaffaye/ftp from our fork (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add --gcs-no-check-bucket to minimise transactions and perms (Nick Gooding)
• Add --gcs-decompress flag to decompress gzip-encoded files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• by default these will be downloaded compressed (which previously failed)
• Hasher
• Support metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• HTTP
• Fix missing response when using custom auth handler (albertony)
• Jottacloud
• Add support for upload to custom device and mountpoint (albertony)
• Always store username in config and use it to avoid initial API request (albertony)
• Fix issue with server-side copy when destination is in trash (albertony)
• Fix listing output of remote with special characters (albertony)
• Mailru
• Fix timeout by using int instead of time.Duration for keeping number of seconds (albertony)
• Mega
• Document using MEGAcmd to help with login failures (Art M. Gallagher)
• Onedrive
• Implement --poll-interval for onedrive (Hugo Laloge)
• Add access scopes option (Sven Gerber)
• Opendrive
• Resolve lag and truncate bugs (Scott Grimes)
• Pcloud
• Fix about with no free space left (buengese)
• Fix cleanup (buengese)
• S3
• Use PUT Object instead of presigned URLs to upload single part objects (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Backend restore command to skip non-GLACIER objects (Vincent Murphy)
• Use chunksize lib to determine chunksize dynamically (Derek Battams)
• Retry RequestTimeout errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement reading and writing of metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Add support for about and hashsum on windows server (albertony)
• Use vendor-specific VFS statistics extension for about if available (albertony)
• Add --sftp-chunk-size to control packets sizes for high latency links (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --sftp-concurrency to improve high latency transfers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --sftp-set-env option to set environment variables (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add Hetzner Storage Boxes to supported sftp backends (Anthrazz)
• Storj
• Fix put which lead to the file being unreadable when using mount (Erik van Velzen)
• Union
• Add min_free_space option for lfs/eplfs policies (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix uploading files to union of all bucket based remotes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix get free space for remotes which don’t support it (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix eplus policy to select correct entry for existing files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Support metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Uptobox
• Fix root path handling (buengese)
• WebDAV
• Add SharePoint in other specific regions support (Noah Hsu)
• Yandex
• Handle api error on server-side move (albertony)
• Zoho
• Add Japan and China regions (buengese)
v1.58.1 - 2022-04-29
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• build: Update github.com/billziss-gh to github.com/winfsp (Nick Craig-Wood)
• filter: Fix timezone of --min-age/-max-age from UTC to local as documented (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc/js: Correct RC method names (Sơn Trần-Nguyễn)
• docs
• Fix some links to command pages (albertony)
• Add --multi-thread-streams note to --transfers. (Zsolt Ero)
• Mount
• Fix --devname and fusermount: unknown option `fsname' when mounting via rc (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Remove wording which suggests VFS is only for mounting (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Fix retries of multipart uploads with incorrect_offset error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Use the s3 pacer to speed up transactions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• pacer: Default the Google pacer to a burst of 100 to fix gcs pacing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Fix scope in token request (albertony)
• Netstorage
• Fix unescaped HTML in documentation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make levels of headings consistent (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add support contacts to netstorage doc (Nil Alexandrov)
• Onedrive
• Note that sharepoint also changes web files (.html, .aspx) (GH)
• Putio
• Handle rate limit errors (Berkan Teber)
• Fix multithread download and other ranged requests (rafma0)
• S3
• Add ChinaMobile EOS to provider list (GuoXingbin)
• Sync providers in config description with providers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Fix OpenSSH 8.8+ RSA keys incompatibility (KARBOWSKI Piotr)
• Note that Scaleway C14 is deprecating SFTP in favor of S3 (Adrien Rey-Jarthon)
• Storj
• Fix bucket creation on Move (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Don’t override Referer if user sets it (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.58.0 - 2022-03-18
See commits
• New backends
• Akamai Netstorage (Nil Alexandrov)
• Seagate Lyve, SeaweedFS, Storj, RackCorp via s3 backend
• Storj (renamed from Tardigrade - your old config files will continue working)
• New commands
• bisync - experimental bidirectional cloud sync (Ivan Andreev, Chris Nelson)
• New Features
• build
• Add windows/arm64 build (rclone mount not supported yet) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Raise minimum go version to go1.15 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config: Allow dot in remote names and improve config editing (albertony)
• dedupe: Add quit as a choice in interactive mode (albertony)
• dlna: Change icons to the newest ones. (Alain Nussbaumer)
• filter: Add {{ regexp }} syntax to pattern matches (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fshttp: Add prometheus metrics for HTTP status code (Michał Matczuk)
• hashsum: Support creating hash from data received on stdin (albertony)
• librclone
• Allow empty string or null input instead of empty json object (albertony)
• Add support for mount commands (albertony)
• operations: Add server-side moves to stats (Ole Frost)
• rc: Allow user to disable authentication for web gui (negative0)
• tree: Remove obsolete --human replaced by global --human-readable (albertony)
• version: Report correct friendly-name for newer Windows 10/11 versions (albertony)
• Bug Fixes
• build
• Fix ARM architecture version in .deb packages after nfpm change (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hard fork github.com/jlaffaye/ftp to fix go get github.com/rclone/rclone (Nick Craig-Wood)
• oauthutil: Fix crash when webbrowser requests /robots.txt (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations: Fix goroutine leak in case of copy retry (Ankur Gupta)
• rc:
• Fix operations/publiclink default for expires parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix missing computation of transferQueueSize when summing up statistics group (Carlo Mion)
• Fix missing StatsInfo fields in the computation of the group sum (Carlo Mion)
• sync: Fix --max-duration so it doesn’t retry when the duration is exceeded (Nick Craig-Wood)
• touch: Fix issue where a directory is created instead of a file (albertony)
• Mount
• Add --devname to set the device name sent to FUSE for mount display (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Add vfs/stats remote control to show statistics (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix failed to _ensure cache internal error: downloaders is nil error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix handling of special characters in file names (Bumsu Hyeon)
• Local
• Fix hash invalidation which caused errors with local crypt mount (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Add base64 and base32768 filename encoding options (Max Sum, Sinan Tan)
• Azure Blob
• Implement --azureblob-upload-concurrency parameter to speed uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove 100MB upper limit on chunk_size as it is no longer needed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Raise --azureblob-upload-concurrency to 16 by default (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix crash with SAS URL and no container (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Compress
• Fix crash if metadata upload failed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix memory leak (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Added --drive-copy-shortcut-content (Abhiraj)
• Disable OAuth OOB flow (copy a token) due to Google deprecation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• See https://developers.googleblog.com/2022/02/making-oauth-flows-safer.html#disallowed-oob the dep‐
reca‐ tion note.
• Add --drive-skip-dangling-shortcuts flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• When using a link type --drive-export-formats shows all doc types (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Speed up directory listings by specifying 1000 items in a chunk (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Save an API request when at the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fichier
• Implemented About functionality (Gourav T)
• FTP
• Add --ftp-ask-password to prompt for password when needed (Borna Butkovic)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add missing regions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Disable OAuth OOB flow (copy a token) due to Google deprecation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• See https://developers.googleblog.com/2022/02/making-oauth-flows-safer.html#disallowed-oob the dep‐
reca‐ tion note.
• Googlephotos
• Disable OAuth OOB flow (copy a token) due to Google deprecation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• See https://developers.googleblog.com/2022/02/making-oauth-flows-safer.html#disallowed-oob the dep‐
reca‐ tion note.
• Hasher
• Fix crash on object not found (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hdfs
• Add file (Move) and directory move (DirMove) support (Andy Jackson)
• HTTP
• Improved recognition of URL pointing to a single file (albertony)
• Jottacloud
• Change API used by recursive list (ListR) (Kim)
• Add support for Tele2 Cloud (Fredric Arklid)
• Koofr
• Add Digistorage service as a Koofr provider. (jaKa)
• Mailru
• Fix int32 overflow on arm32 (Ivan Andreev)
• Onedrive
• Add config option for oauth scope Sites.Read.All (Charlie Jiang)
• Minor optimization of quickxorhash (Isaac Levy)
• Add --onedrive-root-folder-id flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Do not retry on 400 pathIsTooLong error (ctrl-q)
• Pcloud
• Add support for recursive list (ListR) (Niels van de Weem)
• Fix pre-1970 time stamps (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Use ListObjectsV2 for faster listings (Felix Bünemann)
• Fallback to ListObject v1 on unsupported providers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use the ETag on multipart transfers to verify the transfer was OK (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-use-multipart-etag provider quirk to disable this on unsupported providers (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• New Providers
• RackCorp object storage (bbabich)
• Seagate Lyve Cloud storage (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SeaweedFS (Chris Lu)
• Storj Shared gateways (Márton Elek, Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add Wasabi AP Northeast 2 endpoint info (lindwurm)
• Add GLACIER_IR storage class (Yunhai Luo)
• Document Content-MD5 workaround for object-lock enabled buckets (Paulo Martins)
• Fix multipart upload with --no-head flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Simplify content length processing in s3 with download url (Logeshwaran Murugesan)
• SFTP
• Add rclone to list of supported md5sum/sha1sum commands to look for (albertony)
• Refactor so we only have one way of running remote commands (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix timeout on hashing large files by sending keepalives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix unnecessary seeking when uploading and downloading files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update docs on how to create known_hosts file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Storj
• Rename tardigrade backend to storj backend (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement server side Move for files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update docs to explain differences between s3 and this backend (Elek, Márton)
• Swift
• Fix About so it shows info about the current container only (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Union
• Fix treatment of remotes with // in (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix deadlock when one part of a multi-upload fails (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix eplus policy returned nil (Vitor Arruda)
• Yandex
• Add permanent deletion support (deinferno)
v1.57.0 - 2021-11-01
See commits
• New backends
• Sia: for Sia decentralized cloud (Ian Levesque, Matthew Sevey, Ivan Andreev)
• Hasher: caches hashes and enable hashes for backends that don’t support them (Ivan Andreev)
• New commands
• lsjson –stat: to get info about a single file/dir and operations/stat api (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config paths: show configured paths (albertony)
• New Features
• about: Make human-readable output more consistent with other commands (albertony)
• build
• Use go1.17 for building and make go1.14 the minimum supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update Go to 1.16 and NDK to 22b for Android builds (x0b)
• config
• Support hyphen in remote name from environment variable (albertony)
• Make temporary directory user-configurable (albertony)
• Convert --cache-dir value to an absolute path (albertony)
• Do not override MIME types from OS defaults (albertony)
• docs
• Toc styling and header levels cleanup (albertony)
• Extend documentation on valid remote names (albertony)
• Mention make for building and cmount tag for macos (Alex Chen)
• ...and many more contributions to numerous to mention!
• fs: Move with --ignore-existing will not delete skipped files (Nathan Collins)
• hashsum
• Treat hash values in sum file as case insensitive (Ivan Andreev)
• Don’t put ERROR or UNSUPPORTED in output (Ivan Andreev)
• lib/encoder: Add encoding of square brackets (Ivan Andreev)
• lib/file: Improve error message when attempting to create dir on nonexistent drive on windows
(albertony)
• lib/http: Factor password hash salt into options with default (Nolan Woods)
• lib/kv: Add key-value database api (Ivan Andreev)
• librclone
• Add RcloneFreeString function (albertony)
• Free strings in python example (albertony)
• log: Optionally print pid in logs (Ivan Andreev)
• ls: Introduce --human-readable global option to print human-readable sizes (albertony)
• ncdu: Introduce key u to toggle human-readable (albertony)
• operations: Add rmdirs -v output (Justin Winokur)
• serve sftp
• Generate an ECDSA server key as well as RSA (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Generate an Ed25519 server key as well as ECDSA and RSA (albertony)
• serve docker
• Allow to customize proxy settings of docker plugin (Ivan Andreev)
• Build docker plugin for multiple platforms (Thomas Stachl)
• size: Include human-readable count (albertony)
• touch: Add support for touching files in directory, with recursive option, filtering and --dry-run/-i
(albertony)
• tree: Option to print human-readable sizes removed in favor of global option (albertony)
• Bug Fixes
• lib/http
• Fix bad username check in single auth secret provider (Nolan Woods)
• Fix handling of SSL credentials (Nolan Woods)
• serve ftp: Ensure modtime is passed as UTC always to fix timezone oddities (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve sftp: Fix generation of server keys on windows (albertony)
• serve docker: Fix octal umask (Ivan Andreev)
• Mount
• Enable rclone to be run as mount helper direct from the fstab (Ivan Andreev)
• Use procfs to validate mount on linux (Ivan Andreev)
• Correctly daemonize for compatibility with automount (Ivan Andreev)
• VFS
• Ensure names used in cache path are legal on current OS (albertony)
• Ignore ECLOSED when truncating file handles to fix intermittent bad file descriptor error (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Refactor default OS encoding out from local backend into shared encoder lib (albertony)
• Crypt
• Return wrapped object even with --crypt-no-data-encryption (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix uploads with --crypt-no-data-encryption (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Add --azureblob-no-head-object (Tatsuya Noyori)
• Box
• Make listings of heavily used directories more reliable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• When doing cleanup delete as much as possible (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --box-list-chunk to control listing chunk size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Delete items in parallel in cleanup using --checkers threads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --box-owned-by to only show items owned by the login passed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry operation_blocked_temporary errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Chunker
• Md5all must create metadata if base hash is slow (Ivan Andreev)
• Drive
• Speed up directory listings by constraining the API listing using the current filters (fotile96, Ivan
Andreev)
• Fix buffering for single request upload for files smaller than --drive-upload-cutoff (YenForYang)
• Add -o config option to backend drives to make config for all shared drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Add --dropbox-batch-commit-timeout to control batch timeout (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Filefabric
• Make backoff exponential for error_background to fix errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix directory move after API change (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Enable tls session cache by default (Ivan Andreev)
• Add option to disable tls13 (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix timeout after long uploads (Ivan Andreev)
• Add support for precise time (Ivan Andreev)
• Enable CI for ProFtpd, PureFtpd, VsFtpd (Ivan Andreev)
• Googlephotos
• Use encoder for album names to fix albums with control characters (Parth Shukla)
• Jottacloud
• Implement SetModTime to support modtime-only changes (albertony)
• Improved error handling with SetModTime and corrupt files in general (albertony)
• Add support for UserInfo (rclone config userinfo) feature (albertony)
• Return direct download link from rclone link command (albertony)
• Koofr
• Create direct share link (Dmitry Bogatov)
• Pcloud
• Add sha256 support (Ken Enrique Morel)
• Premiumizeme
• Fix directory listing after API changes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix server side move after API change (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix server side directory move after API changes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Add support to use CDN URL to download the file (Logeshwaran)
• Add AWS Snowball Edge to providers examples (r0kk3rz)
• Use a combination of SDK retries and rclone retries (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix IAM Role for Service Account not working and other auth problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix shared_credentials_file auth after reverting incorrect fix (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix corrupted on transfer: sizes differ 0 vs xxxx with Ceph (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Seafile
• Fix error when not configured for 2fa (Fred)
• SFTP
• Fix timeout when doing MD5SUM of large file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swift
• Update OCI URL (David Liu)
• Document OVH Cloud Archive (HNGamingUK)
• Union
• Fix rename not working with union of local disk and bucket based remote (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.56.2 - 2021-10-01
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• serve http: Re-add missing auth to http service (Nolan Woods)
• build: Update golang.org/x/sys to fix crash on macOS when compiled with go1.17 (Herby Gillot)
• FTP
• Fix deadlock after failed update when concurrency=1 (Ivan Andreev)
v1.56.1 - 2021-09-19
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix maximum bwlimit by scaling scale max token bucket size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc: Fix speed does not update in core/stats (negative0)
• selfupdate: Fix --quiet option, not quite quiet (yedamo)
• serve http: Fix serve http exiting directly after starting (Cnly)
• build
• Apply gofmt from golang 1.17 (Ivan Andreev)
• Update Go to 1.16 and NDK to 22b for android/any (x0b)
• Mount
• Fix --daemon mode (Ivan Andreev)
• VFS
• Fix duplicates on rename (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix crash when truncating a just uploaded object (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix issue where empty dirs would build up in cache meta dir (albertony)
• Drive
• Fix instructions for auto config (Greg Sadetsky)
• Fix lsf example without drive-impersonate (Greg Sadetsky)
• Onedrive
• Handle HTTP 400 better in PublicLink (Alex Chen)
• Clarification of the process for creating custom client_id (Mariano Absatz)
• Pcloud
• Return an early error when Put is called with an unknown size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Try harder to delete a failed upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Add Wasabi’s AP-Northeast endpoint info (hota)
• Fix typo in s3 documentation (Greg Sadetsky)
• Seafile
• Fix 2fa config state machine (Fred)
• SFTP
• Remove spurious error message on --sftp-disable-concurrent-reads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Sugarsync
• Fix initial connection after config re-arrangement (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.56.0 - 2021-07-20
See commits
• New backends
• Uptobox (buengese)
• New commands
• serve docker (Antoine GIRARD) (Ivan Andreev)
• and accompanying docker volume plugin
• checksum to check files against a file of checksums (Ivan Andreev)
• this is also available as rclone md5sum -C etc
• config touch: ensure config exists at configured location (albertony)
• test changenotify: command to help debugging changenotify (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Deprecations
• dbhashsum: Remove command deprecated a year ago (Ivan Andreev)
• cache: Deprecate cache backend (Ivan Andreev)
• New Features
• rework config system so it can be used non-interactively via cli and rc API.
• See docs in config create
• This is a very big change to all the backends so may cause breakages - please file bugs!
• librclone - export the rclone RC as a C library (lewisxy) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Link a C-API rclone shared object into your project
• Use the RC as an in memory interface
• Python example supplied
• Also supports Android and gomobile
• fs
• Add --disable-http2 for global http2 disable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --dump imply -vv (Alex Chen)
• Use binary prefixes for size and rate units (albertony)
• Use decimal prefixes for counts (albertony)
• Add google search widget to rclone.org (Ivan Andreev)
• accounting: Calculate rolling average speed (Haochen Tong)
• atexit: Terminate with non-zero status after receiving signal (Michael Hanselmann)
• build
• Only run event-based workflow scripts under rclone repo with manual override (Mathieu Carbou)
• Add Android build with gomobile (x0b)
• check: Log the hash in use like cryptcheck does (Nick Craig-Wood)
• version: Print os/version, kernel and bitness (Ivan Andreev)
• config
• Prevent use of Windows reserved names in config file name (albertony)
• Create config file in windows appdata directory by default (albertony)
• Treat any config file paths with filename notfound as memory-only config (albertony)
• Delay load config file (albertony)
• Replace defaultConfig with a thread-safe in-memory implementation (Chris Macklin)
• Allow config create and friends to take key=value parameters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fixed issues with flags/options set by environment vars. (Ole Frost)
• fshttp: Implement graceful DSCP error handling (Tyson Moore)
• lib/http - provides an abstraction for a central http server that services can bind routes to (Nolan
Woods)
• Add --template config and flags to serve/data (Nolan Woods)
• Add default 404 handler (Nolan Woods)
• link: Use “off” value for unset expiry (Nick Craig-Wood)
• oauthutil: Raise fatal error if token expired without refresh token (Alex Chen)
• rcat: Add --size flag for more efficient uploads of known size (Nazar Mishturak)
• serve sftp: Add --stdio flag to serve via stdio (Tom)
• sync: Don’t warn about --no-traverse when --files-from is set (Nick Gaya)
• test makefiles
• Add --seed flag and make data generated repeatable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add log levels and speed summary (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix startTime of statsGroups.sum (Haochen Tong)
• cmd/ncdu: Fix out of range panic in delete (buengese)
• config
• Fix issues with memory-only config file paths (albertony)
• Fix in memory config not saving on the fly backend config (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fshttp: Fix address parsing for DSCP (Tyson Moore)
• ncdu: Update termbox-go library to fix crash (Nick Craig-Wood)
• oauthutil: Fix old authorize result not recognised (Cnly)
• operations: Don’t update timestamps of files in --compare-dest (Nick Gaya)
• selfupdate: fix archive name on macos (Ivan Andreev)
• Mount
• Refactor before adding serve docker (Antoine GIRARD)
• VFS
• Add cache reset for --vfs-cache-max-size handling at cache poll interval (Leo Luan)
• Fix modtime changing when reading file into cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Avoid unnecessary subdir in cache path (albertony)
• Fix that umask option cannot be set as environment variable (albertony)
• Do not print notice about missing poll-interval support when set to 0 (albertony)
• Local
• Always use readlink to read symlink size for better compatibility (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --local-unicode-normalization (and remove --local-no-unicode-normalization) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Skip entries removed concurrently with List() (Ivan Andreev)
• Crypt
• Support timestamped filenames from --b2-versions (Dominik Mydlil)
• B2
• Don’t include the bucket name in public link file prefixes (Jeffrey Tolar)
• Fix versions and .files with no extension (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Factor version handling into lib/version (Dominik Mydlil)
• Box
• Use upload preflight check to avoid listings in file uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Return errors instead of calling log.Fatal with them (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Switch to the Drives API for looking up shared drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix some google docs being treated as files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Add --dropbox-batch-mode flag to speed up uploading (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Read the batch mode docs for more info
• Set visibility in link sharing when --expire is set (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Simplify chunked uploads (Alexey Ivanov)
• Improve “own App IP” instructions (Ivan Andreev)
• Fichier
• Check if more than one upload link is returned (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Support downloading password protected files and folders (Florian Penzkofer)
• Make error messages report text from the API (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix move of files in the same directory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Check that we actually got a download token and retry if we didn’t (buengese)
• Filefabric
• Fix listing after change of from field from “int” to int. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Make upload error 250 indicate success (Nick Craig-Wood)
• GCS
• Make compatible with gsutil’s mtime metadata (database64128)
• Clean up time format constants (database64128)
• Google Photos
• Fix read only scope not being used properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• HTTP
• Replace httplib with lib/http (Nolan Woods)
• Clean up Bind to better use middleware (Nolan Woods)
• Jottacloud
• Fix legacy auth with state based config system (buengese)
• Fix invalid url in output from link command (albertony)
• Add no versions option (buengese)
• Onedrive
• Add list_chunk option (Nick Gaya)
• Also report root error if unable to cancel multipart upload (Cnly)
• Fix failed to configure: empty token found error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make link return direct download link (Xuanchen Wu)
• S3
• Add --s3-no-head-object (Tatsuya Noyori)
• Remove WebIdentityRoleProvider to fix crash on auth (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t check to see if remote is object if it ends with / (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add SeaweedFS (Chris Lu)
• Update Alibaba OSS endpoints (Chuan Zh)
• SFTP
• Fix performance regression by re-enabling concurrent writes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Expand tilde and environment variables in configured known_hosts_file (albertony)
• Tardigrade
• Upgrade to uplink v1.4.6 (Caleb Case)
• Use negative offset (Caleb Case)
• Add warning about too many open files (acsfer)
• WebDAV
• Fix sharepoint auth over http (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add headers option (Antoon Prins)
v1.55.1 - 2021-04-26
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• selfupdate
• Dont detect FUSE if build is static (Ivan Andreev)
• Add build tag noselfupdate (Ivan Andreev)
• sync: Fix incorrect error reported by graceful cutoff (Nick Craig-Wood)
• install.sh: fix macOS arm64 download (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build: Fix version numbers in android branch builds (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs
• Contributing.md: update setup instructions for go1.16 (Nick Gaya)
• WinFsp 2021 is out of beta (albertony)
• Minor cleanup of space around code section (albertony)
• Fixed some typos (albertony)
• VFS
• Fix a code path which allows dirty data to be removed causing data loss (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Compress
• Fix compressed name regexp (buengese)
• Drive
• Fix backend copyid of google doc to directory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t open browser when service account... (Ansh Mittal)
• Dropbox
• Add missing team_data.member scope for use with –impersonate (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix About after scopes changes - rclone config reconnect needed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix Unable to decrypt returned paths from changeNotify (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Fix implicit TLS (Ivan Andreev)
• Onedrive
• Work around for random “Unable to initialize RPS” errors (OleFrost)
• SFTP
• Revert sftp library to v1.12.0 from v1.13.0 to fix performance regression (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix Update ReadFrom failed: failed to send packet: EOF errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Zoho
• Fix error when region isn’t set (buengese)
• Do not ask for mountpoint twice when using headless setup (buengese)
v1.55.0 - 2021-03-31
See commits
• New commands
• selfupdate (Ivan Andreev)
• Allows rclone to update itself in-place or via a package (using --package flag)
• Reads cryptographically signed signatures for non beta releases
• Works on all OSes.
• test - these are test commands - use with care!
• histogram - Makes a histogram of file name characters.
• info - Discovers file name or other limitations for paths.
• makefiles - Make a random file hierarchy for testing.
• memory - Load all the objects at remote:path into memory and report memory stats.
• New Features
• Connection strings
• Config parameters can now be passed as part of the remote name as a connection string.
• For example, to do the equivalent of --drive-shared-with-me use drive,shared_with_me:
• Make sure we don’t save on the fly remote config to the config file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make sure backends with additional config have a different name for caching (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This work was sponsored by CERN, through the CS3MESH4EOSC Project.
• CS3MESH4EOSC has received funding from the European Union’s Horizon 2020
• research and innovation programme under Grant Agreement no. 863353.
• build
• Update go build version to go1.16 and raise minimum go version to go1.13 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make a macOS ARM64 build to support Apple Silicon (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Install macfuse 4.x instead of osxfuse 3.x (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use GO386=softfloat instead of deprecated GO386=387 for 386 builds (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Disable IOS builds for the time being (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Androids builds made with up to date NDK (x0b)
• Add an rclone user to the Docker image but don’t use it by default (cynthia kwok)
• dedupe: Make largest directory primary to minimize data moved (Saksham Khanna)
• config
• Wrap config library in an interface (Fionera)
• Make config file system pluggable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• --config "" or "/notfound" for in memory config only (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Clear fs cache of stale entries when altering config (Nick Craig-Wood)
• copyurl: Add option to print resulting auto-filename (albertony)
• delete: Make --rmdirs obey the filters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs - many fixes and reworks from edwardxml, albertony, pvalls, Ivan Andreev, Evan Harris, buengese,
Alexey Tabakman
• encoder/filename - add SCSU as tables (Klaus Post)
• Add multiple paths support to --compare-dest and --copy-dest flag (K265)
• filter: Make --exclude "dir/" equivalent to --exclude "dir/**" (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fshttp: Add DSCP support with --dscp for QoS with differentiated services (Max Sum)
• lib/cache: Add Delete and DeletePrefix methods (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lib/file
• Make pre-allocate detect disk full errors and return them (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t run preallocate concurrently (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry preallocate on EINTR (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations: Made copy and sync operations obey a RetryAfterError (Ankur Gupta)
• rc
• Add string alternatives for setting options over the rc (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add options/local to see the options configured in the context (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add _config parameter to set global config for just this rc call (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement passing filter config with _filter parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add fscache/clear and fscache/entries to control the fs cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Avoid +Inf value for speed in core/stats (albertony)
• Add a full set of stats to core/stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Allow fs= params to be a JSON blob (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rcd: Added systemd notification during the rclone rcd command. (Naveen Honest Raj)
• rmdirs: Make --rmdirs obey the filters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• version: Show build tags and type of executable (Ivan Andreev)
• Bug Fixes
• install.sh: make it fail on download errors (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix excessive retries missing --max-duration timeout (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix crash when --low-level-retries=0 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix failed token refresh on mounts created via the rc (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fshttp: Fix bandwidth limiting after bad merge (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lib/atexit
• Unregister interrupt handler once it has fired so users can interrupt again (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix occasional failure to unmount with CTRL-C (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix deadlock calling Finalise while Run is running (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lib/rest: Fix multipart uploads not stopping on context cancel (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Allow mounting to root directory on windows (albertony)
• Improved handling of relative paths on windows (albertony)
• Fix unicode issues with accented characters on macOS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Docs: document the new FileSecurity option in WinFsp 2021 (albertony)
• Docs: add note about volume path syntax on windows (albertony)
• Fix caching of old directories after renaming them (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update cgofuse to the latest version to bring in macfuse 4 fix (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• --vfs-used-is-size to report used space using recursive scan (tYYGH)
• Don’t set modification time if it was already correct (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix Create causing windows explorer to truncate files on CTRL-C CTRL-V (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix modtimes not updating when writing via cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix modtimes changing by fractional seconds after upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix modtime set if --vfs-cache-mode writes/full and no write (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Rename files in cache and cancel uploads on directory rename (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix directory renaming by renaming dirs cached in memory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Add flag --local-no-preallocate (David Sze)
• Make nounc an advanced option except on Windows (albertony)
• Don’t ignore preallocate disk full errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Add --fs-cache-expire-duration to control the fs cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Add option to not encrypt data (Vesnyx)
• Log hash ok on upload (albertony)
• Azure Blob
• Add container public access level support. (Manish Kumar)
• B2
• Fix HTML files downloaded via cloudflare (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Box
• Fix transfers getting stuck on token expiry after API change (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Chunker
• Partially implement no-rename transactions (Maxwell Calman)
• Drive
• Don’t stop server side copy if couldn’t read description (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Pass context on to drive SDK - to help with cancellation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Add polling for changes support (Robert Thomas)
• Make --timeout 0 work properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Raise priority of rate limited message to INFO to make it more noticeable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fichier
• Implement copy & move (buengese)
• Implement public link (buengese)
• FTP
• Implement Shutdown method (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Close idle connections after --ftp-idle-timeout (1m by default) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --timeout 0 work properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --ftp-close-timeout flag for use with awkward ftp servers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry connections and logins on 421 errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hdfs
• Fix permissions for when directory is created (Lucas Messenger)
• Onedrive
• Make --timeout 0 work properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix --s3-profile which wasn’t working (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Close idle connections after --sftp-idle-timeout (1m by default) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “file not found” errors for read once servers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix SetModTime stat failed: object not found with --sftp-set-modtime=false (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swift
• Update github.com/ncw/swift to v2.0.0 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement copying large objects (nguyenhuuluan434)
• Union
• Fix crash when using epff policy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix union attempting to update files on a read only file system (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Refactor to use fspath.SplitFs instead of fs.ParseRemote (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix initialisation broken in refactor (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Add support for sharepoint with NTLM authentication (Rauno Ots)
• Make sharepoint-ntlm docs more consistent (Alex Chen)
• Improve terminology in sharepoint-ntlm docs (Ivan Andreev)
• Disable HTTP/2 for NTLM authentication (georne)
• Fix sharepoint-ntlm error 401 for parallel actions (Ivan Andreev)
• Check that purged directory really exists (Ivan Andreev)
• Yandex
• Make --timeout 0 work properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Zoho
• Replace client id - you will need to rclone config reconnect after this (buengese)
• Add forgotten setupRegion() to NewFs - this finally fixes regions other than EU (buengese)
v1.54.1 - 2021-03-08
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix –bwlimit when up or down is off (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs
• Fix nesting of brackets and backticks in ftp docs (edwardxml)
• Fix broken link in sftp page (edwardxml)
• Fix typo in crypt.md (Romeo Kienzler)
• Changelog: Correct link to digitalis.io (Alex JOST)
• Replace #file-caching with #vfs-file-caching (Miron Veryanskiy)
• Convert bogus example link to code (edwardxml)
• Remove dead link from rc.md (edwardxml)
• rc: Sync,copy,move: document createEmptySrcDirs parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsjson: Fix unterminated JSON in the presence of errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Fix mount dropping on macOS by setting –daemon-timeout 10m (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Document simultaneous usage with the same cache shouldn’t be used (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Automatically raise upload cutoff to avoid spurious error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix failed to create file system with application key limited to a prefix (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Refer to Shared Drives instead of Team Drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Add scopes to oauth request and optionally “members.read” (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix failed to create file system with folder level permissions policy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix Wasabi HEAD requests returning stale data by using only 1 transport (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix shared_credentials_file auth (Dmitry Chepurovskiy)
• Add –s3-no-head to reducing costs docs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Union
• Fix mkdir at root with remote:/ (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Zoho
• Fix custom client id’s (buengese)
v1.54.0 - 2021-02-02
See commits
• New backends
• Compression remote (experimental) (buengese)
• Enterprise File Fabric (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This work was sponsored by Storage Made Easy
• HDFS (Hadoop Distributed File System) (Yury Stankevich)
• Zoho workdrive (buengese)
• New Features
• Deglobalise the config (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Global config now read from the context
• This will enable passing of global config via the rc
• This work was sponsored by Digitalis
• Add --bwlimit for upload and download (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Obey bwlimit in http Transport for better limiting
• Enhance systemd integration (Hekmon)
• log level identification, manual activation with flag, automatic systemd launch detection
• Don’t compile systemd log integration for non unix systems (Benjamin Gustin)
• Add a --download flag to md5sum/sha1sum/hashsum to force rclone to download and hash files locally
(lostheli)
• Add --progress-terminal-title to print ETA to terminal title (LaSombra)
• Make backend env vars show in help as the defaults for backend flags (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Raise minimum go version to go1.12 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• dedupe
• Add --by-hash to dedupe on content hash not file name (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --dedupe-mode list to just list dupes, changing nothing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add warning if used on a remote which can’t have duplicate names (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fs
• Add Shutdown optional method for backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
• When using --files-from check files concurrently (zhucan)
• Accumulate stats when using --dry-run (Ingo Weiss)
• Always show stats when using --dry-run or --interactive (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add support for flag --no-console on windows to hide the console window (albertony)
• genautocomplete: Add support to output to stdout (Ingo)
• ncdu
• Highlight read errors instead of aborting (Claudio Bantaloukas)
• Add sort by average size in directory (Adam Plánský)
• Add toggle option for average s3ize in directory - key `a' (Adam Plánský)
• Add empty folder flag into ncdu browser (Adam Plánský)
• Add ! (error) and . (unreadable) file flags to go with e (empty) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• obscure: Make rclone obscure - ignore newline at end of line (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations
• Add logs when need to upload files to set mod times (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Move and copy log name of the destination object in verbose (Adam Plánský)
• Add size if known to skipped items and JSON log (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Prefer actual listener address if using “:port” or “addr:0” only (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add listener for finished jobs (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• serve ftp: Add options to enable TLS (Deepak Sah)
• serve http/webdav: Redirect requests to the base url without the / (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve restic: Implement object cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• stats: Add counter for deleted directories (Nick Craig-Wood)
• sync: Only print “There was nothing to transfer” if no errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• webui
• Prompt user for updating webui if an update is available (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Fix plugins initialization (negative0)
• Bug Fixes
• fs
• Fix nil pointer on copy & move operations directly to remote (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Fix parsing of .. when joining remotes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• log: Fix enabling systemd logging when using --log-file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• check
• Make the error count match up in the log message (Nick Craig-Wood)
• move: Fix data loss when source and destination are the same object (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations
• Fix --cutoff-mode hard not cutting off immediately (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --immutable error message (Nick Craig-Wood)
• sync
• Fix --cutoff-mode soft & cautious so it doesn’t end the transfer early (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --immutable errors retrying many times (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Docs
• Many fixes and a rewrite of the filtering docs (edwardxml)
• Many spelling and grammar fixes (Josh Soref)
• Doc fixes for commands delete, purge, rmdir, rmdirs and mount (albertony)
• And thanks to these people for many doc fixes too numerous to list
• Ameer Dawood, Antoine GIRARD, Bob Bagwill, Christopher Stewart
• CokeMine, David, Dov Murik, Durval Menezes, Evan Harris, gtorelly
• Ilyess Bachiri, Janne Johansson, Kerry Su, Marcin Zelent,
• Martin Michlmayr, Milly, Sơn Trần-Nguyễn
• Mount
• Update systemd status with cache stats (Hekmon)
• Disable bazil/fuse based mount on macOS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make rclone mount actually run rclone cmount under macOS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement mknod to make NFS file creation work (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make sure we don’t call umount more than once (Nick Craig-Wood)
• More user friendly mounting as network drive on windows (albertony)
• Detect if uid or gid are set in same option string: -o uid=123,gid=456 (albertony)
• Don’t attempt to unmount if fs has been destroyed already (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Fix virtual entries causing deleted files to still appear (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “file already exists” error for stale cache files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix file leaks with --vfs-cache-mode full and --buffer-size 0 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix invalid cache path on windows when using :backend: as remote (albertony)
• Local
• Continue listing files/folders when a circular symlink is detected (Manish Gupta)
• New flag --local-zero-size-links to fix sync on some virtual filesystems (Riccardo Iaconelli)
• Azure Blob
• Add support for service principals (James Lim)
• Add support for managed identities (Brad Ackerman)
• Add examples for access tier (Bob Pusateri)
• Utilize the streaming capabilities from the SDK for multipart uploads (Denis Neuling)
• Fix setting of mime types (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix crash when listing outside a SAS URL’s root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Delete archive tier blobs before update if --azureblob-archive-tier-delete (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix crash on startup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix memory usage by upgrading the SDK to v0.13.0 and implementing a TransferManager (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Require go1.14+ to compile due to SDK changes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Make NewObject use less expensive API calls (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This will improve --files-from and restic serve in particular
• Fixed crash on an empty file name (lluuaapp)
• Box
• Fix NewObject for files that differ in case (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix finding directories in a case insensitive way (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Chunker
• Skip long local hashing, hash in-transit (fixes) (Ivan Andreev)
• Set Features ReadMimeType to false as Object.MimeType not supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix case-insensitive NewObject, test metadata detection (Ivan Andreev)
• Drive
• Implement rclone backend copyid command for copying files by ID (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added flag --drive-stop-on-download-limit to stop transfers when the download limit is exceeded
(Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Implement CleanUp workaround for team drives (buengese)
• Allow shortcut resolution and creation to be retried (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Log that emptying the trash can take some time (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add xdg office icons to xdg desktop files (Pau Rodriguez-Estivill)
• Dropbox
• Add support for viewing shared files and folders (buengese)
• Enable short lived access tokens (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement IDer on Objects so rclone lsf etc can read the IDs (buengese)
• Set Features ReadMimeType to false as Object.MimeType not supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make malformed_path errors from too long files not retriable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Test file name length before upload to fix upload loop (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fichier
• Set Features ReadMimeType to true as Object.MimeType is supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Add --ftp-disable-msld option to ignore MLSD for really old servers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --tpslimit apply (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Storage class object header support (Laurens Janssen)
• Fix anonymous client to use rclone’s HTTP client (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix Entry doesn't belong in directory "" (same as directory) - ignoring (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Googlephotos
• New flag --gphotos-include-archived to show archived photos as well (Nicolas Rueff)
• Jottacloud
• Don’t erroneously report support for writing mime types (buengese)
• Add support for Telia Cloud (Patrik Nordlén)
• Mailru
• Accept special folders eg camera-upload (Ivan Andreev)
• Avoid prehashing of large local files (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix uploads after recent changes on server (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix range requests after June 2020 changes on server (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix invalid timestamp on corrupted files (fixes) (Ivan Andreev)
• Remove deprecated protocol quirks (Ivan Andreev)
• Memory
• Fix setting of mime types (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Add support for China region operated by 21vianet and other regional suppliers (NyaMisty)
• Warn on gateway timeout errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fall back to normal copy if server-side copy unavailable (Alex Chen)
• Fix server-side copy completely disabled on OneDrive for Business (Cnly)
• (business only) workaround to replace existing file on server-side copy (Alex Chen)
• Enhance link creation with expiry, scope, type and password (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove % and # from the set of encoded characters (Alex Chen)
• Support addressing site by server-relative URL (kice)
• Opendrive
• Fix finding directories in a case insensitive way (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Pcloud
• Fix setting of mime types (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Premiumizeme
• Fix finding directories in a case insensitive way (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Qingstor
• Fix error propagation in CleanUp (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix rclone cleanup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Added --s3-disable-http2 to disable http/2 (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Complete SSE-C implementation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix hashes on small files with AWS:KMS and SSE-C (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add MD5 metadata to objects uploaded with SSE-AWS/SSE-C (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-no-head parameter to minimise transactions on upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update docs with a Reducing Costs section (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added error handling for error code 429 indicating too many requests (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Add requester pays option (kelv)
• Fix copy multipart with v2 auth failing with `SignatureDoesNotMatch' (Louis Koo)
• SFTP
• Allow cert based auth via optional pubkey (Stephen Harris)
• Allow user to optionally check server hosts key to add security (Stephen Harris)
• Defer asking for user passwords until the SSH connection succeeds (Stephen Harris)
• Remember entered password in AskPass mode (Stephen Harris)
• Implement Shutdown method (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement keyboard interactive authentication (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --tpslimit apply (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement --sftp-use-fstat for unusual SFTP servers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Sugarsync
• Fix NewObject for files that differ in case (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix finding directories in a case insensitive way (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swift
• Fix deletion of parts of Static Large Object (SLO) (Nguyễn Hữu Luân)
• Ensure partially uploaded large files are uploaded unless --swift-leave-parts-on-error (Nguyễn Hữu
Luân)
• Tardigrade
• Upgrade to uplink v1.4.1 (Caleb Case)
• WebDAV
• Updated docs to show streaming to nextcloud is working (Durval Menezes)
• Yandex
• Set Features WriteMimeType to false as Yandex ignores mime types (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.53.4 - 2021-01-20
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix data race in Transferred() (Maciej Zimnoch)
• build
• Stop tagged releases making a current beta (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Upgrade docker buildx action (Matteo Pietro Dazzi)
• Add -buildmode to cross-compile.go (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix docker build by upgrading ilteoood/docker_buildx (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Revert GitHub actions brew fix since this is now fixed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix brew install –cask syntax for macOS build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update nfpm syntax to fix build of .deb/.rpm packages (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix for Windows build errors (Ivan Andreev)
• fs: Parseduration: fixed tests to use UTC time (Ankur Gupta)
• fshttp: Prevent overlap of HTTP headers in logs (Nathan Collins)
• rc
• Fix core/command giving 500 internal error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add Copy method to rc.Params (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix 500 error when marshalling errors from core/command (Nick Craig-Wood)
• plugins: Create plugins files only if webui is enabled. (negative0)
• serve http: Fix serving files of unknown length (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve sftp: Fix authentication on one connection blocking others (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Add optional brew tag to throw an error when using mount in the binaries installed via Homebrew
(Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Add “.” and “..” to directories to match cmount and expectations (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Make cache dir absolute before using it to fix path too long errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Chunker
• Improve detection of incompatible metadata (Ivan Andreev)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix server side copy of large objects (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Fix token renewer to fix long uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix token refresh failed: is not a regular file error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Pcloud
• Only use SHA1 hashes in EU region (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Sharefile
• Undo Fix backend due to API swapping integers for strings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Fix Open Range requests to fix 4shared mount (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add “Depth: 0” to GET requests to fix bitrix (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.53.3 - 2020-11-19
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• random: Fix incorrect use of math/rand instead of crypto/rand CVE-2020-28924 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Passwords you have generated with rclone config may be insecure
• See issue #4783 for more details and a checking tool
• random: Seed math/rand in one place with crypto strong seed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Fix vfs/refresh calls with fs= parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Sharefile
• Fix backend due to API swapping integers for strings (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.53.2 - 2020-10-26
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• accounting
• Fix incorrect speed and transferTime in core/stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Stabilize display order of transfers on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations
• Fix use of –suffix without –backup-dir (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix spurious “–checksum is in use but the source and destination have no hashes in common” (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• build
• Work around GitHub actions brew problem (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Stop using set-env and set-path in the GitHub actions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• mount2: Fix the swapped UID / GID values (Russell Cattelan)
• VFS
• Detect and recover from a file being removed externally from the cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix a deadlock vulnerability in downloaders.Close (Leo Luan)
• Fix a race condition in retryFailedResets (Leo Luan)
• Fix missed concurrency control between some item operations and reset (Leo Luan)
• Add exponential backoff during ENOSPC retries (Leo Luan)
• Add a missed update of used cache space (Leo Luan)
• Fix –no-modtime to not attempt to set modtimes (as documented) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Fix sizes and syncing with –links option on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Chunker
• Disable ListR to fix missing files on GDrive (workaround) (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix upload over crypt (Ivan Andreev)
• Fichier
• Increase maximum file size from 100GB to 300GB (gyutw)
• Jottacloud
• Remove clientSecret from config when upgrading to token based authentication (buengese)
• Avoid double url escaping of device/mountpoint (albertony)
• Remove DirMove workaround as it’s not required anymore - also (buengese)
• Mailru
• Fix uploads after recent changes on server (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix range requests after june changes on server (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix invalid timestamp on corrupted files (fixes) (Ivan Andreev)
• Onedrive
• Fix disk usage for sharepoint (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Add missing regions for AWS (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Seafile
• Fix accessing libraries > 2GB on 32 bit systems (Muffin King)
• SFTP
• Always convert the checksum to lower case (buengese)
• Union
• Create root directories if none exist (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.53.1 - 2020-09-13
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Remove new line from end of –stats-one-line display (Nick Craig-Wood)
• check
• Add back missing –download flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix docs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs
• Note –log-file does append (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add full stops for consistency in rclone –help (edwardxml)
• Add Tencent COS to s3 provider list (wjielai)
• Updated mount command to reflect that it requires Go 1.13 or newer (Evan Harris)
• jottacloud: Mention that uploads from local disk will not need to cache files to disk for md5
calculation (albertony)
• Fix formatting of rc docs page (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Include vendor tar ball in release and fix startdev (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “Illegal instruction” error for ARMv6 builds (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix architecture name in ARMv7 build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Fix spurious error “vfs cache: failed to _ensure cache EOF” (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Log an ERROR if we fail to set the file to be sparse (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Log an ERROR if we fail to set the file to be sparse (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Re-adds special oauth help text (Tim Gallant)
• Opendrive
• Do not retry 400 errors (Evan Harris)
v1.53.0 - 2020-09-02
See commits
• New Features
• The VFS layer was heavily reworked for this release - see below for more details
• Interactive mode -i/–interactive for destructive operations (fishbullet)
• Add –bwlimit-file flag to limit speeds of individual file transfers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Transfers are sorted by start time in the stats and progress output (Max Sum)
• Make sure backends expand ~ and environment vars in file names they use (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add –refresh-times flag to set modtimes on hashless backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Remove vendor directory in favour of Go modules (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Build with go1.15.x by default (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drop macOS 386 build as it is no longer supported by go1.15 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add ARMv7 to the supported builds (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Enable rclone cmount on macOS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make rclone build with gccgo (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make rclone build with wasm (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Change beta numbering to be semver compatible (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add file properties and icon to Windows executable (albertony)
• Add experimental interface for integrating rclone into browsers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lib: Add file name compression (Klaus Post)
• rc
• Allow installation and use of plugins and test plugins with rclone-webui (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Add reverse proxy pluginsHandler for serving plugins (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Add mount/listmounts option for listing current mounts (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Add operations/uploadfile to upload a file through rc using encoding multipart/form-data (Chaitanya
Bankanhal)
• Add core/command to execute rclone terminal commands. (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• rclone check
• Add reporting of filenames for same/missing/changed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make check command obey --dry-run/-i/--interactive (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make check do --checkers files concurrently (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry downloads if they fail when using the --download flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make it show stats by default (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone obscure: Allow obscure command to accept password on STDIN (David Ibarra)
• rclone config
• Set RCLONE_CONFIG_DIR for use in config files and subprocesses (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Reject remote names starting with a dash. (jtagcat)
• rclone cryptcheck: Add reporting of filenames for same/missing/changed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone dedupe: Make it obey the --size-only flag for duplicate detection (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone link: Add --expire and --unlink flags (Roman Kredentser)
• rclone mkdir: Warn when using mkdir on remotes which can’t have empty directories (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone rc: Allow JSON parameters to simplify command line usage (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone serve ftp
• Don’t compile on < go1.13 after dependency update (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add error message if auth proxy fails (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use refactored goftp.io/server library for binary shrink (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone serve restic: Expose interfaces so that rclone can be used as a library from within restic
(Jack)
• rclone sync: Add --track-renames-strategy leaf (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone touch: Add ability to set nanosecond resolution times (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone tree: Remove -i shorthand for --noindent as it conflicts with -i/--interactive (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting
• Fix documentation for speed/speedAvg (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix elapsed time not show actual time since beginning (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Fix deadlock in stats printing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Fix file handle leak in GitHub release tool (Garrett Squire)
• rclone check: Fix successful retries with --download counting errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rclone dedupe: Fix logging to be easier to understand (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Warn macOS users that mount implementation is changing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• to test the new implementation use rclone cmount instead of rclone mount
• this is because the library rclone uses has dropped macOS support
• rc interface
• Add call for unmount all (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Make mount/mount remote control take vfsOpt option (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add mountOpt to mount/mount (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add VFS and Mount options to mount/listmounts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Catch panics in cgofuse initialization and turn into error messages (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Always supply stat information in Readdir (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add support for reading unknown length files using direct IO (Windows) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix On Windows don’t add -o uid/gid=-1 if user supplies -o uid/gid. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix macOS losing directory contents in cmount (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix volume name broken in recent refactor (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Implement partial reads for --vfs-cache-mode full (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --vfs-writeback option to delay writes back to cloud storage (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --vfs-read-ahead parameter for use with --vfs-cache-mode full (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Restart pending uploads on restart of the cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Support synchronous cache space recovery upon ENOSPC (Leo Luan)
• Allow ReadAt and WriteAt to run concurrently with themselves (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Change modtime of file before upload to current (Rob Calistri)
• Recommend --vfs-cache-modes writes on backends which can’t stream (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add an optional fs parameter to vfs rc methods (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix errors when using > 260 char files in the cache in Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix renaming of items while they are being uploaded (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix very high load caused by slow directory listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix renamed files not being uploaded with --vfs-cache-mode minimal (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix directory locking caused by slow directory listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix saving from chrome without --vfs-cache-mode writes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Add --local-no-updated to provide a consistent view of changing objects (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --local-no-set-modtime option to prevent modtime changes (tyhuber1)
• Fix race conditions updating and reading Object metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Make any created backends be cached to fix rc problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix dedupe on caches wrapping drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Add --crypt-server-side-across-configs flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make any created backends be cached to fix rc problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Alias
• Make any created backends be cached to fix rc problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Don’t compile on < go1.13 after dependency update (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Implement server-side copy for files > 5GB (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cancel in progress multipart uploads and copies on rclone exit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Note that b2’s encoding now allows but rclone’s hasn’t changed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix transfers when using download_url (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Box
• Implement rclone cleanup (buengese)
• Cancel in progress multipart uploads and copies on rclone exit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Allow authentication with access token (David)
• Chunker
• Make any created backends be cached to fix rc problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Add rclone backend drives to list shared drives (teamdrives) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement rclone backend untrash (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Work around drive bug which didn’t set modtime of copied docs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added --drive-starred-only to only show starred files (Jay McEntire)
• Deprecate --drive-alternate-export as it is no longer needed (themylogin)
• Fix duplication of Google docs on server-side copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “panic: send on closed channel” when recycling dir entries (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Add copyright detector info in limitations section in the docs (Alex Guerrero)
• Fix rclone link by removing expires parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fichier
• Detect Flood detected: IP Locked error and sleep for 30s (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Add explicit TLS support (Heiko Bornholdt)
• Add support for --dump bodies and --dump auth for debugging (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix interoperation with pure-ftpd (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add support for anonymous access (Kai Lüke)
• Jottacloud
• Bring back legacy authentication for use with whitelabel versions (buengese)
• Switch to new api root - also implement a very ugly workaround for the DirMove failures (buengese)
• Onedrive
• Rework cancel of multipart uploads on rclone exit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement rclone cleanup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --onedrive-no-versions flag to remove old versions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Pcloud
• Implement rclone link for public link creation (buengese)
• Qingstor
• Cancel in progress multipart uploads on rclone exit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Preserve metadata when doing multipart copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cancel in progress multipart uploads and copies on rclone exit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add rclone link for public link sharing (Roman Kredentser)
• Add rclone backend restore command to restore objects from GLACIER (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add rclone cleanup and rclone backend cleanup to clean unfinished multipart uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add rclone backend list-multipart-uploads to list unfinished multipart uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-max-upload-parts support (Kamil Trzciński)
• Add --s3-no-check-bucket for minimising rclone transactions and perms (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-profile and --s3-shared-credentials-file options (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use regional s3 us-east-1 endpoint (David)
• Add Scaleway provider (Vincent Feltz)
• Update IBM COS endpoints (Egor Margineanu)
• Reduce the default --s3-copy-cutoff to < 5GB for Backblaze S3 compatibility (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix detection of bucket existing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Use the absolute path instead of the relative path for listing for improved compatibility (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• Add --sftp-subsystem and --sftp-server-command options (aus)
• Swift
• Fix dangling large objects breaking the listing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix purge not deleting directory markers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix update multipart object removing all of its own parts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix missing hash from object returned from upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Tardigrade
• Upgrade to uplink v1.2.0 (Kaloyan Raev)
• Union
• Fix writing with the all policy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Fix directory creation with 4shared (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.52.3 - 2020-08-07
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• docs
• Disable smart typography (e.g. en-dash) in MANUAL.* and man page (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update install.md to reflect minimum Go version (Evan Harris)
• Update install from source instructions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• make_manual: Support SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH (Morten Linderud)
• log: Fix –use-json-log going to stderr not –log-file on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve dlna: Fix file list on Samsung Series 6+ TVs (Matteo Pietro Dazzi)
• sync: Fix deadlock with –track-renames-strategy modtime (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Fix moveto/copyto remote:file remote:file2 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Stop using root_folder_id as a cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make dangling shortcuts appear in listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drop “Disabling ListR” messages down to debug (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Workaround and policy for Google Drive API (Dmitry Ustalov)
• FTP
• Add note to docs about home vs root directory selection (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Fix reverting to Copy when Move would have worked (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Avoid comma rendered in URL in onedrive.md (Kevin)
• Pcloud
• Fix oauth on European region “eapi.pcloud.com” (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix bucket Region auto detection when Region unset in config (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.52.2 - 2020-06-24
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• build
• Fix docker release build action (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix custom timezone in Docker image (NoLooseEnds)
• check: Fix misleading message which printed errors instead of differences (Nick Craig-Wood)
• errors: Add WSAECONNREFUSED and more to the list of retriable Windows errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rcd: Fix incorrect prometheus metrics (Gary Kim)
• serve restic: Fix flags so they use environment variables (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve webdav: Fix flags so they use environment variables (Nick Craig-Wood)
• sync: Fix –track-renames-strategy modtime (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Fix not being able to delete a directory with a trashed shortcut (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix creating a directory inside a shortcut (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix –drive-impersonate with cached root_folder_id (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Fix SSH key PEM loading (Zac Rubin)
• Swift
• Speed up deletes by not retrying segment container deletes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Tardigrade
• Upgrade to uplink v1.1.1 (Caleb Case)
• WebDAV
• Fix free/used display for rclone about/df for certain backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.52.1 - 2020-06-10
See commits
• Bug Fixes
• lib/file: Fix SetSparse on Windows 7 which fixes downloads of files > 250MB (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Update go.mod to go1.14 to enable -mod=vendor build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove quicktest from Dockerfile (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Build Docker images with GitHub actions (Matteo Pietro Dazzi)
• Update Docker build workflows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Set user_allow_other in /etc/fuse.conf in the Docker image (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix xgo build after go1.14 go.mod update (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs
• Add link to source and modified time to footer of every page (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove manually set dates and use git dates instead (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Minor tense, punctuation, brevity and positivity changes for the home page (edwardxml)
• Remove leading slash in page reference in footer when present (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Note commands which need obscured input in the docs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• obscure: Write more help as we are referencing it elsewhere (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Fix OS vs Unix path confusion - fixes ChangeNotify on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Fix missing items when listing using –fast-list / ListR (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Putio
• Fix panic on Object.Open (Cenk Alti)
• S3
• Fix upload of single files into buckets without create permission (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix –header-upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Tardigrade
• Fix listing bug by upgrading to v1.0.7
• Set UserAgent to rclone (Caleb Case)
v1.52.0 - 2020-05-27
Special thanks to Martin Michlmayr for proof reading and correcting all the docs and Edward Barker for
helping re-write the front page.
See commits
• New backends
• Tardigrade backend for use with storj.io (Caleb Case)
• Union re-write to have multiple writable remotes (Max Sum)
• Seafile for Seafile server (Fred @creativeprojects)
• New commands
• backend: command for backend-specific commands (see backends) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• cachestats: Deprecate in favour of rclone backend stats cache: (Nick Craig-Wood)
• dbhashsum: Deprecate in favour of rclone hashsum DropboxHash (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New Features
• Add --header-download and --header-upload flags for setting HTTP headers when uploading/downloading
(Tim Gallant)
• Add --header flag to add HTTP headers to every HTTP transaction (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --check-first to do all checking before starting transfers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --track-renames-strategy for configurable matching criteria for --track-renames (Bernd
Schoolmann)
• Add --cutoff-mode hard,soft,cautious (Shing Kit Chan & Franklyn Tackitt)
• Filter flags (e.g. --files-from -) can read from stdin (fishbullet)
• Add --error-on-no-transfer option (Jon Fautley)
• Implement --order-by xxx,mixed for copying some small and some big files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Allow --max-backlog to be negative meaning as large as possible (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added --no-unicode-normalization flag to allow Unicode filenames to remain unique (Ben Zenker)
• Allow --min-age/--max-age to take a date as well as a duration (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add rename statistics for file and directory renames (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add statistics output to JSON log (reddi)
• Make stats be printed on non-zero exit code (Nick Craig-Wood)
• When running --password-command allow use of stdin (Sébastien Gross)
• Stop empty strings being a valid remote path (Nick Craig-Wood)
• accounting: support WriterTo for less memory copying (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Update to use go1.14 for the build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add -trimpath to release build for reproduceable builds (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove GOOS and GOARCH from Dockerfile (Brandon Philips)
• config
• Fsync the config file after writing to save more reliably (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --obscure and --no-obscure flags to config create/update (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make config show take remote: as well as remote (Nick Craig-Wood)
• copyurl: Add --no-clobber flag (Denis)
• delete: Added --rmdirs flag to delete directories as well (Kush)
• filter: Added --files-from-raw flag (Ankur Gupta)
• genautocomplete: Add support for fish shell (Matan Rosenberg)
• log: Add support for syslog LOCAL facilities (Patryk Jakuszew)
• lsjson: Add --hash-type parameter and use it in lsf to speed up hashing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Add -o/--opt and -a/--arg for more structured input (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement backend/command for running backend-specific commands remotely (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add mount/mount command for starting rclone mount via the API (Chaitanya)
• rcd: Add Prometheus metrics support (Gary Kim)
• serve http
• Added a --template flag for user defined markup (calistri)
• Add Last-Modified headers to files and directories (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve sftp: Add support for multiple host keys by repeating --key flag (Maxime Suret)
• touch: Add --localtime flag to make --timestamp localtime not UTC (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting
• Restore “Max number of stats groups reached” log line (Michał Matczuk)
• Correct exitcode on Transfer Limit Exceeded flag. (Anuar Serdaliyev)
• Reset bytes read during copy retry (Ankur Gupta)
• Fix race clearing stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• copy: Only create empty directories when they don’t exist on the remote (Ishuah Kariuki)
• dedupe: Stop dedupe deleting files with identical IDs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• oauth
• Use custom http client so that --no-check-certificate is honored by oauth token fetch (Mark Spieth)
• Replace deprecated oauth2.NoContext (Lars Lehtonen)
• operations
• Fix setting the timestamp on Windows for multithread copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make rcat obey --ignore-checksum (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --max-transfer more accurate (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Fix dropped error (Lars Lehtonen)
• Fix misplaced http server config (Xiaoxing Ye)
• Disable duplicate log (ElonH)
• serve dlna
• Cds: don’t specify childCount at all when unknown (Dan Walters)
• Cds: use modification time as date in dlna metadata (Dan Walters)
• serve restic: Fix tests after restic project removed vendoring (Nick Craig-Wood)
• sync
• Fix incorrect “nothing to transfer” message using --delete-before (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Only create empty directories when they don’t exist on the remote (Ishuah Kariuki)
• Mount
• Add --async-read flag to disable asynchronous reads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Ignore --allow-root flag with a warning as it has been removed upstream (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Warn if --allow-non-empty used on Windows and clarify docs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Constrain to go1.13 or above otherwise bazil.org/fuse fails to compile (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix fail because of too long volume name (evileye)
• Report 1PB free for unknown disk sizes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Map more rclone errors into file systems errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix disappearing cwd problem (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use ReaddirPlus on Windows to improve directory listing performance (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Send a hint as to whether the filesystem is case insensitive or not (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add rc command mount/types (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Change maximum leaf name length to 1024 bytes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Add --vfs-read-wait and --vfs-write-wait flags to control time waiting for a sequential read/write
(Nick Craig-Wood)
• Change default --vfs-read-wait to 20ms (it was 5ms and not configurable) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make df output more consistent on a rclone mount. (Yves G)
• Report 1PB free for unknown disk sizes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix race condition caused by unlocked reading of Dir.path (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make File lock and Dir lock not overlap to avoid deadlock (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement lock ordering between File and Dir to eliminate deadlocks (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Factor the vfs cache into its own package (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Pin the Fs in use in the Fs cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add SetSys() methods to Node to allow caching stuff on a node (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Ignore file not found errors from Hash in Read.Release (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix hang in read wait code (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Speed up multi thread downloads by using sparse files on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement --local-no-sparse flag for disabling sparse files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement rclone backend noop for testing purposes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “file not found” errors on post transfer Hash calculation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Implement rclone backend stats command (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix Server Side Copy with Temp Upload (Brandon McNama)
• Remove Unused Functions (Lars Lehtonen)
• Disable race tests until bbolt is fixed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Move methods used for testing into test file (greatroar)
• Add Pin and Unpin and canonicalised lookup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use proper import path go.etcd.io/bbolt (Robert-André Mauchin)
• Crypt
• Calculate hashes for uploads from local disk (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This allows crypted Jottacloud uploads without using local disk
• This means crypted s3/b2 uploads will now have hashes
• Added rclone backend decode/encode commands to replicate functionality of cryptdecode (Anagh Kumar
Baranwal)
• Get rid of the unused Cipher interface as it obfuscated the code (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Implement streaming of unknown sized files so rcat is now supported (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement memory pooling to control memory use (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --azureblob-disable-checksum flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry InvalidBlobOrBlock error as it may indicate block concurrency problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove unused Object.parseTimeString() (Lars Lehtonen)
• Fix permission error on SAS URL limited to container (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Ignore directory markers at the root also (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Force the case of the SHA1 to lowercase (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove unused largeUpload.clearUploadURL() (Lars Lehtonen)
• Box
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Implement About to read size used (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add token renew function for jwt auth (David Bramwell)
• Added support for interchangeable root folder for Box backend (Sunil Patra)
• Remove unnecessary iat from jws claims (David)
• Drive
• Follow shortcuts by default, skip with --drive-skip-shortcuts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement rclone backend shortcut command for creating shortcuts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added rclone backend command to change service_account_file and chunk_size (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Fix missing files when using --fast-list and --drive-shared-with-me (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix duplicate items when using --drive-shared-with-me (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Extend --drive-stop-on-upload-limit to respond to teamDriveFileLimitExceeded. (harry)
• Don’t delete files with multiple parents to avoid data loss (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Server side copy docs use default description if empty (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Make error insufficient space to be fatal (harry)
• Add info about required redirect url (Elan Ruusamäe)
• Fichier
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Implement custom pacer to deal with the new rate limiting (buengese)
• FTP
• Fix lockup when using concurrency limit on failed connections (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix lockup on failed upload when using concurrency limit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix lockup on Close failures when using concurrency limit (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Work around pureftp sending spurious 150 messages (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add ARCHIVE storage class to help (Adam Stroud)
• Ignore directory markers at the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Googlephotos
• Make the start year configurable (Daven)
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Create feature/favorites directory (Brandon Philips)
• Fix “concurrent map write” error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t put an image in error message (Nick Craig-Wood)
• HTTP
• Improved directory listing with new template from Caddy project (calisro)
• Jottacloud
• Implement --jottacloud-trashed-only (buengese)
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Use RawURLEncoding when decoding base64 encoded login token (buengese)
• Implement cleanup (buengese)
• Update docs regarding cleanup, removed remains from old auth, and added warning about special
mountpoints. (albertony)
• Mailru
• Describe 2FA requirements (valery1707)
• Onedrive
• Implement --onedrive-server-side-across-configs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Fix occasional 416 errors on multipart uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added maximum chunk size limit warning in the docs (Harry)
• Fix missing drive on config (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make error quotaLimitReached to be fatal (harry)
• Opendrive
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Pcloud
• Added support for interchangeable root folder for pCloud backend (Sunil Patra)
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Fix initial config “Auth state doesn’t match” message (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Premiumizeme
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Prune unused functions (Lars Lehtonen)
• Putio
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make downloading files use the rclone http Client (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix parsing of remotes with leading and trailing / (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Qingstor
• Make rclone cleanup remove pending multipart uploads older than 24h (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Try harder to cancel failed multipart uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Prune multiUploader.list() (Lars Lehtonen)
• Lint fix (Lars Lehtonen)
• S3
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Use memory pool for buffer allocations (Maciej Zimnoch)
• Add SSE-C support for AWS, Ceph, and MinIO (Jack Anderson)
• Fail fast multipart upload (Michał Matczuk)
• Report errors on bucket creation (mkdir) correctly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Specify that Minio supports URL encoding in listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added 500 as retryErrorCode (Michał Matczuk)
• Use --low-level-retries as the number of SDK retries (Aleksandar Janković)
• Fix multipart abort context (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Replace deprecated session.New() with session.NewSession() (Lars Lehtonen)
• Use the provided size parameter when allocating a new memory pool (Joachim Brandon LeBlanc)
• Use rclone’s low level retries instead of AWS SDK to fix listing retries (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Ignore directory markers at the root also (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use single memory pool (Michał Matczuk)
• Do not resize buf on put to memBuf (Michał Matczuk)
• Improve docs for --s3-disable-checksum (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t leak memory or tokens in edge cases for multipart upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Seafile
• Implement 2FA (Fred)
• SFTP
• Added --sftp-pem-key to support inline key files (calisro)
• Fix post transfer copies failing with 0 size when using set_modtime=false (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Sharefile
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Sugarsync
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Swift
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix cosmetic issue in error message (Martin Michlmayr)
• Union
• Implement multiple writable remotes (Max Sum)
• Fix server-side copy (Max Sum)
• Implement ListR (Max Sum)
• Enable ListR when upstreams contain local (Max Sum)
• WebDAV
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
• Fix X-OC-Mtime header for Transip compatibility (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Report full and consistent usage with about (Yves G)
• Yandex
• Add support for --header-upload and --header-download (Tim Gallant)
v1.51.0 - 2020-02-01
• New backends
• Memory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Sugarsync (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New Features
• Adjust all backends to have --backend-encoding parameter (Nick Craig-Wood)
• this enables the encoding for special characters to be adjusted or disabled
• Add --max-duration flag to control the maximum duration of a transfer session (boosh)
• Add --expect-continue-timeout flag, default 1s (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --no-check-dest flag for copying without testing the destination (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement --order-by flag to order transfers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• accounting
• Don’t show entries in both transferring and checking (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add option to delete stats (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• build
• Compress the test builds with gzip (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement a framework for starting test servers during tests (Nick Craig-Wood)
• cmd: Always print elapsed time to tenth place seconds in progress (Gary Kim)
• config
• Add --password-command to allow dynamic config password (Damon Permezel)
• Give config questions default values (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Check a remote exists when creating a new one (Nick Craig-Wood)
• copyurl: Add --stdout flag to write to stdout (Nick Craig-Wood)
• dedupe: Implement keep smallest too (Nick Craig-Wood)
• hashsum: Add flag --base64 flag (landall)
• lsf: Speed up on s3/swift/etc by not reading mimetype by default (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsjson: Add --no-mimetype flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc: Add methods to turn on blocking and mutex profiling (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rcd
• Adding group parameter to stats (Chaitanya)
• Move webgui apart; option to disable browser (Xiaoxing Ye)
• serve sftp: Add support for public key with auth proxy (Paul Tinsley)
• stats: Show deletes in stats and hide zero stats (anuar45)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting
• Fix error counter counting multiple times (Ankur Gupta)
• Fix error count shown as checks (Cnly)
• Clear finished transfer in stats-reset (Maciej Zimnoch)
• Added StatsInfo locking in statsGroups sum function (Michał Matczuk)
• asyncreader: Fix EOF error (buengese)
• check: Fix --one-way recursing more directories than it needs to (Nick Craig-Wood)
• chunkedreader: Disable hash calculation for first segment (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config
• Do not open browser on headless on drive/gcs/google photos (Xiaoxing Ye)
• SetValueAndSave ignore error if config section does not exist yet (buengese)
• cmd: Fix completion with an encrypted config (Danil Semelenov)
• dbhashsum: Stop it returning UNSUPPORTED on dropbox (Nick Craig-Wood)
• dedupe: Add missing modes to help string (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations
• Fix dedupe continuing on errors like insufficientFilePersimmon (SezalAgrawal)
• Clear accounting before low level retry (Maciej Zimnoch)
• Write debug message when hashes could not be checked (Ole Schütt)
• Move interface assertion to tests to remove pflag dependency (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make NewOverrideObjectInfo public and factor uses (Nick Craig-Wood)
• proxy: Replace use of bcrypt with sha256 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• vendor
• Update bazil.org/fuse to fix FreeBSD 12.1 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update github.com/t3rm1n4l/go-mega to fix mega “illegal base64 data at input byte 22” (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• Update termbox-go to fix ncdu command on FreeBSD (Kuang-che Wu)
• Update t3rm1n4l/go-mega - fixes mega: couldn’t login: crypto/aes: invalid key size 0 (Nick
Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Enable async reads for a 20% speedup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Replace use of WriteAt with Write for cache mode >= writes and O_APPEND (Brett Dutro)
• Make sure we call unmount when exiting (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t build on go1.10 as bazil/fuse no longer supports it (Nick Craig-Wood)
• When setting dates discard out of range dates (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Add a newly created file straight into the directory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Only calculate one hash for reads for a speedup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make ReadAt for non cached files work better with non-sequential reads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix edge cases when reading ModTime from file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make sure existing files opened for write show correct size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t cache the path in RW file objects to fix renaming (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix rename of open files when using the VFS cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• When renaming files in the cache, rename the cache item in memory too (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix open file renaming on drive when using --vfs-cache-mode writes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix incorrect modtime for mv into mount with --vfs-cache-modes writes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• On rename, rename in cache too if the file exists (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Local
• Make source file being updated errors be NoLowLevelRetry errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix update of hidden files on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Follow move of upstream library github.com/coreos/bbolt github.com/etcd-io/bbolt (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix fatal error: concurrent map writes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Reorder the filename encryption options (Thomas Eales)
• Correctly handle trailing dot (buengese)
• Chunker
• Reduce length of temporary suffix (Ivan Andreev)
• Drive
• Add --drive-stop-on-upload-limit flag to stop syncs when upload limit reached (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --drive-use-shared-date to use date file was shared instead of modified date (Garry McNulty)
• Make sure invalid auth for teamdrives always reports an error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --fast-list when using appDataFolder (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use multipart resumable uploads for streaming and uploads in mount (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Log an ERROR if an incomplete search is returned (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hide dangerous config from the configurator (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Treat insufficient_space errors as non retriable errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Use new auth method used by official client (buengese)
• Add URL to generate Login Token to config wizard (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add support whitelabel versions (buengese)
• Koofr
• Use rclone HTTP client. (jaKa)
• Onedrive
• Add Sites.Read.All permission (Benjamin Richter)
• Add support “Retry-After” header (Motonori IWAMURO)
• Opendrive
• Implement --opendrive-chunk-size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Re-implement multipart upload to fix memory issues (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-copy-cutoff for size to switch to multipart copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add new region Asia Pacific (Hong Kong) (Outvi V)
• Reduce memory usage streaming files by reducing max stream upload size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-list-chunk option for bucket listing (Thomas Kriechbaumer)
• Force path style bucket access to off for AWS deprecation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use AWS web identity role provider if available (Tennix)
• Add StackPath Object Storage Support (Dave Koston)
• Fix ExpiryWindow value (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Fix DisableChecksum condition (Aleksandar Janković)
• Fix URL decoding of NextMarker (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Add --sftp-skip-links to skip symlinks and non regular files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry Creation of Connection (Sebastian Brandt)
• Fix “failed to parse private key file: ssh: not an encrypted key” error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Open files for update write only to fix AWS SFTP interop (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swift
• Reserve segments of dynamic large object when delete objects in container what was enabled
versioning. (Nguyễn Hữu Luân)
• Fix parsing of X-Object-Manifest (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update OVH API endpoint (unbelauscht)
• WebDAV
• Make nextcloud only upload SHA1 checksums (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix case of “Bearer” in Authorization: header to agree with RFC (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add Referer header to fix problems with WAFs (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.50.2 - 2019-11-19
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix memory leak on retries operations (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Fix listing of the root directory with drive.files scope (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix –drive-root-folder-id with team/shared drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.50.1 - 2019-11-02
• Bug Fixes
• hash: Fix accidentally changed hash names for DropboxHash and CRC-32 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fshttp: Fix error reporting on tpslimit token bucket errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• fshttp: Don’t print token bucket errors on context cancelled (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Fix listings of . on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Fix DirMove/Move after Onedrive change (Xiaoxing Ye)
v1.50.0 - 2019-10-26
• New backends
• Citrix Sharefile (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Chunker - an overlay backend to split files into smaller parts (Ivan Andreev)
• Mail.ru Cloud (Ivan Andreev)
• New Features
• encodings (Fabian Möller & Nick Craig-Wood)
• All backends now use file name encoding to ensure any file name can be written to any backend.
• See the restricted file name docs for more info and the local backend docs.
• Some file names may look different in rclone if you are using any control characters in names or
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Halfwidth_and_Fullwidth_Forms_(Unicode_block) unicode FULLWIDTH sym‐
bols.
• build
• Update to use go1.13 for the build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drop support for go1.9 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Build rclone with GitHub actions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Convert python scripts to python3 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swap Azure/go-ansiterm for mattn/go-colorable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dockerfile fixes (Matei David)
• Add https://github.com/rclone/rclone/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md#writing-a-plugin plugin
support for backends and commands (Richard Patel)
• config
• Use alternating Red/Green in config to make more obvious (Nick Craig-Wood)
• contrib
• Add sample DLNA server Docker Compose manifest. (pataquets)
• Add sample WebDAV server Docker Compose manifest. (pataquets)
• copyurl
• Add --auto-filename flag for using file name from URL in destination path (Denis)
• serve dlna:
• Many compatibility improvements (Dan Walters)
• Support for external srt subtitles (Dan Walters)
• rc
• Added command core/quit (Saksham Khanna)
• Bug Fixes
• sync
• Make --update/-u not transfer files that haven’t changed (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Free objects after they come out of the transfer pipe to save memory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --files-from without --no-traverse doing a recursive scan (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations
• Fix accounting for server-side copies (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Display `All duplicates removed' only if dedupe successful (Sezal Agrawal)
• Display `Deleted X extra copies' only if dedupe successful (Sezal Agrawal)
• accounting
• Only allow up to 100 completed transfers in the accounting list to save memory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cull the old time ranges when possible to save memory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix panic due to server-side copy fallback (Ivan Andreev)
• Fix memory leak noticeable for transfers of large numbers of objects (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix total duration calculation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• cmd
• Fix environment variables not setting command line flags (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make autocomplete compatible with bash’s posix mode for macOS (Danil Semelenov)
• Make --progress work in git bash on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix `compopt: command not found' on autocomplete on macOS (Danil Semelenov)
• config
• Fix setting of non top level flags from environment variables (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Check config names more carefully and report errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove error: can’t use --size-only and --ignore-size together. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• filter: Prevent mixing options when --files-from is in use (Michele Caci)
• serve sftp: Fix crash on unsupported operations (e.g. Readlink) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Allow files of unknown size to be read properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Skip tests on <= 2 CPUs to avoid lockup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix panic on File.Open (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix “mount_fusefs: -o timeout=: option not supported” on FreeBSD (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t pass huge filenames (>4k) to FUSE as it can’t cope (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Add flag --vfs-case-insensitive for windows/macOS mounts (Ivan Andreev)
• Make objects of unknown size readable through the VFS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Move writeback of dirty data out of close() method into its own method (FlushWrites) and remove
close() call from Flush() (Brett Dutro)
• Stop empty dirs disappearing when renamed on bucket-based remotes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Stop change notify polling clearing so much of the directory cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Disable logging to the Windows event log (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Remove unverified: prefix on sha1 to improve interop (e.g. with CyberDuck) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Box
• Add options to get access token via JWT auth (David)
• Drive
• Disable HTTP/2 by default to work around INTERNAL_ERROR problems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make sure that drive root ID is always canonical (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --drive-shared-with-me from the root with lsand --fast-list (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix ChangeNotify polling for shared drives (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix change notify polling when using appDataFolder (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Make disallowed filenames errors not retry (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix nil pointer exception on restricted files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fichier
• Fix accessing files > 2GB on 32 bit systems (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Allow disabling EPSV mode (Jon Fautley)
• HTTP
• HEAD directory entries in parallel to speedup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --http-no-head to stop rclone doing HEAD in listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Putio
• Add ability to resume uploads (Cenk Alti)
• S3
• Fix signature v2_auth headers (Anthony Rusdi)
• Fix encoding for control characters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Only ask for URL encoded directory listings if we need them on Ceph (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add option for multipart failure behaviour (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Support for multipart copy (庄天翼)
• Fix nil pointer reference if no metadata returned for object (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Fix --sftp-ask-password trying to contact the ssh agent (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix hashes of files with backslashes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Include more ciphers with --sftp-use-insecure-cipher (Carlos Ferreyra)
• WebDAV
• Parse and return Sharepoint error response (Henning Surmeier)
v1.49.5 - 2019-10-05
• Bug Fixes
• Revert back to go1.12.x for the v1.49.x builds as go1.13.x was causing issues (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix rpm packages by using master builds of nfpm (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix macOS build after brew changes (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.49.4 - 2019-09-29
• Bug Fixes
• cmd/rcd: Address ZipSlip vulnerability (Richard Patel)
• accounting: Fix file handle leak on errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• oauthutil: Fix security problem when running with two users on the same machine (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Fix listing of an empty root returning: error dir not found (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix SetModTime on GLACIER/ARCHIVE objects and implement set/get tier (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.49.3 - 2019-09-15
• Bug Fixes
• accounting
• Fix total duration calculation (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Fix “file already closed” on transfer retries (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.49.2 - 2019-09-08
• New Features
• build: Add Docker workflow support (Alfonso Montero)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix locking in Transfer to avoid deadlock with --progress (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs: Fix template argument for mktemp in install.sh (Cnly)
• operations: Fix -u/--update with google photos / files of unknown size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc: Fix docs for config/create /update /password (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix need for elevated permissions on SetModTime (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.49.1 - 2019-08-28
• Bug Fixes
• config: Fix generated passwords being stored as empty password (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rcd: Added missing parameter for web-gui info logs. (Chaitanya)
• Googlephotos
• Fix crash on error response (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Fix crash on error response (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.49.0 - 2019-08-26
• New backends
• 1fichier (Laura Hausmann)
• Google Photos (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Putio (Cenk Alti)
• premiumize.me (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New Features
• Experimental web GUI (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Implement --compare-dest & --copy-dest (yparitcher)
• Implement --suffix without --backup-dir for backup to current dir (yparitcher)
• config reconnect to re-login (re-run the oauth login) for the backend. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config userinfo to discover which user you are logged in as. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config disconnect to disconnect you (log out) from the backend. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --use-json-log for JSON logging (justinalin)
• Add context propagation to rclone (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Reworking internal statistics interfaces so they work with rc jobs (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Add Higher units for ETA (AbelThar)
• Update rclone logos to new design (Andreas Chlupka)
• hash: Add CRC-32 support (Cenk Alti)
• help showbackend: Fixed advanced option category when there are no standard options (buengese)
• ncdu: Display/Copy to Clipboard Current Path (Gary Kim)
• operations:
• Run hashing operations in parallel (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t calculate checksums when using --ignore-checksum (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Check transfer hashes when using --size-only mode (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Disable multi thread copy for local to local copies (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Debug successful hashes as well as failures (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Add ability to stop async jobs (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• Return current settings if core/bwlimit called without parameters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Rclone-WebUI integration with rclone (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Added command line parameter to control the cross origin resource sharing (CORS) in the rcd.
(Security Improvement) (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Add anchor tags to the docs so links are consistent (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove _async key from input parameters after parsing so later operations won’t get confused
(buengese)
• Add call to clear stats (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• rcd
• Auto-login for web-gui (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• Implement --baseurl for rcd and web-gui (Chaitanya Bankanhal)
• serve dlna
• Only select interfaces which can multicast for SSDP (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add more builtin mime types to cover standard audio/video (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix missing mime types on Android causing missing videos (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve ftp
• Refactor to bring into line with other serve commands (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement --auth-proxy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve http: Implement --baseurl (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve restic: Implement --baseurl (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve sftp
• Implement auth proxy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix detection of whether server is authorized (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve webdav
• Implement --baseurl (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Support --auth-proxy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• Make “bad record MAC” a retriable error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• copyurl: Fix copying files that return HTTP errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• march: Fix checking sub-directories when using --no-traverse (buengese)
• rc
• Fix unmarshalable http.AuthFn in options and put in test for marshalability (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Move job expire flags to rc to fix initialization problem (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --loopback with rc/list and others (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rcat: Fix slowdown on systems with multiple hashes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rcd: Fix permissions problems on cache directory with web gui download (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Default --daemon-timeout to 15 minutes on macOS and FreeBSD (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update docs to show mounting from root OK for bucket-based (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove nonseekable flag from write files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Make write without cache more efficient (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --vfs-cache-mode minimal and writes ignoring cached files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Add --local-case-sensitive and --local-case-insensitive (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Avoid polluting page cache when uploading local files to remote backends (Michał Matczuk)
• Don’t calculate any hashes by default (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fadvise run syscall on a dedicated go routine (Michał Matczuk)
• Azure Blob
• Azure Storage Emulator support (Sandeep)
• Updated config help details to remove connection string references (Sandeep)
• Make all operations work from the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Implement link sharing (yparitcher)
• Enable server-side copy to copy between buckets (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make all operations work from the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Fix server-side copy of big files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update API for teamdrive use (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add error for purge with --drive-trashed-only (ginvine)
• Fichier
• Make FolderID int and adjust related code (buengese)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Reduce oauth scope requested as suggested by Google (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make all operations work from the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• HTTP
• Add --http-headers flag for setting arbitrary headers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Use new api for retrieving internal username (buengese)
• Refactor configuration and minor cleanup (buengese)
• Koofr
• Support setting modification times on Koofr backend. (jaKa)
• Opendrive
• Refactor to use existing lib/rest facilities for uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Qingstor
• Upgrade to v3 SDK and fix listing loop (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make all operations work from the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Add INTELLIGENT_TIERING storage class (Matti Niemenmaa)
• Make all operations work from the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Add missing interface check and fix About (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Completely ignore all modtime checks if SetModTime=false (Jon Fautley)
• Support md5/sha1 with rsync.net (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Save the md5/sha1 command in use to the config file for efficiency (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Opt-in support for diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256 diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 (Yi FU)
• Swift
• Use FixRangeOption to fix 0 length files via the VFS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix upload when using no_chunk to return the correct size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make all operations work from the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix segments leak during failed large file uploads. (nguyenhuuluan434)
• WebDAV
• Add --webdav-bearer-token-command (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Refresh token when it expires with --webdav-bearer-token-command (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add docs for using bearer_token_command with oidc-agent (Paul Millar)
v1.48.0 - 2019-06-15
• New commands
• serve sftp: Serve an rclone remote over SFTP (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New Features
• Multi threaded downloads to local storage (Nick Craig-Wood)
• controlled with --multi-thread-cutoff and --multi-thread-streams
• Use rclone.conf from rclone executable directory to enable portable use (albertony)
• Allow sync of a file and a directory with the same name (forgems)
• this is common on bucket-based remotes, e.g. s3, gcs
• Add --ignore-case-sync for forced case insensitivity (garry415)
• Implement --stats-one-line-date and --stats-one-line-date-format (Peter Berbec)
• Log an ERROR for all commands which exit with non-zero status (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use go-homedir to read the home directory more reliably (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Enable creating encrypted config through external script invocation (Wojciech Smigielski)
• build: Drop support for go1.8 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config: Make config create/update encrypt passwords where necessary (Nick Craig-Wood)
• copyurl: Honor --no-check-certificate (Stefan Breunig)
• install: Linux skip man pages if no mandb (didil)
• lsf: Support showing the Tier of the object (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsjson
• Added EncryptedPath to output (calisro)
• Support showing the Tier of the object (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add IsBucket field for bucket-based remote listing of the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Add --loopback flag to run commands directly without a server (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add operations/fsinfo: Return information about the remote (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Skip auth for OPTIONS request (Nick Craig-Wood)
• cmd/providers: Add DefaultStr, ValueStr and Type fields (Nick Craig-Wood)
• jobs: Make job expiry timeouts configurable (Aleksandar Jankovic)
• serve dlna reworked and improved (Dan Walters)
• serve ftp: add --ftp-public-ip flag to specify public IP (calistri)
• serve restic: Add support for --private-repos in serve restic (Florian Apolloner)
• serve webdav: Combine serve webdav and serve http (Gary Kim)
• size: Ignore negative sizes when calculating total (Garry McNulty)
• Bug Fixes
• Make move and copy individual files obey --backup-dir (Nick Craig-Wood)
• If --ignore-checksum is in effect, don’t calculate checksum (Nick Craig-Wood)
• moveto: Fix case-insensitive same remote move (Gary Kim)
• rc: Fix serving bucket-based objects with --rc-serve (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve webdav: Fix serveDir not being updated with changes from webdav (Gary Kim)
• Mount
• Fix poll interval documentation (Animosity022)
• VFS
• Make WriteAt for non cached files work with non-sequential writes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Only calculate the required hashes for big speedup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Log errors when listing instead of returning an error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix preallocate warning on Linux with ZFS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Make rclone dedupe work through crypt (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix wrapping of ChangeNotify to decrypt directories properly (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Support PublicLink (rclone link) of underlying backend (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement Optional methods SetTier, GetTier (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Implement server-side copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement SetModTime (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Fix move and copy from TeamDrive to GDrive (Fionera)
• Add notes that cleanup works in the background on drive (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --drive-server-side-across-configs to default back to old server-side copy semantics by default
(Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --drive-size-as-quota to show storage quota usage for file size (Garry McNulty)
• FTP
• Add FTP List timeout (Jeff Quinn)
• Add FTP over TLS support (Gary Kim)
• Add --ftp-no-check-certificate option for FTPS (Gary Kim)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix upload errors when uploading pre 1970 files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Add support for selecting device and mountpoint. (buengese)
• Mega
• Add cleanup support (Gary Kim)
• Onedrive
• More accurately check if root is found (Cnly)
• S3
• Support S3 Accelerated endpoints with --s3-use-accelerate-endpoint (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add config info for Wasabi’s EU Central endpoint (Robert Marko)
• Make SetModTime work for GLACIER while syncing (Philip Harvey)
• SFTP
• Add About support (Gary Kim)
• Fix about parsing of df results so it can cope with -ve results (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Send custom client version and debug server version (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Retry on 423 Locked errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.47.0 - 2019-04-13
• New backends
• Backend for Koofr cloud storage service. (jaKa)
• New Features
• Resume downloads if the reader fails in copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• this means rclone will restart transfers if the source has an error
• this is most useful for downloads or cloud to cloud copies
• Use --fast-list for listing operations where it won’t use more memory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• this should speed up the following operations on remotes which support ListR
• dedupe, serve restic lsf, ls, lsl, lsjson, lsd, md5sum, sha1sum, hashsum, size, delete, cat,
settier
• use --disable ListR to get old behaviour if required
• Make --files-from traverse the destination unless --no-traverse is set (Nick Craig-Wood)
• this fixes --files-from with Google drive and excessive API use in general.
• Make server-side copy account bytes and obey --max-transfer (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --create-empty-src-dirs flag and default to not creating empty dirs (ishuah)
• Add client side TLS/SSL flags --ca-cert/--client-cert/--client-key (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement --suffix-keep-extension for use with --suffix (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build:
• Switch to semver compliant version tags to be go modules compliant (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update to use go1.12.x for the build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve dlna: Add connection manager service description to improve compatibility (Dan Walters)
• lsf: Add `e' format to show encrypted names and `o' for original IDs (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsjson: Added --files-only and --dirs-only flags (calistri)
• rc: Implement operations/publiclink the equivalent of rclone link (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting: Fix total ETA when --stats-unit bits is in effect (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bash TAB completion
• Use private custom func to fix clash between rclone and kubectl (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix for remotes with underscores in their names (Six)
• Fix completion of remotes (Florian Gamböck)
• Fix autocompletion of remote paths with spaces (Danil Semelenov)
• serve dlna: Fix root XML service descriptor (Dan Walters)
• ncdu: Fix display corruption with Chinese characters (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add SIGTERM to signals which run the exit handlers on unix (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc: Reload filter when the options are set via the rc (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS / Mount
• Fix FreeBSD: Ignore Truncate if called with no readers and already the correct size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Read directory and check for a file before mkdir (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Shorten the locking window for vfs/refresh (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Enable MD5 checksums when uploading files bigger than the “Cutoff” (Dr.Rx)
• Fix SAS URL support (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Allow manual configuration of backblaze downloadUrl (Vince)
• Ignore already_hidden error on remove (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Ignore malformed src_last_modified_millis (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Add --skip-checksum-gphotos to ignore incorrect checksums on Google Photos (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Allow server-side move/copy between different remotes. (Fionera)
• Add docs on team drives and --fast-list eventual consistency (Nestar47)
• Fix imports of text files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix range requests on 0 length files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix creation of duplicates with server-side copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Retry blank errors to fix long listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Add --ftp-concurrency to limit maximum number of connections (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fall back to default application credentials (marcintustin)
• Allow bucket policy only buckets (Nick Craig-Wood)
• HTTP
• Add --http-no-slash for websites with directories with no slashes (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove duplicates from listings (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix socket leak on 404 errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Fix token refresh (Sebastian Bünger)
• Add device registration (Oliver Heyme)
• Onedrive
• Implement graceful cancel of multipart uploads if rclone is interrupted (Cnly)
• Always add trailing colon to path when addressing items, (Cnly)
• Return errors instead of panic for invalid uploads (Fabian Möller)
• S3
• Add support for “Glacier Deep Archive” storage class (Manu)
• Update Dreamhost endpoint (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Note incompatibility with CEPH Jewel (Nick Craig-Wood)
• SFTP
• Allow custom ssh client config (Alexandru Bumbacea)
• Swift
• Obey Retry-After to enable OVH restore from cold storage (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Work around token expiry on CEPH (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Allow IsCollection property to be integer or boolean (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix race when creating directories (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix About/df when reading the available/total returns 0 (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.46 - 2019-02-09
• New backends
• Support Alibaba Cloud (Aliyun) OSS via the s3 backend (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New commands
• serve dlna: serves a remove via DLNA for the local network (nicolov)
• New Features
• copy, move: Restore deprecated --no-traverse flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This is useful for when transferring a small number of files into a large destination
• genautocomplete: Add remote path completion for bash completion (Christopher Peterson & Danil
Semelenov)
• Buffer memory handling reworked to return memory to the OS better (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Buffer recycling library to replace sync.Pool
• Optionally use memory mapped memory for better memory shrinking
• Enable with --use-mmap if having memory problems - not default yet
• Parallelise reading of files specified by --files-from (Nick Craig-Wood)
• check: Add stats showing total files matched. (Dario Guzik)
• Allow rename/delete open files under Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• lsjson: Use exactly the correct number of decimal places in the seconds (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add cookie support with cmdline switch --use-cookies for all HTTP based remotes (qip)
• Warn if --checksum is set but there are no hashes available (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Rework rate limiting (pacer) to be more accurate and allow bursting (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Improve error reporting for too many/few arguments in commands (Nick Craig-Wood)
• listremotes: Remove -l short flag as it conflicts with the new global flag (weetmuts)
• Make http serving with auth generate INFO messages on auth fail (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• Fix layout of stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix --progress crash under Windows Jenkins (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix transfer of google/onedrive docs by calling Rcat in Copy when size is -1 (Cnly)
• copyurl: Fix checking of --dry-run (Denis Skovpen)
• Mount
• Check that mountpoint and local directory to mount don’t overlap (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix mount size under 32 bit Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Implement renaming of directories for backends without DirMove (Nick Craig-Wood)
• now all backends except b2 support renaming directories
• Implement --vfs-cache-max-size to limit the total size of the cache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --dir-perms and --file-perms flags to set default permissions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix deadlock on concurrent operations on a directory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix deadlock between RWFileHandle.close and File.Remove (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix renaming/deleting open files with cache mode “writes” under Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix panic on rename with --dry-run set (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix vfs/refresh with recurse=true needing the --fast-list flag
• Local
• Add support for -l/--links (symbolic link translation) (yair@unicorn)
• this works by showing links as link.rclonelink - see local backend docs for more info
• this errors if used with -L/--copy-links
• Fix renaming/deleting open files on Windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Check for maximum length before decrypting filename to fix panic (Garry McNulty)
• Azure Blob
• Allow building azureblob backend on *BSD (themylogin)
• Use the rclone HTTP client to support --dump headers, --tpslimit, etc. (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Use the s3 pacer for 0 delay in non error conditions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Ignore directory markers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Stop Mkdir attempting to create existing containers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• cleanup: will remove unfinished large files >24hrs old (Garry McNulty)
• For a bucket limited application key check the bucket name (Nick Craig-Wood)
• before this, rclone would use the authorised bucket regardless of what you put on the command line
• Added --b2-disable-checksum flag (Wojciech Smigielski)
• this enables large files to be uploaded without a SHA-1 hash for speed reasons
• Drive
• Set default pacer to 100ms for 10 tps (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This fits the Google defaults much better and reduces the 403 errors massively
• Add --drive-pacer-min-sleep and --drive-pacer-burst to control the pacer
• Improve ChangeNotify support for items with multiple parents (Fabian Möller)
• Fix ListR for items with multiple parents - this fixes oddities with vfs/refresh (Fabian Möller)
• Fix using --drive-impersonate and appfolders (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix google docs in rclone mount for some (not all) applications (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Retry-After support for Dropbox backend (Mathieu Carbou)
• FTP
• Wait for 60 seconds for a connection to Close then declare it dead (Nick Craig-Wood)
• helps with indefinite hangs on some FTP servers
• Google Cloud Storage
• Update google cloud storage endpoints (weetmuts)
• HTTP
• Add an example with username and password which is supported but wasn’t documented (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix backend with --files-from and nonexistent files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Hubic
• Make error message more informative if authentication fails (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Resume and deduplication support (Oliver Heyme)
• Use token auth for all API requests Don’t store password anymore (Sebastian Bünger)
• Add support for 2-factor authentication (Sebastian Bünger)
• Mega
• Implement v2 account login which fixes logins for newer Mega accounts (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Return error if an unknown length file is attempted to be uploaded (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add new error codes for better error reporting (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Fix broken support for “shared with me” folders (Alex Chen)
• Fix root ID not normalised (Cnly)
• Return err instead of panic on unknown-sized uploads (Cnly)
• Qingstor
• Fix go routine leak on multipart upload errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add upload chunk size/concurrency/cutoff control (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Default --qingstor-upload-concurrency to 1 to work around bug (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Implement --s3-upload-cutoff for single part uploads below this (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Change --s3-upload-concurrency default to 4 to increase performance (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-bucket-acl to control bucket ACL (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Auto detect region for buckets on operation failure (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add GLACIER storage class (William Cocker)
• Add Scaleway to s3 documentation (Rémy Léone)
• Add AWS endpoint eu-north-1 (weetmuts)
• SFTP
• Add support for PEM encrypted private keys (Fabian Möller)
• Add option to force the usage of an ssh-agent (Fabian Möller)
• Perform environment variable expansion on key-file (Fabian Möller)
• Fix rmdir on Windows based servers (e.g. CrushFTP) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix rmdir deleting directory contents on some SFTP servers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix error on dangling symlinks (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swift
• Add --swift-no-chunk to disable segmented uploads in rcat/mount (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Introduce application credential auth support (kayrus)
• Fix memory usage by slimming Object (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix extra requests on upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix reauth on big files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Union
• Fix poll-interval not working (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Support About which means rclone mount will show the correct disk size (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Support MD5 and SHA1 hashes with Owncloud and Nextcloud (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fail soft on time parsing errors (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix infinite loop on failed directory creation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix identification of directories for Bitrix Site Manager (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix upload of 0 length files on some servers (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix if MKCOL fails with 423 Locked assume the directory exists (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.45 - 2018-11-24
• New backends
• The Yandex backend was re-written - see below for details (Sebastian Bünger)
• New commands
• rcd: New command just to serve the remote control API (Nick Craig-Wood)
• New Features
• The remote control API (rc) was greatly expanded to allow full control over rclone (Nick Craig-Wood)
• sensitive operations require authorization or the --rc-no-auth flag
• config/* operations to configure rclone
• options/* for reading/setting command line flags
• operations/* for all low level operations, e.g. copy file, list directory
• sync/* for sync, copy and move
• --rc-files flag to serve files on the rc http server
• this is for building web native GUIs for rclone
• Optionally serving objects on the rc http server
• Ensure rclone fails to start up if the --rc port is in use already
• See the rc docs for more info
• sync/copy/move
• Make --files-from only read the objects specified and don’t scan directories (Nick Craig-Wood)
• This is a huge speed improvement for destinations with lots of files
• filter: Add --ignore-case flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• ncdu: Add remove function (`d' key) (Henning Surmeier)
• rc command
• Add --json flag for structured JSON input (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --user and --pass flags and interpret --rc-user, --rc-pass, --rc-addr (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Require go1.8 or later for compilation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Enable softfloat on MIPS arch (Scott Edlund)
• Integration test framework revamped with a better report and better retries (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• cmd: Make --progress update the stats correctly at the end (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config: Create config directory on save if it is missing (Nick Craig-Wood)
• dedupe: Check for existing filename before renaming a dupe file (ssaqua)
• move: Don’t create directories with --dry-run (Nick Craig-Wood)
• operations: Fix Purge and Rmdirs when dir is not the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
• serve http/webdav/restic: Ensure rclone exits if the port is in use (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Mount
• Make --volname work for Windows and macOS (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Avoid context deadline exceeded error by setting a large TryTimeout value (brused27)
• Fix erroneous Rmdir error “directory not empty” (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Wait for up to 60s to create a just deleted container (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Dropbox
• Add dropbox impersonate support (Jake Coggiano)
• Jottacloud
• Fix bug in --fast-list handing of empty folders (albertony)
• Opendrive
• Fix transfer of files with + and & in (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix retries of upload chunks (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Set ACL for server-side copies to that provided by the user (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix role_arn, credential_source, ... (Erik Swanson)
• Add config info for Wasabi’s US-West endpoint (Henry Ptasinski)
• SFTP
• Ensure file hash checking is really disabled (Jon Fautley)
• Swift
• Add pacer for retries to make swift more reliable (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Add Content-Type to PUT requests (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix config parsing so --webdav-user and --webdav-pass flags work (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add RFC3339 date format (Ralf Hemberger)
• Yandex
• The yandex backend was re-written (Sebastian Bünger)
• This implements low level retries (Sebastian Bünger)
• Copy, Move, DirMove, PublicLink and About optional interfaces (Sebastian Bünger)
• Improved general error handling (Sebastian Bünger)
• Removed ListR for now due to inconsistent behaviour (Sebastian Bünger)
v1.44 - 2018-10-15
• New commands
• serve ftp: Add ftp server (Antoine GIRARD)
• settier: perform storage tier changes on supported remotes (sandeepkru)
• New Features
• Reworked command line help
• Make default help less verbose (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Split flags up into global and backend flags (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Implement specialised help for flags and backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Show URL of backend help page when starting config (Nick Craig-Wood)
• stats: Long names now split in center (Joanna Marek)
• Add --log-format flag for more control over log output (dcpu)
• rc: Add support for OPTIONS and basic CORS (frenos)
• stats: show FatalErrors and NoRetryErrors in stats (Cédric Connes)
• Bug Fixes
• Fix -P not ending with a new line (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config: don’t create default config dir when user supplies --config (albertony)
• Don’t print non-ASCII characters with --progress on windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Correct logs for excluded items (ssaqua)
• Mount
• Remove EXPERIMENTAL tags (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Fix race condition detected by serve ftp tests (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add vfs/poll-interval rc command (Fabian Möller)
• Enable rename for nearly all remotes using server-side Move or Copy (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Reduce directory cache cleared by poll-interval (Fabian Möller)
• Remove EXPERIMENTAL tags (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Local
• Skip bad symlinks in dir listing with -L enabled (Cédric Connes)
• Preallocate files on Windows to reduce fragmentation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Preallocate files on linux with fallocate(2) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Add cache/fetch rc function (Fabian Möller)
• Fix worker scale down (Fabian Möller)
• Improve performance by not sending info requests for cached chunks (dcpu)
• Fix error return value of cache/fetch rc method (Fabian Möller)
• Documentation fix for cache-chunk-total-size (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Preserve leading / in wrapped remote path (Fabian Möller)
• Add plex_insecure option to skip certificate validation (Fabian Möller)
• Remove entries that no longer exist in the source (dcpu)
• Crypt
• Preserve leading / in wrapped remote path (Fabian Möller)
• Alias
• Fix handling of Windows network paths (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Add --azureblob-list-chunk parameter (Santiago Rodríguez)
• Implemented settier command support on azureblob remote. (sandeepkru)
• Work around SDK bug which causes errors for chunk-sized files (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Box
• Implement link sharing. (Sebastian Bünger)
• Drive
• Add --drive-import-formats - google docs can now be imported (Fabian Möller)
• Rewrite mime type and extension handling (Fabian Möller)
• Add document links (Fabian Möller)
• Add support for multipart document extensions (Fabian Möller)
• Add support for apps-script to json export (Fabian Möller)
• Fix escaped chars in documents during list (Fabian Möller)
• Add --drive-v2-download-min-size a workaround for slow downloads (Fabian Möller)
• Improve directory notifications in ChangeNotify (Fabian Möller)
• When listing team drives in config, continue on failure (Nick Craig-Wood)
• FTP
• Add a small pause after failed upload before deleting file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix service_account_file being ignored (Fabian Möller)
• Jottacloud
• Minor improvement in quota info (omit if unlimited) (albertony)
• Add --fast-list support (albertony)
• Add permanent delete support: --jottacloud-hard-delete (albertony)
• Add link sharing support (albertony)
• Fix handling of reserved characters. (Sebastian Bünger)
• Fix socket leak on Object.Remove (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Rework to support Microsoft Graph (Cnly)
• NB this will require re-authenticating the remote
• Removed upload cutoff and always do session uploads (Oliver Heyme)
• Use single-part upload for empty files (Cnly)
• Fix new fields not saved when editing old config (Alex Chen)
• Fix sometimes special chars in filenames not replaced (Alex Chen)
• Ignore OneNote files by default (Alex Chen)
• Add link sharing support (jackyzy823)
• S3
• Use custom pacer, to retry operations when reasonable (Craig Miskell)
• Use configured server-side-encryption and storage class options when calling CopyObject() (Paul
Kohout)
• Make --s3-v2-auth flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix v2 auth on files with spaces (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Union
• Implement union backend which reads from multiple backends (Felix Brucker)
• Implement optional interfaces (Move, DirMove, Copy, etc.) (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix ChangeNotify to support multiple remotes (Fabian Möller)
• Fix --backup-dir on union backend (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Add another time format (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add a small pause after failed upload before deleting file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add workaround for missing mtime (buergi)
• Sharepoint: Renew cookies after 12hrs (Henning Surmeier)
• Yandex
• Remove redundant nil checks (teresy)
v1.43.1 - 2018-09-07
Point release to fix hubic and azureblob backends.
• Bug Fixes
• ncdu: Return error instead of log.Fatal in Show (Fabian Möller)
• cmd: Fix crash with --progress and --stats 0 (Nick Craig-Wood)
• docs: Tidy website display (Anagh Kumar Baranwal)
• Azure Blob:
• Fix multi-part uploads. (sandeepkru)
• Hubic
• Fix uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Retry auth fetching if it fails to make hubic more reliable (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.43 - 2018-09-01
• New backends
• Jottacloud (Sebastian Bünger)
• New commands
• copyurl: copies a URL to a remote (Denis)
• New Features
• Reworked config for backends (Nick Craig-Wood)
• All backend config can now be supplied by command line, env var or config file
• Advanced section in the config wizard for the optional items
• A large step towards rclone backends being usable in other go software
• Allow on the fly remotes with :backend: syntax
• Stats revamp
• Add --progress/-P flag to show interactive progress (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Show the total progress of the sync in the stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --stats-one-line flag for single line stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Added weekday schedule into --bwlimit (Mateusz)
• lsjson: Add option to show the original object IDs (Fabian Möller)
• serve webdav: Make Content-Type without reading the file and add --etag-hash (Nick Craig-Wood)
• build
• Build macOS with native compiler (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Update to use go1.11 for the build (Nick Craig-Wood)
• rc
• Added core/stats to return the stats (reddi1)
• version --check: Prints the current release and beta versions (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Bug Fixes
• accounting
• Fix time to completion estimates (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix moving average speed for file stats (Nick Craig-Wood)
• config: Fix error reading password from piped input (Nick Craig-Wood)
• move: Fix --delete-empty-src-dirs flag to delete all empty dirs on move (ishuah)
• Mount
• Implement --daemon-timeout flag for OSXFUSE (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix mount --daemon not working with encrypted config (Alex Chen)
• Clip the number of blocks to 2^32-1 on macOS - fixes borg backup (Nick Craig-Wood)
• VFS
• Enable vfs-read-chunk-size by default (Fabian Möller)
• Add the vfs/refresh rc command (Fabian Möller)
• Add non recursive mode to vfs/refresh rc command (Fabian Möller)
• Try to seek buffer on read only files (Fabian Möller)
• Local
• Fix crash when deprecated --local-no-unicode-normalization is supplied (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix mkdir error when trying to copy files to the root of a drive on windows (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Cache
• Fix nil pointer deref when using lsjson on cached directory (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix nil pointer deref for occasional crash on playback (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Crypt
• Fix accounting when checking hashes on upload (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Amazon Cloud Drive
• Make very clear in the docs that rclone has no ACD keys (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Azure Blob
• Add connection string and SAS URL auth (Nick Craig-Wood)
• List the container to see if it exists (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Port new Azure Blob Storage SDK (sandeepkru)
• Added blob tier, tier between Hot, Cool and Archive. (sandeepkru)
• Remove leading / from paths (Nick Craig-Wood)
• B2
• Support Application Keys (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove leading / from paths (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Box
• Fix upload of > 2GB files on 32 bit platforms (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Make --box-commit-retries flag defaulting to 100 to fix large uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Drive
• Add --drive-keep-revision-forever flag (lewapm)
• Handle gdocs when filtering file names in list (Fabian Möller)
• Support using --fast-list for large speedups (Fabian Möller)
• FTP
• Fix Put mkParentDir failed: 521 for BunnyCDN (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix index out of range error with --fast-list (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Jottacloud
• Fix MD5 error check (Oliver Heyme)
• Handle empty time values (Martin Polden)
• Calculate missing MD5s (Oliver Heyme)
• Docs, fixes and tests for MD5 calculation (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add optional MimeTyper interface. (Sebastian Bünger)
• Implement optional About interface (for df support). (Sebastian Bünger)
• Mega
• Wait for events instead of arbitrary sleeping (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --mega-hard-delete flag (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix failed logins with upper case chars in email (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Onedrive
• Shared folder support (Yoni Jah)
• Implement DirMove (Cnly)
• Fix rmdir sometimes deleting directories with contents (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Pcloud
• Delete half uploaded files on upload error (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Qingstor
• Remove leading / from paths (Nick Craig-Wood)
• S3
• Fix index out of range error with --fast-list (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add --s3-force-path-style (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add support for KMS Key ID (bsteiss)
• Remove leading / from paths (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Swift
• Add storage_policy (Ruben Vandamme)
• Make it so just storage_url or auth_token can be overridden (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Fix server-side copy bug for unusual file names (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Remove leading / from paths (Nick Craig-Wood)
• WebDAV
• Ensure we call MKCOL with a URL with a trailing / for QNAP interop (Nick Craig-Wood)
• If root ends with / then don’t check if it is a file (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Don’t accept redirects when reading metadata (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Add bearer token (Macaroon) support for dCache (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Document dCache and Macaroons (Onno Zweers)
• Sharepoint recursion with different depth (Henning)
• Attempt to remove failed uploads (Nick Craig-Wood)
• Yandex
• Fix listing/deleting files in the root (Nick Craig-Wood)
v1.42 - 2018-06-16
• New backends
• OpenDrive (Oliver Heyme, Jakub Karlicek, ncw)
• New commands
• deletefile command (Filip Bartodziej)
• New Features
• copy, move: Copy single files directly, don’t use --files-from work-around
• this makes them much more efficient
• Implement --max-transfer flag to quit transferring at a limit
• make exit code 8 for --max-transfer exceeded
• copy: copy empty source directories to destination (Ishuah Kariuki)
• check: Add --one-way flag (Kasper Byrdal Nielsen)
• Add siginfo handler for macOS for ctrl-T stats (kubatasiemski)
• rc
• add core/gc to run a garbage collection on demand
• enable go profiling by default on the --rc port
• return error from remote on failure
• lsf
• Add --absolute flag to add a leading / onto path names
• Add --csv flag for compliant CSV output
• Add `m' format specifier to show the MimeType
• Implement `i' format for showing object ID
• lsjson
• Add MimeType to the output
• Add ID field to output to show Object ID
• Add --retries-sleep flag (Benjamin Joseph Dag)
• Oauth tidy up web page and error handling (Henning Surmeier)
• Bug Fixes
• Password prompt output with --log-file fixed for unix (Filip Bartodziej)
• Calculate ModifyWindow each time on the fly to fix various problems (Stefan Breunig)
• Mount
• Only print “File.rename error” if there actually is an error (Stefan Breunig)
• Delay rename if file has open writers instead of failing outright (Stefan Breunig)
• Ensure atexit gets run on interrupt
• macOS enhancements
• Make --noappledouble --noapplexattr
• Add --volname flag and remove special chars from it
• Make Get/List/Set/Remove xattr return ENOSYS for efficiency
• Make --daemon work for macOS without CGO
• VFS
• Add --vfs-read-chunk-size and --vfs-read-chunk-size-limit (Fabian Möller)
• Fix ChangeNotify for new or changed folders (Fabian Möller)
• Local
• Fix symlink/junction point directory handling under Windows
• NB you will need to add -L to your command line to copy files with reparse points
• Cache
• Add non cached dirs on notifications (Remus Bunduc)
• Allow root to be expired from rc (Remus Bunduc)
• Clean remaining empty folders from temp upload path (Remus Bunduc)
• Cache lists using batch writes (Remus Bunduc)
• Use secure websockets for HTTPS Plex addresses (John Clayton)
• Reconnect plex websocket on failures (Remus Bunduc)
• Fix panic when running without plex configs (Remus Bunduc)
• Fix root folder caching (Remus Bunduc)
• Crypt
• Check the crypted hash of files when uploading for extra data security
• Dropbox
• Make Dropbox for business folders accessible using an initial / in the path
• Google Cloud Storage
• Low level retry all operations if necessary
• Google Drive
• Add --drive-acknowledge-abuse to download flagged files
• Add --drive-alternate-export to fix large doc export
• Don’t attempt to choose Team Drives when using rclone config create
• Fix change list polling with team drives
• Fix ChangeNotify for folders (Fabian Möller)
• Fix about (and df on a mount) for team drives
• Onedrive
• Errorhandler for onedrive for business requests (Henning Surmeier)
• S3
• Adjust upload concurrency with --s3-upload-concurrency (themylogin)
• Fix --s3-chunk-size which was always using the minimum
• SFTP
• Add --ssh-path-override flag (Piotr Oleszczyk)
• Fix slow downloads for long latency connections
• Webdav
• Add workarounds for biz.mail.ru
• Ignore Reason-Phrase in status line to fix 4shared (Rodrigo)
• Better error message generation
v1.41 - 2018-04-28
• New backends
• Mega support added
• Webdav now supports SharePoint cookie authentication (hensur)
• New commands
• link: create public link to files and folders (Stefan Breunig)
• about: gets quota info from a remote (a-roussos, ncw)
• hashsum: a generic tool for any hash to produce md5sum like output
• New Features
• lsd: Add -R flag and fix and update docs for all ls commands
• ncdu: added a “refresh” key - CTRL-L (Keith Goldfarb)
• serve restic: Add append-only mode (Steve Kriss)
• serve restic: Disallow overwriting files in append-only mode (Alexander Neumann)
• serve restic: Print actual listener address (Matt Holt)
• size: Add –json flag (Matthew Holt)
• sync: implement –ignore-errors (Mateusz Pabian)
• dedupe: Add dedupe largest functionality (Richard Yang)
• fs: Extend SizeSuffix to include TB and PB for rclone about
• fs: add –dump goroutines and –dump openfiles for debugging
• rc: implement core/memstats to print internal memory usage info
• rc: new call rc/pid (Michael P. Dubner)
• Compile
• Drop support for go1.6
• Release
• Fix make tarball (Chih-Hsuan Yen)
• Bug Fixes
• filter: fix –min-age and –max-age together check
• fs: limit MaxIdleConns and MaxIdleConnsPerHost in transport
• lsd,lsf: make sure all times we output are in local time
• rc: fix setting bwlimit to unlimited
• rc: take note of the –rc-addr flag too as per the docs
• Mount
• Use About to return the correct disk total/used/free (e.g. in df)
• Set --attr-timeout default to 1s - fixes:
• rclone using too much memory
• rclone not serving files to samba
• excessive time listing directories
• Fix df -i (upstream fix)
• VFS
• Filter files . and .. from directory listing
• Only make the VFS cache if –vfs-cache-mode > Off
• Local
• Add –local-no-check-updated to disable updated file checks
• Retry remove on Windows sharing violation error
• Cache
• Flush the memory cache after close
• Purge file data on notification
• Always forget parent dir for notifications
• Integrate with Plex websocket
• Add rc cache/stats (seuffert)
• Add info log on notification
• Box
• Fix failure reading large directories - parse file/directory size as float
• Dropbox
• Fix crypt+obfuscate on dropbox
• Fix repeatedly uploading the same files
• FTP
• Work around strange response from box FTP server
• More workarounds for FTP servers to fix mkParentDir error
• Fix no error on listing nonexistent directory
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add service_account_credentials (Matt Holt)
• Detect bucket presence by listing it - minimises permissions needed
• Ignore zero length directory markers
• Google Drive
• Add service_account_credentials (Matt Holt)
• Fix directory move leaving a hardlinked directory behind
• Return proper google errors when Opening files
• When initialized with a filepath, optional features used incorrect root path (Stefan Breunig)
• HTTP
• Fix sync for servers which don’t return Content-Length in HEAD
• Onedrive
• Add QuickXorHash support for OneDrive for business
• Fix socket leak in multipart session upload
• S3
• Look in S3 named profile files for credentials
• Add --s3-disable-checksum to disable checksum uploading (Chris Redekop)
• Hierarchical configuration support (Giri Badanahatti)
• Add in config for all the supported S3 providers
• Add One Zone Infrequent Access storage class (Craig Rachel)
• Add –use-server-modtime support (Peter Baumgartner)
• Add –s3-chunk-size option to control multipart uploads
• Ignore zero length directory markers
• SFTP
• Update docs to match code, fix typos and clarify disable_hashcheck prompt (Michael G. Noll)
• Update docs with Synology quirks
• Fail soft with a debug on hash failure
• Swift
• Add –use-server-modtime support (Peter Baumgartner)
• Webdav
• Support SharePoint cookie authentication (hensur)
• Strip leading and trailing / off root
v1.40 - 2018-03-19
• New backends
• Alias backend to create aliases for existing remote names (Fabian Möller)
• New commands
• lsf: list for parsing purposes (Jakub Tasiemski)
• by default this is a simple non recursive list of files and directories
• it can be configured to add more info in an easy to parse way
• serve restic: for serving a remote as a Restic REST endpoint
• This enables restic to use any backends that rclone can access
• Thanks Alexander Neumann for help, patches and review
• rc: enable the remote control of a running rclone
• The running rclone must be started with –rc and related flags.
• Currently there is support for bwlimit, and flushing for mount and cache.
• New Features
• --max-delete flag to add a delete threshold (Bjørn Erik Pedersen)
• All backends now support RangeOption for ranged Open
• cat: Use RangeOption for limited fetches to make more efficient
• cryptcheck: make reading of nonce more efficient with RangeOption
• serve http/webdav/restic
• support SSL/TLS
• add --user --pass and --htpasswd for authentication
• copy/move: detect file size change during copy/move and abort transfer (ishuah)
• cryptdecode: added option to return encrypted file names. (ishuah)
• lsjson: add --encrypted to show encrypted name (Jakub Tasiemski)
• Add --stats-file-name-length to specify the printed file name length for stats (Will Gunn)
• Compile
• Code base was shuffled and factored
• backends moved into a backend directory
• large packages split up
• See the CONTRIBUTING.md doc for info as to what lives where now
• Update to using go1.10 as the default go version
• Implement daily full integration tests
• Release
• Include a source tarball and sign it and the binaries
• Sign the git tags as part of the release process
• Add .deb and .rpm packages as part of the build
• Make a beta release for all branches on the main repo (but not pull requests)
• Bug Fixes
• config: fixes errors on nonexistent config by loading config file only on first access
• config: retry saving the config after failure (Mateusz)
• sync: when using --backup-dir don’t delete files if we can’t set their modtime
• this fixes odd behaviour with Dropbox and --backup-dir
• fshttp: fix idle timeouts for HTTP connections
• serve http: fix serving files with : in - fixes
• Fix --exclude-if-present to ignore directories which it doesn’t have permission for (Iakov Davydov)
• Make accounting work properly with crypt and b2
• remove --no-traverse flag because it is obsolete
• Mount
• Add --attr-timeout flag to control attribute caching in kernel
• this now defaults to 0 which is correct but less efficient
• see the mount docs for more info
• Add --daemon flag to allow mount to run in the background (ishuah)
• Fix: Return ENOSYS rather than EIO on attempted link
• This fixes FileZilla accessing an rclone mount served over sftp.
• Fix setting modtime twice
• Mount tests now run on CI for Linux (mount & cmount)/Mac/Windows
• Many bugs fixed in the VFS layer - see below
• VFS
• Many fixes for --vfs-cache-mode writes and above
• Update cached copy if we know it has changed (fixes stale data)
• Clean path names before using them in the cache
• Disable cache cleaner if --vfs-cache-poll-interval=0
• Fill and clean the cache immediately on startup
• Fix Windows opening every file when it stats the file
• Fix applying modtime for an open Write Handle
• Fix creation of files when truncating
• Write 0 bytes when flushing unwritten handles to avoid race conditions in FUSE
• Downgrade “poll-interval is not supported” message to Info
• Make OpenFile and friends return EINVAL if O_RDONLY and O_TRUNC
• Local
• Downgrade “invalid cross-device link: trying copy” to debug
• Make DirMove return fs.ErrorCantDirMove to allow fallback to Copy for cross device
• Fix race conditions updating the hashes
• Cache
• Add support for polling - cache will update when remote changes on supported backends
• Reduce log level for Plex api
• Fix dir cache issue
• Implement --cache-db-wait-time flag
• Improve efficiency with RangeOption and RangeSeek
• Fix dirmove with temp fs enabled
• Notify vfs when using temp fs
• Offline uploading
• Remote control support for path flushing
• Amazon cloud drive
• Rclone no longer has any working keys - disable integration tests
• Implement DirChangeNotify to notify cache/vfs/mount of changes
• Azureblob
• Don’t check for bucket/container presence if listing was OK
• this makes rclone do one less request per invocation
• Improve accounting for chunked uploads
• Backblaze B2
• Don’t check for bucket/container presence if listing was OK
• this makes rclone do one less request per invocation
• Box
• Improve accounting for chunked uploads
• Dropbox
• Fix custom oauth client parameters
• Google Cloud Storage
• Don’t check for bucket/container presence if listing was OK
• this makes rclone do one less request per invocation
• Google Drive
• Migrate to api v3 (Fabian Möller)
• Add scope configuration and root folder selection
• Add --drive-impersonate for service accounts
• thanks to everyone who tested, explored and contributed docs
• Add --drive-use-created-date to use created date as modified date (nbuchanan)
• Request the export formats only when required
• This makes rclone quicker when there are no google docs
• Fix finding paths with latin1 chars (a workaround for a drive bug)
• Fix copying of a single Google doc file
• Fix --drive-auth-owner-only to look in all directories
• HTTP
• Fix handling of directories with & in
• Onedrive
• Removed upload cutoff and always do session uploads
• this stops the creation of multiple versions on business onedrive
• Overwrite object size value with real size when reading file. (Victor)
• this fixes oddities when onedrive misreports the size of images
• Pcloud
• Remove unused chunked upload flag and code
• Qingstor
• Don’t check for bucket/container presence if listing was OK
• this makes rclone do one less request per invocation
• S3
• Support hashes for multipart files (Chris Redekop)
• Initial support for IBM COS (S3) (Giri Badanahatti)
• Update docs to discourage use of v2 auth with CEPH and others
• Don’t check for bucket/container presence if listing was OK
• this makes rclone do one less request per invocation
• Fix server-side copy and set modtime on files with + in
• SFTP
• Add option to disable remote hash check command execution (Jon Fautley)
• Add --sftp-ask-password flag to prompt for password when needed (Leo R. Lundgren)
• Add set_modtime configuration option
• Fix following of symlinks
• Fix reading config file outside of Fs setup
• Fix reading $USER in username fallback not $HOME
• Fix running under crontab - Use correct OS way of reading username
• Swift
• Fix refresh of authentication token
• in v1.39 a bug was introduced which ignored new tokens - this fixes it
• Fix extra HEAD transaction when uploading a new file
• Don’t check for bucket/container presence if listing was OK
• this makes rclone do one less request per invocation
• Webdav
• Add new time formats to support mydrive.ch and others
v1.39 - 2017-12-23
• New backends
• WebDAV
• tested with nextcloud, owncloud, put.io and others!
• Pcloud
• cache - wraps a cache around other backends (Remus Bunduc)
• useful in combination with mount
• NB this feature is in beta so use with care
• New commands
• serve command with subcommands:
• serve webdav: this implements a webdav server for any rclone remote.
• serve http: command to serve a remote over HTTP
• config: add sub commands for full config file management
• create/delete/dump/edit/file/password/providers/show/update
• touch: to create or update the timestamp of a file (Jakub Tasiemski)
• New Features
• curl install for rclone (Filip Bartodziej)
• –stats now shows percentage, size, rate and ETA in condensed form (Ishuah Kariuki)
• –exclude-if-present to exclude a directory if a file is present (Iakov Davydov)
• rmdirs: add –leave-root flag (lewapm)
• move: add –delete-empty-src-dirs flag to remove dirs after move (Ishuah Kariuki)
• Add –dump flag, introduce –dump requests, responses and remove –dump-auth, –dump-filters
• Obscure X-Auth-Token: from headers when dumping too
• Document and implement exit codes for different failure modes (Ishuah Kariuki)
• Compile
• Bug Fixes
• Retry lots more different types of errors to make multipart transfers more reliable
• Save the config before asking for a token, fixes disappearing oauth config
• Warn the user if –include and –exclude are used together (Ernest Borowski)
• Fix duplicate files (e.g. on Google drive) causing spurious copies
• Allow trailing and leading whitespace for passwords (Jason Rose)
• ncdu: fix crashes on empty directories
• rcat: fix goroutine leak
• moveto/copyto: Fix to allow copying to the same name
• Mount
• –vfs-cache mode to make writes into mounts more reliable.
• this requires caching files on the disk (see –cache-dir)
• As this is a new feature, use with care
• Use sdnotify to signal systemd the mount is ready (Fabian Möller)
• Check if directory is not empty before mounting (Ernest Borowski)
• Local
• Add error message for cross file system moves
• Fix equality check for times
• Dropbox
• Rework multipart upload
• buffer the chunks when uploading large files so they can be retried
• change default chunk size to 48MB now we are buffering them in memory
• retry every error after the first chunk is done successfully
• Fix error when renaming directories
• Swift
• Fix crash on bad authentication
• Google Drive
• Add service account support (Tim Cooijmans)
• S3
• Make it work properly with Digital Ocean Spaces (Andrew Starr-Bochicchio)
• Fix crash if a bad listing is received
• Add support for ECS task IAM roles (David Minor)
• Backblaze B2
• Fix multipart upload retries
• Fix –hard-delete to make it work 100% of the time
• Swift
• Allow authentication with storage URL and auth key (Giovanni Pizzi)
• Add new fields for swift configuration to support IBM Bluemix Swift (Pierre Carlson)
• Add OS_TENANT_ID and OS_USER_ID to config
• Allow configs with user id instead of user name
• Check if swift segments container exists before creating (John Leach)
• Fix memory leak in swift transfers (upstream fix)
• SFTP
• Add option to enable the use of aes128-cbc cipher (Jon Fautley)
• Amazon cloud drive
• Fix download of large files failing with “Only one auth mechanism allowed”
• crypt
• Option to encrypt directory names or leave them intact
• Implement DirChangeNotify (Fabian Möller)
• onedrive
• Add option to choose resourceURL during setup of OneDrive Business account if more than one is
available for user
v1.38 - 2017-09-30
• New backends
• Azure Blob Storage (thanks Andrei Dragomir)
• Box
• Onedrive for Business (thanks Oliver Heyme)
• QingStor from QingCloud (thanks wuyu)
• New commands
• rcat - read from standard input and stream upload
• tree - shows a nicely formatted recursive listing
• cryptdecode - decode crypted file names (thanks ishuah)
• config show - print the config file
• config file - print the config file location
• New Features
• Empty directories are deleted on sync
• dedupe - implement merging of duplicate directories
• check and cryptcheck made more consistent and use less memory
• cleanup for remaining remotes (thanks ishuah)
• --immutable for ensuring that files don’t change (thanks Jacob McNamee)
• --user-agent option (thanks Alex McGrath Kraak)
• --disable flag to disable optional features
• --bind flag for choosing the local addr on outgoing connections
• Support for zsh auto-completion (thanks bpicode)
• Stop normalizing file names but do a normalized compare in sync
• Compile
• Update to using go1.9 as the default go version
• Remove snapd build due to maintenance problems
• Bug Fixes
• Improve retriable error detection which makes multipart uploads better
• Make check obey --ignore-size
• Fix bwlimit toggle in conjunction with schedules (thanks cbruegg)
• config ensures newly written config is on the same mount
• Local
• Revert to copy when moving file across file system boundaries
• --skip-links to suppress symlink warnings (thanks Zhiming Wang)
• Mount
• Re-use rcat internals to support uploads from all remotes
• Dropbox
• Fix “entry doesn’t belong in directory” error
• Stop using deprecated API methods
• Swift
• Fix server-side copy to empty container with --fast-list
• Google Drive
• Change the default for --drive-use-trash to true
• S3
• Set session token when using STS (thanks Girish Ramakrishnan)
• Glacier docs and error messages (thanks Jan Varho)
• Read 1000 (not 1024) items in dir listings to fix Wasabi
• Backblaze B2
• Fix SHA1 mismatch when downloading files with no SHA1
• Calculate missing hashes on the fly instead of spooling
• --b2-hard-delete to permanently delete (not hide) files (thanks John Papandriopoulos)
• Hubic
• Fix creating containers - no longer have to use the default container
• Swift
• Optionally configure from a standard set of OpenStack environment vars
• Add endpoint_type config
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix bucket creation to work with limited permission users
• SFTP
• Implement connection pooling for multiple ssh connections
• Limit new connections per second
• Add support for MD5 and SHA1 hashes where available (thanks Christian Brüggemann)
• HTTP
• Fix URL encoding issues
• Fix directories with : in
• Fix panic with URL encoded content
v1.37 - 2017-07-22
• New backends
• FTP - thanks to Antonio Messina
• HTTP - thanks to Vasiliy Tolstov
• New commands
• rclone ncdu - for exploring a remote with a text based user interface.
• rclone lsjson - for listing with a machine-readable output
• rclone dbhashsum - to show Dropbox style hashes of files (local or Dropbox)
• New Features
• Implement –fast-list flag
• This allows remotes to list recursively if they can
• This uses less transactions (important if you pay for them)
• This may or may not be quicker
• This will use more memory as it has to hold the listing in memory
• –old-sync-method deprecated - the remaining uses are covered by –fast-list
• This involved a major re-write of all the listing code
• Add –tpslimit and –tpslimit-burst to limit transactions per second
• this is useful in conjunction with rclone mount to limit external apps
• Add –stats-log-level so can see –stats without -v
• Print password prompts to stderr - Hraban Luyat
• Warn about duplicate files when syncing
• Oauth improvements
• allow auth_url and token_url to be set in the config file
• Print redirection URI if using own credentials.
• Don’t Mkdir at the start of sync to save transactions
• Compile
• Update build to go1.8.3
• Require go1.6 for building rclone
• Compile 386 builds with “GO386=387” for maximum compatibility
• Bug Fixes
• Fix menu selection when no remotes
• Config saving reworked to not kill the file if disk gets full
• Don’t delete remote if name does not change while renaming
• moveto, copyto: report transfers and checks as per move and copy
• Local
• Add –local-no-unicode-normalization flag - Bob Potter
• Mount
• Now supported on Windows using cgofuse and WinFsp - thanks to Bill Zissimopoulos for much help
• Compare checksums on upload/download via FUSE
• Unmount when program ends with SIGINT (Ctrl+C) or SIGTERM - Jérôme Vizcaino
• On read only open of file, make open pending until first read
• Make –read-only reject modify operations
• Implement ModTime via FUSE for remotes that support it
• Allow modTime to be changed even before all writers are closed
• Fix panic on renames
• Fix hang on errored upload
• Crypt
• Report the name:root as specified by the user
• Add an “obfuscate” option for filename encryption - Stephen Harris
• Amazon Drive
• Fix initialization order for token renewer
• Remove revoked credentials, allow oauth proxy config and update docs
• B2
• Reduce minimum chunk size to 5MB
• Drive
• Add team drive support
• Reduce bandwidth by adding fields for partial responses - Martin Kristensen
• Implement –drive-shared-with-me flag to view shared with me files - Danny Tsai
• Add –drive-trashed-only to read only the files in the trash
• Remove obsolete –drive-full-list
• Add missing seek to start on retries of chunked uploads
• Fix stats accounting for upload
• Convert / in names to a unicode equivalent (／)
• Poll for Google Drive changes when mounted
• OneDrive
• Fix the uploading of files with spaces
• Fix initialization order for token renewer
• Display speeds accurately when uploading - Yoni Jah
• Swap to using http://localhost:53682/ as redirect URL - Michael Ledin
• Retry on token expired error, reset upload body on retry - Yoni Jah
• Google Cloud Storage
• Add ability to specify location and storage class via config and command line - thanks gdm85
• Create container if necessary on server-side copy
• Increase directory listing chunk to 1000 to increase performance
• Obtain a refresh token for GCS - Steven Lu
• Yandex
• Fix the name reported in log messages (was empty)
• Correct error return for listing empty directory
• Dropbox
• Rewritten to use the v2 API
• Now supports ModTime
• Can only set by uploading the file again
• If you uploaded with an old rclone, rclone may upload everything again
• Use --size-only or --checksum to avoid this
• Now supports the Dropbox content hashing scheme
• Now supports low level retries
• S3
• Work around eventual consistency in bucket creation
• Create container if necessary on server-side copy
• Add us-east-2 (Ohio) and eu-west-2 (London) S3 regions - Zahiar Ahmed
• Swift, Hubic
• Fix zero length directory markers showing in the subdirectory listing
• this caused lots of duplicate transfers
• Fix paged directory listings
• this caused duplicate directory errors
• Create container if necessary on server-side copy
• Increase directory listing chunk to 1000 to increase performance
• Make sensible error if the user forgets the container
• SFTP
• Add support for using ssh key files
• Fix under Windows
• Fix ssh agent on Windows
• Adapt to latest version of library - Igor Kharin
v1.36 - 2017-03-18
• New Features
• SFTP remote (Jack Schmidt)
• Re-implement sync routine to work a directory at a time reducing memory usage
• Logging revamped to be more inline with rsync - now much quieter * -v only shows transfers * -vv is
for full debug * –syslog to log to syslog on capable platforms
• Implement –backup-dir and –suffix
• Implement –track-renames (initial implementation by Bjørn Erik Pedersen)
• Add time-based bandwidth limits (Lukas Loesche)
• rclone cryptcheck: checks integrity of crypt remotes
• Allow all config file variables and options to be set from environment variables
• Add –buffer-size parameter to control buffer size for copy
• Make –delete-after the default
• Add –ignore-checksum flag (fixed by Hisham Zarka)
• rclone check: Add –download flag to check all the data, not just hashes
• rclone cat: add –head, –tail, –offset, –count and –discard
• rclone config: when choosing from a list, allow the value to be entered too
• rclone config: allow rename and copy of remotes
• rclone obscure: for generating encrypted passwords for rclone’s config (T.C. Ferguson)
• Comply with XDG Base Directory specification (Dario Giovannetti)
• this moves the default location of the config file in a backwards compatible way
• Release changes
• Ubuntu snap support (Dedsec1)
• Compile with go 1.8
• MIPS/Linux big and little endian support
• Bug Fixes
• Fix copyto copying things to the wrong place if the destination dir didn’t exist
• Fix parsing of remotes in moveto and copyto
• Fix –delete-before deleting files on copy
• Fix –files-from with an empty file copying everything
• Fix sync: don’t update mod times if –dry-run set
• Fix MimeType propagation
• Fix filters to add ** rules to directory rules
• Local
• Implement -L, –copy-links flag to allow rclone to follow symlinks
• Open files in write only mode so rclone can write to an rclone mount
• Fix unnormalised unicode causing problems reading directories
• Fix interaction between -x flag and –max-depth
• Mount
• Implement proper directory handling (mkdir, rmdir, renaming)
• Make include and exclude filters apply to mount
• Implement read and write async buffers - control with –buffer-size
• Fix fsync on for directories
• Fix retry on network failure when reading off crypt
• Crypt
• Add –crypt-show-mapping to show encrypted file mapping
• Fix crypt writer getting stuck in a loop
• IMPORTANT this bug had the potential to cause data corruption when
• reading data from a network based remote and
• writing to a crypt on Google Drive
• Use the cryptcheck command to validate your data if you are concerned
• If syncing two crypt remotes, sync the unencrypted remote
• Amazon Drive
• Fix panics on Move (rename)
• Fix panic on token expiry
• B2
• Fix inconsistent listings and rclone check
• Fix uploading empty files with go1.8
• Constrain memory usage when doing multipart uploads
• Fix upload url not being refreshed properly
• Drive
• Fix Rmdir on directories with trashed files
• Fix “Ignoring unknown object” when downloading
• Add –drive-list-chunk
• Add –drive-skip-gdocs (Károly Oláh)
• OneDrive
• Implement Move
• Fix Copy
• Fix overwrite detection in Copy
• Fix waitForJob to parse errors correctly
• Use token renewer to stop auth errors on long uploads
• Fix uploading empty files with go1.8
• Google Cloud Storage
• Fix depth 1 directory listings
• Yandex
• Fix single level directory listing
• Dropbox
• Normalise the case for single level directory listings
• Fix depth 1 listing
• S3
• Added ca-central-1 region (Jon Yergatian)
v1.35 - 2017-01-02
• New Features
• moveto and copyto commands for choosing a destination name on copy/move
• rmdirs command to recursively delete empty directories
• Allow repeated –include/–exclude/–filter options
• Only show transfer stats on commands which transfer stuff
• show stats on any command using the --stats flag
• Allow overlapping directories in move when server-side dir move is supported
• Add –stats-unit option - thanks Scott McGillivray
• Bug Fixes
• Fix the config file being overwritten when two rclone instances are running
• Make rclone lsd obey the filters properly
• Fix compilation on mips
• Fix not transferring files that don’t differ in size
• Fix panic on nil retry/fatal error
• Mount
• Retry reads on error - should help with reliability a lot
• Report the modification times for directories from the remote
• Add bandwidth accounting and limiting (fixes –bwlimit)
• If –stats provided will show stats and which files are transferring
• Support R/W files if truncate is set.
• Implement statfs interface so df works
• Note that write is now supported on Amazon Drive
• Report number of blocks in a file - thanks Stefan Breunig
• Crypt
• Prevent the user pointing crypt at itself
• Fix failed to authenticate decrypted block errors
• these will now return the underlying unexpected EOF instead
• Amazon Drive
• Add support for server-side move and directory move - thanks Stefan Breunig
• Fix nil pointer deref on size attribute
• B2
• Use new prefix and delimiter parameters in directory listings
• This makes –max-depth 1 dir listings as used in mount much faster
• Reauth the account while doing uploads too - should help with token expiry
• Drive
• Make DirMove more efficient and complain about moving the root
• Create destination directory on Move()
v1.34 - 2016-11-06
• New Features
• Stop single file and --files-from operations iterating through the source bucket.
• Stop removing failed upload to cloud storage remotes
• Make ContentType be preserved for cloud to cloud copies
• Add support to toggle bandwidth limits via SIGUSR2 - thanks Marco Paganini
• rclone check shows count of hashes that couldn’t be checked
• rclone listremotes command
• Support linux/arm64 build - thanks Fredrik Fornwall
• Remove Authorization: lines from --dump-headers output
• Bug Fixes
• Ignore files with control characters in the names
• Fix rclone move command
• Delete src files which already existed in dst
• Fix deletion of src file when dst file older
• Fix rclone check on crypted file systems
• Make failed uploads not count as “Transferred”
• Make sure high level retries show with -q
• Use a vendor directory with godep for repeatable builds
• rclone mount - FUSE
• Implement FUSE mount options
• --no-modtime, --debug-fuse, --read-only, --allow-non-empty, --allow-root, --allow-other
• --default-permissions, --write-back-cache, --max-read-ahead, --umask, --uid, --gid
• Add --dir-cache-time to control caching of directory entries
• Implement seek for files opened for read (useful for video players)
• with -no-seek flag to disable
• Fix crash on 32 bit ARM (alignment of 64 bit counter)
• ...and many more internal fixes and improvements!
• Crypt
• Don’t show encrypted password in configurator to stop confusion
• Amazon Drive
• New wait for upload option --acd-upload-wait-per-gb
• upload timeouts scale by file size and can be disabled
• Add 502 Bad Gateway to list of errors we retry
• Fix overwriting a file with a zero length file
• Fix ACD file size warning limit - thanks Felix Bünemann
• Local
• Unix: implement -x/--one-file-system to stay on a single file system
• thanks Durval Menezes and Luiz Carlos Rumbelsperger Viana
• Windows: ignore the symlink bit on files
• Windows: Ignore directory-based junction points
• B2
• Make sure each upload has at least one upload slot - fixes strange upload stats
• Fix uploads when using crypt
• Fix download of large files (sha1 mismatch)
• Return error when we try to create a bucket which someone else owns
• Update B2 docs with Data usage, and Crypt section - thanks Tomasz Mazur
• S3
• Command line and config file support for
• Setting/overriding ACL - thanks Radek Šenfeld
• Setting storage class - thanks Asko Tamm
• Drive
• Make exponential backoff work exactly as per Google specification
• add .epub, .odp and .tsv as export formats.
• Swift
• Don’t read metadata for directory marker objects
v1.33 - 2016-08-24
• New Features
• Implement encryption
• data encrypted in NACL secretbox format
• with optional file name encryption
• New commands
• rclone mount - implements FUSE mounting of remotes (EXPERIMENTAL)
• works on Linux, FreeBSD and OS X (need testers for the last 2!)
• rclone cat - outputs remote file or files to the terminal
• rclone genautocomplete - command to make a bash completion script for rclone
• Editing a remote using rclone config now goes through the wizard
• Compile with go 1.7 - this fixes rclone on macOS Sierra and on 386 processors
• Use cobra for sub commands and docs generation
• drive
• Document how to make your own client_id
• s3
• User-configurable Amazon S3 ACL (thanks Radek Šenfeld)
• b2
• Fix stats accounting for upload - no more jumping to 100% done
• On cleanup delete hide marker if it is the current file
• New B2 API endpoint (thanks Per Cederberg)
• Set maximum backoff to 5 Minutes
• onedrive
• Fix URL escaping in file names - e.g. uploading files with + in them.
• amazon cloud drive
• Fix token expiry during large uploads
• Work around 408 REQUEST_TIMEOUT and 504 GATEWAY_TIMEOUT errors
• local
• Fix filenames with invalid UTF-8 not being uploaded
• Fix problem with some UTF-8 characters on OS X
v1.32 - 2016-07-13
• Backblaze B2
• Fix upload of files large files not in root
v1.31 - 2016-07-13
• New Features
• Reduce memory on sync by about 50%
• Implement –no-traverse flag to stop copy traversing the destination remote.
• This can be used to reduce memory usage down to the smallest possible.
• Useful to copy a small number of files into a large destination folder.
• Implement cleanup command for emptying trash / removing old versions of files
• Currently B2 only
• Single file handling improved
• Now copied with –files-from
• Automatically sets –no-traverse when copying a single file
• Info on using installing with ansible - thanks Stefan Weichinger
• Implement –no-update-modtime flag to stop rclone fixing the remote modified times.
• Bug Fixes
• Fix move command - stop it running for overlapping Fses - this was causing data loss.
• Local
• Fix incomplete hashes - this was causing problems for B2.
• Amazon Drive
• Rename Amazon Cloud Drive to Amazon Drive - no changes to config file needed.
• Swift
• Add support for non-default project domain - thanks Antonio Messina.
• S3
• Add instructions on how to use rclone with minio.
• Add ap-northeast-2 (Seoul) and ap-south-1 (Mumbai) regions.
• Skip setting the modified time for objects > 5GB as it isn’t possible.
• Backblaze B2
• Add –b2-versions flag so old versions can be listed and retrieved.
• Treat 403 errors (e.g. cap exceeded) as fatal.
• Implement cleanup command for deleting old file versions.
• Make error handling compliant with B2 integrations notes.
• Fix handling of token expiry.
• Implement –b2-test-mode to set X-Bz-Test-Mode header.
• Set cutoff for chunked upload to 200MB as per B2 guidelines.
• Make upload multi-threaded.
• Dropbox
• Don’t retry 461 errors.
v1.30 - 2016-06-18
• New Features
• Directory listing code reworked for more features and better error reporting (thanks to Klaus Post
for help). This enables
• Directory include filtering for efficiency
• –max-depth parameter
• Better error reporting
• More to come
• Retry more errors
• Add –ignore-size flag - for uploading images to onedrive
• Log -v output to stdout by default
• Display the transfer stats in more human-readable form
• Make 0 size files specifiable with --max-size 0b
• Add b suffix so we can specify bytes in –bwlimit, –min-size, etc.
• Use “password:” instead of “password>” prompt - thanks Klaus Post and Leigh Klotz
• Bug Fixes
• Fix retry doing one too many retries
• Local
• Fix problems with OS X and UTF-8 characters
• Amazon Drive
• Check a file exists before uploading to help with 408 Conflict errors
• Reauth on 401 errors - this has been causing a lot of problems
• Work around spurious 403 errors
• Restart directory listings on error
• Google Drive
• Check a file exists before uploading to help with duplicates
• Fix retry of multipart uploads
• Backblaze B2
• Implement large file uploading
• S3
• Add AES256 server-side encryption for - thanks Justin R. Wilson
• Google Cloud Storage
• Make sure we don’t use conflicting content types on upload
• Add service account support - thanks Michal Witkowski
• Swift
• Add auth version parameter
• Add domain option for openstack (v3 auth) - thanks Fabian Ruff
v1.29 - 2016-04-18
• New Features
• Implement -I, --ignore-times for unconditional upload
• Improve dedupecommand
• Now removes identical copies without asking
• Now obeys --dry-run
• Implement --dedupe-mode for non interactive running
• --dedupe-mode interactive - interactive the default.
• --dedupe-mode skip - removes identical files then skips anything left.
• --dedupe-mode first - removes identical files then keeps the first one.
• --dedupe-mode newest - removes identical files then keeps the newest one.
• --dedupe-mode oldest - removes identical files then keeps the oldest one.
• --dedupe-mode rename - removes identical files then renames the rest to be different.
• Bug fixes
• Make rclone check obey the --size-only flag.
• Use “application/octet-stream” if discovered mime type is invalid.
• Fix missing “quit” option when there are no remotes.
• Google Drive
• Increase default chunk size to 8 MB - increases upload speed of big files
• Speed up directory listings and make more reliable
• Add missing retries for Move and DirMove - increases reliability
• Preserve mime type on file update
• Backblaze B2
• Enable mod time syncing
• This means that B2 will now check modification times
• It will upload new files to update the modification times
• (there isn’t an API to just set the mod time.)
• If you want the old behaviour use --size-only.
• Update API to new version
• Fix parsing of mod time when not in metadata
• Swift/Hubic
• Don’t return an MD5SUM for static large objects
• S3
• Fix uploading files bigger than 50GB
v1.28 - 2016-03-01
• New Features
• Configuration file encryption - thanks Klaus Post
• Improve rclone config adding more help and making it easier to understand
• Implement -u/--update so creation times can be used on all remotes
• Implement --low-level-retries flag
• Optionally disable gzip compression on downloads with --no-gzip-encoding
• Bug fixes
• Don’t make directories if --dry-run set
• Fix and document the move command
• Fix redirecting stderr on unix-like OSes when using --log-file
• Fix delete command to wait until all finished - fixes missing deletes.
• Backblaze B2
• Use one upload URL per go routine fixes more than one upload using auth token
• Add pacing, retries and reauthentication - fixes token expiry problems
• Upload without using a temporary file from local (and remotes which support SHA1)
• Fix reading metadata for all files when it shouldn’t have been
• Drive
• Fix listing drive documents at root
• Disable copy and move for Google docs
• Swift
• Fix uploading of chunked files with non ASCII characters
• Allow setting of storage_url in the config - thanks Xavier Lucas
• S3
• Allow IAM role and credentials from environment variables - thanks Brian Stengaard
• Allow low privilege users to use S3 (check if directory exists during Mkdir) - thanks Jakub Gedeon
• Amazon Drive
• Retry on more things to make directory listings more reliable
v1.27 - 2016-01-31
• New Features
• Easier headless configuration with rclone authorize
• Add support for multiple hash types - we now check SHA1 as well as MD5 hashes.
• delete command which does obey the filters (unlike purge)
• dedupe command to deduplicate a remote. Useful with Google Drive.
• Add --ignore-existing flag to skip all files that exist on destination.
• Add --delete-before, --delete-during, --delete-after flags.
• Add --memprofile flag to debug memory use.
• Warn the user about files with same name but different case
• Make --include rules add their implicit exclude * at the end of the filter list
• Deprecate compiling with go1.3
• Amazon Drive
• Fix download of files > 10 GB
• Fix directory traversal (“Next token is expired”) for large directory listings
• Remove 409 conflict from error codes we will retry - stops very long pauses
• Backblaze B2
• SHA1 hashes now checked by rclone core
• Drive
• Add --drive-auth-owner-only to only consider files owned by the user - thanks Björn Harrtell
• Export Google documents
• Dropbox
• Make file exclusion error controllable with -q
• Swift
• Fix upload from unprivileged user.
• S3
• Fix updating of mod times of files with + in.
• Local
• Add local file system option to disable UNC on Windows.
v1.26 - 2016-01-02
• New Features
• Yandex storage backend - thank you Dmitry Burdeev (“dibu”)
• Implement Backblaze B2 storage backend
• Add –min-age and –max-age flags - thank you Adriano Aurélio Meirelles
• Make ls/lsl/md5sum/size/check obey includes and excludes
• Fixes
• Fix crash in http logging
• Upload releases to github too
• Swift
• Fix sync for chunked files
• OneDrive
• Re-enable server-side copy
• Don’t mask HTTP error codes with JSON decode error
• S3
• Fix corrupting Content-Type on mod time update (thanks Joseph Spurrier)
v1.25 - 2015-11-14
• New features
• Implement Hubic storage system
• Fixes
• Fix deletion of some excluded files without –delete-excluded
• This could have deleted files unexpectedly on sync
• Always check first with --dry-run!
• Swift
• Stop SetModTime losing metadata (e.g. X-Object-Manifest)
• This could have caused data loss for files > 5GB in size
• Use ContentType from Object to avoid lookups in listings
• OneDrive
• disable server-side copy as it seems to be broken at Microsoft
v1.24 - 2015-11-07
• New features
• Add support for Microsoft OneDrive
• Add --no-check-certificate option to disable server certificate verification
• Add async readahead buffer for faster transfer of big files
• Fixes
• Allow spaces in remotes and check remote names for validity at creation time
• Allow `&' and disallow `:' in Windows filenames.
• Swift
• Ignore directory marker objects where appropriate - allows working with Hubic
• Don’t delete the container if fs wasn’t at root
• S3
• Don’t delete the bucket if fs wasn’t at root
• Google Cloud Storage
• Don’t delete the bucket if fs wasn’t at root
v1.23 - 2015-10-03
• New features
• Implement rclone size for measuring remotes
• Fixes
• Fix headless config for drive and gcs
• Tell the user they should try again if the webserver method failed
• Improve output of --dump-headers
• S3
• Allow anonymous access to public buckets
• Swift
• Stop chunked operations logging “Failed to read info: Object Not Found”
• Use Content-Length on uploads for extra reliability
v1.22 - 2015-09-28
• Implement rsync like include and exclude flags
• swift
• Support files > 5GB - thanks Sergey Tolmachev
v1.21 - 2015-09-22
• New features
• Display individual transfer progress
• Make lsl output times in localtime
• Fixes
• Fix allowing user to override credentials again in Drive, GCS and ACD
• Amazon Drive
• Implement compliant pacing scheme
• Google Drive
• Make directory reads concurrent for increased speed.
v1.20 - 2015-09-15
• New features
• Amazon Drive support
• Oauth support redone - fix many bugs and improve usability
• Use “golang.org/x/oauth2” as oauth library of choice
• Improve oauth usability for smoother initial signup
• drive, googlecloudstorage: optionally use auto config for the oauth token
• Implement –dump-headers and –dump-bodies debug flags
• Show multiple matched commands if abbreviation too short
• Implement server-side move where possible
• local
• Always use UNC paths internally on Windows - fixes a lot of bugs
• dropbox
• force use of our custom transport which makes timeouts work
• Thanks to Klaus Post for lots of help with this release
v1.19 - 2015-08-28
• New features
• Server side copies for s3/swift/drive/dropbox/gcs
• Move command - uses server-side copies if it can
• Implement –retries flag - tries 3 times by default
• Build for plan9/amd64 and solaris/amd64 too
• Fixes
• Make a current version download with a fixed URL for scripting
• Ignore rmdir in limited fs rather than throwing error
• dropbox
• Increase chunk size to improve upload speeds massively
• Issue an error message when trying to upload bad file name
v1.18 - 2015-08-17
• drive
• Add --drive-use-trash flag so rclone trashes instead of deletes
• Add “Forbidden to download” message for files with no downloadURL
• dropbox
• Remove datastore
• This was deprecated and it caused a lot of problems
• Modification times and MD5SUMs no longer stored
• Fix uploading files > 2GB
• s3
• use official AWS SDK from github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go
• NB will most likely require you to delete and recreate remote
• enable multipart upload which enables files > 5GB
• tested with Ceph / RadosGW / S3 emulation
• many thanks to Sam Liston and Brian Haymore at the Utah Center for High Performance Computing for a
Ceph test account
• misc
• Show errors when reading the config file
• Do not print stats in quiet mode - thanks Leonid Shalupov
• Add FAQ
• Fix created directories not obeying umask
• Linux installation instructions - thanks Shimon Doodkin
v1.17 - 2015-06-14
• dropbox: fix case insensitivity issues - thanks Leonid Shalupov
v1.16 - 2015-06-09
• Fix uploading big files which was causing timeouts or panics
• Don’t check md5sum after download with –size-only
v1.15 - 2015-06-06
• Add –checksum flag to only discard transfers by MD5SUM - thanks Alex Couper
• Implement –size-only flag to sync on size not checksum & modtime
• Expand docs and remove duplicated information
• Document rclone’s limitations with directories
• dropbox: update docs about case insensitivity
v1.14 - 2015-05-21
• local: fix encoding of non utf-8 file names - fixes a duplicate file problem
• drive: docs about rate limiting
• google cloud storage: Fix compile after API change in “google.golang.org/api/storage/v1”
v1.13 - 2015-05-10
• Revise documentation (especially sync)
• Implement –timeout and –conntimeout
• s3: ignore etags from multipart uploads which aren’t md5sums
v1.12 - 2015-03-15
• drive: Use chunked upload for files above a certain size
• drive: add –drive-chunk-size and –drive-upload-cutoff parameters
• drive: switch to insert from update when a failed copy deletes the upload
• core: Log duplicate files if they are detected
v1.11 - 2015-03-04
• swift: add region parameter
• drive: fix crash on failed to update remote mtime
• In remote paths, change native directory separators to /
• Add synchronization to ls/lsl/lsd output to stop corruptions
• Ensure all stats/log messages to go stderr
• Add –log-file flag to log everything (including panics) to file
• Make it possible to disable stats printing with –stats=0
• Implement –bwlimit to limit data transfer bandwidth
v1.10 - 2015-02-12
• s3: list an unlimited number of items
• Fix getting stuck in the configurator
v1.09 - 2015-02-07
• windows: Stop drive letters (e.g. C:) getting mixed up with remotes (e.g. drive:)
• local: Fix directory separators on Windows
• drive: fix rate limit exceeded errors
v1.08 - 2015-02-04
• drive: fix subdirectory listing to not list entire drive
• drive: Fix SetModTime
• dropbox: adapt code to recent library changes
v1.07 - 2014-12-23
• google cloud storage: fix memory leak
v1.06 - 2014-12-12
• Fix “Couldn’t find home directory” on OSX
• swift: Add tenant parameter
• Use new location of Google API packages
v1.05 - 2014-08-09
• Improved tests and consequently lots of minor fixes
• core: Fix race detected by go race detector
• core: Fixes after running errcheck
• drive: reset root directory on Rmdir and Purge
• fs: Document that Purger returns error on empty directory, test and fix
• google cloud storage: fix ListDir on subdirectory
• google cloud storage: re-read metadata in SetModTime
• s3: make reading metadata more reliable to work around eventual consistency problems
• s3: strip trailing / from ListDir()
• swift: return directories without / in ListDir
v1.04 - 2014-07-21
• google cloud storage: Fix crash on Update
v1.03 - 2014-07-20
• swift, s3, dropbox: fix updated files being marked as corrupted
• Make compile with go 1.1 again
v1.02 - 2014-07-19
• Implement Dropbox remote
• Implement Google Cloud Storage remote
• Verify Md5sums and Sizes after copies
• Remove times from “ls” command - lists sizes only
• Add add “lsl” - lists times and sizes
• Add “md5sum” command
v1.01 - 2014-07-04
• drive: fix transfer of big files using up lots of memory
v1.00 - 2014-07-03
• drive: fix whole second dates
v0.99 - 2014-06-26
• Fix –dry-run not working
• Make compatible with go 1.1
v0.98 - 2014-05-30
• s3: Treat missing Content-Length as 0 for some ceph installations
• rclonetest: add file with a space in
v0.97 - 2014-05-05
• Implement copying of single files
• s3 & swift: support paths inside containers/buckets
v0.96 - 2014-04-24
• drive: Fix multiple files of same name being created
• drive: Use o.Update and fs.Put to optimise transfers
• Add version number, -V and –version
v0.95 - 2014-03-28
• rclone.org: website, docs and graphics
• drive: fix path parsing
v0.94 - 2014-03-27
• Change remote format one last time
• GNU style flags
v0.93 - 2014-03-16
• drive: store token in config file
• cross compile other versions
• set strict permissions on config file
v0.92 - 2014-03-15
• Config fixes and –config option
v0.91 - 2014-03-15
• Make config file
v0.90 - 2013-06-27
• Project named rclone
v0.00 - 2012-11-18
• Project started
Bugs and Limitations
Limitations
Directory timestamps aren’t preserved
Rclone doesn’t currently preserve the timestamps of directories. This is because rclone only really
considers objects when syncing.
Rclone struggles with millions of files in a directory/bucket
Currently rclone loads each directory/bucket entirely into memory before using it. Since each rclone
object takes 0.5k-1k of memory this can take a very long time and use a large amount of memory.
Millions of files in a directory tends to occur on bucket-based remotes (e.g. S3 buckets) since those
remotes do not segregate subdirectories within the bucket.
Bucket-based remotes and folders
Bucket-based remotes (e.g. S3/GCS/Swift/B2) do not have a concept of directories. Rclone therefore
cannot create directories in them which means that empty directories on a bucket-based remote will tend
to disappear.
Some software creates empty keys ending in / as directory markers. Rclone doesn’t do this as it
potentially creates more objects and costs more. This ability may be added in the future (probably via a
flag/option).
Bugs
Bugs are stored in rclone’s GitHub project:
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+label%3Abug Reported bugs
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone/issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue+milestone%3A%22Known+Problem%22 Known
issues
Frequently Asked Questions
Do all cloud storage systems support all rclone commands
Yes they do. All the rclone commands (e.g. sync, copy, etc.) will work on all the remote storage
systems.
Can I copy the config from one machine to another
Sure! Rclone stores all of its config in a single file. If you want to find this file, run rclone
config file which will tell you where it is.
See the remote setup docs for more info.
How do I configure rclone on a remote / headless box with no browser?
This has now been documented in its own remote setup page.
Can rclone sync directly from drive to s3
Rclone can sync between two remote cloud storage systems just fine.
Note that it effectively downloads the file and uploads it again, so the node running rclone would need
to have lots of bandwidth.
The syncs would be incremental (on a file by file basis).
e.g.
rclone sync -i drive:Folder s3:bucket
Using rclone from multiple locations at the same time
You can use rclone from multiple places at the same time if you choose different subdirectory for the
output, e.g.
Server A> rclone sync -i /tmp/whatever remote:ServerA
Server B> rclone sync -i /tmp/whatever remote:ServerB
If you sync to the same directory then you should use rclone copy otherwise the two instances of rclone
may delete each other’s files, e.g.
Server A> rclone copy /tmp/whatever remote:Backup
Server B> rclone copy /tmp/whatever remote:Backup
The file names you upload from Server A and Server B should be different in this case, otherwise some
file systems (e.g. Drive) may make duplicates.
Why doesn’t rclone support partial transfers / binary diffs like rsync?
Rclone stores each file you transfer as a native object on the remote cloud storage system. This means
that you can see the files you upload as expected using alternative access methods (e.g. using the Google
Drive web interface). There is a 1:1 mapping between files on your hard disk and objects created in the
cloud storage system.
Cloud storage systems (at least none I’ve come across yet) don’t support partially uploading an object.
You can’t take an existing object, and change some bytes in the middle of it.
It would be possible to make a sync system which stored binary diffs instead of whole objects like rclone
does, but that would break the 1:1 mapping of files on your hard disk to objects in the remote cloud
storage system.
All the cloud storage systems support partial downloads of content, so it would be possible to make
partial downloads work. However to make this work efficiently this would require storing a significant
amount of metadata, which breaks the desired 1:1 mapping of files to objects.
Can rclone do bi-directional sync?
Yes, since rclone v1.58.0, bidirectional cloud sync is available.
Can I use rclone with an HTTP proxy?
Yes. rclone will follow the standard environment variables for proxies, similar to cURL and other
programs.
In general the variables are called http_proxy (for services reached over http) and https_proxy (for
services reached over https). Most public services will be using https, but you may wish to set both.
The content of the variable is protocol://server:port. The protocol value is the one used to talk to the
proxy server, itself, and is commonly either http or socks5.
Slightly annoyingly, there is no standard for the name; some applications may use http_proxy but another
one HTTP_PROXY. The Go libraries used by rclone will try both variations, but you may wish to set all
possibilities. So, on Linux, you may end up with code similar to
export http_proxy=http://proxyserver:12345
export https_proxy=$http_proxy
export HTTP_PROXY=$http_proxy
export HTTPS_PROXY=$http_proxy
Note: If the proxy server requires a username and password, then use
export http_proxy=http://username:password@proxyserver:12345
export https_proxy=$http_proxy
export HTTP_PROXY=$http_proxy
export HTTPS_PROXY=$http_proxy
The NO_PROXY allows you to disable the proxy for specific hosts. Hosts must be comma separated, and can
contain domains or parts. For instance “foo.com” also matches “bar.foo.com”.
e.g.
export no_proxy=localhost,127.0.0.0/8,my.host.name
export NO_PROXY=$no_proxy
Note that the FTP backend does not support ftp_proxy yet.
Rclone gives x509: failed to load system roots and no roots provided error
This means that rclone can’t find the SSL root certificates. Likely you are running rclone on a NAS with
a cut-down Linux OS, or possibly on Solaris.
Rclone (via the Go runtime) tries to load the root certificates from these places on Linux.
"/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt", // Debian/Ubuntu/Gentoo etc.
"/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt", // Fedora/RHEL
"/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem", // OpenSUSE
"/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem", // OpenELEC
So doing something like this should fix the problem. It also sets the time which is important for SSL to
work properly.
mkdir -p /etc/ssl/certs/
curl -o /etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt https://raw.githubusercontent.com/bagder/ca-bundle/master/ca-bundle.crt
ntpclient -s -h pool.ntp.org
The two environment variables SSL_CERT_FILE and SSL_CERT_DIR, mentioned in the x509 package, provide an
additional way to provide the SSL root certificates.
Note that you may need to add the --insecure option to the curl command line if it doesn’t work without.
curl --insecure -o /etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt https://raw.githubusercontent.com/bagder/ca-bundle/master/ca-bundle.crt
Rclone gives Failed to load config file: function not implemented error
Likely this means that you are running rclone on Linux version not supported by the go runtime, ie
earlier than version 2.6.23.
See the system requirements section in the go install docs for full details.
All my uploaded docx/xlsx/pptx files appear as archive/zip
This is caused by uploading these files from a Windows computer which hasn’t got the Microsoft Office
suite installed. The easiest way to fix is to install the Word viewer and the Microsoft Office
Compatibility Pack for Word, Excel, and PowerPoint 2007 and later versions’ file formats
tcp lookup some.domain.com no such host
This happens when rclone cannot resolve a domain. Please check that your DNS setup is generally working,
e.g.
# both should print a long list of possible IP addresses
dig www.googleapis.com # resolve using your default DNS
dig www.googleapis.com @8.8.8.8 # resolve with Google's DNS server
If you are using systemd-resolved (default on Arch Linux), ensure it is at version 233 or higher.
Previous releases contain a bug which causes not all domains to be resolved properly.
Additionally with the GODEBUG=netdns= environment variable the Go resolver decision can be influenced.
This also allows to resolve certain issues with DNS resolution. See the name resolution section in the
go docs.
The total size reported in the stats for a sync is wrong and keeps changing
It is likely you have more than 10,000 files that need to be synced. By default, rclone only gets 10,000
files ahead in a sync so as not to use up too much memory. You can change this default with the
–max-backlog flag.
Rclone is using too much memory or appears to have a memory leak
Rclone is written in Go which uses a garbage collector. The default settings for the garbage collector
mean that it runs when the heap size has doubled.
However it is possible to tune the garbage collector to use less memory by setting GOGC to a lower value,
say export GOGC=20. This will make the garbage collector work harder, reducing memory size at the
expense of CPU usage.
The most common cause of rclone using lots of memory is a single directory with thousands or millions of
files in. Rclone has to load this entirely into memory as rclone objects. Each rclone object takes
0.5k-1k of memory.
Rclone changes fullwidth Unicode punctuation marks in file names
For example: On a Windows system, you have a file with name Test：1.jpg, where ： is the Unicode
fullwidth colon symbol. When using rclone to copy this to your Google Drive, you will notice that the
file gets renamed to Test:1.jpg, where : is the regular (halfwidth) colon.
The reason for such renames is the way rclone handles different restricted filenames on different cloud
storage systems. It tries to avoid ambiguous file names as much and allow moving files between many
cloud storage systems transparently, by replacing invalid characters with similar looking Unicode
characters when transferring to one storage system, and replacing back again when transferring to a
different storage system where the original characters are supported. When the same Unicode characters
are intentionally used in file names, this replacement strategy leads to unwanted renames. Read more
here.
License
This is free software under the terms of the MIT license (check the COPYING file included with the source
code).
Copyright (C) 2019 by Nick Craig-Wood https://www.craig-wood.com/nick/
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Authors and contributors
Authors
• Nick Craig-Wood nick@craig-wood.com
Contributors
{{< rem email addresses removed from here need to be addeed to bin/.ignore-emails to make sure
update-authors.py doesn't immediately put them back in again. >}}
• Alex Couper amcouper@gmail.com
• Leonid Shalupov leonid@shalupov.com shalupov@diverse.org.ru
• Shimon Doodkin helpmepro1@gmail.com
• Colin Nicholson colin@colinn.com
• Klaus Post klauspost@gmail.com
• Sergey Tolmachev tolsi.ru@gmail.com
• Adriano Aurélio Meirelles adriano@atinge.com
• C. Bess cbess@users.noreply.github.com
• Dmitry Burdeev dibu28@gmail.com
• Joseph Spurrier github@josephspurrier.com
• Björn Harrtell bjorn@wololo.org
• Xavier Lucas xavier.lucas@corp.ovh.com
• Werner Beroux werner@beroux.com
• Brian Stengaard brian@stengaard.eu
• Jakub Gedeon jgedeon@sofi.com
• Jim Tittsler jwt@onjapan.net
• Michal Witkowski michal@improbable.io
• Fabian Ruff fabian.ruff@sap.com
• Leigh Klotz klotz@quixey.com
• Romain Lapray lapray.romain@gmail.com
• Justin R. Wilson jrw972@gmail.com
• Antonio Messina antonio.s.messina@gmail.com
• Stefan G. Weichinger office@oops.co.at
• Per Cederberg cederberg@gmail.com
• Radek Šenfeld rush@logic.cz
• Fredrik Fornwall fredrik@fornwall.net
• Asko Tamm asko@deekit.net
• xor-zz xor@gstocco.com
• Tomasz Mazur tmazur90@gmail.com
• Marco Paganini paganini@paganini.net
• Felix Bünemann buenemann@louis.info
• Durval Menezes jmrclone@durval.com
• Luiz Carlos Rumbelsperger Viana maxd13_luiz_carlos@hotmail.com
• Stefan Breunig stefan-github@yrden.de
• Alishan Ladhani ali-l@users.noreply.github.com
• 0xJAKE 0xJAKE@users.noreply.github.com
• Thibault Molleman thibaultmol@users.noreply.github.com
• Scott McGillivray scott.mcgillivray@gmail.com
• Bjørn Erik Pedersen bjorn.erik.pedersen@gmail.com
• Lukas Loesche lukas@mesosphere.io
• emyarod allllaboutyou@gmail.com
• T.C. Ferguson tcf909@gmail.com
• Brandur brandur@mutelight.org
• Dario Giovannetti dev@dariogiovannetti.net
• Károly Oláh okaresz@aol.com
• Jon Yergatian jon@macfanatic.ca
• Jack Schmidt github@mowsey.org
• Dedsec1 Dedsec1@users.noreply.github.com
• Hisham Zarka hzarka@gmail.com
• Jérôme Vizcaino jerome.vizcaino@gmail.com
• Mike Tesch mjt6129@rit.edu
• Marvin Watson marvwatson@users.noreply.github.com
• Danny Tsai danny8376@gmail.com
• Yoni Jah yonjah+git@gmail.com yonjah+github@gmail.com
• Stephen Harris github@spuddy.org sweharris@users.noreply.github.com
• Ihor Dvoretskyi ihor.dvoretskyi@gmail.com
• Jon Craton jncraton@gmail.com
• Hraban Luyat hraban@0brg.net
• Michael Ledin mledin89@gmail.com
• Martin Kristensen me@azgul.com
• Too Much IO toomuchio@users.noreply.github.com
• Anisse Astier anisse@astier.eu
• Zahiar Ahmed zahiar@live.com
• Igor Kharin igorkharin@gmail.com
• Bill Zissimopoulos billziss@navimatics.com
• Bob Potter bobby.potter@gmail.com
• Steven Lu tacticalazn@gmail.com
• Sjur Fredriksen sjurtf@ifi.uio.no
• Ruwbin hubus12345@gmail.com
• Fabian Möller fabianm88@gmail.com f.moeller@nynex.de
• Edward Q. Bridges github@eqbridges.com
• Vasiliy Tolstov v.tolstov@selfip.ru
• Harshavardhana harsha@minio.io
• sainaen sainaen@gmail.com
• gdm85 gdm85@users.noreply.github.com
• Yaroslav Halchenko debian@onerussian.com
• John Papandriopoulos jpap@users.noreply.github.com
• Zhiming Wang zmwangx@gmail.com
• Andy Pilate cubox@cubox.me
• Oliver Heyme olihey@googlemail.com olihey@users.noreply.github.com de8olihe@lego.com
• wuyu wuyu@yunify.com
• Andrei Dragomir adragomi@adobe.com
• Christian Brüggemann mail@cbruegg.com
• Alex McGrath Kraak amkdude@gmail.com
• bpicode bjoern.pirnay@googlemail.com
• Daniel Jagszent daniel@jagszent.de
• Josiah White thegenius2009@gmail.com
• Ishuah Kariuki kariuki@ishuah.com ishuah91@gmail.com
• Jan Varho jan@varho.org
• Girish Ramakrishnan girish@cloudron.io
• LingMan LingMan@users.noreply.github.com
• Jacob McNamee jacobmcnamee@gmail.com
• jersou jertux@gmail.com
• thierry thierry@substantiel.fr
• Simon Leinen simon.leinen@gmail.com ubuntu@s3-test.novalocal
• Dan Dascalescu ddascalescu+github@gmail.com
• Jason Rose jason@jro.io
• Andrew Starr-Bochicchio a.starr.b@gmail.com
• John Leach john@johnleach.co.uk
• Corban Raun craun@instructure.com
• Pierre Carlson mpcarl@us.ibm.com
• Ernest Borowski er.borowski@gmail.com
• Remus Bunduc remus.bunduc@gmail.com
• Iakov Davydov iakov.davydov@unil.ch dav05.gith@myths.ru
• Jakub Tasiemski tasiemski@gmail.com
• David Minor dminor@saymedia.com
• Tim Cooijmans cooijmans.tim@gmail.com
• Laurence liuxy6@gmail.com
• Giovanni Pizzi gio.piz@gmail.com
• Filip Bartodziej filipbartodziej@gmail.com
• Jon Fautley jon@dead.li
• lewapm 32110057+lewapm@users.noreply.github.com
• Yassine Imounachen yassine256@gmail.com
• Chris Redekop chris-redekop@users.noreply.github.com chris.redekop@gmail.com
• Jon Fautley jon@adenoid.appstal.co.uk
• Will Gunn WillGunn@users.noreply.github.com
• Lucas Bremgartner lucas@bremis.ch
• Jody Frankowski jody.frankowski@gmail.com
• Andreas Roussos arouss1980@gmail.com
• nbuchanan nbuchanan@utah.gov
• Durval Menezes rclone@durval.com
• Victor vb-github@viblo.se
• Mateusz pabian.mateusz@gmail.com
• Daniel Loader spicypixel@gmail.com
• David0rk davidork@gmail.com
• Alexander Neumann alexander@bumpern.de
• Giri Badanahatti gbadanahatti@us.ibm.com@Giris-MacBook-Pro.local
• Leo R. Lundgren leo@finalresort.org
• wolfv wolfv6@users.noreply.github.com
• Dave Pedu dave@davepedu.com
• Stefan Lindblom lindblom@spotify.com
• seuffert oliver@seuffert.biz
• gbadanahatti 37121690+gbadanahatti@users.noreply.github.com
• Keith Goldfarb barkofdelight@gmail.com
• Steve Kriss steve@heptio.com
• Chih-Hsuan Yen yan12125@gmail.com
• Alexander Neumann fd0@users.noreply.github.com
• Matt Holt mholt@users.noreply.github.com
• Eri Bastos bastos.eri@gmail.com
• Michael P. Dubner pywebmail@list.ru
• Antoine GIRARD sapk@users.noreply.github.com
• Mateusz Piotrowski mpp302@gmail.com
• Animosity022 animosity22@users.noreply.github.com earl.texter@gmail.com
• Peter Baumgartner pete@lincolnloop.com
• Craig Rachel craig@craigrachel.com
• Michael G. Noll miguno@users.noreply.github.com
• hensur me@hensur.de
• Oliver Heyme de8olihe@lego.com
• Richard Yang richard@yenforyang.com
• Piotr Oleszczyk piotr.oleszczyk@gmail.com
• Rodrigo rodarima@gmail.com
• NoLooseEnds NoLooseEnds@users.noreply.github.com
• Jakub Karlicek jakub@karlicek.me
• John Clayton john@codemonkeylabs.com
• Kasper Byrdal Nielsen byrdal76@gmail.com
• Benjamin Joseph Dag bjdag1234@users.noreply.github.com
• themylogin themylogin@gmail.com
• Onno Zweers onno.zweers@surfsara.nl
• Jasper Lievisse Adriaanse jasper@humppa.nl
• sandeepkru sandeep.ummadi@gmail.com sandeepkru@users.noreply.github.com
• HerrH atomtigerzoo@users.noreply.github.com
• Andrew 4030760+sparkyman215@users.noreply.github.com
• dan smith XX1011@gmail.com
• Oleg Kovalov iamolegkovalov@gmail.com
• Ruben Vandamme github-com-00ff86@vandamme.email
• Cnly minecnly@gmail.com
• Andres Alvarez 1671935+kir4h@users.noreply.github.com
• reddi1 xreddi@gmail.com
• Matt Tucker matthewtckr@gmail.com
• Sebastian Bünger buengese@gmail.com buengese@protonmail.com
• Martin Polden mpolden@mpolden.no
• Alex Chen Cnly@users.noreply.github.com
• Denis deniskovpen@gmail.com
• bsteiss 35940619+bsteiss@users.noreply.github.com
• Cédric Connes cedric.connes@gmail.com
• Dr. Tobias Quathamer toddy15@users.noreply.github.com
• dcpu 42736967+dcpu@users.noreply.github.com
• Sheldon Rupp me@shel.io
• albertony 12441419+albertony@users.noreply.github.com
• cron410 cron410@gmail.com
• Anagh Kumar Baranwal 6824881+darthShadow@users.noreply.github.com
• Felix Brucker felix@felixbrucker.com
• Santiago Rodríguez scollazo@users.noreply.github.com
• Craig Miskell craig.miskell@fluxfederation.com
• Antoine GIRARD sapk@sapk.fr
• Joanna Marek joanna.marek@u2i.com
• frenos frenos@users.noreply.github.com
• ssaqua ssaqua@users.noreply.github.com
• xnaas me@xnaas.info
• Frantisek Fuka fuka@fuxoft.cz
• Paul Kohout pauljkohout@yahoo.com
• dcpu 43330287+dcpu@users.noreply.github.com
• jackyzy823 jackyzy823@gmail.com
• David Haguenauer ml@kurokatta.org
• teresy hi.teresy@gmail.com
• buergi patbuergi@gmx.de
• Florian Gamboeck mail@floga.de
• Ralf Hemberger 10364191+rhemberger@users.noreply.github.com
• Scott Edlund sedlund@users.noreply.github.com
• Erik Swanson erik@retailnext.net
• Jake Coggiano jake@stripe.com
• brused27 brused27@noemailaddress
• Peter Kaminski kaminski@istori.com
• Henry Ptasinski henry@logout.com
• Alexander kharkovalexander@gmail.com
• Garry McNulty garrmcnu@gmail.com
• Mathieu Carbou mathieu.carbou@gmail.com
• Mark Otway mark@otway.com
• William Cocker 37018962+WilliamCocker@users.noreply.github.com
• François Leurent 131.js@cloudyks.org
• Arkadius Stefanski arkste@gmail.com
• Jay dev@jaygoel.com
• andrea rota a@xelera.eu
• nicolov nicolov@users.noreply.github.com
• Dario Guzik dario@guzik.com.ar
• qip qip@users.noreply.github.com
• yair@unicorn yair@unicorn
• Matt Robinson brimstone@the.narro.ws
• kayrus kay.diam@gmail.com
• Rémy Léone remy.leone@gmail.com
• Wojciech Smigielski wojciech.hieronim.smigielski@gmail.com
• weetmuts oehrstroem@gmail.com
• Jonathan vanillajonathan@users.noreply.github.com
• James Carpenter orbsmiv@users.noreply.github.com
• Vince vince0villamora@gmail.com
• Nestar47 47841759+Nestar47@users.noreply.github.com
• Six brbsix@gmail.com
• Alexandru Bumbacea alexandru.bumbacea@booking.com
• calisro robert.calistri@gmail.com
• Dr.Rx david.rey@nventive.com
• marcintustin marcintustin@users.noreply.github.com
• jaKa Močnik jaka@koofr.net
• Fionera fionera@fionera.de
• Dan Walters dan@walters.io
• Danil Semelenov sgtpep@users.noreply.github.com
• xopez 28950736+xopez@users.noreply.github.com
• Ben Boeckel mathstuf@gmail.com
• Manu manu@snapdragon.cc
• Kyle E. Mitchell kyle@kemitchell.com
• Gary Kim gary@garykim.dev
• Jon jonathn@github.com
• Jeff Quinn jeffrey.quinn@bluevoyant.com
• Peter Berbec peter@berbec.com
• didil 1284255+didil@users.noreply.github.com
• id01 gaviniboom@gmail.com
• Robert Marko robimarko@gmail.com
• Philip Harvey 32467456+pharveybattelle@users.noreply.github.com
• JorisE JorisE@users.noreply.github.com
• garry415 garry.415@gmail.com
• forgems forgems@gmail.com
• Florian Apolloner florian@apolloner.eu
• Aleksandar Janković office@ajankovic.com ajankovic@users.noreply.github.com
• Maran maran@protonmail.com
• nguyenhuuluan434 nguyenhuuluan434@gmail.com
• Laura Hausmann zotan@zotan.pw laura@hausmann.dev
• yparitcher y@paritcher.com
• AbelThar abela.tharen@gmail.com
• Matti Niemenmaa matti.niemenmaa+git@iki.fi
• Russell Davis russelldavis@users.noreply.github.com
• Yi FU yi.fu@tink.se
• Paul Millar paul.millar@desy.de
• justinalin justinalin@qnap.com
• EliEron subanimehd@gmail.com
• justina777 chiahuei.lin@gmail.com
• Chaitanya Bankanhal bchaitanya15@gmail.com
• Michał Matczuk michal@scylladb.com
• Macavirus macavirus@zoho.com
• Abhinav Sharma abhi18av@outlook.com
• ginvine 34869051+ginvine@users.noreply.github.com
• Patrick Wang mail6543210@yahoo.com.tw
• Cenk Alti cenkalti@gmail.com
• Andreas Chlupka andy@chlupka.com
• Alfonso Montero amontero@tinet.org
• Ivan Andreev ivandeex@gmail.com
• David Baumgold david@davidbaumgold.com
• Lars Lehtonen lars.lehtonen@gmail.com
• Matei David matei.david@gmail.com
• David david.bramwell@endemolshine.com
• Anthony Rusdi 33247310+antrusd@users.noreply.github.com
• Richard Patel me@terorie.dev
• 庄天翼 zty0826@gmail.com
• SwitchJS dev@switchjs.com
• Raphael PowershellNinja@users.noreply.github.com
• Sezal Agrawal sezalagrawal@gmail.com
• Tyler TylerNakamura@users.noreply.github.com
• Brett Dutro brett.dutro@gmail.com
• Vighnesh SK booterror99@gmail.com
• Arijit Biswas dibbyo456@gmail.com
• Michele Caci michele.caci@gmail.com
• AlexandrBoltris ua2fgb@gmail.com
• Bryce Larson blarson@saltstack.com
• Carlos Ferreyra crypticmind@gmail.com
• Saksham Khanna sakshamkhanna@outlook.com
• dausruddin 5763466+dausruddin@users.noreply.github.com
• zero-24 zero-24@users.noreply.github.com
• Xiaoxing Ye ye@xiaoxing.us
• Barry Muldrey barry@muldrey.net
• Sebastian Brandt sebastian.brandt@friday.de
• Marco Molteni marco.molteni@mailbox.org
• Ankur Gupta 7876747+ankur0493@users.noreply.github.com
• Maciej Zimnoch maciej@scylladb.com
• anuar45 serdaliyev.anuar@gmail.com
• Fernando ferferga@users.noreply.github.com
• David Cole david.cole@sohonet.com
• Wei He git@weispot.com
• Outvi V 19144373+outloudvi@users.noreply.github.com
• Thomas Kriechbaumer thomas@kriechbaumer.name
• Tennix tennix@users.noreply.github.com
• Ole Schütt ole@schuett.name
• Kuang-che Wu kcwu@csie.org
• Thomas Eales wingsuit@users.noreply.github.com
• Paul Tinsley paul.tinsley@vitalsource.com
• Felix Hungenberg git@shiftgeist.com
• Benjamin Richter github@dev.telepath.de
• landall cst_zf@qq.com
• thestigma thestigma@gmail.com
• jtagcat 38327267+jtagcat@users.noreply.github.com
• Damon Permezel permezel@me.com
• boosh boosh@users.noreply.github.com
• unbelauscht 58393353+unbelauscht@users.noreply.github.com
• Motonori IWAMURO vmi@nifty.com
• Benjapol Worakan benwrk@live.com
• Dave Koston dave.koston@stackpath.com
• Durval Menezes DurvalMenezes@users.noreply.github.com
• Tim Gallant me@timgallant.us
• Frederick Zhang frederick888@tsundere.moe
• valery1707 valery1707@gmail.com
• Yves G theYinYeti@yalis.fr
• Shing Kit Chan chanshingkit@gmail.com
• Franklyn Tackitt franklyn@tackitt.net
• Robert-André Mauchin zebob.m@gmail.com
• evileye 48332831+ibiruai@users.noreply.github.com
• Joachim Brandon LeBlanc brandon@leblanc.codes
• Patryk Jakuszew patryk.jakuszew@gmail.com
• fishbullet shindu666@gmail.com
• greatroar <@>
• Bernd Schoolmann mail@quexten.com
• Elan Ruusamäe glen@pld-linux.org
• Max Sum max@lolyculture.com
• Mark Spieth mspieth@users.noreply.github.com
• harry me@harry.plus
• Samantha McVey samantham@posteo.net
• Jack Anderson jack.anderson@metaswitch.com
• Michael G draget@speciesm.net
• Brandon Philips brandon@ifup.org
• Daven dooven@users.noreply.github.com
• Martin Stone martin@d7415.co.uk
• David Bramwell 13053834+dbramwell@users.noreply.github.com
• Sunil Patra snl_su@live.com
• Adam Stroud adam.stroud@gmail.com
• Kush kushsharma@users.noreply.github.com
• Matan Rosenberg matan129@gmail.com
• gitch1 63495046+gitch1@users.noreply.github.com
• ElonH elonhhuang@gmail.com
• Fred fred@creativeprojects.tech
• Sébastien Gross renard@users.noreply.github.com
• Maxime Suret 11944422+msuret@users.noreply.github.com
• Caleb Case caleb@storj.io calebcase@gmail.com
• Ben Zenker imbenzenker@gmail.com
• Martin Michlmayr tbm@cyrius.com
• Brandon McNama bmcnama@pagerduty.com
• Daniel Slyman github@skylayer.eu
• Alex Guerrero guerrero@users.noreply.github.com
• Matteo Pietro Dazzi matteopietro.dazzi@gft.com
• edwardxml 56691903+edwardxml@users.noreply.github.com
• Roman Kredentser shareed2k@gmail.com
• Kamil Trzciński ayufan@ayufan.eu
• Zac Rubin z-0@users.noreply.github.com
• Vincent Feltz psycho@feltzv.fr
• Heiko Bornholdt bornholdt@informatik.uni-hamburg.de
• Matteo Pietro Dazzi matteopietro.dazzi@gmail.com
• jtagcat gitlab@c7.ee
• Petri Salminen petri@salminen.dev
• Tim Burke tim.burke@gmail.com
• Kai Lüke kai@kinvolk.io
• Garrett Squire github@garrettsquire.com
• Evan Harris eharris@puremagic.com
• Kevin keyam@microsoft.com
• Morten Linderud morten@linderud.pw
• Dmitry Ustalov dmitry.ustalov@gmail.com
• Jack 196648+jdeng@users.noreply.github.com
• kcris cristian.tarsoaga@gmail.com
• tyhuber1 68970760+tyhuber1@users.noreply.github.com
• David Ibarra david.ibarra@realty.com
• Tim Gallant tim@lilt.com
• Kaloyan Raev kaloyan@storj.io
• Jay McEntire jay.mcentire@gmail.com
• Leo Luan leoluan@us.ibm.com
• aus 549081+aus@users.noreply.github.com
• Aaron Gokaslan agokaslan@fb.com
• Egor Margineanu egmar@users.noreply.github.com
• Lucas Kanashiro lucas.kanashiro@canonical.com
• WarpedPixel WarpedPixel@users.noreply.github.com
• Sam Edwards sam@samedwards.ca
• wjielai gouki0123@gmail.com
• Muffin King jinxz_k@live.com
• Christopher Stewart 6573710+1f47a@users.noreply.github.com
• Russell Cattelan cattelan@digitalelves.com
• gyutw 30371241+gyutw@users.noreply.github.com
• Hekmon edouardhur@gmail.com
• LaSombra lasombra@users.noreply.github.com
• Dov Murik dov.murik@gmail.com
• Ameer Dawood ameer1234567890@gmail.com
• Dan Hipschman dan.hipschman@opendoor.com
• Josh Soref jsoref@users.noreply.github.com
• David david@staron.nl
• Ingo ingo@hoffmann.cx
• Adam Plánský adamplansky@users.noreply.github.com adamplansky@gmail.com
• Manish Gupta manishgupta.ait@gmail.com
• Deepak Sah sah.sslpu@gmail.com
• Marcin Zelent marcin@zelent.net
• zhucan zhucan.k8s@gmail.com
• James Lim james.lim@samsara.com
• Laurens Janssen BD69BM@insim.biz
• Bob Bagwill bobbagwill@gmail.com
• Nathan Collins colli372@msu.edu
• lostheli
• kelv kelvin@acks.org
• Milly milly.ca@gmail.com
• gtorelly gtorelly@gmail.com
• Brad Ackerman brad@facefault.org
• Mitsuo Heijo mitsuo.heijo@gmail.com
• Claudio Bantaloukas rockdreamer@gmail.com
• Benjamin Gustin gustin.ben@gmail.com
• Ingo Weiss ingo@redhat.com
• Kerry Su me@sshockwave.net
• Ilyess Bachiri ilyess.bachiri@sonder.com
• Yury Stankevich urykhy@gmail.com
• kice wslikerqs@gmail.com
• Denis Neuling denisneuling@gmail.com
• Janne Johansson icepic.dz@gmail.com
• Patrik Nordlén patriki@gmail.com
• CokeMine aptx4561@gmail.com
• Sơn Trần-Nguyễn github@sntran.com
• lluuaapp 266615+lluuaapp@users.noreply.github.com
• Zach Kipp kipp.zach@gmail.com
• Riccardo Iaconelli riccardo@kde.org
• Sakuragawa Misty gyc990326@gmail.com
• Nicolas Rueff nicolas@rueff.fr
• Pau Rodriguez-Estivill prodrigestivill@gmail.com
• Bob Pusateri BobPusateri@users.noreply.github.com
• Alex JOST 25005220+dimejo@users.noreply.github.com
• Alexey Tabakman samosad.ru@gmail.com
• David Sze sze.david@gmail.com
• cynthia kwok cynthia.m.kwok@gmail.com
• Miron Veryanskiy MironVeryanskiy@gmail.com
• K265 k.265@qq.com
• Vesnyx Vesnyx@users.noreply.github.com
• Dmitry Chepurovskiy me@dm3ch.net
• Rauno Ots rauno.ots@cgi.com
• Georg Neugschwandtner georg.neugschwandtner@gmx.net
• pvalls polvallsrue@gmail.com
• Robert Thomas 31854736+wolveix@users.noreply.github.com
• Romeo Kienzler romeo.kienzler@gmail.com
• tYYGH tYYGH@users.noreply.github.com
• georne 77802995+georne@users.noreply.github.com
• Maxwell Calman mcalman@MacBook-Pro.local
• Naveen Honest Raj naveendurai19@gmail.com
• Lucas Messenger lmesseng@cisco.com
• Manish Kumar krmanish260@gmail.com
• x0b x0bdev@gmail.com
• CERN through the CS3MESH4EOSC Project
• Nick Gaya nicholasgaya+github@gmail.com
• Ashok Gelal 401055+ashokgelal@users.noreply.github.com
• Dominik Mydlil dominik.mydlil@outlook.com
• Nazar Mishturak nazarmx@gmail.com
• Ansh Mittal iamAnshMittal@gmail.com
• noabody noabody@yahoo.com
• OleFrost 82263101+olefrost@users.noreply.github.com
• Kenny Parsons kennyparsons93@gmail.com
• Jeffrey Tolar tolar.jeffrey@gmail.com
• jtagcat git-514635f7@jtag.cat
• Tatsuya Noyori 63089076+public-tatsuya-noyori@users.noreply.github.com
• lewisxy lewisxy@users.noreply.github.com
• Nolan Woods nolan_w@sfu.ca
• Gautam Kumar 25435568+gautamajay52@users.noreply.github.com
• Chris Macklin chris.macklin@10xgenomics.com
• Antoon Prins antoon.prins@surfsara.nl
• Alexey Ivanov rbtz@dropbox.com
• Serge Pouliquen sp31415@free.fr
• acsfer carlos@reendex.com
• Tom tom@tom-fitzhenry.me.uk
• Tyson Moore tyson@tyson.me
• database64128 free122448@hotmail.com
• Chris Lu chrislusf@users.noreply.github.com
• Reid Buzby reid@rethink.software
• darrenrhs darrenrhs@gmail.com
• Florian Penzkofer fp@nullptr.de
• Xuanchen Wu 117010292@link.cuhk.edu.cn
• partev petrosyan@gmail.com
• Dmitry Sitnikov fo2@inbox.ru
• Haochen Tong i@hexchain.org
• Michael Hanselmann public@hansmi.ch
• Chuan Zh zhchuan7@gmail.com
• Antoine GIRARD antoine.girard@sapk.fr
• Justin Winokur (Jwink3101) Jwink3101@users.noreply.github.com
• Mariano Absatz (git) scm@baby.com.ar
• Greg Sadetsky lepetitg@gmail.com
• yedamo logindaveye@gmail.com
• hota lindwurm.q@gmail.com
• vinibali vinibali1@gmail.com
• Ken Enrique Morel ken.morel.santana@gmail.com
• Justin Hellings justin.hellings@gmail.com
• Parth Shukla pparth@pparth.net
• wzl wangzl31@outlook.com
• HNGamingUK connor@earnshawhome.co.uk
• Jonta 359397+Jonta@users.noreply.github.com
• YenForYang YenForYang@users.noreply.github.com
• Joda Stößer stoesser@yay-digital.de services+github@simjo.st
• Logeshwaran waranlogesh@gmail.com
• Rajat Goel rajat@dropbox.com
• r0kk3rz r0kk3rz@gmail.com
• Matthew Sevey mjsevey@gmail.com
• Filip Rysavy fil@siasky.net
• Ian Levesque ian@ianlevesque.org
• Thomas Stachl thomas@stachl.me
• Dmitry Bogatov git#v1@kaction.cc
• thomae 4493560+thomae@users.noreply.github.com
• trevyn trevyn-git@protonmail.com
• David Liu david.yx.liu@oracle.com
• Chris Nelson stuff@cjnaz.com
• Felix Bünemann felix.buenemann@gmail.com
• Atílio Antônio atiliodadalto@hotmail.com
• Roberto Ricci ricci@disroot.org
• Carlo Mion mion00@gmail.com
• Chris Lu chris.lu@gmail.com
• Vitor Arruda vitor.pimenta.arruda@gmail.com
• bbabich bbabich@datamossa.com
• David dp.davide.palma@gmail.com
• Borna Butkovic borna@favicode.net
• Fredric Arklid fredric.arklid@consid.se
• Andy Jackson Andrew.Jackson@bl.uk
• Sinan Tan i@tinytangent.com
• deinferno 14363193+deinferno@users.noreply.github.com
• rsapkf rsapkfff@pm.me
• Will Holtz wholtz@gmail.com
• GGG KILLER gggkiller2@gmail.com
• Logeshwaran Murugesan logeshwaran@testpress.in
• Lu Wang coolwanglu@gmail.com
• Bumsu Hyeon ksitht@gmail.com
• Shmz Ozggrn 98463324+ShmzOzggrn@users.noreply.github.com
• Kim kim@jotta.no
• Niels van de Weem n.van.de.weem@smile.nl
• Koopa codingkoopa@gmail.com
• Yunhai Luo yunhai-luo@hotmail.com
• Charlie Jiang w@chariri.moe
• Alain Nussbaumer alain.nussbaumer@alleluia.ch
• Vanessasaurus 814322+vsoch@users.noreply.github.com
• Isaac Levy isaac.r.levy@gmail.com
• Gourav T workflowautomation@protonmail.com
• Paulo Martins paulo.pontes.m@gmail.com
• viveknathani viveknathani2402@gmail.com
• Eng Zer Jun engzerjun@gmail.com
• Abhiraj abhiraj.official15@gmail.com
• Márton Elek elek@apache.org elek@users.noreply.github.com
• Vincent Murphy vdm@vdm.ie
• ctrl-q 34975747+ctrl-q@users.noreply.github.com
• Nil Alexandrov nalexand@akamai.com
• GuoXingbin 101376330+guoxingbin@users.noreply.github.com
• Berkan Teber berkan@berkanteber.com
• Tobias Klauser tklauser@distanz.ch
• KARBOWSKI Piotr piotr.karbowski@gmail.com
• GH geeklihui@foxmail.com
• rafma0 int.main@gmail.com
• Adrien Rey-Jarthon jobs@adrienjarthon.com
• Nick Gooding 73336146+nickgooding@users.noreply.github.com
• Leroy van Logchem lr.vanlogchem@gmail.com
• Zsolt Ero zsolt.ero@gmail.com
• Lesmiscore nao20010128@gmail.com
• ehsantdy ehsan.tadayon@arvancloud.com
• SwazRGB 65694696+swazrgb@users.noreply.github.com
• Mateusz Puczyński mati6095@gmail.com
• Michael C Tiernan - MIT-Research Computing Project mtiernan@mit.edu
• Kaspian 34658474+KaspianDev@users.noreply.github.com
• Werner EvilOlaf@users.noreply.github.com
• Hugal31 hugo.laloge@gmail.com
• Christian Galo 36752715+cgalo5758@users.noreply.github.com
• Erik van Velzen erik@evanv.nl
• Derek Battams derek@battams.ca
• SimonLiu simonliu009@users.noreply.github.com
• Hugo Laloge hla@lescompanions.com
• Mr-Kanister 68117355+Mr-Kanister@users.noreply.github.com
• Rob Pickerill r.pickerill@gmail.com
• Andrey to.merge@gmail.com
• Eric Wolf 19wolf@gmail.com
• Nick nick.naumann@mailbox.tu-dresden.de
• Jason Zheng jszheng17@gmail.com
• Matthew Vernon mvernon@wikimedia.org
• Noah Hsu i@nn.ci
• m00594701 mengpengbo@huawei.com
• Art M. Gallagher artmg50@gmail.com
• Sven Gerber 49589423+svengerber@users.noreply.github.com
• CrossR r.cross@lancaster.ac.uk
• Maciej Radzikowski maciej@radzikowski.com.pl
• Scott Grimes scott.grimes@spaciq.com
• Phil Shackleton 71221528+philshacks@users.noreply.github.com
• eNV25 env252525@gmail.com
• Caleb inventor96@users.noreply.github.com
• J-P Treen jp@wraptious.com
• Martin Czygan 53705+miku@users.noreply.github.com
• buda sandrojijavadze@protonmail.com
• mirekphd 36706320+mirekphd@users.noreply.github.com
• vyloy vyloy@qq.com
• Anthrazz 25553648+Anthrazz@users.noreply.github.com
• zzr93 34027824+zzr93@users.noreply.github.com
• Paul Norman penorman@mac.com
• Lorenzo Maiorfi maiorfi@gmail.com
• Claudio Maradonna penguyman@stronzi.org
• Ovidiu Victor Tatar ovi.tatar@googlemail.com
• Evan Spensley epspensley@gmail.com
• Yen Hu 61753151+0x59656e@users.noreply.github.com
• Steve Kowalik steven@wedontsleep.org
• Jordi Gonzalez Muñoz jordigonzm@gmail.com
• Joram Schrijver i@joram.io
• Mark Trolley marktrolley@gmail.com
• João Henrique Franco joaohenrique.franco@gmail.com
• anonion aman207@users.noreply.github.com
• Ryan Morey 4590343+rmorey@users.noreply.github.com
• Simon Bos simonbos9@gmail.com
• YFdyh000 yfdyh000@gmail.com * Josh Soref 2119212+jsoref@users.noreply.github.com
• Øyvind Heddeland Instefjord instefjord@outlook.com
• Dmitry Deniskin 110819396+ddeniskin@users.noreply.github.com
• Alexander Knorr 106825+opexxx@users.noreply.github.com
• Richard Bateman richard@batemansr.us
• Dimitri Papadopoulos Orfanos 3234522+DimitriPapadopoulos@users.noreply.github.com
• Lorenzo Milesi lorenzo.milesi@yetopen.com
• Isaac Aymerich isaac.aymerich@gmail.com
• YanceyChiew 35898533+YanceyChiew@users.noreply.github.com
• Manoj Ghosh msays2000@gmail.com
• Bachue Zhou bachue.shu@gmail.com
• Manoj Ghosh manoj.ghosh@oracle.com
• Tom Mombourquette tom@devnode.com
• Robert Newson rnewson@apache.org
Contact the rclone project
Forum
Forum for questions and general discussion:
• https://forum.rclone.org
GitHub repository
The project’s repository is located at:
• https://github.com/rclone/rclone
There you can file bug reports or contribute with pull requests.
Twitter
You can also follow me on twitter for rclone announcements:
• @njcw
Email
Or if all else fails or you want to ask something private or confidential email Nick Craig-Wood. Please
don’t email me requests for help - those are better directed to the forum. Thanks!
AUTHORS
Nick Craig-Wood.
User Manual Oct 04, 2024 rclone(1)